FSW

Signal and Spectrum Analyzer

User Manual

(;×ì;2)
1173941102
Version 55
This manual applies to the following FSW models with firmware version 6.20 and later:
● R&S®FSW8 (1331.5003K08 / 1312.8000K08)
● R&S®FSW13 (1331.5003K13 / 1312.8000K13)
● R&S®FSW26 (1331.5003K26 / 1312.8000K26)
● R&S®FSW43 (1331.5003K43 / 1312.8000K43)
● R&S®FSW50 (1331.5003K50 / 1312.8000K50)
● R&S®FSW67 (1331.5003K67 / 1312.8000K67)
● R&S®FSW85 (1331.5003K85 / 1312.8000K85)

In addition to the base unit, the following options are described:

● R&S®FSW-B4, OCXO (1313.0703.02)
● R&S®FSW-B10, external generator control (1313.1622.02)
● R&S®FSW-B13, high-pass filter (1313.0761.02)
● R&S®FSW-B21, external mixer (1313.1100.XX)
● R&S®FSW-B24, preamplifier (1313.0832.XX / 1350.7960.XX)
● R&S®FSW-B25, electronic attenuator (1313.0990.02)
● R&S®FSW-B90G, frequency extension 90 GHz (1331.7693.02)
● R&S®FSW-K19 Noise Power Ratio measurement (1331.8283.02)
● R&S®FSW-K54 EMI measurements (1313.1400.02)
● R&S®FSW-K544 frequency response correction (1338.2716.02)
● R&S®FSW-K553 External frontend control (1350.6118.30)
● R&S®FSW-K980 HUMS (1350.6718.xx)

© 2024 Rohde & Schwarz

Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Muenchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.

1173.9411.02 | Version 55 | FSW

Throughout this manual, R&S® is indicated as R&S.

FSW Contents

Contents
1 Safety and regulatory information......................................................17
1.1 Safety instructions......................................................................................................17
1.2 Warning messages in the documentation................................................................ 20
1.3 Korea certification class B......................................................................................... 21

2 Documentation overview.....................................................................22
2.1 Getting started manual............................................................................................... 22
2.2 User manuals and help...............................................................................................22
2.3 Service manual............................................................................................................22
2.4 Instrument security procedures................................................................................ 23
2.5 Printed safety instructions.........................................................................................23
2.6 Specifications and brochures....................................................................................23
2.7 Release notes and open-source acknowledgment (OSA).......................................23
2.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc......................................... 24
2.9 Videos...........................................................................................................................24

3 Welcome to the FSW............................................................................25

4 Getting Started..................................................................................... 26
4.1 Key features.................................................................................................................26
4.2 Preparing for use........................................................................................................ 27
4.2.1 Lifting and carrying........................................................................................................27
4.2.2 Unpacking and checking............................................................................................... 27
4.2.3 Choosing the operating site.......................................................................................... 27
4.2.4 Setting up the product................................................................................................... 28
4.2.5 Connecting the AC power............................................................................................. 30
4.2.6 Switching the instrument on and off.............................................................................. 30
4.2.7 Connecting to RF coaxial connectors........................................................................... 32
4.2.8 Connecting to LAN........................................................................................................ 33
4.2.9 Connecting a keyboard................................................................................................. 34
4.2.10 Connecting an external monitor.................................................................................... 34
4.2.11 Considerations for test setup........................................................................................ 36
4.2.12 Windows operating system........................................................................................... 37

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 3

FSW Contents

4.2.13 Logging on.................................................................................................................... 38

4.2.14 Checking the supplied options...................................................................................... 40
4.2.15 Performing a self-alignment.......................................................................................... 40
4.2.16 Protecting data using the secure user mode.................................................................41
4.3 Instrument tour............................................................................................................43
4.3.1 Front panel view............................................................................................................43
4.3.2 Rear panel view............................................................................................................ 54
4.4 Trying out the instrument...........................................................................................63
4.4.1 Measuring a basic signal...............................................................................................64
4.4.2 Displaying a spectrogram..............................................................................................65
4.4.3 Activating additional measurement channels................................................................67
4.4.4 Performing sequential measurements.......................................................................... 70
4.4.5 Setting and moving a marker........................................................................................ 71
4.4.6 Displaying a marker peak list........................................................................................ 72
4.4.7 Zooming into the display............................................................................................... 73
4.4.8 Zooming into the display permanently.......................................................................... 76
4.4.9 Saving settings..............................................................................................................79
4.4.10 Printing and saving results............................................................................................ 80
4.5 Operating the instrument........................................................................................... 81
4.5.1 Understanding the display information..........................................................................82
4.5.2 Accessing the functionality............................................................................................91
4.5.3 Changing the focus....................................................................................................... 96
4.5.4 Entering data.................................................................................................................96
4.5.5 Touchscreen gestures................................................................................................... 99
4.5.6 Displaying results........................................................................................................ 102
4.5.7 Getting help.................................................................................................................109

5 Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes........111

5.1 Available applications...............................................................................................113
5.2 R&S multiview........................................................................................................... 121
5.3 Selecting the operating mode and applications.................................................... 122
5.4 Running a sequence of measurements.................................................................. 124
5.4.1 The sequencer concept...............................................................................................124
5.4.2 Sequencer settings..................................................................................................... 127

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 4

FSW Contents

5.4.3 How to set up the sequencer...................................................................................... 128

6 Measurements and results................................................................129

6.1 Basic measurements................................................................................................ 130
6.1.1 Basic measurement types...........................................................................................131
6.1.2 How to perform a basic sweep measurement.............................................................132
6.1.3 Measurement examples - measuring a sinusoidal signal........................................... 133
6.1.4 Measurement example – measuring levels at low S/N ratios..................................... 136
6.1.5 Measurement examples - measuring signal spectra with multiple signals..................139
6.1.6 Measurement examples in zero span......................................................................... 145
6.2 Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement................... 151
6.2.1 About channel power measurements..........................................................................151
6.2.2 Channel power results................................................................................................ 152
6.2.3 Channel power basics.................................................................................................154
6.2.4 Channel power configuration...................................................................................... 167
6.2.5 MSR ACLR configuration............................................................................................ 177
6.2.6 How to perform channel power measurements.......................................................... 194
6.2.7 Measurement examples..............................................................................................199
6.2.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement......................................................205
6.2.9 Reference: predefined CP/ACLR standards............................................................... 206
6.2.10 Reference: predefined ACLR user standard XML files............................................... 207
6.3 Carrier-to-noise measurements...............................................................................208
6.3.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................209
6.3.2 Carrier-to-noise results................................................................................................209
6.3.3 Carrier-to-noise configuration......................................................................................210
6.3.4 How to determine the carrier-to-noise ratio................................................................. 211
6.4 Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)............................................................ 212
6.4.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................212
6.4.2 OBW results................................................................................................................ 214
6.4.3 OBW configuration...................................................................................................... 214
6.4.4 How to determine the occupied bandwidth................................................................. 217
6.4.5 Measurement example................................................................................................218
6.5 Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement...................................................................218
6.5.1 About noise power ratio (NPR) measurements...........................................................219

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 5

FSW Contents

6.5.2 NPR basics................................................................................................................. 219

6.5.3 NPR results................................................................................................................. 221
6.5.4 NPR configuration....................................................................................................... 222
6.5.5 Generator setup.......................................................................................................... 226
6.5.6 Generator frequency coupling.....................................................................................231
6.5.7 How to perform NPR measurements.......................................................................... 233
6.5.8 Measurement example................................................................................................234
6.6 Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement..................................................... 235
6.6.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................236
6.6.2 Typical applications..................................................................................................... 236
6.6.3 SEM results.................................................................................................................236
6.6.4 SEM basics................................................................................................................. 239
6.6.5 SEM configuration.......................................................................................................249
6.6.6 How to perform a spectrum emission mask measurement......................................... 268
6.6.7 Measurement example: Multi-SEM measurement...................................................... 272
6.6.8 Reference: SEM file descriptions................................................................................ 274
6.7 Spurious emissions measurement..........................................................................281
6.7.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................281
6.7.2 Spurious emissions measurement results.................................................................. 282
6.7.3 Spurious emissions basics..........................................................................................283
6.7.4 Spurious emissions measurement configuration........................................................ 285
6.7.5 How to perform a spurious emissions measurement.................................................. 292
6.7.6 Reference: ASCII export file format (spurious)........................................................... 294
6.8 Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)..................................................................295
6.8.1 About the measurements............................................................................................ 295
6.8.2 Typical applications..................................................................................................... 296
6.8.3 APD and CCDF results............................................................................................... 296
6.8.4 APD and CCDF basics - gated triggering................................................................... 298
6.8.5 APD and CCDF configuration..................................................................................... 299
6.8.6 How to perform an APD or CCDF measurement........................................................ 306
6.8.7 Examples.................................................................................................................... 307
6.8.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement......................................................310
6.9 Time domain power measurement.......................................................................... 310

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 6

FSW Contents

6.9.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................310

6.9.2 Time domain power results......................................................................................... 310
6.9.3 Time domain power basics - range definition using limit lines.....................................311
6.9.4 Time domain power configuration............................................................................... 312
6.9.5 How to measure powers in the time domain............................................................... 313
6.9.6 Measurement example................................................................................................314
6.10 Harmonic distortion measurement..........................................................................315
6.10.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................316
6.10.2 Harmonic distortion basics.......................................................................................... 316
6.10.3 Harmonic distortion results..........................................................................................318
6.10.4 Harmonic distortion configuration................................................................................319
6.10.5 How to determine the harmonic distortion...................................................................321
6.11 Third order intercept (TOI) measurement............................................................... 321
6.11.1 About the TOI measurement....................................................................................... 322
6.11.2 TOI basics................................................................................................................... 322
6.11.3 TOI results...................................................................................................................326
6.11.4 TOI configuration.........................................................................................................327
6.11.5 How to determine the third order intercept..................................................................328
6.11.6 Measurement example – measuring the FSW's intrinsic intermodulation...................329
6.12 AM modulation depth measurement....................................................................... 331
6.12.1 About the measurement..............................................................................................331
6.12.2 AM modulation depth results.......................................................................................332
6.12.3 AM modulation depth configuration.............................................................................332
6.12.4 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement......................................................333
6.12.5 How to determine the AM modulation depth............................................................... 334
6.13 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement................................................ 334
6.13.1 About the EMI measurement...................................................................................... 335
6.13.2 EMI measurement results........................................................................................... 335
6.13.3 EMI measurement basics............................................................................................337
6.13.4 EMI measurement configuration................................................................................. 343
6.13.5 EMI result analysis...................................................................................................... 353
6.13.6 How to perform EMI measurements........................................................................... 353
6.13.7 Measurement example: measuring radio frequency interference............................... 355

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 7

FSW Contents

6.13.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting EMI measurements.................................................. 358

7 Common measurement settings...................................................... 359

7.1 Configuration overview............................................................................................ 359
7.2 Data input and output............................................................................................... 361
7.2.1 Receiving data input and providing data output.......................................................... 361
7.2.2 Input source settings................................................................................................... 364
7.2.3 Power sensors............................................................................................................ 369
7.2.4 Optional external generator control.............................................................................377
7.2.5 Probes.........................................................................................................................405
7.2.6 Optional external mixers............................................................................................. 413
7.2.7 External frontend control (R&S FSW-K553)................................................................443
7.2.8 Output settings............................................................................................................ 468
7.2.9 Trigger input/output settings........................................................................................470
7.2.10 How to output a trigger signal..................................................................................... 472
7.3 Frequency and span configuration......................................................................... 473
7.3.1 Impact of the frequency and span settings................................................................. 473
7.3.2 Frequency and span settings...................................................................................... 475
7.3.3 Keeping the center frequency stable - signal tracking................................................ 479
7.3.4 How to define the frequency range............................................................................. 480
7.3.5 How to move the center frequency through the frequency range............................... 480
7.4 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration..............................................................481
7.4.1 Impact of the vertical axis settings.............................................................................. 481
7.4.2 Amplitude settings.......................................................................................................483
7.4.3 Scaling the y-axis........................................................................................................ 491
7.4.4 How to optimize the amplitude display........................................................................493
7.5 Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration.............................................................494
7.5.1 Impact of the bandwidth, filter and sweep settings..................................................... 494
7.5.2 Bandwidth, filter and sweep settings...........................................................................500
7.6 Trigger and gate configuration................................................................................ 510
7.6.1 Triggering.................................................................................................................... 510
7.6.2 Gating..........................................................................................................................522
7.7 Adjusting settings automatically.............................................................................532

8 Common analysis and display functions........................................ 536

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 8

FSW Contents

8.1 Result display configuration....................................................................................536

8.1.1 Basic evaluation methods........................................................................................... 536
8.1.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid.......................................................... 539
8.2 Zoomed displays.......................................................................................................543
8.2.1 Single zoom versus multiple zoom..............................................................................543
8.2.2 Zoom functions............................................................................................................545
8.2.3 How to zoom into a diagram....................................................................................... 547
8.3 Marker usage............................................................................................................. 550
8.3.1 Basics on markers.......................................................................................................550
8.3.2 Marker settings............................................................................................................553
8.3.3 Marker search settings and positioning functions....................................................... 559
8.3.4 Marker (measurement) functions................................................................................ 567
8.3.5 How to work with markers........................................................................................... 588
8.3.6 Measurement example: measuring harmonics using marker functions...................... 591
8.4 Display and limit lines.............................................................................................. 592
8.4.1 Display lines................................................................................................................ 593
8.4.2 Limit lines.................................................................................................................... 595
8.5 Trace configuration................................................................................................... 611
8.5.1 Standard traces........................................................................................................... 611
8.5.2 Spectrograms..............................................................................................................631
8.5.3 Trace math.................................................................................................................. 648
8.6 Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation............................. 650
8.6.1 Displaying a reference trace - importing trace data.................................................... 651
8.6.2 Trace/data ex/import................................................................................................... 652
8.6.3 How to import traces................................................................................................... 657
8.6.4 How to export trace data and numerical results..........................................................658
8.6.5 How to export a peak list.............................................................................................658
8.6.6 Reference: ASCII file export format............................................................................ 659
8.7 Event-based actions................................................................................................. 662
8.7.1 Managing rules............................................................................................................663
8.7.2 Defining rules.............................................................................................................. 664
8.7.3 Debugging rules with the EBA-Journal....................................................................... 671
8.7.4 Reference: overview of available result-events and state-events............................... 672

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 9

FSW Contents

9 Optimizing measurements................................................................ 674

9.1 Minimizing the measurement duration................................................................... 674
9.2 Improving averaging results.................................................................................... 674

10 Data management.............................................................................. 676

10.1 Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset).......................................676
10.2 Protecting data using the secure user mode......................................................... 677
10.3 Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data...................... 679
10.3.1 Quick save/quick recall............................................................................................... 681
10.3.2 Configurable storage and recall.................................................................................. 683
10.3.3 How to save and load instrument settings.................................................................. 689
10.4 Import/export functions............................................................................................691
10.5 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings.................. 696
10.5.1 Print and screenshot settings......................................................................................696
10.5.2 How to store or print screenshots of the display......................................................... 707
10.5.3 Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file................................ 710
10.6 Working with test reports......................................................................................... 712
10.6.1 Designing a test report template................................................................................. 713
10.6.2 Managing templates....................................................................................................722
10.6.3 Creating datasets........................................................................................................ 723
10.6.4 Creating a test report.................................................................................................. 724
10.6.5 How to create a test report..........................................................................................726

11 General instrument setup..................................................................728

11.1 Alignment...................................................................................................................728
11.1.1 Basics on alignment.................................................................................................... 728
11.1.2 Alignment settings.......................................................................................................730
11.1.3 How to perform a self-test........................................................................................... 735
11.1.4 How to align the instrument.........................................................................................735
11.1.5 How to align the touchscreen......................................................................................736
11.2 Display settings.........................................................................................................736
11.2.1 Display settings........................................................................................................... 736
11.2.2 How to configure the colors for display and printing................................................... 747
11.2.3 How to work with the soft front panels........................................................................ 748
11.2.4 Reference: Keyboard shortcuts for the mini front panel..............................................749

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 10

FSW Contents

11.3 Application starter.................................................................................................... 751

11.3.1 Application starter functions........................................................................................ 751
11.3.2 How to work with the application starter......................................................................755
11.4 Transducers...............................................................................................................756
11.4.1 Basics on transducer factors.......................................................................................756
11.4.2 Transducer settings.....................................................................................................758
11.4.3 Reference: transducer factor file format......................................................................764
11.4.4 How to configure the transducer................................................................................. 765
11.5 Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544).................................................769
11.5.1 Basics on frequency response correction................................................................... 769
11.5.2 User-defined frequency response correction settings.................................................772
11.6 Reference frequency settings..................................................................................781
11.7 System configuration settings.................................................................................785
11.7.1 Hardware information..................................................................................................785
11.7.2 Licensing, versions and options.................................................................................. 786
11.7.3 System messages.......................................................................................................791
11.7.4 Firmware updates....................................................................................................... 792
11.7.5 General configuration settings.................................................................................... 793
11.7.6 Signal generator settings............................................................................................ 795
11.7.7 AC power loss behavior.............................................................................................. 797
11.8 Service functions...................................................................................................... 798
11.8.1 R&S support information............................................................................................. 798
11.8.2 Self-test settings and results....................................................................................... 800
11.8.3 Calibration signal display............................................................................................ 800
11.8.4 Service functions.........................................................................................................802
11.8.5 Hardware diagnostics..................................................................................................804
11.9 Synchronizing measurement channel configuration............................................ 805
11.9.1 General parameter coupling........................................................................................806
11.9.2 User-defined parameter coupling................................................................................808
11.9.3 Generator coupling......................................................................................................812
11.9.4 How to synchronize parameters..................................................................................814
11.9.5 Example for a user-defined parameter coupling......................................................... 816

12 Network operation and remote control............................................ 819

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 11

FSW Contents

12.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols............................................................... 819

12.1.1 LAN interface.............................................................................................................. 820
12.1.2 GPIB interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 bus interface).......................................................824
12.1.3 USB interface.............................................................................................................. 824
12.2 Status reporting system........................................................................................... 825
12.2.1 Hierarchy of status registers....................................................................................... 825
12.2.2 Contents of the status registers.................................................................................. 826
12.2.3 Reset values of the status reporting system............................................................... 837
12.3 GPIB languages.........................................................................................................838
12.4 The IECWIN tool........................................................................................................ 840
12.5 Automating tasks with remote command scripts.................................................. 841
12.5.1 The context-sensitive SCPI command menu.............................................................. 842
12.5.2 The SCPI recorder...................................................................................................... 844
12.5.3 How to determine the required SCPI command..........................................................851
12.5.4 How to create and export SCPI scripts....................................................................... 851
12.5.5 Example for a recorded SCPI script............................................................................854
12.6 Network and remote control settings......................................................................854
12.6.1 General network settings............................................................................................ 855
12.6.2 GPIB settings.............................................................................................................. 857
12.6.3 Compatibility settings.................................................................................................. 860
12.6.4 LAN settings................................................................................................................864
12.6.5 HUMS settings............................................................................................................ 865
12.6.6 Remote errors............................................................................................................. 871
12.6.7 Returning to manual mode ("local").............................................................................873
12.7 How to set up a network and remote control......................................................... 873
12.7.1 How to configure a network.........................................................................................874
12.7.2 How to operate the instrument without a network....................................................... 880
12.7.3 How to log on to the network.......................................................................................880
12.7.4 How to share directories (only with Microsoft networks)............................................. 883
12.7.5 How to control the FSW via the web browser interface.............................................. 884
12.7.6 How to deactivate the web browser interface............................................................. 885
12.7.7 How to set up remote desktop.................................................................................... 886
12.7.8 How to start a remote control session from a PC........................................................892

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 12

FSW Contents

12.7.9 How to return to manual operation..............................................................................893

13 Remote commands............................................................................ 894

13.1 Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions............................................... 894
13.2 Common suffixes...................................................................................................... 895
13.3 Common commands.................................................................................................895
13.4 Selecting the operating mode and application...................................................... 900
13.4.1 Selecting the mode and applications.......................................................................... 900
13.4.2 Performing a sequence of measurements.................................................................. 906
13.4.3 Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements............................ 908
13.5 Configuring and performing measurements.......................................................... 910
13.5.1 Performing measurements.......................................................................................... 911
13.5.2 Configuring power measurements.............................................................................. 914
13.5.3 Measuring the channel power and ACLR................................................................... 918
13.5.4 Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio............................................................................ 982
13.5.5 Measuring the occupied bandwidth.............................................................................983
13.5.6 Remote commands for noise power ratio (NPR) measurements................................985
13.5.7 Measuring the spectrum emission mask...................................................................1001
13.5.8 Measuring spurious emissions..................................................................................1038
13.5.9 Analyzing statistics (APD, CCDF)............................................................................. 1054
13.5.10 Measuring the time domain power............................................................................ 1064
13.5.11 Measuring the harmonic distortion............................................................................ 1074
13.5.12 Measuring the third order intercept point.................................................................. 1078
13.5.13 Measuring the AM modulation depth........................................................................ 1081
13.5.14 Remote commands for EMI measurements..............................................................1083
13.5.15 List evaluations......................................................................................................... 1092
13.5.16 Measuring the pulse power....................................................................................... 1096
13.6 Configuring the result display............................................................................... 1101
13.6.1 General window commands...................................................................................... 1101
13.6.2 Working with windows in the display......................................................................... 1102
13.6.3 Examples: configuring the result display................................................................... 1109
13.7 Setting basic measurement parameters............................................................... 1112
13.7.1 Configuring the data input and output........................................................................1112
13.7.2 Defining the frequency and span...............................................................................1193

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 13

FSW Contents

13.7.3 Configuring bandwidth and sweep settings...............................................................1201

13.7.4 Configuring the vertical axis (amplitude, scaling)......................................................1210
13.7.5 Configuring triggered and gated measurements.......................................................1221
13.7.6 Adjusting settings automatically................................................................................ 1236
13.8 Analyzing measurements (basics)........................................................................ 1240
13.8.1 Zooming into the display........................................................................................... 1240
13.8.2 Configuring the trace display and retrieving trace data.............................................1243
13.8.3 Working with markers................................................................................................1272
13.8.4 Configuring display lines........................................................................................... 1332
13.8.5 Defining limit checks................................................................................................. 1334
13.9 Managing settings and results.............................................................................. 1351
13.9.1 General data storage and loading commands.......................................................... 1352
13.9.2 Selecting the items to store.......................................................................................1358
13.9.3 Storing and loading instrument settings.................................................................... 1361
13.9.4 Storing or printing screenshots................................................................................. 1366
13.9.5 Storing measurement results.................................................................................... 1377
13.9.6 Test reports............................................................................................................... 1380
13.9.7 Examples: managing data.........................................................................................1390
13.10 Configuring the FSW.............................................................................................. 1394
13.10.1 Configuring the reference frequency.........................................................................1394
13.10.2 Calibration and checks..............................................................................................1398
13.10.3 Working with transducers.......................................................................................... 1407
13.10.4 Compensating for frequency response using touchstone files (R&S FSW-K544).....1411
13.10.5 Customizing the screen layout.................................................................................. 1430
13.10.6 Remote commands for language settings.................................................................1437
13.10.7 Configuring the network and remote control............................................................. 1438
13.10.8 Configuring HUMS.................................................................................................... 1443
13.10.9 Checking the system configuration........................................................................... 1449
13.10.10 Signal generator control commands......................................................................... 1459
13.10.11 Using service functions............................................................................................. 1460
13.10.12 Remote commands for synchronizing parameters....................................................1463
13.10.13 Configuring the application starter............................................................................ 1479
13.10.14 Programming examples for instrument setup........................................................... 1482

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 14

FSW Contents

13.11 Using the status register........................................................................................ 1483

13.11.1 General status register commands........................................................................... 1483
13.11.2 Reading out the CONDition part............................................................................... 1484
13.11.3 Reading out the EVENt part......................................................................................1484
13.11.4 Controlling the ENABle part...................................................................................... 1485
13.11.5 Controlling the negative transition part......................................................................1485
13.11.6 Controlling the positive transition part....................................................................... 1486
13.12 Commands for remote instrument operation.......................................................1487
13.13 Recording SCPI Commands Automatically..........................................................1487
13.14 Emulating other instruments' commands............................................................ 1492
13.14.1 Setting up instrument emulation................................................................................1493
13.14.2 Reference: GPIB commands of emulated HP models.............................................. 1496
13.14.3 Reference: command set of emulated PSA models................................................. 1524
13.14.4 Reference: command set of emulated PXA models................................................. 1528
13.14.5 Command set for analog demodulation for emulated PXA models.......................... 1531
13.14.6 Command set for vector signal analysis (VSA) for emulated R&S FSE instruments 1531
13.15 Deprecated commands...........................................................................................1532
13.16 Programming examples......................................................................................... 1536
13.16.1 Programming example: performing a basic frequency sweep.................................. 1536
13.16.2 Service request......................................................................................................... 1539

14 Troubleshooting............................................................................... 1548
14.1 Error information.....................................................................................................1548
14.2 Error messages in remote control mode.............................................................. 1550
14.3 Troubleshooting remote operation........................................................................1551
14.4 Miscellaneous troubleshooting hints....................................................................1553
14.5 System recovery..................................................................................................... 1555
14.6 Collecting information for support........................................................................1555
14.7 Contacting customer support................................................................................1558

15 Maintenance, storage, transport and disposal..............................1559

15.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................... 1559
15.2 Storage.....................................................................................................................1559
15.3 Transporting............................................................................................................ 1559

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 15

FSW Contents

15.4 Disposal................................................................................................................... 1560

List of Commands (base unit).........................................................1561

Index..................................................................................................1589

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 16

FSW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions

1 Safety and regulatory information

The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the
instructions provided here and in the following sections.

Intended use
The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic
components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and
performance limits stated in the specifications document.

Target audience
The target audience of this document includes developers and technicians, administra-
tors and maintenance personnel performing RF signal measurements. The required
skills and experience of the users depend on the test setup and application of the prod-
uct.

Where do I find safety information?

Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dan-
gers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by
dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows:
● In Section 1.1, "Safety instructions", on page 17. The same information is provi-
ded in many languages in printed format. The printed "Safety Instructions" for
"Mains-Powered Products, Heavy" (document number 1171.1788.99) are delivered
with the product.
● Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to
take care during setup or operation.

1.1 Safety instructions

Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according
to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions
provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation
nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended
use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the specifications
document, manuals and the printed "Safety Instructions" document. If you are unsure
about the appropriate use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer support.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also
need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces
and the product documentation are available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 17

FSW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions

Reconfigure or adjust the product only as described in the product documentation or

the specifications document. Any other modifications can affect safety and are not per-
mitted.
Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by
Rohde & Schwarz are allowed to repair the product. If any part of the product is dam-
aged or broken, stop using the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer support at
https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/support.

Lifting and carrying the product

The product is heavy. Do not move or carry the product by yourself. A single person
can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical con-
dition. Look up the maximum weight in the specifications document. Use the product
handles to move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the
product. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product.
To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift
trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.

Choosing the operating site

Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters
can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock,
serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing.
If Rohde & Schwarz provides accessories designed for outdoor use of your product,
e.g. a protective cover, you can use the product outdoors.
You can operate the product up to an altitude of 2000 m above sea level. If a higher
altitude is permissible, the value is provided in the specifications document. The prod-
uct is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where nonconductive contamination
can occur. For more information on environmental conditions such as ambient temper-
ature and humidity, see the specifications document.

Setting up the product

Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the prod-
uct facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so
that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure sta-
bility. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is
moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the prod-
uct, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause
injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and
stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the prod-
ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the
product so that it cannot fall off the rack.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 18

FSW Safety and regulatory information
Safety instructions

Connecting the product

Before connecting the interfaces or measuring inputs of the product to other products
or electrical circuits, make sure that the other products or electrical circuits provide
special protection against electric shock. This protection principle is referred to as
SELV (safety extra-low voltage) and is based on a low voltage level and increased
insulation. Exceptions are indicated by a measurement category on the product and
given in the specifications document.

Connecting to power
The product is an overvoltage category II product. Connect the product to a fixed
installation used to supply energy-consuming equipment such as household applian-
ces and similar loads. Keep in mind that electrically powered products have risks, such
as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death. Replace parts that are relevant to
safety only by original parts, e.g. power cables or fuses.
Take the following measures for your safety:
● Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not
adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse.
● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe-
cific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conduc-
tor terminal.
● Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged.
Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure
that nobody can trip over loose cables.
● Only connect the product to a power source with a fuse protection of maximum
20 A.
● Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time.
Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily
accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these
requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.

Using headphones
Take the following measures to prevent hearing damage. Before using headphones,
check the volume and reduce it if necessary. If you monitor varying signal levels, take
off the headphones and wait until the signal has settled. Then adjust the volume.

Cleaning the product

Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the
casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.

Meaning of safety labels

Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 19

FSW Safety and regulatory information
Warning messages in the documentation

Potential hazard
Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.

Heavy product
Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires a suffi-
cient number of persons or transport equipment.

Electrical hazard
Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.

Hot surface
Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire.

Protective conductor terminal

Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This connec-
tion protects you against electric shock if an electric problem occurs.

1.2 Warning messages in the documentation

A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig-
nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do
not follow the safety precautions.

WARNING
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in death or serious injury if not avoided.

CAUTION
Potentially hazardous situation. Could result in minor or moderate injury if not avoided.

NOTICE
Potential risks of damage. Could result in damage to the supported product or to other
property.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 20

FSW Safety and regulatory information
Korea certification class B

1.3 Korea certification class B

이 기기는 가정용(B급) 전자파 적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 하

며, 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 21

FSW Documentation overview
Service manual

2 Documentation overview
This section provides an overview of the FSW user documentation. Unless specified
otherwise, you find the documents at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/FSW
Further documents are available at:
www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/FSW

2.1 Getting started manual

Introduces the FSW and describes how to set up and start working with the product.
Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general information,
e.g. safety instructions, etc.
A printed version is delivered with the instrument. A PDF version is available for down-
load on the Internet.

2.2 User manuals and help

Separate user manuals are provided for the base unit and the firmware applications:
● Base unit manual
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an
introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control com-
mands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument
interfaces and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
● Firmware application manual
Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application, includ-
ing remote control commands. Basic information on operating the FSW is not inclu-
ded.
The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the FSW. The help offers
quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the base unit and the
firmware applications.
All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Inter-
net.

2.3 Service manual

Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace-
ment and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains
mechanical drawings and spare part lists.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 22

FSW Documentation overview
Release notes and open-source acknowledgment (OSA)

The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz
information system (GLORIS):
https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com

2.4 Instrument security procedures

Deals with security issues when working with the FSW in secure areas. It is available
for download on the internet.

2.5 Printed safety instructions

Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with
the product.

2.6 Specifications and brochures

The specifications document, also known as the data sheet, contains the technical
specifications of the FSW. It also lists the firmware applications and their order num-
bers, and optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char-
acteristics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/FSW

2.7 Release notes and open-source acknowledgment

(OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current
software version, and describe the software installation.
The software uses several valuable open source software packages. An open source
acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source
software.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/FSW

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 23

FSW Documentation overview
Videos

2.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers,

etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu-
lar topics.
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/FSW

2.9 Videos
Find various videos on Rohde & Schwarz products and test and measurement topics
on YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/@RohdeundSchwarz

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 24

FSW Welcome to the FSW

3 Welcome to the FSW

The R&S FSW is a new high-performance Rohde & Schwarz signal and spectrum ana-
lyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering low phase noise,
wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the analyzer
makes measurements fast and easy.
This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument pro-
vides, including remote control operation. The latest version is available for download
at the product homepage (http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/FSW.html).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 25

FSW Getting Started
Key features

4 Getting Started
Note: the following sections are identical to those in the printed FSW Getting Started
manual.
● Key features............................................................................................................ 26
● Preparing for use.....................................................................................................27
● Instrument tour........................................................................................................ 43
● Trying out the instrument........................................................................................ 63
● Operating the instrument.........................................................................................81

4.1 Key features

The FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer sets standards in RF performance and usabil-
ity. The FSW provides the following outstanding key features:
● Unmatched phase noise
● Excellent dynamic range
● Up to 8.3 GHz analysis bandwidth
● 800 MHz real-time analysis bandwidth with 2.4 million FFT/s, 0.46 μs POI and
500 MHz I/Q data streaming interface
● High sensitivity even at low frequencies
● High measurement rates and fast sweep times with sweep rates up to 1000
sweeps per second
● Multiple measurement applications can be run and displayed in parallel
● Easy and intuitive to operate via the large touchscreen user interface and opti-
mized user guidance
● SCPI recorder simplifies code generation
● Integrated support of R&S®NRP-Zxx power sensors
For a detailed specification refer to the specifications document.
Due to these features the FSW is ideal for various measurement tasks, for instance:
● Measuring oscillators for radar and communications applications due to the low
phase noise
● Identifying and analyzing spurious emissions due to the large spurious-free
dynamic range and low DANL
● Measuring harmonics due to integrated highpass filters
● Measuring wide-band modulated or frequency-agile signals due to the large band-
width
● Detecting errors caused by interaction between signals by measuring multiple
standards simultaneously

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 26

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

4.2 Preparing for use

Here, you can find basic information about setting up the product for the first time.
● Lifting and carrying..................................................................................................27
● Unpacking and checking......................................................................................... 27
● Choosing the operating site.................................................................................... 27
● Setting up the product.............................................................................................28
● Connecting the AC power....................................................................................... 30
● Switching the instrument on and off........................................................................ 30
● Connecting to RF coaxial connectors..................................................................... 32
● Connecting to LAN.................................................................................................. 33
● Connecting a keyboard........................................................................................... 34
● Connecting an external monitor.............................................................................. 34
● Considerations for test setup.................................................................................. 36
● Windows operating system..................................................................................... 37
● Logging on.............................................................................................................. 38
● Checking the supplied options................................................................................ 40
● Performing a self-alignment.................................................................................... 40
● Protecting data using the secure user mode...........................................................41

4.2.1 Lifting and carrying

The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument. Do not apply exces-
sive external force to the handles.
See "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 18.

4.2.2 Unpacking and checking

1. Unpack the FSW carefully.

2. Retain the original packing material. Use it when transporting or shipping the FSW
later.

3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness.

4. Check the equipment for damage.

If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.

4.2.3 Choosing the operating site

Specific operating conditions ensure proper operation and avoid damage to the prod-
uct and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as ambi-
ent temperature and humidity, see the specifications document.
For safety information, see "Choosing the operating site" on page 18.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 27

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Electromagnetic compatibility classes

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the
product. The EMC class of the product is given in the specifications document.
● Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
– Residential environments
– Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that
supplies residential buildings
● Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause
radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radi-
ated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments.
If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to
eliminate them.

4.2.4 Setting up the product

See also:
● "Setting up the product" on page 18
● "Intended use" on page 17

4.2.4.1 Placing the product on a bench top

To place the product on a bench top

1. Place the product on a stable, flat and level surface. Ensure that the surface can
support the weight of the product. For information on the weight, see the specifica-
tions document.

2. WARNING! A stack of products can fall over and cause injury. Never stack more
than two products. Otherwise, mount them in a rack.
Stack as follows:
● All products must have the same dimensions (width and length).
● Do not exceed a total load of 50 kg placed on the product at the bottom of the
stack.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 28

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Left = Stacked correctly

Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products

3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product.

Prevent overheating as follows:
● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product
and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.
● Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators
or other products.

4.2.4.2 Mounting the FSW in a rack

To prepare the rack

1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 18.

2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product.
Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.

To mount the FSW in a rack

1. Use an adapter kit to prepare the FSW for rack mounting.
a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the FSW. For the order number, see the
specifications document.
b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the
adapter kit.

2. Lift the FSW to shelf height.

3. Grab the handles and push the FSW onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit
closely to the rack.

4. Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure
the FSW in the rack.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 29

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

To unmount the FSW from a rack

1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets.

2. Remove the FSW from the rack.

3. If placing the FSW on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the FSW.
Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.

4.2.5 Connecting the AC power

In the standard version, the FSW is equipped with an AC power supply connector.
The FSW can be used with different AC power voltages and adapts itself automatically
to it. Refer to the specifications document for the requirements of voltage and fre-
quency.
For safety information, see "Connecting to power" on page 19.

To connect the AC power

1. Plug the AC power cable into the AC power connector on the rear panel of the
instrument. Only use the AC power cable delivered with the FSW.

2. Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact.
The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the specifica-
tions document.

For details on the connector, refer to Section 4.3.2.2, "AC power supply connection and
main power switch", on page 56.

4.2.6 Switching the instrument on and off

Table 4-1: Overview of power states

Status LED on Power key Position of main power switch

Off gray [0]

Standby orange [I]

Ready green [I]

To switch on the FSW

Prerequisites:
The FSW is off but connected to power.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 30

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

No RF input is connected to the instrument.

1. Set the switch on the power supply to position [I].
See Section 4.3.2.2, "AC power supply connection and main power switch",
on page 56.
The LED of the Power key is orange.
See Section 4.3.1.1, "Power key", on page 44.
Note: If the FSW was disconnected from power before it was switched off regu-
larly, it automatically switches back on when the power is reconnected.
Using a LAN-controlled power switch, you can take advantage of this behavior to
switch the device on and off remotely.
2. Press the Power key.
See Table 4-1.
The LED changes to green.
The FSW boots.
After booting, the instrument is ready for operation.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time.

To shut down the product

Prerequisites:
The product is in the ready state.
Any RF input is disconnected from the instrument.
► Press the [Power] key.
The operating system shuts down. The LED changes to orange.

If the instrument temperature exceeds the limit specified in the specifications docu-
ment, the FSW automatically shuts down to protect the instrument from damage.

To disconnect from power

The FSW is in the standby state.
1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in
the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first.
Set the switch on the power supply to position [0].
See Section 4.3.2.2, "AC power supply connection and main power switch",
on page 56.
The LED of the standby key is switched off.

2. Disconnect the FSW from the power source.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 31

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

4.2.7 Connecting to RF coaxial connectors

The most common interface used to provide signal input to the FSW is the RF input 50
ohm connector.
The RF input can be coupled to the DUT by alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC). AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal. This is the default set-
ting to prevent damage to the instrument. However, some specifications require DC
coupling.
In this case, protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually, e.g. by
inserting a DC blocker or using a bias tee to bias your DUT and supply the DC input to
the instrument. For details, refer to the specifications document.

To prepare for connecting

1. NOTICE! Damaged or not clean connections can lead to RF insertion loss and mis-
match, and even premature wear of the connectors.
Before connecting to the port, inspect the RF connector visually. Check that it is
clean, undamaged and mechanically compatible.

2. Use a high-quality RF cable that matches the RF connector type. See also "Cable
selection to minimize electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 36.

You can connect to two kinds of connectors:

● "To connect to screwable connectors" on page 32
● "To connect to pluggable connectors" on page 32

To connect to screwable connectors

To connect the cable with the connector, proceed as follows:
1. Carefully align the connector of the cable and the connector along a common axis.

2. Mate the connectors along the common axis until the male pin of the inner connec-
tor engages with the female socket of the outer connector.

3. Turn the nut of the outer connector until the connectors are firmly coupled.

4. NOTICE! Excessive tightening can damage the connectors.

Do not fasten the 1.00 mm "RF Input" connector with a torque larger than 0.23 Nm.
Rohde & Schwarz delivers an appropriate torque wrench with the instrument
(R&S®ZN-ZTW Torque 0.23 Nm).
Using a calibrated torque wrench, torque the nut to the limit. Hold the opposite con-
nector part stationary with a spanner.

To connect to pluggable connectors

The FSW provides pluggable Bayonet Neill-Concelman (BNC) connectors.
To connect the RF cable with the BNC connector, proceed as follows:
1. Carefully align the connector of the cable and the BNC connector along a common
axis.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 32

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

2. Mate the connectors along the common axis until the male pin of the connector of
the cable engages with the female socket of the BNC connector.

4.2.8 Connecting to LAN

You can connect the instrument to a LAN for remote operation via a PC.
For details on the connector, see Section 4.3.2.4, "LAN", on page 56.
Provided the network administrator has assigned you the appropriate rights and adap-
ted the Windows firewall configuration, you can use the interface, for example:
● To transfer data between a controlling device and the test device, e.g. to run a
remote control program
● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application (or a similar tool)
● To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
● To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders

Network environment
Before connecting the product to a local area network (LAN), consider the following:
● Install the latest firmware to reduce security risks.
● For internet or remote access, use secured connections, if applicable.
● Ensure that the network settings comply with the security policies of your company.
Contact your local system administrator or IT department before connecting your
product to your company LAN.
● When connected to the LAN, the product may potentially be accessed from the
internet, which may be a security risk. For example, attackers might misuse or
damage the product. For more information about IT security and how to operate
the product in a secure LAN environment, see the Rohde & Schwarz white paper
1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10.

► NOTICE! Risk of network failure.

Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks:
● Connecting the instrument to the network
● Configuring the network
● Changing IP addresses
● Exchanging hardware
Errors can affect the entire network.
Connect the FSW to the LAN via the LAN interface on the rear panel of the instru-
ment.
Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required
drivers.
By default, the FSW is configured to use DHCP and no static IP address is config-
ured.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 33

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

The default instrument name is <Type><variant>-<serial_number>, for example,

FSW8-123456. For information on determining the serial number, see Section 4.3.2.21,
"Device ID", on page 63.

For more information on LAN configuration, see Section 12.6.4, "LAN settings",
on page 864.

4.2.9 Connecting a keyboard

The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default input lan-
guage is English – US.
However, you can also connect foreign language keyboards; currently the following
languages are supported for the FSW:
● German
● Swiss
● French
● Russian

To configure the keyboard language

1. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the external
keyboard.

2. Select "Start > Settings > Time & language > Region & language > Add a lan-
guage" .

4.2.10 Connecting an external monitor

You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "Display port" con-
nector on the rear panel of the FSW (see also Section 4.3.2.5, "Display port and DVI",
on page 57).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 34

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Screen resolution and format

The touchscreen of the FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor
or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the
screen does not react to your touch actions properly.
The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of
the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor.
If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows
configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the
monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the FSW application window and see
even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the standard
Windows configuration dialog box.
However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor
using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Res-
olution: Restore to default".
The FSW supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels.

1. Connect the external monitor to the FSW.

2. Press [Setup].

3. Press "Display".

4. Select the "Configure Monitor" tab in the "Display" dialog box.

The standard Windows "Screen Resolution" dialog box is displayed.

5. Select the instrument for display:

● "Display 1": internal monitor only

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 35

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

● "Display 2": external monitor only

● "Duplicate": both internal and external monitor

6. Tap "Apply" to try out the settings before they are accepted permanently, then you
can easily return to the previous settings, if necessary.

7. Select "OK" if the settings are suitable.

4.2.11 Considerations for test setup

An unsuitable test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices.

Cable selection to minimize electromagnetic interference (EMI)

Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation:
● Use high-quality shielded cables, for example, double-shielded RF and LAN
cables.
● Always terminate open cable ends.
● Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations.

Preventing electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT.

► NOTICE! Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the

product and the device under test (DUT).
Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage:
a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground.
b) Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.

Electrostatically discharge the DUT with a short or match before connecting it to the
instrument. Even residual charges on cables can cause damage when discharged by
the instrument.

Signal input and output levels

Information on signal levels is provided in the specifications document and on the
instrument, next to the connector. Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to
avoid damage to the FSW and connected devices.
When measuring unknown signals, attenuate the signal input by at least 10 dB. Using
a 0 dB attenuation when measuring unknown signals can damage or destroy the input
mixer.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 36

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

4.2.12 Windows operating system

The instrument contains the Windows 10 operating system which has been configured
according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup are
only required when peripherals like a keyboard or a printer are installed or if the net-
work configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the FSW is started,
the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automatically.

Tested software
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Windows 10 are adapted to
the instrument. Only install update software released by Rohde & Schwarz to modify
existing instrument software.
You can install additional software on the instrument; however, additional software can
impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has tested
for compatibility with the instrument software.
The following program packages have been tested:
● R&S Power Viewer Plus - virtual power meter for displaying results of the power
sensor R&S NRPxx (install only this component!)
● Symantec Endpoint Security – virus-protection software
● FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk

Service packs and updates

Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows-
based operating systems. They are released through the Microsoft Update website and
associated update server. Update instruments using Windows regularly, especially
instruments that connect to a network.

Firewall settings
A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access
to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends using the firewall on
your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall
enabled. All ports and connections for remote control are enabled.
Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.

Virus protection
Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection. Use strong firewall
settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde & Schwarz instru-
ment regularly. It is also recommended that you install anti-virus software on the instru-
ment. Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the
background ("on-access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially
degrading instrument performance. However, Rohde & Schwarz does recommend run-
ning it during non-critical hours.
For details and recommendations, see the following Rohde & Schwarz white paper:
● 1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 37

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

To access the "Start" menu

The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Windows 10 functionality and instal-
led programs.
► Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar, or press the "Windows" key or the [CTRL
+ ESC] key combination on the (external) keyboard.
The "Start" menu and the Windows taskbar are displayed.

The Windows taskbar also provides quick access to commonly used programs, for
example Paint or WordPad. IECWIN, the auxiliary remote control tool provided free of
charge and installed by Rohde & Schwarz, is also available from the taskbar or "Start"
menu.
For details on the IECWIN tool, see Section 12.4, "The IECWIN tool", on page 840.

All necessary system settings can be defined in the "Start > Settings" menu.
For required settings, refer to the Windows 10 documentation and to the hardware
description.

4.2.13 Logging on

Windows 10 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass-
word in a login window. By default, the FSW provides the following user accounts:
● "Instrument": an administrator account with unrestricted access to the computer/
domain
● "NormalUser": a standard user account with limited access
Some administrative tasks require administrator rights (e.g. the configuration of a LAN
network). Refer to the description of the basic instrument Setup ([Setup] menu) to find
out which functions are affected.

Secure user mode

If the secure user mode option (R&S FSW-K33) is installed, an additional account is
provided: the "SecureUser".
The "SecureUser" is a standard user account with limited functionality. In particular,
administrative tasks such as LAN configuration or general instrument settings are not
available. Furthermore, for a "SecureUser", data that the FSW normally stores on the
solid-state drive is redirected to volatile memory instead. You can access data that is
stored in volatile memory during the current instrument session. However, when the
instrument’s power is removed, all data in volatile memory is erased.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 38

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Passwords
For all default user accounts, the initial password is 894129. Note that this password is
very weak, and it is recommended that you change the password for all users after ini-
tial login. An administrator can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any
time via "Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change".

Auto-login
When shipped, the instrument automatically logs on the default "Instrument" user to
Windows 10 (with full access) using the default password. This function is active until
an administrator explicitly deactivates it or changes the password.

Changing the password and use of auto-login function

Note that when you change the default password, the default auto-login function no
longer works!
In this case, you must enter the new password manually to log on.

Adapting the auto-login function to a new password

If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer
works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first.

Changing the password for auto-login requires administrator rights.

1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 38).

2. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.

Notepad).

3. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password

(894129) by the new password for automatic login.

4. Save the changes to the file.

5. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run".

The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

6. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.

7. Press [ENTER] to confirm.

The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It is applied the
next time you switch on the instrument.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 39

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Switching users when using the auto-login function

Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login win-
dow is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when
the auto-login function is active.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 38).

2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out".

The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.

For information on deactivating and reactivating the auto-login function, see "Deactivat-
ing the auto-login function" on page 883.

4.2.14 Checking the supplied options

The instrument can be equipped with both hardware and firmware options. To check
whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note,
proceed as follows.

1. Press [SETUP].

2. Press "System Config".

3. Switch to the "Versions + Options" tab in the "System Configuration" dialog box.
A list with hardware and firmware information is displayed.

4. Check the availability of the hardware options as indicated in the delivery note.

4.2.15 Performing a self-alignment

When temperature changes occur in the environment of the FSW, or after updating the
firmware, you have to perform a self-alignment to align the data to a reference source.
During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a
self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement
results.

Performing a self-alignment
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature (for details, refer to the specifications document).
A message in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating
temperature has not yet been reached.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 40

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed after

installation. A dialog box is displayed indicating how much warm-up time is still
required before self-alignment can be performed.
1. Press [Setup].

2. Press "Alignment".

3. Select "Start Self Alignment" in the "Alignment" dialog box.

Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.

To display the alignment results again later

● Press [SETUP].
● Press "Alignment".

4.2.16 Protecting data using the secure user mode

During normal operation, the FSW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating sys-
tem, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data created
during operation.
If necessary, the solid-state drive can be removed from the FSW and locked in a
secure place to protect any classified data it may contain.

Redirecting storage to volatile memory

Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the FSW permanently, the secure
user mode was introduced (option R&S FSW-K33). In secure user mode, the instru-
ment’s solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to mem-
ory permanently. Data that the FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirec-
ted to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instrument is
switched off. This data includes:
● Windows operating system files
● Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state
● Self-alignment data
● General instrument settings such as the IP address
● Measurement settings
● User data created during operation
(see also Table 10-1)
● Any data created by other applications installed on the FSW, for example, text edi-
tors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation.
However, when the instrument’s power is switched off, all data in this memory is
cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed
state when switched on.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 41

FSW Getting Started
Preparing for use

To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an exter-

nal storage device, such as a memory stick.

Limited storage space

The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB.
Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage
space is still available.

Storing required data permanently

Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the FSW must be stored
on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes
predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.

Self-alignment data
Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature
changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new
self-alignment at the start of each new session on the FSW.

Windows updates
In secure user mode, in rare cases, Windows updates trigger a reboot. We recommend
using secure user mode on R&S FSW-K33 only in private LAN without access to the
internet or disconnected to LAN to avoid unwanted Windows updates. In preparation
for Windows updates, disable secure user mode temporarily.

Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in
secure user mode:
● Firmware update
● Activating a new option key
Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have admin-
istrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general
instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument
setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.

Activating and deactivating secure user mode

Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user
mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then log-
ged on to the FSW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure user
mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 42

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

Secure passwords
By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "Secure-
User" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after
installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to
improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the pass-
words, it is strongly recommended that you do so.
You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via:
"Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"

To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with
administrator rights must log on.

Switching users when using the auto-login function

In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to "Shut down" and then "Log off".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account
name and password.

The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when
another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available.
For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the
general system configuration settings (see "SecureUser Mode" on page 794).

Remote control
Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
(See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].)
Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.

4.3 Instrument tour

4.3.1 Front panel view

This section describes the front panel, including all function keys and connectors.
(Note: the graphic shows a 26 GHz model of the FSW. Some connectors on the
85 GHz model differ slightly; differences are indicated for the individual connectors.)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 43

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

2 3 4

7
1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Figure 4-1: Front panel view of FSW26

1 = POWER key
2 = Touchscreen
3 = Function keys
4 = Keypad
5 = Navigation controls
6 = TRIGGER INPUT/OUTPUT connectors
7 = RF Input 50 Ω connector
8 = EXT MIXER connector (optional)
9 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50Ω connectors for I/Q signal or Rohde & Schwarz active probes (optional)
10 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50Ω connectors for inverse part of differential I/Q signal (optional, not for
FSW85)
11 = NOISE SOURCE CONTROL
12 = PROBE connector
13 = POWER SENSOR connector
14 = USB connectors
15 = Headphones connector and volume control
16 = SYSTEM keys

4.3.1.1 Power key

The power key is on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and shuts down
the instrument.
See also "Connecting to power" on page 19.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 44

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.1.2 Touchscreen

All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel. Additionally,
the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch
between various measurement tasks. The screen is touch-sensitive, offering an alter-
native means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the instrument.
1 2 3 4

5
7

Figure 4-2: Touchscreen elements

1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc.
2 = Tabs for individual measurement channels
3 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings
4 = Measurement results area
5 = Softkeys for function access
6 = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display
7 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on application
8 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information

Any user interface elements that react to a click by a mouse pointer also react to a tap
on the screen, and vice versa. Using touchscreen gestures, you can perform the fol-
lowing tasks (among others, see also Section 4.4, "Trying out the instrument",
on page 63):
● Changing a setting
● Changing the display
● Moving a marker
● Zooming into a diagram
● Selecting a new evaluation method
● Scrolling through a result list or table
● Saving or printing results and settings

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 45

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

To imitate a right-click by mouse using the touchscreen, for example to open a context-
sensitive menu for a specific item, press the screen for about 1 second.
For details on touchscreen gestures, see Section 4.5.5, "Touchscreen gestures",
on page 99.

4.3.1.3 Function keys

Function keys provide access to the most common measurement settings and func-
tions.
A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual.
Table 4-2: Function keys

Function key Assigned functions

Basic measurement settings

[FREQ] Sets the center frequency and the start and stop frequencies for the fre-
quency range under consideration. This key is also used to set the fre-
quency offset and the signal track function.

[SPAN] Sets the frequency span to be analyzed.

[AMPT] Sets the reference level, the displayed dynamic range, the RF attenua-
tion and the unit for the level display.
Sets the level offset and the input impedance.
Activates the preamplifier (option RF Preamplifier, R&S FSW-B24).

[AUTO SET] Enables automatic settings for level, frequency or sweep type mode.

[BW] Sets the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth.

[SWEEP] Sets the sweep time and the number of measurement points.
Selects continuous measurement or single measurement.

[TRACE] Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the mea-
surement data.

[TRIG] Sets the trigger mode, the trigger threshold, the trigger delay, and the
gate configuration in the case of gated sweep.

Marker functions

[MKR] Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement markers
(markers and delta markers).

[PEAK SEARCH] Performs a peak search for active marker. If no marker is active, normal
marker 1 is activated and the peak search is performed for it.

[MKR FUNC] Provides additional analysis functions of the measurement markers:

Frequency counter (Sig Count)
Fixed reference point for relative measurement markers (Ref Fixed)
Noise marker (Noise Meas)
Phase noise (Phase Noise)
n dB down function
AM/FM audio demodulation
Peak list

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 46

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

Function key Assigned functions

[MKR->] Used for search functions of the measurement markers (maximum/mini-

mum of the trace).
Assigns the marker frequency to the center frequency, and the marker
level to the reference level.
Restricts the search area (Search Limits) and characterizes the maxi-
mum points and minimum points (Peak Excursion).

Measurement and evaluation functions

[MEAS] Provides the measurement functions.

Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power ACLR)
Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/N0)
Occupied bandwidth (OBW)
Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask)
Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions)
Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power)
Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumulative
complementary distribution function (CCDF)
Third-order intercept point (TOI)
AM modulation depth (AM Mod Depth)

[MEAS CONFIG] Used to define measurement configuration.

[LINES] Configures display lines and limit lines.

[INPUT/OUTPUT] Displays softkeys for input/output functions.

Measurement start functions

[RUN SINGLE] Starts a single new measurement (Single Sweep Mode).

[RUN CONT] Starts a continuous measurement (Continuous Sweep Mode).

Function execution (in navigation controls area)

[UNDO] Reverts last operation

[REDO] Repeats previously reverted operation.

4.3.1.4 Navigation controls

The navigation controls include a rotary knob, navigation keys, and Undo / Redo keys.
They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes.

Navigating in tables
The easiest way to navigate within tables (both in result tables and configuration
tables) is to scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen.

Rotary knob

The rotary knob has several functions:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 47

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

● For numeric entries: increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counter-

clockwise direction) the instrument parameter at a defined step width
● In lists: toggles between entries
● For markers, limit lines, and other graphical elements on the screen: moves their
position
● For active scroll bars: moves the scroll bar vertically
● For dialog boxes: Same effect as the Enter key when pressed

Navigation keys
You can use the navigation keys as an alternative to the rotary knob to navigate
through dialog boxes, diagrams or tables.

Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys

The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following:
● For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the
instrument parameter at a defined step width
● In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries
● In a table: moves the selection bar vertically
● In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar: moves the scroll bar

Arrow Left/Arrow Right Keys

The <arrow left> or <arrow right> keys do the following:
● In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor.
● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries.
● In a table, move the selection bar horizontally.
● In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scroll bar, move the scroll bar.

Undo/redo keys
● [Undo] reverts the previous action, i.e. the state before the previous action is
retrieved.
The undo function is useful, for example, if you accidentally select a different mea-
surement. In this case, many settings are lost. However, if you press [Undo] imme-
diately afterwards, the previous state is retrieved, i.e. the previous measurement
and all settings.
● [Redo] repeats the previously reverted action, i.e. the most recent action is repea-
ted.

The [Undo] function is not available after a [Preset] or "Recall" operation. When you
use these functions, the history of previous actions is deleted.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 48

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.1.5 Keypad

The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding

units (see also Section 4.5.4.2, "Entering alphanumeric parameters", on page 97). It
contains the following keys:
Table 4-3: Keys on the keypad

Type of key Description

Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes.

Decimal point Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.

Sign key Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. For an alphanumeric parame-
ter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.

Unit keys (GHz/-dBm MHz/ Adds the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the
dBm, kHz/dB and Hz/dB) entry.
For level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the
value "1" as multiplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an
Enter key.

[Esc] key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit Mode is not active. Quits the
edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can-
cel" button it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used:
● If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and
closes the dialog box.
● If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes
the dialog box.

Backspace key If an alphanumeric entry has already been started, this key deletes the
character to the left of the cursor.

Enter key ● Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is
accepted.
● With other entries, this key can be used instead of the "Hz/dB" unit
key.
● In a dialog box, selects the default or focused element.

4.3.1.6 TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT

Use the female "TRIGGER INPUT" connector to input an external trigger or gate data.
Thus, you can control the measurement using an external signal. The voltage levels
can range from 0.5 V to 3.5 V. The default value is 1.4 V. The typical input impedance
is 10 kΩ.
Use the female BNC "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connector to receive a second
external signal or to provide a signal to another device. The signal is TTL compatible
(0 V / 5 V). You control the connector usage in the "Trigger" settings ([TRIG] key).
The trigger output also controls signals by the frequency mask trigger available in
Real-Time mode.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 49

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

The rear panel provides a third "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connector, see Sec-
tion 4.3.2.12, "TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT", on page 59. (Not models
1312.8000Kxx)
For FSW85 models, the second trigger (female BNC "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT"
connector) on the front panel is not available due to the second RF input connector
(see Section 4.3.1.7, "RF input 50 ohm", on page 50).

4.3.1.7 RF input 50 ohm

Provides RF input from a connected device under test (DUT) to the FSW, which is then
analyzed in an RF measurement. Connect the DUT to the "RF Input" connector on the
FSW after switching on the instrument. Disconnect the RF input before switching off
the instrument. Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the speci-
fications document.
The specific connector type depends on the instrument model:
● FSW26: APC 3.5 mm male (compatible with R&S SMA)
● FSW43: 2.92 mm male (compatible with R&S SMA)
● FSW50/67: 1.85 mm male (compatible with 2.4 mm)
● FSW85:
– Input 1: 1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz
with option R&S FSW-B90G)
– Input 2: 1.85 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 67 GHz
For models 1312.8000Kxx:
1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz with option
R&S FSW-B90G)
For more information on connecting devices to this input, see Section 4.2.7, "Connect-
ing to RF coaxial connectors", on page 32.
See also Section 4.2.11, "Considerations for test setup", on page 36.
For FSW85 models, which have two input connectors, you must define which input
source is used for each measurement channel.
(See Section 7.2.2.1, "Radio frequency input", on page 364).

4.3.1.8 EXT MIXER connector (optional)

Connect external mixers to the "EXT MIXER LO OUT/IF IN" and "IF IN" female con-
nectors to increase the available frequency range. These connectors are optional and
only available with R&S FSW-B21.
If no external mixers are connected to the FSW, cover the two front connectors "LO
OUT / IF IN" and "IF IN" with the supplied SMA caps.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 50

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.1.9 (Analog) baseband input 50 ohm connectors (optional)

The "Analog Baseband" interface option provides four "Baseband input" BNC connec-
tors on the front panel of the FSW for analog I and Q signals.
(FSW85: two connectors)

The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used
to input:
● Single-ended signals
● The positive signal input for differential signals
● Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see specifications document)
The lower BNC connectors Ī and Ǭ are used to input the negative signal for differential
signals.

FSW85
The FSW85 provides only two connectors; differential input is not supported.

Complex signal input (I+jQ)

For complex signal input (I+jQ), always use two identical cables for the I and Q con-
nectors (same length, same type, same manufacturer). Otherwise, time delay or gain
imbalance can occur between the different cables, which cannot be calibrated.

All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 Ω. Do not overload the input. For maxi-
mum allowed values, see the specifications document.
Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal
path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connec-
tions for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connec-
tions to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after
switching the input source.
Input via the "Analog Baseband" interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer or in one
of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 51

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.1.10 Noise source control

The noise source control female connector is used to provide the supply voltage for an
external noise source. For example, use it to measure the noise figure and gain of
amplifiers and frequency converting devices.
Conventional noise sources require a voltage of +28 V to be switched on and 0 V to be
switched off. The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA.

For smart noise sources, use the Lemosa Power sensor connector.

For details on noise source control, see "Noise Source Control" on page 470.

4.3.1.11 Probe

The FSW provides a connector for supply voltages of +15 V to -12 V and ground for
active probes and preamplifiers. A maximum current of 140 mA is available. This con-
nector is suitable as a power supply for high-impedance probes.
For details on configuring and using power sensors, see Section 7.2.3, "Power sen-
sors", on page 369.

4.3.1.12 Power sensor

The "Lemosa" female connector is used to connect Rohde & Schwarz power sensors,
but also smart noise sources. For a detailed list of supported sensors and smart noise
sources, see the specifications document.
For details on configuring and using power sensors, see Section 7.2.3, "Power sen-
sors", on page 369. For details on noise source control, see "Noise Source Control"
on page 470.
A smart noise source (SNS) provides its own ENR and uncertainty tables and a tem-
perature value from an internal measurement. Thus, accuracy is improved and less
configuration efforts are required compared to common noise sources.
Connect the smart noise source to the Lemosa "Power Sensor" connector on the FSW.
Then connect the SNS output to the DUT or the "RF Input" connector on the FSW.
When you connect a smart noise source, the FSW automatically loads its ENR table
and stores it for future measurements. The ENR table remains stored on the instru-
ment even after the noise source is disconnected. If the table already exists on the
FSW, the contents are updated, if necessary. The identification and setup procedure
after connecting the R&S FS-SNS can take up to 10 seconds.
For details on Rohde & Schwarz smart noise sources, see the product documentation.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 52

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.1.13 USB

The front panel provides three female "USB" connectors ("USB-A") to connect devices
like a keyboard or a mouse. In addition, a memory stick can be connected to store and
reload instrument settings and measurement data.

The rear panel provides further "USB" connectors, including a male ("USB-B") connec-
tor. See Section 4.3.2.3, "USB", on page 56.
All USB connectors support standard 2.0.

4.3.1.14 Phones and volume

You can use headphones to monitor demodulated audio frequencies in time domain
measurements acoustically.
Connect headphones equipped with a miniature jack plug to the "PHONES" female
connector. Set the output voltage using the "Volume" control to the right of the female
connector. The maximum output voltage (volume) is 1 V. If a headphone is plugged
into the instrument, the internal loudspeaker is automatically switched off.
The output provided to the "PHONES" connector is the same as the (video) output at
the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT connector.
See also "Using headphones" on page 19.

4.3.1.15 SYSTEM keys

[SYSTEM] keys set the instrument to a predefined state, change basic settings, and
provide print and display functions.
A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the User Manual.
Table 4-4: SYSTEM keys

SYSTEM key Assigned functions

[PRESET] Resets the instrument to the default state.

[MODE] Provides the selection between applications

[SETUP] Provides basic instrument configuration functions, e.g.:

● Reference frequency (external/internal), noise source
● Date, time, display configuration
● LAN interface
● Self-alignment
● Firmware update and enabling of options
● Information about instrument configuration incl. firmware version and
system error messages
● Service support functions (self-test etc.)

Switches between the on-screen keyboard display:

● At the top of the screen
● At the bottom of the screen
● Off

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 53

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

SYSTEM key Assigned functions

Switches between maximized and split display of focus area.

Moves focus area from one active window to the next.

4.3.2 Rear panel view

This figure shows the rear panel view of the FSW. The individual elements are descri-
bed in more detail in the subsequent sections.

3
6

Figure 4-3: Rear panel view

1 = see Figure 4-4

2 = see Figure 4-5
3 = see Figure 4-6
4 = see Figure 4-7
5 = IF OUT 2 GHz connector
6 = Device ID with serial number and other labels

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 54

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

1 2

6 5 4 3

Figure 4-4: Rear panel view - extract 1

1 = Removable system hard drive

2 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch
3 = USB (DEVICE) connectors
4 = LAN connector
5 = DVI connector for external display
6 = DISPLAY PORT for external display

7 6 5 4 3 2

Figure 4-5: Rear panel view - extract 2

1 = Bandwidth extension options, with "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector (option -B160/-B320-B512) and Digital
I/Q 40G Streaming Output QSFP+ connector (option B517/B1017)
2 = GPIB interface
3 = AUX PORT
4 = SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT
5 = DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT/OUTPUT connectors (option B17)
6 = TRIGGER 3 INPUT/OUTPUT connector
7 = IF/VIDEO/DEMOD connector

1 2 3

Figure 4-6: Rear panel view - extract 3

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 55

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

1 = Analog baseband interface (option B71)

2 = External generator control (option B10)
3 = Alignment Signal Source (option B2000)

1 2

Figure 4-7: Rear panel view - extract 4

1 = OCXO external reference (option B4)

2 = REF INPUT/OUTPUT connectors

4.3.2.1 Removable system hard drive

The removable system hard drive contains all measurement data from the FSW, allow-
ing you to store the data securely in an external location.

4.3.2.2 AC power supply connection and main power switch

An AC power supply connector and main power switch are located in a unit on the rear
panel of the instrument.
Main power switch function:
Position 1: The instrument can be started via the Power key on the front panel.
The (optional) OCXO reference frequency is warmed up.
Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply.
For details, refer to "Connecting to power" on page 19 and Section 4.2.5, "Connecting
the AC power", on page 30.

4.3.2.3 USB

The rear panel provides four additional female "USB (USB-A)" connectors to connect
devices like a keyboard, a mouse or a memory stick (see also Section 4.3.1.13, "USB",
on page 53).
Furthermore, a male "USB DEVICE" connector ("USB-B") is provided, for example to
connect the FSW to a PC for remote control. (Not available for instruments with CPU
board 1206.3874.00 or higher.)
All USB connectors support standard 2.0.

4.3.2.4 LAN

The FSW is equipped with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u network interface with Auto-
MDI(X) functionality. The assignment of the RJ-45 connector supports twisted-pair cat-

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 56

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

egory 5 UTP/STP cables in a star configuration (UTP stands for unshielded twisted
pair, and STP for shielded twisted pair).
For details, see Section 12, "Network operation and remote control", on page 819.

4.3.2.5 Display port and DVI

You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the FSW to provide an
enlarged display. Two different types of connectors are provided for this purpose:
● Display Port
● DVI (digital visual interface)
For details, see Section 4.2.10, "Connecting an external monitor", on page 34.

4.3.2.6 Bandwidth extension options and IF WIDE OUTPUT connector

You can extend the signal analysis bandwidth of the FSW by a hardware option
(R&S FSW-B160/-B320/-B512/-B1200/-B2001/-B4001/-B8001 or R&S FSW-Uxxx).
The bandwidth extension allows for an output sample rate of up to 10 GHz and a linear
bandwidth up to:
● 160 MHz (with option B160/U160)
● 320 MHz (with option B320/U320)
● 512 MHz (with option B512/U512)
● 1200 MHz (with option B1200/U1200)
● 2001 MHz (with option B2001/U2001)
● 4001 MHz (with option B4001/U4001)
● 6001 MHz (with option B6001/U6001)
● 8001 MHz (with option B8001/U8001)
While the extension can be activated or deactivated manually in the FSW base unit
(I/Q Analyzer application), it is activated automatically in some applications that also
support I/Q data analysis. See the application-specific documentation for details.

IF WIDE OUTPUT connector

Together with the bandwidth extension options B160/B320/B512, an additional IF out-
put connector is provided ("IF WIDE OUTPUT"). As opposed to the default IF/VIDEO/
DEMOD OUTPUT connector, the IF output frequency of the optional connector cannot
be defined manually, but is determined automatically depending on the center fre-
quency. For details on the used frequencies, see the specifications document. The "IF
WIDE OUTPUT" connector is used automatically when the bandwidth extension is acti-
vated (i.e. for bandwidths > 80 MHz).

4.3.2.7 Digital I/Q 40G streaming output connector (R&S FSW-B517/-B1017)

The Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output (QSFP+) connector is provided by the hardware
of any bandwidth extension option for 512 MHz or more.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 57

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

If necessary, remove the metal cover from the connector on the rear panel of the FSW.

The output connector provides I/Q data streams with a sample rate of up to 600 MHz, if
the R&S FSW-B517 option is installed and active. With R&S FSW-B1017 installed, out-
put rates up to 1200 MHz are available.
Output is activated in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key).
See the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual for details.

4.3.2.8 GPIB interface

The GPIB interface is in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI. A computer for remote
control can be connected via this interface. To set up the connection, a shielded cable
is recommended.
For more details, refer to Section 12, "Network operation and remote control",
on page 819.

4.3.2.9 Aux. port

A 9-pole SUB-D male connector used to provide low-voltage TTL control signals (max.
5 V). The output signals can be used to control external devices.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 58

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

4.3.2.10 SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT

Use the "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT" connectors to synchronize several devi-

ces (e.g. two FSWs) to a common trigger signal or reference frequency. The FSW can
output a 100 MHz signal as a trigger or reference signal to another device. The FSW
can also receive an external trigger or reference signal at the input connector.

4.3.2.11 DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT / OUTPUT (R&S FSW-B17)

The optional "DIGITAL BASEBAND" connectors allow you to provide digital I/Q data for
measurements with the FSW. Using the output connector you can provide RF input
from the FSW to a connected device as digital I/Q data. The digital input and output
connectors cannot be used simultaneously.
It is recommended that you use the R&S®SMU-Z6 (1415.0201.02) cable to connect
other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the FSW.

For high output rates, use the Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output option (R&S FSW-
B517), see Section 4.3.2.7, "Digital I/Q 40G streaming output connector (R&S FSW-
B517/-B1017)", on page 57.

4.3.2.12 TRIGGER 3 INPUT/ OUTPUT

The additional female BNC "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connector can be used to
receive a third external signal or to provide a signal to another device. The signal is
TTL compatible (0 V / 5 V). You can control the connector usage in the "Trigger" set-
tings ([TRIG] key).

4.3.2.13 IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT

The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs:

● Intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 20 MHz
● Video output (1V)
Which output is provided is defined in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key).
For details, see "Data Output" on page 469.

4.3.2.14 (Analog) baseband input 50 ohm connectors (optional)

The "Analog Baseband" interface option provides four "Baseband input" BNC connec-
tors on the front panel of the FSW for analog I and Q signals.
(FSW85: two connectors)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 59

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used
to input:
● Single-ended signals
● The positive signal input for differential signals
● Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see specifications document)
The lower BNC connectors Ī and Ǭ are used to input the negative signal for differential
signals.

FSW85
The FSW85 provides only two connectors; differential input is not supported.

Complex signal input (I+jQ)

For complex signal input (I+jQ), always use two identical cables for the I and Q con-
nectors (same length, same type, same manufacturer). Otherwise, time delay or gain
imbalance can occur between the different cables, which cannot be calibrated.

All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 Ω. Do not overload the input. For maxi-
mum allowed values, see the specifications document.
Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal
path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connec-
tions for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connec-
tions to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after
switching the input source.
Input via the "Analog Baseband" interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer or in one
of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).

4.3.2.15 External generator control option (R&S FSW-B10)

The external generator control option provides an additional GPIB and an "AUX con-
trol" connector.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 60

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

The GPIB connector can be used to connect the external generator to the FSW.
The 9-pole SUB-D female "AUX control" connector is required for TTL synchronization,
if supported by the generator.
For details on connecting an external generator, see "External generator connections"
on page 378.

4.3.2.16 Alignment signal source (option R&S FSW-B2000)

The alignment signal source is required to align the connected oscilloscope and the
oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000).
For details, see the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.

4.3.2.17 REF INPUT / REF OUTPUT

The "REF INPUT" connectors are used to provide an external reference signal to the
FSW.
The "REF OUTPUT" connectors can be used to provide an external reference signal
(or the optional OCXO reference signal) from the FSW to other devices that are con-
nected to this instrument.
Various connectors are provided for different reference signals:

Connector Reference signal Usage

"REF INPUT" 1...50 MHz To provide an external reference signal on the FSW.
0...10 dBm

"REF OUTPUT" 1...50 MHz To provide the same external reference signal received by
the "REF INPUT 1...50 MHz" connector to another device,
0...10 dBm
when available.

"REF OUTPUT" 10 MHz To provide the internal reference signal from the FSW to
another device continuously.
10 dBm
Also used to provide OCXO reference signal to another
device.

"REF INPUT" 100 MHz / 1 GHz To provide an external reference signal on the FSW.
0...10 dBm

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 61

FSW Getting Started
Instrument tour

Connector Reference signal Usage

"REF OUTPUT" 100 MHz To provide a 100 MHz reference signal from the FSW to
another device.
6 dBm

"REF OUTPUT" 640 MHz To provide a 640 MHz reference signal from the FSW to
another device.
16 dBm

SYNC TRIGGER
The "SYNC TRIGGER" connector can also be used to synchronize the reference fre-
quency on several devices (see Section 4.3.2.10, "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/INPUT",
on page 59).

4.3.2.18 OCXO option (R&S FSW-B4)

This option generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise frequency. If
installed, and if no external signal is used, this signal is used as an internal reference.
It can also be used to synchronize other connected devices via the "REF OUTPUT 10
MHz" connector.

Warm-up time for OCXO

When the instrument is switched on, the OCXO requires an extended warm-up time.
For details, refer to the specifications document.

4.3.2.19 IF OUT 2 GHz / 5 GHz connector

The female SMA connector is only available for instrument models

FSW26/43/50/67/85. It can be used to provide intermediate frequency (IF) output of
approximately 2 GHz at a frequency of 2 GHz.
Output is activated in the software ([INPUT/OUTPUT] key).
For details, see the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.

4.3.2.20 Labels on FSW

Labels on the casing inform about:

● Personal safety, see "Meaning of safety labels" on page 19
● Product and environment safety, see Table 4-5
● Identification of the product, see Section 4.3.2.21, "Device ID", on page 63
Table 4-5: Labels regarding FSW and environment safety

Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the prod-
uct has come to the end of its service life.
For more information, see "Disposing of electrical and electronic equipment" on page 1560.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 62

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

4.3.2.21 Device ID

The unique device identifier is provided as a barcode sticker on the rear panel of the
FSW.
It consists of the device order number and a serial number.

The serial number is used to define the default instrument name, which is:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example, FSW8-123456.
The instrument name is required to establish a connection to the instrument in a LAN.

4.4 Trying out the instrument

This section introduces the most important functions and settings of the FSW step by
step. The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the FSW
User Manual. Basic instrument operation is described in Section 4.5, "Operating the
instrument", on page 81.

Prerequisites
● The instrument is set up, connected to the mains system, and started up as descri-
bed in Section 4.2, "Preparing for use", on page 27.
For these first measurements, you use the internal calibration signal, so you do not
need any additional signal source or instruments. Try out the following:
● Measuring a basic signal.........................................................................................64
● Displaying a spectrogram........................................................................................65
● Activating additional measurement channels..........................................................67
● Performing sequential measurements.................................................................... 70
● Setting and moving a marker.................................................................................. 71
● Displaying a marker peak list.................................................................................. 72
● Zooming into the display......................................................................................... 73
● Zooming into the display permanently.................................................................... 76
● Saving settings........................................................................................................79
● Printing and saving results...................................................................................... 80

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 63

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

4.4.1 Measuring a basic signal

We will start out by measuring a basic signal, using the internal calibration signal as
the input.

To display the internal 64 MHz calibration signal

1. Press [PRESET] to start out in a defined instrument configuration.

2. Press [Setup] on the front panel.

3. Tap "Service + Support".

4. Tap the "Calibration Signal" tab.

5. Tap the "Calibration Frequency RF" option. Leave the frequency at the default
64 MHz, with a narrowband spectrum.
The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the FSW. By default, a continu-
ous frequency sweep is performed, so that the spectrum of the calibration signal is
now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram.

Figure 4-8: Calibration signal as RF input

Instrument warmup time

Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on. A mes-
sage in the status bar ("Instrument warming up...") indicates that the operating temper-
ature has not yet been reached. Wait until this message is no longer displayed before
you start a measurement to obtain accurate results.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 64

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

To optimize the display

To optimize the display for the calibration signal, we will adjust the main measurement
settings.
1. Set the center frequency to the calibration frequency:
a) Tap "Overview" to display the configuration "Overview".
b) Tap "Frequency".
c) In the "Center" field, enter 64 on the number pad on the front panel.
d) Press "MHz" next to the number pad.

2. Reduce the span to 20 MHz:

a) In the "Span" field of the "Frequency" dialog box, enter 20 MHz.
b) Close the "Frequency" dialog box.

3. Set the reference level to -25 dBm:

a) In the configuration "Overview", tap "Amplitude".
b) In the "Value" field of the "Amplitude" dialog box, enter -25 dBm.
The display of the calibration signal is now improved. The maximum at the center
frequency (=calibration frequency) of 64 MHz becomes visible.

Figure 4-9: Calibration signal with optimized display settings

4.4.2 Displaying a spectrogram

In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" spectrum display, the FSW also
provides a spectrogram display of the measured data. A spectrogram shows how the
spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis shows the frequency, the y-axis
shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 65

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequen-
cies.

1. Tap "Overview" to display the general configuration dialog box.

2. Tap "Display Config".

The SmartGrid mode is activated, and the evaluation bar with the available evalua-
tion methods is displayed.

3.

Drag the "Spectrogram" icon from the evaluation bar to the diagram area. The blue
area indicates that the new diagram would replace the previous spectrum display.
Since we do not want to replace the spectrum, drag the icon to the lower half of the
display to add an additional window instead.

Figure 4-10: Adding a Spectrogram to the display

Drop the icon.

4. Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the "Close" icon at the top right corner of the
toolbar.

You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display. Since the
calibration signal does not change over time, the color of the frequency levels does
not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend at the top of the spectrogram win-
dow describes the power levels the colors represent.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 66

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Figure 4-11: Spectrogram of the calibration signal

4.4.3 Activating additional measurement channels

The FSW features multiple measurement channels, i.e. you can define several mea-
surement configurations in parallel and then switch between the channels automati-
cally to perform the measurements sequentially. We will demonstrate this feature by
activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range, a zero
span measurement, and an I/Q analysis.

To activate additional measurement channels

1. Press [Mode] on the front panel.

2. On the "New Channel" tab of the "Signal + Spectrum Mode" dialog box, tap "Spec-
trum".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 67

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Figure 4-12: Adding a new measurement channel

3. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display:

In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span
to 1 GHz.

Figure 4-13: Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span

4. Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window.

Change the frequency range for this spectrum display:
In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 64 MHz and tap "Zero
Span".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 68

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

As the calibration signal does not vary over time, the level versus time diagram dis-
plays a straight line.

Figure 4-14: Time domain display of the calibration signal

5. Create a new channel for I/Q analysis:

a) Press [Mode].
b) Tap "IQ Analyzer" to activate a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application.
c) Tap "Display Config" to activate the SmartGrid mode.
d) Drag the "Real/Imag (I/Q)" icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid.

Figure 4-15: Inserting a Real/Imag diagram for I/Q analysis

e) Close the SmartGrid mode.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 69

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

The "IQ Analyzer" channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate
windows.

To display the MultiView tab

An overview of all active channels is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always
displayed and cannot be closed.
► Tap the "MultiView" tab.

Figure 4-16: The "MultiView" tab

4.4.4 Performing sequential measurements

Although only one measurement can be performed at any one time, the measurements
configured in the active channels can be performed sequentially, that means: one after
the other, automatically, either once or continuously.

1. Tap the "Sequencer" icon in the toolbar.

2. Toggle "Sequencer" in the "Sequencer" menu to "On".

A continuous sequence is started, i.e. each channel measurement is performed
one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 70

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Figure 4-17: "MultiView" tab with active Sequencer

In Figure 4-17, the "Spectrum 2" measurement is currently active (indicated by the
"channel active" icon in the tab label).

3. Stop the Sequencer by tapping "Sequencer" again.

4.4.5 Setting and moving a marker

Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace. The most
common use is to determine a peak, which is the default setting when you activate a
marker. We will set a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement.

1. In the "MultiView" tab, double-tap the "Spectrum" window (frequency sweep with
spectrogram display) to return to the "Spectrum" channel.

2. Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window.

3. Press "Split/Maximize" on the front panel to maximize the spectrum window, as we

currently do not need the spectrogram display.

4. Press "RUN SINGLE" on the front panel to perform a single sweep so we have a
fixed trace to set a marker on.

5. Press [MKR] on the front panel to display the "Marker" menu.

Marker 1 is activated and automatically set to the maximum of trace 1. The marker
position and value is indicated in the diagram area as M1[1].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 71

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position.
The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and
value change in the marker area of the diagram.

4.4.6 Displaying a marker peak list

The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum
automatically. We will display a marker peak list for the Spectrum 2 channel.

1. Tap the "Spectrum 2" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 72

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

2. Press "RUN SINGLE" on the front panel to perform a single sweep for which we
will determine the peaks.

3. Tap the "SmartGrid" icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode.

4. Drag the "Marker Peak List" icon from the evaluation bar to the lower half of the
display to add a new window for the peak list.

5. Close the SmartGrid mode.

6. To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks, for exam-
ple, define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor:
a) Press [MKR] on the front panel.
b) Tap "Marker Config" in the "Marker" menu.
c) Tap the "Search" tab in the "Marker" dialog box.
d) In the "Threshold" field, enter -68 dBm.
e) Tap the "State" box for "Threshold" to activate its use.
Only peaks that are larger than -68 dBm will be included in the peak list.
The marker peak list displays the determined peaks that are above the defined
threshold.

Figure 4-18: Marker Peak List

4.4.7 Zooming into the display

To analyze the areas around the peak levels in more detail, we will zoom into the top 3
peaks.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 73

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

1. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar.

The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active.

2. Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of
the zoom area. A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to
the current position.

Figure 4-19: Defining the zoom area

When you remove your finger, the zoom area is enlarged in a second (sub-)win-
dow.

Figure 4-20: Zoomed display around a peak

3. In Figure 4-20, the enlarged peak is represented by a very thick trace. This is due
to the insufficient number of sweep points. The missing sweep points for the
zoomed display are interpolated, which provides poor results. To optimize the
results, we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to
32001.
a) Press [Sweep] on the front panel.
b) Tap "Sweep Config" in the "Sweep" menu.
c) In the "Sweep Points" field, enter 32001.
d) Press RUN SINGLE on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the
increased number of sweep points.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 74

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Figure 4-21: Zoomed peak with increased number of sweep points

Note that the trace becomes much more precise.

4. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around
markers M4, M5 and M6.

Figure 4-22: Multiple zoom windows

5. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around
marker M8.

6. To increase the size of the third zoom window, drag the "splitter" between the win-
dows to the left or right or up or down.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 75

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

Figure 4-23: Enlarged zoom window

4.4.8 Zooming into the display permanently

The zoomed results from Section 4.4.7, "Zooming into the display", on page 73 were
only graphical changes to the display. Now we would like to change the measurement
settings such that the zoomed result is maintained permanently. We will demonstrate
this in the Spectrum channel.

1. Tap the "Spectrum" tab.

2. Double-tap the diagram close to the peak of the measurement.

A peak marker (M1) is inserted at the detected peak.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 76

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

3. Select the (graphical) zoom icon on the toolbar.

Any subsequent touch gestures define the zoom area for the zoom display.

4. Place two fingers on the diagram, to the left and right of the marker, and stretch
them apart.

The area around the marker is enlarged in the result display.

5. When the area has the size you require, remove your fingers from the display.
The displayed span and the number of displayed sweep points is smaller than
before, all other measurement settings remain unchanged.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 77

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

6. Tap the "Measurement Zoom" icon on the toolbar for a second or so.
A context menu with further options is displayed.

7. Select "Adapt Hardware to Zoom (selected diagram)".

The span of the measurement is changed, and due to the automatic coupling of the
span to the sweep time, RBW and VBW, those values are also changed. The num-
ber of sweep points is restored to the default 1001. The range of the trace is the
same as in the graphical zoom. However, due to the smaller RBW filter, the peak is
narrower.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 78

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

4.4.9 Saving settings

To restore the results of our measurements later, we will store the instrument settings
to a file.

To save the instrument settings to a file

1. Tap the "Save" icon in the toolbar.

2. Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the on-screen keyboard, as
you will have to enter text in the next step.

3. In the "Save" dialog box, tap the "File Name" field and enter MyMultiViewSetup
using the external or onscreen keyboard.
Keep the default "File Type" setting "Instrument with all Channels" to store the con-
figuration of all channels.

Figure 4-24: Saving the instrument settings to a file

4. Tap "Save".
The file MyMultiViewSetup.dfl is stored in the default directory C:/R_S/
instr/user.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 79

FSW Getting Started
Trying out the instrument

To load stored instrument settings

You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file.
1. Press [PRESET] to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that
the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards.

2. Tap the "Load" icon in the toolbar.

3. In the "Load" dialog box, select the MyMultiViewSetup.dfl file in the default
directory C:/R_S/instr/user.

4. Tap the "Load" button.

All instrument settings are restored and the display should resemble Figure 4-23,
which shows the instrument display right before the settings were stored.

4.4.10 Printing and saving results

Finally, after a successful measurement, we will document our results. First we will
export the numeric trace data, then we will create a screenshot of the graphical display.

To export the trace data

1. Press [TRACE] on the front panel.

2. Tap "Trace Config".

3. Tap the "Trace Export" tab.

4. Tap "Export Trace to ASCII File".

5. Enter the file name MyPeakResults using the external or onscreen keyboard.
The trace data is stored to MyPeakResults.DAT

To create a screenshot of the display

1. Tap the "Print immediately" icon in the toolbar.
A screenshot of the current display is created. Note that the colors on the screen
are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results.

2. In the "Save Hardcopy as Portable Network Graphics (PNG)" dialog box, enter a
file name, e.g. MyPeakDisplay.
The screenshot is stored to MyPeakDisplay.png.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 80

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Figure 4-25: Screenshot of the current display

4.5 Operating the instrument

This section provides an overview on how to work with the FSW.

Remote control
In addition to working with the FSW interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is
also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote
control are supported:
● Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network
● Using the web browser interface in a LAN network
● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network
● Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the FSW user manual.

● Understanding the display information....................................................................82

● Accessing the functionality......................................................................................91
● Changing the focus................................................................................................. 96
● Entering data...........................................................................................................96
● Touchscreen gestures............................................................................................. 99
● Displaying results.................................................................................................. 102
● Getting help...........................................................................................................109

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 81

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

4.5.1 Understanding the display information

The following figure shows a measurement diagram in Spectrum mode. All different
information areas are labeled. They are explained in more detail in the following sec-
tions.

1 2 3

5 4

1 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings

2 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information
3 = Diagram area with marker information
4 = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display
5 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application

Hiding elements in the display

You can hide some of the elements in the display, for example the status bar or chan-
nel bar, to enlarge the display area for the measurement results. ("Setup > Display >
Displayed Items")
For details, see the FSW User Manual.

● Channel bar.............................................................................................................83
● Window title bar.......................................................................................................87
● Marker information.................................................................................................. 88
● Frequency and span information in diagram footer.................................................89
● Instrument and status information...........................................................................89
● Error information..................................................................................................... 90

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 82

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

4.5.1.1 Channel bar

Using the FSW you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels) at the
same time, although they can only be performed asynchronously. For each channel, a
separate tab is displayed on the screen. To switch from one channel display to another,
simply select the corresponding tab.

If many tabs are displayed, select the tab selection list icon at the right end of the chan-
nel bar. Select the channel you want to switch to from the list.

MultiView tab
An additional tab labeled "MultiView" provides an overview of all active channels at a
glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each individual window contains its own channel bar
with an additional button. Tap this button, or double-tap in any window, to switch to the
corresponding channel display quickly.

Icons in the channel bar

The yellow star icon on the tab label (sometimes referred to as a "dirty flag") indi-
cates that invalid or inconsistent data is displayed, that is: the trace no longer matches
the displayed instrument settings. For example, after you change the measurement
bandwidth, the displayed trace is still based on the old bandwidth. As soon as a new
measurement is performed or the display is updated, the icon disappears.
The icon indicates that an error or warning is available for that measurement chan-
nel. This is particularly useful if the MultiView tab is displayed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 83

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

"IQ" in the channel tab indicates that the results for the channel no longer match the
data currently in the capture buffer.
In MSRA mode, the results in an MSRA secondary application no longer match the
data captured by the MSRA primary application. The "IQ" disappears after you refresh
the results in the outdated application.
For applications using a long capture buffer, this icon appears if you switch channels.
The icon disappears after you switch back to the application and perform a new mea-
surement.
The icon indicates the currently active channel during an automatic measurement
sequence ("Sequencer" functionality).

Channel-specific settings
Beneath the channel name, information on channel-specific settings for the measure-
ment is displayed in the "channel bar". Channel information varies depending on the
active application.
In the Spectrum application, the FSW shows the following settings:
Table 4-6: Channel settings displayed in the channel bar in the Spectrum application

"Ref Level" Reference level

"m.+el.Att" Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation

"SAN: Att" Analyzer attenuation when using an (optional) external frontend

"ExtFE: Att" External frontend attenuation when measuring external frontend input.

"Ref Offset" Reference level offset

"SWT" Sweep time

If the sweep time does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a bullet is displayed in front of the field. The color of the bullet turns red if
the sweep time is set below the value for automatic coupling. In addition,
the UNCAL flag is shown. In this case, the sweep time must be increased.
For FFT sweeps, an estimated duration for data capture and processing is
indicated behind the sweep time in the channel bar.

"Meas Time"/"AQT" Measurement (acquisition) time, calculated from analysis bandwidth and
number of samples (for statistics measurements)

"RBW" Resolution bandwidth that has been set.

(CISPR) indicates that a CISPR bandwidth filter is being used, e.g. due to
an active CISPR trace detector.
For details, see Section 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types",
on page 337.
If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet appears in front of the field.

"VBW" Video bandwidth that has been set.

If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling,
a green bullet is displayed in front of the field.

"AnBW" Analysis bandwidth (for statistics measurements)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 84

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

"Compatible" Compatible device mode (FSP, FSU, default; default not displayed)

"Mode" Indicates which sweep mode type is selected:

● "Auto FFT": automatically selected FFT sweep mode
● "Auto sweep": automatically selected swept sweep mode
● "Sweep": manually selected frequency sweep mode
● "FFT": manually selected FFT sweep mode

Icons for individual settings

A bullet next to the setting indicates that user-defined settings are used, not automatic
settings. A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is correct. A
red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not provide useful results.

Common settings
The channel bar above the diagram not only displays the channel-specific settings. It
also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results
even though it is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values.
This information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current mea-
surement, as opposed to the channel-specific settings that are always displayed.

The following types of information are displayed, if applicable.

Table 4-7: Common settings displayed in the channel bar

"SGL" The sweep is set to single sweep mode.

"Sweep Count" The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse-
quent sweeps
(see "Sweep Count" setting in "Sweep settings" in the User Manual)

"TRG" Trigger source

(for details see "Trigger settings" in the User Manual)
● "BBP": Baseband power (with Digital Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B17 only)
● "EXT": External
● "GP_0": General purpose bit (with Digital Baseband Interface R&S FSW-B17 only)
● "IFP": IF power (+trigger bandwidth)
● "PSE": Power sensor
● "RFP": RF power
● "SQL": Squelch
● "TIM": Time
● "VID": Video

"6dB"/"RRC"/"C Filter type for sweep bandwidth

HN" See "Filter Type" on page 348

"PA"/"Ext PA" The preamplifier is activated. / Data compensation is performed using data from the
(optional) external preamplifier.

"GAT" The frequency sweep is controlled via the TRIGGER INPUT connector.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 85

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

"TDF" The specified transducer factor is activated.

"75 Ω" The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Ω.

"FRQ" A frequency offset ≠ 0 Hz is set.

"DC/AC" DC or AC coupling is used for the input.

"ExtMix" An external mixer is activated for input (requires option R&S FSW-B21); the used band is
<band> also indicated

"Ext. Gen" The FSW is controlling an external generator (requires option R&S FSW-B10).
<"NOR" | "NOR": the measurements are normalized with the results of the external generator cali-
"APX"> bration
"APX" (approximation): the measurements are normalized with the results of the external
generator calibration; however, the measurement settings have been changed since cali-
bration
If neither label is displayed, no calibration has been performed yet or normalization is not
active.
For details, see Section 7.2.4, "Optional external generator control", on page 377.

"Inp:ExtFe" An external frontend is active (requires option R&S FSW-K553); the used frequency
"IF High" / "IF band configuration is indicated for reference.
Low" / "Spur See "Frequency Band Configuration" on page 454.
optimized" /
"EVM opti-
mized" / <IF
frequency
range> /
"Shared LO"

"LO EXT" The frontend uses an external LO signal.

"LO EXT" The frontend uses an external LO signal.

"IFCorr" IF cable correction for an active external frontend is enabled and a valid correction file is
available.

"LVL" A level offset is applied to the external generator signal (only if external generator control
is active).

"Inp: Input 2" For FSW85 models with two RF input connectors only: the second input connector "RF2"
is the current input source for the channel

"B2000" A connected oscilloscope is being used to acquire data with up to 2 GHz bandwidth
(requires bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B2000)

"B5000" A connected oscilloscope is being used to acquire data with up to 5 GHz bandwidth
(requires bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B5000)

Changing the Channel Name

The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name already
exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the measurement
channel by double-tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new name.
For an overview of default names, see INSTrument:LIST? on page 902.
Note: Channel name restrictions. Channel names can have a maximum of 31 charac-
ters, and must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In particu-
lar, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 86

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Remote command:
INSTrument:REName on page 905

4.5.1.2 Window title bar

Each channel in the FSW display can contain several windows. Each window can dis-
play either a graph or a table as a result of the channel measurement. Which type of
result evaluation is displayed in which window is defined in the display configuration
(see Section 4.5.6, "Displaying results", on page 102). The window title bar indicates
which type of evaluation is displayed.

Double-tap the window title bar to enlarge the window temporarily. Double-tap it again
to restore the original size.
See also Section 4.5.6.4, "Switching between a split and maximized window display",
on page 108.

Trace information in window title bar

Information on the displayed traces is indicated in the window title bar.

1 2 3 4 5

(1) Trace color Color of trace display in diagram

(2) Trace no. Trace number (1 to 6)

(3) Detector Selected detector:

AP AUTOPEAK detector

Pk MAX PEAK detector

Mi MIN PEAK detector

Sa SAMPLE detector

Av AVERAGE detector

Rm RMS detector

QP QUASIPEAK detector

(4) Trace Mode Sweep mode:

Clrw CLEAR/WRITE

Max MAX HOLD

Min MIN HOLD

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 87

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Avg AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr)

View VIEW

(5) Smoothing factor Smth Smoothing factor, if enabled.

(See "Smoothing" on page 627)

Norm/NCor Correction data is not used.

4.5.1.3 Marker information

Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table,
depending on the configuration.

Marker information in diagram grid

Within the diagram grid, the x-axis and y-axis positions of the last two markers or delta
markers that were set are displayed, if available, as well as their index. The value in
the square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned.
(Example: M2[1] defines marker 2 on trace 1.) For more than two markers, a separate
marker table is displayed beneath the diagram by default.

Marker information in marker table

In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:

Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal), PWR (power sensor)

Ref Reference (for delta markers)

Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned

X-value X-value of the marker

Y-value Y-value of the marker

Func Activated marker or measurement function

Func .Result Result of the active marker or measurement function

The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations:

FXD Fixed reference marker

PHNoise Phase noise measurement

CNT Signal count

TRK Signal tracking

NOIse Noise measurement

MDepth AM modulation depth

TOI Third order intercept measurement

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 88

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

4.5.1.4 Frequency and span information in diagram footer

The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current
application, measurement, and result display.
For a default measurement in the "Spectrum" mode, the "Diagram" result display con-
tains the following information, for example:
Table 4-8: Frequency domain display

Label Information

CF / Span Center frequency / Frequency span

or or
none (first / last Start frequency / Stop frequency
value) (Depending on how the range was defined)

Pts Number of sweep points or (rounded) number of currently displayed points in zoom
mode

MHz/ Span per division

Table 4-9: Time domain display

Label Information

CF Center frequency

Pts Number of sweep points or (rounded) number of currently displayed points in zoom
mode

ms/ Time per division

4.5.1.5 Instrument and status information

Global instrument settings and functions, the instrument status and any irregularities
are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram.

In the MultiView tab, the status bar always displays the information for the currently
selected measurement.
The following information is displayed:

Instrument status

The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference.

The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used for digital
input
For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the FSW I/Q Ana-
lyzer User Manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 89

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used to provide
digital output.
For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the FSW I/Q Ana-
lyzer User Manual.

The optional Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSW-B517) is being
IQ 40G
used to provide digital output.
For details on the Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector, see the FSW I/Q
Analyzer User Manual.

Progress
The progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar.

In the MultiView tab, the progress bar indicates the status of the currently selected
measurement, not the measurement a Sequencer is currently performing, for example.

Date and time

The date and time settings of the instrument are displayed in the status bar.

4.5.1.6 Error information

If errors or irregularities are detected, a keyword and an error message, if available,

are displayed in the status bar.

Depending on the type of message, the status message is indicated in varying colors.
Table 4-10: Status bar information - color coding

Color Type Description

Red Error An error occurred at the start or during a measurement, e.g. due to missing
data or wrong settings, so that the measurement cannot be started or com-
pleted correctly.

Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement, e.g. the settings no lon-
ger match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was
interrupted temporarily.

Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps.

No color No errors No message displayed - normal operation.

Green Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show-
successful ing a message.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 90

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed

next to the channel name ( ). This is particularly useful when the MultiView tab is dis-
played, as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the
currently selected channel only.

For a description of possible errors, see the FSW user manual.

4.5.2 Accessing the functionality

You can operate all instrument functions using this user interface.
For most tasks, there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them:
● Using the touchscreen
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
arrow and position keys.
The measurement and instrument functions and settings can be accessed by selecting
one of the following elements:
● System and function keys on the front panel of the instrument
● Softkeys on the touchscreen
● Context menus for specific elements on the touchscreen
● Icons on the tool bar in the touchscreen
● Displayed setting on the touchscreen

4.5.2.1 Toolbar

Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at thetop of the
screen.

You can hide the toolbar display, e.g. when using remote control, to enlarge the display
area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items"). See the FSW
User Manual for details.

The following functions are available by default:

Table 4-11: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar

Icon Description

Windows: displays the Windows "Start" menu and task bar

Open: opens a file from the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 91

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Icon Description

Store: stores data on the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu)

Print: defines print settings ("Print" menu)

Report Menu:
Displays the "Report" menu to configure a report.
See Section 10.6, "Working with test reports", on page 712.

Undo: reverts last operation

Redo: repeats previously reverted operation

Selection mode: the cursor can be used to select (and move) markers in a zoomed display
(This function is only available and required for older instruments that do not support multi-touch
gestures.)

Measurement zoom: applies to the next display you select;

Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; the
selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram with adapted measurement settings which dis-
plays the selected extract of the trace.
Also provides a context menu to determine the firmware behavior for touch gestures:
● "Level Lock"
(Default:) The reference level (and thus the attenuation) remains unchanged during touch
gestures on the screen.
● "X-Lock"
The x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
● "Y-Lock"
The y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch gestures.
● "Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)"
Automatically adapts the measurement settings to the currently zoomed display

(Graphical) Zoom mode: applies to the next display you select;

Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; the
selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace.
This function changes the behavior of finger gestures such as dragging or stretching a finger
(see also "Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings" on page 101)

Multiple (graphical) zoom mode: applies to the next display you select;
Allows you to enlarge several different areas of the trace simultaneously.
Displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area; a
subwindow is added to display an enlarged extract of the trace
This function changes the behavior of finger gestures such as dragging or stretching a finger
(see also "Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings" on page 101)

Zoom off: displays the diagram in its original size

This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms, for which mea-
surement settings were adapted, remain untouched.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 92

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Icon Description

Data shift: Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display and re-evaluates the new data.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.

Data zoom: Decreases the amount of data to be evaluated in the result display and re-evaluates
the new data, thus enlarging the display of the remaining data.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.

SmartGrid: activates "SmartGrid" mode to configure the screen layout

Sequencer: opens the "Sequencer" menu to perform consecutive measurements

SCPI Recorder: opens a dialog to record SCPI commands during operation

Event based actions manager: opens a dialog to configure actions based on specific events
For details see Section 8.7, "Event-based actions", on page 662.

Application starter: opens a dialog to start an external application directly from the FSW firm-
ware.
For details see Section 11.3, "Application starter", on page 751.
To return to the FSW window, use the [Alt]+[Tab] keys.

Help (+ Select): allows you to select an object for which context-specific help is displayed

Help: displays context-sensitive help topic for currently selected element

Report New: Deletes all currently stored datasets and creates a new one.
See Section 10.6, "Working with test reports", on page 712.

Report Append: Adds a new dataset to the existing ones for the next test report.
See Section 10.6, "Working with test reports", on page 712.

Print immediately: prints the current display (screenshot) as configured

In "SmartGrid" mode only:

Exit "SmartGrid" mode

4.5.2.2 Softkeys

Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 93

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Softkeys are dynamic, i.e. depending on the selected function key, a different list of
softkeys is displayed on the right side of the screen.
A list of softkeys for a certain function key is also called a menu. Softkeys can either
perform a specific function or open a dialog box.
The "More" softkey indicates that the menu contains more softkeys than can be dis-
played at once on the screen. When pressed, it displays the next set of softkeys.

Recognizing the softkey status by color

Color Meaning

Orange Associated dialog box is open

Blue Associated function is active; for toggle keys: currently active state

Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option

You can hide the softkey display, e.g. when using remote control, to enlarge the display
area for the measurement results ("Setup > Display > Displayed Items"). See the User
Manual for details.

4.5.2.3 Context menus

Several items in the diagram area have context menus, such as traces, markers, soft-
keys, or settings in the channel bar. If you right-click on one of these items (or tap it for
about 1 second), a menu is displayed with context-specific menu items for the selected
item.
If SCPI Recording is available, the context menu contains a link to the SCPI recorder
functions and a link to a help topic for the specific item.
For details, see Section 12.5.1, "The context-sensitive SCPI command menu",
on page 842.

Figure 4-26: Context menu for a result display with SCPI Recorder functions

If SCPI Recorder functions are not available, for example for channel bar settings or in
some applications, the context menu contains functions for the selected item. These

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 94

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

functions correspond to the functions also provided for the item in softkey menus. This
is useful, for example, when the softkey display is hidden.

Figure 4-27: Context menu for channel bar setting

4.5.2.4 On-screen keyboard

The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with-
out having to connect an external keyboard.

The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On-
Screen Keyboard" function key beneath the screen.

When you press this key, the display switches between the following options:
● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen
● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen
● No keyboard displayed

You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field
to another in dialog boxes.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 95

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

4.5.3 Changing the focus

Any interaction using the keypad, scrollbar or knobs always affects the currently
focused element in the display, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. The currently
focused element is indicated by a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise
highlighted (softkey, marker etc.). To move the focus, select the element on the touch-
screen.
To move the focus between any displayed diagrams or tables in a window, press
"Change focus" on the front panel. The focus moves from the diagram to the first table
to the next table etc. and then back to the diagram, within the same window.
In fullscreen mode, where a single window is displayed in full size on the screen, this
key switches the focus (and the display) from one active window to the next.

4.5.4 Entering data

You can enter data in dialog boxes using any of the following methods:
● Using the touchscreen, via the on-screen keyboard
● Using other elements provided by the front panel, e.g. the keypad, rotary knob, or
navigation keys
The rotary knob acts like the [ENTER] key when it is pressed.
● Using a connected external keyboard

Transparent dialog boxes

You can change the transparency of the dialog boxes to see the results in the windows
behind the dialog box. Thus, you can see the effects that the changes you make to the
settings have on the results immediately.
To change the transparency, select the transparency icon at the top of the dialog box.
A slider is displayed. To hide the slider, select the transparency icon again.

(The title bar of the dialog box is always slightly transparent and is not affected by the
slider.)

Particularities in Windows dialog boxes

In some cases, e.g. if you want to install a printer, original Windows dialog boxes are
used. In these dialog boxes, the rotary knob and function keys do not work. Use the
touchscreen instead.

4.5.4.1 Entering numeric parameters

If a field requires numeric input, the keypad provides only numbers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 96

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

1. Enter the parameter value using the keypad, or change the currently used parame-
ter value by using the rotary knob (small steps) or the [UP] or [DOWN] keys (large
steps).

2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key.
The unit is added to the entry.

3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing
[ENTER] or any of the unit keys.
The editing line is highlighted to confirm the entry.

Digit-based data entry

By default, when you enter a numeric value in an input field, you overwrite the existing
value. If you edit the value using the arrow keys or rotary knob, the value is increased
or decreased linearly. An extended digit-based data entry mode allows you to edit indi-
vidual digits and change the unit quickly.

1. In the input field for a numeric value, select the pencil icon to switch to extended
data entry mode.

2. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the individual digits of the indica-
ted value.

3. Change the required digit using the up and down arrow keys or the rotary knob to
scroll through the values 0 to 9.
The new value is applied immediately, without further confirmation.
Note:
● If you enter a digit using the keypad, the entire value is overwritten, as in nor-
mal data entry mode.
● To add a digit to the existing value, you must return to normal data entry mode.
Select the pencil icon to toggle between entry modes.
4. To change the unit:
a) Press the right arrow key and scroll past the last digit to select the unit list.
b) Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the available units.
c) Press the left arrow key to return to the last digit of the numeric value.
The new unit is applied immediately, without further confirmation.

5. Select the "X" to close the input field.

4.5.4.2 Entering alphanumeric parameters

If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter
numbers and (special) characters (see Section 4.5.2.4, "On-screen keyboard",
on page 95).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 97

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Alternatively, you can use the keypad. Every alphanumeric key represents several
characters and one number. The decimal point key (.) represents special characters,
and the sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment,
refer to Table 4-12.

You can change the default behavior of the keypad for text input. This is useful if you
frequently enter numeric values in text fields, for example to define file names consist-
ing of numbers.
For details, see "Number block behavior" on page 795.

To enter numbers and (special) characters via the keypad

1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value.

2. All characters available via this key are displayed.

3. To choose another value provided by this key, press the key again, until your
desired value is displayed.

4. With every key stroke, the next possible value of this key is displayed. If all possi-
ble values have been displayed, the series starts with the first value again. For
information on the series, refer to Table 4-12.

5. To change from capital to small letters and vice versa, press the sign key (-).

6. When you have chosen the desired value, wait for 2 seconds (to use the same key
again), or start the next entry by pressing another key.

To enter a blank
► Press the "Space" bar, or press "0" and wait 2 seconds.

To correct an entry
1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete.

2. Press [BACKSPACE].
The entry to the left of the cursor is deleted.

3. Enter your correction.

To complete the entry

► Press [ENTER] or the rotary knob.

To abort the entry

► Press [ESC].
The dialog box is closed without changing the settings.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 98

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Table 4-12: Keys for alphanumeric parameters

Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided

(upper inscription)

7 7µΩ°€¥$¢

8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç

9 DEF9É

4 GHI4

5 JKL5

6 MNO6ŇÖ

1 PQRS1

2 TUV2Ü

3 WXYZ3

0 <blank> 0 – @ + / \ < > = % &

. .*:_,;"'?()#

– <toggles between capital and small letters>

4.5.5 Touchscreen gestures

A touchscreen allows you to interact with the software using various finger gestures on
the screen. The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are
described here. Further actions using the same gestures may be possible.
Tapping
Touch the screen quickly, usually on a specific element.
You can tap most elements on the screen; in particular, any elements you can also
click on with a mouse pointer.

Figure 4-28: Tapping

Double-tapping
Tap the screen twice, in quick succession.
Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to
restore the original size.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 99

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Dragging
Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on
the display the whole time.
By dragging your finger over a table or diagram you can pan the displayed area of the
table or diagram to show results that were previously out of view.

Figure 4-29: Dragging

Pinching and spreading two fingers

Move two fingers together on the display (pinch) or move two fingers apart on the dis-
play (spread).
When you pinch two fingers in the display, you decrease the size of the currently dis-
played area, showing the surrounding areas previously out of view.
When you spread two fingers in the display, you increase the size of the currently dis-
played area, showing more details.
You can pinch or spread your fingers vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. The direction
in which you move your fingers determines which dimension of the display is changed.

Figure 4-30: Pinching

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 100

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Figure 4-31: Spreading

Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings

When you change the display using touch gestures, the corresponding measurement
settings are adapted. This is different to selecting an area on the screen in zoom
mode, where merely the resolution of the displayed trace points is changed temporarily
(graphical zoom).

For example:
● Dragging horizontally in a spectrum display changes the center frequency.
● Dragging vertically in a power vs frequency (spectrum) or power vs. time display
changes the reference level (for absolute scaling) or the min and max power val-
ues (for relative scaling).
● Dragging horizontally in a time domain display changes the trigger offset value (if
available, not in free run).
● Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span
(horizontal) or reference level and range (vertical), or a combination of these set-
tings (diagonal).
● Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the sweep time and trigger
offset (horizontal) or reference level position and range (vertical), or a combination
of these settings (diagonal).
You can prevent the firmware from changing specific settings using the options in the
context menu for the measurement zoom icon. By default, the reference level is locked
and thus not changed automatically due to touch gestures.
(See "Measurement Zoom" on page 545).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 101

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Mouse vs. touch actions

Any user interface elements that react to actions by a mouse pointer also react to fin-
ger gestures on the screen, and vice versa. The following touch actions correspond to
mouse actions:
Table 4-13: Correlation of mouse and touch actions

Mouse operation Touch operation

Click Tap

Double-click Double-tap

Click and hold Touch and hold

Right-click Touch, hold for 1 second and release

Drag-&-drop (= click and hold, then drag and Touch, then drag and release
release)

n.a. (Change hardware settings) Spread and pinch two fingers

Mouse wheel to scroll up or down Swipe

Dragging scrollbars to scroll up or down, left or right Swipe

In (graphical) Zoom mode only: dragging the bor- Touch, then drag and release
ders of the displayed rectangle to change its size

Example:
You can scroll through a long table in conventional mouse operation by clicking in the
table's scrollbar repeatedly. In touch operation, you would scroll through the table by
dragging the table up and down with your finger.

4.5.6 Displaying results

The FSW provides several instrument applications for different analysis tasks and dif-
ferent types of signals, e.g. 3G FDD, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. For each
application, a new measurement channel is created and displayed in a separate tab on
the screen.
The results of a measurement channel can be evaluated in many different ways, both
graphically and numerically. For each evaluation method the results are displayed in a
separate window in the tab.
The FSW allows you to configure the display to suit your specific requirements and
optimize analysis.

4.5.6.1 Activating and deactivating channels

When you activate an application, a new measurement channel is created which deter-
mines the measurement settings for that application. The same application can be acti-
vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 102

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

application. Whenever you switch channels, the corresponding measurement settings

are restored. Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen.
An additional tab ("MultiView") provides an overview of all currently active channels at
once.
Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently
active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecu-
tively, a Sequencer function is provided.

To start a new channel

1. Select [Mode].

2. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the required application on the "New Channel" tab.
A new tab is displayed for the new channel.

Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 901/ INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate
on page 901

To change the application in an active channel

1. Select the tab of the channel you want to change.

2. Select [Mode].

3. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the new application to be displayed on the
"Replace Current Channel" tab.
The selected application is displayed in the current channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 103

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 902

To close a measurement channel

►

Select the "Close" icon on the tab of the measurement channel.

The tab is closed, any running measurements are aborted, and all results for that
channel are deleted.

Remote command:
INSTrument:DELete on page 902

4.5.6.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid

Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a
separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per
channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde &
Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the
SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different
layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
● Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both.
● Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns.
● Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well.
● All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons
than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same
evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously.
● New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to
the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval-
uation icon in relation to the existing windows.
● All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When Smart-
Grid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu dis-
play. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu
display is restored.
● Background information: the smartgrid principle...................................................105
● How to activate smartgrid mode............................................................................106
● How to add a new result window...........................................................................106
● How to close a result window................................................................................107
● How to arrange the result windows....................................................................... 107

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 104

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Background information: the smartgrid principle

SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors
and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where
you drop the window determines its position on the screen.

Figure 4-32: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode

The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which
the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win-
dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate
the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows:
above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 4-33). If an existing win-
dow would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.

Positioning the window

The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four
columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows
always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A
single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can
be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if
the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 105

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

1
A

B 2 3 2 3 2

C
1

Figure 4-33: SmartGrid window positions

1 = Insert row above or below the existing row

2 = Create a new column in the existing row
3 = Replace a window in the existing row

SmartGrid functions
Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and
move functions.
The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the
size and position of the other displayed windows.

The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remain-
ing windows.

How to activate smartgrid mode

All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid
mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the Smart-
Grid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.

► To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:

●

Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar.

● Select "Display Config" in the configuration "Overview".
● Select "Display Config" from the [Meas Config] menu.
The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.

To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu, select the
"Close" icon, or press any key.

How to add a new result window

Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows
can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 106

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

1. Activate SmartGrid mode.

All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar.

2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar.
If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the
screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons
and move it up or down until the required icon appears.

3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed
in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See "How to arrange the
result windows" on page 107 for more information on positioning the window).

Remote command:
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 1107

How to close a result window

► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the
window.

Remote command:
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 1105 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
on page 1108

How to arrange the result windows

1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation
window.

2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid.

A blue area shows where the window will be placed.

3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue.

4. Drop the window in the target area.

The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons
are displayed in each window.

5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 107

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 1105 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace
on page 1108
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 1105

4.5.6.3 Changing the size of windows

Each channel tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results
using different methods. A "splitter" allows you to change the size of neighboring win-
dows.

The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode.

► To change the size of two neighboring windows, drag the splitter between the win-
dows in either direction.

4.5.6.4 Switching between a split and maximized window display

To get an overview of the results, displaying several windows at the same time may be
helpful. However, the individual windows may become rather small. In this case it is
useful to maximize an individual window to the entire screen temporarily in order to
analyze the results in more detail.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 108

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

To switch between a split and a maximized display without having to close and re-open
windows, press [SPLIT/MAXIMIZE] on the front panel. In maximized display, the cur-
rently focused window is maximized. In split display, all active windows are displayed.
Alternatively, double-tap the title bar of a window to maximize it.

4.5.6.5 Changing the display

The display can be optimized for your individual needs. The following display functions
are available and are described in detail in Section 11.2, "Display settings",
on page 736 and Section 8, "Common analysis and display functions", on page 536.
● Displaying a simulation of the entire front panel of the instrument on the screen
("Front Panel")
● Displaying the main function hardkeys in a separate window on the screen ("Mini
Front Panel")
● Hiding or showing various screen elements
● Selecting a display theme and colors
● Changing the display update rate
● Activating or deactivating the touch-sensitivity of the screen
● Zooming into the diagram

4.5.7 Getting help

If any questions or problems concerning the FSW arise, an extensive online help sys-
tem is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time. The help system
is context-sensitive and provides information specifically for the current operation or
setting to be performed. In addition, general topics provide an overview on complete
tasks or function groups as well as background information.
The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the "Help" icons on the
toolbar or by pressing [F1] on an external or the on-screen keyboard.

To call context-sensitive help

► To display the "Help" dialog box for the currently focused screen element, e.g. a
softkey or a setting in an opened dialog box, select the "Help" icon on the toolbar.

The "Help" dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about
the focused screen element is displayed.
If no context-specific help topic is available, a more general topic or the "Content"
tab is displayed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 109

FSW Getting Started
Operating the instrument

For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no context-
sensitive help is available.

To display a help topic for a screen element not currently focused

1. Select the "Help pointer" icon on the toolbar.

The pointer changes its shape to a "?" and an arrow.

2. Select the screen element to change the focus.

A topic containing information about the selected (now focused) screen element is
displayed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 110

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes

5 Applications, measurement channels, and

operating modes
The FSW allows you to perform all sorts of different analysis tasks on different types of
signals, e.g. W-CDMA, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. Depending on the task
or type of signal, a different set of measurement functions and parameters are
required. Therefore, the FSW provides various applications - some of which are inclu-
ded in the base unit, others are optional. The default application when you start the
FSW is "Spectrum", for basic spectrum analysis measurements on any type of signal.
For each application, a separate measurement channel is created, which determines
the measurement settings for that application. The same application can be activated
with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same applica-
tion. Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen.

The maximum number of measurement channels may be limited by the available

memory on the instrument.

Measurements
Depending on the task, the application can provide different measurement functions.
The measurement function determines which settings, functions and evaluation meth-
ods are available in the FSW. Only one measurement can be performed at the same
time within the same application instance. You select the measurement for an applica-
tion via the [MEAS] key.
In the Spectrum application, for example, the FSW provides a variety of different mea-
surement functions, including:
● Frequency sweep or zero span measurement
● Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal
in time domain
● Power measurements - calculate the powers involved in modulated carrier signals
● Emission measurements - detect unwanted signal emission
● Statistic measurements - evaluate the spectral distribution of the signal
● Further measurements - provide characteristic values of the signal
● EMI measurements - detect electromagnetic interference in the signal
The individual functions are described in detail in Section 6, "Measurements and
results", on page 129.
The individual functions are described in detail in the FSW User Manual.

Operating modes
By default, each application operates independently of the others, measuring and ana-
lyzing its own distinct data. However, the FSW also provides other operating modes, in
which the individual applications are correlated and analyze the same set of data.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 111

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes

Signal and Spectrum Analyzer Mode

With the conventional FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, you can perform
several different measurements almost simultaneously. However, the individual mea-
surements are independent of each other - each application captures and evaluates
its own set of data, regardless of what the other applications do.
In some cases it may be useful to analyze the exact same input data using different
applications. For example, imagine capturing data from a base station and analyzing
the RF spectrum in the Analog Demodulation application. If a spur or an unexpected
peak occurs, you may want to analyze the same data in the I/Q Analyzer to see the
real and imaginary components of the signal and thus detect the reason for the irregu-
lar signal. Normally when you switch to a different application, evaluation is performed
on the data that was captured by that application, and not the previous one. In our
example that would mean the irregular signal would be lost. Therefore, a second oper-
ating mode is available in the FSW: Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer (MSRA) mode.

Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer mode

In Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer (MSRA) mode, data acquisition is performed once
as an I/Q measurement in a primary application, and the captured data is then evalu-
ated by any number of secondary applications for different radio standards. Data
acquisition and global configuration settings are controlled globally, while the evalua-
tion and display settings can be configured individually for each secondary application.
Using the Multi-Standard Radio Analyzer, unwanted correlations between different sig-
nal components using different transmission standards can be detected. Thus, for
example, an irregularity in a GSM burst can be examined closer in the FSW 3G FDD
BTS (W-CDMA) secondary application to reveal dependencies like a change in the
EVM value.

Multi-Standard Real-Time mode

In order to combine the advantages of the MSRA mode with its correlated measure-
ments and the gapless results and frequency mask provided by real-time measure-
ments, a third operating mode has been introduced: the Multi-Standard Real-Time
(MSRT) mode. This operating mode is only available if one of the real-time options
(R&S FSW-K160RE/-B160R/-B512R/-U160R/-U512R) is installed.
In this operating mode, data acquisition is performed once as a real-time measure-
ment, and the captured data is then evaluated by any number of secondary applica-
tions. Thus, a real-time measurement triggered with a frequency mask can be per-
formed, and the results can be evaluated in the VSA secondary application, for exam-
ple, to detect the cause of a frequency exception.

Distinct operating modes

Although the applications themselves are identical in all operating modes, the handling
of the data between applications is not. Thus, the operating mode determines which
secondary applications are available and active. Whenever you change the operating
mode, the currently active measurement channels are closed. The default operating
mode is "Signal and Spectrum Analyzer" mode; however, the presetting can be
changed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 112

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

Remote command:
INST:MODE SAN, see INSTrument:MODE on page 904

Switching between secondary applications

When you switch to a new secondary application, a set of parameters is passed on
from the current secondary application to the new one:
● center frequency and frequency offset
● reference level and reference level offset
● attenuation
After initial setup, the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting
and restored upon re-entering the channel. Thus, you can switch between secondary
applications quickly and easily.

5.1 Available applications

Access: [MODE]
The FSW provides some applications in the base unit while others are available only if
the corresponding firmware options are installed. Not all FSW applications are suppor-
ted in MSRA/MSRT mode.
For details on the MSRT operating mode, see the R&S®FSW Real-Time Measure-
ments User Manual.

Spectrogram application
Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application, but rather a trace evalua-
tion method, thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configu-
ration, not by creating a new channel. Spectrograms are configured and activated in
the "Trace" settings. See Section 8.5.2.1, "Working with spectrograms", on page 631
for details.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 113

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

Trial licenses
The trial license allows you to use further optional applications that require a separate
license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on request. If enabled,
you can use additional applications for a limited period of time (90 days from factory
installation).
Applications with trial licenses are indicated by a special tag:

Currently, the following options are included in the trial license:

● R&S FSW-K6: "Pulse Measurements" on page 120
● R&S FSW-K7: "AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis" on page 117
● R&S FSW-K17: "(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay" on page 118
● R&S FSW-K18: "Amplifier" on page 117
● R&S FSW-K19: Section 6.5, "Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement", on page 218
(no separate application, part of Spectrum application)
● R&S FSW-K30: "Noise Figure" on page 119
● R&S FSW-K40: "Phase Noise" on page 119
● R&S FSW-K50: "Fast Spur Search" on page 118
● R&S FSW-K54: Section 6.13, "Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement",
on page 334 (no separate application, part of Spectrum application)
● R&S FSW-K60: "Transient Analysis" on page 120
● R&S FSW-K70: "Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)" on page 121
● R&S FSW-K96: "OFDM Vector Signal Analysis (OFDM VSA)" on page 119
● R&S FSW-K544: Section 11.5, "Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)",
on page 769 (no separate application, available in several applications)
For more information on the trial license see "Trial license" on page 787.

Spectrum..................................................................................................................... 115
1xEV-DO BTS..............................................................................................................115
1xEV-DO MS............................................................................................................... 115
3G FDD BTS............................................................................................................... 116
3G FDD UE................................................................................................................. 116
5G NR..........................................................................................................................116
802.11ad......................................................................................................................116
802.11ay...................................................................................................................... 116
Amplifier.......................................................................................................................117
AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis..................................................................................117
Avionics....................................................................................................................... 117
Bluetooth..................................................................................................................... 117
cdma2000 BTS............................................................................................................117
cdma2000 MS............................................................................................................. 118
Fast Spur Search.........................................................................................................118
(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay......................................................................................... 118

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 114

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

GSM............................................................................................................................ 118
HRP UWB....................................................................................................................118
I/Q Analyzer.................................................................................................................118
LTE.............................................................................................................................. 119
NB-IoT......................................................................................................................... 119
Noise Figure................................................................................................................ 119
OFDM Vector Signal Analysis (OFDM VSA)............................................................... 119
OneWeb...................................................................................................................... 119
Phase Noise................................................................................................................ 119
Pulse Measurements.................................................................................................. 120
Real-Time Spectrum................................................................................................... 120
TD-SCDMA BTS......................................................................................................... 120
TD-SCDMA UE........................................................................................................... 120
Transient Analysis....................................................................................................... 120
Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF)..................................................... 121
Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)...................................................................................... 121
WLAN..........................................................................................................................121
DOCSIS 3.1................................................................................................................ 121

Spectrum
In the Spectrum application the provided functions correspond to those of a conven-
tional spectrum analyzer. The analyzer measures the frequency spectrum of the RF
input signal over the selected frequency range with the selected resolution and sweep
time, or, for a fixed frequency, displays the waveform of the video signal. This applica-
tion is used in the initial configuration.
For details see Section 6, "Measurements and results", on page 129.
Remote command:
INST:SEL SAN, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

1xEV-DO BTS
The 1xEV-DO BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO BTS
Measurements option, R&S FSW-K84. This application provides test measurements
for 1xEV-DO BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specifi-
cation.
For details see the R&S FSW-K84/-K85 User Manual.
For details see the R&S FSW-K84 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL BDO, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

1xEV-DO MS
The 1xEV-DO MS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO MS
Measurements option, R&S FSW-K85. This application provides test measurements
for 1xEV-DO MS uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specification.
For details see the R&S FSW-K84/-K85 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL MDO, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 115

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

3G FDD BTS
The 3G FDD BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP Base
Station Measurements option, R&S FSW-K72. This application provides test measure-
ments for W-CDMA downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test speci-
fication.
For details see the R&S FSW-K72/-K73 User Manual.
For details see the R&S FSW-K72 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL BWCD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

3G FDD UE
The 3G FDD UE application requires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP User
Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K73. This application provides test mea-
surements for W-CDMA uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specifica-
tion.
For details see the R&S FSW-K72/-K73 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL MWCD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

5G NR
The 5G NR application requires an instrument equipped with one of the 5G NR Mea-
surements options.
The R&S FSW-K144 application provides 5G NR measurements on the downlink.
The R&S FSW-K145 application provides 5G NR measurements on the uplink.
For details see the user manuals for the 5G NR downlink and uplink measurement
application.
Remote command:
INST:SEL NR5G, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

802.11ad
The 802.11ad application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ad option,
R&S FSW-K95. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to
the IEEE 802.11 ad standard.
For details see the R&S FSW-K95/-K97 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL WIGIG, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

802.11ay
The 802.11ay application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ay option,
R&S FSW-K97. This application provides measurements and evaluations according to
the IEEE 802.11 ay standard.
For details see the R&S FSW-K95/-K97 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL EDMG, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 116

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

Amplifier
The Amplifier Measurement application requires an instrument equipped with the
Amplifier Measurement option R&S FSW-K18. This application provides measure-
ments to measure the efficiency of traditional amplifiers and amplifiers that support
envelope tracking with the FSW.
Also available is option R&S FSW-K18D, which provides direct DPD functionality.
For details see the R&S FSW-K18 User Manual (also contains information about
R&S FSW-K18D.
Remote command:
INST:SEL AMPL, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis

The AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with
the corresponding optional software. This application provides measurement functions
for demodulating AM, FM, or PM signals.
For details see the R&S FSW-K7 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL ADEM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Avionics
The Avionics application requires an instrument equipped with the corresponding
optional software. This application provides measurement functions for measuring
avionics (ILS/VOR) signals.
For details see the R&S FSW-K15 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL AVIONICS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Bluetooth
The Bluetooth application requires an instrument equipped with the Bluettooth Mea-
surements option R&S FSW-K8. This application provides Bluetooth measurements.
For details see the R&S FSW-K8 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL BTO, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

cdma2000 BTS
The cdma2000 BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000
BTS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K82. This application provides test measure-
ments for cdma2000 BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test
specification.
For details see the R&S FSW-K82/-K83 User Manual.
For details see the R&S FSW-K82 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL BC2K, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 117

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

cdma2000 MS
The cdma2000 MS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000
MS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K83. This application provides test measure-
ments for cdma2000 MS uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specifica-
tion.
For details see the R&S FSW-K82/-K83 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL MC2K, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Fast Spur Search

The Fast Spur Search application requires an instrument equipped with the Fast Spur
Search option, R&S FSW-K50. This application provides measurements and evalua-
tions for spurious signal effects.
For details see the R&S FSW-K50 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL SPUR, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay

The Group Delay application requires an instrument equipped with the Multi-Carrier
Group Delay Measurements option R&S FSW-K17. This application provides a Multi-
Carrier Group Delay measurement.
For details see the R&S FSW-K17 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL MCGD, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

GSM
The GSM application requires an instrument equipped with the GSM Measurements
option R&S FSW-K10. This application provides GSM measurements.
For details see the R&S FSW-K10 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL GSM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

HRP UWB
The HRP UWB application requires an instrument equipped with the HRP UWB Mea-
surements option R&S FSW-K149. This application provides HRP UWB measure-
ments.
For details see the R&S FSW-K149 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL UWB, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

I/Q Analyzer
The I/Q Analyzer application provides measurement and display functions for I/Q data.
For details see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL IQ, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 118

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

LTE
The LTE application requires an instrument equipped with the LTE Measurements
option R&S FSW-K10x. This application provides LTE measurements.
For details see the user manuals for the LTE downlink and uplink measurement appli-
cation.
Remote command:
INST:SEL LTE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

NB-IoT
The NB-IoT application requires an instrument equipped with the NB-IoT measure-
ments option R&S FSW-K106. This application provides NB-IoT measurements in the
downlink.
For details see the R&S FSW-K106 (NB-IoT Downlink) User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL NIOT, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Noise Figure
The Noise Figure application requires an instrument equipped with the Noise Figure
Measurements option R&S FSW-K30. This application provides noise figure measure-
ments.
For details see the R&S FSW-K30 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL NOISE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

OFDM Vector Signal Analysis (OFDM VSA)

The OFDM VSA application requires the OFDM Vector Signal Analysis option,
R&S FSW-K96, to be installed. This application provides measurements and evalua-
tions for OFDM Vector Signal Analysis.
For details see the R&S FSW-K96 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL OFDMVSA, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

OneWeb
The OneWeb application requires an instrument equipped with the OneWeb measure-
ments option R&S FSW-K201. This application provides OneWeb reverse link mea-
surements.
For details see the R&S FSW-K201 (OneWeb Reverse Link Measurements) User Man-
ual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL OWEB, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Phase Noise
The Phase Noise application requires an instrument equipped with the Phase Noise
Measurements option, R&S FSW-K40. This application provides measurements for
phase noise tests.
For details see the R&S FSW-K40 User Manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 119

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Available applications

Remote command:
INST:SEL PNOISE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Pulse Measurements
The Pulse application requires an instrument equipped with the Pulse Measurements
option, R&S FSW-K6. This application provides measurement functions for pulsed sig-
nals.
For details see the R&S FSW-K6 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL PULSE, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Real-Time Spectrum
The Real-Time Spectrum application requires an instrument equipped with the Real-
Time Spectrum option (R&S FSW-B160R/-K160RE/-U160R). This application provides
real-time measurement functions.
For details see the R&S FSW Real-Time User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL RTIM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

TD-SCDMA BTS
The TD-SCDMA BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA
Base Station Measurements option, R&S FSW-K76. This application provides test
measurements for TD-SCDMA downlink signals (base station signals) according to the
test specification.
For details see the R&S FSW-K76/-K77 User Manual.
For details see the R&S FSW-K76 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL BTDS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

TD-SCDMA UE
The TD-SCDMA UE application requires an instrument equipped with the TD-SCDMA
User Equipment Measurements option, R&S FSW-K77. This application provides test
measurements for TD-SCDMA uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test
specification.
For details see the R&S FSW-K76/-K77 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL MTDS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Transient Analysis
The Transient Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with the Transient
Analysis option, R&S FSW-K60. This application provides measurements and evalua-
tions for Transient Analysis.
For details see the R&S FSW-K60 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL TA, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 120

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
R&S multiview

Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF)

The Verizon 5GTF measurement application requires an instrument equipped with the
V5GTF option, R&S FSW-K118/K119. This application provides measurements and
evaluations for uplink and downlink signals according to the Verizon 5G technical
forum (TS V5G.211 standard).
For details see the R&S FSW-K118/-K119 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL V5GT, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)

The VSA application requires an instrument equipped with the Vector Signal Analysis
option, R&S FSW-K70. This application provides measurements and evaluations for
single-carrier digitally modulated signals.
For details see the R&S FSW-K70 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL DDEM, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

WLAN
The WLAN application requires an instrument equipped with the WLAN option,
R&S FSW-K91/91n. This application provides measurements and evaluations accord-
ing to the WLAN IEEE 802.11 standards.
For details see the R&S FSW-K91 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL WLAN, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

DOCSIS 3.1
The DOCSIS 3.1 application requires an instrument equipped with the DOCSIS 3.1
option, R&S FSW-K192. This application provides measurements and evaluations
according to the DOCSIS 3.1 standard.
For details see the R&S FSW-K192 User Manual.
Remote command:
INST:SEL DOCS, see INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

5.2 R&S multiview

Each application is displayed in a separate tab. An additional tab ("MultiView") provides
an overview of all currently active channels at a glance. In the "MultiView" tab, each
individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button. Select this
button to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 121

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Selecting the operating mode and applications

Remote command:
DISPlay:FORMat on page 1102

5.3 Selecting the operating mode and applications

Access: [MODE]
The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the pre-
setting can be changed.
See "Preset Mode" on page 793.

The default application in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode is a Spectrum measure-
ment.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 122

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Selecting the operating mode and applications

Optional applications require additional licenses. The application selection in the

"Mode" dialog box depends on which licenses are available. If the predefined number
of available licenses for a particular option are currently occupied by other users, you
cannot open a further instance of the optional application until a license is returned.
Per option, you only require a single license for any number of channels.
For more information, see Section 11.7.2, "Licensing, versions and options",
on page 786.

Switching between applications

When you switch to a new application, a set of parameters is passed on from the cur-
rent application to the new one:
● center frequency and frequency offset
● reference level and reference level offset
● attenuation
After initial setup, the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting
and restored upon re-entering the channel. Thus, you can switch between applications
quickly and easily.
Switching the operating mode.....................................................................................123
Selecting an application.............................................................................................. 123
└ New Channel................................................................................................ 123
└ Replace Current Channel............................................................................. 124
└ Duplicate Current Channel............................................................................124
Closing an application................................................................................................. 124

Switching the operating mode

To switch the operating mode, select the corresponding tab.
Remote command:
INSTrument:MODE on page 904

Selecting an application
To start a new or replace an existing application, select the corresponding button in the
correct tab.
Note: The measurement channels are labeled with their default name. If that name
already exists, a sequential number is added. You can change the name of the mea-
surement channel by double-tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new
name.
For an overview of default names see INSTrument:LIST? on page 902.
Remote command:
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

New Channel ← Selecting an application

The applications selected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel, i.e. a
new tab in the display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 123

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Running a sequence of measurements

Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 901
INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905

Replace Current Channel ← Selecting an application

The applications selected on this tab are started in the currently displayed measure-
ment channel, replacing the current application.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace on page 902

Duplicate Current Channel ← Selecting an application

The currently active channel can be duplicated, i.e. a new channel of the same type
and with the identical measurement settings is started. The name of the new channel is
the same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g. "Spectrum" -
> "Spectrum 2").
This command is not available if the MSRA primary channel is selected.
Remote command:
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate on page 901

Closing an application
To close an application, simply close the corresponding tab by selecting the "x" next to
the channel name.
Remote command:
INSTrument:DELete on page 902

5.4 Running a sequence of measurements

Only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently
active channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecu-
tively, a Sequencer function is provided.

The Sequencer function is slightly different in MSRA or MSRT operating mode. For
details see the FSW MSRA User Manual or the FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application
and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.

● The sequencer concept.........................................................................................124

● Sequencer settings............................................................................................... 127
● How to set up the sequencer................................................................................ 128

5.4.1 The sequencer concept

The instrument can only activate one specific channel at any time. Thus, only one
measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active
channel. However, in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a
Sequencer function is provided, which changes the channel of the instrument as

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 124

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Running a sequence of measurements

required. If activated, the measurements configured in the currently defined "Channel"s

are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs.
For each individual measurement, the sweep count is considered. Thus, each mea-
surement may consist of several sweeps. The currently active measurement is indica-
ted by a symbol in the tab label.
The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measure-
ments are performed. Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently dis-
played tab.

Sequencer modes
Three different Sequencer modes are available:
● Single Sequence
Similar to single sweep mode; each measurement is performed once, until all mea-
surements in all defined "Channel"s have been performed.
● Continuous Sequence
Similar to continuous sweep mode; the measurements in each defined "Channel"
are performed one after the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential
operation is stopped. This is the default Sequencer mode.
● Channel-defined Sequence
First, a single sequence is performed. Then, only "Channel"s in continuous sweep
mode are repeated continuously.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 125

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Running a sequence of measurements

Example: Sequencer procedure

Assume the following active channel definition:

Tab name Application Sweep mode Sweep count

Spectrum Spectrum Cont. Sweep 5

Spectrum 2 Spectrum Single Sweep 6

Spectrum 3 Spectrum Cont. Sweep 2

IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer Single Sweep 7

For Single Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:

5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer
For Continuous Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
...
For Channel-defined Sequence, the following sweeps will be performed:
5x Spectrum, 6x Spectrum 2, 2 x Spectrum 3, 7x IQ Analyzer,
5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3,
5x Spectrum, 2 x Spectrum 3,
...

Run Single/Run Cont and Single Sweep/Sweep Continuous keys

While the Sequencer is active, the [Run Single] and [Run Cont] keys control the
Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [Run Single] starts the Sequencer in single mode,
while [Run Cont] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 126

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Running a sequence of measurements

The "Single Sweep" and "Continuous Sweep"softkeys control the sweep mode for the
currently selected channel only; the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the
Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence. In this
case, a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer. A channel
in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly.

5.4.2 Sequencer settings

The "Sequencer" menu is available from the toolbar.

Sequencer in MSRA/MSRT mode

In MSRA/MSRT operating mode and in the Real-Time Spectrum Application, the
Sequencer behaves slightly differently.
For details on the MSRA operating mode see the FSW MSRA User Manual. For details
on the MSRT operating mode and the Real-Time Spectrum application see the FSW
Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.

Sequencer State......................................................................................................... 127

Sequencer Mode.........................................................................................................127

Sequencer State
Activates or deactivates the Sequencer. If activated, sequential operation according to
the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 908
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 907
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt on page 907

Sequencer Mode
Defines how often which measurements are performed. The currently selected mode
softkey is highlighted blue. During an active Sequencer process, the selected mode
softkey is highlighted orange.
"Single Sequence"
Each measurement is performed once, until all measurements in all
active channels have been performed.
"Continuous Sequence"
The measurements in each active channel are performed one after
the other, repeatedly, in the same order, until sequential operation is
stopped.
This is the default Sequencer mode.
"Channel Defined Sequence"
First, a single sequence is performed. Then, only channels in continu-
ous sweep mode are repeated.
Channel-defined sequence is not available in Multi-Standard Real-
Time (MSRT) operating mode.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 127

FSW Applications, measurement channels, and operating modes
Running a sequence of measurements

Remote command:
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE on page 907

5.4.3 How to set up the sequencer

In order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function

is provided.

1. Configure a channel for each measurement configuration as required, including the

sweep mode.

2. In the toolbar, select the "Sequencer" icon.

The "Sequencer" menu is displayed.

3. Toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "On".

A continuous sequence is started immediately.

4. To change the Sequencer mode and start a new sequence immediately, select the
corresponding mode softkey, or press the [Run Single] or [Run Cont] key.
The measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one
after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped.
The result displays in the individual channels are updated as the measurements
are performed.

To stop the sequencer

► To stop the Sequencer temporarily, press the highlighted [Run Single] or [Run
Cont] key (not for a channel-defined sequence). To continue the Sequencer, press
the key again.
To stop the Sequencer permanently, select the "Sequencer" icon in the toolbar and
toggle the "Sequencer" softkey to "Off".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 128

FSW Measurements and results

6 Measurements and results

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement"
Or: [MEAS]
In the Spectrum application, the FSW provides a variety of different measurement
functions.
● Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal
in time domain
● Power measurements - calculate the powers involved in modulated carrier signals
● Emission measurements - detect unwanted signal emission
● Statistic measurements - evaluate the spectral distribution of the signal
● Further measurements - provide characteristic values of the signal
● EMI measurements - detect electromagnetic interference in the signal
The individual functions are described in detail in the following sections.

Trial licenses
The trial license allows you to use further optional measurements that require a sepa-
rate license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on request. If
enabled, you can use additional measurements for a limited period of time (90 days
from factory installation).
Measurements with trial licenses are indicated by a special tag:

Currently, the following measurements are included in the trial license:

● R&S FSW-K19: Section 6.5, "Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement", on page 218
● R&S FSW-K54: Section 6.13, "Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement",
on page 334
For more information on the trial license see "Trial license" on page 787.

The measurement function determines which settings, functions and evaluation meth-
ods are available in the FSW. The various measurement functions are described in
detail here.
When you select a measurement function, the measurement is started with its default
settings immediately and the corresponding measurement configuration menu is dis-
played. The measurement configuration menu can be displayed at any time by press-
ing [MEAS CONFIG].
The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration "Overview", see
Section 7.1, "Configuration overview", on page 359.
In addition to the measurement-specific parameters, the general parameters can be
configured as usual, see Section 7, "Common measurement settings", on page 359.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 129

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Many measurement functions provide special result displays or evaluation methods;

however, in most cases the general evaluation methods are also available, see Sec-
tion 8, "Common analysis and display functions", on page 536.
After a preset, and when all other functions are switched off ("All Functions Off" in the
"Select Measurement" dialog) the FSW performs a basic frequency sweep.
The remote commands required to retrieve measurement results are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.2.4, "Retrieving trace results", on page 1261.

Measurements on I/Q-based data

The I/Q Analyzer secondary application (not primary) in MSRA mode can also perform
measurements on the captured I/Q data in the time and frequency domain.
The measurements are configured using the same settings as described here for the
Spectrum application.
The results, however, may differ slightly as hardware settings are not adapted automat-
ically as for the Spectrum application. Additionally, the analysis interval used for the
measurement is indicated as in all MSRA applications.
For more information see the FSW MSRA User Manual.

● Basic measurements.............................................................................................130
● Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement....................151
● Carrier-to-noise measurements............................................................................ 208
● Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)...........................................................212
● Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement................................................................ 218
● Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement....................................................235
● Spurious emissions measurement........................................................................ 281
● Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)............................................................... 295
● Time domain power measurement........................................................................310
● Harmonic distortion measurement........................................................................ 315
● Third order intercept (TOI) measurement............................................................. 321
● AM modulation depth measurement..................................................................... 331
● Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement................................................334

6.1 Basic measurements

Basic measurements are common sweeps in the time or frequency domain which pro-
vide an overview of the basic input signal characteristics.
If no other measurement function is selected, or if all measurement functions are
switched off, the FSW performs a basic frequency or time sweep.
After a preset, a frequency sweep is performed.
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the
"Overview" (see Section 7, "Common measurement settings", on page 359).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 130

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

6.1.1 Basic measurement types

Frequency Sweep....................................................................................................... 131

Zero Span................................................................................................................... 131
All Functions Off..........................................................................................................132

Frequency Sweep
A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span. Can be used for
general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spec-
trum traces. The "Frequency" menu is displayed. This is the default measurement if no
other function is selected.
Various other measurements are based on the common frequency sweep, but require
additional configuration of sweep spans or amplitude limits, for example.
Examples for frequency sweep measurements are:
● Adjacent channel power (ACP)
● Carrier-to-noise (C/N)
● Occupied bandwidth (OBW)
● Noise power ratio (NPR)
● Spectrum emission mask (SEM)
● Spurious emissions
● Third order intercept (TOI)
● AM modulation depth
● Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the
"Overview" (see Section 7, "Common measurement settings", on page 359).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 1198, [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP
on page 1199
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 913
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912

Zero Span
A sweep in the time domain at the specified (center) frequency, i.e. the frequency span
is set to zero. The display shows the time on the x-axis and the signal level on the y-
axis, as on an oscilloscope. On the time axis, the grid lines correspond to 1/10 of the
current sweep time.
Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement, e.g. via the
"Overview" (see Section 7, "Common measurement settings", on page 359).
Most result evaluations can also be used for zero span measurements, although some
functions (e.g. markers) may work slightly differently and some may not be available. If
so, this will be indicated in the function descriptions (see Section 8, "Common analysis
and display functions", on page 536).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1198
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 913
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 131

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

All Functions Off

Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep.
Selecting "Frequency Sweep" has the same effect.

6.1.2 How to perform a basic sweep measurement

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic sweep mea-
surements.

For remote operation, see Section 13.16.1, "Programming example: performing a basic
frequency sweep", on page 1536.

To perform one or more single sweeps

1. Configure the frequency and span to be measured ("Frequency" dialog box, see
Section 7.3, "Frequency and span configuration", on page 473).

2. Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement

("Sweep Config" dialog box, see "Sweep/Average Count" on page 506).

3. If necessary, configure how the signal is processed internally ("Bandwidth" dialog

box, see "Sweep Type" on page 507).

4. If necessary, configure a trigger for the measurement ("Trigger/ Gate Config" dialog
box.
See Section 7.6, "Trigger and gate configuration", on page 510

5. Define how the results are evaluated for display ("Trace" dialog box, see Sec-
tion 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings", on page 624).

6. If necessary, configure the vertical axis of the display ("Amplitude" dialog box, see
Section 7.4, "Amplitude and vertical axis configuration", on page 481).

7. To start the measurement, select one of the following:

● [RUN SINGLE]
● "Single Sweep" in the "Sweep" menu
The defined number of sweeps are performed, then the measurement is stopped.
While the measurement is running, the [RUN SINGLE] key is highlighted. To abort
the measurement, press [RUN SINGLE] again. The key is no longer highlighted.
The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.

8. To repeat the same number of sweeps without deleting the last trace, select "Con-
tinue Single Sweep" in the "Sweep" menu.

To start continuous sweeping

1. If you want to average the trace or search for a maximum over more (or less) than
10 sweeps, configure the "Sweep/Average Count" ("Sweep Config" dialog box, see
"Sweep/Average Count" on page 506).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 132

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

2. To start the measurement, select one of the following:

● [RUN CONT]
● "Continuous Sweep" in the "Sweep" menu
After each sweep is completed, a new one is started automatically. While the mea-
surement is running, the [RUN CONT] key is highlighted. To stop the measure-
ment, press [RUN CONT] again. The key is no longer highlighted. The results are
not deleted until a new measurement is started.

6.1.3 Measurement examples - measuring a sinusoidal signal

One of the most common measurement tasks that can be handled using a signal ana-
lyzer is determining the level and frequency of a signal. When measuring an unknown
signal, you can usually start with the presettings.

Test setup
1. Configure the signal generator (e.g. R&S SMW):
● Frequency: 128 MHz
● Level: -30 dBm

2. NOTICE! Signal levels exceeding 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the
input mixer. When calculating the expected power level, consider the total power of
all occuring signals.
If you measure signals higher than +30 dBm (=1 W), insert a power attenuator
before the RF input of the analyzer.

3. Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the FSW.

● Measuring the level and frequency using markers................................................133

● Measuring the signal frequency using the signal counter..................................... 135

6.1.3.1 Measuring the level and frequency using markers

The level and frequency of a sinusoidal signal can be measured easily using the
marker function. The FSW always displays its amplitude and frequency at the marker
position. The frequency measurement uncertainty is determined by the reference fre-
quency of the FSW, the resolution of the marker frequency display and the number of
sweep points.

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Connect the signal to be measured to the "RF INPUT" connector on the FSW.

3. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

4. Reduce the frequency span to 1 MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 133

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Note: Coupled settings. When the frequency span is defined, the resolution band-
width, the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted,
because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings.
5. Select [MKR] to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the
trace.
The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the
marker information at the top of the display.
Note: Performing a peak search. When a marker is initially activated, it automati-
cally performs the peak search function (as shown in the example).
If a marker was already active, select [Peak Search] or the "Peak" softkey in the
[MKR >] menu in order to set the currently active marker to the maximum of the
displayed signal.

Increasing the frequency resolution

The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace. A
trace consists of 1001 trace points, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each trace point
represents a span of approximately 1 kHz. This corresponds to a maximum uncertainty
of +/- 0.5 kHz.
You can increase the resolution of the trace by reducing the frequency span or by
using more sweep points.

Reducing the frequency span to 10 kHz

► Reduce the frequency span to 10 kHz.
The resolution of the trace is now approximately 10 Hz (10 kHz span / 1001 trace
points), thus, the precision of the marker frequency display increases to approxi-
mately ±5 Hz.

Setting the reference level

The reference level is the level at the upper limit of the diagram. To achieve the widest
dynamic range possible for a spectrum measurement, use the entire level span of the
FSW. In other words, the highest level that occurs in the signal should be located at the
top edge of the diagram ( = reference level) or immediately below it.

Low Reference Levels

If the selected reference level is lower than the highest signal that occurs in the spec-
trum, the signal path in the FSW is overloaded.
In this case, the message "IFOVL" is displayed in the error message field.

In the presettings, the value of the reference level is 0 dBm. If the input signal is
-30 dBm, the reference level can be reduced by 30 dB without causing the signal path
to be overloaded.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 134

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Reducing the reference level by 30 dB

► Set the reference level to -30 dBm.
The maximum of the trace is near the maximum of the measurement diagram. The
increase in the displayed noise is not substantial. Thus, the distance between the
signal maximum and the noise display (=dynamic range) has increased.

Setting the reference level with the help of a marker

You can also use a marker to shift the maximum value of the trace directly to the top
edge of the diagram. If the marker is located at the maximum level of the trace (as in
this example), the reference level can be moved to the marker level as follows:
1. Press [MKR ->].

2. Select "Ref Lvl = Mkr Lvl".

The reference level is set to the current marker level.

6.1.3.2 Measuring the signal frequency using the signal counter

The built-in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than
measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and the
FSW measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position (see also Sec-
tion 8.3.4.1, "Precise frequency (signal count) marker", on page 568).
In the following example, the frequency of the generator at 128 MHz is shown using
the marker.

Prerequisite
Precise frequency measurements require a precise reference frequency. Therefore, an
external reference frequency from the signal generator is used. Connect the signal
generator's "Ref OUT" connector to the analyzer's "Ref IN" connector.

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

3. Set the frequency span to 1 MHz.

4. Select "Setup" > "Reference" > "External Reference 10 MHz" to activate the exter-
nal reference frequency.

5. Select [MKR] to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the
trace.
The level and the frequency of the marker are displayed in the marker results in the
diagram or the marker table.

6. Select [MKR FUNC] > "Signal Count" to activate the signal counter.
The result of the signal counter is displayed in the marker results.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 135

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

7. If necessary, increase the resolution of the signal counter by selecting "Signal

Count Resolution" (in the "Signal Count" menu).

Prerequisites for using the internal signal counter

In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal sig-
nal counter, an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available. The marker
must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the specified
measurement accuracy is adhered to.

6.1.4 Measurement example – measuring levels at low S/N ratios

The minimum signal level a signal analyzer can measure is limited by its intrinsic noise.
Small signals can be swamped by noise and therefore cannot be measured. For sig-
nals that are just above the intrinsic noise, the accuracy of the level measurement is
influenced by the intrinsic noise of the FSW.
The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected
RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band-
width and the detector.
For details see:
● Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482
● Section 7.4.1.1, "Reference level", on page 481
● Section 7.5.1.1, "Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution band-
width", on page 494
● Section 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth", on page 495
● "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector" on page 611
This measurement example shows the different factors influencing the S/N ratio.
Table 6-1: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -95 dBm

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

3. Set the span to 100 MHz.

4. Set the reference level to -30 dBm.

The signal is measured with the auto peak detector and is completely hidden in the
intrinsic noise of the FSW.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 136

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-1: Sine wave signal with low S/N ratio

5. To suppress noise spikes, average the trace. In the "Traces" configuration dialog,
set the "Trace Mode" to "Average" (see "Trace Mode" on page 625).
The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the FSW
automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, therefore, can be
more clearly distinguished from noise.

Figure 6-2: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with an averaged trace

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 137

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

6. Instead of trace averaging, you can select a video filter that is narrower than the
resolution bandwidth. Set the trace mode back to "Clear/ Write", then set the VBW
to 10 kHz manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog.
The RF signal can be distinguished from noise more clearly.

Figure 6-3: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth

7. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by

10 dB. Set the RBW to 100 kHz.
The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB. The signal, therefore,
emerges from noise by about 10 dB. Compared to the previous setting, the video
bandwidth has remained the same, i.e. it has increased relative to the smaller reso-
lution bandwidth. The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is therefore reduced.
The trace will be noisier.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 138

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-4: Reference signal at a smaller resolution bandwidth

6.1.5 Measurement examples - measuring signal spectra with multiple

signals

● Separating signals by selecting the resolution bandwidth.................................... 139

● Measuring the modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier in the frequency
domain.................................................................................................................. 142
● Measuring AM-modulated signals.........................................................................143

6.1.5.1 Separating signals by selecting the resolution bandwidth

A basic feature of a Signal and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spec-
tral components of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual compo-
nents can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolu-
tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral
components, i.e. they are displayed as a single component (see also Section 7.5.1.1,
"Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution bandwidth", on page 494).
Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre-
cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the
level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
In this measurement example we will analyze two signals with a level of -30 dBm each
and a frequency spacing of 30 kHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 139

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-5: Test setup

Table 6-2: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Level Frequency

Signal generator 1 -30 dBm 128,00 MHz

Signal generator 2 -30 dBm 128,03 MHz

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 128.015 MHz.

3. Set the frequency span to 300 kHz.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz.
Note: Larger video bandwidths. The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to
make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible. At larger video
bandwidths, the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not suffi-
ciently suppressed. This produces additional voltages, which are visible in the
trace, in the transition area between the two signals.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 140

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-6: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band-
width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals

Matching generator and FSW frequencies

The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator
frequencies match the frequency display of the FSW exactly. To achieve exact
matching, the frequencies of the generators and the FSW must be synchronized.
5. Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz.
It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two generator signals.

Figure 6-7: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band-
width which is larger than their frequency spacing

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 141

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz.

The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep
time becomes longer. At smaller bandwidths, the noise display decreases simulta-
neously (10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of
10).

Figure 6-8: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band-
width (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing

6.1.5.2 Measuring the modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier in the frequency

domain

In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow
bandwidth and measured separately. The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with
a sinusoidal signal can then be measured. Since the dynamic range of a signal ana-
lyzer is very large, extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely.
For this purpose, the FSW provides measurement routines that output the modulation
depth numerically in percent directly.

Figure 6-9: Test setup

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 142

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Table 6-3: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -30 dBm

Modulation 50 % AM, 10 kHz AF

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

3. Set the frequency span to 50 kHz.

4. Select [MEAS] > "AM Modulation Depth" to activate the modulation depth mea-
surement.
The FSW automatically sets a marker to the carrier signal in the center of the dia-
gram and one delta marker each to the upper and lower AM sidebands. The FSW
calculates the AM modulation depth from the level differences of the delta markers
to the main marker and outputs the numeric value in the marker information.

Figure 6-10: Measurement of the AM modulation depth

The modulation depth is displayed as "MDepth". The frequency of the AF signal can be
obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker.

6.1.5.3 Measuring AM-modulated signals

The FSW rectifies the RF input signal (that is, removes the negative parts) and dis-
plays it as a magnitude spectrum. The rectification also demodulates AM-modulated

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 143

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

signals. The AF voltage can be displayed in zero span if the modulation sidebands fall
within the resolution bandwidth.
Displaying the AF of an AM-modulated signal (Zero Span)

Figure 6-11: Test setup

Table 6-4: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 128 MHz

Level -30 dBm

Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz or select "Zero Span".

4. Set the sweep time to 2.5 ms.

5. Set the RBW to 3 MHz.

6. Set the reference level to -24 dBm and the display range to linear ([AMPT] > "Scale
Config" > "Scaling": "Linear Percent").

7. Set the scaling unit to Volt ([AMPT] > "Amplitude Config" > "Unit": "V").

8. Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a
static image.
a) Press [TRIG].
b) Select "Video".
c) Set the "Trg/Gate Level" to 50%.
The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement
diagram. The FSW displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static image in zero span.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 144

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-12: Measurement of the AF signal of a carrier that is AM-modulated with 1 kHz

9. Activate the internal AM demodulator to output the audio signal.

a) Press [MKR FUNC].
b) Select "Marker Demodulation".
The FSW automatically switches on the AM audio demodulator. A 1 kHz tone
can be heard over headset (via the PHONES connector). If necessary, use the
volume control to turn up the volume.

6.1.6 Measurement examples in zero span

For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method (for example, GSM), trans-
mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character-
istics in zero span. A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the
same frequency. Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their
assigned timeslots.
Both the power during the send phase as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA
burst, and rise and fall times of the burst, are important.
● Measuring the power characteristic of burst signals............................................. 145
● Measuring the signal-to-noise ratio of burst signals..............................................149

6.1.6.1 Measuring the power characteristic of burst signals

To measure power in zero span, the FSW offers easy-to-use functions that measure
the power over a predefined time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 145

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Measuring the power of a GSM burst during the activation phase

Figure 6-13: Test setup

Table 6-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz ([FREQ]).

3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz ([SPAN] > "Zero Span").

4. Set the reference level to 10 dBm (= level of the signal generator +10 dB) (AMPT).

5. Set the attenuation to 20 dB ([AMPT] > "RF Atten Manual").

6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz ([BW] > "Res BW").

7. Set the sweep time to 1 ms ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual").

The FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.

8. Using the video trigger, set triggering on the rising edge of the burst.
a) Press [TRIG].
b) Set the "Trg Source" to "Video".
c) Set the "Trg/Gate Level" to 70%.
The FSW shows a static image with the GSM burst at the start of the trace. The
trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line labeled with the absolute level for the
trigger threshold in the measurement diagram.

9. Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span.
a) Press [MEAS].
b) Select "Time Domain Power".
c) Select "Time Dom Power Config".
d) Set the "Limits" state to "On".
e) Select the "Left Limit" input field.
f) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of
the burst.
g) Select the "Right Limit" input field.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 146

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of
the burst.
The FSW displays the average (mean) power during the activation phase of the
burst.

Figure 6-14: Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal

Measuring the edges of a GSM burst with high time resolution

Due to the high time resolution of the FSW at the 0 Hz display range, the edges of
TDMA bursts can be measured precisely. The edges can be shifted to the display area
using the trigger offset.

Figure 6-15: Test setup

Table 6-6: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated

The measurement is based on the example "Measuring the power of a GSM burst dur-
ing the activation phase" on page 146.
1. Switch off the power measurement.
a) Press [MEAS].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 147

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

b) Select "Zero Span".

2. Increase the time resolution by setting the sweep time to 100 µs ([SWEEP] >
"Sweep Time Manual").

3. Shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the display by defining a trig-
ger offset.
a) Press [TRIG].
b) Select "Trigger Offset".
c) By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, reduce the trigger offset until the
burst edge is displayed in the center of the display, or enter -50 µs.
The FSW displays the rising edge of the GSM burst.

Figure 6-16: Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution

4. Move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the display. To do so, switch the
trigger "Slope" to "Falling" ([TRIG] > "Trigger/ Gate Config").
The FSW displays the falling edge of the GSM burst.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 148

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

Figure 6-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution

6.1.6.2 Measuring the signal-to-noise ratio of burst signals

When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the dynamic
range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the
activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst. Therefore, the
FSW provides a measurement for absolute and relative power in zero span. In the fol-
lowing example, the measurement is performed using a GSM burst.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio of a GSM Signal

Figure 6-18: Test setup

Table 6-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW)

Frequency 890 MHz

Level 0 dBm

Modulation GSM, one time slot is switched on

1. Select [PRESET] to reset the instrument.

2. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz.

3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 149

FSW Measurements and results
Basic measurements

5. Set the reference level to 0 dBm (= level of the signal generator).

6. Set the sweep time to 2 ms ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual").

The FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display.

7. Use the trigger source "Video" and the trigger slope "Rising" to trigger on the rising
edge of the burst and shift the start of the burst to the center of the display (see
step 3 in "Measuring the edges of a GSM burst with high time resolution"
on page 147).

8. Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span.
a) Press [MEAS].
b) Select "Time Domain Power".
c) Select "Time Dom Power Config".
d) Set the "Limits" state to "On".
e) Select the "Left Limit" input field.
f) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S1" to the start of
the burst.
g) Select the "Right Limit" input field.
h) By turning the rotary knob clockwise, move the vertical line "S2" to the end of
the burst.
i) Note down the power result for the burst, indicated by the "TD Pow RMS" result
in the marker table.

9. Measure the power during the deactivation phase of the burst by switching the trig-
ger slope to "Falling" ([TRIG] > "Trigger/ Gate Config").
The FSW initiates triggering in response to the falling edge of the burst. This shifts
the burst to the left-hand side of the measurement diagram. The power is mea-
sured in the deactivation phase.

Figure 6-19: Measurement of the signal-to-noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 150

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

10. Note down the power result for the measured noise, indicated by the "TD Pow
RMS" result in the marker table.
Subtract the measured noise power from the burst power to obtain the signal-to-
noise ratio of the burst signal.

6.2 Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR)

measurement
Measuring the power in channels adjacent to the carrier or transmission channel is
useful to detect interference. The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual
channels.
● About channel power measurements....................................................................151
● Channel power results.......................................................................................... 152
● Channel power basics...........................................................................................154
● Channel power configuration................................................................................ 167
● MSR ACLR configuration...................................................................................... 177
● How to perform channel power measurements.................................................... 194
● Measurement examples........................................................................................199
● Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement................................................205
● Reference: predefined CP/ACLR standards......................................................... 206
● Reference: predefined ACLR user standard XML files......................................... 207

6.2.1 About channel power measurements

Measuring channel power and adjacent channel power is one of the most important
tasks during signal analysis with the necessary test routines in the field of digital trans-
mission. Theoretically, a power meter could be used to measure channel power at
highest accuracy. However, its low selectivity means that it is not suitable for measur-
ing adjacent channel power as an absolute value or relative to the transmit channel
power. Only a selective power meter can measure the power in the adjacent channels.
A signal analyzer cannot be classified as a true power meter, because it displays the IF
envelope voltage. However, it is calibrated such as to display the power of a pure sine
wave signal correctly, irrespective of the selected detector. This calibration cannot be
applied for non-sinusoidal signals. Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a
Gaussian amplitude distribution, the signal power within the selected resolution band-
width can be obtained using correction factors. The internal power measurement rou-
tines in a signal analyzer normally use these correction factors to determine the signal
power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only if the assump-
tion of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Apart from this common method, the FSW also has a true power detector, i.e. an RMS
detector. It displays the power of the test signal within the selected resolution band-
width correctly, irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without additional correction
factors being required.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 151

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

The FSW software allows you to perform ACLR measurements on input containing
multiple signals for different communication standards. A measurement standard is
provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified
frequencies, independent from the selected center frequency. The ACLR measurement
determines the power levels of the individual transmit, adjacent, and gap channels, as
well as the total power for each sub block of transmit channels.
A detailed measurement example is provided in Section 6.2.7, "Measurement exam-
ples", on page 199.

6.2.2 Channel power results

For channel or adjacent-channel power measurements, the individual channels are

indicated by different colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds
to the measured power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel ("Adj", "Alt
%1", "Tx %1", etc., or a user-defined name) is indicated above the bar (separated by a
line which has no further meaning).
For "Fast ACLR" measurements, which are performed in the time domain, the power
versus time is shown for each channel.

Multi-standard radio (MSR) channel power results

The channel power results for MSR signals are described in Section 6.2.3.4, "Measure-
ment on multi-standard radio (MSR) signals", on page 161.

Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels
above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, you must
specify the channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values refer. By
default, it is the TX channel with the maximum power.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 152

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Table 6-8: Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels

Number Measurement results

of adj.
chan.

0 Channel powers

1 ● Channel powers
● Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel

2 ● Channel powers
● Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
● Power of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1)

3 ● Channel powers
● Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
● Power of the next higher and lower channel (alternate channel 1)
● Power of the second next higher and lower adjacent channel (alternate channel 2)

… …

12 ● Channel powers
● Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel
● Power of all the higher and lower channels (alternate channels 1 to 11)

In the FSW display, only the first neighboring channel of the carrier (TX) channel is
labeled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labeled "Alt" (alternate) channels. In this
manual, "Adjacent" refers to both adjacent and alternate channels.

The measured power values for the TX and adjacent channels are also output as a
table in the Result Summary window. Which powers are measured depends on the
number of configured channels.
For each channel, the following values are displayed:

Label Description

Channel Channel name as specified in the "Channel Settings" (see "Channel Names"
on page 177).

Bandwidth Configured channel bandwidth (see "Channel Bandwidth" on page 174)

Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel (configured channel spacing, see "Channel
Bandwidth" on page 174)

Power The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels. The
powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz, or in dBc, relative
(Lower/Upper)
to the specified reference TX channel.

Retrieving Results via Remote Control

All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? command from a remote computer (see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915). Alter-
natively, the results can be output as channel power density, i.e. in reference to the
measurement bandwidth.
Furthermore, the measured power values of the displayed trace can be retrieved as
usual using the TRAC:DATA? commands (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262). In

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 153

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

this case, the measured power value for each sweep point (by default 1001) is
returned.
For a full list of remote commands for ACLR measurements, see Section 13.5.3.10,
"Retrieving and analyzing measurement results", on page 971.

6.2.3 Channel power basics

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in channel power
measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration
settings.
● Measurement methods......................................................................................... 154
● Measurement repeatability....................................................................................156
● Recommended common measurement parameters.............................................157
● Measurement on multi-standard radio (MSR) signals...........................................161

6.2.3.1 Measurement methods

The channel power is defined as the integration of the power across the channel band-
width.
The Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio (ACLR) is also known as the Adjacent
Channel Power Ratio (ACPR). It is defined as the ratio between the total power of the
adjacent channel to the power of the carrier channel. An ACLR measurement with sev-
eral carrier channels (also known as transmission or TX channels) is also possible and
is referred to as a multicarrier ACLR measurement.
There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power
with a signal analyzer:
● IBW method (Integration BandWidth method)
● Fast ACLR (Zero-span method ), i.e. using a channel filter

IBW method
When measuring the channel power, the FSW integrates the linear power which corre-
sponds to the levels of the measurement points within the selected channel. The signal
analyzer uses a resolution bandwidth which is far smaller than the channel bandwidth.
When sweeping over the channel, the channel filter is formed by the passband charac-
teristics of the resolution bandwidth.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 154

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-20: Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth

The following steps are performed:

1. The linear power of all the trace points within the channel is calculated.
Pi = 10(Li/10)
Where Pi = power of the trace pixel i
Li = displayed level of trace point i

2. The powers of all trace points within the channel are summed up and the sum is
divided by the number of trace points in the channel.

3. The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the
noise bandwidth of the resolution filter (RBW).

Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel
bandwidth, this method is called the IBW method (Integration Bandwidth method).

Fast ACLR
The integrated bandwidth method (IBW) calculates channel power and ACLR from the
trace data obtained during a continuous sweep over the selected span. Most parts of
this sweep are not part of the channel itself or the defined adjacent channels. There-
fore, most of the samples taken during the sweep time cannot be used for channel
power or ACLR calculation.
To decrease the measurement times, the FSW offers a "Fast ACLR" mode. In Fast
ACLR mode, the power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not
measured, because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation. The mea-
surement time per channel is set with the sweep time. It is equal to the selected mea-
surement time divided by the selected number of channels.
In the "Fast ACLR" mode, the FSW measures the power of each channel in the time
domain, with the defined channel bandwidth, at the center frequency of the channel in
question. The digital implementation of the resolution bandwidths makes it possible to
select filter characteristics that are precisely tailored to the signal. For CDMA2000, for
example, the power in the useful channel is measured with a bandwidth of 1.23 MHz.
The power of the adjacent channels is measured with a bandwidth of 30 kHz. There-
fore the FSW changes from one channel to the other and measures the power at a
bandwidth of 1.23 MHz or 30 kHz using the RMS detector.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 155

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-21: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 signals
with zero span (Fast ACLR)

6.2.3.2 Measurement repeatability

The repeatability of the results, especially in the narrow adjacent channels, strongly
depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth. A longer sweep
time can increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value
of the adjacent channel power, but obviously increases measurement time.
Assume a measurement with five channels (1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adja-
cent channels) and a sweep time of 100 ms. This measurement requires a measure-
ment time per channel of 20 ms. To calculate the power in one channel, the analyzer
considers the following number of effective samples:
<sweep time in channel> * <selected resolution bandwidth>
For example, for a sweep time of 100 ms the analyzer considers
(30 kHz / 4.19 MHz) * 100 ms * 10 kHz ≈ 7 samples. Whereas in Fast ACLR mode, it
considers (100 ms / 5) * 30 kHz ≈ 600 samples. If you compare these numbers, you
understand the increase of repeatability with a 95 % confidence level (2δ). It rises from
± 2.8 dB in normal mode to ± 0.34 dB in Fast ACLR mode for a sweep time of 100 ms.
For the same repeatability, the integration method requires a sweep time of 8.5 s. The
Figure 6-22 shows the standard deviation of the results as a function of the sweep
time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 156

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-22: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if
the integration bandwidth method is used

The Figure 6-23 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit chan-
nel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of
sweep time. The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100
consecutive measurements. Consider the scaling when you compare power values.

Figure 6-23: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast
ACLR mode

6.2.3.3 Recommended common measurement parameters

The following sections provide recommendations on the most important measurement

parameters for channel power measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 157

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel
spacing) can be optimized automatically using the "Adjust Settings" function (see "Opti-
mized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172).
The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview",
see Section 7.1, "Configuration overview", on page 359.

● Sweep Time.......................................................................................................... 158

● Frequency span.................................................................................................... 159
● Resolution bandwidth (RBW)................................................................................ 159
● Video bandwidth (VBW)........................................................................................ 160
● Detector.................................................................................................................160
● Trace averaging.................................................................................................... 161
● Reference level..................................................................................................... 161

Sweep Time
The "Sweep Time" is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results.
Reproducibility increases with "Sweep Time" since power measurement is then per-
formed over a longer time period. As a general approach, approximately 500 non-cor-
related measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.5 dB. (That means: 95
% of the measurements are within 0.5 dB of the true measured value). Approximately
5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0.1 dB (99 %). These values
are valid for white noise. The measured values are considered as non-correlated if
their time interval corresponds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth.
The number of A/D converter values, N, used to calculate the power, is defined by the
"Sweep Time". The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly propor-
tional to the selected "Sweep Time".
If the sample detector is used, it is best to select the smallest "Sweep Time" possible
for a given span and resolution bandwidth. The minimum time is obtained if the setting
is coupled, that is: the time per measurement is minimal. Extending the measurement
time does not have any advantages. The number of samples for calculating the power
is defined by the number of trace points in the channel.
If the RMS detector is used, the selection of "Sweep Time"s can affect the repeatability
of the measurement results. Repeatability is increased at longer "Sweep Time"s.
If the RMS detector is used, the number of samples can be estimated as follows:
Since only uncorrelated samples contribute to the RMS value, the number of samples
can be calculated from the "Sweep Time" and the resolution bandwidth.
Samples can be assumed to be uncorrelated if sampling is performed at intervals of 1/
RBW. The number of uncorrelated samples is calculated as follows:
Ndecorr = SWT * RBW

(Ndecorr means uncorrelated samples)

The number of uncorrelated samples per trace pixel is obtained by dividing Ndecorr by
1001 (= pixels per trace).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 158

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

The "Sweep Time" can be defined using the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu or in the
"Sweep" configuration dialog box (see "Sweep Time" on page 172).

Frequency span
The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measure-
ment margin of approximately 10 %.
If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adjacent-
channel bandwidths) being analyzed, only a few points on the trace are available per
channel. The calculated waveform for the used channel filter is less accurate, which
has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy. It is therefore strongly recommen-
ded that you consider the described formulas when you select the frequency span.
The frequency span for the defined channel settings can be optimized. Use the "Adjust
Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR
Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172). You can
set the frequency span manually in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box.
(See Section 7.3.4, "How to define the frequency range", on page 480.)
For channel power measurements the "Adjust Settings" function sets the frequency
span as follows:
(No. of transmission channels – 1) x transmission channel spacing + 2 x transmission
channel bandwidth + measurement margin
For adjacent-channel power measurements, the "Adjust Settings" function sets the fre-
quency span as a function of the following parameters:
● Number of transmission channels
● Transmission channel spacing
● Adjacent-channel spacing
● Bandwidth of one of adjacent-channels ADJ, ALT1 or ALT2, whichever is furthest
away from the transmission channels
(No. of transmission channels – 1) * (transmission channel spacing + 2) * (adjacent-
channel spacing + adjacent-channel bandwidth) + measurement margin
The measurement margin is approximately 10 % of the value obtained by adding the
channel spacing and the channel bandwidth.

Resolution bandwidth (RBW)

It is important to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured,
especially of the adjacent channels. At the same time, you expect an acceptable mea-
surement speed. To fulfill both these requirements, the appropriate resolution band-
width is essential. As a general approach, set the resolution bandwidth to values
between 1 % and 4 % of the channel bandwidth.
If the spectrum within the channel to be measured and the spectrum around the chan-
nel has a flat characteristic, you can select a larger resolution bandwidth. In the stan-
dard setting, e.g. for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz,
a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used. This yields correct results since the spectrum
near the adjacent channels normally has a constant level.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 159

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

You can optimize the resolution bandwidth for the defined channel settings. Use the
"Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172).
You can set the RBW manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog box, see "RBW"
on page 349.
Except for the IS95 CDMA standards, the "Adjust Settings" function sets the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) as a function of the channel bandwidth:
"RBW" ≤ 1/40 of "Channel Bandwidth"
The maximum resolution bandwidth (concerning the requirement RBW ≤ 1/40) result-
ing from the available RBW steps (1, 3) is selected.

Video bandwidth (VBW)

For a correct power measurement, the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth. A
restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal causes signal averaging and thus
results in a too low indication of the power (-2.51 dB at very low video bandwidths).
Thus, select the video bandwidth at least three times the resolution bandwidth:
VBW ≥3 * RBW
For FFT sweeps, instead of increasing the VBW, you can also select the trace average
mode "Power" to ensure correct power measurements (see "Average Mode"
on page 627). Note that in power measurements this setting affects the VBW regard-
less of whether or not a trace is actually averaged.
The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized. Use the
"Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172).
You can set the VBW manually in the "Bandwidth" configuration dialog box, see "VBW"
on page 503.
The video bandwidth (VBW) is set as a function of the channel bandwidth (see formula
above) and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size is
selected.

Detector
The RMS detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of
the signal to be measured.
For details, see "RMS average detector" on page 618.
In principle, the sample detector is also possible. However, due to the limited number
of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel, the sample detector
yields less stable results.
You can set the RMS detector for the defined channel settings automatically. Use the
"Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box (see "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172).
You can set the detector manually in the "Traces" configuration dialog box, see "Detec-
tor" on page 626.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 160

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Trace averaging
Avoid averaging, which is often performed to stabilize the measurement results but
leads to a level indication that is too low. The reduction in the displayed power depends
on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea-
sured.
The "Adjust Settings" function switches off trace averaging. You can deactivate the
trace averaging manually in the "Traces" configuration dialog box, see "Average Mode"
on page 627.

Reference level
To achieve an optimum dynamic range, set the reference level so that the signal is as
close to the reference level as possible without forcing an overload message. However,
if the signal-to-noise ratio becomes too small, the dynamic range is also limited. The
measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly smaller than
the signal bandwidth. Thus, the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still
significantly below the reference level.

Selecting a predefined standard or automatically adjusting settings does not affect the
reference level. The reference level can be set automatically using the "Auto Level"
function in the [Auto Set] menu, or manually in the "Amplitude" menu.

6.2.3.4 Measurement on multi-standard radio (MSR) signals

Modern base stations can contain multiple signals for different communication stand-
ards. A new measurement standard is provided for the FSW ACLR measurement that
allows you to measure such MSR signals, including non-contiguous setups. Multiple
(also non-) contiguous transmit channels can be specified at absolute frequencies,
independent from the common center frequency selected for display.

Signal structure
Up to 18 transmit channels can be grouped in a maximum of 8sub blocks. Between
two sub blocks, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an upper gap. Each gap in turn
contains two channels (gap channels). The channels in the upper gap are identical to
those in the lower gap, but inverted. To either side of the outermost transmit channels,
lower and upper adjacent channels can be defined as in common ACLR measurement
setups.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 161

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-24: MSR signal structure

Asymmetrical gap channels

Gap channels between sub blocks can now also be asymmetrical, that is: channels in
the lower and upper gaps are not identical. For example, in Figure 6-25, the gap
between sub blocks A and B contains one lower channel (AB:Gap1L), but two upper
channels (AB:Gap1U, AB:Gap2U). Furthermore, the gaps between different sub blocks
need not be identical. For example, the gap between sub blocks A and B contains 3
gap channels, while the gap between sub blocks B and C contains only two gap chan-
nels (BC:Gap1L, BC:Gap2L, which are not identical to the lower gap channels in gap
AB.

Figure 6-25: Asymmetrical MSR signal structure

Sub block and channel definition

The sub blocks are defined by a specified center frequency, RF bandwidth, and num-
ber of transmit channels.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 162

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-26: Sub block definition

As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the TX channels are defined at

absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center fre-
quency. Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology, used to prede-
fine the required bandwidth.

Gap channels and CACLR

If two or more sub blocks are defined, the power in the gaps between the sub blocks
must also be measured. Gap channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings,
relative to the outer edges of the surrounding sub blocks.
If the upper and lower gap channels are symmetrical, only two gap channels must be
configured. The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula
(indicated for lower channels):
Spacing = [CF of gap channel] - [left sub block CF] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub
block] /2)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 163

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-27: Gap channel definition for lower gap

If the gap channels are not symmetrical, you must configure up to four channels indi-
vidually. The formula indicated above applies for the lower channels. For the upper
channels, the spacing is defined as:
Spacing = [right sub block CF]- [CF of gap channel] - ([RF bandwidth of right sub
block] /2)
According to the MSR standard, the Cumulative Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio
(CACLR) power must be determined for the gap channels. The CACLR power is mea-
sured in the two gap channels for the upper and lower gap. The power in the gap chan-
nels is then set in relation to the power of the two closest transmission channels to
either side of the gap. The CACLR power for the gap channels is indicated in the
Result Summary.
In addition, the ACLR power for the individual gap channels is indicated in the Result
Summary. The ACLR power of the lower gap channels refers to the TX channel to the
left of the gap. The ACLR power of the upper gap channels refers to the TX channel to
the right of the gap. A separate relative limit value can be defined for the ACLR power.

Adjacent channels
Adjacent channels are defined as in common ACLR measurements using bandwidths
and spacings, relative to the uppermost or lowermost transmit channels in the sub
blocks (see also Figure 6-24):
● The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first TX channel
in the first sub block.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 164

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

● The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last TX channel
in the last sub block.

The upper and lower adjacent channels can also be defined asymmetrically (see "Sym-
metrical Adjacent Setup" on page 182). This is particularly useful if the lowest TX chan-
nel and highest TX channel use different standards and thus require different band-
widths for adjacent channel power measurement.

Channel display for MSR signals

As in common ACLR measurements, the individual channels are indicated by different
colored bars in the diagram. The height of each bar corresponds to the measured
power of that channel. In addition, the name of the channel is indicated above the bar.
Sub blocks are named A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H and are also indicated by a slim blue bar along
the frequency axis.
TX channel names correspond to the specified technology (for LTE including the band-
width), followed by a consecutive number. (If the channel is too narrow to display the
channel name, "..."is displayed instead.) The assigned sub block is indicated with the
channel name, e.g. "B: LTE_5M1" for the first TX channel in sub block B that uses the
LTE 5 MHz bandwidth technology.
Adjacent and alternate channels are displayed as in common ACLR measurements.
Gap channels are indicated using the following syntax:
● The names of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub
blocks A and B),
● The channel name ("Gap1" or "Gap2")
● "L" (for lower) or "U" (for upper)
For example: "ABGap1L" indicates the first lower gap channel between sub blocks A
and B.
Both the lower and upper gap channels are displayed.

For symmetrical configuration, gap channels can be hidden if they do not reach a mini-
mum size.
For asymmetrical configuration, you can define the number of upper or lower gap
channels to be displayed.
In both cases, you can deactivate all gap channels. This enhances the result display,
as fewer lines and bars are displayed. If gap channels are deactivated, the power
results are not calculated and thus are not shown in the Result Summary table.
Furthermore, channel names for all TX, adjacent, and alternate channels are user-
definable (not gap channels).

Channel power results

The Result Summary for MSR signal measurements is similar to the table for common
signals (see Section 6.2.2, "Channel power results", on page 152). However, the TX
channel results are grouped by sub blocks, and sub block totals are provided instead

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 165

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

of a total TX channel power. Instead of the individual channel frequency offsets, the
absolute center frequencies are indicated for the transmit channels.
The CACLR and ACLR power results for each gap channel are appended at the end of
the table. The CACLR results are calculated as the power in the gap channel divided
by the power sum of the two closest transmission channels to either side of it.

Figure 6-28: Result summary for symmetrical channel definition

Figure 6-29: Result summary for asymmetrical channel definition

Remote command:
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? GACLr or
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? MACM, see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915

Restrictions and dependencies

As the signal structure in multi-standard radio signals can vary considerably, you can
define the channels very flexibly for the ACLR measurement with the FSW. No checks
or limitations are implemented concerning the channel definitions, apart from the maxi-
mum number of channels to be defined. Thus, you are not notified if transmit channels
for a specific sub block lie outside the defined frequency range for the sub block, or if
transmit and gap channels overlap.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 166

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

6.2.4 Channel power configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Config"
Both Channel Power (CP) and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) measurements are
available.

If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see "Standard" on page 168), the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box. See Sec-
tion 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR configuration", on page 177 for a description of these settings.

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.3, "Measuring the channel power and ACLR", on page 918.
● General CP/ACLR measurement settings............................................................ 167
● Channel setup.......................................................................................................173

6.2.4.1 General CP/ACLR measurement settings

General measurement settings are defined in the "ACLR Setup" dialog, in the "General
Settings" tab.
Standard......................................................................................................................168
└ Predefined Standards................................................................................... 168
└ User Standards............................................................................................. 168

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 167

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Number of channels: Tx, Adj.......................................................................................169

Reference Channel..................................................................................................... 170
Noise Cancellation...................................................................................................... 170
Fast ACLR...................................................................................................................171
Selected Trace............................................................................................................ 171
Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode).............................................................. 171
Channel power level and density (Power Unit)........................................................... 171
Power Mode................................................................................................................ 172
Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements (Set CP Reference)..... 172
Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)...........................................................................172
Sweep Time................................................................................................................ 172

Standard
The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a stan-
dard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automati-
cally set on the FSW. However, the settings can be changed. Predefined standards are
available for standard measurements, but standard files with user-defined configura-
tions can also be created.
Note: If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box
is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box (see Section 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR con-
figuration", on page 177).
If any other predefined standard (or "NONE") is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box
is restored (see Section 6.2.4, "Channel power configuration", on page 167).
Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are
exchanged.

Predefined Standards ← Standard

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the FSW. However, you can change the settings.
The predefined standards contain the following settings:
● Channel bandwidths
● Channel spacings
● Detector
● Trace Average setting
● Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)
● Weighting Filter
For details on the available standards, see Section 6.2.9, "Reference: predefined CP/
ACLR standards", on page 206.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 919

User Standards ← Standard

Access: "CP / ACLR Config" > "General Settings" tab > "Manage User Standards"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 168

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

In addition to the predefined standards, you can save your own standards with your
specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later. User-
defined standards are stored on the instrument in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std direc-
tory.
A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement (MSR_ACLRExample.xml).
It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the
file C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR measurements.
Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to
the FSW. User standards created on an FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible
to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard:
● Number of adjacent channels
● Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) chan-
nels
● Channel spacings
● Weighting filters
● Resolution bandwidth
● Video bandwidth
● Detector
● ACLR limits and their state
● "Sweep Time" and "Sweep Time" coupling
● Trace and power mode
● (MSR only: sub block and gap channel definition)
Save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard, load a stored mea-
surement configuration, or delete an existing configuration file.
For details see Section 6.2.6.4, "How to manage user-defined configurations",
on page 198.
Remote command:
To query all available standards:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?
on page 919
To load a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 919
To save a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE
on page 920
To delete a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete
on page 920

Number of channels: Tx, Adj

Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 169

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Results are provided for the Tx channel and the number of defined adjacent channels
above and below the Tx channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, the carrier
channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced
must be defined (see "Reference Channel" on page 170).
Note: If several carriers (Tx channels) are activated for the measurement, the number
of sweep points is increased to ensure that adjacent-channel powers are measured
with adequate accuracy.
For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers,
see Section 6.2.2, "Channel power results", on page 152.
Remote command:
Number of Tx channels:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 925
Number of Adjacent channels:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 921

Reference Channel
The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the
transmission channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, define which one is used
as a reference channel.

Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used.

(Not available for MSR ACLR)

Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel.

Max Power Tx Chan- The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel
nel (Default).

Lowest & Highest The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower
Channel adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission channel that for the upper
adjacent channels.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 928
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 928

Noise Cancellation
The FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which
increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried
out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that
is being analyzed (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu-
tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when-
ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the
screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate
it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
For an active external frontend, noise cancellation is not available. See "External Fron-
tend Connection State" on page 453.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 170

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see
"Detector" on page 626):
● RMS
● Average
● Sample
● Positive peak
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1212

Fast ACLR
If activated, instead of using the IBW method, the FSW sets the center frequency to
the different channel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with
the selected measurement time (= sweep time/number of channels).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed on page 940

Selected Trace
The CP/ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 918

Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode)

The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz (absolute values),
or in dBc, relative to the specified reference Tx channel.
"Abs" The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit
of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm, dBµV.
"Rel" The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of
the transmission channel in dBc.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 974

Channel power level and density (Power Unit)

By default, the channel power is displayed in absolute values. If "/Hz" or "/MHz" is acti-
vated, the channel power density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the
channel power is switched from dBm to dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz.
Note: The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power inside a band-
width of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows:
"channel power density = channel power – log10(channel bandwidth)"
Thus you can measure the signal/noise power density, for example, or use the addi-
tional functions Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) and Reference Channel to
obtain the signal to noise ratio.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ on page 973
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT on page 973

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 171

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Power Mode
The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ("Clear/ Write"),
or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ("Max
Hold"). In the latter case, the power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value
is retained. If "Max Hold" mode is activated, "Pwr Max" is indicated in the table header.
Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 914

Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements (Set CP Reference)

If only one TX channel and no adjacent channels are defined, the currently measured
channel power can be used as a fixed reference value for subsequent channel power
measurements.
When you select this button, the channel power currently measured on the TX channel
is stored as a fixed reference power. In the following channel power measurements,
the power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power. The reference value is dis-
played in the "Reference" field (in relative ACLR mode); the default value is 0 dBm.
Note: In adjacent-channel power measurement, the power is always referenced to a
transmission channel (see "Reference Channel" on page 170), thus, this function is not
available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE on page 927

Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)

All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel
spacing) can be optimized automatically.
The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be
changed later.
The following settings are optimized by "Adjust Settings":
● "Frequency span" on page 159
● "Resolution bandwidth (RBW)" on page 159
● "Video bandwidth (VBW)" on page 160
● "Detector" on page 160
● "Trace averaging" on page 161
Note: The reference level is not affected by this function. To adjust the reference level
automatically, use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) function
in the [Auto Set] menu.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 917

Sweep Time
With the RMS detector, a longer "Sweep Time" increases the stability of the measure-
ment results. For recommendations on setting this parameter, see "Sweep Time"
on page 158.
The "Sweep Time" can be set via the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu and is identical
to the general setting in the "Sweep" configuration dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 172

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1208

6.2.4.2 Channel setup

The "Channel Settings" tab in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box provides all the channel
settings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement. You can define the
channel settings for all channels, independent of the defined number of used TX or
adjacent channels (see "Number of channels: Tx, Adj" on page 169).
For details on setting up channels, see Section 6.2.6.2, "How to set up the channels",
on page 195.

In addition to the specific channel settings, the general settings "Standard"

on page 168 and "Number of channels: Tx, Adj" on page 169 are also available in this
tab.

The following settings are available in individual subtabs of the "Channel Settings" tab.
Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 174
Channel Spacings....................................................................................................... 174
Limit Check................................................................................................................. 175
Total Limit Pass Mode................................................................................................. 176
Weighting Filters..........................................................................................................177
Channel Names.......................................................................................................... 177

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 173

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Channel Bandwidth

The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard.

The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard. The bandwidth for
each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.
For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined
in the selected standard, use the IBW method ("Fast ACLR" "Off"). With the IBW
method, the channel bandwidth borders are right and left of the channel center fre-
quency. Thus, you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test
is within the selected channel bandwidth.
The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent
Tx channels. Thus, only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth.
The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all
alternate (ALT) channels. Thus, only enter one value if all adjacent channels have the
same bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel on page 921
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> on page 922

Channel Spacings
Channel spacings are normally defined by the transmission standard but can be
changed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 174

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

If the spacings are not equal, the channel distribution in relation to the center frequency
is as follows:

Odd number of Tx channels The middle Tx channel is centered to center frequency.

Even number of Tx channels The two Tx channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre-
quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to
the center frequency.

The spacings between all Tx channels can be defined individually. When you change
the spacing for one channel, the value is automatically also defined for all subsequent
Tx channels. This allows you to set up a system with equal Tx channel spacing quickly.
For different spacings, set up the channels from top to bottom.

Tx1-2 Spacing between the first and the second carrier

Tx2-3 Spacing between the second and the third carrier

… …

If you change the adjacent-channel spacing (ADJ), all higher adjacent channel spac-
ings (ALT1, ALT2, …) are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing
value). Again, only enter one value for equal channel spacing. For different spacing,
configure the spacings from top to bottom.
For details, see Section 6.2.6.2, "How to set up the channels", on page 195
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> on page 924
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> on page 924

Limit Check
During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they
exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be
defined, or both. Both limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured lev-
els are absolute or relative values. The check of both limit values can be activated
independently. If any active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in
red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table.

The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta-
tus registry (see Section 12.2.2.6, "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register",
on page 832).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 935
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 929

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 175

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute on page 929

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe
on page 931
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] on page 930
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe
on page 932
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute on page 932
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe
on page 934
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]
on page 933
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? on page 930

Total Limit Pass Mode

Supported only by the LTE and 5G application.
Access (ACLR measurement): "Meas Config" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Channel Set-
tings" > "Limits"
Access (multi-carrier ACLR measurement): "Meas Config" > "CP / ACLR Config" >
"MSR General Settings"
The "Total Limit Pass Mode" selects the logic the ACLR limits are evaluated with if you
define both absolute limits and relative limits.

Figure 6-30: Evaluate both absolute and relative limits

If you define only relative or absolute limits, the FSW only evaluates the corresponding
limits.

Figure 6-31: Evaluate only relative limits

If you change the limit evaluation method after the measurement, you have to refresh
the measurement.
The selected method adjusts the contents of the following result displays.
● ACLR result summary
The default value is according to 3GPP 36.141 and 38.141-x.
"Absolute" Checks the absolute limits defined for the ACLR. The limit check
passes when the signal level is within the absolute limits.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 176

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

"Relative" Checks the relative limits defined for the ACLR. The limit check
passes when the signal level is within the relative limits.
"Absolute and The limit check for both, the absolute and the relative limits, must
Relative" pass to get an overall pass.
"Absolute or The limit check for either the absolute or the relative limits must pass
Relative" to get an overall pass.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe on page 934

Weighting Filters
Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total
measurement result. For each channel you can activate or deactivate the use of the
weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ("Alpha:" value).
Weighting filters are not available for all supported standards and cannot always be
defined manually where they are available.
Remote command:
Activating/Deactivating:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch> on page 927
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel on page 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 927
Alpha value:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> on page 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 925

Channel Names
In the FSW's display, carrier channels are labeled "Tx" by default; the first neighboring
channel is labeled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labeled "Alt" (alternate)
channels. You can define user-specific channel names for each channel which are dis-
played in the result diagram and result table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> on page 923

6.2.5 MSR ACLR configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config"
ACLR measurements can also be performed on input containing multiple signals for
different communication standards. A new measurement standard is provided that
allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies,
independent from the selected center frequency. If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard
is selected (see "Standard" on page 168), the "ACLR Setup" dialog box is replaced by
the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 177

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

For more information, see Section 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on multi-standard radio

(MSR) signals", on page 161.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.3, "Measuring the channel power and ACLR", on page 918.
● General MSR ACLR measurement settings......................................................... 178
● MSR sub block and TX channel definition............................................................ 183
● MSR adjacent channel setup................................................................................ 186
● MSR gap channel setup........................................................................................189
● MSR channel names.............................................................................................193

6.2.5.1 General MSR ACLR measurement settings

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "MSR General
Settings" tab

Standard......................................................................................................................179
└ Predefined Standards................................................................................... 179
└ User Standards............................................................................................. 179
Number of Sub Blocks................................................................................................ 180
Reference Channel..................................................................................................... 180
Noise Cancellation...................................................................................................... 181
Selected Trace............................................................................................................ 181
Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode).............................................................. 181
Channel power level and density (Power Unit)........................................................... 182
Power Mode................................................................................................................ 182
Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)...........................................................................182
Symmetrical Adjacent Setup....................................................................................... 182
Limit Checking.............................................................................................................183

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 178

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Standard
The main measurement settings can be stored as a standard file. When such a stan-
dard is loaded, the required channel and general measurement settings are automati-
cally set on the FSW. However, the settings can be changed. Predefined standards are
available for standard measurements, but standard files with user-defined configura-
tions can also be created.
Note: If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box
is replaced by the "MSR ACLR Setup" dialog box (see Section 6.2.5, "MSR ACLR con-
figuration", on page 177).
If any other predefined standard (or "NONE") is selected, the "ACLR Setup" dialog box
is restored (see Section 6.2.4, "Channel power configuration", on page 167).
Note that changes in the configuration are not stored when the dialog boxes are
exchanged.

Predefined Standards ← Standard

Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure-
ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati-
cally set on the FSW. However, you can change the settings.
The predefined standards contain the following settings:
● Channel bandwidths
● Channel spacings
● Detector
● Trace Average setting
● Resolution Bandwidth (RBW)
● Weighting Filter
For details on the available standards, see Section 6.2.9, "Reference: predefined CP/
ACLR standards", on page 206.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 919

User Standards ← Standard

Access: "CP / ACLR Config" > "General Settings" tab > "Manage User Standards"
In addition to the predefined standards, you can save your own standards with your
specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later. User-
defined standards are stored on the instrument in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std direc-
tory.
A sample file is provided for an MSR ACLR measurement (MSR_ACLRExample.xml).
It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform described in the
file C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Note that ACLR user standards are not supported for Fast ACLR measurements.
Note: User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to
the FSW. User standards created on an FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible
to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.
The following parameter definitions are saved in a user-defined standard:
● Number of adjacent channels

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 179

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

● Channel bandwidth of transmission (Tx), adjacent (Adj) and alternate (Alt) chan-
nels
● Channel spacings
● Weighting filters
● Resolution bandwidth
● Video bandwidth
● Detector
● ACLR limits and their state
● "Sweep Time" and "Sweep Time" coupling
● Trace and power mode
● (MSR only: sub block and gap channel definition)
Save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard, load a stored mea-
surement configuration, or delete an existing configuration file.
For details see Section 6.2.6.4, "How to manage user-defined configurations",
on page 198.
Remote command:
To query all available standards:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?
on page 919
To load a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 919
To save a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE
on page 920
To delete a standard:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete
on page 920

Number of Sub Blocks

Defines the number of sub blocks, i.e. groups of transmission channels in an MSR sig-
nal.
For more information, see Section 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on multi-standard radio
(MSR) signals", on page 161.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBCount on page 942

Reference Channel
The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the
transmission channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, define which one is used
as a reference channel.

Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used.

(Not available for MSR ACLR)

Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 180

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Max Power Tx Chan- The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel
nel (Default).

Lowest & Highest The outer left-hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower
Channel adjacent channels, the outer right-hand transmission channel that for the upper
adjacent channels.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual on page 928
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO on page 928

Noise Cancellation
The FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which
increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried
out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that
is being analyzed (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu-
tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when-
ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the
screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate
it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
For an active external frontend, noise cancellation is not available. See "External Fron-
tend Connection State" on page 453.
Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see
"Detector" on page 626):
● RMS
● Average
● Sample
● Positive peak
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1212

Selected Trace
The CP/ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 918

Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode)

The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm/Hz (absolute values),
or in dBc, relative to the specified reference Tx channel.
"Abs" The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit
of the y-axis, e.g. in dBm, dBµV.
"Rel" The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of
the transmission channel in dBc.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 181

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE on page 974

Channel power level and density (Power Unit)

By default, the channel power is displayed in absolute values. If "/Hz" or "/MHz" is acti-
vated, the channel power density is displayed instead. Thus, the absolute unit of the
channel power is switched from dBm to dBm/Hz or dBm/MHz.
Note: The channel power density in dBm/Hz corresponds to the power inside a band-
width of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows:
"channel power density = channel power – log10(channel bandwidth)"
Thus you can measure the signal/noise power density, for example, or use the addi-
tional functions Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode) and Reference Channel to
obtain the signal to noise ratio.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ on page 973
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:UNIT on page 973

Power Mode
The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ("Clear/ Write"),
or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ("Max
Hold"). In the latter case, the power values are calculated from the current trace and
compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm. The higher value
is retained. If "Max Hold" mode is activated, "Pwr Max" is indicated in the table header.
Note that the trace mode remains unaffected by this setting.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 914

Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)

All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel
spacing) can be optimized automatically.
The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be
changed later.
The following settings are optimized by "Adjust Settings":
● "Frequency span" on page 159
● "Resolution bandwidth (RBW)" on page 159
● "Video bandwidth (VBW)" on page 160
● "Detector" on page 160
● "Trace averaging" on page 161
Note: The reference level is not affected by this function. To adjust the reference level
automatically, use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) function
in the [Auto Set] menu.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 917

Symmetrical Adjacent Setup

If enabled, the upper and lower adjacent and alternate channels are defined symmetri-
cally. This is the default behavior.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 182

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

If disabled, the upper and lower channels can be configured differently. This is particu-
larly useful if the lowest TX channel and highest TX channel use different standards
and thus require different bandwidths for adjacent channel power measurement.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup on page 946

Limit Checking
Activates or deactivates limit checks globally for all adjacent and gap channels. In addi-
tion to this setting, limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel.
The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta-
tus registry (see Section 12.2.2.6, "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register",
on page 832).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 935

6.2.5.2 MSR sub block and TX channel definition

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Tx Channels"
tab
The "Tx Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure sub blocks and TX
channels in MSR ACLR measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 183

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

For details on MSR signals, see Section 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on multi-standard

radio (MSR) signals", on page 161.
For details on setting up channels, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an MSR
ACLR measurement", on page 196.
The TX channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual sub-
tabs of the "Tx Channel Settings" tab.
Sub Block Definition.................................................................................................... 184
└ Sub Block / Center Freq................................................................................184
└ RF Bandwidth............................................................................................... 184
└ Number of Tx Channels (Tx Count).............................................................. 184
Tx Channel Definition..................................................................................................184
└ Tx Center Frequency.................................................................................... 185
└ Technology Used for Transmission...............................................................185
└ Tx Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................185
└ Weighting Filters........................................................................................... 185

Sub Block Definition

Sub blocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal. Up to 8 sub blocks can
be defined. They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequency with a
specific number of transmit channels (max. 18).
Sub blocks are named A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H and are indicated by a slim blue bar along the
frequency axis.

Sub Block / Center Freq ← Sub Block Definition

Defines the center of an MSR sub block. Note that the position of the sub block also
affects the position of the adjacent gap channels.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:FREQuency:CENTer on page 944

RF Bandwidth ← Sub Block Definition

Defines the bandwidth of the individual MSR sub block. Note that sub block ranges
also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth on page 944

Number of Tx Channels (Tx Count) ← Sub Block Definition

Defines the number of transmit channels the specific sub block contains. The maxi-
mum is 18 TX channels.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt on page 945

Tx Channel Definition
As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the TX channels are defined at
absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center fre-
quency. Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology, used to prede-
fine the required bandwidth.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 184

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

The TX channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual sub-
tabs of the "Tx Channel Settings" tab.
For details on configuring MSR TX channels, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an
MSR ACLR measurement", on page 196.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 970

Tx Center Frequency ← Tx Channel Definition

Defines the (absolute) center frequency of an MSR TX channel. Each TX channel is
defined independently of the others; automatic spacing as in common ACLR measure-
ments is not performed.
Note that the position of the adjacent channels is also affected by:
● The position of the first TX channel in the first sub block
● The position of last TX channel in the last sub block
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 943

Technology Used for Transmission ← Tx Channel Definition

The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for
each channel. The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are pre-
configured automatically according to the selected technology standard.
"GSM" Transmission according to GSM standard
"W-CDMA" Transmission according to W-CDMA standard
"LTE_xxx"
Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel band-
widths
"USER" User-defined transmission; no automatic preconfiguration possible
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>]
on page 945

Tx Channel Bandwidth ← Tx Channel Definition

The TX channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission technology stan-
dard. The correct bandwidth is predefined automatically for the selected technology.
Each TX channel is defined independently of the others; automatic bandwidth configu-
ration for subsequent channels as in common ACLR measurements is not performed.
The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>]
on page 943

Weighting Filters ← Tx Channel Definition

Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total
measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the
weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ("Alpha:" value).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 185

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Remote command:
Activating/Deactivating:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>
on page 942
Alpha value:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch>
on page 942

6.2.5.3 MSR adjacent channel setup

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Adjacent
Channels" tab
The "Adjacent Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure adjacent
and gap channels in MSR ACLR measurements.

For symmetrical channel definition (see "Symmetrical Adjacent Setup" on page 182),
the dialog box is reduced as the upper and lower channels are identical.

Figure 6-32: Asymmetrical adjacent channel definition

For details on setting up channels, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an MSR
ACLR measurement", on page 196.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 186

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Number of Adjacent Channels (Adj Count)................................................................. 187

Adjacent Channel Definition........................................................................................187
└ Adjacent Channel Spacings..........................................................................187
└ Adjacent Channel Bandwidths...................................................................... 187
└ Weighting Filters........................................................................................... 188
└ Limit Checking.............................................................................................. 188

Number of Adjacent Channels (Adj Count)

Defines the number of adjacent channels above and below the TX channel block in an
MSR signal. You must define the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel
power values refer (see "Reference Channel" on page 170).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs on page 921

Adjacent Channel Definition

Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals. A
maximum of 12 adjacent channels can be defined.
For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of
the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.:
● The lower adjacent channels are defined in relation to the CF of the first TX chan-
nel in the first sub block.
● The upper adjacent channels are defined in relation to the CF of the last TX chan-
nel in the last sub block.
Adjacent channels are named "Adj" and "Alt1" to "Alt11" by default; the names can be
changed manually (see Section 6.2.5.5, "MSR channel names", on page 193).
In all other respects, channel definition is identical to common ACLR measurements.

Adjacent Channel Spacings ← Adjacent Channel Definition

Channel spacings are normally predefined by the selected technology but can be
changed.
For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of
the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.:
● The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first TX channel
in the first sub block.
● The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last TX channel
in the last sub block.
For details, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement",
on page 196
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> on page 924
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel on page 946
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> on page 946

Adjacent Channel Bandwidths ← Adjacent Channel Definition

The adjacent channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology
standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology. The
bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 187

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel on page 921
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> on page 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel on page 947
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> on page 947

Weighting Filters ← Adjacent Channel Definition

Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total
measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the
weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ("Alpha:" value).
Remote command:
Activating/Deactivating:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel on page 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 927
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel on page 948
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> on page 948
Alpha value:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel on page 948
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch> on page 948

Limit Checking ← Adjacent Channel Definition

During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they
exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be
defined, or both, for each individual adjacent channel. Both limit types are considered,
regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values. The check of
both limit values can be activated independently. If any active limit value is exceeded,
the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the
result table.
Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels, limit checking
must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement (see "Limit Checking"
on page 183).

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 935
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe on page 929
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute on page 929
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe
on page 931
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] on page 930
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe
on page 932
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute on page 932

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 188

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe
on page 934
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]
on page 933
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult? on page 930

6.2.5.4 MSR gap channel setup

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Gap Chan-
nels" tab
The "Gap Channels" tab provides all the channel settings to configure gap channels in
MSR ACLR measurements.

Figure 6-33: Symmetrical (auto) gap channel configuration

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 189

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-34: Asymmetrical (manual) gap channel configuration

For details on MSR signals, see Section 6.2.3.4, "Measurement on multi-standard

radio (MSR) signals", on page 161.
For details on setting up channels, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an MSR
ACLR measurement", on page 196.
Activate Gaps..............................................................................................................190
Gap Mode................................................................................................................... 190
Gap Channel Definition............................................................................................... 191
└ Minimum gap size to show Gap 1/ Minimum gap size to show Gap 2..........191
└ Gap Channel Active...................................................................................... 191
└ Gap Channel Spacing...................................................................................191
└ Gap Channel Bandwidths............................................................................. 192
└ Weighting Filters........................................................................................... 193
└ Limit Checking.............................................................................................. 193

Activate Gaps
If enabled, the gap channels are displayed and channel power results are calculated
and displayed in the Result Summary.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels on page 949

Gap Mode
In "Auto" mode, upper and lower gap channels are configured identically, so only two
channels need to be configured (gap 1, gap 2). Gap channels are configured identically
for all gaps, if more than two sub blocks are defined. Depending on the defined mini-
mum gap size, the actual number of evaluated gap channels is determined automati-
cally.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 190

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

In "Manual" mode, up to four channels can be configured individually for each gap. If
enabled, the configured gap channels are always evaluated, regardless of the gap
size.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>:MODE on page 949

Gap Channel Definition

Between two sub blocks in an MSR signal, two gaps are defined: a lower gap and an
upper gap. Each gap in turn can contain two channels, the gap channels.
By default ("Auto" gap mode, see "Gap Mode" on page 190), the channels in the upper
gap are assumed to be identical to those in the lower gap, but inverted. Thus, you only
have to configure two gap channels in the FSW MSR ACLR measurement. All other
gap channels are configured automatically.
In manual gap mode, you can define up to four different gap channels per gap individu-
ally. Each gap is configured on a separate subtab. Only gaps between defined sub
blocks are available. If only one sub block is defined, gap channels cannot be defined
manually.
Gap channels are indicated using the following syntax:
● The names of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub
blocks A and B)
● The channel name ("Gap1" or "Gap2")
● "L" (for lower) or "U" (for upper)

Minimum gap size to show Gap 1/ Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 ← Gap
Channel Definition
If the gap between the sub blocks does not exceed the specified bandwidth, the gap
channels are not displayed in the diagram. The gap channel results are not calculated
in the result summary.
This command is only available for symmetrical gap channels in "Auto" gap mode (see
"Gap Mode" on page 190).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe on page 954

Gap Channel Active ← Gap Channel Definition

Defines which gap channels are active in the specified gap for asymmetrical (manual)
configuration of gap channels.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer
on page 967
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GCHannel[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer
on page 967

Gap Channel Spacing ← Gap Channel Definition

Gap channel spacings are normally predefined by the MSR standard but can be
changed.
Gap channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings, relative to the outer edges
of the surrounding sub blocks.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 191

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula (indicated
for lower channels):
Spacing = [CF of gap channel] - [left sub block CF] + ([RF band-
width of left sub block] /2)

Figure 6-35: Gap channel definition for lower gap

For details, see Section 6.2.6.3, "How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement",
on page 196.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 954
For manual (asymmetrical) configuration:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 968
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 968

Gap Channel Bandwidths ← Gap Channel Definition

The gap channel bandwidth is normally predefined by the transmission technology
standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology. The
bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display (if the gap is not
too narrow, see "Channel display for MSR signals" on page 165).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 953
For manual (asymmetrical) configuration:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 963
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 964

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 192

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Weighting Filters ← Gap Channel Definition

Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of individual channels on the total
measurement result. For each channel, you can activate or deactivate the use of the
weighting filter and define an individual weighting factor ("Alpha:" value).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 954
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 953
For manual (asymmetrical) configuration:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer
on page 964
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer
on page 965
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer
on page 966
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer
on page 966

Limit Checking ← Gap Channel Definition

During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they
exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be
defined, or both, for each individual gap channel. Both limit types are considered,
regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values. The check of
both limit values can be activated independently. Furthermore, relative limits can be
defined and activated individually for ACLR or CACLR power levels.
If any active limit value is exceeded, the measured value is displayed in red and
marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table.
Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels, limit checking
must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement (see "Limit Checking"
on page 183).
Remote command:
"Automatic (symmetrical) configuration" on page 950

6.2.5.5 MSR channel names

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR
Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Names" tab
Channel names for all TX, adjacent, and alternate channels are user-definable.
In the "Names" tab, you can define a customized name for each channel in each sub
block. Note that the names are not checked for uniqueness.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 193

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-36: Channel name definition for asymmetric adjacent channels

Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 970
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel on page 969
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> on page 970

6.2.6 How to perform channel power measurements

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate the most common tasks when per-
forming channel power measurements.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.3.11, "Programming examples for channel
power measurements", on page 974.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 194

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

● How to perform a standard channel power measurement.................................... 195

● How to set up the channels...................................................................................195
● How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement....................................................196
● How to manage user-defined configurations.........................................................198
● How to compare the TX channel power in successive measurements.................199

6.2.6.1 How to perform a standard channel power measurement

Performing a channel power or ACLR measurement according to common standards is

a very easy and straightforward task with the FSW.

1. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

2. Select "Channel Power ACLR".

The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.

3. Select "CP / ACLR Standard".

4. Select a standard from the list.

The measurement is restarted with the predefined settings for the selected stan-
dard.

5. If necessary, edit the settings for your specific measurement as described in Sec-
tion 6.2.6.2, "How to set up the channels", on page 195, or load a user-defined
configuration (see "To load a user-defined configuration" on page 198).

6.2.6.2 How to set up the channels

Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges.
Usually, the power levels in one or more carrier (TX) channels and possibly the adja-
cent channels are of interest. Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels
can be defined.
When a measurement standard is selected, all settings including the channel band-
widths and channel spacings are set according to the selected standard. Select a stan-
dard in the "Ch Power" menu or the "ACLR Setup" dialog box. You can adjust the set-
tings afterwards.
Channel setup consists of the following settings:
● The number of transmission (TX) and adjacent channels
● The bandwidth of each channel
● For multicarrier ACLR measurements: which TX channel is used as a reference
● The spacing between the individual channels
● Optionally: the names of the channels displayed in the diagram and result table
● Optionally: the influence of individual channels on the total measurement result
("Weighting Filter")
● Optionally: limits for a limit check on the measured power levels

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 195

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see Sec-

tion 6.2.6.4, "How to manage user-defined configurations", on page 198.

► To configure the channels in the "Ch Power" dialog box, select "Ch Power" > "CP /
ACLR Config" > "Channel Settings" tab.

In the "Channel Setup" dialog box, you can define the channel settings for all channels,
independent of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels.

To define channel spacings

Channel spacings are normally defined by the selected standard but can be changed.
► In the "Channel Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select the "Spacing"
subtab.
The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse-
quent TX channels. Thus, only enter one value if all TX channels have the same
spacing.
If the channel spacing for the adjacent or an alternate channel is changed, all
higher alternate channel spacings are multiplied by the same factor (new spacing
value/old spacing value). The lower adjacent-channel spacings remain unchanged.
Only enter one value for equal channel spacing.

Example: Defining channel spacing

In the default setting, the adjacent channels have the following spacing: 20 kHz
("ADJ"), 40 kHz ("ALT1"), 60 kHz ("ALT2"), 80 kHz ("ALT3"), 100 kHz ("ALT4"), …
Set the spacing of the first adjacent channel ("ADJ") to 40 kHz. For all other adjacent
channels, the spacing is multiplied by factor 2: 80 kHz ("ALT1"), 120 kHz ("ALT2"), 160
kHz ("ALT3"), …
Starting from the default setting, set the spacing of the fifth adjacent channel ("ALT4")
to 150 kHz. For all higher adjacent channels, the spacing is multiplied by factor 1.5:
180 kHz ("ALT5"), 210 kHz ("ALT6"), 240 kHz ("ALT7"), …

6.2.6.3 How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement

You configure ACLR measurements on MSR signals in a special configuration dialog

box on the FSW.

1. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

2. Select "Channel Power ACLR".

The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.

3. Select "CP / ACLR Standard".

4. Select the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard from the list.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 196

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

5. Select "CP / ACLR Config" to configure general MSR settings, including the num-
ber of sub blocks (up to 8).
To configure asymmetric adjacent channels, deactivate the "Symmetrical" option in
the general MSR settings.

6. Select the "Tx Channels" tab to configure the sub blocks and transmission chan-
nels.
For each sub block:
a) Define the (center frequency) position and bandwidth of the sub block, as well
as the number of transmission channels it contains.
b) For each transmission channel in the sub block:
● Define the center frequency.
● Select the technology used for transmission.
● Check the bandwidth.
● If necessary, define the use of a weighting filter for the channel.

7. Select the "Adjacent Channels" tab to configure the adjacent channels.

8. Define the number of adjacent channels and the settings for each channel:
● The spacing, defined as the distance of the center frequency from the center
frequency of the first transmission channel in the first sub block.
For asymmetrical channels, define the upper adjacent channel spacing as the
distance from the center frequency of the last transmission channel in the last
sub block.
● The bandwidth
● If necessary, a weighting filter
● Optionally, define and activate relative or absolute limits, or both, against which
the power levels of the channel are to be checked.

9. Select the "Gap Channels" tab to configure the gap channels.

10. Define the following settings for the two (upper or lower) gap channels. Since the
upper and lower channels are identical, it is only necessary to configure two chan-
nels.
● The spacing, defined as the distance of the center frequency from the outer
edge of the sub block to the left or right of the gap. You can determine the
required spacing as follows:
Spacing = [CF of the gap channel] - [left sub block center] + ([RF bandwidth of
left sub block] /2)
● The bandwidth
● If necessary, a weighting filter
● Optionally, define and activate relative or absolute limits, or both, against which
the power levels of the channel are to be checked.

11. If power limits are defined and activated, activate global limit checking for the mea-
surement on the "MSR General Settings" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 197

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

12. Optionally, store the settings for the MSR ACLR measurement as a user-defined
standard as described in "To store a user-defined configuration" on page 198. Oth-
erwise the configuration is lost when you select a different measurement standard.

6.2.6.4 How to manage user-defined configurations

You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefined standard

and save the current ACLR configuration as a "user standard" in an XML file. You can
then load the file and thus the settings again later.
User-defined standards are not supported for "Fast ACLR" and multicarrier ACLR mea-
surements.

Compatibility to R&S FSP

User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the
FSW. User standards created on an FSW, however, are not necessarily compatible to
the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there.

To store a user-defined configuration

1. In the "Ch Power" menu, select "CP / ACLR Config" to display the "ACLR Setup"
dialog box.

2. Configure the measurement as required (see also Section 6.2.6.2, "How to set up
the channels", on page 195).

3. In the "General Settings" tab, select "Manage User Standards" to display the "Man-
age" dialog box.

4. Define a filename and storage location for the user standard.

By default, the XML file is stored in
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std\.
However, you can define any other storage location.

5. Select "Save".

To load a user-defined configuration

1. In the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select "Manage User
Standards" to display the "Manage" dialog box.

2. Select the user standard file.

3. Select "Load".
The stored settings are automatically set on the FSW and the measurement is
restarted with the new parameters.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 198

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

6.2.6.5 How to compare the TX channel power in successive measurements

For power measurements with only one TX channel and no adjacent channels, you
can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to
the stored reference power.

1. Configure a measurement with only one TX channel and no adjacent channels

(see also Section 6.2.6.2, "How to set up the channels", on page 195).

2. In the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, select "Set CP Reference".

The channel power currently measured on the TX channel is stored as a fixed ref-
erence power. The reference value is displayed in the "Reference" field of the
result table (in relative ACLR mode).

3. Start a new measurement.

The resulting power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power.

4. Repeat this for any number of measurements.

5. To start a new measurement without the fixed reference, temporarily define a sec-
ond channel or preset the instrument.

6.2.7 Measurement examples

The FSW has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measure-
ments. These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious setting proce-
dures.

A programming example demonstrating an ACLR measurement in a remote environ-

ment is provided in Section 13.5.3.11, "Programming examples for channel power
measurements", on page 974.

● Measurement example 1 – ACPR measurement on a CDMA2000 signal........... 199

● Measurement example 2 – measuring adjacent channel power of a W-CDMA
uplink signal.......................................................................................................... 201
● Measurement example 3 – measuring the intrinsic noise of the FSW with the chan-
nel power function................................................................................................. 204

6.2.7.1 Measurement example 1 – ACPR measurement on a CDMA2000 signal

Test setup:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 199

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):

Frequency: 850 MHz

Level: 0 dBm

Modulation: CDMA2000

Procedure:

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 850 MHz.

3. Set the span to 4 MHz.

4. Set the reference level to +10 dBm.

5. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

6. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function.

7. Set the "CDMA2000" standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the
"ACLR Setup" dialog box.
The FSW sets the channel configuration according to the 2000 standard with two
adjacent channels above and 2 below the transmit channel. The spectrum is dis-
played in the upper part of the screen, the numeric values of the results and the
channel configuration in the lower part of the screen. The various channels are rep-
resented by vertical lines on the graph.
The frequency span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth and detector are
selected automatically to give correct results. To obtain stable results – especially
in the adjacent channels (30 kHz bandwidth) which are narrow in comparison with
the transmission channel bandwidth (1.23 MHz) – the RMS detector is used.

8. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using
the "Auto Level" function in the [Auto Set] menu.
The FSW sets the optimal RF attenuation and the reference level based on the
transmission channel power to obtain the maximum dynamic range.
The Figure 6-37 shows the result of the measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 200

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-37: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 signal

6.2.7.2 Measurement example 2 – measuring adjacent channel power of a W-CDMA

uplink signal

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):

Frequency: 1950 MHz

Level: 4 dBm

Modulation: 3GPP W-CDMA Reverse Link

Procedure:

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Enter the Spectrum application via [MODE].

3. Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz.

4. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function from the "Select Mea-
surement" dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 201

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

5. Set the "W-CDMA 3GPP REV" standard for adjacent channel power measurement
in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box.
The FSW sets the channel configuration to the W-CDMA standard for mobiles with
two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The frequency span,
the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the
correct values. The spectrum is displayed in the upper window and the channel
power, the level ratios of the adjacent channel powers and the channel configura-
tion in the lower window. The individual channels are displayed as bars in the
graph.

6. Set the optimal reference level and RF attenuation for the applied signal level using
the "Auto Level" function.
The FSW sets the optimum RF attenuation and the reference level for the power in
the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range. The following fig-
ure shows the result of the measurement.

Figure 6-38: Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W-CDMA uplink signal

The FSW measures the power of the individual channels. A root raised cosine filter
with the parameters α = 0.22 and chip rate 3.84 Mcps (= receive filter for W-CDMA)
is used as channel filter.

Optimum Level Setting for ACLR Measurements on W-CDMA Signals

The dynamic range for ACLR measurements is limited by the thermal noise floor, the
phase noise and the intermodulation (spectral regrowth) of the signal analyzer. The
power values produced by the FSW due to these factors accumulate linearly. They
depend on the applied level at the input mixer. The three factors are shown in the fig-
ure below for the adjacent channel (5 MHz carrier offset).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 202

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-39: Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals as a function of the
mixer level

The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e.
the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation. The individual compo-
nents which contribute to the power in the adjacent channel and the resulting relative
level (total ACPR) in the adjacent channel are displayed on the vertical axis. The opti-
mum mixer level is -12 dBm. The relative adjacent channel power (ACPR) at an opti-
mum mixer level is -77 dBc. At a given signal level, the mixer level is set in 1 dB steps
with the 1 dB RF attenuator. Thus, the optimum range spreads from -10 dBm to
-14 dBm.
To set the attenuation parameter manually, the following method is recommended:

► Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level (= measured channel power – RF
attenuation) is between -10 dBm and -14 dBm.

This method is automated with the "Auto Level" function. Especially in remote control
mode, e.g. in production environments, set the attenuation parameters correctly before
the measurement. That saves the time required for automatic setting.

To measure the FSW's intrinsic dynamic range for W-CDMA adjacent channel power
measurements, a filter which suppresses the adjacent channel power is required at the
output of the transmitter. A SAW filter with a bandwidth of 4 MHz, for example, can be
used.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 203

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

6.2.7.3 Measurement example 3 – measuring the intrinsic noise of the FSW with the
channel power function

Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func-
tions. Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined, for exam-
ple.
If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat, the noise marker can be
used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel band-
width. However, in the following cases, the channel power measurement method must
be used to obtain correct measurement results:
● If phase noise and noise that normally increases towards the carrier is dominant in
the channel to be measured
● If there are discrete spurious signals in the channel

Test setup:

► Leave the RF input of the FSW open-circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω.

Procedure:

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz.

3. To obtain maximum sensitivity, set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level

to -40 dBm.

4. Select the "Channel Power ACLR" measurement function from the "Select Mea-
surement" dialog box.

5. In the "ACLR Setup" dialog box, set up a single TX channel with the channel band-
width 1.23 MHz.

6. Select "Adjust Settings".

The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW and VBW) and the
detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measure-
ment.

7. Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the "Sweep Time".

Set the "Sweep Time" to 1 s.
The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel
power measurement display is much more stable.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 204

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Figure 6-40: Measurement of the FSW's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel bandwidth.

6.2.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement

If the results do not meet your expectations, or if you want to minimize the measure-
ment duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement:
● Only activate as many adjacent channels as necessary to minimize the required
span and thus the required measurement time for the measurement.
● Increase the RBW to minimize the measurement time; however, consider the
requirements of the standard if you need to measure according to standard! The
automatic settings are always according to standard.
● Take advantage of the speed optimization mode in the "Sweep" settings if you do
not require the larger dynamic range (see "Optimization" on page 506).
● Reduce the "Sweep Time" and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcu-
lated; however, consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation.
● To improve the stability of the measured results, increase the "Sweep Time",
which also leads to more averaging steps.
● Instead of trace averaging, use an RMS detector with a higher "Sweep Time" to
obtain better average power results in less time.
● To determine a channel power level quickly, use the Time domain power mea-
surement (TDP) rather than a Channel Power measurement. The TDP measure-
ment is a zero span measurement where the sweep time determines the measure-
ment time. Due to the FFT measurement, duplicate averaging is performed, provid-
ing very stable results very quickly.
Note, however, that for TDP measurements, channel filters are not available and a
fixed RBW is used. Thus, the measurement may not be according to standard for
some test cases.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 205

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

6.2.9 Reference: predefined CP/ACLR standards

When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the
channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically.
You can select a predefined standard via "CP / ACLR Standard" in the "Ch Power"
menu or the selection list in the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup" dialog box
(see "Standard" on page 168).
Table 6-9: Predefined CP / ACLR standards with remote command parameters

Standard Remote parameter

None NONE

Multi-Standard Radio MSR

EUTRA/LTE Square EUTRa

EUTRA/LTE Square/RRC REUTra

5G NR DL FR1 20MHz F1D20nr5g

5G NR DL FR1 100MHz F1D100nr5g

5G NR UL FR1 20MHz F1U20nr5g

5G NR UL FR1 100MHz F1U100nr5g

5G NR DL FR2 100MHz F2D100nr5g

5G NR DL FR2 200MHz F2D200nr5g

5G NR UL FR2 100MHz F2U100nr5g

5G NR UL FR2 200MHz F2U200nr5g

W-CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3Gppcdma

W-CDMA 3GPP REV RW3Gppcdma

CDMA IS95A FWD F8CDma

CDMA IS95A REV R8CDma

CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD*) FIS95c0

CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV*) RIS95c0

CDMA J-STD008 FWD F19Cdma

CDMA J-STD008 REV R19Cdma

CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD*) FIS95c1

CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV*) RIS95c1

CDMA2000 S2CDma

TD-SCDMA FWD FTCDma

TD-SCDMA REV TRCDma

WLAN 802.11A AWLAN

WLAN 802.11B BWLAN

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 206

FSW Measurements and results
Channel power and adjacent-channel power (ACLR) measurement

Standard Remote parameter

WIMAX WIMax

WIBRO WIBRo

GSM GSM

RFID 14443 RFID14443

TETRA TETRa

PDC PDC

PHS PHS

CDPD CDPD

APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25

User Standard USER

Customized Standard <string>

For the FSW, the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center fre-
quency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel.
The definition of the adjacent-channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is
different. These standards define the adjacent-channel spacing from the center of the
transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel. This definition is
also used by the FSW for the standards marked with an asterisk *).

6.2.10 Reference: predefined ACLR user standard XML files

In addition to the predefined standards, some user standards with specific measure-
ment settings for common ACLR measurements are provided in XML files on the
instrument in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std direc-
tory.
In particular, a sample file (MSR_ACLRExample.xml) is provided for an MSR ACLR
measurement. It sets up the measurement for the MSR signal generator waveform
described in the file
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\waveform\MSRA_GSM_WCDMA_LTE_GSM.wv.
Furthermore, the following XML files are provided:
5GNR\DL
● 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR1_20MHz
● 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR1_100MHz
● 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR2_100MHz
● 5GNR\DL\5GNR_DL_FR2_200MHz
5GNR\UL
● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR1_20MHz

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 207

FSW Measurements and results
Carrier-to-noise measurements

● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR1_100MHz
● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_100MHz
● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_200MHz
LTE\DL
● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_5MHZ.XML
● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_10MHZ.XML
● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_15MHZ.XML
● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_20MHZ.XML
LTE\UL
● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_5MHZ.XML
● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_10MHZ.XML
● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_15MHZ.XML
● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_20MHZ.XML
WLAN
● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_20MHZ.XML
● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_40MHZ.XML
● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_80MHZ.XML
● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_160MHZ.XML

To load a stored measurement configuration, in the "General Settings" tab of the

"ACLR Setup" dialog box, select "Manage User Standards" to display the "Manage"
dialog box. Select the user standard file, then "Load".
The stored settings are automatically set on the FSW and the measurement is restar-
ted with the new parameters.
For details, see Section 6.2.6.4, "How to manage user-defined configurations",
on page 198.

6.3 Carrier-to-noise measurements

Measures the carrier-to-noise ratio. C/No measurements normalize the ratio to a 1 Hz
bandwidth.
● About the measurement........................................................................................209
● Carrier-to-noise results..........................................................................................209
● Carrier-to-noise configuration................................................................................210
● How to determine the carrier-to-noise ratio........................................................... 211

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 208

FSW Measurements and results
Carrier-to-noise measurements

6.3.1 About the measurement

The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier. When you activate the C/N or
C/N0 function, the FSW searches the (unmodulated) carrier using a peak detector. The
carrier is marked using a fixed reference marker ("FXD").
To determine the noise power, the FSW analyzes a channel with a defined bandwidth
at the defined center frequency. The FSW integrates the power within this channel to
obtain the noise power level. If the carrier is within this channel, you have to switch off
the carrier to determine the correct noise power level. To determine the noise power,
the FSW requires an RMS detector. To switch detectors, you must adjust the settings
between the two measurements (see "Adjust Settings" on page 211).
The FSW subtracts the noise power of the channel from the maximum carrier signal
level. For a C/N0 measurement, the FSW normalizes the result to a 1 Hz bandwidth.

The carrier-to-noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span
>0).

Frequency Span
To measure the carrier-to-noise ratio correctly, set the frequency span to approximately
twice the channel bandwidth. The "Adjust Settings" function automatically uses that
value.

6.3.2 Carrier-to-noise results

As a result of the carrier-to-noise measurement, the evaluated bandwidth and the cal-
culated C/N ratio are displayed in the result window. The fixed reference marker for the
(unmodulated) carrier is indicated in the diagram.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 209

FSW Measurements and results
Carrier-to-noise measurements

Remote command:
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0
See CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915.

6.3.3 Carrier-to-noise configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "C/N"/"C/N0" > "Carrier Noise Config"
Both a carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) and a carrier-to-noise ratio in relation to the band-
width (C/N0) measurement are available.

Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode.

The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview",

see Section 7.1, "Configuration overview", on page 359.

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.4, "Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio", on page 982.
C/N.............................................................................................................................. 210
C/N0............................................................................................................................ 211
Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 211
Adjust Settings.............................................................................................................211

C/N
Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio on or off. If no marker is active,
marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift
marker 1 and measure another trace, use "Marker To Trace" in the "Marker" menu (see
"Assigning the Marker to a Trace" on page 346).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 210

FSW Measurements and results
Carrier-to-noise measurements

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 916
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 917

C/N0
Switches the measurement of the carrier/noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth
on or off. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to. To shift
marker 1 and measure another trace, use "Marker To Trace" in the "Marker" menu (see
"Assigning the Marker to a Trace" on page 346).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 916
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 917

Channel Bandwidth
Defines the channel bandwidth.
The default setting is 14 kHz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 922

Adjust Settings
Enables the RMS detector and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth
according to:
2 * channel bandwidth
The adjustment is performed once. If necessary, you can change the setting later.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 917

6.3.4 How to determine the carrier-to-noise ratio

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the carrier-to-

noise ratio.

For remote operation, see "Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise

ratio" on page 982.

1. Select [MEAS].

2. To configure the measurement without reference to the bandwidth, select "C/N".

To configure the measurement with reference to the bandwidth, select "C/N0".

3. To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed, select "Channel Bandwidth".

4. Select [RUN SINGLE].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 211

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

The fixed reference marker for the (unmodulated) carrier is indicated in the dia-
gram.

5. If the carrier signal is located within the analyzed channel bandwidth, switch off the
carrier signal so that only the noise is displayed in the channel.

6. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration and use the RMS
detector, select "Adjust Settings".

7. Select [RUN SINGLE] to perform a second measurement.

The carrier-to-noise ratio is displayed after the measurement has been completed.

6.4 Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

An important characteristic of a modulated signal is its occupied bandwidth, that is: the
bandwidth which must contain a defined percentage of the power. In a radio communi-
cations system, for instance, the occupied bandwidth must be limited to enable distor-
tion-free transmission in adjacent channels.
● About the measurement........................................................................................212
● OBW results.......................................................................................................... 214
● OBW configuration................................................................................................ 214
● How to determine the occupied bandwidth........................................................... 217
● Measurement example..........................................................................................218

6.4.1 About the measurement

The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage

of the total transmitted power. A percentage between 10 % and 99.9 % can be set.

Measurement principle
The bandwidth containing 99% of the signal power is to be determined, for example.
The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace. In the
next step, the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the
total power is reached. Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency.
Then the points from the left edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the power
is reached. Auxiliary marker 2 is positioned at this point. 99 % of the power is now
between the two markers. The distance between the two frequency markers is the
occupied bandwidth which is displayed in the marker field.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 212

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

OBW within defined search limits - multicarrier OBW measurement in one sweep
The occupied bandwidth of the signal can also be determined within defined search
limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine
the OBW for a multicarrier signal. To do so, search limits are defined for an individual
carrier and the OBW measurement is restricted to the frequency range contained
within those limits. Then the search limits are adapted for the next carrier and the OBW
is automatically recalculated for the new range.

For step-by-step instructions, see "How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal
using search limits" on page 217.

Prerequisites
To ensure correct power measurement, especially for noise signals, and to obtain the
correct occupied bandwidth, the following prerequisites and settings are necessary:
● Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window, or search limits are
defined to include only one (carrier) signal. An additional signal would falsify the
measurement.
● RBW << occupied bandwidth (approx. 1/20 of occupied bandwidth, for voice com-
munication type: 300 Hz or 1 kHz)
● VBW ≥ 3 x RBW
● RMS detector
● Span ≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth
Some of the measurement specifications (e.g. PDC, RCR STD-27B) require measure-
ment of the occupied bandwidth using a peak detector. The detector setting of the
FSW has to be changed accordingly then.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 213

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

6.4.2 OBW results

As a result of the OBW measurement the occupied bandwidth ("Occ Bw") is indicated
in the marker results. Furthermore, the marker at the center frequency and the tempo-
rary markers are indicated.
The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1. In order to evaluate
another trace, marker 1 must be placed on another trace (see Assigning the Marker to
a Trace).

The OBW calculation is repeated if the Search Limits are changed, without performing
a new sweep. Thus, the OBW for a multicarrier signal can be determined using only
one sweep.

Centroid frequency
The centroid frequency is defined as the point in the center of the occupied bandwidth,
calculated using the temporary OBW markers T1 and T2. This frequency is indicated
as a function result ("Occ Bw Centroid") in the marker table.

Frequency offset
The offset of the calculated centroid frequency to the defined center frequency of the
FSW is indicated as a function result ("Occ Bw Freq Offset") in the marker table.

Remote command:
The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? AOBW. While
the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth, the AOBW parameter also
returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the
occupied bandwidth.
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer<sb>:SELect on page 916
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] on page 917
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? OBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? COBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915

6.4.3 OBW configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "OBW" > "OBW Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 214

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

This measurement is not available in zero span.

Configuring search limits for OBW measurement

The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search
(see "Search Limits" on page 561). However, only the left and right limits are consid-
ered.

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.5, "Measuring the occupied bandwidth", on page 983.
% Power Bandwidth.................................................................................................... 215
Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 216
Adjust Settings............................................................................................................ 216
Search Limits (Left / Right)..........................................................................................216
Search Limits Off.........................................................................................................216

% Power Bandwidth
Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines
the occupied bandwidth. Values from 10 % to 99.9 % are allowed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth on page 984

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 215

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

Channel Bandwidth
Defines the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel in single-carrier measure-
ments. This bandwidth is used to optimize the test parameters (for details see "Adjust
Settings" on page 216). The default setting is 14 kHz.
For measurements according to a specific transmission standard, define the bandwidth
specified by the standard for the transmission channel.
For multicarrier measurements, this setting is irrelevant.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 922

Adjust Settings
Optimizes the instrument settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth
according to the specified channel bandwidth.
This function is only useful for single carrier measurements.
All instrument settings relevant for power measurement within a specific frequency
range are optimized:
● Frequency span: 3 × channel bandwidth
● RBW ≤ 1/40 of channel bandwidth
● VBW ≥ 3 × RBW
● Detector: RMS
The reference level is not affected by "Adjust Settings". For an optimum dynamic
range,select the reference level such that the signal maximum is close to the reference
level.
(See "Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level)" on page 488).
The adjustment is carried out only once. If necessary, the instrument settings can be
changed later.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 917

Search Limits (Left / Right)

If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the
limited search range are considered.
For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1283

Search Limits Off

Deactivates the search range limits.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1284

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 216

FSW Measurements and results
Occupied bandwidth measurement (OBW)

6.4.4 How to determine the occupied bandwidth

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the occupied

bandwidth.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.5.2, "Programming example: OBW measure-
ment", on page 984.

How to determine the OBW for a single signal

1. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

2. Select the "OBW" measurement function.

The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.

3. Select "OBW Config".

The "Occupied Bandwidth" configuration dialog box is displayed.

4. Define the percentage of power ("% Power Bandwidth") that defines the bandwidth
to be determined.

5. If necessary, change the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel.

6. To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration, select "Adjust Set-
tings".

7. Start a sweep.
The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results.

How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits
1. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

2. Select the "OBW" measurement function.

3. Select "OBW Config".

4. Define the percentage of power ("% Power Bandwidth") that defines the bandwidth
to be determined.

5. Define search limits so the search area contains only the first carrier signal:
a) Enter values for the left or right limits, or both.
b) Enable the use of the required limits.

6. Start a sweep.
The result for the first carrier is displayed as OBW in the marker results.

7. Change the search limits so the search area contains the next carrier signal as
described in step 5.
The OBW is recalculated and the result for the next carrier is displayed. A new
sweep is not necessary!

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 217

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

8. Continue in this way until all carriers have been measured.

6.4.5 Measurement example

In the following example, the bandwidth that occupies 99 % of the total power of a PDC
signal at 800 MHz, level 0 dBm is measured.

A programming example demonstrating an OBW measurement in a remote environ-

ment is provided in Section 13.5.5.2, "Programming example: OBW measurement",
on page 984.

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the "Center Frequency" to 800 MHz.

3. Set the "Reference Level" to -10 dBm.

4. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

5. Select the "OBW" measurement function.

6. Select "OBW Config".

7. Set the "% Power Bandwidth" to 99 %.

8. Set the "Channel Bandwidth" to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard.

9. Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting "Adjust
Settings".

10. Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting "Auto Level" in
the [Auto set] menu.

11. The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement. In the
"Traces" configuration dialog, set the trace detector to "PositivePeak".

12. Start a sweep.

The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results.

6.5 Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

The FSW noise power ratio measurement is similar to the common adjacent channel
power (ACP) measurement, but less sophisticated and therefore easier to configure.
This measurement requires the Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement firmware
option R&S FSW-K19.
● About noise power ratio (NPR) measurements.....................................................219
● NPR basics........................................................................................................... 219
● NPR results........................................................................................................... 221
● NPR configuration................................................................................................. 222

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 218

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

● Generator setup.................................................................................................... 226

● Generator frequency coupling...............................................................................231
● How to perform NPR measurements.................................................................... 233
● Measurement example..........................................................................................234

6.5.1 About noise power ratio (NPR) measurements

The noise power ratio is defined as the relationship between the total power density in
a channel and the noise power density. The noise power ratio is commonly used to
describe the distortion caused by in-band multi-carrier intermodulation in a wideband
satellite channel. A satellite can be considered to be a "transparent transponder". It
receives the uplink signal, amplifies it, translates the frequency, amplifies it more, and
finally retransmits it. Typically, the signal contains a large number of carriers. To mea-
sure the in-band distortions of specific carriers in a satellite DUT, notch filters are inser-
ted inside the channel. Notch filters remove the effects of the underlying subcarriers
from the signal. Thus, the distortion of these carriers caused by the others can be
determined.
The FSW noise power ratio measurement allows you to specify your satellite channel
and up to 25 notch filters in your measurement setup. For a more general measure-
ment, the bandwidth on which the total power density is based can be selected freely.
As a result, the channel power density, the notch power density, and the noise power
ratio are calculated.

6.5.2 NPR basics

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in noise power ratio
measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration
settings.

Channel bandwidth, integration bandwidth and notch bandwidth

The Channel Bandwidth defines the width of the channel, or general measurement
range. The displayed span usually depends on the channel bandwidth (span = channel
bandwidth * 1.1)
The Integration Bandwidth defines the frequency range over which measurement
results are actually calculated. By default, it is the same as the channel bandwidth, but
you can define any other value, smaller or larger, as well.
The Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW) defines the width of the
notches, if you define any.

Notches and their effects on the measurement results

You can select from an automatic measurement mode that selects the integration
bandwidth automatically, and a manual measurement mode that allows you to define a
custom integration bandwidth.
In automatic measurement mode, the power within the notches is deducted from the
total noise power density.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 219

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Channel Bandwidth
Integration Bandwidth

Notch 1 Notch 2

Figure 6-41: Auto mode: Integration bandwidth = channel bandwidth (notches deducted)

In manual measurement, however, the notch power is not deducted. In manual mode,
the application simply integrates all measured powered levels over the integration
bandwidth, including the power levels measured within the notches.

Channel Bandwidth

Integration Bandwidth
Notch 1 Notch 2

Figure 6-42: Manual mode: Integration bandwidth ≠ channel bandwidth (notches not deducted)

Overlapping notches or notches outside the channel bandwidth

Note that measurement results can become inaccurate when notches overlap or lie
outside of the channel bandwidth.

NPR measurements with signal generator control

To test the NPR of a satellite channel with multiple notch filters using a signal genera-
tor, you must configure the same settings on the analyzer and on the generator. The
FSW can now take control of the connected generator, so that you only need to config-
ure the notches once. The analyzer can then automatically set the generator to the
same settings.
Generator control by the FSW has the following preconditions on the signal generator:
● R&S SMW
● Notched Noise option (R&S SMW-K811) installed
● Either ARB waveforms or one of the standards supported by the K811 option active
on the generator

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 220

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Frequency-coupled NPR measurements

For NPR measurements, configuring and re-configuring the carrier frequencies and
notches first on the analyzer, and then on the generator, can become very tedious.
Therefore, frequency coupling is now provided in which the analyzer takes control of
the generator. The frequency on the generator is automatically set to the analyzer fre-
quency, possibly with a fixed factor or offset applied.

6.5.3 NPR results

The FSW shows the measurement results in a diagram and a table in numerical form.
The diagram consists of several elements.
● A horizontal blue bar at the bottom of the diagram indicates the channel bandwidth.
● Two vertical blue lines indicate the integration range or integration bandwidth. It is
the same as the channel bandwidth by default (it is labeled "channel bandwidth" in
that case).
● Vertical green lines indicate notches and their bandwidth. The number of displayed
notches is variable.

In the result summary, the following results are provided for the specified channel and
individual notches:
Table 6-10: Noise Power Ratio result summary parameters

Parameter Description

"Channel" / "Notch" Channel or notch number

"Channel BW" (auto Specified channel bandwidth or manually defined integration bandwidth used
mode) / "Integration BW" as basis for power density calculation in total channel or notch

"Offset" Frequency offset of notch or integration bandwidth to center frequency

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 221

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Parameter Description

"Channel Power" / "Power Power measured in channel or notch - absolute value or density (= power
density" divided by the "Channel BW"/"Integration BW" in dBm/Hz)

"NPR" (Notches only:) Ratio of total channel power density to notch power density in
dB

Remote command:
Channel power (density), notch power density, power ratio:
CALCulate<n>:NPRatio:RESult? on page 999
Measured power values for each sweep point (by default 1001):
TRAC:DATA? TRACe1 (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262).

6.5.4 NPR configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR
Config" > "Noise Power Ratio" tab
The FSW noise power ratio measurement allows you to specify your satellite channel
and up to 25 notch filters in your measurement setup. For a more general measure-
ment, the bandwidth on which the total power density is based can be selected freely.

Figure 6-43: Noise Power Ratio configuration dialog with a signal generator connected

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 222

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

An LED next to a setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected
generator successfully. They are only available if a valid generator IP address is detec-
ted (see "IP Address" on page 228).
The LED indicates the following states:
● green: setting on the FSW is valid and was successfully applied on the signal gen-
erator
● red: control error, for example because the specified value cannot be applied on
the signal generator
● gray: signal generator control off
Note that if you change the setting on the generator manually, the analyzer does not
adapt the setting automatically. The green LED for a previous successful transmission
does not change.

Channel Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 223

Integration Bandwidth................................................................................................. 223
Number of Notches..................................................................................................... 224
Generator Notch Filter State....................................................................................... 224
Frequency Offset per Notch........................................................................................ 224
Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW).............................................. 224
Generator Notch State................................................................................................ 225
Upload all Notch Settings to Generator.......................................................................225
Query all Notch Settings from Generator.................................................................... 225
Result Power Mode.....................................................................................................226

Channel Bandwidth
Defines the channel bandwidth on which the total power density is based. The band-
width is positioned around the currently defined Center Frequency.
To specify a different bandwidth for total power density calculation, or to shift the band-
width, define an Integration Bandwidth manually.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:BWIDth on page 985

Integration Bandwidth
Defines a bandwidth other than the channel bandwidth to be used for total power den-
sity calculation. Select the "Manual" option and define the bandwidth manually.
In auto mode, the integration bandwidth is the same as the channel bandwidth.
Notches are deducted from the results.
In manual mode, you can customize the integration bandwidth. The results include the
power levels measured within notches, however.
A "Frequency Offset" shifts the bandwidth away from the currently defined Center Fre-
quency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:BWIDth on page 986
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO on page 986
[SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 987

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 223

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Number of Notches
Defines the number of notches for which results are determined. A maximum of 25
notches can be defined. Note that even if bandwidths for further notches are defined,
only the number specified here are actually calculated and displayed.
If Generator Control State is enabled in the generator settings, the specified number of
notches is sent to the generator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates
whether the setting was adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
See Section 6.5.3, "NPR results", on page 221 for more information about how notches
are treated in the measurement.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt on page 988
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate? on page 995

Generator Notch Filter State

Activates or deactivates a notch filter on the signal generator.
This setting is only available if Generator Control State is enabled. Its value is only sent
to the signal generator when you select Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Gener-
ator. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the con-
nected instrument successfully.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe] on page 997
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate? on page 997

Frequency Offset per Notch

Defines the center position of the notch in relation to the currently defined Center Fre-
quency.
If Generator Control State is enabled, the frequency offset for the notch is sent to the
generator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was
adjusted on the connected instrument successfully.
If a variable frequency definition is used (see Section 6.5.6, "Generator frequency cou-
pling", on page 231), the defined factor (Numerator / Denominator) is also applied to
the frequency offset per notch.
FreqOffsetGen = Numerator / Denominator * FreqOffsetAnalyzer
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 988
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet:
CSTate? on page 993

Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)

Defines the bandwidth of the individual notch either as an absolute value, or as a per-
centage of the defined Channel Bandwidth.
If Generator Control State is enabled, the absolute notch bandwidth is sent to the gen-
erator on upload. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted
on the connected instrument successfully.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 224

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

If a variable frequency definition is used (see Section 6.5.6, "Generator frequency cou-
pling", on page 231), the defined factor (Numerator / Denominator) is also applied to
the absolute notch bandwidth.
Notch_BWGen = Numerator / Denominator * Notch_BWAnalyzer
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth[:ABSolute] on page 988
[SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:RELative on page 987
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:BWIDth:ABSolute:CSTate?
on page 993

Generator Notch State

If enabled, the notch is considered for signal generation on the connected signal gen-
erator.
This setting is only available if Generator Control State is enabled. Its value is only sent
to the signal generator when you select Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Gener-
ator. An LED next to the setting indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the con-
nected instrument successfully.
Note: on the FSW, all notches are always active. The "Generator Notch State" parame-
ter determines whether the individual notch is considered by the generator or not.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] on page 994
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate? on page 994

Upload all Notch Settings to Generator

Transmits the notch settings defined on this tab from the FSW to the connected signal
generator. The signal generator uses the settings to create an ARB waveform, which in
turn is used as the input signal for the measurement.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the generator:
● Generator Notch Filter State
● Number of Notches
Per notch:
● Frequency Offset per Notch
● Notch bandwidth (absolute)
● Generator Notch State
As opposed to the general generator settings, changes to the notch settings are not
applied to the generator immediately. Since creating the waveform can take some time,
it is best done after all notch settings have been defined, rather than after each individ-
ual setting.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate on page 997

Query all Notch Settings from Generator

Queries all currently defined notch settings on the connected signal generator and
applies the settings to the FSW.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or after making
changes to the notch settings on the generator.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 225

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the analyzer:

● Generator Notch Filter State
● Number of Notches
Per notch:
● Frequency Offset per Notch
● Notch bandwidth (absolute)
● Generator Notch State
Remote command:
CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio:NOTCh on page 999

Result Power Mode

Determines whether the power measured in a channel or notch is indicated as a power
or a density value.
"Power" Absolute power measured in channel or notch in current amplitude
unit
"Density" Power measured in channel or notch divided by the "Channel
BW"/"Integration BW" in dBm/Hz
Remote command:
[SENSe:]NPRatio:MODE on page 987

6.5.5 Generator setup

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR
Config" > "Generator Setup" tab
The general settings required to control a connected signal generator by the FSW are
defined here. The control settings are only available if a connection to a signal genera-
tor has been established.
The individual settings are only available if generator control is enabled.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 226

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

For each setting, an LED indicates whether the setting was adjusted on the connected
generator successfully. Thus, you can quickly detect the cause of possible errors.
The LED indicates the following states:
● green: connection established and all settings valid
● red: control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the
signal generator
● gray: signal generator control off
If you change the setting on the generator manually after an automatic setting, the LED
might not indicate the correct state.

Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate? on page 997
IP Address...................................................................................................................228
└ IP Address / Computer Name....................................................................... 228
└ Connect/Disconnect......................................................................................228
Generator Control State.............................................................................................. 229
Path RF/ Path BB........................................................................................................229
RF Output State.......................................................................................................... 229
Frequency................................................................................................................... 230
Level (RMS)................................................................................................................ 230
Level Offset................................................................................................................. 230
Reference Frequency..................................................................................................230
Standard......................................................................................................................230

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 227

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

ARB Waveform File.....................................................................................................230

Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator..................................................... 231
Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator...................................................231

IP Address
Indicates the state and address of a connected signal generator.
The LED indicates the following connection states:
● green: connection established to compatible generator
● red: connection could not be established, possibly due to an incompatible instru-
ment
● gray: no signal generator connected
Select the TCPIP address or "Configure" to define the connection information for the
connected signal generator.

Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459

IP Address / Computer Name ← IP Address

The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the FSW via
LAN.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Select Connect/Disconnect to establish a connection from the FSW to the specified
signal generator.
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the
connection information.
The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred
between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in
the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1460

Connect/Disconnect ← IP Address
The FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 228

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed:

● Device type
● Name and serial number
● Connection state
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1460
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459

Generator Control State

Activates or disables control of the signal generator by the FSW.
If a connection was defined in another measurement channel, the connection is main-
tained when you switch to the Spectrum application. However, generator control is dis-
abled to protect the DUT from possibly erroneous or damaging settings. Check the set-
tings, then enable the control state.
Note: While generator control is active, you cannot change the connection information.
Only one channel can control a generator at any time. If you switch on generator con-
trol while it is still active in another channel, for example for parameter coupling with a
generator, the control is disabled in the other channel.
Exception: The SCPI Recorder maintains control of the generator even if you switch
channels.
For details on parameter coupling, see Section 11.9, "Synchronizing measurement
channel configuration", on page 805.
As long as the FSW controls the signal generator, any (general) generator settings you
define on the FSW are automatically adapted on the generator. The opposite does not
apply, that is: changes you make on the generator are not automatically applied to the
FSW. The green LED for a previous successful transmission does not change. Use the
Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator function to apply the generator set-
tings on the FSW.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONTrol[:STATe] on page 991

Path RF/ Path BB

Selects the RF signal path and indicates the BB signal path of the generator to be used
for signal generation.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF on page 999
CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB? on page 998

RF Output State
To protect the instrument from possibly erroneous or damaging settings, you must
manually activate the RF output on the signal generator to start providing a signal.
Check all settings on the signal generator, in particular the level settings, before acti-
vating the RF output.
A red LED on the "Generator Control" tab indicates a setting error on the generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe] on page 998
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate? on page 996

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 229

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Frequency
Defines the frequency of the signal provided by the signal generator.
If the Generator Frequency Coupling State is active, this value is read-only and indi-
cates the resulting frequency setting on the generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer on page 990
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate? on page 991

Level (RMS)
(Default:) The specified power level is used for the output power by the connected sig-
nal generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel on page 998
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate? on page 995

Level Offset
Defines a fixed offset in the power level used by the generator, for example due to a
gain from the DUT.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet on page 998
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate? on page 996

Reference Frequency
Selects the source of the generator reference frequency.
The internal reference is that of the signal generator itself.
An external reference is provided via the EXT connectors on the generator, for exam-
ple by the FSW.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:EXTernal:ROSCillator on page 989
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:EXTernal:ROSCillator:CSTate?
on page 991

Standard
For reference only: the standard currently used by the signal generator. If no standard
is defined on the generator, notched signals are not available (see "Generator Notch
Filter State" on page 224).
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard? on page 990

ARB Waveform File

For reference only: the ARB waveform file currently used by the signal generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:ARBitrary:WAVeform:SELect?
on page 990

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 230

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator

Applies all generator setup settings defined on this tab to the connected signal genera-
tor once.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or when you
change settings on the generator. As soon as generator control is active, any changes
to the general settings on the FSW are immediately applied to the generator automati-
cally.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the generator:
● RF Output State
● Frequency
● Level (RMS)
● Level Offset
● Reference Frequency
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate on page 997

Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator

Queries all currently defined generator setup settings on the connected signal genera-
tor and applies the settings to the FSW.
This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or when you
change settings on the generator. The FSW does not automatically adapt its settings
when you make changes on the generator.
In particular, the following settings are transmitted to the analyzer:
● RF Output State
● Frequency
● Level (RMS)
● Level Offset
● Reference Frequency
Remote command:
CONFigure:SETTings:NPRatio on page 999

6.5.6 Generator frequency coupling

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Noise Power Measurement" > "NPR
Config" > "Generator Freq Coupling" tab
These settings are only available if generator control is enabled (see "Generator Con-
trol State" on page 229).
Instead of defining a fixed frequency to be used by the signal generator, you can cou-
ple the frequency of the generator to the analyzer using a variable frequency definition.
Note that the frequency definition also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Abso-
lute / Relative to Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 224.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 231

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

The overall status of the frequency coupling is indicated by an LED next to the fre-
quency definition.
The LED indicates the following states:
● green: frequency setting valid
● red: frequency value cannot be applied on the signal generator
● gray: signal generator control or coupling off

Generator Frequency Coupling State......................................................................... 232

fGen...............................................................................................................................232
fAnalyzer..........................................................................................................................233
Numerator................................................................................................................... 233
Denominator................................................................................................................233
Frequency Offset.........................................................................................................233

Generator Frequency Coupling State

Enables or disables frequency coupling between the FSW and the connected genera-
tor.
If disabled, a fixed frequency is used by the generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] on page 992

fGen
Indicates the resulting frequency setting on the generator, depending on the other fre-
quency parameters.
The generator frequency is defined as:
fGen = [fAnalyzer * Numerator / Denominator] + Frequency Offset
Any changes to one of the interdependent parameters automatically affect the calcula-
ted signal levels on the connected generator.
If Generator Frequency Coupling State is disabled, define a fixed frequency to be used
by the generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer on page 990
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:CENTer:CSTate? on page 991

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 232

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

fAnalyzer
Sets the analyzer (center) frequency, which is used as a basis for the variable fre-
quency definition.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1195

Numerator
Defines the numerator of the frequency-defining factor.
Note that this factor also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to
Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 224.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator
on page 993

Denominator
Defines the denominator of the frequency-defining factor.
Note that this factor also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to
Channel BW) and the "Frequency Offset per Notch" on page 224.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator
on page 992

Frequency Offset
Defines a fixed offset to be applied to the generator frequency.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 992

6.5.7 How to perform NPR measurements

Measuring the noise power ratio is a very easy and straightforward task with the FSW.

1. From the "Overview", select "Frequency".

2. Define the "Center Frequency" of your channel.

3. From the "Overview", select "Select Measurement".

4. Select "Noise Power Measurement".

The measurement is started immediately with the default settings.

5. Select "NPR Config".

6. Specify the "Channel Bandwidth" of your entire channel.

7. If necessary, define an appropriate span.

8. Enter the "Number of notches" in your signal.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 233

FSW Measurements and results
Noise power ratio (NPR) measurement

9. For each notch, define the bandwidth (absolute or relative to the channel band-
width) and its position (relative to the center frequency).
The channel and notches are indicated in the spectrum diagram, and the power
results are indicated in the result summary.

6.5.8 Measurement example

Assume a satellite channel with a bandwidth of 72 MHz at a center frequency of

500 MHz. Notch filters are located around the subcarrier frequencies 487.8 MHz and
512.2 MHz, with a bandwidth of 3.6 MHz.
We will demonstrate how to determine the distortion caused by each subcarrier on the
other, defined as the noise power ratio for each notch.

How to perform this measurement in a remote environment is described in Sec-

tion 13.5.6.5, "Programming example: measuring the noise power ratio", on page 1000.

1. From the "Overview", select "Frequency".

2. Define the "Center Frequency" = 500 MHz.

3. Define a "Span" = 80 MHz.

4. From the "Overview", select "Select Measurement".

5. Select "Noise Power Measurement".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 234

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

6. Select "NPR Config".

7. Specify the "Channel Bandwidth" = 72 MHz.

8. Enter the "Number of notches" = 2.

9. For notch 1, define:

● "Frequency Offset" = -12.2 MHz
● "Notch Bandwidth Absolute" = 3.6 MHz

10. For notch 2, define:

● "Frequency Offset" = +12.2 MHz
● "Notch Bandwidth Relative" = 5 % (for demonstration purposes; the effect is the
same as "Notch Bandwidth Absolute" = 3.6 MHz)
The channel and two notches are indicated in the spectrum diagram, and the noise
power ratio for each notch is indicated in the result summary.

6.6 Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurements monitor compliance with a spectral
mask.
● About the measurement........................................................................................236
● Typical applications............................................................................................... 236
● SEM results...........................................................................................................236
● SEM basics........................................................................................................... 239
● SEM configuration.................................................................................................249
● How to perform a spectrum emission mask measurement................................... 268
● Measurement example: Multi-SEM measurement................................................ 272
● Reference: SEM file descriptions.......................................................................... 274

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 235

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

6.6.1 About the measurement

The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni-
tors compliance with a spectral mask. The mask is defined with reference to the input
signal power. The FSW allows for a flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM
measurement. The analyzer performs measurements in predefined frequency ranges
with settings that can be specified individually for each of these ranges.
In the basic Spectrum application, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple
sub blocks of channels, where the sub blocks can include gaps or overlap, and define
separate masks. Radio signals using multiple standards can also be analyzed.
SEM measurement configurations can be saved to an XML file which can then be
exported to another application or loaded on the FSW again later. Some predefined
XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected
standard.
To improve the performance of the FSW for spectrum emission mask measurements, a
"Fast SEM" mode is available.
A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the
spectrum.

6.6.2 Typical applications

Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modu-
lated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges. These ranges are defined by a
particular transmission standard, both in the transmission channel and neighboring
channels. Any violations of the mask can interfere with other transmissions.
The 3GPP TS 34.122 standard, for example, defines a mask for emissions outside the
transmission channel. This mask is defined relative to the input signal power. Three
frequency ranges to each side of the transmission channel are defined.

6.6.3 SEM results

As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the following results are dis-
played in a diagram (see also Section 6.6.4.2, "Limit lines in SEM measurements",
on page 242):
● The measured signal levels
● The result of the limit check (mask monitoring)
● The defined limit lines
● TX channel power "P"
● The used power class

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 236

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Multi-SEM measurements
Multi-SEM measurements are SEM measurements with more than one sub block. In
these measurements, each sub block has its own power class definitions. In this case,
the power class is not indicated in the graphical result displays.

Example:
For example, in Figure 6-44, "31 < P < 39" is indicated as the used power class is
defined from 31 to 39.

Figure 6-44: Spectrum Emission Mask result displays

In addition to the graphical results of the SEM measurement displayed in the diagram,
a result summary is displayed to evaluate the limit check results (see also Sec-
tion 6.6.4.2, "Limit lines in SEM measurements", on page 242).
The following information is provided in the result summary:

Label Description

General information

"Standard" Loaded standard settings

"Tx Power" Power of the reference range

"Tx Bandwidth" Tx bandwidth used by the reference range

"RBW" RBW used by the reference range

Range results

"Range Low" Start of the frequency range the peak value was found in

"Range Up" Frequency range end the peak value was found in

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 237

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Label Description

"RBW" RBW of the range

"Frequency" Frequency of the peak power level

"Power Abs" Absolute peak power level within the range

"Power Rel" Peak power level within the range, relative to the "Tx Power"

"ΔLimit" Deviation of the peak power level from the limit line

You can define in which detail the data is displayed in the result summary in the "List
Evaluation" settings (see Section 6.6.5.7, "List evaluation (results configuration)",
on page 266). By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change
the settings to display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin").
Detected peaks are not only listed in the Result Summary, they are also indicated by
colored squares in the diagram (optionally, see Show Peaks in the "List Evaluation"
settings).

Figure 6-45: Detected peak display in SEM measurement

Furthermore, you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be
exported to another application for further analysis.

Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks

In the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple
sub blocks of channels (see Section 6.6.4.5, "SEM with multiple sub blocks ("Multi-
SEM")", on page 246 for details). Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For
each sub block and each gap, the results described above are provided individually in
the result summary.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 238

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Figure 6-46: SEM results for multiple sub blocks

Retrieving results via remote control

The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using
the CALC:LIM:FAIL? command from a remote computer; see CALCulate<n>:
LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1348 for a detailed description.
The power result for the reference range can be queried using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW;
The peak power for the reference range can be queried using
CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? PPOW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:
POWer<sb>:RESult? on page 915.
The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC:DATA? and TRAC:DATA:X?,
see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262 and TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? on page 1265:
The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC:DATA? LIST, see
TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262.

6.6.4 SEM basics

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measure-
ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set-
tings.
● Ranges and range settings................................................................................... 240
● Limit lines in SEM measurements.........................................................................242
● Fast SEM measurements......................................................................................244
● Multi-standard radio (MSR) SEM measurements................................................. 245
● SEM with multiple sub blocks ("Multi-SEM")......................................................... 246

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 239

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

6.6.4.1 Ranges and range settings

In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which
you can define the following parameters separately:
● Start and stop frequency
● RBW
● VBW
● "Sweep Time"
● "Sweep Points"
● Reference level
● Attenuator settings
● Preamplifier settings
● Transducer settings
● Limit values
Via the sweep list, you define the ranges and their settings. For details on settings,
refer to Section 6.6.5.1, "Sweep List", on page 250.
For details on defining the limits (masks), see Section 6.6.4.2, "Limit lines in SEM mea-
surements", on page 242.

Range definition
After a preset, the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters. For
each range, you can change the parameters listed above. You can insert or delete
ranges.
The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set (by
pressing [PRESET] or by loading an XML file). If you want a parameter set to be avail-
able permanently, create an XML file for this configuration (for details refer to "How to
save a user-defined SEM settings file" on page 271).
If you load one of the provided XML files, the sweep list contains ranges and parame-
ters according to the selected standard.

Reference range
The range containing the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all
other ranges in the sweep list. All range limits are defined in relation to the reference
range. The TX power used as a reference for all power level results in the result sum-
mary is also calculated for this reference range. You can define whether the power
used for reference is the peak power level or the integrated power of the reference
range. In the "Sweep List", the reference range is highlighted in blue and cannot be
deleted.

Rules
The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but can have gaps).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 240

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

● The maximum number of ranges is 30.

● The minimum number of ranges is 3.
● The reference range cannot be deleted.
● Center the reference range on the center frequency.
● The current "Tx Bandwidth" defines the minimum span of the reference range (see
"Channel Power Settings" on page 259).
● Define frequency values for each range relative to the center frequency.

Changing the frequency range of the measurement using external mixers

If you change the used frequency range of the measurement by activating or deactivat-
ing an external mixer, the FSW automatically adapts the span to full span. Thus, the
ranges for the SEM measurement can change, as well.

Sweep points
You can define a minimum number of sweep points for each range. The total number
of available sweep points is then distributed among the ranges in consideration of the
minimum values. If the total number of sweep points is not enough to satisfy the mini-
mum sweep point requirements in all ranges, the FSW adjusts the global number of
Sweep Points accordingly. By default, each range has a minimum of one sweep point.
This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis.
You do not have to increase the overall number of sweep points and thus the measure-
ment time for the SEM measurement.

Symmetrical ranges
You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings, i.e. the ranges to
the left and right of the reference range are defined symmetrically. When symmetrical
setup is activated, the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetri-
cal setup regarding the reference range. The number of ranges to the left of the refer-
ence range is reflected to the right, i.e. any missing ranges on the right are inserted,
while superfluous ranges are removed. The values in the ranges to the right of the ref-
erence range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges.
Symmetrical ranges fulfill the conditions required for "Fast SEM" mode (see Sec-
tion 6.6.4.3, "Fast SEM measurements", on page 244).

Power classes
If the signal power level to be monitored varies and the limits vary accordingly, you can
define power classes, which can then be assigned to the frequency ranges. Thus, the
limits for the signal levels can be defined differently for varying input levels. For
instance, for higher input levels a transmission standard can allow for higher power lev-
els in adjacent channels, whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation can be
stricter. Up to four different power classes can be defined.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 241

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

6.6.4.2 Limit lines in SEM measurements

For the FSW, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines. Limit lines allow
you to check the measured data (that is, the trace results) against specified limit val-
ues. Generally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum
application application using the [Lines] function. For SEM measurements, however,
special limit lines are available via the "Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended
that you use only these limit line definitions.
In the "Sweep List", you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level
according to the specified frequency ranges. Special limit lines are automatically
defined for each power class according to the current "Sweep List" settings every time
the settings change. These limit lines are labeled "_SEM_LINE_<xxx>_ABS<0...3>"
and "_SEM_LINE_<xxx>_REL<0...3>", where <xxx> is an index to distinguish limit
lines between different channels.
The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the
display. The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram. Note that
only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a "Margin" function as for general limit lines is not
available.

The indicated limit line depends on the settings in the "Sweep List". Several types of
limit checks are possible:
Table 6-11: Limit check types

Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Limit line definition

"Absolute" Absolute power levels must not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start"/ "Abs Limit
exceed limit line Stop" values for each range

"Relative" Power deviations relative to the TX Defined by the "Rel Limit Start"/ "Rel Limit
channel power must not exceed limit Stop" values (relative to the TX channel
line power), fixed for each range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 242

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Limit line definition

"Relative with If the power exceeds both the abso- Defined by the maximum of the absolute or
function f(x)" lute and the relative limits, the check relative start and stop limit values for each
fails (see Relative limit line functions range. Thus, the start or stop point of the limit
below) range, or both, are variable (since the maxi-
mum can vary).

"Abs and Rel" If the power exceeds both the abso- The less strict (higher) limit line is displayed
lute and the relative limits, the check for each range.
fails. If you use a function to define the relative limit
start or stop value, the signal is checked
against an additional condition: the power
must exceed the absolute limit, as well as the
absolute and relative function values.

"Abs or Rel" If the power exceeds either the The stricter (lower) limit line is displayed for
absolute or the relative limits, the each range.
check fails. If you use a function to define the relative limit
start or stop value, the signal is checked
against an additional condition: if the power
exceeds the absolute limit, or the higher of the
absolute and relative function values, the
check fails.

Relative limit line functions

A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points (or both) are
variable, depending on the carrier power. Thus, the resulting limit line can change its
slope within the range, depending on the carrier power. Common relative limit lines are
calculated once for the defined start and end points and maintain a constant slope.
If the relative limit value function is used in combination with the "Abs and Rel" or "Abs
or Rel" limit check types, an additional condition is considered for the limit check (see
Table 6-11).

Limit check results in the result summary

For each range, the peak measured value and the deviation of these values from the
limit line are displayed in the result summary. If the limit check is passed for the range,
the deviation represents the closest value to the limit line. If the limit check is passed
for the range, the deviation represents the closest value to the limit line. If the limit
check for the range fails, the deviation represents the maximum violation against the
limit line. Furthermore, the absolute power levels and the relative deviation of the
peaks from the TX channel power are displayed. Values that exceed the limit are indi-
cated in red and by an asterisk (*).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 243

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold)
for the peak values to be displayed in the Result Summary can be defined. (In the "List
Evaluation" settings, see Section 6.6.5.7, "List evaluation (results configuration)",
on page 266).

6.6.4.3 Fast SEM measurements

To improve the performance of the FSW for spectrum emission mask measurements, a
"Fast SEM" mode is available. If this mode is activated, several consecutive ranges
with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally, which makes the
measurement considerably faster. The displayed results remain unchanged and still
consist of several ranges. Thus, measurement settings that apply only to the results,
such as limits, can nevertheless be defined individually for each range.

Prerequisites
"Fast SEM" mode is available if the following criteria apply:
● The frequency ranges are consecutive, without frequency gaps
● The following sweep settings are identical (for details see Section 6.6.5.1, "Sweep
List", on page 250):
– "Filter Type"
– "RBW"
– "VBW"
– "Sweep Time Mode"
– "Reference Level"
– "RF Attenuation Mode"
– "RF Attenuation"
– "Preamplifier"

Activating Fast SEM mode

"Fast SEM" mode is activated in the sweep list (see Section 6.6.5.1, "Sweep List",
on page 250) or using a remote command. Activating the mode for one range automat-
ically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed on page 1005

Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks

For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub
block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting,
this setting is disabled.
For more information on multi-SEM measurements, see Section 6.6.4.5, "SEM with
multiple sub blocks ("Multi-SEM")", on page 246.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 244

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Consequences
When the "Fast SEM" mode is activated, the ranges for which these criteria apply are
displayed as one single range. The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual
sweep times, initially, but can be changed.

If "Symmetrical Setup" mode is active when "Fast SEM" mode is activated, not all
sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically (see also "Symmetri-
cal Setup" on page 256).

Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each
included range and remain changed even after deactivating "Fast SEM" mode.

Example

Figure 6-47: Sweep list using Fast SEM mode

In Figure 6-47, a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated. The formerly five
separately defined ranges are combined to two sweep ranges internally.

6.6.4.4 Multi-standard radio (MSR) SEM measurements

Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals
with multiple carriers using different digital standards. MSR measurements are descri-
bed in the specification 3GPP TS 37.141. Various typical combinations of standards for
base station tests are described, e.g. LTE FDD and W-CDMA carriers. By performing
an MSR SEM measurement you can determine if or how the different carriers affect
each other, i.e. if unwanted emissions occur. On the FSW, the MSR SEM measure-
ment is a standard measurement as for single carriers. The MSR settings merely pro-

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 245

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

vide a convenient way of configuring the sweep list for all required ranges according to
the specification quickly.
Refined settings allow the FSW to calculate the SEM limits according to standard
3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0, which distinguishes between base station configurations and
power values.

6.6.4.5 SEM with multiple sub blocks ("Multi-SEM")

In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for
multiple sub blocks of channels (also referred to as a "Multi-SEM" measurement). Sub
blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined center frequency (carrier). Multiple
sub blocks can include gaps or overlap, and each sub block defines a separate mask.
In the overlapping masks, multi-limit lines are calculated. Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7
gaps) can be defined. For each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concern-
ing ranges, limit lines etc. can be defined individually.

Comparison to "traditional" SEM measurement

The default SEM measurement is simply a special case of "Multi-SEM" - consisting of
one single block. Only if the number of sub blocks in the basic SEM configuration is
larger than 1, multiple sub blocks are inserted in the configuration settings and result
tables.

Particular features of configuring multiple sub blocks

The sub blocks are independent of the global start, stop, center and span frequencies
for the complete SEM measurement. Thus, there can be gaps that can even include
other carrier ranges, but are not configured for the SEM measurement.
For each sub block, you define:
● The center frequency of the reference range of the sub block; center frequencies
must be defined in ascending order for sub blocks A,B,C
● The reference range; note that although individual ranges of different sub blocks
can overlap, reference ranges for different sub blocks cannot; they must define dis-
tinct frequency ranges
● The sweep list, including the limit lines
● Optionally: a standard file or MSR settings to be used for measurement (if one is
selected, the other is disabled)

Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks

For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub
block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting,
this setting is disabled.

Absolute vs relative frequencies

In the default configuration with only one sub block, frequencies are defined relative to
the center frequency; this is the familiar configuration.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 246

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

For setups with more than one sub block, frequencies are defined relative to the center
frequency of the reference ranges for the individual sub blocks. However, in the result
summary, frequencies are indicated as absolute values. Relative frequencies that refer
to different reference ranges would be inconvenient and difficult to analyze.

Limit check behavior for overlapping masks

Since spectrum emission masks are defined individually for each sub block, and sub
blocks can overlap, the question arises what happens during the limit check in the
overlapping regions? To answer this question, we must distinguish the following cases:
● For the reference range, no limit checking is performed, as the reference range
contains the carrier
● For other ranges, only the limit lines defined for ranges between the carriers, that is
the reference ranges to either side, are significant. In other words: if a limit line def-
inition covers the frequency area of several carriers, only the limit lines for ranges
between the corresponding reference range and the next closest reference range
are significant.

Figure 6-48: Behavior for overlapping masks

● For the ranges in which multiple limit lines are significant, a range-specific function
determines the behavior of the limit check

Limit calculation for individual ranges

For each range a function can be defined that determines the behavior of the limit
check if there are multiple limit lines:
● "NONE": In reference ranges no limit check is performed;
Reference ranges always use the function "NONE".
For other ranges, see the combinations for overlapping ranges below.
● "SUM": sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used
● "MAX": maximum of the two limit lines is used
This leads to the following combinations for overlapping ranges:
● "MAX"+"MAX": maximum of the two limit lines is used
● "MAX"+"SUM": maximum of the two limit lines is used
● "SUM"+"SUM": sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used
● "NONE"+"MAX"/"NONE"+"SUM": limit line (and parameters) of the "NONE"
range are ignored
● "NONE"+"NONE": depends on the position of the overlapping ranges in relation to
the mid-frequency between the two neighboring sub blocks:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 247

 FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

– Overlap is completely below the mid-frequency: limits and parameters of the

left sub block are used
– Overlap is completely above the mid-frequency: limits and parameters of the
right sub block are used
– Overlap crosses the mid-frequency: new subranges are created: one to the left
of the mid-frequency, one to the right of the mid-frequency. The left subrange
uses the limits and parameters of the left sub block, the right subrange uses
the limits and parameters of the right sub block.

Different RBWs in overlapping ranges

If different RBWs are defined for the overlapping ranges, the following parameters from
the range with the smaller RBW are considered for both ranges:
● RBW
● VBW
● Attenuation
● Reference level
● Transducer
● Filter type
● (proportional) sweep time
In the range with the higher RBW, the following offset is applied to the limit line:
-10*log(RBWlarge / RBWsmall)

Table 6-12: Limit lines in overlapping ranges crossing the mid-frequency

Initial situation: overlapping ranges Result: Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the
mid-frequency;
Range 4 ("None") + Range 5 ("None") overlap and cross the
mid-frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 For subrange 4a: limit line and parameters of range 4 apply
For subrange 5a: limit line and parameters of range 5 apply

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 248

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Global SEM limit check

For the complete SEM measurement, which can consist of multiple sub blocks, only
one single limit check is performed. A single limit line is calculated according to the
individual range limit lines and the defined functions for overlapping ranges. The mea-
sured values are then compared with this single limit line. If the limit is exceeded in any
range, the result of the limit check is ."' failed!"

Figure 6-49: Summarized limit line for multiple sub blocks

6.6.5 SEM configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask"

The SEM measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.7, "Measuring the spectrum emission mask", on page 1001.

Global span settings

The span of the signal to be monitored is configured in the general span settings (see
Section 7.3.2, "Frequency and span settings", on page 475). Only ranges within this
global span are considered for the SEM measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 249

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Multi-SEM configuration
In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for
multiple sub blocks of channels (see Section 6.6.4.5, "SEM with multiple sub blocks
("Multi-SEM")", on page 246). Up to 8 sub blocks (with 7 gaps) can be defined. For
each sub block, the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges, limit lines etc.
can be defined in individual tabs. In addition, settings on the sub blocks themselves
must be configured in the "Sub Block" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" configura-
tion dialog box (see Section 6.6.5.2, "Multi-SEM (sub block) settings", on page 257).

The following settings are available in individual tabs of the "Spectrum Emission Mask"
configuration dialog box.
● Sweep List.............................................................................................................250
● Multi-SEM (sub block) settings..............................................................................257
● Reference range................................................................................................... 258
● Power classes....................................................................................................... 259
● MSR settings.........................................................................................................261
● Standard files........................................................................................................ 264
● List evaluation (results configuration)....................................................................266

6.6.5.1 Sweep List

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Sweep
List"
For SEM measurements, the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which
are swept individually and for which different limitations apply. You configure the indi-
vidual frequency ranges and mask limits in the "Sweep List".

If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations described
in Section 6.6.4.1, "Ranges and range settings", on page 240.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 250

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Range Start / Range Stop........................................................................................... 251

Fast SEM.................................................................................................................... 252
Filter Type................................................................................................................... 252
RBW............................................................................................................................252
VBW............................................................................................................................ 252
Sweep Time Mode...................................................................................................... 252
Sweep Time................................................................................................................ 253
Ref Level..................................................................................................................... 253
RF Att Mode................................................................................................................ 253
RF Attenuation............................................................................................................ 253
SPA: RF Attenuation Mode / SPA: RF Attenuation..................................................... 253
Preamp........................................................................................................................254
Transducer Factor....................................................................................................... 254
Limit Check <n>.......................................................................................................... 254
Abs Limit Start / Stop <n>........................................................................................... 255
Rel Limit Start / Stop <n>............................................................................................ 255
Multi-Limit Calc <n>.................................................................................................... 255
Min Sweep Points....................................................................................................... 256
Insert before Range / Insert after Range.....................................................................256
Delete Range.............................................................................................................. 256
Symmetrical Setup...................................................................................................... 256

Range Start / Range Stop

Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 251

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

To change the start/stop frequency of the first or last range, respectively, select the
appropriate span in the [SPAN] configuration dialog. You can set a span that is smaller
than the overall span of the ranges. In this case, the measurement includes only the
ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz. The first
and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz
is not violated.
Define frequency values for each range relative to the center frequency. Center the ref-
erence range on the center frequency. The current "Tx Bandwidth" defines the mini-
mum span of the reference range (see "Channel Power Settings" on page 259).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 1008
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 1009

Fast SEM
Activates "Fast SEM" mode for all ranges in the sweep list. For details, see Sec-
tion 6.6.4.3, "Fast SEM measurements", on page 244.
Note: If you deactivate "Fast SEM" mode while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on,
"Symmetrical Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If you activate "Fast SEM" mode while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range
settings can be configured symmetrically automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed on page 1005

Filter Type
Sets the filter type for this range.
For details on filter types, see Section 7.5.1.6, "Which data may pass: filter types",
on page 498.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE on page 1007

RBW
Sets the resolution bandwidth for this range.
For details on the RBW, see Section 7.5.1.1, "Separating signals by selecting an
appropriate resolution bandwidth", on page 494.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 1006

VBW
Sets the video bandwidth for this range.
For details on the VBW, see Section 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the trace using the video
bandwidth", on page 495.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 1006

Sweep Time Mode

Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 252

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

For details on the sweep time mode, see Section 7.5.1.7, "How long the data is mea-
sured: Sweep Time", on page 499
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1019

Sweep Time
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
For details on the sweep time, see Section 7.5.1.7, "How long the data is measured:
Sweep Time", on page 499
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME on page 1019

Ref Level
Sets the reference level for the range.
For details on the reference level, see Section 7.4.1.1, "Reference level", on page 481.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel on page 1018

RF Att Mode
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
For details on attenuation, see Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482.
Note: If an external frontend is active (see External frontend settings), the required
attenuation is applied to the input of the external frontend, not the FSW. However, you
can configure additional attenuation for the analyzer (see SPA: RF Attenuation Mode /
SPA: RF Attenuation). When using an external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is
available.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW User Manual.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1009

RF Attenuation
Sets the attenuation value for the range.
For details on attenuation, see Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 1009

SPA: RF Attenuation Mode / SPA: RF Attenuation

If an external frontend is active (see External frontend settings), you can configure
attenuation settings for the external frontend and the analyzer separately. This setting
defines the attenuation for the analyzer.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW User Manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 253

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

When using an external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is available.

The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference
level (Auto mode). Automatic attenuation ensures that no overload occurs at the RF
Input connector for the current reference level. It is the default setting.
In "Manual" mode, you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps (down to 0 dB). Other
entries are rounded to the next integer value. The range is specified in the specifica-
tions document. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenua-
tion, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is dis-
played.
NOTICE! Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels. When decreasing the
attenuation manually, ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level
allowed at the RF input, as an overload can lead to hardware damage.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation
on page 1011
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation:AUTO
on page 1011

Preamp
Switches the preamplifier on or off.
For details on the preamplifier, see "Preamplifier" on page 490.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 1010

Transducer Factor
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
For details on transducers, see Section 11.4.1, "Basics on transducer factors",
on page 756.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer on page 1020

Limit Check <n>

Sets the type of limit check for the n-th power class in the range. Up to four limits are
possible.
For details on limit checks, see Section 6.6.4.2, "Limit lines in SEM measurements",
on page 242.
The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 1017
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1348

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 254

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Abs Limit Start / Stop <n>

Sets an absolute limit value for the n-th power class at the start or stop frequency of
the range [dBm].
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STARt
on page 1012
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP
on page 1013

Rel Limit Start / Stop <n>

Sets a relative limit value for the n-th power class at the start or stop frequency of the
range [dBc].
By default, this value is a fixed relative limit, i.e. no function is defined. To define a
function for the relative limit, select the input field for "Rel Limit Start" or "Rel Limit
Stop" and then the "f(x)" icon that appears.

If the function is set to "Max", you can define a relative and an absolute limit level. In
this case, the maximum of the two values is used as the limit level.
For more information, see "Relative limit line functions" on page 243.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt
on page 1013
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP
on page 1015
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:
FUNCtion on page 1014
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:FUNCtion
on page 1016
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS
on page 1014
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP:ABS
on page 1016

Multi-Limit Calc <n>

Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n-th power class for overlap-
ping ranges in Multi-SEM measurements. For details, see "Limit calculation for individ-
ual ranges" on page 247.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 255

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

"NONE" (reference ranges only:) the limit of the reference range is used
"SUM" Sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used
"MAX" Maximum of the two limit lines is used
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc on page 1018

Min Sweep Points

Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range.
If necessary to fulfill all minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges, the global
Sweep Points setting is increased. By default, each range is supplied with a minimum
of one sweep point.
For details, see "Sweep points" on page 241
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:POINts:MINimum[:VALue] on page 1018

Insert before Range / Insert after Range

Inserts a new range to the left (before) or to the right (after) of the range in which the
cursor is currently displayed. The range numbers of the currently focused range and all
higher ranges are increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 30.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert on page 1012

Delete Range
Deletes the currently focused range, if possible. (The reference range cannot be
deleted. A minimum of three ranges is required.) The range numbers are updated
accordingly.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:DELete on page 1007

Symmetrical Setup
Any changes to the range settings in active "Symmetrical Setup" mode lead to sym-
metrical changes in the other ranges (where possible). In particular, this means:
● Inserting ranges: a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference
range
● Deleting ranges: the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is
also deleted
● Editing range settings: the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord-
ingly
Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, "Sym
Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated.
If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetrical Setup" mode is on, not all range
settings can be set automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SSETup on page 1020

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 256

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

6.6.5.2 Multi-SEM (sub block) settings

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Sub
Blocks"
In the Spectrum application application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for
multiple sub blocks of channels (see Section 6.6.4.5, "SEM with multiple sub blocks
("Multi-SEM")", on page 246). Sub blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined
center frequency (carrier).
By default, a single sub block is assumed. If more than one sub blocks are defined,
additional tabs are inserted for each sub block in the individual tabs of the "Spectrum
Emission Mask" configuration dialog box.

Sub Block Count......................................................................................................... 257

Sub Block / Center Freq..............................................................................................257
Standard / MSR Settings.............................................................................................257
Edit Sweep List........................................................................................................... 258

Sub Block Count

Defines the number of sub blocks. By default, the familiar SEM measurement with just
one single block of ranges is configured.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCOunt on page 1004

Sub Block / Center Freq

Defines the center frequency for an individual sub block. The center frequency deter-
mines the reference range used for each block.
For measurements with only one sub block, this setting corresponds to the global set-
ting in the "Frequency" settings (see Center Frequency).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:SCENter on page 1004

Standard / MSR Settings

Defines the use of a standard settings file or a multi-standard radio configuration for a
particular sub block. For details, see Section 6.6.5.6, "Standard files", on page 264 and
Section 6.6.5.5, "MSR settings", on page 261.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 257

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Note that either a standard or an MSR setting can be selected; if one is selected, the
other is disabled.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 1002
Section 13.5.7.3, "Configuring a multi-sem measurement", on page 1003

Edit Sweep List

Switches to the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box to con-
figure the individual frequency ranges and mask limits for the corresponding sub block.
See Section 6.6.5.1, "Sweep List", on page 250.

6.6.5.3 Reference range

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Refer-
ence Range"
The range around the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other
ranges in the sweep list.

Power Reference Type................................................................................................258

Channel Power Settings..............................................................................................259
└ Tx Bandwidth................................................................................................ 259
└ RRC Filter State............................................................................................259
└ Alpha:............................................................................................................259

Power Reference Type

Defines how the reference power is calculated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 258

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

"Channel Power"
Measures the channel power within the reference range using the
integration bandwidth method. Additional settings can be configured
for this method.
(See also "IBW method" on page 154)
"Peak Power"
Determines the peak power within the reference range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe on page 1022

Channel Power Settings

If the "Power Reference Type:" "Channel Power" was selected, additional parameters
can be configured.

Tx Bandwidth ← Channel Power Settings

Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power, with:
Minimum span ≤ "Tx Bandwidth" ≤ of reference range
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID on page 1021

RRC Filter State ← Channel Power Settings

Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] on page 1021

Alpha: ← Channel Power Settings

Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter (if activated).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:FILTer[:RRC]:ALPHa on page 1021

6.6.5.4 Power classes

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Power
Classes"
You can configure power classes which you can then assign to sweep list ranges. For
details, see "Power classes" on page 241.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 259

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Used Power Classes:..................................................................................................260

PMin/ PMax.................................................................................................................260
Sweep List...................................................................................................................261
Adding or Removing a Power Class........................................................................... 261

Used Power Classes:

Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement. Limits can be
defined only for used power classes. It is only possible to select either one specific
power class or all the defined power classes.
If "All" is selected, the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power
in the reference range is used for monitoring. The limits assigned to that power class
are applied (see "Abs Limit Start / Stop <n>" on page 255 and "Rel Limit Start / Stop
<n>" on page 255).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>[:EXCLusive]
on page 1025
To define all limits in one step:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:LIMit[:STATe]
on page 1026

PMin/ PMax
Defines the power limits for each power class. The first range always starts at -200
dBm (-INF) and the last range always stops at 200 dBm (+INF). These fields cannot be
modified. If more than one power class is defined, the value of "PMin" must be equal to
the value of "PMax" of the previous power class and vice versa.
Note that the power level can be equal to the lower limit(s), but must be lower than the
upper limit(s):
Pmin≦P<Pmax
Otherwise the ranges are corrected automatically.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 260

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum
on page 1027
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum
on page 1026

Sweep List
Switches to the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box and
focuses the "Limit Check" setting for the corresponding power class (1-4) in the refer-
ence range (see "Limit Check <n>" on page 254).

Adding or Removing a Power Class

Adds a new power class at the end of the list or removes the last power class. After
adding or removing, the last power class is adapted to end at "+INF". Note that a maxi-
mum of four power classes are available.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:COUNt on page 1025

6.6.5.5 MSR settings

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "MSR
Settings"
Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on multiple
carriers using different digital standards.
For details, see Section 6.6.4.4, "Multi-standard radio (MSR) SEM measurements",
on page 245.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 261

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Band Category............................................................................................................ 262

Base Station Class......................................................................................................262
Base Station Maximum Output Power........................................................................ 263
Bands.......................................................................................................................... 263
Base Station RF Bandwidth........................................................................................ 263
Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge..................................................................... 263
Power Gsm Carrier..................................................................................................... 263
Apply to SEM.............................................................................................................. 264

Band Category
Defines the band category for MSR measurements, i.e. the combination of available
carriers to measure.
"BC1" LTE FDD and W-CDMA
"BC2" LTE FDD, W-CDMA and GSM/EDGE
"BC3" LTE TDD and TD-SCDMA
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory on page 1029

Base Station Class

Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range.
This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141
V12.2.0.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 262

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs on page 1030

Base Station Maximum Output Power

Defines the maximum output power of the base station. Possible values are from
0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps.
This setting is only available for base stations with a medium range Base Station
Class.
This value is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141
V12.2.0.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:MPOWer on page 1032

Bands
Defines the frequency range of the bands used by the base station.
This setting is only available for Band Category 1 or 3.
This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141
V12.2.0.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BAND on page 1028

Base Station RF Bandwidth

Defines the relevant RF bandwidth (span) required to measure all available carriers in
MSR SEM measurements.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:RFBWidth on page 1033

Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge

For particular measurement setups, the specification demands specific limits for the
SEM ranges.
These settings are only available for Band Category 2.
"GSM/Edge Present"
A GSM/EDGE carrier is located at the edge of the RF band.
In this case, the power of the GSM carrier must be specified (see
"Power Gsm Carrier" on page 263).
"LTE FDD 1.4MHz/3MHz Present"
An LTE FDD 1.4 MHz or 3 MHz carrier is located at the edge of the
RF band.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent on page 1031
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:LTE:CPResent on page 1032

Power Gsm Carrier

Defines the power of the GSM carrier (if available, see "Carrier Adjacent to RF Band-
width Edge" on page 263). Possible values are from 0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps.
This setting is only available for Band Category2.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 263

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141
V12.2.0.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CARRier on page 1030

Apply to SEM
Configures the SEM sweep list according to the specified MSR settings.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy on page 1028

6.6.5.6 Standard files

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Stan-
dard Files"
You can save the current measurement settings as a user-defined standard (XML file),
or load stored measurement settings. Furthermore, you can delete an existing settings
file.

For details, see Section 6.6.6.1, "How to manage SEM settings files", on page 271.

Standard files for sub blocks (Multi-SEM measurements)

If more than one sub blocks are defined, the "Standard Files" tab and softkey are not
available. To load a standard file for an individual sub block, use the Standard / MSR
Settings setting in the "Sub Blocks" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 264

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................265

File Name....................................................................................................................265
Load Standard.............................................................................................................265
File Explorer................................................................................................................ 265
Save Standard............................................................................................................ 266
Delete Standard.......................................................................................................... 266
Restore Standard Files............................................................................................... 266

Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files

Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog on page 1353

File Name
Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore.
Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g.
limit_lines_005.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Section 10.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 684.

Load Standard
Loads the selected measurement settings file.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] on page 1002

File Explorer
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 265

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Save Standard
Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the
defined name.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe on page 1002

Delete Standard
Deletes the selected standard. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be
deleted. A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stan-
dard.
Note: Restoring predefined standard files. The standards predefined by Rohde &
Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the "Restore Standard
Files" function (see "Restore Standard Files" on page 266).

Restore Standard Files

Restores the standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of deliv-
ery.
The XML files from the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_backup
folder are copied to the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std folder.
Note that this function overwrites customized standards that have the same name as
predefined standards.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore on page 1002

6.6.5.7 List evaluation (results configuration)

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "List
Evaluation"
In the "List Evaluation" dialog box, you configure the contents and display of the SEM
results.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 266

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

List Evaluation State (result summary)....................................................................... 267

Show Peaks................................................................................................................ 267
Margin......................................................................................................................... 267
Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File............................................... 268

List Evaluation State (result summary)

Activates or deactivates the Result Summary.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO on page 1034
TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262

Show Peaks
If activated, all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are
marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 1035

Margin
Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, you can define a
margin (or: threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary. Only
peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed (also in the diagram, if activated).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin on page 1034

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 267

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File

Exports the Result Summary of the SEM measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation
in an external application. If necessary, change the decimal separator for evaluation in
other languages.
Define the filename and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is dis-
played when you select the "Save" function.
For details, see Section 6.6.8.2, "ASCII file export format (spectrum emission mask)",
on page 280.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1378
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

6.6.6 How to perform a spectrum emission mask measurement

SEM measurements can be performed according to a specific standard or freely con-

figured. Configuration for signals with a regular channel definition can be configured
quickly and easily. Selecting the SEM measurement is a prerequisite for all other tasks.
For signals with multiple carriers, also in non-contiguous ranges, an SEM measure-
ment with multiple sub blocks can be configured.
For multi-standard radio SEM measurements, configuration for specified scenarios can
be done automatically.
The following tasks are described:
● "To select an SEM measurement" on page 268
● "To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard" on page 268
● "To configure a user-defined SEM measurement" on page 268
● "To perform an MSR SEM measurement" on page 270
● "To perform a Multi-SEM measurement" on page 270

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM measurement",

on page 1035.

To select an SEM measurement

► Press [MEAS], then select the "Spectrum Emission Mask" measurement.

To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard

► Load the settings file as described in "How to load an SEM settings file"
on page 271 and start a measurement.

To configure a user-defined SEM measurement

1. Define the span of the signal you want to monitor in the general span settings.

2. Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with simi-
lar characteristics.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 268

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Starting from the center frequency, determine which sections of the signal to the
left and right can be swept and monitored using the same parameters. Criteria for
such a range definition may be, for example:
● The signal power level
● The required resolution bandwidth or sweep time
● Transducer factors
● Permitted deviation from the defined signal level, i.e. the required limit values
for monitoring
If the signal consists of a transmission channel and adjacent channels, the channel
ranges can usually be used for the range definition.

3. If the signal power level to be monitored varies and the limits vary, define power
classes. For each range of levels that can be monitored in the same way, define a
power class.
a) Select "Overview".
b) Select "SEM Setup".
c) Switch to the "Power Classes" tab.
d) To add a power class, select "Add".
e) Enter the start and stop power levels to define the class.
f) Select the power classes to be used for the current measurement:
● a specific class
● all classes, to have the required class selected automatically according to
the input level measured in the reference range

4. Select the "Sweep List" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box.

5. Insert the required ranges using "Insert before Range" and "Insert after Range",
which refer to the currently selected range (the reference range by default).
If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency, activate the "Sym Setup"
option to make setup easier and quicker.

6. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required. If symmetrical

setup is activated, you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center
range.
In particular, define the limits for each range of the signal, i.e. the area in which the
signal level can deviate without failing the limit check. If several power classes
were defined (see step 3), define limits for each power class.
a) Define the type of limit check, i.e. whether absolute values or relative values
are checked, or both. The type of limit check is identical for all power classes.
b) Define the limit start and stop values.

7. If the sweep list settings - other than the limit and transducer values - are identical
for several adjacent ranges, activate "Fast SEM" mode to speed up the measure-
ment. You only have to activate the mode for one range, the others are adapted
automatically.

8. If necessary, change the settings for the reference power to which all SEM results
refer in the "Reference Range" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 269

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

9. To indicate the determined peaks in the display during an SEM measurement,

select "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Show Peaks".

10. To save the current SEM measurement settings to a file to re-use them later, save
a settings file as described in "How to save a user-defined SEM settings file"
on page 271.

11. Start a sweep.

The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the
Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indica-
ted in the Spectrum diagram.

12. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Sec-
tion 6.6.6.2, "How to save SEM result files", on page 272.

To perform an MSR SEM measurement

1. Select "MSR Config".

2. Select the band category that determines the digital standards used in the mea-
surement setup (see "Band Category" on page 262).

3. Define the bandwidth that contains all relevant carrier signals to be measured.

4. For measurements with GSM/EDGE, LTE FDD and W-CDMA carriers (BC2),
define whether a GSM/EDGE or an LTE FDD carrier, or both, are located at the
edge of the bandwidth.

5. Select "Apply to SEM".

The sweep list is configured according to the MSR specification, with the required
number of ranges and defined limits.

6. Start a sweep.
The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the
Result Summary. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indica-
ted in the Spectrum diagram.

7. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Sec-
tion 6.6.6.2, "How to save SEM result files", on page 272.

To perform a Multi-SEM measurement

1. Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings.

2. Select "Multi-SEM Config".

3. Define the number of sub blocks (up to 8) that contain the relevant carriers.

4. For each sub block, define the center frequency, that is, the frequency of the TX
carrier or a frequency in the dedicated reference range.

5. For each sub block, do one of the following:

● Select a standard settings file to be used.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 270

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

● Select "MSR Settings" and define the MSR configuration as described in "To
perform an MSR SEM measurement" on page 270.
● Select "Edit" and configure the sweep list manually as defined in "To configure
a user-defined SEM measurement" on page 268. Be sure to select the correct
vertical tab for the corresponding sub block within each subtab of the "Spec-
trum Emission Mask" configuration dialog.
Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the "Multi-Limit Calc"
field of the sweep list.

6. Start a sweep.
The determined powers and limit deviations for each sub block, each gap, and
each range are indicated in the Result Summary. If activated, the peak power lev-
els for each range are also indicated in the Spectrum diagram.

7. To save the Result Summary, export the results to a file as described in Sec-
tion 6.6.6.2, "How to save SEM result files", on page 272.

6.6.6.1 How to manage SEM settings files

SEM measurement settings can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to
another application or loaded on the FSW again later. Some predefined XML files are
provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard. All
XML files are stored under
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
For details on the file format of the SEM settings file, see Section 6.6.8.1, "Format
description of SEM XML files", on page 274.
SEM settings or standard files are managed in the "Standard" tab of the "Spectrum
Emission Mask" dialog box. To display this dialog box, select "Overview" and then
"SEM Setup".

How to load an SEM settings file

1. From the file selection dialog box, select the settings file (with a .xml extension).

2. Select "Load".
The settings from the selected file are restored to the FSW and you can repeat the
SEM measurement with the stored settings.

How to save a user-defined SEM settings file

1. Configure the SEM measurement as required (see Section 6.6.6, "How to perform
a spectrum emission mask measurement", on page 268).

2. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, define a
filename and storage location for the settings file.

3. Select "Save".
The settings are stored to a file with the extension .xml as specified.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 271

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

How to delete an SEM settings file

1. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, select the
file you want to delete.

2. Select "Delete".

3. Confirm the message.

The settings file is removed from the FSW.

How to restore default SEM settings files

The FSW is delivered with predefined settings files which can be edited and overwrit-
ten. However, you can restore the original files.
► In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, select
"Restore Standard Files".
The original predefined settings files are available for selection on the FSW.

6.6.6.2 How to save SEM result files

The Result Summary from an SEM measurement can be saved to a file, which can be
exported to another application for further analysis, for example.
For details on the file format of the SEM export file, see Section 6.6.8.2, "ASCII file
export format (spectrum emission mask)", on page 280.

1. Configure and perform an SEM measurement as described in Section 6.6.6, "How

to perform a spectrum emission mask measurement", on page 268.

2. In the "Overview", select "Analysis".

3. If necessary, change the "Decimal Separator" to "COMMA" for evaluation in other

languages.

4. Select "Save".

5. In the file selection dialog box, select a storage location and filename for the result
file.

6. Select "Save".
The file with the specified name and the extension .dat is stored in the defined
storage location.

6.6.7 Measurement example: Multi-SEM measurement

The following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal

with multiple sub blocks.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 272

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment

is provided in Section 13.5.7.11, "Example: SEM measurement", on page 1035.

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. FSW SMW):

Device Standard Center frequency Level Test model

SigGen 1 3GPP/FDD 900 MHz 0 dBm 1-16

SigGen 2 EUTRA/LTE 906.5 MHz 0 dBm 1_1_5MHz

Setting up the measurement

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 903.25 MHz.

3. Set the reference level to 10 dBm with an offset of to 30 dB.

4. Press [MEAS] or select "Select Measurement" in the "Overview".

5. Select the "SEM" measurement function.

6. Select "Sub Blocks" and enter "Sub Block Count" of 2.

7. For "Sub Block A", define the settings for the 3GPP/FDD signal:
● Set the "Center Frequency" to 900 MHz
● Select "MSR Settings".
● Set the "Base Station RF Bandwidth" to 5 MHz.
● Select "Apply to SEM".

8. For "Sub Block B", define the settings for the EUTRA/LTE signal:
● Set the "Center Frequency" to 906.5 MHz
● Select "MSR Settings".
● Set the "Base Station RF Bandwidth" to 5 MHz.
● Select "Apply to SEM".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 273

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

9. Select [RUN SINGLE] to perform a measurement with the new settings.

The results of the measurement for each sub block are displayed in the Result
Summary. The summarized limit line is indicated in the Spectrum graph.

Figure 6-50: Multi-SEM measurement: results of the measurement for each sub block

6.6.8 Reference: SEM file descriptions

This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files.
● Format description of SEM XML files....................................................................274
● ASCII file export format (spectrum emission mask).............................................. 280

6.6.8.1 Format description of SEM XML files

The SEM XML files offer a quick way to change the measurement settings. A set of
predefined XML files for different standards is already provided. You can also create
and use your own XML files. Alternatively, edit the settings directly in the "Spectrum
Emission Mask" dialog box and save the XML file afterwards. This way, you do not
have to modify the XML file itself.
In addition to saving the current settings to a file, settings files can also be created
independently of the FSW, in an external application. When creating your own XML
files, be sure to comply with the following conventions because the FSW can only inter-
pret XML files of a known structure. For sample files, see the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std direc-
tory of the FSW.
To load a settings file, use the "Load" function in the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spec-
trum Emission Mask" dialog box (see "How to load an SEM settings file" on page 271).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 274

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

All XML files are stored under

C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
The files for importing range settings obey the rules of the XML standard. The child
nodes, attributes, and structure defined for the data import are described here.

Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the FSW is not able to
interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen. It is recommended
that you make a copy of an existing file and edit the copy of the file.

Basically, the file consists of three elements that can be defined:

● The BaseFormat element
● The PowerClass element
● The Range element

The "BaseFormat" element

It carries information about basic settings. In this element, only the ReferencePower
child node has any effects on the measurement itself. The other attributes and child
nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask standard on
the measurement screen. The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in
Table 6-13.

Example:
In the sample file PowerClass_39_43.xml under
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std\
WCDMA\3GPP, these attributes are defined as follows:
● Standard="W-CDMA 3GPP"
● LinkDirection="DL"
● PowerClass="(39,43)dBm"

The "PowerClass" element

It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about
the power classes. Up to four different power classes can be defined. For details, refer
to Section 6.6.5.4, "Power classes", on page 259. The child nodes and attributes of this
element are shown in Table 6-14.

The "Range" element

This element is embedded in the PowerClass element. It contains the settings infor-
mation of the range. There have to be at least three defined ranges: one reference
range and at least one range to either side of the reference range. The maximum num-
ber of ranges is 30. Note that the FSW uses the same ranges in each power class.
Therefore, the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical
to the first power class. The Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are
used to determine the power class are an exception. Note also that you must define

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 275

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

two limit nodes: one that defines the limit in absolute values and one in relative values.
Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node.
For details, refer to Section 6.6.5.1, "Sweep List", on page 250. The child nodes and
attributes of this element are shown in Table 6-15.
The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a
child node or attribute is mandatory for the FSW to interpret the file or not. The hierar-
chy of the XML cannot be seen in the tables. View one of the predefined files already
stored on the FSW in the "C:\Program Files
(x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std" directory, or check the struc-
ture as shown below.
Below, a basic example of the structure of the file is shown, containing all mandatory
attributes and child nodes. Note that the PowerClass element and the Range element
are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element. They must be inserted where
noted. They are separated here simply to provide a better overview. Also, no example
values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above. Italic font shows
the placeholders for the values.
● The BaseFormat element is structured as follows:
– <RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version="1.0.0.0">
<Name>"Standard"</Name>
<Instrument>
<Type>"Instrument Type"</Type>
<Application>"Application"</Application>
</Instrument>
<LinkDirection Name="Name">
<ReferencePower>
<Method>"Method"</Method>
</ReferencePower>
<PowerClass Index="n">
<!-- For contents of the PowerClass node, see Table 6-14 -->
<!-- Define up to four PowerClass nodes -->
</PowerClass>
</LinkDirection>
</RS_SEM_ACP_File>
● The "PowerClass" element is structured as follows:
– <PowerClass Index="n">
<StartPower Unit="dBm" InclusiveFlag="true" Value="StartPowerValue"/>
<StopPower Unit="dBm" InclusiveFlag="false" Value="StopPowerValue"/>
<DefaultLimitFailMode>"Limit Fail Mode"</DefaultLimitFailMode>
<Range Index="n">
<!-- For contents of the Range node, see Table 6-15 -->
<!-- Define up to twenty Range nodes -->
</Range>
…
</PowerClass>
● The "Range" element is structured as follows:
– <Range Index="n">

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 276

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

<Name="Name">
<ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type>
<WeightingFilter>
<Type>"FilterType"</Type>
<RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor>
<Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth>
</WeightingFilter>
<FrequencyRange>
<Start>"RangeStart"</Start>
<Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop>
</FrequencyRange>
<Limit>
<Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/>
<Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/>
</Limit>
<Limit>
<Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/>
<Stop Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/>
</Limit>
<RBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth" Type="FilterType"/>
<VBW Bandwidth="Bandwidth"/>
<Detector>"Detector"</Detector>
<Sweep Mode="SweepMode" Time="SweepTime"/>
<Amplitude>
<ReferenceLevel Unit="dBm" Value="Value"/>
<RFAttenuation Mode="Auto" Unit="dB" Value="Value"/>
<Preamplifier State="State"/>
</Amplitude>
<MeasPointsMin>1</MeasPointsMin>
<CalcRuleMulti>Sum</CalcRuleMulti>
</Range>
Table 6-13: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

FileFormatVersion 1.0.0.0 Yes

Date YYYY-MM-DD Date in ISO 8601 format No

HH:MM:SS

Name <string> Name of the standard Yes

Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No

Application SA | K72 | K82 Name of the application No

LinkDirection Name Downlink | Uplink | Yes

None

ShortName DL | UL No

Reference- Yes
Power

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 277

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.

Method TX Channel Power | Yes

TX Channel Peak
Power

Reference- <string> No
Channel

Table 6-14: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element

Child Node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand.

StartPower Value <power in dBm> The start power must be equal Yes
to the stop power of the previ-
ous power class. The Start-
Power value of the first range
is -200

Unit dBm Yes

InclusiveFlag true Yes

StopPower Value <power in dBm> The stop power must be equal Yes
to the start power of the next
power class. The StopPower
value of the last range is 200

Unit dBm

InclusiveFlag false Yes

DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute | Relative Yes

| Absolute and Rel-
ative | Absolute or
Relative

Table 6-15: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges)

Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand.

Index 0…19 Indices are continuous and Yes

have to start with 0

Name <string> Name of the range Only if Referen-

ceChannel con-
tains a name and
the range is the
reference range

Short- <string> Short name of the range No

Name

ChannelType TX | Adjacent Yes

WeightingFilter Only if Referen-

cePower method
is TX Channel
Power and the
range is the ref-
erence range

Type RRC | CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 278

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand.

Roll Off Factor 0…1 Excess bandwidth of the fil- Only if the filter
ter type is RRC

Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> Filter bandwidth Only if the filter

type is RRC

FrequencyRange Yes

Start <frequency in Hz> Start value of the range Yes

Stop <frequency in Hz> Stop value of the range Yes

Limit dBm/Hz | dBm | A Range must contain Yes

dBc | dBr | dB exactly two limit nodes; one
of the limit nodes has to
have a relative unit (e.g.
dBc), the other one must
have an absolute unit (e.g.
dBm)

Start Value <numeric_value> Power limit at start fre- Yes

quency

Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the start

dBc | dBr | dB value

Stop Value <numeric_value> Power limit at stop fre-

quency

Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the stop

dBc | dBr | dB value

LimitFailMode Absolute | Relative If used, it has to be identical No

| Absolute and Rel- to DefaultLimitFailMode
ative | Absolute or
Relative

RBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "RBW" on page 252 Yes

Type NORM | PULS | No

CFIL | RRC

VBW Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz> "VBW" on page 252 Yes

Detector NEG | POS | If used, it has to be identical No

SAMP | RMS | in all ranges.
AVER | QUAS

Sweep Mode Manual | Auto "Sweep Time Mode" Yes

on page 252

Time <time in sec> "Sweep Time" on page 253 No

Amplitude No

ReferenceLevel Value <power in dBm> "Ref Level" on page 253 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used

Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes, if the Refer-

enceLevel node
is used

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 279

FSW Measurements and results
Spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement

Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand.

RFAttenuation Mode Manual | Auto "RF Att Mode" on page 253 Yes, if the Refer-
enceLevel child
node is used

Preamplifier ON | OFF | 1 | 0 "Preamplifier" on page 490 Yes

6.6.8.2 ASCII file export format (spectrum emission mask)

When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported, the data is stored in ASCII
format as described below. The first part of the file lists information about the signal
analyzer and the general setup.

File contents Explanation

File header

Type;FSW-26; Model

Version;1.00; Firmware version

Date;31.Mar 17; Storage date of data set

Mode;ANALYZER;SEM; Operating mode and measurement function

Center Freq;13250000000.000000;Hz X-axis settings

Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz

Span;25500000.000000;Hz

x-Axis;LIN;

Start;13237250000.000000;Hz

Stop;13262750000.000000;Hz

Level Offset;0.000000;dB Y-axis settings

Ref Position;100.000000;%

y-Axis;LOG;

Level Range;100.000000;dB

Trace settings

Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;

Detector;RMS;

Sweep Count;0;

Trace 1:;

x-Unit;Hz;

y-Unit;dBm;

List evaluation settings

Margin;200; Peak List margin

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 280

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

File contents Explanation

Reference range settings

RefType; CPOWER; Reference power type

TxBandwidth;3840000;;Hz Channel power settings

Filter State; ON;

Alpha;0.22;

PeaksPerRange;1; Max. number of peaks per range to be detected

Values;2; Number of detected peaks

File data section

0;-12750000;-2515000;30000;13242367500;-43.844 Measured peak values:

722747802734;-0.33028793334960938;49.6697120
<range number>;
66650391;FAIL;
<start frequency>;
2;2515000;12750000;30000;13257632500;-43.8447 <stop frequency>;
22747802734;-0.33028793334960938;49.66971206
6650391;FAIL; <resolution bandwidth of range>;
<frequency of peak>;
<absolute power in dBm of peak>;
<relative power in dBc of peak>; (related to the
channel power)
<distance to the limit line in dB>; (positive value
means above the limit)
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;

6.7 Spurious emissions measurement

Spurious emissions measurements monitor unwanted RF products outside the
assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier.
● About the measurement........................................................................................281
● Spurious emissions measurement results............................................................ 282
● Spurious emissions basics....................................................................................283
● Spurious emissions measurement configuration.................................................. 285
● How to perform a spurious emissions measurement............................................ 292
● Reference: ASCII export file format (spurious)..................................................... 294

6.7.1 About the measurement

The Spurious Emissions measurement monitors unwanted RF products outside the

assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier. The spurious emissions are usu-
ally measured across a wide frequency range. The Spurious Emissions measurement
allows a flexible definition of all parameters. A result table indicates the largest devia-
tions of the absolute power from the limit line for each range, and the results can be
checked against defined limits automatically.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 281

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

6.7.2 Spurious emissions measurement results

The measured signal, including any spurious emissions, and optionally the detected
peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagram. If defined, the
limit lines and the limit check results are also indicated. In addition to the graphical
results, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit
check results (see also Section 6.7.3.2, "Limit lines in spurious measurements",
on page 284). The details of the evaluation list can be configured.

The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range:

Column Description

Range Low Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to

Range Up Frequency range end for the range the peak value belongs to

RBW RBW of the range

Frequency Frequency at the peak value

Power Abs Absolute power level at the peak value

ΔLimit Deviation of the absolute power level from the defined limit for the peak
value

By default, one peak per range is displayed. However, you can change the settings to:
● Display all peaks
● Display a certain number of peaks per range
● Display only peaks that exceed a threshold ("Margin")

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 282

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

● Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram, as well as in the peak list

Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file.

Retrieving Results via Remote Control

The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the
TRAC:DATA? SPUR command (see TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262).

6.7.3 Spurious emissions basics

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emis-
sions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required config-
uration settings.
● Ranges and range settings................................................................................... 283
● Limit lines in spurious measurements................................................................... 284

6.7.3.1 Ranges and range settings

Conditions for ranges

The following rules apply to ranges:
● The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz.
● The individual ranges must not overlap (but can have gaps).
● The maximum number of ranges is 30
● The maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001.
You can define a span that is smaller than the combined span of the ranges. In this
case, the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and
have a minimum span of 20 Hz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 283

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Defining ranges by remote control

In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new
ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or redefine the exist-
ing ranges to create the required order.
A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emis-
sions measurements is described in Section 13.5.8.7, "Programming example: spuri-
ous emissions measurement", on page 1051.

6.7.3.2 Limit lines in spurious measurements

Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Gener-
ally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application
using [Lines]. For Spurious measurements, however, a special limit line is available via
the "Sweep List", and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line defini-
tion.
In the "Sweep List", you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the
specified frequency ranges. A distinguished limit line is automatically defined according
to the current "Sweep List" settings every time the settings change. This limit line is
labeled "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>", where <xxx> is an index to distinguish limit
lines between different channels.
If a limit check is activated in the "Sweep List", the "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>"
limit line is indicated by a red line in the display. The result of the limit check is indica-
ted at the top of the diagram. Note that only "Pass" or "Fail" is indicated; a margin func-
tion as for general limit lines is not available. Also, only absolute limits can be checked,
not relative ones.

As for general limit lines, the results of each limit line check are displayed (here:
"_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_<xxx>"), as well as the combined result for all defined limit
lines ("Limit Check").

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 284

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

The limit check is considered to be "' failed!" if any signal level outside the absolute lim-
its is measured.
If the limit check is activated, the limit line values for each range are displayed in the
evaluation list. Furthermore, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit
line for each range are displayed. Values that exceed the limit are indicated in red and
by an asterisk (*).

Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold)
for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined. Furthermore,
you can define how many peaks per range are listed. For details, see Section 6.7.4.3,
"List evaluation", on page 290.

6.7.4 Spurious emissions measurement configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions"

The spurious emissions measurement is started immediately with the default settings.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.8, "Measuring spurious emissions", on page 1038.
● Sweep list..............................................................................................................285
● Adjusting the X-Axis to the range definitions.........................................................290
● List evaluation....................................................................................................... 290

6.7.4.1 Sweep list

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "Sweep List"
For Spurious Emissions measurements, the input signal is split into several frequency
ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply.

If you edit the sweep list, always follow the rules and consider the limitations described
in Section 6.7.3.1, "Ranges and range settings", on page 283.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 285

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Range Start / Range Stop........................................................................................... 286

Filter Type................................................................................................................... 287
RBW............................................................................................................................287
VBW............................................................................................................................ 287
Sweep Time Mode...................................................................................................... 287
Sweep Time................................................................................................................ 287
Detector.......................................................................................................................287
Reference Level.......................................................................................................... 288
RF Attenuation Mode.................................................................................................. 288
RF Attenuation............................................................................................................ 288
SPA: RF Attenuation Mode / SPA: RF Attenuation..................................................... 288
Preamp........................................................................................................................289
Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 289
Stop After Sweep........................................................................................................ 289
Transducer.................................................................................................................. 289
Limit Check................................................................................................................. 289
Abs Limit Start/ Abs Limit Stop....................................................................................290
Insert before Range/ Insert after Range......................................................................290
Delete Range.............................................................................................................. 290

Range Start / Range Stop

Sets the start frequency/stop frequency of the selected range.
You can define a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges. In this case,
the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a
minimum span of 20 Hz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 286

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 1042
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP on page 1042

Filter Type
Sets the filter type for this range.
For details on filter types, see Section 7.5.1.6, "Which data may pass: filter types",
on page 498.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:FILTer:TYPE on page 1043

RBW
Sets the RBW value for this range.
For details on the RBW, see Section 7.5.1.1, "Separating signals by selecting an
appropriate resolution bandwidth", on page 494.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution on page 1040

VBW
Sets the VBW value for this range.
For details on the VBW, see Section 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the trace using the video
bandwidth", on page 495.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 1040

Sweep Time Mode

Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
For details on the sweep time mode, see Section 7.5.1.7, "How long the data is mea-
sured: Sweep Time", on page 499
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1048

Sweep Time
Sets the sweep time value for the range.
For details on the sweep time, see Section 7.5.1.7, "How long the data is measured:
Sweep Time", on page 499
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME on page 1048

Detector
Sets the detector for the range.
For details, refer to "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector"
on page 611.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector on page 1041

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 287

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Reference Level
Sets the reference level for the range.
For details on the reference level, see Section 7.4.1.1, "Reference level", on page 481.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel on page 1047

RF Attenuation Mode
Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
For details on attenuation, see Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482.
Note: If an external frontend is active (see External frontend settings), you can config-
ure attenuation settings for the external frontend and the analyzer separately. This set-
ting defines the attenuation for the external frontend.
When using an external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is available.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW User Manual.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1044

RF Attenuation
Sets the attenuation value for that range.
For details on attenuation, see Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation on page 1044

SPA: RF Attenuation Mode / SPA: RF Attenuation

If an external frontend is active (see External frontend settings), you can configure
attenuation settings for the external frontend and the analyzer separately. This setting
defines the attenuation for the analyzer.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW User Manual.
When using an external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is available.
The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference
level (Auto mode). Automatic attenuation ensures that no overload occurs at the RF
Input connector for the current reference level. It is the default setting.
In "Manual" mode, you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps (down to 0 dB). Other
entries are rounded to the next integer value. The range is specified in the specifica-
tions document. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenua-
tion, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is dis-
played.
NOTICE! Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels. When decreasing the
attenuation manually, ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level
allowed at the RF input, as an overload can lead to hardware damage.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 288

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation on page 1045
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation:AUTO
on page 1045

Preamp
Switches the preamplifier on or off.
For details on the preamplifier, see "Preamplifier" on page 490.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 1044

Sweep Points
Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range.
For details on sweep points, see Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data is measured: sweep
points and sweep count", on page 499.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue] on page 1047

Stop After Sweep

This command configures the sweep behavior.
"On" The FSW stops after one range is swept and continues only if you
confirm (a message box is displayed).
"Off" The FSW sweeps all ranges in one go.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BREak on page 1040

Transducer
Sets a transducer for the specified range. You can only choose a transducer that fulfills
the following conditions:
● The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range.
● The x-axis is linear.
● The unit is dB.
For details on transducers, see Section 11.4.1, "Basics on transducer factors",
on page 756.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer on page 1048

Limit Check
Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges.
For details on limit checks, see Section 6.7.3.2, "Limit lines in spurious measure-
ments", on page 284.
"ABSOLUTE" Signal is checked against absolute limit values
"NONE" No limit check is performed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 289

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STATe on page 1046
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:FAIL? on page 1348

Abs Limit Start/ Abs Limit Stop

Sets an absolute limit value at the start or stop frequency of the range [dBm].
Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt on page 1046
[SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STOP on page 1047

Insert before Range/ Insert after Range

Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range (before) or to the right
(after). The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are
increased accordingly. The maximum number of ranges is 30.

Delete Range
Deletes the currently focused range. The range numbers are updated accordingly.

6.7.4.2 Adjusting the X-Axis to the range definitions

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "Adjust X-Axis"
The frequency axis of the measurement diagram can be adjusted automatically so that
the span of all sweep list ranges corresponds to the displayed span. Thus, the x-axis
range is set from the start frequency of the first sweep range to the stop frequency of
the last sweep range.

Remote command:
[SENSe:]LIST:XADJust on page 1051

6.7.4.3 List evaluation

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spurious Emissions" > "List Evalua-
tion"
Configure the contents and display of the result list.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 290

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

List Evaluation State................................................................................................... 291

Show Peaks................................................................................................................ 291
Margin......................................................................................................................... 291
Details......................................................................................................................... 292
Peaks per Range........................................................................................................ 292
Save Evaluation List....................................................................................................292

List Evaluation State

Activates or deactivates the list evaluation.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO on page 1049

Show Peaks
If activated, all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are
marked with blue squares in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow on page 1050

Margin
A margin functionality is not available for the limit check. However, you can define a
margin (=threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list. Only
peaks that exceed the margin value are displayed (also in the diagram, if activated).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin on page 1050

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 291

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

Details
Configures how detailed the list in the Result Summary is.

On Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by "Peaks per Range").

Off Includes only one peak per range.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails on page 1049

Peaks per Range

Defines the maximum number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the
selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current
range and continued in the next range. The maximum value is 50.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges on page 1050

Save Evaluation List

Exports the evaluation list of the Spurious Emissions measurement to an ASCII file for
evaluation in an external application. If necessary, change the decimal separator for
evaluation in other languages.
Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is dis-
played when you select the "Save" function.
For details, see "How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List" on page 293.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST on page 1378
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

6.7.5 How to perform a spurious emissions measurement

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform spurious emis-

sions measurements.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.8.7, "Programming example: spurious emis-
sions measurement", on page 1051.

1. Press [MEAS], then select the "Spurious Emissions" measurement.

2. Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings.

3. Select "Overview", then select "Spurious Setup".

The "Spurious Emissions" dialog box is displayed.

4. Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with simi-
lar characteristics.
Define the required ranges in the "Sweep List" using "Insert before Range" and
"Insert after Range", which refer to the currently selected range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 292

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

5. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required.

6. Optionally, define a limit check.

a) Activate the limit check by setting "Limit Check" to "ABSOLUTE". The limit
check is always activated or deactivated for all ranges simultaneously.
b) Define the limit line's start and stop values for each range of the signal. If a sig-
nal level higher than the defined limit is measured, the limit check fails, which
may indicate a spurious emission.

7. Configure the peak detection during a Spurious Emissions measurement: select

"Evaluations" in the "Overview".
● To indicate the determined peaks in the display, activate the "Show Peaks"
option.
● To restrict peak detection, define a "Margin". Only peaks that exceed this value
are detected.
● To allow for more peaks per range to be detected than the default 1, increase
the "Peaks per Range" value and set "Details" to "On".

8. Start a sweep.
The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the
evaluation list. If activated, the peak power levels for each range are also indicated
in the diagram.

9. To save the evaluation list, export the results to a file as described in "How to Save
the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List" on page 293.

How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List

The evaluation list from a Spurious Emissions measurement can be saved to a file,
which can be exported to another application for further analysis, for example.
1. Configure and perform a Spurious Emissions measurement as described in Sec-
tion 6.7.5, "How to perform a spurious emissions measurement", on page 292.

2. Select "Evaluations" in the "Overview".

3. If necessary, change the "Decimal Separator" to "COMMA" for evaluation in other

languages.

4. Select "Save".

5. In the file selection dialog box, select a storage location and file name for the result
file.

6. Select "Save".
The file with the specified name and the extension .dat is stored in the defined
storage location.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 293

FSW Measurements and results
Spurious emissions measurement

6.7.6 Reference: ASCII export file format (spurious)

The file has a header containing important parameters for scaling, several data sec-
tions containing the sweep settings per range, and a data section containing the peak
list.
The header data is made up of three columns, separated by ';', with the syntax:
Parameter name; numeric value; basic unit

File contents Explanation

File header

Type;FSW-26 Model

Version;1.00; Firmware version

Date;31.Mar 11; Storage date of data set

Mode;ANALYZER; SPURIOUS; Operating mode and measurement function

Center Freq;13250000000.000000;Hz X-axis settings

Freq Offset;0.000000;Hz

Span;26499982000.000000;Hz

x-Axis;LIN;

Start;9000.000000;Hz
Stop;8000000000.000000;Hz

Level Offset;0.000000;dB Y-axis settings

Ref Position;100.000000;%

y-Axis;LOG;

Level Range;100.000000;dB

Trace settings

Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;

Sweep Count;1;

TRACE 1:

Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;

x-Unit;Hz;

y-Unit;dBm;

List evaluation settings

Margin;6.000000;s Peak List margin

PeaksPerRange;25; Max. number of peaks per range to be detected

Values;3; Number of detected peaks

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 294

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

File contents Explanation

File data section

0;9000;150000;1000;79500;-25.006643295288086;- Measured peak values:

12.006643295288086;PASS;
<range number>;
0;9000;150000;1000;101022.11126961483;-47.075 <start frequency>;
111389160156;-34.075111389160156;PASS;
<stop frequency>;
0;9000;150000;1000;58380.171184022824;-47.079
341888427734;-34.079341888427734;PASS; <resolution bandwidth of range>;
<frequency of peak>;
<absolute power in dBm of peak>;
<distance to the limit line in dB>; (positive value
means above the limit)
<limit fail (pass = 0, fail =1)>;

6.8 Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

To measure the amplitude distribution, the FSW has simple measurement functions to
determine both the Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) and the Complementary
Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF). Only one of the signal statistic functions can
be switched on at a time.
● About the measurements...................................................................................... 295
● Typical applications............................................................................................... 296
● APD and CCDF results......................................................................................... 296
● APD and CCDF basics - gated triggering............................................................. 298
● APD and CCDF configuration............................................................................... 299
● How to perform an APD or CCDF measurement.................................................. 306
● Examples.............................................................................................................. 307
● Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement................................................310

6.8.1 About the measurements

The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probability
Distribution function (APD). During a selectable measurement time all occurring ampli-
tude values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in
the individual ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram.
Alternatively, the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) can be dis-
played. It shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded
in percent.
Only one of the signal statistic functions can be switched on at a time. When a statistic
function is switched on, the FSW is set into zero span mode automatically. The FSW
measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the defined analysis
bandwidth. To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically
set to 10 times the analysis bandwidth. The sample detector is used for detecting the
video voltage.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 295

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. For
details see Section 6.8.4, "APD and CCDF basics - gated triggering", on page 298.

6.8.2 Typical applications

Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are
different in their amplitude distribution. In order to transmit the modulated signal without
distortion, all amplitudes of the signal have to be transmitted linearly from the output
power amplifier. Most critical are the peak amplitude values. Degradation in transmit
quality caused by a transmitter two port network is dependent on the amplitude of the
peak values as well as on their probability.
If modulation types are used that do not have a constant envelope in zero span, the
transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power.
This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation, QPSK for exam-
ple. CDMA transmission modes in particular may have power peaks that are large
compared to the average power.
For signals of this kind, the transmitter must provide large reserves for the peak power
to prevent signal compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver.
The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter
design criterion. The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or,
logarithmically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal. To reduce
power consumption and cut costs, transmitters are not designed for the largest power
that could ever occur, but for a power that has a specified probability of being excee-
ded (e.g. 0.01 %).
The statistical functions provide information on such signal criteria.

6.8.3 APD and CCDF results

Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD)

As a result of the Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) function, the probability of
measured amplitude values is displayed. During a selectable measurement time all
measured amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range (bin). The number of
amplitude values in the individual ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a
histogram. Each bar of the histogram represents the percentage of measured ampli-
tudes within the specific amplitude range. The x-axis represents the amplitude values
and is scaled in absolute values (dBm).

The size of each amplitude range (bin) determines the resolution of the histogram and
is indicated in the channel bar, for example / 0.10 dB. In this case, a single bar in the
histogram represents an amplitude range of 0.10 dB.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 296

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation
● For each displayed trace:
– Mean amplitude
– Peak amplitude
– Crest factor
The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or, logarith-
mically, as the peak level minus the average level of the signal.

Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF)

The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (CCDF) shows the probability
that the signal power amplitude exceeds the mean value in percent. The level above
the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corre-
sponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted
along the y-axis.

A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian (normal) distribution for the measured ampli-
tude range.

The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr" + "<x dB>"

In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa-
tion:
● Number of samples used for calculation

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 297

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

● For each displayed trace:

Mean Mean power

Peak Peak power

Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power)

10 % 10 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB

1% 1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB

0,1 % 0,1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB

0,01 % 0,01 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB

Percent marker
In addition to the results for specific percentages in the table, a percent marker can be
activated for a freely selectable percentage. This marker indicates how many level val-
ues are over <x> % above the mean power.

Percent marker
As all markers, the percent marker can be moved simply by selecting it with a finger or
mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired position.

Diagram Scaling
The scaling for both the x-axis and y-axis of the statistics diagram can be configured.
In particular, you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili-
ties to be displayed.

Remote commands:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF:X<t>? on page 1062
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>? on page 1062

6.8.4 APD and CCDF basics - gated triggering

Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. An

external or power trigger is required as a time (frame) reference.
The gate ranges define the part of the measured data taken into account for the statis-
tics calculation. These ranges are defined relative to a reference point T=0. The gate
interval is repeated for each period until the end of the capture buffer.
The reference point T=0 is defined by the external trigger event and the instrument's
trigger offset.
For each trace you can define up to 3 separate ranges of a single period to be traced.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 298

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

6.8.5 APD and CCDF configuration

Configuration consists of the following settings:

● Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value
(see "Reference Level" on page 486).
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 300
● Gate range definition for APD and CCDF............................................................. 302
● Scaling for statistics diagrams...............................................................................303

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 299

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

6.8.5.1 Basic settings

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "APD"/"CCDF" > "APD Config"/ "CCDF
Config"
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.9, "Analyzing statistics (APD, CCDF)", on page 1054.

Both dialog boxes are identical except for the "Percent Marker" setting, which is only
available for CCDF measurements.
Percent Marker (CCDF only).......................................................................................300
Analysis Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 300
Number of Samples.................................................................................................... 301
Gated Trigger.............................................................................................................. 301
Normal Distribution......................................................................................................301
Edit Gate Ranges........................................................................................................301
Adjust Settings............................................................................................................ 301

Percent Marker (CCDF only)

Defines a probability value. Thus, the power which is exceeded with a given probability
can be determined very easily. If marker 1 is deactivated, it is switched on automati-
cally.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent on page 1055

Analysis Bandwidth
Defines the analysis bandwidth.
For correct measurement of the signal statistics, the analysis bandwidth has to be
wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the peaks of the signal amplitude
correctly. To avoid influencing the peak amplitudes, the video bandwidth is automati-
cally set to 10 MHz. The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 300

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is installed, APD and CCDF mea-

surements are only available up to a bandwidth of 80 MHz.
The calculated measurement time is displayed for reference only.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201

Number of Samples
Defines the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statis-
tics.
For statistics measurements with the FSW, the number of samples to be measured is
defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent samples con-
tribute to statistics, the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and
displayed in the channel bar ("Meas Time"). The samples are statistically independent
if the time difference is at least 1/RBW. The measurement time is, therefore, expressed
as follows:
Meas Time = NSamples/RBW
The maximum number of samples is limited by the hardware capability. For gated trig-
gered APD or CCDF measurements, the maximum number is limited further, if neces-
sary, to accommodate for very small ranges within a relatively long period. In this case,
the smallest gate/period ratio is considered, and the number is adapted to capture full
periods of data. If the defined number of samples exceeds the limit, it is automatically
reduced to the maximum value.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples on page 1056

Gated Trigger
Activates and deactivates gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF
measurements. The gate ranges are defined using the Edit Gate Ranges function.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 1228

Normal Distribution
Enables or disables the red trace in the CCDF display indicating the normal distribu-
tion.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:STATistics:CCDF:GAUSs on page 1056

Edit Gate Ranges

Opens a dialog box to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace. For details see
Section 6.8.5.2, "Gate range definition for APD and CCDF", on page 302.

Adjust Settings
Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min-
imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement
in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current
input signal.
Note this function is not available when using an external frontend.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 301

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 1059

6.8.5.2 Gate range definition for APD and CCDF

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "APD"/"CCDF" > "APD Config"/ "CCDF
Config" > "Edit Gate Ranges"
You can configure gate ranges for gated triggering in statistical measurements.
For background information on defining gate ranges see Section 6.8.4, "APD and
CCDF basics - gated triggering", on page 298.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.9.3, "Using gate ranges for statistical measurements", on page 1056.

Up to three ranges can be defined for each of the six available traces.
Comment.....................................................................................................................302
Period..........................................................................................................................302
Range <x> Use........................................................................................................... 303
Range <x> Start/Stop..................................................................................................303

Comment
An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent on page 1056

Period
Length of the period to be traced. The period is the same for all traces. If you change
the period for one trace, it is automatically changed for all traces.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 302

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Make sure the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the cur-
rent measurement. Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the band-
width and the number of samples (see "Number of Samples" on page 301). The cur-
rent measurement time is indicated as "Meas Time" in the channel bar.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:PERiod on page 1057

Range <x> Use

Activates tracing of the defined range during a gated measurement.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>[:STATe<gr>] on page 1058

Range <x> Start/Stop

Defines the start and stop points of the range within the tracing period. Make sure the
value for the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period.
Note: You can define the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is dis-
played; the values are only rounded for display.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr> on page 1057
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr> on page 1058

6.8.5.3 Scaling for statistics diagrams

Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Scale" tab

Or: [AMPT] > "Scale Config"
For statistics displays, scale settings are available for both the y-axis and the x-axis.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.9.4, "Scaling the diagram", on page 1059.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 303

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Figure 6-51: Scale settings for CCDF diagram

In statistical diagrams, the x-axis displays the signal level values (= y-axis in standard
display), while the y-axis displays the probability of the values.

X-Axis..........................................................................................................................304
└ Ref Level.......................................................................................................304
└ Range........................................................................................................... 304
└ Shifting the Display (Offset).......................................................................... 305
Y-Axis.......................................................................................................................... 305
└ Y-Unit............................................................................................................ 305
└ Y-Max/ Y-Min.................................................................................................305
Default Settings...........................................................................................................305
Adjust Settings............................................................................................................ 306

X-Axis
Defines the scaling settings for signal level values.

Ref Level ← X-Axis

Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV,
etc.).
For the APD function this value corresponds to the right diagram border. For the CCDF
function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is
scaled relatively to the measured mean power.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel on page 1060

Range ← X-Axis
Defines the level range in dB to be evaluated by the statistics measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 304

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RANGe on page 1060

Shifting the Display (Offset) ← X-Axis

Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level irrespec-
tive of the selected unit. The scaling of the x-axis is changed accordingly. The setting
range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:
OFFSet on page 1211

Y-Axis
Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution.

Y-Unit ← Y-Axis
Defines the scaling type of the y-axis as either percentage or absolute. The default
value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT on page 1061

Y-Max/ Y-Min ← Y-Axis

Defines the upper (max) and lower (min) limit of the displayed probability range. Values
on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The mini-
mum value must be in the range:
1E-9 < Y-Min < 0.1
The distance between "Y-Max" and "Y-Min" must be at least one decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer on page 1061
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer on page 1060

Default Settings
Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values.

X-axis ref level: 0 dBm

X-axis range APD: 100 dB

X-axis range CCDF: 20 dB

Y-axis upper limit: 1.0

Y-axis lower limit: 1E-6

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet on page 1059

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 305

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Adjust Settings
Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min-
imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement
in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current
input signal.
Note this function is not available when using an external frontend.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE on page 1059

6.8.6 How to perform an APD or CCDF measurement

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic statistic

measurements.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.9.7, "Programming example: measuring statis-
tics", on page 1063.

To start a basic statistic measurement

1. Press [MEAS], then select the "APD" or "CCDF" measurement.

2. Start a sweep.
As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured, the statistical
evaluation is displayed.

To perform a statistic measurement using gate ranges

For pulsed signals, the transmission intervals should not be included in the statistical
evaluation. Thus, you must define gate ranges to be included in the measurement.
1. Press [MEAS Config], then select "APD Config" or "CCDF Config".
The "APD""APD" or "CCDF" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select "Edit Gate Ranges".

3. Define the time period for which the input signal is to be analyzed, for example the
duration of 3 signal pulses.

4. For each active trace, define up to three ranges within the time period to be mea-
sured. In the example covering 3 pulses, you could define one range for each
pulse.
a) Assuming the external trigger determines T=0 as the start of the first pulse,
define the start time of range 1 at 0 s.
b) Define the stop time of range 1 at the duration of the first pulse.
c) Activate range 1 by setting "Range 1 Use" to On.
d) Define the start time of range 2 as (duration of pulse 1 + duration of interval)
e) Define the stop time of range 2 as (start time of range 2 + duration of pulse 2)
f) Activate range 2 by setting "Range 2 Use" to On.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 306

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

g) Define the third range in the same way.

5. Start a sweep.
As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured, the statistical
evaluation is displayed. Only the signal levels within the pulse periods are consid-
ered.

6.8.7 Examples

6.8.7.1 Configuration example: gated statistics

A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and
t4. The period of the GSM signal is 4.61536 ms.

t1: External positive trigger slope

t2: Begin of burst (after 25 µs)
t3: Begin of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 40 µs)
t4: End of useful part, to be used for statistics (after 578 µs)
t5: End of burst (after 602 µs)
The instrument has to be configured as follows:

Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2

Range1 Start t3 – t2 = 15 µs start of range 1 relative to t2

Range1 End t4 – t2 = 553 µs end of range 1 relative to t2

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 307

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

6.8.7.2 Measurement example – measuring the APD and CCDF of white noise generated
by the FSW

Setting the analysis bandwidth

When the amplitude distribution is measured, the analysis bandwidth must be set so
that the complete spectrum of the signal to be measured falls within the bandwidth.
This is the only way of ensuring that all the amplitudes will pass through the IF filter
without being distorted. If the selected bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated
signal, the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian dis-
tribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise
signal. The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined.

A programming example demonstrating a statistics measurement in a remote environ-

ment is provided in Section 13.5.9.7, "Programming example: measuring statistics",
on page 1063.

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the reference level to -60 dBm.

The FSW's intrinsic noise is displayed at the top of the screen.

3. Select the "APD" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dialog
box.
The FSW sets the frequency span to 0 Hz and measures the amplitude probability
distribution (APD). The number of uncorrelated level measurements used for the
measurement is 100000. The mean power and the peak power are displayed in
dBm. The crest factor (peak power – mean power) is output as well.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 308

FSW Measurements and results
Statistical measurements (APD, CCDF)

Figure 6-52: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise

4. Now select the "CCDF" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dia-
log box.

Figure 6-53: CCDF of white noise

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 309

FSW Measurements and results
Time domain power measurement

The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power.
The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin
of the axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be
exceeded is plotted along the y-axis.

6.8.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement

If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the
measurement:
● Make sure the defined bandwidth is wide enough for the signal bandwidth of the
device under test to be fully analyzed (see "Analysis Bandwidth" on page 300).
● If the complete signal is be measured, increase the number of samples so that the
resulting measurement time is longer than one period of a bursted signal.
● If only parts of the signal are to be examined, define a trigger source and a gate.

6.9 Time domain power measurement

The Time Domain Power measurement determines the power of a signal in the time
domain.
A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span.
● About the measurement........................................................................................310
● Time domain power results................................................................................... 310
● Time domain power basics - range definition using limit lines...............................311
● Time domain power configuration......................................................................... 312
● How to measure powers in the time domain......................................................... 313
● Measurement example..........................................................................................314

6.9.1 About the measurement

Using the Time Domain Power measurement function, the FSW determines the power
of the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measurement
points and dividing the result by the number of measurement points. Thus it is possible
to measure the power of TDMA signals during transmission, for example, or during the
muting phase. Both the mean power and the RMS power can be measured.
For this measurement, the sample detector is recommended. The sample detector is
activated automatically if the detector is in auto mode.

6.9.2 Time domain power results

Several different power results can be determined simultaneously:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 310

FSW Measurements and results
Time domain power measurement

Mode Description

Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.

RMS RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.

Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula-
ted.
For example to measure the mean power during a GSM burst

Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean
value.

The result is displayed in the marker results, indicated by "Power" and the selected
power mode, e.g. "RMS". The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver-
aged over a user-defined number of sweeps (trace averaging).

The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in Sec-
tion 13.5.10, "Measuring the time domain power", on page 1064.

6.9.3 Time domain power basics - range definition using limit lines

The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be
restricted using limit lines. The left and right limit lines (S1, S2) define the evaluation
range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram. If activated, the power
results are only calculated from the levels within the limit lines.
For example, if both the on and off phase of a burst signal are displayed, the measure-
ment range can be limited to the transmission or to the muting phase. The ratio

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 311

FSW Measurements and results
Time domain power measurement

between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by
using a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range.

In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range, usually a trig-
ger is required.

6.9.4 Time domain power configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Time Domain Power" > "Time Dom
Power Config"

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.10, "Measuring the time domain power", on page 1064.
Results........................................................................................................................ 313
Limit State................................................................................................................... 313
Left Limit / Right Limit..................................................................................................313

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 312

FSW Measurements and results
Time domain power measurement

Results
Activates the power results to be evaluated from the displayed trace or a limited area
of the trace.
"Peak" Peak power over several measurements (uses trace averaging, Max
Hold)
"RMS" RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof.
"Mean" Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment
thereof. The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula-
ted.
"Std Dev" The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean
value.
The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at
the same time.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] on page 1067
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? on page 1070
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] on page 1067
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? on page 1071
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] on page 1066
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? on page 1069

Limit State
Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off. Default setting is off.
If deactivated, the entire sweep time is evaluated. If switched on, the evaluation range
is defined by the left and right limit. If only one limit is set, it corresponds to the left limit
and the right limit is defined by the stop frequency. If the second limit is also set, it
defines the right limit.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282

Left Limit / Right Limit

Defines a power level limit for line S1 (left) or S2 (right).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1283

6.9.5 How to measure powers in the time domain

The step-by-step procedure to measure powers in the time domain is described here in
detail.

To measure the power in the time domain

1. Select [MEAS].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 313

FSW Measurements and results
Time domain power measurement

2. From the "Select Measurement" dialog box, select the "Time Domain Power" mea-
surement function.

3. Select the type of power measurement results to be determined by selecting the

corresponding softkeys.

4. To restrict the power evaluation range, define limits:

a) Select "Time Dom Power Config" to display the "Time Domain Power" configu-
ration dialog box.
b) Switch on the limits by setting the "Limit State" to "On".
The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed.
c) Define the left limit (limit line S1), the right limit (S2), or both.

5. Start a sweep.
The measured powers are displayed in the marker results.

6.9.6 Measurement example

This measurement example demonstrates the time domain power calculation for a
GSM burst.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.10.4, "Programming example: time domain
power", on page 1073.

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):

Frequency: 1.8 GHz

Level: -10 dBm

Modulation: GSM/EDGE

Procedure:
1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 1.8 GHz.

3. Set the RBW to 100 kHz.

4. Set the sweep time to 640 μs.

5. Set the trigger source to "IF Power".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 314

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

6. Define a trigger offset of -50 μs.

7. Select the "Time Domain Power" measurement function from the "Select Measure-
ment" dialog box.

8. In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box, set all four results to "On".

9. Set the "Limit State" to "On".

10. Define the left limit at 326 μs and the right limit at 538 μs.
This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst.
The mean power of the useful part of the GSM burst is calculated to be -13 dBm.

6.10 Harmonic distortion measurement

The "Harmonic Distortion" measurement measures harmonics and their distortion,
including the total harmonic distortion.

Harmonic distortion measurement is not available if an external frontend is active.

● About the measurement........................................................................................316

● Harmonic distortion basics.................................................................................... 316
● Harmonic distortion results....................................................................................318
● Harmonic distortion configuration..........................................................................319
● How to determine the harmonic distortion.............................................................321

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 315

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

6.10.1 About the measurement

With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily, for example
from a VCO. In addition, the total harmonic distortion (THD) is calculated.
For measurements in the frequency domain, the Harmonic Distortion measurement
starts with an automatic search for the first harmonic (= peak) within the set frequency
range. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted
accordingly.
For measurements in zero span, the center frequency remains unchanged.
The Harmonic Distortion measurement then performs zero span sweeps at the center
frequency and at each harmonic, i.e. at frequencies that are a multiple of the center
frequency.
As a result, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, as well as the RMS
values and the total harmonic distortion (THD).

An application note discussing harmonics measurement is available from the Rohde &
Schwarz website:
1EF78: Measurement of Harmonics using Spectrum Analyzers

6.10.2 Harmonic distortion basics

Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best
using a signal analyzer. In general, every signal contains harmonics. Harmonics are
generated by nonlinear characteristics, which add frequencies to a pure sinewave.
They can often be reduced by low pass filters. Since the signal analyzer itself has a
nonlinear characteristic, for example in its first mixer, measures must be taken to
ensure that harmonics produced in the signal analyzer do not cause spurious results. If
necessary, the fundamental wave must be attenuated selectively with respect to the
other harmonics with a high pass filter. Harmonics are particularly critical regarding
high-power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere
with other radio services.
Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components, or as
the root mean square of all components together, the total harmonic distortion (THD).
The THD is set in relation to the power of the fundamental frequency (= center fre-
quency).

Obtainable dynamic range

When harmonics are being measured, the obtainable dynamic range depends on the
second harmonic intercept of the signal analyzer. The second harmonic intercept is the
virtual input level at the RF input mixer at which the level of the 2nd harmonic becomes
equal to the level of the fundamental wave. In practice, however, applying a level of
this magnitude would damage the mixer. Nevertheless the available dynamic range for
measuring the harmonic distance of a DUT can be calculated relatively easily using the
second harmonic intercept.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 316

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

As shown in Figure 6-54, the level of the 2nd harmonic drops by 20 dB if the level of the
fundamental wave is reduced by 10 dB.

Figure 6-54: Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm

The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d2 in dB is derived from the
straight-line equations and the given intercept point:
d2 = S.H.I – PI (1)

where:

d2 = harmonic distortion

S.H.I. = second harmonic intercept

PI = mixer level/dBm

The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation.

The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is:

P1 = 2 * PI – S.H.I. (2)

The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer.
The harmonic of the measured DUT should – if sufficiently averaged by means of a
video filter – be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due
to the input noise is less than 1 dB.

Rules for measuring high harmonic ratios

The following rules for measuring high harmonic ratios can be derived:
● Select the smallest possible IF bandwidth for a minimal noise floor.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 317

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

● Select an RF attenuation which is high enough to measure the harmonic ratio only.
The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the
intrinsic noise level of the receiver. The level applied to the mixer, according to (2), is:

At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz (noise level -143 dBm, S.H.I. = 40 dBm), the opti-
mum mixer level is – 51.5 dBm. According to (1) a maximum measurable harmonic dis-
tortion of 91.5 dB minus a minimum S/N ratio of 4 dB is obtained.

Detecting the origin of harmonics

If the harmonic emerges from noise sufficiently (approx. >15 dB), it is easy to check (by
changing the RF attenuation) whether the harmonics originate from the DUT or are
generated internally by the signal analyzer. If a harmonic originates from the DUT, its
level remains constant if the RF attenuation is increased by 10 dB. Only the displayed
noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation. If the harmonic is exclu-
sively generated by the signal analyzer, the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB
or is lost in noise. If both – the DUT and the signal analyzer – contribute to the har-
monic, the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller.

High-sensitivity harmonics measurements

If harmonics have very small levels, the resolution bandwidth required to measure
them must be reduced considerably. The sweep time is, therefore, also increased con-
siderably. In this case, the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the
FSW set to a small span. Only the frequency range around the harmonics will then be
measured with a small resolution bandwidth.

Required measurement time

During the harmonics measurement, zero span sweeps are performed at the center
frequency and at each harmonic. The duration of each sweep ("Harmonic Sweep
Time", SWT) and the "Number of Harmonics" (n) are defined in the "Harmonic Distor-
tion" configuration dialog box. Thus, the required measurement time for the harmonic
distortion measurement (Cumulated Measurement Time, CMT) is:
CMT = n*SWT
The required measurement time is indicated as "CMT" in the channel bar.

6.10.3 Harmonic distortion results

As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps of all
detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines. This pro-
vides a very good overview of the measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 318

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information:

● First harmonic frequency
● THD (total harmonic distortion), relative and absolute values
● For each detected harmonic:
– Frequency
– RBW
– Power

Remote commands
The results can also be queried using remote commands.
The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com-
mand [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1195.
THD: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion?
on page 1076
List of harmonics: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:LIST
on page 1077

6.10.4 Harmonic distortion configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Harmonic Distortion" > "Harmonic Dis-
tortion Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 319

FSW Measurements and results
Harmonic distortion measurement

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.11, "Measuring the harmonic distortion", on page 1074.
Number of Harmonics................................................................................................. 320
Harmonic Sweep Time................................................................................................ 320
Harmonic RBW Auto................................................................................................... 320
Adjust Settings............................................................................................................ 320

Number of Harmonics
Defines the number of harmonics to be measured. The range is from 1 to 26. Default is
10.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics on page 1075

Harmonic Sweep Time

Defines the sweep time for the zero span measurement on each harmonic frequency.
This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span, see also "Sweep Time"
on page 504.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1208

Harmonic RBW Auto

Enables/disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal
(3dB) (Gaussian) and 5-Pole filter types.
The automatic adjustment is carried out according to:
"RBWn = RBW1 * n"
If RBWn is not available, the next higher value is used.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO
on page 1075

Adjust Settings
If harmonic measurement was performed in the frequency domain, a new peak search
is started in the frequency range that was set before starting the harmonic measure-
ment. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted
accordingly.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 320

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

If harmonic measurement was performed in the time domain, this function adjusts the
reference level only.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet on page 1076

6.10.5 How to determine the harmonic distortion

In Section 8.3.6, "Measurement example: measuring harmonics using marker func-

tions", on page 591, measuring harmonics was described using marker functions. This
task can be performed much simpler using the Harmonic Distortion measurement, as
described in the following procedure.
For remote operation, see Section 13.5.11.5, "Example: measuring the harmonic dis-
tortion", on page 1077.

1. Select the "Harmonic Distortion" measurement function from the "Select Measure-
ment" dialog box.

2. Define the number of harmonics to be determined using "Number of Harmonics".

3. Perform a sweep.
The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram, separated by
red display lines. The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda-
mental is indicated in the result table.

4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement, use
the "Adjust Settings" function to adjust the settings automatically and restart the
measurement.

6.11 Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

The third order intercept point of the FSW can be determined if a two-tone signal with
equal carrier levels is applied to the input.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 1079
● About the TOI measurement.................................................................................322
● TOI basics............................................................................................................. 322
● TOI results.............................................................................................................326
● TOI configuration...................................................................................................327
● How to determine the third order intercept............................................................328
● Measurement example – measuring the FSW's intrinsic intermodulation............ 329

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 321

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

6.11.1 About the TOI measurement

If several signals are applied to a two-port transmission device with nonlinear charac-
teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of
the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals,
which intermodulate at the characteristic. The intermodulation products of lower order
have a special effect, since their level is largest and they are near the useful signals.
The intermodulation product of third order causes the highest interference. It is the
intermodulation product generated from one of the useful signals and the 2nd harmonic
of the second useful signal for two-tone modulation.
To measure the third order intercept point (TOI), a two-tone signal with equal carrier
levels is expected at the FSW input. Marker 1 and marker 2 (both normal markers) are
set to the maximum of the two signals. Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the inter-
modulation products.
The FSW calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between
the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4, and displays it in the marker table.

6.11.2 TOI basics

If several signals are applied to a two-port transmission device with nonlinear charac-
teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of
the signals. The nonlinear characteristic produces harmonics of the useful signals,
which intermodulate at the characteristic.
The frequencies of the intermodulation products are above and below the useful sig-
nals. Figure 6-55 shows intermodulation products PS1 and PS2, generated by the two
useful signals PU1 and PU2.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 322

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

Figure 6-55: Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2

The intermodulation product at fi2 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful
signal PU2 and useful signal PU1.

The intermodulation product at fi1 is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful
signal PU1 and useful signal PU2.

fi1 = 2 × fu1 – fu2 (1)

fi2 = 2 × fu2 – fu1 (2)

Dependency on level of useful signals

The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals. If
the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB, the level of the intermodulation products
increases by 3 dB. Thus, the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful
signals is reduced by 2 dB, as shown in Figure 6-56.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 323

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

Figure 6-56: Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals

The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as
long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a
level change of 1 dB at the output. Beyond a certain input level, the two-port goes into
compression and the output level stops increasing. The intermodulation products of the
third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals. The intercept point is
the fictitious level where the two lines intersect. It cannot be measured directly, since
the useful level is limited by the maximum two-port output power.

Calculation method
However, the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the
measured spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful signals at a given
level Pu according to the following formula:

aD 3
IP3   PN
2

Example:
Assume that the measured spacing between intermodulation and useful signal is 60 dB
at the input level PU= -20 dBm. Then the third order intercept point (TOI) is calculated
according to the following formula:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 324

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

60
IP3   (20dBm)  10dBm
2

Intermodulation-free dynamic range

The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range" is the level range in which no internal inter-
modulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured. It is determined
by the third order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal
analyzer. At high signal levels, the range is determined by intermodulation products. At
low signal levels, intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor, i.e. the
noise floor and the phase noise of the signal analyzer determine the range. The noise
floor and the phase noise depend on the resolution bandwidth that has been selected.
At the smallest resolution bandwidth, the noise floor and phase noise are at a minimum
and so the maximum range is obtained. However, a large increase in sweep time is
required for small resolution bandwidths. It is therefore best to select the largest resolu-
tion bandwidth possible to obtain the range that is required. Since phase noise decrea-
ses as the carrier-offset increases, its influence decreases with increasing frequency
offset from the useful signals.
The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function
of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer (= signal level – set RF
attenuation) at different useful signal offsets.

For typical values for your instrument, see the specifications document.

Figure 6-57: Intermodulation-free range as a function of level at the input mixer and the set resolution
bandwidth

Sample values at 2 GHz:

● Useful signal offset = 1 MHz
● DANL = -145 dBm/Hz
● TOI = 15 dBm

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 325

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

The optimum mixer level, i.e. the level at which the intermodulation distance is at its
maximum, depends on the bandwidth. At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz, it is approx.
‑35 dBm. At 1 kHz, it increases to approx. ‑30 dBm.
Phase noise has a considerable influence on the intermodulation-free range at carrier
offsets between 10 kHz and 100 kHz ( see Figure 6-58). At greater bandwidths, the
influence of the phase noise is greater than it would be with small bandwidths. The
optimum mixer level at the bandwidths under consideration becomes almost independ-
ent of bandwidth and is approx. -40 dBm.

Figure 6-58: Intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the
selected resolution bandwidth

Sample values at 2 GHz:

● Useful signal offset = 10 kHz to 100 kHz
● DANL = -145 dBm/Hz
● TOI = 15 dBm

When you measure the intermodulation products of a DUT with a very high dynamic
range, the used resolution bandwidth is usually very small. In this case, it is best to
measure the levels of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products sep-
arately, using a small span. The measurement time is reduced, in particular if the offset
of the useful signals is large. To find signals reliably when the frequency span is small,
it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the FSW.

6.11.3 TOI results

As a result of the TOI measurement, the following values are displayed in the marker
area of the diagram:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 326

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

Label Description

TOI Third-order intercept point for averaged levels (see also Section 6.11.3, "TOI results",
on page 326 and Figure 6-55):
PU-AVG+ (PU-AVG-PS-AVG)/2

TOI (max) PU-MAX+ (PU-MAX-PS-MIN)/2

TOI (min) PU-MIN+ (PU-MIN-PS-MAX)/2

M1 Maximum of first useful signal

M2 Maximum of second useful signal

M3 First intermodulation product

M4 Second intermodulation product

Remote command
The TOI can also be queried using the remote commands:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? on page 1079.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MAXimum? on page 1079
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult:MINimum? on page 1080

6.11.4 TOI configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Third Order Intercept" > "TOI Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 327

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.12, "Measuring the third order intercept point", on page 1078.
Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3/Marker 4........................................................................ 328
Search Signals............................................................................................................ 328

Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3/Marker 4

Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the TOI measurement
(see Section 6.11.3, "TOI results", on page 326).
The marker positions can be edited; the TOI is then recalculated according to the new
marker values.
To reset all marker positions automatically, use the Search Signals function.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1276
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1292

Search Signals
Performs a new search on the input signals and recalculates the TOI according to the
measured values.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:SEARchsignal ONCE on page 1079

6.11.5 How to determine the third order intercept

The precise TOI for the FSW in relation to the input signals is provided in the specifica-
tions document.
For remote operation, see Section 13.5.12.2, "Programming example: measuring the
TOI", on page 1081.

1. Apply a two-tone signal with equal carrier levels to the FSW input.

2. On the FSW, press [MEAS].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 328

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

3. Select the "Third Order Intercept" measurement function from the "Select Measure-
ment" dialog box.
The calculated TOI is indicated in the marker information. The markers required for
calculation are displayed in the marker table.

4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the TOI measurement, use the
"Search Signals" function to start a new signal search automatically and restart the
calculation of the TOI.

6.11.6 Measurement example – measuring the FSW's intrinsic intermodu-

lation

A programming example demonstrating a TOI measurement in a remote environment

is provided in Section 13.5.12.2, "Programming example: measuring the TOI",
on page 1081.

Test setup:

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):

Device Level Frequency

Signal generator 1 -4 dBm 799.6 MHz

Signal generator 2 -4 dBm 800.4 MHz

Setting up the measurement

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 800 MHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz.

3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB.

4. Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 329

FSW Measurements and results
Third order intercept (TOI) measurement

The noise is reduced, the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod-
ucts can be seen clearly.

5. Set the VBW to 1 kHz.

Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept (TOI) measurement

function
1. Select [MEAS] > "Third Order Intercept".
The FSW activates four markers to measure the intermodulation distance. Two
markers are positioned on the useful signals and two on the intermodulation prod-
ucts. The TOI is calculated from the level difference between the useful signals and
the intermodulation products. It is then displayed on the screen:

The third order intercept (TOI) is displayed in the marker information.

2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the

RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added,
the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased. With an
additional RF attenuation of 10 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are
reduced by 20 dB. The noise level is, however, increased by 10 dB.
Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products.
The FSW's intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below the noise floor.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 330

FSW Measurements and results
AM modulation depth measurement

6.12 AM modulation depth measurement

This measurement determines the AM modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier.
● About the measurement........................................................................................331
● AM modulation depth results.................................................................................332
● AM modulation depth configuration.......................................................................332
● Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement................................................333
● How to determine the AM modulation depth......................................................... 334

6.12.1 About the measurement

The AM modulation depth, also known as a modulation index, indicates how much the
modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude. It is defined as:
MDepth = peak signal amplitude / unmodulated carrier amplitude

So for MDepth = 0.5, for example, the carrier amplitude varies by 50% above and below
its unmodulated level, and for MDepth = 1.0 it varies by 100%.

When this measurement is activated, marker 1 is set to the peak level, which is consid-
ered to be the carrier level. Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically
to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace. The markers can be adjusted
manually, if necessary.
The FSW calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels. The
AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power values at the refer-
ence marker and at the delta markers. If the powers of the two AM side bands are
unequal, the mean value of the two power values is used for AM modulation depth cal-
culation.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 331

FSW Measurements and results
AM modulation depth measurement

6.12.2 AM modulation depth results

As a result of the AM Modulation Depth measurement, the following values are dis-
played in the marker area of the diagram:

Label Description

MDepth AM modulation depth in percent

M1 Maximum of the signal (= carrier level)

D2 Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier

D3 Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier

Remote command:
The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>? on page 1082.

6.12.3 AM modulation depth configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "AM Modulation Depth" > "AM Mod
Depth Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 332

FSW Measurements and results
AM modulation depth measurement

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.5.13, "Measuring the AM modulation depth", on page 1081.
Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3........................................................................................333
Search Signals............................................................................................................ 333

Marker 1/Marker 2/Marker 3

Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation
Depth measurement:

Marker Description

M1 Maximum of the signal (= carrier level)

D2 Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier

D3 Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier

The marker positions can be edited; the modulation depth is then recalculated accord-
ing to the new marker values.
To reset all marker positions automatically, use the Search Signals function.
Note: Moving the marker positions manually. When the position of delta marker 2 is
changed, delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker
1.
Delta marker 3, on the other hand, can be moved for fine adjustment independently of
marker 2.
Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re-adjustment without affecting the position
of the delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1276
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 1292

Search Signals
Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth
according to the measured values.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:SEARchsignal ONCE
on page 1082

6.12.4 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement

If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the
measurement:
● Set the center frequency to the frequency of the device under test.
● Adjust the span so the peaks to the left and right of the carrier, produced by the AM
modulated signal, are clearly visible.
If the span is too wide, these signals may fall together with the carrier and the mea-
surement can not be performed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 333

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

If the span is too narrow, theses signals are outside of the measured span and the
delta markers can not find these peaks.
The rule of thumb is to set the span to three times the value of the AM modulation
frequency.

6.12.5 How to determine the AM modulation depth

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the AM modula-

tion depth.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.13.2, "Example: measuring the AM modulation
depth", on page 1082.

1. Apply a modulated carrier signal to the FSW input.

2. On the FSW, press [MEAS].

3. Select the "AM Modulation Depth" measurement function from the "Select Mea-
surement" dialog box.
The calculated AM Modulation Depth is indicated in the marker information. The
markers required for calculation are displayed in the marker table.

4. If the signal changes significantly during or after the AM Modulation Depth mea-
surement, use the "Search Signals" function to start a new peak search automati-
cally and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth.

6.13 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

The electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement is suitable for measurements
according to commercial and military electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards.
The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and develop-
ment.
The EMI measurement requires the R&S FSW-K54 option.
The EMI measurement features:
● EMI marker functionality
● Marker demodulation
● Measurement bandwidths and detectors for EMI measurements
● Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis
● Additional predefined limit lines for EMC standards
● Predefined transducer factors
● Additional amplitude units, normalized to 1 MHz
● LISN control

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 334

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

● About the EMI measurement................................................................................ 335

● EMI measurement results..................................................................................... 335
● EMI measurement basics......................................................................................337
● EMI measurement configuration........................................................................... 343
● EMI result analysis................................................................................................ 353
● How to perform EMI measurements..................................................................... 353
● Measurement example: measuring radio frequency interference......................... 355
● Optimizing and troubleshooting EMI measurements............................................ 358

6.13.1 About the EMI measurement

EMI measurements can be very time-consuming, especially if weighting detectors are

required for the measurement. In addition, EMC testing often requires various proce-
dures to locate local EMI maxima. Such procedures are, for example, movements of
an absorbing clamp, variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the
DUT.
Covering all test setups with one of the (slow) EMI weighting detectors over the
required frequency range can lead to very long measurement times.
Splitting the measurement procedure into several stages, however, can eliminate this
problem.
The first stage is a peak search, used to get a rough idea about the location of peak
levels that can indicate interference over the required frequency range. This stage
uses a detector that allows for a fast sweep time, e.g. the peak detector.
During the second stage, or final test, the FSW performs the actual EMC test, a refined
measurement with detectors designed for and required by EMC standards. To keep
measurement times brief, the FSW performs a final measurement only on frequencies
you have marked with a marker or delta marker. You can assign a different detector to
every marker and thus test a particular frequency easily for compliance.
Optionally, you can activate continuous demodulation of the signal during the initial
measurement and at the peak marker positions during the final test.
After the final measurement, you can check the signal levels against specified limits.

6.13.2 EMI measurement results

As the result of an EMI measurement, the measured signal levels and active markers
are displayed in a Spectrum diagram.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 335

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Figure 6-59: EMI measurement results

Initial peak search results - Marker Table

As a result of the initial peak search, the active markers are set to the positive peaks of
the measured signal.
If auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak
delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
The active marker levels and positions are displayed in the Marker Table.

The marker results are also displayed in the Result Summary; in addition, the Marker
Table contains the marker results for those markers for which no final EMI test is per-
formed.

Final test results - Result Summary

The results of the final EMI tests at the active marker frequencies are displayed in the
Result Summary.
The Result Summary provides the following information:

Label Description

Type Marker name

Ref Reference marker for delta markers

Trace Assigned trace

X-value Marker x-value (frequency for final test)

Y-value Marker y-value (level during initial measurement)

Final Test Detector used for final EMI test

Line name Line activated for limit check

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 336

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Label Description

Δ Limit Delta between measured level and limit line (if active)
The value is colored to indicate the following states:
● green: does not exceed limit
● yellow: within margin
● red: exceeds limit

Final Result Value measured during final EMI test using specified detector at marker frequency

6.13.3 EMI measurement basics

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in EMI measure-
ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set-
tings.
● Resolution bandwidth and filter types................................................................... 337
● Detectors and dwell time.......................................................................................338
● Frequency resolution - sweep points and scaling................................................. 339
● Controlling V-Networks (LISN).............................................................................. 340
● Using transducer factors....................................................................................... 340
● Initial measurement - peak search........................................................................ 341
● Final measurement at the marker position............................................................342
● Limit checks.......................................................................................................... 342

6.13.3.1 Resolution bandwidth and filter types

EMI testing requires resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth. The EMI measurement
adds the following bandwidths, which comply to commercial and military standards, to
those already available with the base unit:
Commercial (CISPR, FFC etc.)
● 200 Hz
● 9 kHz
● 120 kHz
● 1 MHz (not with quasi-peak detector, see "Quasi-peak detector (CISPR filter only)"
on page 338)
Military (MIL Std)
● 10 Hz
● 100 Hz
● 1 kHz
● 10 kHz
● 100 kHz
● 1 MHz
If you select a CISPR or MIL filter type, the corresponding RBW that is closest to the
currently selected RBW value is used. In this case, the channel bar indicates "RBW
(CISPR)".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 337

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

For the quasi-peak, CISPR Average, or RMS Average detector, the bandwidth is fixed
depending on the frequency. For more information, see Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors
and dwell time", on page 338.

6.13.3.2 Detectors and dwell time

The EMI measurement adds new detectors to those already available with the base
unit. The additional detectors are especially designed for and required by EMI applica-
tions.
The additional detectors are available only if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement
option is installed. However, the EMI measurement need not be active.
See:
● "Quasipeak detector" on page 616
● "CISPR average detector" on page 617
● "RMS average detector" on page 618
The detector to be used for the initial peak search is configured in the trace settings
(see Section 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings", on page 624). The detector for the final test is
configured in the EMI marker settings, see Section 6.13.4.1, "EMI marker configura-
tion", on page 343.

Dwell time
EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement. The dwell time
defines how long the FSW measures the signal at the individual frequencies. Each
detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and discharge. For details on
defining the dwell time for an EMI measurement, see "Defining a dwell time for the final
measurement" on page 342.

RMS detector
The RMS detector displays the root mean square (RMS) value over the specified dwell
time. The integration time is the specified dwell time.
See "RMS detector" on page 614

Sample detector
The sample detector displays the last value from the samples allocated to a pixel.
The sample detector is used for noise or phase noise marker calculation. However, it is
unreliable if the displayed span is much greater then the resolution bandwidth or if the
tuning steps of the local oscillator are too large. The sample detector is not recommen-
ded for EMI tests.
See "Sample detector" on page 616

Quasi-peak detector (CISPR filter only)

See "Quasipeak detector" on page 616

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 338

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

CISPR Average detector (CISPR filter only)

See "CISPR average detector" on page 617

RMS Average detector (CISPR filter only)

See "RMS average detector" on page 618

6.13.3.3 Frequency resolution - sweep points and scaling

The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected dur-
ing one sweep. Thus, increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the
results regarding the frequency resolution.
Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range, be sure to define an
adequate number of sweep points, especially when performing the measurement on a
logarithmic axis. As on a linear axis, the distance from one sweep point to the next is
calculated graphically on a logarithmic axis, and is not based on the frequency itself.
Thus, the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher fre-
quencies.

The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this
condition is not met, signals or interferences can be missed during refined measure-
ment of narrowband interferers. If the distance between two sweep points is larger than
RBW/2, a warning is displayed in the status bar ("Increase Sweep Points"). If possible
for the selected RBW and span, the minimum required number of sweep points to fulfill
this condition is indicated. If the number of sweep points exceeds the limit, reduce the
span or increase the RBW.
The FSW supports a maximum of 200001 sweep points for EMI measurements.

Example:
Linear axis:

With a linear axis, the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz.
Logarithmic axis:

With a logarithmic axis, the distance between sweep points is variable. In the spectrum
from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz, the dis-
tance is several MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 339

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

This number is based on typical bands measured with a single resolution bandwidth.
There are sufficient sweep points to make sure that a signal is found during the refined
measurement, even when covering 30 MHz to 1 GHz with logarithmic scaling and
120 kHz RBW.

6.13.3.4 Controlling V-Networks (LISN)

For measurements on power lines, EMI measurement adds functionality to the

R&S FSW to control a line impedance stabilization network (LISN) directly. Thus you
can determine the interference caused by power supplies and cables.
You can connect the LISN to the user port of the FSW. Control cables for the various
LISNs are available as accessories. The FSW then controls which phase of the LISN is
to be tested and outputs the information to the user port.
The EMI measurement supports several V-networks. For each type of network, you
can define the phase you want to test for interferences. The EMI measurement allows
you to test one phase at a time.
Table 6-16: Supported networks and phases

Network type Phases

Two-line V-networks

ESH3-Z5 N, L1

ENV216 / AMN6500 N, L1

Four-line V-networks

ESH2-Z5 N, L1. L2, L3

ENV4200 N, L1. L2, L3

ENV432 N, L1. L2, L3

For the ENV216 / AMN6500 network, a 150 kHz highpass filter is available to protect
the input of the FSW.

6.13.3.5 Using transducer factors

The FSW EMI measurement provides functionality to include transducer factors in the
test setup. Transducers are devices like antennas, probes or current probes that are
connected to the FSW to measure interferences or wanted signals. The transducer
converts the measured value such as field strength, current or RFI voltage into a volt-
age across 50 Ω. During the measurement, the transducer is considered a part of the
instrument.
A transducer usually has a frequency-dependent transducer factor that includes the
frequency response of the corresponding device. During level measurement, the trans-
ducer factor automatically converts the results into the correct unit and magnitude. A
transducer factor consists of a maximum of 1001 reference values. Each reference
value includes frequency, unit and level.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 340

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

The FSW EMI measurement adds several predefined transducer factors. In addition,
you can also create new and edit existing transducer factors.
For more information, see Section 11.4.1, "Basics on transducer factors",
on page 756 .

6.13.3.6 Initial measurement - peak search

The purpose of an initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level
quickly. The peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average
detector. The initial peak search is the basis for a possible refined measurement of
interferences with the detectors specific to EMI measurements.
The results of the initial peak search are shown in the Marker Table (see Sec-
tion 6.13.2, "EMI measurement results", on page 335).
Peak searches can be performed automatically or manually.

Automatic peak search

If enabled, the automatic peak search starts as soon as you select the EMI measure-
ment and one or more markers are active. During automatic peak search, the FSW
looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions
a marker on those peaks after each sweep. If a limit line is assigned to the trace, the
peak search is based on the level difference between the trace and the limit line. For
each active marker, a peak is searched. You can use up to 16 markers simultaneously.
The largest peak is always assigned to the active marker with the lowest number; sub-
sequent peaks are assigned to the active markers in ascending order.
The FSW allows you to distribute markers among several traces. If you do so, the
marker with the lowest number assigned to a particular trace is positioned on the larg-
est peak of the corresponding trace.

Manual peak search

If automatic peak search is off, you can set the markers to any frequency you need
more information about manually. You can change the marker position with the rotary
knob or the cursor s, or position it to a particular frequency with the number s.
Setting markers is the same as setting markers in other spectrum measurements. For
more information, see Section 8.3, "Marker usage", on page 550.

Searching for peaks over several traces

You can search for peaks on six traces simultaneously with a different weighting detec-
tor for each trace.
In this case, the FSW searches for peaks on all traces separately, if you have assigned
at least one marker to each trace.
A typical selection for EMI measurement is to use the peak and the average detector.
After initial measurement, search for peaks on the peak trace and the average trace
separately. Thus, you can consider the distribution of narrowband and wideband sour-
ces of interference.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 341

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Example:
● In the initial measurement, determine the peak on one trace using the average
detector by assigning a marker to that trace. For the marker frequency, perform a
refined measurement using the CISPR or RMS average detector.
● In the initial measurement, determine the peak on another trace using the peak
detector by assigning another marker to that trace. For this marker frequency, per-
form a refined measurement using the quasi-peak detector.

6.13.3.7 Final measurement at the marker position

Finding peaks with the help of an initial marker peak search reduces data to be evalu-
ated and thus measurement time. A final measurement with a special EMI detector can
then refine the initial results.
The R&S FSW EMI measurement performs the final measurement automatically as
soon as a detector for the final test is defined for an EMI marker and the marker is acti-
vated. The final measurement starts immediately after the marker has been set. The
advantage of an immediate final measurement is that it eliminates the risk of measure-
ment errors based on frequency drifts of the disturbance signal.
The final measurement at the marker frequency can have a different detector than dur-
ing the initial peak search. Thus, the final measurement consumes much less time
because detectors with a long measurement time are needed only at the critical fre-
quency.
The R&S FSW EMI measurement also allows you to use multiple detectors for the final
measurement. The advantage of multiple detections is that you only need one test run
to see if the results comply with the limits specified in a standard. The detectors for the
final EMI tests are defined in the marker configuration, as opposed to the trace detec-
tor which is used for the initial peak search.
The results of the final measurement are shown in the Result Summary (see Sec-
tion 6.13.2, "EMI measurement results", on page 335).

Defining a dwell time for the final measurement

EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement. The dwell time
defines how long the FSW measures the signal at the frequencies of the marker posi-
tions. The dwell time is identical for all EMI final measurements and is thus defined in
the EMI measurement configuration. Select a dwell time according to the characteris-
tics of the measured signal. See also Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and dwell time",
on page 338.

6.13.3.8 Limit checks

General limit line functionality is provided by the FSW base unit. The base unit also
provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications.
The EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with
several EMC standards.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 342

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

When using limit lines in combination with EMI measurements, the marker levels from
the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values. The result of the limit line
check is displayed in the diagram as usual.
In the EMI Result Summary, the limit check is based on the results of the final test.
Since the marker can be determined using a different detector than the final test
results, the two limit check results can differ. The difference between the limit line and
the measured value is colored to indicate the following states:
● green: does not exceed limit
● yellow: within margin
● red: exceeds limit
For more information on using limit lines, see Section 8.4.2.1, "Basics on limit lines",
on page 595.

6.13.4 EMI measurement configuration

Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "EMI" > "EMI Config"
On the FSW, EMI measurement configuration consists of the following settings.
In addition, some common settings are also relevant for EMI measurements:
● Section 11.4.2, "Transducer settings", on page 758
● "Reference Level" on page 486
● Section 8.4.2.2, "Limit line settings and functions", on page 599
● EMI marker configuration...................................................................................... 343
● EMI final measurement configuration....................................................................347
● LISN control settings............................................................................................. 351

6.13.4.1 EMI marker configuration

Access: [MKR] > "Marker Config"

The final peak search for the EMI measurement is defined by the marker configuration.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 343

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Selected Marker.......................................................................................................... 344

Marker State................................................................................................................344
Marker Position X-value.............................................................................................. 344
Marker Type................................................................................................................ 345
Reference Marker....................................................................................................... 345
Linking to Another Marker........................................................................................... 345
Assigning the Marker to a Trace................................................................................. 346
Final Test Detector...................................................................................................... 346
Select Marker.............................................................................................................. 347

Selected Marker
Marker name. The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange.
Remote command:
Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands.

Marker State
Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

Marker Position X-value

Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the
absolute position is indicated. For delta markers, the position relative to the reference
marker is provided.
To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as
the x-value for the delta marker. Then link the delta marker to another marker using the
Linking to Another Marker function.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 344

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1276

Marker Type
Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta".
These types cannot be changed.
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an
additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not
activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal" A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position
in the diagram.
"Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci-
fied reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

Reference Marker
Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis
results (delta marker values).
If the reference marker is deactivated, the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva-
ted.
If a fixed reference point is configured (see "Defining a Fixed Reference" on page 558),
the reference point ("FXD") can also be selected instead of another marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 1275

Linking to Another Marker

Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers. If the x-
axis value of the initial marker is changed, the linked marker follows to the same posi-
tion on the x-axis. Linking is off by default.
Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ-
ence (e.g. between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement
and a reference trace).
For linked delta markers, the x-value of the delta marker is 0 Hz by default. To create a
delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value
for the linked delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1277
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1274
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 1273

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 345

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Assigning the Marker to a Trace

The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace deter-
mines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previ-
ously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or
time, but indicates the value of the new trace.
If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva-
ted.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 1278

Final Test Detector

Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency.
This setting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is instal-
led. CISPR detectors are only available after selecting a CISPR RBW or filter (see
"Res BW CISPR" on page 351).
For details, see Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and dwell time", on page 338.
Note: The trace detector configured in the trace settings is used for the initial peak
search only, see Section 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings", on page 624.
"Off" No final test is performed.
"PositivePeak" Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the
specified dwell time.
"Average" Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collec-
ted during the specified dwell time.
"Quasi-Peak" Determines the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that
was detected during the dwell time.
The "Quasi-Peak" detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and
not for an RBW of 1 MHz.
"CISPR Aver- Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR
age" 16-1-1.
The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value
detected while calculating the linear average value during the speci-
fied dwell time.
The "CISPR Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
"RMS Aver- A combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies
age" above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repeti-
tion frequencies below the corner frequency).
Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value
(simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument).
The "RMS Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1084
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector
on page 1084

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 346

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Select Marker
The "Select Marker" function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate
one or more markers quickly.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

6.13.4.2 EMI final measurement configuration

The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial
peak search. These settings are described here.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 347

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each fre-
quency, thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings, see "Final Test
Detector" on page 346.

Filter Type................................................................................................................... 348

RBW............................................................................................................................349
Automatic Peak Search...............................................................................................349
Dwell Time...................................................................................................................350
Final Test Detector...................................................................................................... 350
Frequency Axis Scaling...............................................................................................351
Res BW CISPR........................................................................................................... 351
Res BW MIL................................................................................................................ 351

Filter Type
Defines the filter type.
The following filter types are available:
● Normal (3dB)
● Channel
● RRC (not available for sweep type "FFT")
● 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT")
● CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
● MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
For more information, see Section 7.5.1.6, "Which data may pass: filter types",
on page 498.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 348

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Note: The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measure-
ment option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. If you select a CISPR
trace detector, the filter type is automatically also set to CISPR. An active CISPR filter
is indicated in the channel info, next to the RBW information. For details, see Sec-
tion 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types", on page 337.
The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured
in the EMI configuration.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1203

RBW
Defines the resolution bandwidth. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in
the specifications document. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible
bandwidth.
If "Auto" is selected, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span (for span
> 0). If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the
"RBW" display in the channel bar.
For a list of supported filters, see the specifications document.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.1, "Separating signals by selecting an appropri-
ate resolution bandwidth", on page 494.
Note: Restrictions.
● For measurements on I/Q data in the frequency domain, the maximum RBW is
1 MHz.
● Some additional Gaussian filters are provided for special measurements, such as
5G NR spurious emissions measurements. They are only available if you enter the
value manually, not using the rotary knob or stepping through the filter values. They
are not supported by all applications. For these particular filters, gating is also pos-
sible. The following values indicate the 3-dB filter width:
– 51 kHz
– 150 kHz
– 250 kHz
– 400 kHz
– 450 kHz
– 6 MHz
– 8 MHz
● For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector, the 1 MHz RBW filter is not
available (see Section 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types",
on page 337).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1202

Automatic Peak Search

If activated, a peak search is performed automatically for all active markers after each
sweep.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 349

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak
delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
Note: The general search functions Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search
are not available for EMI measurements.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PEAKsearch:AUTO
on page 1085

Dwell Time
Sets the dwell time for the EMI marker measurement.
For more information see Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and dwell time", on page 338.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DWELl on page 1086

Final Test Detector

Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency.
This setting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is instal-
led. CISPR detectors are only available after selecting a CISPR RBW or filter (see
"Res BW CISPR" on page 351).
For details, see Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and dwell time", on page 338.
Note: The trace detector configured in the trace settings is used for the initial peak
search only, see Section 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings", on page 624.
"Off" No final test is performed.
"PositivePeak" Determines the maximum signal level that was detected during the
specified dwell time.
"Average" Determines the average signal level of the samples that were collec-
ted during the specified dwell time.
"Quasi-Peak" Determines the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16-1-1 that
was detected during the dwell time.
The "Quasi-Peak" detector is only available for the CISPR filter, and
not for an RBW of 1 MHz.
"CISPR Aver- Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR
age" 16-1-1.
The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value
detected while calculating the linear average value during the speci-
fied dwell time.
The "CISPR Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
"RMS Aver- A combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition frequencies
age" above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repeti-
tion frequencies below the corner frequency).
Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value
(simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument).
The "RMS Average" detector is only available for the CISPR filter.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 350

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector on page 1084
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector
on page 1084

Frequency Axis Scaling

Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis.
Logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed and only for fstop ≥1.4*
fstart.
By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency
axis, however, is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhan-
ces the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies get
more crowded and become harder to distinguish.
For more information see Section 7.3.1.3, "Coping with large frequency ranges - loga-
rithmic scaling", on page 474.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 1194

Res BW CISPR
Automatically sets the measurement bandwidth for commercial EMC standards
according to CISPR.
For more information, see Section 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types",
on page 337.
Remote command:
Filter type:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1203
Filter bandwidth:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201

Res BW MIL
Automatically sets the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards.
For more information, see Section 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types",
on page 337.
Remote command:
Filter type:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1203
Filter bandwidth:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201

6.13.4.3 LISN control settings

Access: [MEAS CONFIG] > "LISN Config"

For measurements with power lines, the following settings are available for the FSW to
control which phase of the LISN is to be tested (e.g. for EMI measurements). LISN
control requires the EMI measurement (R&S FSW-K54) option.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 351

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

For more information, see Section 6.13.3.4, "Controlling V-Networks (LISN)",

on page 340.
LISN Type................................................................................................................... 352
Phase.......................................................................................................................... 352
150 kHz Highpass....................................................................................................... 352

LISN Type
Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the
FSW. The network type determines the supported phases (see Table 6-16).
"Off" disables LISN control and output.
Remote command:
INPut:LISN[:TYPE] on page 1087

Phase
Selects the phase to be measured. Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN.
Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four-line networks.
You can select one phase only for each measurement.
Remote command:
INPut:LISN:PHASe on page 1087

150 kHz Highpass

Enables or disables the use of an additional 150 kHz highpass filter to protect the FSW
LISN from excessive input.
The filter is available for the ENV 216 network only.
Remote command:
INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] on page 1086

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 352

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

6.13.5 EMI result analysis

The EMI measurement provides functionality to analyze the results.

Marker demodulation
The FSW is able to demodulate AM and FM signals for acoustic tests and monitoring
purposes.
When the demodulator function is active, the EMI measurement demodulates the sig-
nal continuously (regardless of the "Continuous Demodulation" setting in the marker
function configuration). The demodulation begins as soon as a marker is activated.
During the initial measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement
span; during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are
demodulated (for the defined dwell time). You can listen to the results during the mea-
surement using headphones or the internal speaker.
For more information, see Section 8.3.4.7, "Demodulating marker values and providing
audio output (marker demodulation)", on page 581.

Limit lines
General limit line functionality is provided by the FSW base unit. The base unit also
provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications.
The EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in compliance with
several EMC standards.
Limit line configuration is described in Section 8.4.2.2, "Limit line settings and func-
tions", on page 599.

Test reports
The FSW features a test report generator. A test report is a document that summarizes
the results and configuration of measurements.
Test reports are based on a general template, and are completed with user-defined,
measurement-specific contents. You can create multiple templates for different applica-
tions.
Test reports are described in Section 10.6, "Working with test reports", on page 712.

6.13.6 How to perform EMI measurements

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to perform an EMI measure-

ment with the FSW.

For remote operation, see Section 13.5.14.8, "Programming example: EMI measure-
ment", on page 1090.

1. Select [MODE] on the front panel and select the "Spectrum" application.

2. Define the frequency range of the EMI measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 353

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

a) Select [FREQ] and then the "Frequency Config" .

b) Define the start and stop frequency.

3. Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement.

a) Select [TRACE] .
b) Select the "Trace Config" to configure as many traces as required.
c) Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement, for example the peak
detector and the average detector.

4. Select [MEAS] on the front panel and select the "EMI" measurement.
The EMI main menu is displayed.

5. Select the "EMI Config" .

6. Define the resolution bandwidth and filter type to be used for the measurement.
By default, the FSW uses a filter with a 3-db bandwidth. EMI measurements usu-
ally require a filter with a 6 dB bandwidth.

7. Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final
measurement.

8. To obtain an overview of peak values in the input signal during the initial measure-
ment, activate the "Auto Peak Search".
As soon as a sweep is started, the FSW looks for the strongest peaks in the fre-
quency range you are measuring and positions one of the active markers on those
peaks. The number of active markers determines the number of detected peaks;
no additional markers are activated.

9. Define the type of scaling for the frequency axis according to the definition of the
limit lines in the standard.

10. Optionally, select the "LISN Config" to configure a LISN control.

11. Configure the EMI measurement markers.

a) Select "Marker Config".
b) Activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze.
c) For each active marker, select a detector to be used for the "Final Test", that is:
the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position.
d) If you already know which frequencies cause irregular values, set the markers
to those positions. (Otherwise perform an initial peak search to obtain an over-
view, see step 8).

12. Optionally, select the "Marker Demod Config" to configure continuous marker
demodulation.
Demodulation begins immediately with the next measurement. During the initial
measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span; during
the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated
(for the defined dwell time).

13. Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement.
a) Select [SWEEP] on the front panel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 354

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

b) Select the "Sweep Config" .

c) Set the number of "Sweep Points" so that the distance between two sweep
points is smaller than RBW/2.

14. Optionally, select or configure limit lines to check the marker results against.
a) Select [Lines] and then the "Lines Config" , then select the "Lines Config" tab.
b) In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compati-
ble".
All limit lines that comply with the following conditions are displayed in the over-
view:
● Stored in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instru-
ment
● File extension .LIN
● Compatible to the current EMI measurement settings
c) Select the "Check Traces" setting for a limit line in the overview.
d) Select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check. You can assign the
same limit line to several traces.

15. The default unit dBm is not suitable for EMI measurements. Define a suitable unit
for the measured values, or select a transducer.
To change the unit:
Select [AMPT] > "Amplitude Config" > "Unit".
To select a transducer:
a) Select [SETUP].
b) Select "Transducer".
c) In the "Transducer" dialog box, set the "View Filter" to "Show Compatible" to
determine the available transducers for the current EMI measurement setup.
d) In the overview, select the "Active" setting for a transducer line.

16. Select [RUN SINGLE] to start a new EMI measurement.

If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measure-
ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time. If acti-
vated, the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions.
The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines. The
status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Sum-
mary.

6.13.7 Measurement example: measuring radio frequency interference

A common measurement task that you can do with the EMI measurement is to detect
radio frequency interference (RFI) or electromagnetic interferences (EMI).
The measurement shows signal levels over a particular frequency range. A typical fre-
quency range for EMI measurements is 150 kHz to 1 GHz. Usually, the captured signal
characteristics are unknown. Thus, the best way to start the measurement is to preset
the FSW and perform a peak search to obtain a general overview.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 355

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

If you perform measurements according to a particular EMI standard, a preset also

eliminates the risk of wrong settings inherited from previous measurements. Note that
EMI measurements are possible in the Spectrum application only.

A programming example demonstrating an EMI measurement in a remote environment

is provided in Section 13.5.14.8, "Programming example: EMI measurement",
on page 1090.

Preparing the measurement

1. Select [PRESET] .
The FSW restores the default settings.

2. Define the frequency range of the measurement.

a) Select [FREQ] .
b) Select "Start Frequency".
c) Enter a frequency of 150 kHz.
d) Select "Stop Frequency".
e) Enter a frequency of 1 GHz.
The FSW scales the horizontal axis accordingly.

3. Select [MEAS] on the front panel and select the "EMI" measurement.
The EMI main menu is displayed.

4. Select the "EMI Config" .

5. Define the resolution bandwidth and filter type for the measurement.
By default, the FSW uses a filter with a 3-db bandwidth. EMI measurements usu-
ally require a filter with a 6-dB bandwidth.

6. Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final
measurement.

7. To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial
measurement, activate the "Auto Peak Search".

8. Select the measurement bandwidth.

a) Select the "Res BW CISPR" .
A CISPR (6 dB) filter is configured.
b) Set the bandwidth to 1 MHz.
The FSW shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth in the diagram header.

9. Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement.

a) Select [TRACE] .
b) Select "Trace Config" to configure two traces.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 356

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

c) Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement. Select the peak detec-
tor for trace 1 and the average detector for trace 2.
The peak detector ensures that the detected peak levels in the frequency range
covered by one pixel are displayed.
The FSW now displays two traces. Trace 1 shows the peak values, trace 2 shows
the average values.

10. Increase the number of sweep points for the EMI measurement.
a) Select [SWEEP] on the front panel.
b) Select the "Sweep Config" .
c) Set the number of "Sweep Points" to 200000.

11. Select [AMPT] , then select the "Amplitude Config" and, in the "Amplitude" dialog
box, select V as the "Unit".

Performing the measurement

1. Configure the EMI measurement markers. In this example, we use 6 markers.

a) Select the "Marker Config" .
b) Activate six normal markers.
c) Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1. Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2.
d) For each of these markers, select the "CISPR AV" detector to be used for the
"Final Test", i.e. the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker positions.

2. Select a limit line to check the marker results against.

a) Select [Lines] and then the "Lines Config" , then select the "Lines Config" tab.
b) In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compati-
ble".
All limit lines that comply with the following conditions are displayed in the over-
view:
● Stored in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instru-
ment
● File extension .LIN
● Compatible to the current EMI measurement settings
c) In the overview, click the "Check Traces" setting for the EN55011A limit line.
d) Select trace 1 to be included in the limit check. (Trace 2, which is defined as
the average, is always lower than trace 1, which contains peak values.)

3. Select [RUN SINGLE] to start a new EMI measurement.

If activated, a peak search is performed. For each active marker, a final measure-
ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time.
If activated, the signal is demodulated. During the initial measurement, demodula-
tion is performed for the entire measurement span; during the final measurement
only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell
time).
The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit line. The sta-
tus of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the Result Summary.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 357

FSW Measurements and results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) measurement

Evaluating the measurement

Check the Result Summary to detect exceeded limit values.
Zoom into the diagram at the conspicuous frequency for more details.
If necessary, decrease the span to the area in which irregular values occurred and
repeat the measurement.

6.13.8 Optimizing and troubleshooting EMI measurements

If the results do not meet your expectations, try the following methods to optimize the
measurement:

Number of sweep points

The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point (more is better). If this
condition is not met, signals or interferences could be missed during refined measure-
ment of narrowband interferers. See Section 6.13.3.3, "Frequency resolution - sweep
points and scaling", on page 339.
If the distance between two sweep points is larger than RBW/2, a warning is displayed
in the status bar ("Increase Sweep Points" or "RBW").

Dwell time
Consider the following when defining the dwell time:
● Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses
down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly
● Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly: the dwell time must cover at
least the time until the first signal peak is measured; can require long dwell time
● Unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency: the dwell
time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured; usually
shorter than for pulsed signals

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 358

FSW Common measurement settings
Configuration overview

7 Common measurement settings

Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless
of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a spe-
cific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Ana-
lyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the
specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these com-
mon settings.
● Configuration overview..........................................................................................359
● Data input and output............................................................................................361
● Frequency and span configuration........................................................................473
● Amplitude and vertical axis configuration..............................................................481
● Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration.............................................................494
● Trigger and gate configuration.............................................................................. 510
● Adjusting settings automatically............................................................................ 532

7.1 Configuration overview

Access: all menus
Each channel provides an overview of the most important currently defined settings
and access to the most important configuration dialog boxes for the particular mea-
surement. This overview is available via the "Overview" icon, which is displayed in all
menus.

Using this overview, you can easily configure an entire channel from input over pro-
cessing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated.
In particular, the "Overview" provides quick access to the following configuration dialog
boxes (listed in the recommended order of processing):

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 359

FSW Common measurement settings
Configuration overview

1. "Select Measurement"
See Section 6, "Measurements and results", on page 129

2. Input
Section 7.2, "Data input and output", on page 361

3. Amplitude
See Section 7.4, "Amplitude and vertical axis configuration", on page 481

4. Frequency
See Section 7.3, "Frequency and span configuration", on page 473

5. (Optionally:) Trigger/Gate
See Section 7.6, "Trigger and gate configuration", on page 510

6. Bandwidth
See Section 7.5.2, "Bandwidth, filter and sweep settings", on page 500
(For SEM measurements: SEM Setup, see Section 6.6.5, "SEM configuration",
on page 249)
(For Spurious measurements: Spurious Setup, see Section 6.7.4, "Spurious emis-
sions measurement configuration", on page 285)

7. (Optionally:) Outputs
See Section 7.2.8, "Output settings", on page 468

8. Analysis
See Section 8, "Common analysis and display functions", on page 536

9. Display
See Section 8.1, "Result display configuration", on page 536

To configure settings
► Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box.
Select a setting in the channel bar (at the top of the channel tab) to change a spe-
cific setting.

Preset Channel
Select "Preset Channel" in the lower left-hand corner of the "Overview" to restore all
measurement settings in the current channel to their default values.
Note: Do not confuse "Preset Channel" with the [Preset] key, which restores the entire
instrument to its default values and thus closes all channels on the FSW (except for the
default channel)!
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 1366

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 360

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

7.2 Data input and output

The FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of
output (such as video or trigger signals).
● Receiving data input and providing data output....................................................361
● Input source settings............................................................................................. 364
● Power sensors...................................................................................................... 369
● Optional external generator control.......................................................................377
● Probes...................................................................................................................405
● Optional external mixers....................................................................................... 413
● External frontend control (R&S FSW-K553)..........................................................443
● Output settings......................................................................................................468
● Trigger input/output settings..................................................................................470
● How to output a trigger signal............................................................................... 472

7.2.1 Receiving data input and providing data output

The FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of
output (such as noise or trigger signals).

7.2.1.1 Receiving and providing trigger signals

Using one of the "TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT" connectors of the FSW, the FSW can
use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data. Alternatively, the
internal trigger signal used by the FSW can be output for use by other connected devi-
ces. Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted
and received signals within a measurement.
For details on the connectors see the FSW "Getting Started" manual.

External trigger as input

If the trigger signal for the FSW is provided by an external device, the trigger signal
source must be connected to the FSW and the trigger source must be defined as
"External" in the FSW.

External triggers with R&S FSW-B2000/B5000

When the input is provided from an FSW with the B2000/B5000 option, the connected
oscilloscope samples the data. Thus, triggering is also processed by the oscilloscope.
The trigger source can be either the IF level or an external trigger, for example from the
FSW.
In this case, the trigger source must be defined as "External CH3" (or "External Ana-
log" for power splitting mode) on the FSW.

Trigger output
The FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trigger
signal, or to indicate that the FSW itself is ready to trigger.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 361

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The trigger signal can be output by the FSW automatically, or manually by the user. If it
is provided automatically, a high signal is output when the FSW has triggered due to a
sweep start ("Device Triggered"), or when the FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal
after a sweep start ("Trigger Armed").

Manual triggering
If the trigger output signal is initiated manually, the length and level (high/low) of the
trigger pulse is also user-definable. Note, however, that the trigger pulse level is always
opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output "Level" setting, e.g. for
"Level" = "High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until "Send Trigger"
is selected. Then, a low pulse is provided.

7.2.1.2 IF and video signal output

The measured IF signal or displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF sig-
nal) can be provided at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD or "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz" out-
put connector.
The video output is a signal of 1 V. It can be used, for example, to control demodula-
ted audio frequencies.
The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency.
The "2ND IF" output is a signal with a bandwidth of 2 GHz at the frequency 2 GHz.
This output is only available if the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz" output connector is
installed. (The availability of this connector depends on the instrument model.)
If the optional 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000) is active,
the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT 5 GHz" output connector is used to transfer the measured
data from the FSW to the connected oscilloscope. In this case, the "2ND IF" output is
automatically deactivated. It is not reactivated when the B2000/B5000 option is
switched off.
The frequency at which the active B5000 option transmits data to the oscilloscope via
the "IF 5 GHz OUT" connector depends on the analysis bandwidth.

Restrictions
Note the following restrictions for data output:
● IF and video output is only available in the time domain (zero span).
● For I/Q data, only IF output is available.
● IF output is not available if any of the following conditions apply:
– The optional "Digital Baseband" interface is active (for input or output)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 362

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

– MSRA operating mode is active

– MSRT operating mode is active
– A wideband extension is used (hardware options R&S FSWB160--B512; used
automatically for bandwidths > 80 MHz; in this case select the "IF WIDE OUT"
output, which uses the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector; for bandwidths larger
than 512 MHz, IF output is not available.)
A wideband extension is used (hardware options R&S FSWB160--B512; used
automatically for bandwidths > 80 MHz; in this case select the "IF WIDE OUT"
output, which uses the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" connector)
– The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz (upsampling)

IF WIDE OUTPUT
For bandwidths > 80 MHz, but less than 512 MHz, the IF output is provided at the "IF
WIDE OUTPUT" connector.
For bandwidths larger than 512 MHz, IF output is not available.
In this case, the IF output frequency cannot be defined manually, but is determined
automatically depending on the center frequency. The currently used output frequency
is indicated in the "IF Wide Out Frequency" field of the "Output" dialog box. For details
on the used frequencies see the specifications document.

2ND IF Output
For instrument models FSW26/43/50/67/85, the IF output can also be provided at the
optional "IF OUT 2 GHz" output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a band-
width of 2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument, for
example an R&S®RTO oscilloscope.
For instrument model FSW85, the IF output can also be provided at the optional "IF
OUT 2 GHz" output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of
2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument. However, con-
sider the note on the 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option below.

If "2ND IF" output is activated, the measured values are no longer available on the dis-
play; thus, the trace data currently displayed on the FSW becomes invalid. A message
in the status bar indicates this situation. The message also indicates whether the side-
bands of the IF spectrum output are in normal or inverted order compared to the RF
signal, which depends on the used center frequency.

2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000)

To analyze IF data with a bandwidth of 2 GHz / 5 GHz using an R&S®RTO oscillo-
scope, it is recommended that you use the fully integrated solution including alignment
with the 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth extension option (R&S FSW-B2000/B5000),
rather than the "2ND IF" output solution.
If the B2000/B5000 option is activated, the "2ND IF" output is automatically deactiva-
ted. It is not reactivated when the B2000/B5000 option is switched off.
For details see the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 363

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Prerequisites
Note the following prerequisites for output to the "IF OUT 2 GHz" connector ("2ND
IF"):
● Instrument model FSW26/43/50/67/85; external mixers can be used
● Zero span mode, I/Q Analyzer, or optional application supporting B2000
(See the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual)
● Center frequency ≥ 5.5 GHz
● Optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000) is not active
Prerequisites for output to the "IF OUT 5 GHz" connector ("2ND IF"):
● Instrument model FSW43/85; external mixers can be used
● Zero span mode, I/Q Analyzer, or optional application supporting B5000
● Center frequency ≥ 9.5 GHz
● Optional 5 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B5000) is not active

7.2.2 Input source settings

Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source"

The input source determines which data the FSW analyzes.
The default input source for the FSW is "Radio Frequency", i.e. the signal at the "RF
Input" connector of the FSW. If no additional options are installed, this is the only avail-
able input source.
Since the Digital I/Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal
path, both cannot be used simultaneously. When one is activated, established connec-
tions for the other are disconnected. When the second input is deactivated, connec-
tions to the first are re-established. Reconnecting can cause a short delay in data
transfer after switching the input source.
External mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode.
● Radio frequency input........................................................................................... 364

7.2.2.1 Radio frequency input

Access: "Overview" > "Input/Frontend" > "Input Source" > "Radio Frequency"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 364

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

RF Input Protection
The RF input connector of the FSW must be protected against signal levels that
exceed the ranges specified in the specifications document. Therefore, the FSW is
equipped with an overload protection mechanism for DC and signal frequencies up to
30 MHz. This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer
exceeds the specified limit. It ensures that the connection between RF input and input
mixer is cut off.
When the overload protection is activated, an error message is displayed in the status
bar ("INPUT OVLD"), and a message box informs you that the RF input was discon-
nected. Furthermore, a status bit (bit 3) in the STAT:QUES:POW status register is set.
In this case, you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the
message box. Then measurement is possible again. Reactivating the RF input is also
possible via the remote command INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet.

Radio Frequency State............................................................................................... 365

Input Coupling............................................................................................................. 366
Impedance.................................................................................................................. 366
Direct Path.................................................................................................................. 367
High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz.........................................................................................367
YIG-Preselector...........................................................................................................367
Preselector Adjust....................................................................................................... 368
Input Connector...........................................................................................................368

Radio Frequency State

Activates input from the "RF Input" connector.
For FSW85 models with two input connectors, you must define which input source is
used for each measurement channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 365

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

If an external frontend is active, select the connector the external frontend is connected
to. You cannot use the other RF input connector simultaneously for the same channel.
However, you can configure the use of the other RF input connector for another active
channel at the same time.
"Input 1" 1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz
with option R&S FSW-B90G)
"Input 2" 1.85 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 67 GHz
Remote command:
INPut:SELect on page 1116
INPut:TYPE on page 1117

Input Coupling
The RF input of the FSW can be coupled by alternating current (AC) or direct current
(DC).
For an active external frontend, input coupling is always AC.
Not available for input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Not available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal. AC coupling is activated by
default to prevent damage to the instrument. Very low frequencies in the input signal
can be distorted.
However, some specifications require DC coupling. In this case, you must protect the
instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually. For details, refer to the specifi-
cations document.
Remote command:
INPut:COUPling on page 1113

Impedance
The FSW has an internal impedance of 50 Ω. However, some applications use other
impedance values. To match the impedance of an external application to the impe-
dance of the FSW, an impedance matching pad can be inserted at the input. If the type
and impedance value of the used matching pad is known to the FSW, it can convert
the measured units accordingly so that the results are calculated correctly.
(See "Reference Level" on page 486).
For an active external frontend, impedance is always 50 Ω.
This function is not available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
Not all settings are supported by all FSW applications.
The impedance conversion does not affect the level of the output signals (such as IF,
video, demod, digital I/Q output).
"50Ω" (Default:) no conversion takes place

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 366

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

"75Ω" The 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance

using a 75 Ω adapter of the selected "Pad Type": "Series-R" (default)
or "MLP" (Minimum Loss Pad)
"User" The 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a user-defined impe-
dance value according to the selected "Pad Type": "Series-R"
(default) or "MLP" (Minimum Loss Pad)
Remote command:
INPut:IMPedance on page 1115
INPut:IMPedance:PTYPe on page 1115
For Analog Baseband input:
INPut:IQ:IMPedance on page 1145
INPut:IQ:IMPedance:PTYPe on page 1145

Direct Path
Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies.
In spectrum analyzers, passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the
input signal. In such mixers, the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited
isolation. The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz. This effect
is referred to as LO feedthrough.
To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path
to the A/D converter, referred to as the direct path. By default, the direct path is
selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero. However, this behavior can be
disabled. If "Direct Path" is set to "Off", the spectrum analyzer always uses the analog
mixer path.
For an active external frontend, the direct path is always used automatically for fre-
quencies close to zero.
"Auto" (Default) The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close
to zero.
"Off" The analog mixer path is always used.
Remote command:
INPut:DPATh on page 1114

High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz

Activates an additional internal highpass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to
3 GHz. This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer to measure the har-
monics for a DUT, for example.
This function requires an additional hardware option.
Note: For RF input signals outside the specified range, the high-pass filter has no
effect. For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards, the harmonics
are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG-preselector, if available.)
Remote command:
INPut:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] on page 1114

YIG-Preselector
Enables or disables the YIG-preselector.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 367

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

An internal YIG-preselector at the input of the FSW ensures that image frequencies are
rejected. However, image rejection is only possible for a restricted bandwidth. To use
the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can disable the YIG-preselector at the
input of the FSW, which can lead to image-frequency display.
Note: Note that the YIG-preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz.
Therefore, switching the YIG-preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is
below that value.
To use the optional 90 GHz frequency extension (R&S FSW-B90G), the YIG-preselec-
tor must be disabled.
The "YIG-Preselector" is off by default.
Note:
For the following measurements, the "YIG-Preselector" is off by default (if available).
● I/Q Analyzer
● All secondary applications in MSRA operating mode
● Real-time (and thus in all secondary applications in MSRT operating mode)
Remote command:
INPut:FILTer:YIG[:STATe] on page 1115

Preselector Adjust
Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment.
This function is only available for instrument modelsFSW43/50/67/85, for frequency
sweeps in the Spectrum application.
Generally, sweeps exceeding a certain span use different signal paths to measure the
required spectrum. To minimize the hysteresis impact of the YIG preselector at the
transition frequencies, you can activate this function. It is applied only when the YIG-
preselector is active.
If activated, the FSW automatically performs a short internal adjustment. If you change
the frequency or span settings, the adjustment is repeated.
If activated, "PRADJ" is indicated in the window title bar.
Remote command:
CALibration:PADJust[:STATe] on page 1113

Input Connector
Determines which connector the input data for the measurement is taken from.
For more information on the optional "Analog Baseband" interface, see the FSW I/Q
Analyzer and I/Q Input user manual.
"RF" (Default:) The "RF Input" connector
"RF Probe" The "RF Input" connector with an adapter for a modular probe
This setting is only available if a probe is connected to the "RF Input"
connector.
It is not available for an active external frontend.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 368

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

"Baseband The optional "Baseband Input I" connector

Input I" This setting is only available if the optional "Analog Baseband" inter-
face is installed and active for input.
It is not available for the FSW67. For FSW85 models with two input
connectors, this setting is only available for "Input 1".
Remote command:
INPut:CONNector on page 1113

7.2.3 Power sensors

The FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor.
● Basics on power sensors...................................................................................... 369
● Power sensor settings...........................................................................................370
● How to work with a power sensor......................................................................... 375

7.2.3.1 Basics on power sensors

For precise power measurement, up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the

instrument via the power sensor interface (on the front panel) or the USB connectors.
Both manual operation and remote control are supported.

For a detailed list of supported sensors, see the specifications document.

Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level,
e.g. from a signal generator (see "Using a power sensor as an external power trigger"
on page 370).

Signal Power Signal

source sensor analyzer

Figure 7-1: Power sensor support – standard test setup

Using the power sensor with several applications

The power sensor cannot be used from the FSW firmware and the R&S Power Viewer
Plus (virtual power meter for displaying results of the R&S NRP power sensors) simul-
taneously.

Result display
The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table. For
each power sensor, a row is inserted. The sensor index is indicated in the "Type" col-
umn.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 369

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Using a power sensor as an external power trigger

Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level, e.g.
from a signal generator. For a list of supported power sensors see the specifications
document.
With the FSW, the power sensors can be connected to the "Power Sensor" interface
directly, and no further cables are required. They can then be configured as an external
power sensor trigger.

Figure 7-2: Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface

The FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured
by the power sensor. Power measurement results are provided as usual.

The "Gate Mode" Level is not supported for R&S power sensors. The signal sent by
these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded, rather than a time
period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level mode. Thus, the trig-
ger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement; the
measurement cannot be completed. For details on gating see Section 7.6.2.1, "Gated
measurements", on page 523.

For details see "How to configure a power sensor as an external (PSE) trigger"
on page 377.

7.2.3.2 Power sensor settings

Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Power Sensor" tab

For details on working with power sensors, see the FSW User Manual.
Each sensor is configured on a separate tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 370

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

State............................................................................................................................371
Continuous Value Update........................................................................................... 372
Select.......................................................................................................................... 372
Zeroing Power Sensor................................................................................................ 372
Frequency Manual...................................................................................................... 372
Frequency Coupling.................................................................................................... 373
Unit/Scale....................................................................................................................373
Meas Time/Average.................................................................................................... 373
Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas -> Ref.............................. 373
Reference Value..........................................................................................................373
Use Ref Level Offset................................................................................................... 373
Sensor Level Offset.....................................................................................................374
Average Count (Number of Readings)........................................................................374
Duty Cycle...................................................................................................................374
Using the power sensor as an external trigger............................................................374
└ External Trigger Level...................................................................................374
└ Hysteresis..................................................................................................... 375
└ Trigger Holdoff.............................................................................................. 375
└ Drop-Out Time.............................................................................................. 375
└ Slope.............................................................................................................375

State
Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off. Note that in addition
to this general setting, each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually
by the Select setting on each tab. However, the general setting overrides the individual
settings.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 371

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Continuous Value Update

If activated, the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long
sweep time, and even after a single sweep has completed.
This function cannot be activated for individual sensors.
If the power sensor is being used as a trigger (see "Using the power sensor as an
external trigger" on page 374), continuous update is not possible; this setting is
ignored.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:UPDate[:STATe] on page 1187

Select
Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti-
vated (State function).
The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are
provided in a selection list. For each of the four available power sensor indexes
("Power Sensor 1"..."Power Sensor 4"), which correspond to the tabs in the configura-
tion dialog, one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned. The physical sensor is
thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index.
By default, serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free
power sensor index for which "Auto Assignment" is selected.
Alternatively, you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the "Auto" option
and selecting a serial number from the list.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>[:STATe] on page 1186
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:DEFine on page 1180
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:CONFigure:AUTO[:STATe]
on page 1180
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<p>:COUNt? on page 1180

Zeroing Power Sensor

Starts zeroing of the power sensor.
For details on the zeroing process refer to the FSW User Manual.
For details on the zeroing process refer to "How to zero the power sensor"
on page 376.
Remote command:
CALibration:PMETer<p>:ZERO:AUTO ONCE on page 1181

Frequency Manual
Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured. The power sensor has a memory
with frequency-dependent correction factors. This allows extreme accuracy for signals
of a known frequency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency on page 1184

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 372

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Frequency Coupling
Selects the coupling option. The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center
frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency:LINK on page 1184

Unit/Scale
Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed. Available units are
dBm, dB, W and %.
If dB or % is selected, the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with
either the "Meas -> Ref" setting or the "Reference Value" setting.
Remote command:
UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer on page 1187
UNIT<n>:PMETer<p>:POWer:RATio on page 1188

Meas Time/Average
Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode. In general,
results are more precise with longer measurement times. The following settings are
recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results:
"Short" Stationary signals with high power (> -40dBm), because they require
only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides
the highest repetition rates.
"Normal" Signals with lower power or modulated signals
"Long" Signals at the lower end of the measurement range (<-50 dBm) or
Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise
"Manual" Manual averaging mode. The average count is set with the Average
Count (Number of Readings) setting.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe on page 1185
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage[:STATe] on page 1185

Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas -> Ref
Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display. The
reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude]:AUTO ONCE on page 1182

Reference Value
Defines the reference value in dBm used for relative power meter measurements.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude] on page 1182

Use Ref Level Offset

If activated, takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the
measured power (see "Shifting the Display (Offset)" on page 487).
If deactivated, takes the Sensor Level Offset into account.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 373

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:ROFFset[:STATe] on page 1186

Sensor Level Offset

Takes the specified offset into account for the measured power. Only available if Use
Ref Level Offset is disabled.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:SOFFset on page 1186

Average Count (Number of Readings)

Defines the number of readings (averages) to be performed after a single sweep has
been started. This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected (Meas Time/
Average setting).
The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps (1, 2, 4, 8, …).
For average count = 0 or 1, one reading is performed. The general averaging and
sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting.
Results become more stable with extended average, particularly if signals with low
power are measured. This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the
power sensor measurement.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:MTIMe:AVERage:COUNt on page 1185

Duty Cycle
Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse-modulated signals and
activates the duty cycle correction. With the correction activated, the sensor calculates
the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle[:STATe] on page 1183
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:DCYCle:VALue on page 1183

Using the power sensor as an external trigger

If activated, the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the
defined "External Trigger Level" is measured. This trigger signal can be used as an
external power trigger by the FSW.
This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor.
For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger, see "Using a power sensor
as an external power trigger" on page 370.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger[:STATe] on page 1190
TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225

External Trigger Level ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger

Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger.
For details on supported trigger levels, see the specifications document.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel on page 1189

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 374

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Hysteresis ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger

Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed
before a trigger event occurs. Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events
caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HYSTeresis on page 1189

Trigger Holdoff ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger

Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events.
Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:HOLDoff on page 1188

Drop-Out Time ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger

Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering
again.

Slope ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger

Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls
down to it.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 1190

7.2.3.3 How to work with a power sensor

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor. For
details on individual functions and settings see Section 7.2.3.2, "Power sensor set-
tings", on page 370.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.7.1.8, "Working with power sensors", on page 1179.

Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level,
e.g. from a signal generator.
This is described in "How to configure a power sensor as an external (PSE) trigger"
on page 377.

How to set up a power sensor

Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately and used for precise
power measurement. All power sensors can be activated and deactivated individually.
The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sen-
sors.

1. To display the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select "Input" from the "Overview".
● Select [INPUT/OUTPUT] and then "Power Sensor Config".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 375

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

2. Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure, e.g. "Power Sen-
sor 1".

3. Press "Select" to analyze the power sensor data according to the current configura-
tion when power measurement is activated.

4. From the selection list with serial numbers of connected power sensors, select the
sensor you want to configure.
To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically (default),
select "Auto".

5. Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure.
a) To define the frequency manually, select "Frequency Manual" and enter a fre-
quency.
b) To determine the frequency automatically, select "Frequency Coupling" and
then either "Center", to use the center frequency, or "Marker", to use the fre-
quency defined by marker 1.

6. Select the unit for the power result display.

7. Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated, or define the
number of readings to average. To define the number of readings to be taken into
account manually, select "Manual" and enter the number in the "Number of Read-
ings" field.

8. To activate the duty cycle correction, select "DutyCycle" and enter a percentage as
the correction value.

9. If you selected "dB" or "%" as units (relative display), define a reference value:
a) To set the currently measured power as a reference value, press "Meas ->
Ref".
b) Alternatively, enter a value manually in the "Reference Value" field.
c) Optionally, select the "Use Ref Level Offset" option to take the reference level
offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power.

10. To use the power sensor as an external power trigger, select the "External Power
Trigger" option and define the trigger settings.
For details see "How to configure a power sensor as an external (PSE) trigger"
on page 377.

11. If necessary, repeat steps 3-10 for another power sensor.

12. Set the "Power Sensor State" at the top of the "Power Sensor" tab to "On" to acti-
vate power measurement for the selected power sensors.
The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table (Function:
"Sensor <1...4>").

How to zero the power sensor

1. To display the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, do one of the following:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 376

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

● Select "Input" from the "Overview".

● Select [INPUT/OUTPUT] and then "Power Sensor Config".

2. Select the tab that is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero.

3. Press "Zeroing Power Sensor".

A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input
of the power sensor.

4. Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press [ENTER] to
continue.

5. Wait until zeroing is complete.

A corresponding message is displayed.

How to configure a power sensor as an external (PSE) trigger

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor
to be used as an external power sensor trigger.

To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor (PSE) trigger

1. Connect a compatible power sensor to the "Power Sensor" interface on the front
panel of the FSW. (For details on supported sensors see "Using a power sensor as
an external power trigger" on page 370).

2. Set up the power sensor as described in "How to set up a power sensor"

on page 375.

3. In the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, select the "External Power Trig-
ger" option.

4. Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated ("External Trigger
Level") and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger.

5. Press [TRIG] and then select "Trigger/ Gate Config".

6. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, select "Signal Source" = "PSE".
The FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor
occur. Power measurement results are provided as usual.

7.2.4 Optional external generator control

If the FSW optional External Generator Control is installed, you can operate various
commercially available generators as an external generator with the FSW. Thus, scalar
network analysis with the FSW is possible.
● About external generator control...........................................................................378
● Basics on external generator control.....................................................................378
● External generator control settings....................................................................... 387
● How to work with external generator control......................................................... 395
● Measurement example: calibration with an external generator............................ 398

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 377

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

7.2.4.1 About external generator control

A common measurement setup includes a signal generator, a device under test (DUT),
and a signal and spectrum analyzer, for example the FSW. In this setup, the signal
analyzer can control which signal the generator is to send, which is in turn measured
by the analyzer. This process is referred to as external generator control. The genera-
tor in this setup is referred to as a tracking generator.
A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the
power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the
signal analyzer in advance. The known effects can then be removed from the mea-
surement results to obtain accurate information on the DUT.

7.2.4.2 Basics on external generator control

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera-
tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set-
tings.

External generator control is only available in the following applications.

● Spectrum Analyzer
● I/Q Analyzer
● Analog Demodulation
● Noise Figure Measurements

● External generator connections............................................................................ 378

● Generator setup files.............................................................................................381
● Calibration mechanism..........................................................................................381
● Normalization........................................................................................................ 382
● Reference trace, reference line and reference level............................................. 383
● Coupling the frequencies...................................................................................... 384
● Displayed information and errors.......................................................................... 386

External generator connections

The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT. GEN.
CONTROL GPIB interface of the FSW supplied with the option.
For more information on configuring interfaces, see Section 12.1, "Remote control
interfaces and protocols", on page 819.

TTL synchronization
In addition, TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde & Schwarz generators
connected via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the
External Generator Control option.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 378

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure
GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the FSW is directly coupled with the
frequency stepping of the generator. For details see "Coupling the frequencies"
on page 384.

In Figure 7-3 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R&S SMA100B generator, for
example.

Signal generator Signal analyzer

rear panel rear panel

BNC Trigger

BNC Blank

Figure 7-3: TTL connection for an R&S SMA100B generator

In Figure 7-4 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R&S SMU generator, for exam-
ple.

R&S SMU rear

Analyzer rear

BNC Blank

BNC Trigger

Figure 7-4: TTL connection for an R&S SMU generator

In Figure 7-5 the TTL connection for an R&S SMW is shown.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 379

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Signal generator Signal analyzer

rear panel rear panel

BNC Trigger

BNC Blank

Figure 7-5: TTL connection for an R&S SMW generator

The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either
transmission or reflection measurements.

Transmission Measurement
This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two-port network. The
external generator is used as a signal source. It is connected to the input connector of
the DUT. The input of the FSW is fed from the output of the DUT. A calibration can be
carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup (e.g. frequency response of
connecting cables).

Figure 7-6: Test setup for transmission measurement

Reflection Measurement
Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection-coefficient mea-
surement bridge.

Figure 7-7: Test setup for reflection measurement

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 380

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Generated signal input

To use the functions of the external generator, an appropriate generator must be con-
nected and configured correctly. In particular, the generator output must be connected
to the RF input of the FSW.

External reference frequency

To enhance measurement accuracy, use a common reference frequency for both the
FSW and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available,
connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the FSW.
Enable usage of the external reference on the FSW via "SETUP" > "Reference" >
"External Reference".
For more information on external references, see Section 11.6, "Reference frequency
settings", on page 781.

Connection errors
If no external generator is connected, if the connection address is not correct, or the
generator is not ready for operation, an error message is displayed (e.g."Ext. Genera-
tor TCPIP Handshake Error!", see "Displayed information and errors" on page 386).

Generator setup files

For each signal generator type to be controlled by the FSW, configure a generator
setup file and store it on the FSW. The setup file defines the frequency and power
ranges supported by the generator, and information required for communication. For
the signal generators listed in the specifications document, default setup files are provi-
ded. If necessary, you can edit or duplicate these files for varying measurement setups
or other instruments.
You can display the existing setup files in an editor in read-only mode directly from the
"External Generator" configuration dialog box. From there, you can edit them and store
them under a different name. Then they are available on the FSW.
(For details see "How to define a new generator setup file" on page 395).

Calibration mechanism
A common measurement setup includes a signal generator, a device under test (DUT),
and a signal and spectrum analyzer. Therefore, it is useful to measure the attenuation
or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal
analyzer in advance. The known level offsets can then be removed from the measure-
ment results to obtain accurate information on the DUT.
Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference
trace is referred to as calibration. Thus, the measurement results from the controlled
external generator - including the inherent distortions - can be used as a reference
trace to calibrate the measurement setup.
The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting
the FSW to the signal generator. The FSW sends a predefined list of frequencies to the
signal generator (see also "Coupling the frequencies" on page 384). The signal gener-
ator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 381

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

list. The FSW measures the signal and determines the level offsets to the expected
values.

Saving calibration results

A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value
pairs (frequency/level), one for each sweep point. The measured offsets can then be
used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results. The calibration data
can also be stored permanently with the instrument settings using the "Save" function
in the toolbar.
The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measure-
ments. The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is
included in the reference dataset.

Normalization
Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available,
subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors,
if necessary. Results are corrected by subtracting the reference trace from the mea-
surement results. This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or
deactivated as required. If normalization is activated, "NOR" is displayed in the channel
bar, next to the indication that an external generator is being used ("Ext.Gen"). The
normalized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line, as <calibration
trace> - <reference trace> = 0.
As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration, the normal-
ized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distor-
tions. Thus, the measured DUT values are very accurate.

Approximate normalization
As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed, the stored refer-
ence trace is longer identical to the new measurement results. However, if the mea-
surement settings do not deviate too much, the measurement results can still be nor-
malized approximately using the stored reference trace. An "APX" label in the channel
bar (instead of "NOR") indicates the approximated normalization.
Approximation is necessary if one or more of the following values deviate from the cali-
bration settings:
● Coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT)
● Reference level, RF attenuation
● Start or stop frequency
● Output level of external generator
● Detector (max. peak, min. peak, sample, etc.)
● Frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits (cor-
responds to a doubling of the span)
Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument
settings are considered automatically. If the span is reduced, a linear interpolation of
the intermediate values is applied. If the span increases, the values at the left or right

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 382

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop frequency.
The reference dataset is extended by constant values.
Thus, you can change various instrument settings without giving up normalization. The
necessity to carry out a new normalization is reduced to a minimum.

The normalized trace in the display

The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram, by default at
the top of the diagram (= 100% of the window height). It is indicated by a red line
labeled "NOR", followed by the current reference value. However, it can be shifted ver-
tically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT (see also "Shifting
the reference line (and normalized trace)" on page 384).

Restoring the calibration settings

If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the
calibration was performed (indicated by the "APX" or no label next to "Ext.TG" in the
channel bar), you can restore the calibration settings, which are stored with the refer-
ence dataset on the FSW.

Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor

The (inverse) normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for
use in other FSW applications that do not support external generator control.
The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file
with the specified name and the suffix .trd under c:\r_s\instr\trd. The fre-
quency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency.
Transducer factors are useful, for example, to determine the effects of a particular
device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement
which includes this component.
For an example, see "How to remove the effects of a particular component from mea-
surement results using calibration" on page 397.

Note that the normalized measurement data is stored, not the original reference trace.
Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any
settings, the transducer factor is 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the normal-
ized trace).

Reference trace, reference line and reference level

Reference trace
The calibration results are stored internally on the FSW as a reference trace. For each
measured sweep point, the offset to the expected values is determined. If normaliza-
tion is activated, the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current mea-
surement results to compensate for the inherent distortions.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 383

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Reference line
The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the
"External Generator" > "Source Calibration" settings. It is similar to the Reference
Level defined in the "Amplitude" settings. However, as opposed to the reference level,
this reference line only affects the y-axis scaling in the diagram. It has no effect on the
expected input power level or the hardware settings.
The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y-axis, just as the refer-
ence level does.
The normalized reference trace (0 dB directly after calibration) is displayed on this ref-
erence line, indicated by a red line in the diagram. By default, the reference line is dis-
played at the top of the diagram. If you shift the reference line, the normalized trace is
shifted, as well.

Shifting the reference line (and normalized trace)

You can shift the reference line - and thus the normalized trace - in the result display by
changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value.
If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement, this effect can be
reflected in the result display on the FSW. To reflect a power offset in the measurement
trace, change the Reference Value.
For a detailed example, see Section 7.2.4.5, "Measurement example: calibration with
an external generator", on page 398.

Coupling the frequencies

As described in "Normalization" on page 382, normalized measurement results are
very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration. Although
approximate normalization is possible, it is important to consider the required frequen-
cies for calibration in advance. The frequencies and levels supported by the connected
signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration.
Frequency coupling means that the generator frequency and the frequency of the FSW
are the same.
● Manual coupling: a single frequency is defined
● Automatic coupling: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep
point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the FSW. The RF fre-
quency range covers the currently defined span of the FSW (unless limited by the
range of the signal generator).

Automatic coupling
If automatic coupling is used, the output frequency of the generator (source frequency)
is calculated as follows:

Numerator
FGenerator  FAnalyzer   FOffset
Deno min ator
Equation 7-1: Output frequency of the generator

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 384

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Where:
FGenerator = output frequency of the generator

FAnalyzer = current frequency at the RF input of the FSW

Numerator = multiplication factor for FAnalyzer

Denominator = division factor for FAnalyzer

FOffset = frequency offset for FAnalyzer, for example for frequency-converting measure-
ments or harmonics measurements
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is
0 Hz. Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar (see
also "Displayed information and errors" on page 386).

Swept frequency range

The FAnalyzer values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with
the stop frequency defined in the "Frequency" settings of the FSW. The resulting out-
put frequencies (Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop) are displayed in
"External Generator" > "Measurement Configuration" for reference.
If the resulting frequency range exceeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator, an
error message is displayed (see "Displayed information and errors" on page 386). The
Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply
with the range limits.

The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the FSW. How-
ever, no input is received from the generator outside the generator's defined limits.

TTL synchronization
Some Rohde & Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec-
ted via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the Exter-
nal Generator Control option.
When pure GPIB connections are used between the FSW and the signal generator, the
FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB. Only
when the setting procedure is finished, the FSW can measure the next sweep point.
For generators with a TTL interface, the FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set
to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep. Then the FSW starts the
sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the FSW and the generator
using the TTL handshake line "TRIGGER". The FSW can only measure a value when
the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the "BLANK" signal.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because
the frequency stepping of the FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of
the generator.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 385

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Reverse sweep
The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc-
tion. To do so, define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu-
ration. (Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation, thus a
negative frequency is not possible.)

Example: Example for reverse sweep

FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -300 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 200 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 100 MHz

If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener-
ator frequency, a message is displayed in the status bar ("Reverse Sweep via min. Ext.
Generator Frequency!").

Example: Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency

FAnalyzerStart= 100 MHz
FAnalyzerStop = 200 MHz
FOffset = -150 MHz
Fmin = 20 MHz
Numerator = Denominator = 1
→FGeneratorStart = 50 MHz
→FGeneratorStop = 50 MHz via Fmin

Displayed information and errors

Channel bar
If external generator control is active, some additional information is displayed in the
channel bar.

Label Description

EXT TG: <source power> External generator active; signal sent with <source power> level

LVL Power Offset (see "Source Offset" on page 389

FRQ Frequency Offset (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denomi-

nator/Offset)" on page 389

NOR Normalization on;

No difference between reference setting and measurement

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 386

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Label Description

APX (approximation) Normalization on;

Deviation from the reference setting occurs

- Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet

Error and status messages

The following status and error messages can occur during external generator control.

Message Description

"Ext. Generator GPIB Handshake Error!" / Connection to the generator is not possible, e.g. due to a
cable damage or loose connection or wrong address.
"Ext. Generator TCPIP Handshake Error!" /
"Ext. Generator TTL Handshake Error!"

"Ext. Generator Limits Exceeded!" The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator
were exceeded.

"Reverse Sweep via min. Ext. Generator Fre- Reverse sweep is performed; frequencies are reduced to
quency!" the minimum frequency, then increased again; see
"Reverse sweep" on page 386.

"Ext. Generator File Syntax Error!" Syntax error in the generator setup file (see "Generator
setup files" on page 381

"Ext. Generator Command Error!" Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file
(see "Generator setup files" on page 381

"Ext. Generator Visa Error!" Error with Visa driver provided with installation (very
unlikely)

Overloading
At a reference level of -10 dBm and at an external generator output level of the same
value, the FSW operates without overrange reserve. That means the FSW is in danger
of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference
line. In this case, either the message "RF OVLD" for overload or "OVLD" for exceeded
display range (clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border = overrange) is dis-
played in the status line.
Overloading can be avoided as follows:
● Reducing the output level of the external generator ("Source Power" on page 389
in "External Generator > Measurement Configuration")
● Increasing the reference level (Reference Level in the "Amplitude" menu)

7.2.4.3 External generator control settings

Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config"

The "External Generator" settings are available if the FSW External Generator Control
option is installed. For each measurement channel, you can configure one external
generator. To switch between different configurations, define multiple measurement
channels.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 387

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

For more information on external generator control, see Section 7.2.4.2, "Basics on
external generator control", on page 378.
● Measurement settings...........................................................................................388
● Interface configuration settings............................................................................. 390
● Source calibration functions.................................................................................. 392

Measurement settings
Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Measurement Configura-
tion" tab

Source State............................................................................................................... 388

Source Power..............................................................................................................389
Source Offset.............................................................................................................. 389
Source Frequency Coupling........................................................................................389
(Manual) Source Frequency........................................................................................389
(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)............................... 389
Result Frequency Start............................................................................................... 390
Result Frequency Stop................................................................................................390

Source State
Activates or deactivates control of an external generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe] on page 1172

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 388

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Source Power
The output power of the external generator. The default output power is -20 dBm. The
range is specified in the specifications document.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:POWer[:LEVel] on page 1171

Source Offset
Constant level offset for the external generator. Values from -200 dB to +200 dB in 1
dB steps are allowed. The default setting is 0 dB. Offsets are indicated by the "LVL"
label in the channel bar (see also "Displayed information and errors" on page 386).
Using this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gen-
erator can be considered. This is useful, for example, for the displayed output power
values on screen or during data entry. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier, while nega-
tive offsets apply to an attenuator after the external generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 1172

Source Frequency Coupling

Defines the frequency coupling mode between the FSW and the generator.
For more information on coupling frequencies, see "Coupling the frequencies"
on page 384.
"Auto" Default setting: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each
sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the
FSW (see "(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/
Offset)" on page 389). The RF frequency range covers the currently
defined span of the FSW (unless limited by the range of the signal
generator).
"Manual" The generator uses a single fixed frequency, defined by (Manual)
Source Frequency which is displayed when you select "Manual" cou-
pling.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:COUPling[:STATe] on page 1169

(Manual) Source Frequency

Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency on page 1169

(Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)

With automatic frequency coupling, a series of frequencies is defined (one for each
sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the FSW.
However, the frequency used by the generator can differ from the input from the FSW.
The RF frequency can be multiplied by a specified factor, or a frequency offset can be
added, or both.
Note: The input for the generator frequency is not validated, i.e. you can enter any val-
ues. However, if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded, an error

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 389

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

message is displayed on the FSW. The values for Result Frequency Start and Result
Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits.
The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator. The default setting is
0 Hz. Offsets <> 0 Hz are indicated by the "FRQ" label in the channel bar. Negative
offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps.
For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps, see "Coupling the
frequencies" on page 384. For more information on error messages and the channel
bar, see "Displayed information and errors" on page 386.
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator
on page 1170
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator on page 1170
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 1171

Result Frequency Start

For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the FSW.

Result Frequency Stop

For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config-
ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the FSW.

Interface configuration settings

Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Interface Configuration" tab

For more information on configuring interfaces, see Section 12.1, "Remote control
interfaces and protocols", on page 819.
Generator Type........................................................................................................... 391
Interface...................................................................................................................... 391
TTL Handshake...........................................................................................................391
GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name...................................................... 391
Reference....................................................................................................................391

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 390

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Edit Generator Setup File............................................................................................392

Frequency Min/ Frequency Max..................................................................................392
Level Min/ Level Max.................................................................................................. 392

Generator Type
Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use.
For an overview of supported generators, see the specifications document. For infor-
mation on generator setup files, see "Generator setup files" on page 381.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:TYPE on page 1174

Interface
Type of interface connection used.
For details on which signal generators support which interfaces, see the documenta-
tion of the corresponding signal generator.
● GPIB
● TCP/IP
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:INTerface on page 1173

TTL Handshake
If available for the specified generator type, this option activates TTL synchronization
via handshake.
Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates, because
the frequency stepping of the FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of
the generator.
For more information on TTL synchronization, see "TTL synchronization" on page 385.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:LINK on page 1173

GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name

For LAN connections: TCP/IP address of the signal generator
For GPIB connections: GPIB address of the signal generator.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess on page 1173
SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess
on page 1174

Reference
Selects the internal FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the FSW
with the generator (default: internal).
Remote command:
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce] on page 1172

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 391

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Edit Generator Setup File

Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read-only mode in
an editor.
Although the existing setup files are displayed in read-only mode in the editor, they can
be saved under a different name (using "File > SaveAs").
Be careful, however, to adhere to the required syntax and commands. Errors are only
detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see also "Displayed
information and errors" on page 386).
For details, see "Generator setup files" on page 381.

Frequency Min/ Frequency Max

For reference only: Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator.

Level Min/ Level Max

For reference only: Lower and upper power limit for the generator.

Source calibration functions

Access: [INPUT/OUPUT] > "External Generator Config" > "Source Calibration" tab
The calibration functions of the external generator are available only if external genera-
tor control is active (see "Source State" on page 388).

Calibrate Transmission................................................................................................393
Calibrate Reflection Short........................................................................................... 393
Calibrate Reflection Open........................................................................................... 393
Normalization state..................................................................................................... 393

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 392

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Recall Cal. Settings.....................................................................................................393

Save as Trd Factor......................................................................................................394
Reference Position......................................................................................................394
Reference Value..........................................................................................................394

Calibrate Transmission
Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace. This trace is
used to calculate the difference for the normalized values.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1176

Calibrate Reflection Short

Starts a short-circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for
calibration.
If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration trace is
calculated by averaging the two measurements. The order of the two calibration mea-
surements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1176
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 1176
Starts the sweep for short-circuit calibration.

Calibrate Reflection Open

Starts an open-circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for
calibration.
If both reflection-type calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the refer-
ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements. The order of the two cali-
bration measurements is irrelevant.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:METHod on page 1176
Selects the reflection method.
[SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] on page 1176
Starts the sweep for open-circuit calibration.

Normalization state
Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off. This function is only
available if the memory contains a reference trace, that is, after a calibration has been
performed.
For details on normalization, see "Normalization" on page 382.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] on page 1177

Recall Cal. Settings

Restores the settings that were used during source calibration. This can be useful if
instrument settings were changed after calibration (e.g. center frequency, frequency
deviation, reference level, etc.).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 393

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:RECall on page 1177

Save as Trd Factor

Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor. The trace
data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified
name and the suffix .trd under
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd. The fre-
quency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency.
The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the "Transducer" func-
tion in the [Setup] menu.
For more information on transducers, see Section 11.4.1, "Basics on transducer fac-
tors", on page 756.
Note: Note that the normalized measurement data is used, not the reference trace!
Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any
settings, the transducer factor is 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the normal-
ized trace).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:GENerate on page 1177

Reference Position
Defines the position of the reference line in percent of the total y-axis range.
The top of the diagram is 100%, the bottom is 0%. By default, the 0 dB line is displayed
at the top of the diagram (100%).
This setting is only available if normalization is on (see "Normalization state"
on page 393).
The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to
the Reference Level defined in the "Amplitude" settings. However, this reference line
only affects the y-axis scaling in the diagram, it has no effect on the expected input
power level or the hardware settings.
The normalized trace (0 dB directly after calibration) is displayed on this reference line,
indicated by a red line in the diagram. If you shift the reference line, the normalized
trace is shifted, as well.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
on page 1219

Reference Value
Defines an offset for the position of the reference line.
This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace, simi-
lar to the Shifting the Display (Offset) defined in the "Amplitude" settings shifts the ref-
erence level in the display.
Shifting the normalized trace is useful, for example, to reflect an attenuation or gain
caused by the measured DUT. If you then zoom into the diagram around the normal-
ized trace, the measured trace still remains fully visible.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 394

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
on page 1175

7.2.4.4 How to work with external generator control

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to work with the optional
external generator control.

For remote operation, see "Programming example for external generator control"
on page 1178.

● How to configure an external generator connection via GPIB.............................. 395

● How to define a new generator setup file..............................................................395
● How to calibrate a measurement setup using an external generator....................396
● How to remove the effects of a particular component from measurement results
using calibration.................................................................................................... 397
● How to compensate for additional gain or attenuation after calibration................ 397

How to configure an external generator connection via GPIB

1. Connect the signal generator's GPIB interface connector to the "Ext. Gen.Control
GPIB" connector on the rear panel of the FSW.

2. If the signal generator supports TTL synchronization, connect the signal generator
to the optional"Aux.Control" port.

3. Press [INPUT/OUTPUT] and select "External Generator Config".

4. In the "Interface Configuration" subtab, select the "Generator Type" connected to

the FSW.
If the required generator type is not available, define a new setup file as described
in "How to define a new generator setup file" on page 395.

5. Select the type of interface and the address used to connect the generator to the
FSW.

6. If the generator supports "TTL Synchronization", activate this function.

How to define a new generator setup file

1. Press [INPUT/OUTPUT] and select "External Generator Config".

2. In the "Interface Configuration" subtab, select a generator type that has similar
characteristics (frequency and power ranges).

3. Select "Edit Generator Setup File".

The configuration file for the selected generator type is displayed (read-only) in an
editor.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 395

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

4. Edit the configuration values according to your generator. Be sure not to change
the syntax of the file - only change the values of the parameters.
Errors are only detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator (see
also "Displayed information and errors" on page 386).

5. Save the file under a different name with the extension .gen:
a) In the editor, select "File > SaveAs".
b) Select "Save as type: All Files (*.*)".
c) Specify a name with the extension .gen.

6. In the FSW firmware, close the "External Generator Config" dialog and re-open it.
Now you can select the new generator type from the selection list on the "Interface
Configuration" tab.

How to calibrate a measurement setup using an external generator

1. Connect the signal generator output to the "RF input" connector of the FSW.

2. If the measurement setup does not require the full span of the FSW, change the
"Frequency Start" and "Frequency Stop" values ([FREQ] > "Frequency Config").

3. Press [INPUT/OUTPUT] and select "External Generator Config".

4. In the "Interface Configuration" subtab, select "Reference: External" to synchronize

the analyzer with the generator.

5. Switch to the "Measurement Configuration" subtab.

6. Set the "Source State" to "On".

7. Define the generator output level as the "Source Power".

8. Optionally, to define a constant level offset for the external generator, define a
"Source Offset".

9. The default frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 1001 values, divided in
equidistant frequencies between the FSW's start and stop frequency. Usually, this
automatic coupling is correct. Check the "Result Frequency Start" and "Result Fre-
quency Stop" values to make sure that the required measurement span is covered.
If necessary, change the frequency settings on the FSW ([FREQ] > "Frequency
Config"), or use a different generator type.

10. Switch to the "Source Calibration" subtab.

11. Select the "Source Calibration Type": "Transmission" to perform a calibration

sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup.

12. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 396

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

13. Optionally, shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing
the "Reference": "Position".
The measurement setup is now calibrated. Subsequent measurement results are
normalized, so that any unwanted effects from the cables and connectors are
removed.

How to remove the effects of a particular component from measurement results

using calibration

1. Set up the measurement, including the component, and perform a calibration as

described in "How to calibrate a measurement setup using an external generator"
on page 396.

2. After setting "Source Calibration Normalize": "On", select "Save as Trd Factor" to
store the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor.

3. If necessary, switch to another measurement channel for a different FSW applica-

tion.

4. Press [Setup], then select "Transducer".

5. Select the stored transducer in the list of available transducers and select the
"Active" setting for it.

6. Perform any measurement with the setup that contains the calibrated component.
The measurement results do not include the effects from the component.

How to compensate for additional gain or attenuation after calibration

If a gain or an attenuation is inserted in the measurement after calibration, this effect
can be reflected in the display of the normalized trace on the FSW. Thus, the mea-
sured trace and the normalized trace are not so far apart in the display, so that you can
zoom into the normalized trace without cropping the measurement trace.

Prerequisite: a calibration has been performed for the original measurement setup,
except for the component causing an additional gain or attenuation (as described in
"How to calibrate a measurement setup using an external generator" on page 396)
1. Insert the additional component in the calibrated measurement setup and perform
a new measurement.

2. Press [INPUT/OUTPUT] and select "External Generator Config".

3. Switch to the "Source Calibration" subtab.

4. With active normalization, set the "Reference": "Value" to the same value as the
gain or attenuation the inserted component causes.

5. Optionally, shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing
the "Reference": "Position".
The normalized reference trace moves to the position of the measured trace.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 397

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

6. Optionally, zoom into the measured trace by changing the y-axis scaling (or the
range: "AMPT > Scale Config > Range").
The measured trace is still fully visible, and the absolute values are still valid.

7.2.4.5 Measurement example: calibration with an external generator

The following measurement example demonstrates the most common functions using
an external generator. This example requires the External Generator Control option.
The example assumes an SMW100A generator is connected to the FSW. A band elim-
ination filter is the device under test. After calibration, an additional attenuator is inser-
ted between the DUT and the FSW.
The following procedures are described:
● "Calibrating the measurement setup" on page 398
● "Measuring the effects of the DUT" on page 400
● "Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration" on page 402

Calibrating the measurement setup

1. Connect the signal generator's GPIB interface connector to the [Ext. Gen.Control
GPIB] connector on the rear panel of the FSW.

2. Connect the signal generator output to the [RF input] connector of the FSW.

3. Adapt the measurement range of the FSW to the filter to be tested. In this mea-
surement, define the following settings:
a) Press [FREQ], select "Frequency Config" and enter "Frequency Start":
100 MHz.
b) Enter "Frequency Stop": 300 MHz

4. Press [INPUT/OUTPUT] and select "External Generator Config".

5. In the "Interface Configuration" sub-tab, select "Generator Type":"SMW06".

6. Select "Reference: External" to synchronize the analyzer with the generator.

7. Switch to the "Measurement Configuration" sub-tab.

8. Set the "Source State" to "On".

9. Define the generator output level as the "Source Power": -20 dBm.

10. Set the "Coupling State" to "Auto".

The "Result Frequency Start" value for the generator is indicated as 100.0 MHz.
The "Result Frequency Stop" value is indicated as 300.0 MHz.

11. Switch to the "Source Calibration" sub-tab.

12. Select the "Source Calibration Type": "Transmission" to perform a calibration

sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 398

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-8: Measurement results from generator, analyzer and connecting cables

13. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On" to set the measurement results for the
current setup to 0, thus eliminating all effects from the generator, the analyzer and
the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination
filter.
The reference line is displayed at 0 dB at the top of the diagram (100%).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 399

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-9: Normalized measurement results after calibration

Measuring the effects of the DUT

After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter (our DUT) in the measurement
setup.
1. Connect the signal generator output to the band elimination filter.

2. Connect the band elimination filter output to the [RF input] connector of the FSW.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 400

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-10: Band elimination filter results

3. Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by
changing the position of the reference point 0.0 dB to 50 %.
In the "Source Calibration" tab, enter "Position": 50 %.
At the same time, the range of the displayed y-axis moves from [-100.0 dB to 0 dB]
to [-50 dB to +50 dB].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 401

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-11: Reference line shifted to middle of diagram (50%)

Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration

After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the FSW.
This may be necessary, for example, to protect the analyzer's input connector. Never-
theless, we are only interested in the effects of the DUT, not those of the additional pro-
tective attenuator. Thus, we will compensate these effects in the result display on the
FSW by moving the reference line.
1. Connect a 3 dB attenuator between the band elimination filter output and the [RF
input] connector on the FSW.
The measurement results are now 3 dB lower.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 402

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-12: Measurement results with additional attenuator

2. In the "Source Calibration" tab, enter "Reference Value": -3 dB.

The reference line is shifted down by 3 dB so th at the measurement trace is dis-
played on the reference line again.
At the same time, the scaling of the y-axis is changed: -3dB are now shown at 50%
of the diagram; the range is [-53 dB to +47 dB].

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 403

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-13: Reference line with an offset of -3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram (50%)

3. After the reference trace has been shifted, you can zoom into the measured trace
to determine the offsets to the reference line, which represent the effects of the
band elimination filter in the measurement setup.
Change the y-axis scaling to 1 dB/div (or the range to 10 dB).
a) Press [AMPT], then select "Scale Config" > "Range".
b) Enter 10 dB.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 404

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-14: Reference line with measurement results using larger scale

7.2.5 Probes

The FSW can also analyze data from a connected probe.

7.2.5.1 Using probes

Probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all
sorts of devices to be tested, without interfering with the signal. The FSW base unit
and some (optional) applications support input from probes. For information on which
probes are supported, see the FSW specifications document.

Probe connectors
Probes can be connected to the following connectors on the FSW:
● BASEBAND INPUT connectors, if the optional "Analog Baseband" interface is
installed;
Allows you to perform I/Q analysis or frequency sweeps on data from all active
probes up to a frequency of 5 GHz. The power supply for the probe is integrated in
the connector.
Supported only by applications that can process I/Q data.
● "RF Input" connector using an R&S RT-ZA9 adapter;
Allows you to perform I/Q analysis or frequency sweeps on data from active modu-
lar probes directly on the RF input up to the maximum frequency of the probe and
analyzer. Does not require the optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Supported by all FSW applications, in particular the Spectrum application.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 405

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The R&S RT-ZA9 provides an interface between the probe's BNC socket and the
analyzer's N-socket. The USB connection provides the necessary supply voltages
for the probe.

Active probes
When using active probes from the R&S RT family, consider the following:
● Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary
interface to the instrument.
● The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument, no adjustment is
required.
● Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth high.
● Observe the operating voltage range.

Microbutton action
You can define an action to be performed by the FSW when the probe's microbutton (if
available) is pressed. Currently, a single data acquisition via the probe can be per-
formed simply by pressing the microbutton.

Analog baseband probes

Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND
INPUT connectors on the front panel of the FSW. The detected information on the
probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box, individually for each
connector.

To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the
FSW, use the [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe? remote control command.

Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications
that support I/Q data processing and the optional "Analog Baseband" interface, such
as the I/Q Analyzer or one of the optional applications.
However, probes can also provide RF input to the FSW via the BASEBAND INPUT I
connector. In this case, the input is redirected to the RF input path. Then the probe
data can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application, allowing you to perform mea-
surements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe.
For details see the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
As opposed to common RF input processing, a transducer is activated before the com-
mon process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal.

Impedance and attenuation

The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe's specific
attenuation.
For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path, the attenuation is compensated by
the transducer.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 406

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The reference level is adjusted automatically.

For analog baseband input, the attenuation is compensated without a transducer. In
this case, higher levels are available for the full scale level.
A fixed impedance of 50 Ω is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power
levels.

Additional information
An application note discussing differential measurements with spectrum analyzers is
available from the Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF84: Differential measurements with Spectrum Analyzers and Probes

Common mode offset (for differential probes)

Common mode offset compensation is available for R&S®RT-ZD10/20/30 probes with
serial number ≥ 200 000. It can compensate a common DC voltage applied to both
input sockets (referenced to the ground socket). This is particularly helpful for mea-
surements on differential signals with high common mode levels, for example, current
measurements using a shunt resistor.

Figure 7-15: Common mode (CM) offset compensation for a differential measurement

If the input signals fit into the operating voltage window of the R&S®RT-ZD10/20/30, it
is not necessary to set a common mode offset compensation.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 407

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset

The R&S®RT-ZD10/20/30 probe measures only differential input signals. Common
mode signals are suppressed by the probe. Therefore, the common mode offset com-
pensation is not directly visible in the result display. An incorrect common mode offset
compensation can lead to unwanted clipping effects. Measuring the common mode
input voltage using the R&S ProbeMeter is a convenient way to detect breaches of the
operating voltage window.
For more information on common mode offset see the R&S®RT-ZD10/20/30 User Man-
ual.

RF probes
Generally, you can perform frequency sweeps on active probes connected to the
BASEBAND INPUT connectors by redirecting the input to the RF Input path (see "Ana-
log baseband probes" on page 406). However, this measurement setup is restricted to
a maximum frequency of 5 GHz by the BASEBAND INPUT connectors. Furthermore,
this setup is restricted to applications that can process I/Q data.
Connecting probes directly to the RF Input connector allows you to make use of the
maximum frequency range provided by the probe and the FSW, which can be much
higher than 5 GHz.
Furthermore, input from probes at the RF Input connector can be analyzed in all FSW
applications, including applications that do not process I/Q data, and do not support the
optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Only active modular probes can be connected to the RF Input connector via the
optional R&S RT-ZA9 adapter.

To connect an active probe to the RF Input

1. Connect the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter to the RF Input connector on the FSW.

2. Connect the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter's USB cable to a USB connector on the FSW.

3. Connect the probe to the adapter.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 408

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

4. In the "Input source" settings, select the "Input connector": "RF Probe".
Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the FSW. The detected
information on the probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box.

To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the
FSW, use the [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:STATe? remote control command.

Impedance and attenuation

The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe's specific
attenuation. For RF probes, the attenuation is compensated using a pre-defined "Probe
on RF Input" transducer factor. This special transducer factor is automatically activated
before the common RF data processing when you select "RF probe" as the input con-
nector. The reference level is adjusted automatically.
A fixed impedance of 50 Ω is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power
levels.

Multimode function and offset compensation for modular RF probes

The R&S RT-ZM probe family features the MultiMode function which allows you to
switch between single-ended, differential, and common mode measurements without
reconnecting or resoldering the probe.
Four different input voltages can be measured with the MultiMode feature:
● P-Mode: (pos.) Single-ended input voltage (Vp)
Voltage between the positive input terminal and ground
● N-Mode: (neg.) Single-ended input voltage (Vn)
Voltage between the negative input terminal and ground
● DM-Mode: Differential mode input voltage (Vdm)
Voltage between the positive and negative input terminal

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 409

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

● CM-Mode: Common mode input voltage (Vcm)

Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground

The FSW supports all probe modes.

The mode is configured in the Section 7.2.5.2, "Probe settings", on page 410.

Offset compensation
The R&S RT-ZM probes feature a comprehensive offset compensation function. The
compensation of DC components directly at the probe tip even in front of the active
probe amplifier is possible with an extremely wide compensation range of ±16 V (±24 V
for P and N modes).
The offset compensation feature is available for every MultiMode setting:

MultiMode Offset compensation Offset compen- Application

setting sation range

DM-Mode Differential DC voltage ±16 V Probing single-ended signals, e.g. power

rails with high DC component and small AC
signal.

CM-Mode Common mode DC volt- ±16 V Measurements of signals with high common
age mode levels, e.g. current measurements
with a shunt resistor.

P-Mode DC voltage at positive ±24 V Measurement of single-ended AC signals

input terminal with high superimposed DC component at
the positive input terminal.
Note: The maximum voltage difference
between the positive and negative input ter-
minals is 16 V.

N-Mode DC voltage at negative ±24 V Measurement of single ended AC signals

input terminal with high superimposed DC component at
the negative input terminal.
Note: The maximum voltage difference
between the positive and negative input ter-
minals is 16 V.

If the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode and N-
mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.

7.2.5.2 Probe settings

Access: [INPUT / OUTPUT] > "Input Source Config" > "Probes"

Data input for the measurement can be provided by probes if the optional "Analog
Baseband" interface is available or the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter is used.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 410

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

For each possible probe connector (Baseband Input I, Baseband Input Q, RF), the
detected type of probe, if any, is displayed.
For more information on using probes with an FSW, see Section 7.2.5.1, "Using
probes", on page 405.
For general information on the R&S®RT probes, see the device manuals.
Name...........................................................................................................................411
Serial Number..............................................................................................................411
Part Number................................................................................................................ 411
Type............................................................................................................................ 412
Mode........................................................................................................................... 412
Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /................................. 412
Attenuation.................................................................................................................. 412
Microbutton Action...................................................................................................... 413

Name
Probe name
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NAME? on page 1165

Serial Number
Serial number of the probe
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber? on page 1163

Part Number
Rohde & Schwarz part number

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 411

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber? on page 1162

Type
Type of probe:
● Single-ended
● Differential
● Active Modular
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:TYPE? on page 1168

Mode
Mode for multi-mode modular probes. Determines which voltage is measured.
"DM-mode" Voltage between the positive and negative input terminal
"CM-mode" Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs.
ground
"P-mode" Voltage between the positive input terminal and ground
"N-mode" Voltage between the negative input terminal and ground
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMODe on page 1166

Common Mode Offset / Diff. Mode Offset / P Offset / N Offset /

Sets the offset for the probe, depending on the used mode (CM and DM mode both
use the "Common Mode Offset"). The setting is only available if a differential (R&S RT-
ZD) or modular (R&S RT-ZM) probe is connected to the FSW.
If the probe is disconnected, the offset of the probe is reset to 0.0 V.
Note: If the offset for DM-mode or CM-mode is changed, the offsets for the P-mode
and N-mode are adapted accordingly, and vice versa.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:CMOFfset on page 1164
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:DMOFfset on page 1164
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:NMOFfset on page 1166
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:PMOFfset on page 1167

Attenuation
Defines the attenuation applied to the input at the probe. This setting is only available
for modular probes.
"10:1" Attenuation by 20 dB
"2:1" Attenuation by 6 dB
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio on page 1163

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 412

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Microbutton Action
Active Rohde & Schwarz probes (except for R&S RT-ZS10E) have a configurable
microbutton on the probe head. By pressing this button, you can perform an action on
the instrument directly from the probe.
Select the action that you want to start from the probe:
"Run Single" Starts one data acquisition.
"No Action" Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut-
ton.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:MODE on page 1165

7.2.6 Optional external mixers

If the FSW External Mixer option is installed, an external mixer can be connected to the
FSW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to measure is
not taken from the RF input connector, but from the "Ext Mixer" connector(s).
For an active external frontend, external mixers are not available. See "External Fron-
tend Connection State" on page 453.
● Basics on external mixers..................................................................................... 413
● External mixer settings..........................................................................................425
● How to work with external mixers..........................................................................436
● Measurement examples: using an external mixer.................................................439

7.2.6.1 Basics on external mixers

Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used with external mixers
is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings.
● Frequency ranges................................................................................................. 413
● Two-port and three-port mixers............................................................................. 414
● Bias current........................................................................................................... 415
● Conversion loss tables.......................................................................................... 416
● External mixers and large bandwidth extension options....................................... 418
● Automatic signal identification...............................................................................420

Frequency ranges
In a common spectrum analyzer, rather than providing one large (and thus inaccurate)
filter, or providing several filters to cover the required frequency range of the input sig-
nal (at a high cost), a single, very accurate filter is used. Therefore, the input signal
must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter. This is done
by a mixer, which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help
of the local oscillator (LO). The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency (IF).
The local oscillator can be tuned within the supported frequency range of the input sig-
nal.
In order to extend the supported frequency range of the input signal, an external mixer
can be used. In this case, the LO frequency is output to the external mixer, where it is

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 413

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

mixed with the RF input from the original input signal. In addition, the harmonics of the
LO are mixed with the input signal, and converted to new intermediate frequencies.
Thus, a wider range of frequencies can be obtained. The IF from the external mixer is
then returned to the spectrum analyzer.
The frequency of the input signal can be expressed as a function of the LO frequency
and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows:
fin = n * fLO + fIF

Where:
fin: Frequency of input signal

n: Order of harmonic used for conversion

fLO: Frequency of first LO: 7.65 GHz to 17.45 GHz

fIF: Intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW, span and
optional bandwidth extensions)
Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic
must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined bands with the
appropriate harmonic order setting are provided. By default, the lowest harmonic order
is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band.
For the "USER" band, the order of harmonic is defined by the user. The order of har-
monic can be between 2 and 128, the lowest usable frequency being 16.88 GHz.
The frequency ranges for pre-defined bands are described in Table 13-4.

Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the [PRESET]
function. A "Preset band" function allows you to restore the original band settings.

Extending predefined ranges

In some cases, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre-
quency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. How-
ever, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the
defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values ("RF Overrange"
option).

Additional ranges
If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one
harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range
can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the har-
monic defined for the first range, and at a specified frequency in the overlapping range
("handover frequency"), switches to the harmonic for the second range.
Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type.

Two-port and three-port mixers

External mixers are connected to the FSW at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN connectors.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 414

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

When using three-port mixers, the LO signal output from the FSW and the IF input
from the mixer are transmitted on separate connectors, whereas for two-port mixers,
both signals are exchanged via the same connector (LO OUT/IF IN). Because of the
diplexer contained in the FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used
to feed the LO signal to the mixer.

For measurements with a bandwidth larger than 2 GHz and an external mixer, only 3-
port mixers are supported.
For more information see "External mixers and large bandwidth extension options"
on page 418.

Two-port mixer Three-port mixer

In both cases, the nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm.

Bias current
Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line.
This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such
a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS" function using the D/A converter of the FSW.
The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short-circuit current. The current is
defined in the "Bias Settings" or set to the value of the conversion loss table.
See "Bias Value" on page 431 and "Bias" on page 435.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 415

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-16: Bias circuit of the FSW

The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range –2.0 V
to +2.0 V. An open-circuit voltage Ubias of –0.5 V to +0.5 V is obtained accordingly at
the output of the voltage divider. A short-circuit current of Ishort = U0 / 200 Ω = 10 mA to
+10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider. In order to use
biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the
conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency. Therefore, it makes no
difference whether the setting is performed by an open-circuit voltage or by a short-cir-
cuit current. A DC return path is ensured via the 66 Ω resistor, which is an advantage
in some mixers.

Conversion loss tables

Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for
conversion loss at certain frequencies. Correction values for frequencies between the
reference values are obtained by interpolation. Linear interpolation is performed if the
table contains only two values. If it contains more than two reference values, spline
interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency range covered by the table the con-
version loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value
(see Figure 7-17).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 416

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-17: Conversion loss outside the band's frequency range

Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can
be imported to the FSW.
Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
are configured and managed in the "Conversion loss Table Settings" tab of the "Exter-
nal Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
See "Managing conversion loss tables" on page 431 for more information about con-
version loss tables.
When using external mixers with optional bandwidth extensions larger than 512 MHz,
special conversion loss tables are required, see "External mixers and large bandwidth
extension options" on page 418.

Importing CVL tables

The conversion loss table to be used for a particular measurement range is also
defined in the "External Mixer Configuration" dialog box.
The frequency range that the cvl table must cover depends on the used IF, which var-
ies depending on the instrument and installed bandwidth extension options. Thus,
external mixers from Rohde & Schwarz provide multiple conversion loss table files.
When you select a storage path containing cvl files, or a particular cvl file from a
Rohde & Schwarz mixer for import, all available files are copied to the
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory on the FSW. Provided .acl files are renamed
according to the following syntax:
<serial_number>_<harmonic_order>_<IF>.acl,
e.g. 12345_2_1330M.acl
To select a conversion loss table for use in a measurement, you merely have to select
the serial number for the external mixer in use. The FSW automatically selects the cor-
rect cvl file for the current IF. As an alternative, you can also select a user-defined con-
version loss table (.acl file).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 417

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory, the FSW firm-
ware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use a
user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\backup
directory.

A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies
with the settings. In particular, the following is checked:
● The assigned band name
● The harmonic order
● The mixer type
● The table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range
for the band

Reference level
The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss
value. Thus, the reference level can be adjusted for each range according to the used
conversion loss table or average conversion loss value. If a conversion loss value is
used which exceeds the maximum reference level, the reference level is adjusted to
the maximum value permitted by the firmware.

External mixers and large bandwidth extension options

If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B1200/-B2001/-B2000 are active, exter-
nal mixers with a bandwidth up to 2 GHz are supported. For information on which mix-
ers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the FSW specifications document.
Two-port mixers are not supported.
If the bandwidth extension option R&S FSW-B5000 is active, some external (three-
port) mixers with a bandwidth up to 5 GHz are supported. For information on which
mixers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the FSW specifications docu-
ment. Two-port mixers are not supported. Instrument models 1312.8000Kxx require an
additional hardware option,R&S FSW-U21 or R&S FSW-U85.
If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B4001/B6001/B8001 are active, external
mixers are supported for an analysis bandwidth up to 4 GHz. For information on which
mixers are supported for these bandwidth options, see the FSW specifications docu-
ment.
Depending on the installed and active bandwidth extension options and used measure-
ment bandwidth, special conversion loss tables are required.
Table 7-1: Required conversion loss tables depending on measurement bandwidth

BW extension option Used meas bandwidth Required conversion loss table format

B1200/B2001 <=512 MHz *.ACL

>512 MHz *_B1200_B2001.B2G

B2000 (active) <=2 GHz *_B2000.B2G

B5000 (active) <=4.4 GHz *_B5000_2G8.B5G

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 418

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

BW extension option Used meas bandwidth Required conversion loss table format

>4.4 GHz *_B5000_3G5.B5G

B4001/B6001/B8001 <=80 MHz *.ACL

80 MHz< bw <=4 GHz *_B5000_2G8.B5G

While the common .acl files can be used, data acquisition with larger bandwidths
using such conversion loss tables leads to substantial inaccuracy. Using an average
conversion loss for the entire range (instead of a conversion loss table) during data
acquisition with the large bandwidth extension options causes even more inaccuracy.
In both cases, the UNCAL status message indicates that the measurement can have
inaccurate results.
Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) cannot be edited within the FSW
firmware; they can only be imported and deleted.

B2000-specific conversion loss tables

A B2000 conversion loss table consists of 43 magnitude correction values (as opposed
to 1 for .acl files). To each side of the specific frequency, 21 reference values are
defined with an offset of 25 MHz to 1025 MHz. Thus, correction levels are measured
with a spacing of 50 MHz.

Example:
For example, for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz, 43 correction levels are
defined:
● 21 for the frequencies 48.075 GHz, 49.125 GHz, 49.175 GHz, ..., 49.975 GHz
● 1 for the frequency 50 GHz
● 21 for the frequencies 50.025 GHz, 50.075 GHz, 50.125 GHz, ..., 51.025 GHz

B2000-specific conversion loss tables are provided in files according to the following
syntax:
<serial_no.>_MAG_<harmonic>_B2000.b2g

Phase correction tables

In addition to the magnitude correction tables, B2000 phase correction tables with the
same layout are defined in a separate file. Both files are always delivered as a pair by
the manufacturer of the external mixer. Currently, the FSW uses only the magnitude
correction files for external mixers; the phase is assumed to be ideal (correction values
are all 0).
B2000-specific phase conversion loss tables are provided in files according to the fol-
lowing syntax:
<serial_no.>_PHASE_<harmonic>_B2000.b2g

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 419

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

B5000-specific conversion loss tables

For bandwidths larger than 2 GHz, two different types of conversion loss tables are
available, depending on the required bandwidth:
● For bandwidths ≤4.4 GHz: table consists of 91 correction values per frequency, for
an IF of 2.8 GHz
The tables are provided in files according to the following syntax:
<serial_no.>_MAG|PHASE_<harmonic>_B5000_2G8.b5g
● For bandwidths between 4.4 GHz and 5 GHz: table consists of 103 correction val-
ues per frequency, for an IF of 3.5 GHz
The tables are provided in files according to the following syntax:
<serial_no.>_MAG|PHASE_<harmonic>_B5000_3G5.b5g
Currently, the FSW uses only the magnitude correction files; the phase is assumed to
be ideal (correction values are all 0).

Automatic signal identification

Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results
of the mixer, thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per-
form frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).

The "Auto ID" function is now also available for Spectrum emission mask (SEM) mea-
surement and Spurious emissions measurement using an external mixer.

Signal ID function
Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the
upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured
on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the reference sweep.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 420

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-18: Signal identification function (Signal ID) with optional external mixer

The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2*IF/

<Harmonic order>. Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the
specified harmonic are displayed in both traces at the same position on the frequency
axis. Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed at
different positions in both traces. The user identifies the signals visually by comparing
the two traces.
Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep. Therefore the signal level should
only be measured in the test sweep (trace 1).

Auto ID function
The Auto ID function basically functions like Signal ID function. However, the test and
reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak
values of each sweep point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Sig-
nal ID" is active at the same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be dis-
played in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this cal-
culated trace.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 421

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Test sweep and reference sweep traces

Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the
traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the ref-
erence sweep (lower side-band sweep).

Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3

Signal ID Signal ID upper side- Signal ID lower side- -

band band

Auto ID Auto ID - -

Signal ID + Auto ID Signal ID upper side- Signal ID lower side- Auto ID

band band

Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference

Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep, the conver-
sion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep. This is due to the fact that
the LO output power of the FSW varies with the frequency, and also due to the non-
ideal characteristics of the mixer. A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted for
the comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep. A user-
defined threshold is used to determine deviations.

Auto ID detection threshold

Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference
sweeps, i.e. theoretically, identical signal levels are expected at the frequency of the
real mixer product in both sweeps. If the level difference is lower than the user-defined
threshold, the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed. If a signal occurs only in
the test sweep or reference sweep, it is an unwanted mixer product. The level of this
signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep. If the S/N ratio is sufficiently
large, the threshold is exceeded. This means that the signal with the lower level, i.e.
noise in this case, is displayed.
Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail-safe principle, i.e. unwan-
ted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input
signals are not blanked out.

Time-constant spectrum
The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the Auto ID
function can only be applied usefully for signals with a time-constant spectrum since
the two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum.

Mixer products with low S/N ratio

If the S/N ratio of a mixer product is lower than the user-defined threshold, the level
difference between the test sweep and reference sweep at the frequency of this mixer
product is always within limits, even if the signal occurs in one of the sweeps only.
Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function. It is therefore recom-
mended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep
using the Signal ID function.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 422

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Examining unwanted mixer products with small span

With large spans in which non-modulated sine-wave signals are represented as single
lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out. However, if you
examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span,
e.g. an image-frequency response, part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed.
This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ-
ence which is smaller than the user-defined threshold when compared with the noise
floor. These components are therefore not blanked out.
An unwanted signal with an S/N ratio that corresponds approximately to the user-
defined threshold may not be blanked out permanently. Due to the fact that the noise
display varies from one sweep to another, the S/N ratio changes and thus the level dif-
ference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a frequency
changes as well. As a result, the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is not fulfilled.
To blank out unwanted signals permanently, an almost constant noise indication is
therefore required. This can be achieved by reducing the video bandwidth. Since the
average noise indication lies well below the generated noise peak values, the minimum
level diminishes. For identification using the Auto ID function, signals should have this
minimum noise level.

Display of mixer products at the same frequency

If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components, it will
become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be
displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 423

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-19: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and refer-
ence sweep (large span)

Example:
The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test
sweep is displayed by trace 1. The IF filter of the FSW is represented at a 3 dB band-
width of 20 kHz, the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz. If, however, the 3 dB bandwidth of
the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined (trace 2), it will be found to be
larger exactly by a factor of 2. This shows that the two products were generated by
mixing with LO harmonics of different orders. The signal recorded in the test sweep
was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic. Since the frequency axis scaling
is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is
compressed by a factor of 2/3. The signal recorded in the reference sweep was gener-
ated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal. Since the frequency axis scaling
is based on the 2nd order, the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is
expanded by a factor of 2.

Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products
are displayed at the same frequency. The diagram shown in Figure 7-20 is obtained
when examining products with a narrow span using the Auto ID function. You can
easily recognize unwanted mixer products in the diagram obtained using one of the
automatic detection functions.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 424

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Figure 7-20: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span

7.2.6.2 External mixer settings

Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config"

If installed, the optional external mixer can be configured from the Spectrum applica-
tion.
Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode.
Special conversion loss tables (in .b5g or .b2g files) cannot be edited within the FSW
firmware; they can only be imported and deleted.
See "External mixers and large bandwidth extension options" on page 418
● Mixer settings........................................................................................................ 425
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 429
● Managing conversion loss tables.......................................................................... 431
● Creating and editing conversion loss tables..........................................................433

Mixer settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Mixer Settings"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 425

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

External Mixer (State)................................................................................................. 426

RF Start / RF Stop.......................................................................................................426
Handover Freq............................................................................................................ 427
Band............................................................................................................................427
RF Overrange............................................................................................................. 427
Preset Band................................................................................................................ 427
IF................................................................................................................................. 428
Mixer Type...................................................................................................................428
Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration).................................................................. 428
└ Range 1/Range 2..........................................................................................428
└ Harmonic Type..............................................................................................428
└ Harmonic Order............................................................................................ 428
└ Conversion Loss........................................................................................... 429

External Mixer (State)

Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input. If activated, "ExtMix" is indicated
in the channel bar of the application, together with the used band (see "Band"
on page 427).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>[:STATe] on page 1147

RF Start / RF Stop
Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band (read-only).
The frequency range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configura-
tion (see "Range 1/Range 2" on page 428).
For details on available frequency ranges, see table 13-4 on page 1151.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 426

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STARt on page 1150
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:STOP on page 1150

Handover Freq
If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one
harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range
can be defined using different harmonics. In this case, the sweep begins using the har-
monic defined for the first range. At the specified "handover frequency" in the overlap-
ping range, it switches to the harmonic for the second range.
The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency
range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:FREQuency:HANDover on page 1150

Band
Defines the waveguide frequency band or user-defined frequency band to be used by
the mixer.
The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the "RF Start" and
"RF Stop" fields.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 13-4 on
page 1151.
The mixer settings for the user-defined band can be selected freely. The frequency
range for the user-defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration (see "Range
1/Range 2" on page 428).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND on page 1151

RF Overrange
Sometimes, the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre-
quency range than the band requires. By default, the pre-defined range is used. How-
ever, you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the
defined "RF Start" and "RF Stop" frequencies by the maximum values.
If "RF Overrange" is enabled, the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits
("RF Start" and "RF Stop"). In this case, the full frequency range that can be reached
using the selected harmonics is used.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:RFOVerrange[:STATe] on page 1155

Preset Band
Restores the presettings for the selected band.
Note: changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the
[PRESET] function. This function allows you to restore the original band settings.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:BAND:PRESet on page 1151

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 427

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

IF
Displays the intermediate frequency currently used by the external mixer (for reference
and in the I/Q Analyzer only).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:IF? on page 1153

Mixer Type
The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types:
Note: For measurements with a bandwidth larger than 2 GHz and an external mixer,
only 3-port mixers are supported.
For more information, see "External mixers and large bandwidth extension options"
on page 418.
"2 Port" LO and IF data use the same port
"3 Port" LO and IF data use separate ports
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs on page 1155

Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)

The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user-defined bands
(see "Band" on page 427).

Range 1/Range 2 ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)

Enables the use of one or two frequency ranges, where the second range is based on
another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band's frequency range.
For each range, you can define which harmonic to use and how the conversion loss is
handled.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH:STATe on page 1152

Harmonic Type ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)

Defines if only even, only odd, or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion.
Depending on this selection, the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes
(see "Harmonic Order" on page 428). Which harmonics are supported depends on the
mixer type.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:TYPE on page 1152

Harmonic Order ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)

Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre-
quency range.
By default, the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con-
version of input signals in the whole band. If due to the LO frequency the conversion is
not possible using one harmonic, the band is split.
For the "USER" band, the order of harmonic is defined by the user. The order of har-
monic can be between 2 and 128, the lowest usable frequency being 16.88 GHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 428

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic[:LOW] on page 1153
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:HARMonic:HIGH[:VALue] on page 1152

Conversion Loss ← Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)

Defines how the conversion loss is handled. The following methods are available:
"Average" Defines the average conversion loss for the entire frequency range in
dB.
"Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre-
defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external
mixer and can be imported to the FSW. Alternatively, you can define
your own conversion loss tables. Imported tables are checked for
compatibility with the current settings before being assigned.
Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver-
sion Loss Table tab.
For details on conversion loss tables, see "Conversion loss tables"
on page 416.
For details on importing tables, see "Import Table" on page 433.
Remote command:
Average for range 1:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS[:LOW] on page 1155
Table for range 1:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe[:LOW] on page 1154
Average for range 2:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:HIGH on page 1153
Table for range 2:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOSS:TABLe:HIGH on page 1154

Basic settings
Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Basic Settings"
The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer. They are only available if
the External Mixer (State) is "On".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 429

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

LO Level......................................................................................................................430
Signal ID......................................................................................................................430
Auto ID........................................................................................................................ 430
Auto ID Threshold....................................................................................................... 431
Bias Value................................................................................................................... 431
└ Write to CVL table.........................................................................................431

LO Level
Defines the LO level of the external mixer's LO port. Possible values are from
13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm in 0.1 dB steps. Default value is 15.5 dB.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower on page 1148

Signal ID
Activates or deactivates visual signal identification. Two sweeps are performed alter-
nately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the
test sweep). Trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e. the
reference sweep.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per-
form frequency sweeps (not in the VSA or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
(See also "Automatic signal identification" on page 420).
Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID
function.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal on page 1148

Auto ID
Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 430

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID. However, the test and reference sweeps are
converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep
point. The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if "Signal ID" is active at the
same time. If "Signal ID" is not active, the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1
to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace.
Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per-
form frequency sweeps (not in vector signal analysis or the I/Q Analyzer, for instance).
Note: The "Auto ID" function is now also available for Spectrum emission mask (SEM)
measurement and Spurious emissions measurement using an external mixer.
(See also "Automatic signal identification" on page 420).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:SIGNal on page 1148

Auto ID Threshold
Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference
sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison ("Auto ID" on page 430 function).
The input range is between 0.1 dB and 100 dB. Values of about 10 dB (i.e. default set-
ting) generally yield satisfactory results.
(See also "Automatic signal identification" on page 420).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:THReshold on page 1149

Bias Value
Define the bias current for each range, which is required to set the mixer to its optimum
operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range
from -10 mA to 10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage
of the mixer diode(s).
Tip: The trace in the currently active result display (if applicable) is adapted to the set-
tings immediately so you can check the results.
To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table, select Write to
CVL table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS[:LOW] on page 1148
[SENSe:]MIXer<x>:BIAS:HIGH on page 1147

Write to CVL table ← Bias Value

Stores the bias setting in the currently selected "Conversion Loss Table" for the range.
If no conversion loss table is selected yet, this function is not available ("CVL Table not
selected").
(See "Conversion Loss" on page 429).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 1156

Managing conversion loss tables

Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 431

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

In this tab, you configure and manage conversion loss tables. Conversion loss tables
consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain
frequencies. The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are
obtained via interpolation.
The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box. All
conversion loss tables found in the instrument's C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ direc-
tory are listed in the "Modify Tables" list.

New Table................................................................................................................... 432

Edit Table.................................................................................................................... 432
Delete Table................................................................................................................ 432
Import Table................................................................................................................ 433

New Table
Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss
table.
For details on table configuration, see "Creating and editing conversion loss tables"
on page 433.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1159

Edit Table
Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss
table.
For details on table configuration, see "Creating and editing conversion loss tables"
on page 433.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1159

Delete Table
Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 432

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:CLEar on page 1157

Import Table
Imports one or more stored conversion loss tables from any directory and copies them
to the instrument's C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory. They can then be assigned
for use for a specific frequency range (see "Conversion Loss" on page 429).
Note:
Before copying any files to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory, the FSW firm-
ware moves any existing user-defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory. To use a
user-defined cvl table later, select the file in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\backup
directory.
Note: If the bandwidth extension options R&S FSW-B6001/-B8001 are active, external
mixers are supported for an analysis bandwidth up to 4 GHz.
Measurements using bandwidth extension options over 512 MHz require special con-
version loss tables, see Table 7-1.
Supported tables have the file extension .b2g or .b5g, as opposed to .acl for com-
mon tables. While .acl files can be used, data acquisition with larger bandwidths
using such conversion loss tables leads to substantial inaccuracy. Using no conversion
loss tables at all during data acquisition with the larger bandwidth options causes even
more inaccuracy.
Note that only common conversion loss tables (in .acl files) can be edited. Special
conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) can only be imported and deleted.
For more details, see "External mixers and large bandwidth extension options"
on page 418.
Remote command:
MMEM:COPY '<conversionlosstable>',C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\
See MMEMory:COPY on page 1354
See FSW base unit user manual.

Creating and editing conversion loss tables

Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" > "Conversion Loss Table" >
"New Table" / "Edit Table"
Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited.

Note that only common conversion loss tables (in .acl files) can be edited. Special
conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) can only be imported and deleted.
For details see "External mixers and large bandwidth extension options" on page 418.

A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as
described by the position/value entries.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 433

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

File Name....................................................................................................................434
Comment.....................................................................................................................435
Band............................................................................................................................435
Harmonic Order...........................................................................................................435
Bias............................................................................................................................. 435
Mixer Name.................................................................................................................435
Mixer S/N.................................................................................................................... 435
Mixer Type...................................................................................................................436
Position/Value..............................................................................................................436
Insert Value................................................................................................................. 436
Delete Value................................................................................................................436
Shift x.......................................................................................................................... 436
Shift y.......................................................................................................................... 436
Save............................................................................................................................ 436

File Name
Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\
directory on the instrument. The name of the table is identical to the name of the file
(without extension) in which the table is stored. This setting is mandatory. The .ACL
extension is automatically appended during storage.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 434

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect on page 1159

Comment
An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment is user-
definable.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent on page 1157

Band
The waveguide or user-defined band to which the table applies. This setting is checked
against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
For a definition of the frequency range for the pre-defined bands, see table 13-4 on
page 1151.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BAND on page 1156

Harmonic Order
The harmonic order of the range to which the table applies. This setting is checked
against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:HARMonic on page 1158

Bias
The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It
corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to
10 mA. The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer
diode(s).
Tip: You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the
changed setting is displayed, see "Bias Value" on page 431.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:BIAS on page 1156

Mixer Name
Specifies the name of the external mixer to which the table applies. This setting is
checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the
range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:MIXer on page 1158

Mixer S/N
Specifies the serial number of the external mixer to which the table applies.
The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before
the table can be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SNUMber on page 1160

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 435

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Mixer Type
Specifies whether the external mixer to which the table applies is a two-port or three-
port type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can
be assigned to the range.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:PORTs on page 1159

Position/Value
Each position/value pair defines the conversion loss value in dB for a specific fre-
quency. Enter the reference values in order of increasing frequencies. You can define a
maximum of 500 reference values. To enter a new value pair, select an empty space in
the "Position"/"Value" table, or select Insert Value.
Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are interpolated. Lin-
ear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values. If it contains more
than two reference values, spline interpolation is carried out. Outside the frequency
range covered by the table, the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as for the
first and last reference value.
The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position/
value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:DATA on page 1158

Insert Value
Inserts a new position/value entry in the table.
If the table is empty, a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted.
If entries already exist, a new entry is inserted above the selected entry. The position of
the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half.

Delete Value
Deletes the currently selected position/value entry.

Shift x
Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value. The value can be entered in the edit
dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x-axis.

Shift y
Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value. The value can be entered in the
edit dialog box. The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y-
axis.

Save
The conversion loss table is stored under the specified file name in the
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory of the instrument.

7.2.6.3 How to work with external mixers

The required tasks to work with external mixers are described step-by-step:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 436

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

● "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 437

● "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 438
● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 438
● "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 439
● "To shift the conversion loss values" on page 439

For remote operation, see "Programming example: working with an external mixer"
on page 1160.

To connect a three-port mixer

External mixers can be connected at the LO OUT/IF IN and IF IN female connectors (if
option is installed). Both two-port and three-port mixers can be used. Connect the
mixer as follows:

Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO signal. If no external mixers are con-
nected to the FSW, cover the two front connectors [LO OUT / IF IN] and [IF IN] with the
SMA caps supplied.

1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the FSW to the LO port of the external mixer.

2. Connect the IF IN input of the FSW to the IF port of the external mixer.

3. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 437

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

To connect a two-port mixer

1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the FSW to the LO/IF port of the external
mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm.
Because of the diplexer contained in the FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the
line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.

2. Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer.

To activate and configure the external mixer

1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external
mixer for the current application.

2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.

3. From the "Band" selection list, select the required band.

4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define fre-
quency-dependent level correction.

5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No
further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in
"To define a new conversion loss table" on page 439).

6. Optionally, select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identifi-
cation.

7. If necessary, adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID

Threshold".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 438

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

To define a new conversion loss table

1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".

2. Select "New Table".

3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table.

4. Define the band and mixer settings for which the conversion loss table is to be
used. These settings will be compared to the current mixer settings during the vali-
dation check when the table is imported.

5. Define the reference values for the frequency-dependant conversion loss:

a) Select "Insert Value" to add a new row in the table.
b) Enter the first reference frequency.
c) Enter the corresponding conversion loss value.
The conversion loss function is updated and displayed in the preview diagram
in the dialog box.
d) Repeat these steps to define up to 500 reference values. Remember to define
the values in ascending order of frequencies.

6. Select "Save".
The table is stored and is then available for import and assignment to a specific fre-
quency range.

To shift the conversion loss values

In order to increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table a constant value
(a0), the values can be shifted either in x-directoin or in y-direction.

1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table".

2. Select the assigned conversion loss table.

3. Select "Edit Table".

4. Select "Shift y" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all y-values in the table by
this value.
Or:
Select "Shift x" and enter the constant value <a0> to shift all x-values in the table by
this value.

5. Select "Save".

7.2.6.4 Measurement examples: using an external mixer

Measurement example 1: two-port mixer

The following example demonstrates the basic operation of an external two-port mixer
as well as the required settings. A sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz is applied to the
input of a multiplier. The spectrum at the multiplier output is to be recorded in the range

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 439

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 2-port mixer for the V band. The mixer used is a double-
diode mixer. The example of operation is described in the following steps:
● "To set up the measurement" on page 440
● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 440
● "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 441

To set up the measurement

IF IN

LO OUT/IF IN

LO/IF
External
Mixer
RF

Multiplier

RF
INPUT

Figure 7-21: External Mixer test setup

1. Connect the [LO OUT / IF IN] output of the FSW to the [LO/IF] port of the external
mixer.

2. Connect the multiplier to the RF input of the external mixer.

3. Apply a sine wave signal with f = 14.5 GHz to the input of the multiplier.

To activate and configure the external mixer

1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer: ON" to activate the external
mixer for the current application.

2. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.

3. From the "Band" selection list, select the band "V".

4. In the Mixer Settings, select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define fre-
quency-dependent level correction.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 440

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

5. From the selection list, select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument. No
further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame-
ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis-
played.
If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in
"To define a new conversion loss table" on page 439).

6. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 GHz to 75 GHz).

7. Reduce the video bandwidth by selecting "BW > Video Bandwidth Manual": 1
MHz. This allows for correct signal identification using the Auto ID function (see
also "Automatic signal identification" on page 420).

8. Select "Basic Settings> Auto ID: On" to activate automatic signal identification.

9. Adapt the tolerance limit by selecting "Basic Settings> Auto ID Threshold". The tol-
erance limit is set to 5 dB in this example.

To take into account the cable loss in the IF path

On performing level correction, the conversion loss of the mixer and also the insertion
loss a0 of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account. This addi-
tional loss is frequency-dependent.
1. Determine the insertion of the cable at the used intermediate frequency.

2. Increase each reference value in the conversion-loss table by the insertion loss
(a0).
a) Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss
Table".
b) Select the assigned conversion loss table.
c) Select "Edit Table".
d) Select "Shift y" and enter the insertion loss value <a0> to shift all y-values in the
table by this value.

3. Select "Save".

Measurement example 2: three-port mixer with a large analysis bandwidth

The following example demonstrates the operation of an external three-port mixer with
a large analysis bandwidth in the I/Q Analyzer. This example requires the optional
bandwidth extension R&S FSW-B5000. It is assumed that this option has been instal-
led and set up and is ready for use.
(See the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.)
A broadband 5G-modulated signal with a carrier frequency of 58 GHz is applied. The
spectrum is to be recorded in the range of 52 GHz to 60 GHz using a 3-port mixer for
the V band. The mixer used is an RPG FS-Z75 (new model) double-diode mixer.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 441

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

To set up the measurement

IF IN

LO OUT/IF IN

LO IF
External
Mixer RF

RF
INPUT

Figure 7-22: 3-port external mixer test setup

1. Connect the [LO] port of the external mixer to the [LO OUT / IF IN] connector of the
FSW.

2. Connect the [IF] port of the external mixer to the [IF IN] connector of the FSW.

3. Apply a 5G-modulated signal with a carrier frequency of 58 GHz to the RF input of

the mixer.

To activate the large analysis bandwidth

1. Press [Mode].

2. Select the I/Q Analyzer.

3. On the FSW, press [Input/Output].

4. Select "B5000 Config".

5. Set the B5000 "State" to "On".

6. If necessary, start an alignment for the measurement setup with the R&S FSW-
B5000.

To activate and configure the external mixer

1. Select "INPUT" > "Input Source Config" > "External Mixer": "ON" to activate the
external mixer for the current application.

2. Import the conversion loss table for the RPG FS-Z75 mixer, which is provided with
the device.
a) Select the "Conversion Loss Table" tab.
b) Select "Import Table".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 442

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

c) From the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl directory, select the

100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G file.
d) Select [ENTER].

3. Switch to the "Mixer Settings" tab.

4. Select the "Mixer Type": "3-port".

5. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range.

6. From the "Band" selection list, select the band "V".

7. A span is automatically set which covers the whole V band (50 GHz to 75 GHz).

8. In the "Mixer Settings", select "Conversion Loss: Table" for Range 1 to define fre-
quency-dependent level correction.

9. From the selection list, select the 100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G conversion

loss table which you imported previously. No further settings are necessary since
the selected file contains all required parameters.
Now you can analyze the broadband signal with an analysis bandwidth of 5 GHz.

7.2.7 External frontend control (R&S FSW-K553)

If the External Frontend Control option (R&S FSW-K553) is installed, you can control
measurements with the FSW using a connected external frontend.
● External frontend basics........................................................................................443
● External frontend settings..................................................................................... 451
● How to use an external frontend........................................................................... 462
● Troubleshooting external frontend control.............................................................465

7.2.7.1 External frontend basics

Due to the physical dimensions of modern spectrum analyzers, long RF cables

between the DUT and the analyzer are often necessary in complex setups. When mea-
suring high frequency signals, the long RF cable can lead to unwanted loss.
An external frontend with smaller physical dimensions allows for measurements closer
to the DUT. The measurement signal is transferred from the DUT to the analyzer on a
lower intermediate frequency (IF), for which loss does not have a major effect.
Thus, the external frontend outsources the conversion of the RF input signal to the IF
signal required for processing in the FSW. The external frontend downconverts the
high-frequency RF input signal to a lower frequency IF signal using its own internal LO.
For all subsequent signal processing steps in the FSW, this process is transparent.
Outsourcing has two main advantages:
● Extended frequency range: the external frontend can process RF data in a higher
frequency range than the FSW itself supports.
For example, using an R&S FE44S external frontend, RF signals in a range of
24 GHz to 44 GHz can be measured by an FSW7.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 443

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

● Minimized RF cable loss: in difficult testing environments, long RF cables between

the DUT and the FSW are no longer necessary. The external frontend, which is
much smaller than the FSW, can be placed closer to the DUT using much shorter
RF cables. The required IF cable between the frontend and the FSW is not as vul-
nerable to distortion effects and power loss. Furthermore, since the IF cable is usu-
ally part of the fixed setup, any existing frequency response can be calculated in
advance. The FSW can then adapt the actual measurement results automatically.
A typical application is a test involving a DUT placed in an RF shield box. The
external frontend is connected directly to the shield box, while the FSW is placed in
a measurement rack elsewhere in the laboratory.

Prerequisites
To use an external frontend, the external frontend control option (R&S FSW-K553)
must be installed.
Only measurements that support FFT sweeps or I/Q-based measurements, such as
the I/Q Analyzer application, can process input from an external frontend.
● Test setup..............................................................................................................444
● Multiple connections to a single frontend.............................................................. 445
● Mismatched settings on multiple connected instruments......................................446
● Using external frontends for FFT sweep measurements...................................... 446
● Activation...............................................................................................................447
● Configuration.........................................................................................................448
● External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation......................................... 448
● External frontends and FSW85 with two input connectors....................................449
● LO signal input and output.................................................................................... 449
● Calibration and alignment..................................................................................... 450
● Diagnostics............................................................................................................450
● Adding external devices to the test setup............................................................. 450

Test setup
Currently, the FSW supports the following external frontend types:
● R&S FE44S
● R&S FE50DTR
● R&S FE110SR
● R&S FE170SR
For details on which FSWs support external frontends, see the instrument's specifica-
tions document.
The external frontend is controlled by the FSW via a LAN connection. Up to 2 LAN/SSL
connections are supported by the frontend. The data is transferred using an IF cable.
In addition, a reference signal is provided from the FSW to the frontend.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 444

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

RF shield box
RF IF Out RF
DUT
Signal Analyzer REF Ref Frontend

LAN FE control

Figure 7-23: Typical setup using an external frontend

For details on setting up the external frontend, see the documentation of the used
device.

Multiple connections to a single frontend

The FE50DTR-type frontend has an RX and a TX signal path. The RX signal path uses
the "RF A" and "IF Out A" connectors and is connected to the FSW. The TX path uses
the "RF B" and "IF In B" connectors and can be connected to a signal generator. With
the latest firmware, both a signal generator and a FSW can use the same frontend at
the same time.

RF

Signal Analyzer REF Ref

IF Out A RF shield box
LAN
RF A DUT
Frontend
LAN
Vector Signal RF B
Generator REF Ref
IF In B
IF

Figure 7-24: Typical setup for multiple instruments connected to one external frontend

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 445

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Exclusive use during specific tasks

For specific tasks, the external frontend is blocked exclusively for one connected
instrument. In particular:
● When updating the frontend firmware
● During initial connection of an instrument to the frontend, when the device data is
exchanged.
If such a task is performed while another instrument that is connected to the same
frontend is performing a measurement, an error occurs ("Device busy"). In this case,
the running measurement is aborted. The instrument remains connected, though, and
you can restart the measurement once the frontend is available again.
Furthermore, only one instrument can access the frontend to change settings at a time.
While one connected instrument changes hardware settings on the external frontend,
the frontend is locked for the other connected instrument. The second instrument gets
a "Device busy" message and must retry when the frontend is available again.

Mismatched settings on multiple connected instruments

When multiple instruments are connected to the same frontend at the same time, both
channels use the same internal LO and thus both signal paths operate on the same
frequency. Therefore, if you want to analyze the signal from the generator using the
same frontend, make sure the Frequency Band Configuration is identical on both
instruments.
If multiple instruments use the same frontend at the same time, the frequency conver-
sion settings are identical for all connected instruments. Thus, if you change a fre-
quency setting on one instrument while the other is performing a measurement, the
measurement results no longer match the original measurement settings. In this case,
an error message is displayed ("Settings mismatch"). To restore the original measure-
ment settings on the frontend, change a frontend setting in the FSW dialog. See also
"Configuration" on page 448 and "Error messages" on page 465.

Using external frontends for FFT sweep measurements

When using an external frontend, the RF input signal is downconverted to the IF fre-
quency using the internal LO of the external frontend. The required LO frequency is
determined automatically according to the selected frequency band and the reference
frequency. In a basic I/Q measurement, the LO remains fixed during the measurement.
It is indicated in the channel info bar and the Frontend configuration settings.
For FFT sweep measurements, the external frontend acts as a block downconverter.
One full bandwidth segment is mixed down at a time to the IF. The external frontend
adapts the LO during the measurement to cover the entire sweep range. The used IF
range is indicated in the channel info bar and the Frontend configuration settings.
The FSW then performs an FFT sweep on the individual segments using several par-
tial spans.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 446

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

When using R&S FE170SR and R&S FE110SR type frontends, make sure you insert
the correct waveguide filter for the frequency range you intend to measure. See "Add-
ing external devices to the test setup" on page 450 and the specifications document for
details. Particularly when performing FFT sweeps with these external frontends, fre-
quencies outside the filter range can cause mixer products that produce unexpected
signals.

Spectrum measurements that use FFT sweeps also support external frontends.

Restrictions for Spectrum measurements

When using an external frontend in a "Spectrum" application, only the following trigger
sources are supported:
● External trigger
● Video trigger
The following Spectrum measurements do not support external frontends:
● "Harmonic Distortion" measurements
● "Fast ACLR" measurements
● List evaluation measurements (remote operation, see Section 13.5.15, "List evalu-
ations", on page 1092)

Activation
Activation is a two-step process. First, global activation allows for the general use of an
external frontend for the application. The application adapts the available measure-
ment settings to the connected frontend, for example the available frequency range,
reference level and attenuation.
If a measurement is active that does not support an FFT sweep, the basic frequency
sweep measurement is automatically selected. For all frequency sweep measure-
ments, the "Sweep type" is set to "FFT".
If a measurement is active that does not support external frontends when you activate
the frontend, the basic zero span measurement is automatically selected.
If no frontend is configured yet, the configuration settings become available. The chan-
nel bar indicates "Inp: ExtFe".
In a second step, the configured frontend is connected. Due to the two-step process,
the frontend can be deactivated temporarily for use by another connected instrument,
for example if the frontend has two signal paths. The measurement settings on the
FSW remain untouched.
If global activation is stopped, the application adapts the measurement settings to the
common settings supported by the FSW.
If an external frontend is configured in the active channel and you start a new applica-
tion that supports its use, the external frontend settings are automatically copied. How-
ever, you can deactivate the frontend or change the settings for individual applications.
Only one application can use the frontend at the same time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 447

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Configuration
You can configure external frontends individually for each measurement application.
The settings are preserved after presetting the instrument, and are included in save-
sets. The frontend is controlled and configured by the FSW using the common mea-
surement settings.
There are some minor differences in the measurement settings if an external frontend
is active:
● The available frequency range, reference level and attenuation are adapted to the
values supported by the configured frontend.
● Amplitude settings refer to the RF input at the external frontend, not the levels at
the RF input of the FSW (which is the downconverted IF data from the frontend).
However, you can also configure attenuation for the analyzer, see "External fron-
tend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation" on page 448.
● Only mechanical attenuation is available.
Electronic attenuation, preamplifier, and noise cancellation are not available.
● Auto settings are not available for active external frontends.
● Input coupling is always AC.
● Impedance is always 50 Ω.
● Only external triggers, I/Q power triggers, and (periodic) time triggers are suppor-
ted as trigger sources.
For spectrum measurements, only external triggers and video triggers are suppor-
ted.
● Depending on the bandwidth extension options available on the FSW, the maxi-
mum I/Q bandwidth is 1 GHz.
● If global activation of the external frontend is on, but the connection state of the
configured frontend is off, the FSW application is temporarily "on hold". It is set up
for and awaiting input from the external frontend, but the connection is aborted.
Thus, further measurement configuration is not possible until the frontend is recon-
nected, or global activation is stopped.
● The hardware of the FSW is adjusted to the defined reference level for the RF
input at the external frontend. It is adjusted optimally for input signals with a crest
factor of 10 dB. Thus, the required reference level for an optimal measurement can
differ depending on the crest factor of the input signal.
● Input from external frontends cannot be used simultaneously with:
– External generator control
– I/Q file input
– External mixers
– Analog baseband input

External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation

If an external frontend is active, you can configure the attenuation of the external fron-
tend and the analyzer separately. In both cases, only mechanical attenuation is availa-
ble.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 448

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Defining attenuation at the analyzer can avoid frequent switching at the mechanical
attenuator when you switch between applications with different input settings.
Note, however, that in "Auto" mode, the FSW determines the required attenuation at
the external frontend for an optimal EVM automatically. If you adapt the attenuation at
the frontend and the analyzer manually, the EVM can decrease.

External frontends and FSW85 with two input connectors

Both RF connectors on the FSW85 can be used for external frontend input. Since the
external frontend settings apply to both RF input connectors, you must select the con-
nector the external frontend is connected to. You cannot use the other RF input con-
nector simultaneously for the same channel.

LO signal input and output

External frontends provide LO input and output connectors.
You can use these connectors, for example:
● To provide an external signal as LO input to the external frontend
In the frontend configuration settings, you can configure whether the external fron-
tend uses its internal LO frequency, or an external LO provided at the "LO IN" con-
nector. Note that if you configure the external frontend to use an external LO sig-
nal, the signal must be provided at the frequency indicated in the dialog. Other-
wise, the results of the external frontend are inaccurate.
● To provide an LO signal at the external frontend's "LO OUT" connector. The fre-
quency at which the external frontend provides LO output is indicated in the fron-
tend configuration settings.
● To couple multiple external frontends

LO OUT LO IN
Signal Generator DUT Signal Analyzer
Ext. FE1 Ext. FE2

Figure 7-25: Coupled LO frequencies between multiple external frontends

Coupling multiple devices by their used LO signals is useful, for example, in setups
with multiple input streams to reduce the phase noise.
To use the same LO signal on coupled external frontends, both devices have to
use the same LO frequency for upconversion and downconversion. For coupled
frontends of the same type, make sure to select the same frequency band configu-
ration for all frontends. (See "Frequency Band Configuration" on page 454.)
You can also couple an R&S FE170SR and an R&S FE170ST, or an
R&S FE110SR and an R&S FE110ST. However, since they are different types of
frontend, they can use different LO signals for the same frequency band setting. In
this case, use the "Shared LO" setting, which ensures that both devices use the
same LO frequency according to a frequency plan.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 449

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

LO input and output is not available for FFT sweep measurements. In this case, the
external frontend always uses its internal LO.

Missing "Shared LO" setting in stored frequency configurations

The frequency band configuration of the external frontend is stored on the device.
Since the "Shared LO" setting was only introduced recently, this setting is not yet
implemented on older devices. If you find this setting is missing on your R&S FE170SR
and you require it, contact Rohde & Schwarz support.

Calibration and alignment

The calibration data for the RF input and output signal paths of the frontend are stored
on the device. The FSW reads out the data from the connected frontend and aligns the
measured data accordingly. The IF cable used to transfer data from the external fron-
tend to the RF input of the FSW must be calibrated during initial connection. Usually,
this cable is part of the fixed test setup and is not changed regularly. The calibration
data for the IF cable is often provided with the cable as a touchstone (.s2p) file. The
FSW can read such files and adapt the measurement results to the frequency
response of the cable.
To provide valid results, the frequency response file must provide the S21 parameter
for the used frequency range of the external frontend.
Frequency response files are usually provided with the IF cable. The calibration data
for the IF cable provided with the FSW is installed on the instrument at the factory.
The .s2p files are stored on the instrument under
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\external_frontends\<frontend_type>\
touchstonefiles\. For example, the files for the IF cable are stored under
C:\R_S\Instr\user\external_frontends\FE44S\touchstonefiles\
if_default_cable_1347_7552_00.s2p.

Diagnostics
The FSW allows you to obtain information on the performance of the connected fron-
tend and to perform a self-test on the frontend. The results can be stored as an XML
log file.

Adding external devices to the test setup

R&S FE170SR and R&S FE110SR type frontends allow you to connect additional
external devices to the signal path before the frontend. External devices can amplify or
filter the RF signal before the frontend converts it. Using an IX cable, correction data
and device information stored on the external device is transferred to the frontend.
Thus, the external frontend can consider the correction data for its signal processing.
The FSW automatically detects the external frontend and any connected external devi-
ces during initial connection. If an external device is connected to the frontend later, a
refresh function initiates the detection.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 450

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

When using R&S FE170SR and R&S FE110SR type frontends, make sure you insert
the correct waveguide filter for the frequency range you intend to measure. See the
specifications document for details.

Test setup
Figure 7-26 illustrates a test setup with an external frontend connected to a FSW and
an antenna, which is mounted inside an RF shield box. An additional band filter is
inserted between the DUT and the external frontend.

RF shield box
RF In IF Out RF In RF out in RF
Ref R&S Band- DUT
Signal Analyzer REF
FE110SR filter

LAN IX IX
LAN

IX

Figure 7-26: Example for a test setup with external devices

Correcting the signal path

IF cable loss can occur in the path between the frontend and the FSW. The frequency
response for the IF cable is usually provided with the cable and considered by the ana-
lyzer. External devices can cause additional losses in the signal path between the DUT
and the FSW. If you use the IX cable to connect the external device, the required cor-
rection data is automatically passed on from the external device to the frontend. The
frontend then considers the data for its internal levelling algorithms and compensates
the output values.
For external devices that are not connected to the frontend using an IX cable, you can
configure a further correction file for the path between the DUT and the frontend man-
ually.

7.2.7.2 External frontend settings

Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend"
The following settings are only available if the external frontend control option
(R&S FSW-K553) is installed on the FSW.
They are only available for measurements that support FFT sweeps or I/Q-based mea-
surements, such as in the I/Q Analyzer application.
For details see the FSW user manual.
● Global configuration settings.................................................................................452
● Frontend configuration settings.............................................................................453
● Diagnostics............................................................................................................457
● Network configuration........................................................................................... 458
● External Devices................................................................................................... 460

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 451

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Global configuration settings

Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend" > "Global Config"
In the global configuration settings, you define general settings for the connected exter-
nal frontend. The general measurement setup is indicated for reference.

Global activation..........................................................................................................452
External Frontend Connection State........................................................................... 453
Frontend Type............................................................................................................. 453
IP Address/ Computer Name...................................................................................... 453
FW Update.................................................................................................................. 453

Global activation
If enabled, the FSW allows you to configure and connect an external frontend. The
application adapts the available measurement settings to the connected frontend, for
example the available frequency range, reference level and attenuation.
If a measurement is active that does not support an FFT sweep, the basic frequency
sweep measurement is automatically selected. For all measurements, the "Sweep
type" is set to "FFT".
If no frontend is configured yet, the configuration settings become available. The chan-
nel bar indicates "Inp: ExtFe".
If disabled, the frontend is disconnected. The application adapts the measurement set-
tings to the common settings supported by the FSW.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:STATe] on page 1127

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 452

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

External Frontend Connection State

Connects or disconnects the configured frontend for use in a measurement. Note that
this setting is only available if Global activation of external frontends is set to "On".
It can take up to 10 seconds to determine that LAN connection failed.
If disabled, the connection to the frontend is deactivated temporarily. A running mea-
surement is aborted, the measurement results are indicated as invalid. The measure-
ment settings for the FSW remain untouched.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1119
[SENSe:]EFRontend:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1120

Frontend Type
Defines the type of frontend to be connected.
Currently, the FSW supports the following external frontend types:
● R&S FE44S
● R&S FE50DTR
● R&S FE110SR
● R&S FE170SR
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:CONNection:CONFig on page 1119

IP Address/ Computer Name

The IP address or computer name of the frontend connected to the FSW via LAN. The
IP address and computer name are indicated on the electronic ink display on the side
panel of the frontend.
By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle
"123"/"ABC" to "ABC".
Note: You can change the IP address of the connected frontend directly from the FSW,
in the "Network configuration" on page 458.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:CONNection:CONFig on page 1119

FW Update
When the FSW establishes a connection to the frontend, it checks the firmware version
of the frontend. If the FSW does not support the firmware installed on the frontend, you
are asked to update the frontend firmware. You can either start the firmware update
immediately, or abort the connection process and update the firmware on the frontend
later. In this case, the frontend is not available for use with the FSW until you perform
the update.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FWUPdate on page 1129

Frontend configuration settings

Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend" > "Frontend Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 453

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

In the frontend configuration tab, frequency information on the connected frontend is

provided and you can configure the frequency response for the IF cable.

Mismatched settings on multiple connected instruments

Multiple instruments can be connected to and use the same frontend at the same time.
The frequency conversion settings are identical for all connected instruments. Thus, if
you change a frequency setting on one instrument while the other is performing a mea-
surement, the measurement results no longer match the original measurement set-
tings. In this case, an error message is displayed ("Settings mismatch"). To restore the
original measurement settings on the frontend, change a frontend setting in the FSW
dialog.
Only one instrument can access the frontend to change settings at a time. While one
connected instrument changes hardware settings on the external frontend, the frontend
is locked for the other connected instrument. The second instrument gets a "Device
busy" message and must retry when the frontend is available again. In this case, start
a new measurement to access the frontend and change the settings.

Frequency Band Configuration................................................................................... 454

Frequency Band..........................................................................................................455
Reference Frequency..................................................................................................455
Intermediate Frequency.............................................................................................. 456
LO Mode..................................................................................................................... 456
LO Out State............................................................................................................... 456
Mandatory LO IN Frequency.......................................................................................457
LO OUT Frequency.....................................................................................................457
Correction State.......................................................................................................... 457
Load Cable Correction S2P File..................................................................................457

Frequency Band Configuration

Defines the intermediate frequency (output) range of the external frontend.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 454

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The used Intermediate Frequency and the resulting Frequency Band sideband that can
be analyzed on the FSW are indicated for reference.
The selected frequency band configuration is also indicated in the channel bar.
R&S FE50DTR-type frontends can be used by an analyzer and a signal generator
simultaneously. In this case, both channels use the same internal LO and thus both
signal paths operate on the same frequency. Therefore, if you want to analyze the sig-
nal from the generator using the same frontend, make sure that the configured fre-
quency bands are identical on both instruments.
You can select the required IF output range manually, or it can be determined automat-
ically, according to the other frequency settings.
Currently, auto mode always applies the "IF Low" range for R&S FE44S and
R&S FE50DTR-type frontends. For R&S FE170SR and R&S FE110SR frontends, the
"Spur Optimized" range is used.
In manual mode, select one of the following IF output ranges:
"IF High" (R&S FE44S/ R&S FE50DTR)
A higher intermediate frequency is used on the external frontend,
resulting in a higher input frequency at the FSW.
"IF Low" (R&S FE44S/ R&S FE50DTR)
A lower intermediate frequency is used on the external frontend,
resulting in a lower input frequency at the FSW.
"Spur Optimized"
(R&S FE170SR/R&S FE110SR only)
The selected IF range avoids unwanted spurious effects.
"EVM Optimized"
(R&S FE170SR only)
The selected IF range provides an optimal EVM result.
"Shared LO" (R&S FE170SR/R&S FE110SR only)
Ensures that multiple external frontends of a different type
(R&S FE170SR/ R&S FE170ST or R&S FE110SR/R&S FE110ST)
use the same LO frequencies for upconversion and downconversion.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BCONfig:AUTO on page 1121
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BCONfig:LIST? on page 1122
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BCONfig:SELect on page 1122

Frequency Band
Displays the range of the frequency band supported by the connected frontend (for ref-
erence only).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BAND:COUNt? on page 1120
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BAND<b>:LOWer? on page 1120
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:BAND<b>:UPPer? on page 1121

Reference Frequency
Sets the reference frequency that is used for frequency conversion on the frontend.
Depending on the connected type of frontend, different values are available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 455

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:REFerence on page 1126
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:REFerence:LIST? on page 1126

Intermediate Frequency
Indicates the currently used intermediate frequency (IF) and sideband (upper/lower) for
frequency conversion (for reference only).
This value depends on the "Frequency Band Configuration" on page 454.
For FFT sweep measurements, the LO is adapted during the measurement to cover
the entire sweep range. The resulting IF range is indicated.
For FE50DTR-type frontends that are used by an analyzer and a signal generator
simultaneously, make sure that the used intermediate frequency is identical on both
instruments.
Make sure the IF frequency required by the external frontend lies within the IF fre-
quency range of the FSW.
"USB" Upper sideband
"LSB" Lower sideband
Remote command:
For I/Q measurements:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:IFRequency[:VALue]? on page 1124
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:IFRequency:SIDeband? on page 1123
For FFT sweep measurements:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:IFRequency:MAXimum? on page 1123
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:IFRequency:MINimum? on page 1123

LO Mode
Determines whether the external frontend uses its internal LO or an external LO.
The LO configuration settings are not available for FFT sweep measurements. The
external frontend always uses its internal LO.
See also "LO signal input and output" on page 449.
For details, see the FSW base unit user manual.
"External" Uses the external signal provided at the "LO Input" connector of the
external frontend. The frequency at which the LO must be input to the
external frontend is indicated as "Mandatory LO IN Frequency"
on page 457.
If enabled, "LO EXT" is displayed in the channel bar.
"Internal" Uses the internal LO
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:LOSCillator:MODE on page 1124

LO Out State
Enables or disables output of the LO at the "LO OUT" connector of the external fron-
tend. Which LO is provided depends on LO Mode. The frequency at which the LO is
provided to the connector is indicated as LO OUT Frequency.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 456

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:LOSCillator:OUTPut:STATe on page 1125

Mandatory LO IN Frequency
Indicates the required frequency of the LO input at the external frontend when using an
external LO. If the coupled device does not provide the external LO at this frequency,
the results of the external frontend are inaccurate.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:LOSCillator:INPut:FREQuency?
on page 1124

LO OUT Frequency
Indicates the frequency of the LO output, if LO Out State is "ON".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:FREQuency:LOSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency?
on page 1125

Correction State
Activates correction of the IF signal due to cable loss from the frontend to the analyzer.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:ALIGnment<ch>:STATe on page 1128

Load Cable Correction S2P File

Opens a common file selection dialog to load correction data to compensate for signal
losses in the cable occurring at different IF signal frequencies.
To provide valid results, the frequency response file must provide the S21 parameter
for the used frequency range of the external frontend.
Frequency response files are usually provided with the IF cable. The calibration data
for the IF cable provided with the FSW is installed on the instrument at the factory.
The .s2p files are stored on the instrument under
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\external_frontends\<frontend_type>\
touchstonefiles\. For example, the files for the IF cable are stored under
C:\R_S\Instr\user\external_frontends\FE44S\touchstonefiles\
if_default_cable_1347_7552_00.s2p.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:ALIGnment<ch>:FILE on page 1128

Diagnostics
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend" > "Diagnostics"
The "Diagnostics" tab provides information on the performance of the connected fron-
tend and allows you to perform a self-test on the frontend.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 457

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Start Selftest................................................................................................................458
Abort Selftest...............................................................................................................458
Selftest Results........................................................................................................... 458

Start Selftest
Performs a self-test on the frontend to compare the current performance and charac-
teristic values with the specified values for the frontend.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend<fe>:SELFtest? on page 1129

Abort Selftest
Aborts a running self-test.
Remote command:
not supported

Selftest Results
Indicates the results of a selftest performed on the connected frontend.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend<fe>:SELFtest:RESult? on page 1129

Network configuration
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend" > "Network Config"
After connection, you can assign a static IP address or switch to a dynamic IP address
for the external frontend directly from the FSW.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 458

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

IP Address...................................................................................................................459
Subnet Mask............................................................................................................... 459
DHCP.......................................................................................................................... 459
Apply Network Settings............................................................................................... 459

IP Address
Defines the IP address of the external frontend. If the DHCP server is used ("DHCP
On"), the setting is read-only.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:NETWork on page 1126

Subnet Mask
Defines the subnet mask of the external frontend. If the DHCP server is used ("DHCP
On"), this setting is read-only.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:NETWork on page 1126

DHCP
Switches between DHCP server available (""On) or not available ("Off"). If a DHCP
server is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the external fron-
tend are obtained automatically from the DHCP server.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:NETWork on page 1126

Apply Network Settings

Any changes to the external frontend network configuration are applied.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 459

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Beware that if you change the network information, the connection is aborted and you
must re-establish a connection to the frontend (see "External Frontend Connection
State" on page 453).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend:NETWork on page 1126

External Devices
Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External
Frontend" > "External Devices"
You can insert additional external devices in the signal path between the DUT and the
external frontend, such as preamplifiers or filters. The external frontend must then con-
sider the additional gain or correction values.

When the FSW initially connects to the external frontend, the instrument automatically
detects any devices connected to the external frontend. The FSW displays information
on detected devices in the "External Devices" tab of the dialog.
Name...........................................................................................................................460
Type............................................................................................................................ 461
Frequency Range........................................................................................................461
Gain.............................................................................................................................461
Refresh External Devices............................................................................................461
Correction State.......................................................................................................... 461
Load S2P File..............................................................................................................461

Name
Name of the external device for reference.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:NAME? on page 1133
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:LIST? on page 1131

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 460

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Type
Type of the detected device for reference.
Currently, the following device types are supported:
● Filter
● Amplifier (R&S FE170SR only)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:TYPE? on page 1134

Frequency Range
The supported frequency range of the connected device.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:FREQuency:MINimum?
on page 1133
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:FREQuency:MAXimum?
on page 1132

Gain
For connected external amplifiers only: provided gain.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:GAIN? on page 1133

Refresh External Devices

Scans the ports of the external frontend and refreshes the display with detected infor-
mation on connected devices. This function is useful after connecting a new device to
the frontend.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:REFResh on page 1132

Correction State
Enables or disables the use of an additional correction file for the connected external
devices. Additional correction is useful, for example, if you do not use the IX cable to
connect the external device to the external frontend. In this case, automatic compensa-
tion cannot be applied.
See also "Correcting the signal path" on page 451.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:CORRection:STATe
on page 1130

Load S2P File

Opens a common file selection dialog to load correction data to compensate for signal
losses by the external devices occurring at different RF signal frequencies.
To provide valid results, the frequency response file must provide the S21 parameter
for the used frequency range of the external devices.
The dialog indicates whether the loaded file is valid or not.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 461

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:CORRection:FILE
on page 1130
[SENSe:]EFRontend[:CHANnel<ch>]:EXTDevice<di>:CORRection:VALid?
on page 1131

7.2.7.3 How to use an external frontend

To configure the use of an external frontend

1. Connect an external frontend to the DUT and the FSW as described in the frontend
manual.

2. Open a measurement channel for a measurement that supports FFT sweeps

([MEAS]), or an I/Q-based application, such as the I/Q Analyzer ([Mode]).

3. Select [Input / Output] > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External Fron-
tend".

4. On the "Global Config" tab, enable general use of the external frontend for the
application ("On").
The connection settings become available.

5. Select the "Type" of connected frontend.

6. Enter the IP address or computer name of the connected frontend. The information
is indicated on the electronic label on the side panel of the frontend.
After you enter the IP address, the "Connection State" setting becomes available.

7. Set the "Connection State" to "On".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 462

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

It can take up to 10 seconds until the FSW sets up the control connection to the
frontend. The displayed status of the control connection in the dialog box switches
from "Not Connected" (white) to "Connected" (green). The LAN LED on the front
panel of the frontend switches from green to orange.
The frequency band supported by the connected frontend is displayed on the
"Frontend Config" tab.

8. On the "Frontend Config" tab, select the "Frequency Band Configuration" to be

used by the frontend. The band determines the used intermediate frequency and
resulting frequency band you can analyze. Both values are indicated in the dialog
box for reference.

9. Select the "Reference Frequency" to be used by the frontend.

10. Optionally, enable compensation for the frequency response of the IF cable from
the FSW to the frontend.
a) Select "Load Cable Correction S2P File".
b) Select an .s2p file that contains the frequency response for the used IF cable.
To provide valid results, the frequency response file must provide the S21
parameter for the used frequency range of the external frontend.
Frequency response files are usually provided with the IF cable. The calibration
data for the IF cable provided with the FSW is installed on the instrument at the
factory.
The .s2p files are stored on the instrument under
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\external_frontends\<frontend_type>\
touchstonefiles\. For example, the files for the IF cable are stored under
C:\R_S\Instr\user\external_frontends\FE44S\
touchstonefiles\if_default_cable_1347_7552_00.s2p.
c) Set the "Correction State" to "On" to enable the use of the correction file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 463

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The FSW automatically adapts the measured values from the external frontend to
the known cable loss.

11. Optionally, check the network settings of the FSW.

a) Select the "Network Config" tab.
b) Make sure the correct "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask" are assigned.

By default, DHCP is enabled and the IP address of the external frontend is

assigned automatically.

12. Optionally, if you need to change the network settings, proceed as follows:
a) Disable DHCP ("DHCP" > "Off").
b) Adjust the network settings according to your test setup.
c) Click "Apply Network Settings".
Note: If you change the network configuration to "DHCP" > "On", the connection to
the FSW is aborted. You must re-establish a connection to the frontend as descri-
bed in step step 4).
If you have connection issues, see .
13. Configure the measurement as usual. The amplitude and frequency settings are
adapted to the supported values of the external frontend. The reference value
refers to the RF input of the external frontend.

To configure the use of additional external devices

R&S FE170SR and R&S FE110SR type frontends allow you to connect additional
external devices to the signal path before the frontend.
1. Connect an external device to the DUT and the R&S FE170SR/R&S FE110SR type
frontend as described in the frontend manual.

2. Connect the external frontend to the FSW as described in the frontend manual.

3. Configure the external frontend as described in "To configure the use of an external
frontend" on page 462.

4. Select [Input / Output] > "Input Source Config" > "Input Source" > "External Fron-
tend" > "External Devices".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 464

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The detected external devices and the provided information is displayed.

5. If the external frontend was already connected to the analyzer when you connected
the external device, select "Refresh External Devices" to update the information.

6. Optionally, if you do not connect the external device to the frontend using the IX
cable, enable additional compensation for the external device.
a) Select "Load S2P File".
b) Select an .s2p file that contains the frequency response for the used devices
and cables.
To provide valid results, the frequency response file must provide the S21
parameter for the used frequency range of the external devices.
The dialog indicates whether the selected file is valid or not.
c) Set the "Correction State" to "On" to enable the use of the correction file.
The external frontend automatically adapts the signal values from the external
devices to the known loss.

7.2.7.4 Troubleshooting external frontend control

If problems arise during external frontend control, try the following measures to opti-
mize the connection or setup.
For additional information, see the external frontend documentation.

Error messages
If errors occur, status messages in the external frontend configuration dialog box and in
the status bar of the display inform you about them.
Query the error message queue using the remote command SYST:ERR? to determine
if any or which errors occurred during operation. For details, see Section 14.2, "Error
messages in remote control mode", on page 1550.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 465

 FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

If any errors occur that are not described here, contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer
support, see Section 14.7, "Contacting customer support", on page 1558.
Table 7-2: Status and error messages

Status bar message Dialog status SYST:ERR? result Description/ Possible solution

External Frontend [x]: Connecting... Connection to the external frontend is being estab-
Connecting... lished.
It can take up to 10 seconds to determine that LAN
connection failed.

Connected Connected Connection established, ready for operation.

No External Frontend Not connected No external frontend detected.

Connected Connect an external frontend to the FSW.

External Frontend [x]: Invalid Host IP 300, "Invalid Host Verify the specified IP address of the external fron-
Invalid Host IP IP" tend.

External Frontend [x]: Not connected 301, "LAN Connection Verify that the external frontend is connected to the
LAN Connection Failed Failed" same network as the FSW.
Verify the specified IP address of the external fron-
tend.

External Frontend [x]: Incompatible Ana- 302, "Incompatible The frontend hardware is not compatible with the
Incompatible Analyzer lyzer Firmware Analyzer Firmware" installed analyzer firmware.
Firmware Update your analyzer firmware.
See Section 11.7.4, "Firmware updates",
on page 792.

External Frontend [x]: Incompatible Fron- 303, "Incompatible The firmware of the external frontend is not up-to-
Incompatible Frontend tend Firmware Frontend Firmware" date.
Firmware Perform a firmware update.
See "FW Update" on page 453.

External Frontend [x]: Device Locked 304, "Device Locked" External frontend is accessible via ping, but no
Device Locked SSL-connection could be established.
Disconnect another device that is currently access-
ing the external frontend and try reconnecting.
A single frontend supports up to 2 LAN/SSL con-
nections.

External Frontend [x]: Wrong Device Type 306, "Wrong Device The connected external frontend is not of the
Wrong Device Type Type" specified type.
Disconnect the device, select the correct external
frontend type in the configuration dialog box, and
reconnect.

External Frontend [x]: LAN Connection Lost 314, "LAN Connection The connection to the external frontend has been
LAN Connection Lost Lost" lost.
The analyzer attempts to reconnect periodically.
Wait for the "Connecting…" message.

External Frontend [x]: Firmware Update 315, "Firmware The firmware of the external frontend was not
Firmware Update Failed Failed Update Failed" updated successfully.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 466

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Status bar message Dialog status SYST:ERR? result Description/ Possible solution

External Frontend [x]: Connected 316, "External The FSW does not support any IF frequencies
<Frontend_Name> is Frontend Not required by the external frontend.
not allowed, RF input Allowed"
frequency of at least
<Max_RF> GHz is
required.

External Frontend [x]: Connected 317, “RF frequency The selected measurement (RF) frequency is not
Current RF frequency is is out of valid supported by the selected frequency band of the
out of valid range. range.” external frontend. Select a different frequency on
Please check Frontend the FSW, or a different frequency band for the fron-
Config dialog for more tend.
information

External Frontend [x]: Connected 332, "Settings The conversion settings on the external frontend
Settings Mismatch - Mismatch" were changed by another instrument during the
reinitiate frontend by measurement on the FSW. The measurement
changing a measure- results no longer match the original measurement
ment parameter settings. To restore the original measurement set-
tings on the frontend, change a frontend setting in
the FSW dialog.

External Frontend [x]: Device busy 333, "Device Busy" The external frontend is currently blocked by
Not Connected – Device another instrument, e.g. for initial connection or a
Busy firmware update. After the other instrument finishes
its task, try reconnecting the FSW. (Switch the
"Connection" state off and on again.)

External Frontend [x]: Connected 333, "Device Busy" During a running measurement, the external fron-
Device Busy tend is blocked by another instrument, e.g. for ini-
tial connection or a firmware update. The current
measurement is aborted. After the other instrument
finishes its task, start a new measurement on the
FSW.

External Frontend [x]: 350, "Touchstone The .s2p file does not cover the used frequency.
Touchstone file insuffi- file frequency range
Correct the file or select a different correction file.
cient frequency range insufficient"

"<filename>.s2p has -150, "String data The .s2p file does not have the correct syntax.
wrong file format" error"
Correct the file.
(Result for [SENSe:
]EFRontend:
ALIGnment<ch>:FILE
on page 1128)

-256, "File name not The specified .s2p file does not exist.
found"
Correct the path and filename and make sure that
(Result for [SENSe: the file is stored on the instrument under
]EFRontend: C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\external_frontends\
ALIGnment<ch>:FILE <frontend_type>\touchstonefiles.
on page 1128)

Touchstone file errors

Some errors concerning .s2p correction files do not cause warnings in the status bar
and do not provide results in the system error queue, but do display messages or
return errors in remote control.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 467

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Problems with connection

If you cannot connect to the external frontend, check the status bar or error queue of
the FSW for error messages (see also "Error messages" on page 465).
If no messages are available, check the "LAN" and "POWER" status LEDs on the
external frontend. Permanent red lights indicate an error, usually hardware problems,
e.g. if the fans are off. In this case, the instrument is automatically put in a safe (error)
state to avoid damage. A LAN connection is no longer possible. Try switching the
external frontend off and on again.
If the problem persists, contact Rohde & Schwarz service, as described in Sec-
tion 14.7, "Contacting customer support", on page 1558.

Problems during operation

Problem: The analyzer does not show the signal sent by a signal generator using the
same external frontend............................................................................................... 468
Problem: My FSW85 does not show the signal measured with an external frontend. 468

Problem: The analyzer does not show the signal sent by a signal generator using
the same external frontend
Possible Solution: Although the generator and the analyzer are set to the same fre-
quency, possibly they are not using the same IF for conversion.
Make sure that both instruments are set to the same Frequency Band Configuration in
the Frontend configuration settings.

Problem: My FSW85 does not show the signal measured with an external fron-
tend
Possible Solution:
Select the other RF Input connector in the Radio frequency input (see "Radio Fre-
quency State" on page 365). The external frontend settings apply to both RF input con-
nectors on the FSW85, so you must select the connector you use.

7.2.8 Output settings

Access: [Input/Output] > "Output"

The FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices.
For details on connectors, refer to the FSW Getting Started manual, "Front / Rear
Panel View" sections.

Providing trigger signals as output is described in Section 7.2.9, "Trigger input/output

settings", on page 470.
Providing output for LISN control in EMI measurements is described in Sec-
tion 6.13.4.3, "LISN control settings", on page 351.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 468

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Data Output.................................................................................................................469
Noise Source Control.................................................................................................. 470

Data Output
Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the FSW.
For restrictions and additional information, see Section 7.2.1.2, "IF and video signal
output", on page 362.
"IF" The measured IF value is provided at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output
connector.
For bandwidths up to 80 MHZ, the IF output is provided at the speci-
fied "IF Out Frequency".
If an optional bandwidth extension FSW-B160/-B320/-B512 is used,
the measured IF value is available at the "IF WIDE OUTPUT" con-
nector. The frequency at which this value is output is determined
automatically. It is displayed as the "IF Wide Out Frequency". For
details on the used frequencies, see the specifications document.
This setting is not available for bandwidths larger than 512 MHz.
"2ND IF" The measured IF value is provided at the "IF OUT 2 GHz/ IF OUT
5 GHz" output connector, if available, at a frequency of 2 GHz and
with a bandwidth of 2 GHz. The availability of this connector depends
on the instrument model.
This setting is not available if the optional 2 GHz / 5 GHz bandwidth
extension (FSW-B2000/B5000) is active.
"Video" The displayed video signal (i.e. the filtered and detected IF signal) is
available at the IF/VIDEO/DEMOD output connector. This setting is
required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output. It is
not available for frequency sweeps or I/Q measurements.
Remote command:
OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] on page 1191
OUTPut:IF:IFFRequency on page 1192
SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume on page 1193

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 469

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Noise Source Control

Enables or disables the 28 V voltage supply for an external noise source connected to
the "Noise source control / Power sensor") connector. By switching the supply voltage
for an external noise source on or off in the firmware, you can enable or disable the
device as required.
External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below
the noise floor of the FSW itself, for example when measuring the noise level of an
amplifier.
In this case, you can first connect an external noise source (whose noise power level is
known in advance) to the FSW and measure the total noise power. From this value,
you can determine the noise power of the FSW. Then when you measure the power
level of the actual DUT, you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to
obtain the power level of the DUT.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:NSOurce on page 1191

7.2.9 Trigger input/output settings

Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger In/Out"

Or: [TRIG] > "Trigger Config" > "Trigger In/Out"
The FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data. Alter-
natively, the internal trigger signal used by the FSW can be output for use by other
connected devices.

Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in Section 7.2.1.1, "Receiving

and providing trigger signals", on page 361 and Section 7.2.10, "How to output a trig-
ger signal", on page 472.

Trigger 2/3

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 470

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

The trigger input and output functionality depends on how the variable "Trigger Input/
Output" connectors are used.
"Trigger 1" "Trigger 1" is input only.
"Trigger 2" Defines the usage of the variable "Trigger Input/Output" connector on
the front panel
(not available for FSW85 models with 2 RF input connectors)
"Trigger 3" Defines the usage of the variable "Trigger 3 Input/Output" connector
on the rear panel
"Input" The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by
the FSW. Trigger input parameters are available in the "Trigger" dia-
log box.
"Output" The FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by
connected devices.
Further trigger parameters are available for the connector.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:DIRection on page 1233

Output Type ← Trigger 2/3

Type of signal to be sent to the output
"Device Trig- (Default) Sends a trigger when the FSW triggers.
gered"
"Trigger Sends a (high level) trigger when the FSW is in "Ready for trigger"
Armed" state.
This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus:OPERation reg-
ister (bit 5), as well as by a low-level signal at the "AUX" port (pin 9).
For details, see Section 12.2.2.4, "STATus:OPERation register",
on page 829 and the FSW Getting Started manual.
"User Defined" Sends a trigger when you select "Send Trigger".
In this case, further parameters are available for the output signal.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:OTYPe on page 1234

Level ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3

Defines whether a high (1) or low (0) constant signal is sent to the trigger output con-
nector (for "Output Type": "User Defined".
The trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined here. For
example, for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is output to the connector until you
select the Send Trigger function. Then, a low pulse is provided.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 471

FSW Common measurement settings
Data input and output

Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:LEVel on page 1234

Pulse Length ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3

Defines the duration of the pulse (pulse width) sent as a trigger to the output connector.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth on page 1235

Send Trigger ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3

Sends a user-defined trigger to the output connector immediately.
Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined
by the output Level setting. For example, for "Level" = "High", a constant high signal is
output to the connector until you select the "Send Trigger" function. Then, a low pulse
is sent.
Which pulse level is sent is indicated by a graphic on the button.
Remote command:
OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:IMMediate on page 1235

7.2.10 How to output a trigger signal

Using the variable Trigger 2/3 connector of the FSW, the internal trigger signal can be
output for use by other connected devices.
For details on the connectors see the FSW "Getting Started" manual.

To output a trigger to a connected device

1. Select [Trigger] > "Trigger Config".

2. Switch to the "Trigger In/Out" tab of "Trigger and Gate".

3. Set the trigger to be used to "Output".

(Note: Trigger 2 is output to the front panel connector, Trigger 3 is output to the rear
panel connector. For FSW85 models with two RF input connectors, Trigger 2 is not
available.)

4. Define whether the trigger signal is to be output automatically ("Output Type" =

"Device triggered" or "Trigger Armed") or whether you want to start output manually
("Output Type" = "User-defined").

5. For manual output: Specify the constant signal level and the length of the trigger
pulse to be output. Note that the level of the trigger pulse is opposite to the con-
stant output "Level" setting (compare the graphic on "Send Trigger").

6. Connect a device that will receive the trigger signal to the configured Trigger 2/3
connector.

7. Start a measurement and wait for an internal trigger, or select "Send Trigger".
The configured trigger is output to the connector.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 472

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

7.3 Frequency and span configuration

The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum to be
analyzed with the FSW.
● Impact of the frequency and span settings........................................................... 473
● Frequency and span settings................................................................................ 475
● Keeping the center frequency stable - signal tracking.......................................... 479
● How to define the frequency range....................................................................... 480
● How to move the center frequency through the frequency range......................... 480

7.3.1 Impact of the frequency and span settings

Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here
for a better understanding of the required configuration.
● Defining the scope of the measurement - frequency range.................................. 473
● Stepping through the frequency range - center frequency stepsize..................... 473
● Coping with large frequency ranges - logarithmic scaling.....................................474

7.3.1.1 Defining the scope of the measurement - frequency range

The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed. It
can either be defined as a span around a center frequency, or as a range from a start
to a stop frequency. Furthermore, the full span comprising the entire possible fre-
quency range can be selected, or a zero span. The full span option allows you to per-
form an overview measurement over the entire span. Using the "Last Span" function
you can easily switch back to the detailed measurement of a specific frequency range.
For sinusoidal signals, the center frequency can be defined automatically by the FSW
as the highest frequency level in the frequency span (see "Adjusting the Center Fre-
quency Automatically (Auto Frequency)" on page 533).

7.3.1.2 Stepping through the frequency range - center frequency stepsize

Using the arrow keys you can move the center frequency in discrete steps through the
available frequency range. The step size by which the center frequency is increased or
decreased is defined by the "Center Frequency Stepsize".

The "Center Frequency Stepsize" also defines the step size by which the value is
increased or decreased when you use the rotary knob to change the center frequency;
however, the rotary knob moves in steps of only 1/10 of the "Center Frequency
Stepsize" to allow for a more precise setting.

By default, the step size is set in relation to the selected span or resolution bandwidth
(for zero span measurements). In some cases, however, it may be useful to set the
step size to other values.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 473

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

For example, to analyze signal harmonics, you can define the step size to be equal to
the center frequency. In this case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre-
quency of another harmonic. Similarly, you can define the step size to be equal to the
current marker frequency.

7.3.1.3 Coping with large frequency ranges - logarithmic scaling

In a linear display, the frequencies are distributed linearly across the x-axis. That
means the entire frequency range is divided by the number of sweep points, and the
distance between sweep points is equal. Linear scaling is useful to determine precise
frequencies within a small range.

1 MHz 10 MHz

Figure 7-27: Linear x-axis scaling: the distance between the sweep points is equal, e.g. 200 kHz

However, if high and low frequencies appear in the same display, it is difficult to deter-
mine individual frequencies precisely or to distinguish frequencies that are close
together.
In a logarithmic display, lower frequencies are distributed among a much larger area of
the display, while high frequencies are condensed to a smaller area. Now it is much
easier to distinguish several lower frequencies, as they are spread over a wider area.
Logarithmic scaling is useful for overview measurements when a large frequency
range must be displayed in one diagram.
Note that logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed.
However, with logarithmic scaling, the frequency resolution between two sweep points
deteriorates with higher frequencies.

1 Hz 1 MHz 1 GHz

Figure 7-28: Logarithmic x-axis scaling: the distance between sweep points is variable

In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz, the distance is a few Hz. Between 100 MHz and
1 GHz, the distance is several MHz.
Thus, for logarithmic x-axis scaling, the number of sweep points must be sufficiently
high in order to distinguish high frequencies precisely. The resolution bandwidth should
cover at least one sweep point (that means: the distance between two sweep points
should not exceed the RBW). If this condition is not met, signals or interferers could be
missed, especially narrowband interferers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 474

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

Insufficient measurement points - Resolution filter bandwidth Resolution filter bandwidth covers
Filter may miss a signal covers one measurement point several measurement points

7.3.2 Frequency and span settings

Access: "Overview" > "Frequency"

For more information see Section 7.3.4, "How to define the frequency range",
on page 480.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 475

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

Center Frequency....................................................................................................... 476

Span............................................................................................................................476
Start / Stop.................................................................................................................. 477
Frequency Axis Scaling...............................................................................................477
Full Span..................................................................................................................... 477
Zero Span................................................................................................................... 477
Last Span.................................................................................................................... 477
Center Frequency Stepsize.........................................................................................478
Frequency Offset.........................................................................................................478

Center Frequency
Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz.
The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span.
span > 0: spanmin/2 ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax – spanmin/2
zero span: 0 Hz ≤ fcenter ≤ fmax
fmax and spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the specifications docu-
ment.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1195

Span
Defines the frequency span. The center frequency is kept constant. The following
range is allowed:
span = 0: 0 Hz
span >0:
spanmin ≤ f span ≤ f max
fmax and spanmin are specified in the specifications document.
For more information, see Section 7.3.1.1, "Defining the scope of the measurement -
frequency range", on page 473.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 476

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1198

Start / Stop
Defines the start and stop frequencies.
The following range of values is allowed:
fmin ≤ fstart ≤ fmax – spanmin
fmin + spanmin ≤ fstop ≤ fmax
fmin, fmax and spanmin are specified in the specifications document.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt on page 1198
[SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP on page 1199

Frequency Axis Scaling

Switches between linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis.
Logarithmic scaling is only available if R&S FSW-K54 is installed and only for fstop ≥1.4*
fstart.
By default, the frequency axis has linear scaling. Logarithmic scaling of the frequency
axis, however, is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhan-
ces the resolution of the lower frequencies. On the other hand, high frequencies get
more crowded and become harder to distinguish.
For more information see Section 7.3.1.3, "Coping with large frequency ranges - loga-
rithmic scaling", on page 474.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing on page 1194

Full Span
Sets the span to the full frequency range of the FSW specified in the specifications
document. This setting is useful for overview measurements.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN:FULL on page 1198

Zero Span
Sets the span to 0 Hz (zero span). The x-axis becomes the time axis with the grid lines
corresponding to 1/10 of the current sweep time ("SWT").
For details see Section 6.1, "Basic measurements", on page 130.
Remote command:
FREQ:SPAN 0Hz, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1198

Last Span
Sets the span to the previous value. With this function you can switch between an
overview measurement and a detailed measurement quickly.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:SPAN on page 1198

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 477

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

Center Frequency Stepsize

Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when
the arrow keys are pressed. When you use the rotary knob the center frequency
changes in much smaller steps (1/10 the size as for the arrow keys).
The step size can be coupled to the span (span > 0) or the resolution bandwidth (span
= 0), or it can be manually set to a fixed value.
For more details see Section 7.3.1.2, "Stepping through the frequency range - center
frequency stepsize", on page 473.
"0.1 * Span" / Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 % of the span /
"0.1 * RBW" RBW.
This is the default setting.
"0.5 * Span" / Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the span /
"0.5 * RBW" RBW.
"x * Span" / Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined fac-
"x * RBW" tor of the span / RBW. The "X-Factor" defines the percentage of the
span / RBW.
Values between 1 and 100 % in steps of 1 % are allowed. The default
setting is 10 %.
"= Center" Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes
the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth. The
used value is indicated in the "Value" field.
"= Marker" This setting is only available if a marker is active.
Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the
coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth. The used
value is indicated in the "Value" field.
"Manual" Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency. Enter the step size
in the "Value" field.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK on page 1197
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor on page 1197
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP on page 1196

Frequency Offset
Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x-axis by the defined offset.
This parameter has no effect on the instrument's hardware, on the captured data, or on
data processing. It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre-
quency values are displayed. Thus, the x-axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a
constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies. However, if it shows frequencies rela-
tive to the signal's center frequency, it is not shifted.
A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted
by the measurement setup, for example.
The allowed values range from -1 THz to 1 THz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet on page 1198

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 478

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

7.3.3 Keeping the center frequency stable - signal tracking

If the signal drifts on the display but you want to keep the center frequency on the sig-
nal peak, the center frequency can be adjusted automatically using signal tracking. In
this case, the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected
center frequency. After each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum signal
found within the searched bandwidth. If no maximum signal above a defined threshold
value is found in the searched bandwidth, the center frequency remains unchanged.
The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines
which are labeled as "TRK".

Signal Tracking
Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" > "Signal Tracking" tab
Defines the settings for signal tracking. These settings are only available for spans > 0.
For more details see Section 7.3.3, "Keeping the center frequency stable - signal track-
ing", on page 479.
If activated, after each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum level of the
specified "Signal Track Trace" found within the searched "Tracking Bandwidth".
If the signal level does not pass the "Tracking Threshold", the center frequency is not
changed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] on page 1199
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth on page 1200

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 479

FSW Common measurement settings
Frequency and span configuration

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold on page 1200

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe on page 1201

7.3.4 How to define the frequency range

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure the frequency

and span settings. For details on individual functions and settings see Section 7.3.2,
"Frequency and span settings", on page 475.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.7.2, "Defining the frequency and span", on page 1193.

To configure the frequency and span

Frequency and span settings can be configured via the "Frequency" dialog box. Signal
tracking is configured in the "Signal Tracking" tab of this dialog box.
1. To display the "Frequency" dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select "Frequency" from the "Overview".
● Select [FREQ] and then "Frequency Config".
● Select [SPAN] and then "Frequency Config".

2. Define the frequency range using one of the following methods:

● Define the "Center Frequency" and "Span".
● Define the "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency".
● To perform a measurement in the time domain, define the "Center Frequency"
and select "Zero Span".
● To perform a measurement over the entire available frequency range, select
"Full Span".
● To return to the previously set frequency range, select "Last Span".

7.3.5 How to move the center frequency through the frequency range

In some cases it may be useful to move the center frequency through a larger fre-
quency range, for example from one harmonic to another.

1. In the "Frequency" dialog box, define the "Center Frequency Stepsize". This is the
size by which the center frequency is to be increased or decreased in each step.
Enter a manual or relative value, or set the step size to the current center fre-
quency or marker value. To move from one harmonic to the next, use the center
frequency or marker value.

2. Select the "Center Frequency" dialog field.

3. Use the arrow keys to move the center frequency in discrete steps through the
available frequency range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 480

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

7.4 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

In the Spectrum application, measurement results usually consist of the measured sig-
nal levels (amplitudes) displayed on the vertical (y-)axis for the determined frequency
spectrum or for the measurement time (horizontal, x-axis). The settings for the vertical
axis, regarding amplitude and scaling, are described here.
● Impact of the vertical axis settings........................................................................ 481
● Amplitude settings.................................................................................................483
● Scaling the y-axis.................................................................................................. 491
● How to optimize the amplitude display..................................................................493

7.4.1 Impact of the vertical axis settings

Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here
for a better understanding of the required configuration.
● Reference level..................................................................................................... 481
● RF attenuation.......................................................................................................482
● Scaling.................................................................................................................. 483

7.4.1.1 Reference level

The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without
distortion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured
correctly, which is indicated by the "IF Overload" status display.
Internally, the reference level is also used to determine the optimum hardware settings
for the FSW. The defined reference level should correspond with the maximum expec-
ted RF input level.

When determining the expected input level, consider that the power from all input sig-
nals contribute to the total power. The reference level must be higher than the total
power from all signals.

The optimum reference level for the current measurement settings can be set automat-
ically by the FSW (see "Reference Level" on page 486).
The reference level determines the amplitude represented by the topmost grid line in
the display. When you change the reference level, the measurement is not restarted;
the results are merely shifted in the display. Only if the reference level changes due to
a coupled RF attenuation (see "Attenuation Mode / Value" on page 488), the measure-
ment is restarted.
In general, the FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input. The level display is
calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal. In the default state, the
level is displayed at a power of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the known input impedance, con-
version to other units is possible.
See "Impedance" on page 366.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 481

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Reference level offset

If the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the FSW, you can define an
(arithmetic) offset to the reference level so the application shows correct power results.
All displayed power level results are shifted by this value, and the scaling of the y-axis
is changed accordingly.
To determine the required offset, consider the external attenuation or gain applied to
the input signal. For attenuation, define a positive offset so the FSW increases the dis-
played power values.
If an external gain is applied, define a negative offset so the FSW decreases the dis-
played power values.
Note, however, that the internal reference level (used to adjust the hardware settings to
the expected signal optimally) ignores any "Reference Level Offset". Thus, it is impor-
tant to keep in mind the actual power level the FSW must handle, and not to rely on the
displayed reference level.
internal reference level = displayed reference level - offset

Example
1. The initial reference level is 2 dBm with no offset.
Both the displayed reference level and the internal reference level are 2 dBm.

2. An offset of 3 dB is defined.
The displayed reference level is adjusted to 5 dBm.
The internal reference level remains at 2 dBm.
(5 dBm (displayed ref level) - 3 dB (offset) = 2 dBm)

3. Now the user decreases the reference level to 1 dBm.

The displayed reference level is adjusted to 1 dBm.
The internal reference level is adjusted to:
1 dBm (displayed ref level) - 3 dB (offset) = -2 dBm.

7.4.1.2 RF attenuation

The attenuation is meant to protect the input mixer from high RF input levels. The level
at the input mixer is determined by the set RF attenuation according to the formula:
"levelmixer = levelinput – RF attenuation"

The maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm.

Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which is indi-
cated by the "RF Overload" status display. Furthermore, higher input levels may dam-
age the instrument. Therefore, the required RF attenuation is determined automatically
according to the reference level by default.
High attenuation levels also avoid intermodulation. On the other hand, attenuation
must be compensated for by re-amplifying the signal levels after the mixer. Thus, high

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 482

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

attenuation values cause the inherent noise (i.e the noise floor) to rise and the sensitiv-
ity of the analyzer decreases.
The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenua-
tion. The highest sensitivity is obtained at an RF attenuation of 0 dB. Each additional
10 dB step reduces the sensitivity by 10 dB, i.e. the displayed noise is increased by 10
dB. To measure a signal with an improved signal-to-noise ratio, decrease the RF
attenuation.

For ideal sinusoidal signals, the displayed signal level is independent of the RF attenu-
ation.

Depending on the type of measurement you must find a compromise between a low
noise floor and high intermodulation levels, and protecting the instrument from high
input levels. You achieve this best by letting the FSW determine the optimum level
automatically (see "Attenuation Mode / Value" on page 488).

Electronic attenuation
If the optional electronic attenuation hardware is installed on the FSW, you can also
activate an electronic attenuator. For details, see "Using Electronic Attenuation"
on page 489.

7.4.1.3 Scaling

In a linear display, the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid.
That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in
the grid (10) and each row corresponds to 1/10 of the total range. Linear scaling is use-
ful to determine precise levels for a small range of values. However, if large and small
values appear in the same display, it is difficult to determine individual values precisely
or to distinguish values that are close together.
In a logarithmic display, smaller values are distributed among a much larger area of the
display, while large values are condensed to a smaller area. Now it is much easier to
distinguish several lower values, as they are spread over a wider area. Logarithmic
scaling is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display. Loga-
rithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarithmic units (dB, dBm
etc.).
In addition to linear or logarithmic scaling, the vertical axis can be set to display either
absolute or relative values. Absolute values show the measured levels, while relative
values show the difference between the measured level and the defined reference
level. Relative values are indicated in percent for linear scaling, and in dB for logarith-
mic scaling.

7.4.2 Amplitude settings

Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 483

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Amplitude settings determine how the FSW must process or display the expected input
power levels.
Configuring amplitude settings allows you to:
● Adapt the instrument hardware to the expected maximum signal level by setting
the Reference Level to this maximum
● Consider an external attenuator or preamplifier (using the "Offset").
● Optimize the SNR of the measurement for low signal levels by configuring the Ref-
erence Level as high as possible without introducing compression, clipping or over-
load. Use early amplification by the preamplifier and a low attenuation.
● Optimize the SNR for high signal levels and ensure that the instrument hardware is
not damaged, using high attenuation and AC coupling (for DC input voltage).
● Adapt the reference impedance for power results when measuring in a 75-Ohm
system by connecting an external matching pad to the RF input.

Using external frontends

For an active external frontend, the amplitude settings refer to the RF input at the
external frontend, not the levels at the RF input of the FSW. You can configure the
attenuation at the external frontend and the analyzer separately. Electronic attenuation,
preamplifier and noise cancellation are not available. Input coupling is always DC.
Impedance is always 50 Ω.

Amplitude settings for input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface are descri-
bed in the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.7.4.1, "Amplitude settings", on page 1210.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 484

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 485

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Figure 7-29: Amplitude settings for active external frontend

Reference Level.......................................................................................................... 486

└ Shifting the Display (Offset).......................................................................... 487
└ Unit................................................................................................................487
└ Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level)...............................488
External Frontend Attenuation.................................................................................... 488
Attenuation Mode / Value............................................................................................ 488
Using Electronic Attenuation....................................................................................... 489
Input Settings.............................................................................................................. 490
└ Preamplifier...................................................................................................490
└ Ext. PA Correction.........................................................................................490
Noise Cancellation...................................................................................................... 491

Reference Level
Defines the expected maximum reference level. Signal levels above this value are pos-
sibly not measured correctly. Signals above the reference level are indicated by an "IF
Overload" or "OVLD" status display.
The reference level can also be used to scale power diagrams; the reference level is
then used for the calculation of the maximum on the y-axis.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 486

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Since the hardware of the FSW is adapted according to this value, it is recommended
that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level. Thus
you ensure an optimal measurement (no compression, good signal-to-noise ratio).
For details, see Section 7.4.1.1, "Reference level", on page 481.
Note that for input from the External Mixer (R&S FSW-B21) the maximum reference
level also depends on the conversion loss, see "Reference level" on page 418.
Note that for input from the External Mixer (R&S FSW-B21) the maximum reference
level also depends on the conversion loss; see the FSW base unit user manual for
details.
For an active external frontend, the reference level refers to the RF input at the exter-
nal frontend, not the levels at the RF input of the FSW. The hardware is adjusted to the
defined reference level optimally for input signals with a crest factor of 10 dB. Thus, the
required reference level for an optimal measurement can differ depending on the crest
factor of the input signal.
See "External Frontend Connection State" on page 453.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
on page 1211

Shifting the Display (Offset) ← Reference Level

Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level. In some
result displays, the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly.
Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the FSW so
the application shows correct power results. All displayed power level results are shif-
ted by this value.
The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.01 dB steps.
Note, however, that the internal reference level (used to adjust the hardware settings to
the expected signal) ignores any "Reference Level Offset". Thus, it is important to keep
in mind the actual power level the FSW must handle. Do not rely on the displayed ref-
erence level (internal reference level = displayed reference level - offset).
For details, see "Reference level offset" on page 482.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:
OFFSet on page 1211

Unit ← Reference Level

The FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input.
In the default state, the level is displayed at a power level of 1 mW (= dBm). Via the
known input impedance (50 Ω or 75 Ω, see "Impedance" on page 366), conversion to
other units is possible.
Additional units are available only if the R&S FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option is
installed. These additional "dBx/MHz" units are normalized to the pulse bandwidth and
intended to be used only for EMI and EMC measurements. As opposed to the common
dBm/Hz and dBm/MHz units, they are not suitable to measure power densities in the
spectrum application.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 487

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Remote command:
INPut:IMPedance on page 1115
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer on page 1211

Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) ← Reference Level

Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at
the FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the
preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full-scale level) are adjusted. As a result,
the signal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are mini-
mized.
To determine the required reference level, a level measurement is performed on the
FSW.
If necessary, you can optimize the reference level further. Decrease the attenuation
level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs, then decrease
the reference level in the same way.
You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary (see
"Changing the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Manual)" on page 534).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 1240

External Frontend Attenuation

If an external frontend is active, you can configure the attenuation for the external fron-
tend and the analyzer separately.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW User Manual.
When using an external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is available.
The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference
level (Auto mode). Automatic attenuation ensures that no overload occurs at the RF
Input connector for the current reference level. It is the default setting.
In "Manual" mode, you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps (down to 0 dB). Other
entries are rounded to the next integer value. The range is specified in the specifica-
tions document. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenua-
tion, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is dis-
played.
NOTICE! Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels. When decreasing the
attenuation manually, ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level
allowed at the RF input, as an overload can lead to hardware damage.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation on page 1212
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1213

Attenuation Mode / Value

Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the FSW.
This function is not available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 488

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference

level (Auto mode). Automatic attenuation ensures that no overload occurs at the RF
Input connector for the current reference level. It is the default setting.
Note: Using an external frontend. If an external frontend is active, you can configure
the attenuation for the external frontend and the analyzer separately. When using an
external frontend, only mechanical attenuation is available.
For more information, see "External frontend attenuation vs. analyzer attenuation"
on page 448.
For more information, see the FSW base unit user manual.
By default and when no (optional) electronic attenuation is available, mechanical
attenuation is applied.
In "Manual" mode, you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps (down to 0 dB). Other
entries are rounded to the next integer value. The range is specified in the specifica-
tions document. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenua-
tion, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is dis-
played.
NOTICE! Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels. When decreasing the
attenuation manually, ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level
allowed at the RF input, as an overload can lead to hardware damage.
For details, see Section 7.4.1.2, "RF attenuation", on page 482.
Remote command:
INPut:ATTenuation on page 1212
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1213
Defining attenuation for the analyzer when using an external frontend:
INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation:AUTO on page 1215
INPut:SANalyzer:ATTenuation on page 1215

Using Electronic Attenuation

If the (optional) Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the FSW, you can also
activate an electronic attenuator.
In "Auto" mode, the settings are defined automatically; in "Manual" mode, you can
define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately.
For an active external frontend, electronic attenuation is not available.
Note: Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies (or center frequencies
in zero span) above 15 GHz.
In "Auto" mode, RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as
possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required. Mechanical attenua-
tion can provide a better signal-to-noise ratio, however.
When you switch off electronic attenuation, the RF attenuation is automatically set to
the same mode (auto/manual) as the electronic attenuation was set to. Thus, the RF
attenuation can be set to automatic mode, and the full attenuation is provided by the
mechanical attenuator, if possible.
The electronic attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps. If the electronic attenuation is
on, the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 5 dB steps. Other entries are rounded
to the next lower integer value.
For the FSW85, the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 489

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation, the reference
level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "limit reached" is displayed in the status
bar.
Remote command:
INPut:EATT:STATe on page 1214
INPut:EATT:AUTO on page 1214
INPut:EATT on page 1214

Input Settings
Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal, as well.
The parameters "Input Coupling" and "Impedance" are identical to those in the "Input"
settings.
See Section 7.2.2, "Input source settings", on page 364.

Preamplifier ← Input Settings

If the (optional) internal preamplifier hardware is installed on the FSW, a preamplifier
can be activated for the RF input signal.
You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low output power.
Note: If an optional external preamplifier is activated, the internal preamplifier is auto-
matically disabled, and vice versa.
For an active external frontend, a preamplifier is not available.
This function is not available for input from the (optional) "Digital Baseband" interface.
For all FSW models except for FSW85, the following settings are available:
"Off" Deactivates the preamplifier.
"15 dB" The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB.
"30 dB" The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB.
For older FSW43/FSW50/FSW67 models, the input signal is always ampilfied by about
30 dB when the preamplifier is active.
For FSW85 models, no preamplifier is available.
Remote command:
INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 1217
INPut:GAIN[:VALue] on page 1217

Ext. PA Correction ← Input Settings

This function is only available if an external preamplifier is connected to the FSW, and
only for frequencies above 1 GHz. For details on connection, see the preamplifier's
documentation.
Using an external preamplifier, you can measure signals from devices under test with
low output power, using measurement devices which feature a low sensitivity and do
not have a built-in RF preamplifier.
When you connect the external preamplifier, the FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P)
file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the
preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the FSW, the preamplifier is
permanently on and ready to use. However, you must enable data correction based on
the stored data explicitly on the FSW using this setting.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 490

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

When enabled, the FSW automatically compensates the magnitude and phase charac-
teristics of the external preamplifier in the measurement results. Any internal preampli-
fier, if available, is disabled.
An active external preamplifier is also included in the calculation of the combined user-
defined frequency response correction filter and displayed in the preview for SnP files
(see "Preview" on page 778).
For FSW85 models with two RF inputs, you can enable correction from the external
preamplifier for each input individually, but not for both at the same time.
When disabled, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains
connected.
Remote command:
INPut:EGAin[:STATe] on page 1216

Noise Cancellation
The FSW can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer, which
increases the dynamic range.
In this case, a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried
out. The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that
is being analyzed (first active trace only).
The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu-
tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when-
ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the
screen. To enable the correction function after changing one of these settings, activate
it again. A new reference measurement is carried out.
Noise cancellation is also available in zero span.
For an active external frontend, noise cancellation is not available. See "External Fron-
tend Connection State" on page 453.
Currently, noise cancellation is only available for the following trace detectors (see
"Detector" on page 626):
● RMS
● Average
● Sample
● Positive peak
Remote command:
[SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1212

7.4.3 Scaling the y-axis

The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here.
Access: "Overview" > "Amplitude" > "Scale" tab
Or: [AMPT] > "Scale Config"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.7.4, "Configuring the vertical axis (amplitude, scaling)", on page 1210.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 491

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Range..........................................................................................................................492
Ref Level Position....................................................................................................... 492
Auto Scale Once......................................................................................................... 492
Scaling........................................................................................................................ 493

Range
Defines the displayed y-axis range in dB.
The default value is 100 dB.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 1218

Ref Level Position

Defines the reference level position, i.e. the position of the maximum AD converter
value on the level axis in %.
0 % corresponds to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Values from -120 % to +280 % are available.
Larger values are useful for small scales, such as a power range of 10 dB or 20 dB,
and low signal levels, for example 60 dB below the reference level. In this case, large
reference level position values allow you to see the trace again.
For spectrograms, this value defines the position of the reference level value within the
span covered by the color map. In this case, the value is given in %, where 0 % corre-
sponds to the maximum (right end) and 100 % to the minimum (left end) of the color
map.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
on page 1219

Auto Scale Once

Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis-
played for the current measurement settings.
The display is only set once; it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are
changed again.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 492

FSW Common measurement settings
Amplitude and vertical axis configuration

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
on page 1218

Scaling
Defines the scaling method for the y-axis.
For more information, see Section 7.4.1.3, "Scaling", on page 483.
"Logarithmic" Logarithmic scaling (only available for logarithmic units - dB..., and A,
V, Watt)
"Linear with Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal
Unit"
"Linear Per- Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100
cent"
"Absolute" The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer-
ence level (not available for "Linear Percent")
"Relative" The scaling is in dB, relative to the reference level (only available for
logarithmic units - dB...). The upper line of the grid (reference level) is
always at 0 dB.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 1220
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE
on page 1218

7.4.4 How to optimize the amplitude display

This section gives you some advice on how to optimize the display of the measured
signal amplitudes depending on the required evaluation.

1. Perform a measurement with the default settings to get an impression of the values
to be expected.

2. Use the "Auto Level" function ([AUTO] menu) to optimize the reference level.

3. Use the "Auto Scale Once" function ([AUTO] menu) to optimize the scaling.

4. To determine a precise level at a specific point in the signal:

● Reduce the "Range" of the y-axis to a small area around the required level. If
necessary, change the "Ref Level Position" so the required range remains visi-
ble.
● Select "Linear with Unit" scaling.
Now you can set a marker at the point in question and read the result.

5. To detect a spurious signal close to the noise floor:

● Set the "RF Attenuation" to "Manual" mode and reduce the "Value" to lower the
noise floor.
● Select "Relative" - "Logarithmic" scaling.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 493

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Now you can determine if any spurious levels of a certain size are visible.

7.5 Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

The basic bandwidth, filter and sweep settings that apply to most measurements are
described here. These parameters define how the data is measured: how much data is
collected internally and which filters are used.
● Impact of the bandwidth, filter and sweep settings............................................... 494
● Bandwidth, filter and sweep settings.....................................................................500

7.5.1 Impact of the bandwidth, filter and sweep settings

The bandwidth, filter and sweep settings are closely related and interdependent. The
values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected
filter type. In addition, these settings have an impact on other measurement parame-
ters. The following equation shows the interdependency of these settings:
TMIN = K*Span/RBW2

where K = Filter constant

By default, a Gaussian filter is used. The resolution bandwidth, the video bandwidth
and the "Sweep Time" are set automatically according to the set span, and default cou-
pling is used. Thus, the following settings are applied:
RBW = Span/100
VBW = RBW
"Sweep Time" = Tmin for set Span, RBW, VBW

When defining the bandwidth and filter settings, consider the impact of the individual
settings on the other settings and the measurement result, as described in more detail
in the following sections.
● Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution bandwidth.................. 494
● Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth................................................... 495
● Coupling VBW and RBW...................................................................................... 496
● Coupling span and RBW.......................................................................................496
● How data is measured: the sweep type................................................................ 497
● Which data may pass: filter types......................................................................... 498
● How long the data is measured: Sweep Time.......................................................499
● How much data is measured: sweep points and sweep count............................. 499
● How often data is measured: sweep mode........................................................... 500

7.5.1.1 Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution bandwidth

The resolution bandwidth defines the 3 dB bandwidth of the resolution filter to be used.
An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed according to the passband characteristic of the
resolution filter (RBW), i.e. the signal display reflects the shape of the filter.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 494

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

A basic feature of a signal analyzer is being able to separate the spectral components
of a mixture of signals. The resolution at which the individual components can be sepa-
rated is determined by the resolution bandwidth. Selecting a resolution bandwidth that
is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components, i.e.
they are displayed as a single component. Smaller resolution bandwidths, however,
increase the required "Sweep Time".
Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is
smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth
is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3
dB precisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth
makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer.
The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth (1 Hz). If the bandwidth is
increased, the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth.
Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx. 5
dB (4.77 dB precisely). If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10, the displayed
noise increases by a factor of 10, i.e. 10 dB.
If there are large level differences between signals, the resolution is determined by
selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected. The measure
of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB
bandwidth (= shape factor).
For the FSW, the shape factor for bandwidths is < 5, i.e. the 60 dB bandwidth of the 30
kHz filter is <150 kHz.
The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths is won by longer sweep times
for the same span. The sweep time has to allow the resolution filters to settle during a
sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed.
If the RBW is too large, signal parts that are very far away (e.g. from a different signal)
are considered in the measurement and distort the results. The noise increases.
If the RBW is too small, parts of the signal are lost. As the displayed signal always
reflects the shape of the filter, select a bandwidth large enough so the displayed signal
reflects the entire shape of the filter.

7.5.1.2 Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth

The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace. Using video band-
widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth, only the signal average is
displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed. If pulsed signals are to
be measured, it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the
resolution bandwidth (VBW = 10 x RBW) for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured
correctly.
The level of a sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth. A sine wave
signal can therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small com-
pared with the resolution bandwidth, and thus be measured more accurately.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 495

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

RMS/Average detector and VBW

If an RMS detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus,
duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS or average detector no longer
occurs. However, the VBW is still considered when calculating the "Sweep Time". This
leads to a longer "Sweep Time" for small VBW values. Thus, you can reduce the VBW
value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector. Nor-
mally, if the RMS detector is used, the "Sweep Time" should be increased to get more
stable traces.
If an average detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is only bypassed if
the video filter is set to "Auto" mode. Use this mode to avoid duplicate trace averaging
with small VBWs.

7.5.1.3 Coupling VBW and RBW

The video bandwidth can be coupled to the resolution bandwidth automatically. In this
case, if the resolution bandwidth is changed, the video bandwidth is automatically
adjusted.
Coupling is recommended if a minimum "Sweep Time" is required for a selected reso-
lution bandwidth. Narrow video bandwidths require longer "Sweep Time"s due to the
longer settling time. Wide bandwidths reduce the signal/noise ratio.
Table 7-3: Overview of RBW/VBW ratios and recommendations for use

Ratio RBW/VBW Recommendation for use

1/1 Recommended for sinusoidal signals

This is the default setting for automatic coupling.

0.1 Recommended when the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured

correctly. The IF filter is exclusively responsible for the pulse shape. No
additional evaluation is performed by the video filter.

10 Recommended to suppress noise and pulsed signals in the video domain.

Manually set (0.001 to 1000) Recommended for other measurement requirements

7.5.1.4 Coupling span and RBW

The resolution bandwidth can be coupled to the span setting, either by a manually
defined factor or automatically. If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is
automatically adjusted. The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the
currently set frequency span/100.
The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz, 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the available channel filters are
not changed by the coupling.
With a span/RBW ratio of 100 and a screen resolution of 1000 pixels, each frequency
in the spectrum is displayed by 10 pixels. A span/RBW ratio of 1000 provides the high-
est resolution.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 496

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

7.5.1.5 How data is measured: the sweep type

In a standard analog frequency sweep, the local oscillator of the analyzer sweeps the
applied signal quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency to determine the fre-
quency spectrum.
Alternatively, the analyzer can sample signal levels over time at a defined frequency
and transform the data to a spectrum by Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT). Although
this measurement method requires additional calculations, it can provide results much
faster than the frequency sweep, in particular for small RBWs.
Which sweep mode is appropriate for the current measurement depends on the span,
RBW, VBW and "Sweep Time" settings. By default ("Auto" sweep type), the FSW auto-
matically uses the sweep type with the highest sweep rate depending on these mea-
surement settings.
For EMI measurements, the FSW automatically selects sweep mode for auto sweep
type. You can also select sweep mode manually.

Restrictions for FFT mode

FFT mode is not available when using 5-pole filters, channel filters or RRC filters, or
the quasi peak detector. In this case, sweep mode is used.
The same applies when an external generator is active (with the optional External Gen-
erator Control).
FFT mode is not available if if CISPR detectors are used.
(See Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors and dwell time", on page 338).

Optimization
In FFT mode, FFT analysis is performed to determine a spectrum of frequencies. Sev-
eral analysis steps are required to cover the entire span. The subspan which is cov-
ered by one FFT analysis depends on the RBW. The subspan cannot be defined
directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements.
Narrow subspans provide a higher dynamic range, and also allow you to perform mea-
surements near a carrier with a reduced reference level. With a wide subspan, the car-
rier and the useful signal are likely to be measured at the same time, in which case the
powers of both signals are summarized, so the reference level must be high enough to
consider this factor. With a narrow subspan, this is less likely to happen, so the refer-
ence level can be reduced.
For an optimal dynamic range, the narrowest possible subspan (depending on the
RBW) is used. Furthermore, the autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation
is activated to obtain the best control range of the A/D converter.
On the other hand, the narrower the subspan, the more steps are required to cover the
entire span, thus increasing analysis and calculation time. To optimize the sweep
rate, the widest possible subspan (depending on the RBW) is used.

For an optimal sweep rate, it is recommended that you set the "Sweep Time" to "Auto",
as well.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 497

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

For general purpose measurements, an "Auto" mode is available, which provides a

compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep. In this case, a
medium-sized subspan is used.

FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21)

The subspan optimation modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppression
of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use
the "Speed" mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in normal sweep mode.

FFT mode and EMI measurements (R&S FSW-K54)

For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), the subspan optimization mode
"Dynamic" is not supported. "Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization.

Optimization for zero span sweeps

For normal sweeps in the time domain (zero span), the optimization mode determines
the selection of the A/D converter prefilter, which depends on the RBW.
In "Dynamic" mode, the narrowest possible prefilter is used.
In "Speed" mode, the widest possible prefilter is used.
In "Auto" mode, a medium-sized prefilter is used.

Number of subspans
Several analysis steps are required to cover the entire span, in particular if the span
exceeds the maximum I/Q bandwidth for a single measurement. In this case, each FFT
analysis covers a subspan. The subspan cannot be defined directly, but it can be opti-
mized according to measurement requirements, as described above. The number of
required subspans is indicated in the sweep settings dialog box. Thus, you can deter-
mine the required measurement time for an individual span (and thus sweep point) as:
<Meas time subspan> = <sweep time> / <no. of subspans>

7.5.1.6 Which data may pass: filter types

While the filter is irrelevant when measuring individual narrowband signals (as long as
the signal remains within the RBW), the measurement result for broadband signals is
very dependant on the selected filter type and its shape. If the filter is too narrow, the
signal is distorted by the filter. If the filter is too wide, multiple signals can no longer be
distinguished. Generally, the smaller the filter width and the steeper its edges, the lon-
ger the settling time and thus the longer the "Sweep Time" must be.
All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters. Normal (3dB) Gaussian filters
are set by default. Some communication standards require different filters.
For a list of available filter types, see the specifications document.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 498

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Normal (3 dB) Gaussian filters

Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling
time. This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default.
The available Gaussian (3 dB) filters are listed in the FSW specifications document.

Channel filters
Channel filters are fairly steep but require a long settling time; they are useful for pulse
measurements in the time domain.

RRC filters
Root raised cosine filters are similar in shape to channel filters and are required by
some measurement standards.

5-Pole filters
5-Pole filters are very broad and allow for a large bandwidth to pass.

7.5.1.7 How long the data is measured: Sweep Time

Each filter has a settling time that must be awaited in order to obtain correct results.
Since the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth define the filter, the smaller of the
two determines the minimum "Sweep Time" required for the measurement. Allowed
values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW.
If the selected "Sweep Time" is too short for the selected bandwidth and span, level
measurement errors will occur. In this case, the FSW displays the error message
"Sweep time too low" and marks the indicated "Sweep Time" with a red bullet. Further-
more, a status bit indicates an error.
(For more information see Section 12.2.2.14, "STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register",
on page 837.)
The "Sweep Time" can be coupled to the span (not zero span), video bandwidth (VBW)
and resolution bandwidth (RBW) automatically. If the span, resolution bandwidth or
video bandwidth is changed, the "Sweep Time" is automatically adjusted.

Note that the "Sweep Time" only indicates how long data is captured; the time required
to process the captured data may be considerably longer, in particular for FFT mode.
For FFT mode, an estimated duration is indicated behind the "Sweep Time" in the
channel bar (for RF measurements only).

7.5.1.8 How much data is measured: sweep points and sweep count

By default, 1001 data points are determined in a single sweep. During the next sweep,
1001 new data points are collected, and so on. The number of sweep points defines
how much of the entire span is covered by a single data point. By increasing the num-
ber of sweep points you can increase the reliability of the individual data points and
thus the accuracy of the analyzed results. However, these data points are all stored on

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 499

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

the instrument, occupying a large amount of memory, and each sweep point increases
the overall measurement time.
The number of sweeps to be performed in single sweep mode is defined by the
"Sweep Count". Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one
sweep is performed. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram.
If the trace configurations "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, the "Sweep/
Average Count" also determines the number of averaging or maximum search proce-
dures (see "Analyzing several traces - trace mode" on page 620).
For details on how the number of sweep points and the sweep count affect the trace
results on the screen, see "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector"
on page 611.

7.5.1.9 How often data is measured: sweep mode

How often the spectrum is swept depends on the sweep mode. Either a certain number
of sweeps can be defined ("Sweep Count") which are performed in "Single Sweep"
mode, or the sweep is repeated continuously ("Continuous Sweep" mode).
By default, the data is collected for the specified number of sweeps and the corre-
sponding trace is displayed. When the next sweep is started, the previous trace is
deleted.
However, the data from a single sweep run can also be retained and displayed
together with the new data ("Continue Single Sweep" mode). This is particularly of
interest when using the trace configurations "Average" or "Max Hold" to take previously
recorded measurements into account for averaging/maximum search (see "Analyzing
several traces - trace mode" on page 620).

7.5.2 Bandwidth, filter and sweep settings

Access: "Overview" > "Bandwidth"

The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.7.3, "Configuring bandwidth and sweep settings", on page 1201.
How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in Section 6.1.2, "How to
perform a basic sweep measurement", on page 132.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 500

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Figure 7-30: Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 501

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Figure 7-31: Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display

RBW............................................................................................................................503
VBW............................................................................................................................ 503
Sweep Time................................................................................................................ 504
Span/RBW.................................................................................................................. 504
RBW/VBW...................................................................................................................504
Filter Type................................................................................................................... 505
Default Coupling..........................................................................................................505
Sweep/Average Count................................................................................................ 506
Sweep Points.............................................................................................................. 506
Optimization................................................................................................................ 506
Sweep Type................................................................................................................ 507
FFT Subspans.............................................................................................................508
Single Sweep / Run Single..........................................................................................508
Continuous Sweep / Run Cont....................................................................................508
Continue Single Sweep...............................................................................................509
Spectrogram Frames.................................................................................................. 509
└ Select Frame.................................................................................................509
└ Continue Frame............................................................................................ 509
└ Frame Count................................................................................................. 510
└ Clear Spectrogram........................................................................................510

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 502

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

RBW
Defines the resolution bandwidth. The available resolution bandwidths are specified in
the specifications document. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible
bandwidth.
If "Auto" is selected, the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the selected span (for span
> 0). If the span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted.
If the resolution bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the
"RBW" display in the channel bar.
For a list of supported filters, see the specifications document.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.1, "Separating signals by selecting an appropri-
ate resolution bandwidth", on page 494.
Note: Restrictions.
● For measurements on I/Q data in the frequency domain, the maximum RBW is
1 MHz.
● Some additional Gaussian filters are provided for special measurements, such as
5G NR spurious emissions measurements. They are only available if you enter the
value manually, not using the rotary knob or stepping through the filter values. They
are not supported by all applications. For these particular filters, gating is also pos-
sible. The following values indicate the 3-dB filter width:
– 51 kHz
– 150 kHz
– 250 kHz
– 400 kHz
– 450 kHz
– 6 MHz
– 8 MHz
● For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector, the 1 MHz RBW filter is not
available (see Section 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types",
on page 337).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1202

VBW
Defines the video bandwidth automatically or manually.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the trace using the video band-
width", on page 495.
"Auto" The video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth. If the
resolution bandwidth is changed, the video bandwidth is automatically
adjusted.
"Manual" For manual mode, define the bandwidth value. The available video
bandwidths are specified in the specifications document. Numeric
input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth.
If the video bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed
next to the "VBW" display in the channel bar.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 503

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1204
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo on page 1203
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:TYPE on page 1204

Sweep Time
Defines the duration of a single sweep, during which the defined number of sweep
points are measured. The "Sweep Time" can be defined automatically or manually.
The allowed "Sweep Time" depends on the device model; refer to the specifications
document.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.7, "How long the data is measured: Sweep
Time", on page 499.
Note: The "Sweep Time" only indicates how long data is captured; the time required to
process the captured data may be considerably longer, in particular for FFT mode. For
FFT mode, an estimated duration is indicated behind the "Sweep Time" in the channel
bar (for RF measurements only).
"Auto" The "Sweep Time" is coupled to the span (not zero span), video
bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW). If the span, reso-
lution bandwidth or video bandwidth is changed, the "Sweep Time" is
automatically adjusted.
"Manual" For manual mode, define the "Sweep Time". Allowed values depend
on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details refer to the
specifications document. Numeric input is always rounded to the
nearest possible "Sweep Time".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1208
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1208
[SENSe:]SWEep:DURation? on page 1206

Span/RBW
Sets the coupling ratio if RBW is set to auto mode.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.4, "Coupling span and RBW", on page 496.
"Auto[100]" "Resolution Bandwidth" = "Span/100"
This coupling ratio is the default setting of the FSW.
"Manual" The coupling ratio is defined manually.
The span/resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range from 1 to
10000.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio on page 1202

RBW/VBW
Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth.
This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.3, "Coupling VBW and RBW", on page 496.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 504

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

"Sine[1/1]" "Video Bandwidth" = "Resolution Bandwidth"

This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW/VBW and is rec-
ommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured.
"Pulse[0.1]" "Video Bandwidth" = 10 x "Resolution Bandwidth"
or
"Video Bandwidth" = "10 MHz" (= max. VBW)
Recommended for pulse signals
"Noise[10]" "Video Bandwidth" = "Resolution Bandwidth/10"
Recommended for noise measurements
"Manual" The coupling ratio is defined manually.
The RBW/VBW ratio can be set in the range of 0.001 to 1000.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1204
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio on page 1204

Filter Type
Defines the filter type.
The following filter types are available:
● Normal (3dB)
● Channel
● RRC (not available for sweep type "FFT")
● 5-Pole (not available for sweep type "FFT")
● CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
● MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option
For more information, see Section 7.5.1.6, "Which data may pass: filter types",
on page 498.
Note: The EMI-specific filter types are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measure-
ment option is installed, even if EMI measurement is not active. If you select a CISPR
trace detector, the filter type is automatically also set to CISPR. An active CISPR filter
is indicated in the channel info, next to the RBW information. For details, see Sec-
tion 6.13.3.1, "Resolution bandwidth and filter types", on page 337.
The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured
in the EMI configuration.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE on page 1203

Default Coupling
Sets all coupled functions to the default state ("Auto"). In addition, the ratio "RBW/
VBW" is set to "Sine[1/1]" and the ratio "Span/RBW" to 100.
For more information see Section 7.5.1.3, "Coupling VBW and RBW", on page 496.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO on page 1202
[SENSe:]BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO on page 1204
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 1208

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 505

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Sweep/Average Count
Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode. Values from
0 to 200000 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one sweep is performed.
The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams.
If the trace modes "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set, this value also deter-
mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures.
In continuous sweep mode, if "Sweep Count" = 0 (default), averaging is performed
over 10 sweeps. For "Sweep Count" =1, no averaging, maxhold or minhold operations
are performed.
For more information, see Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data is measured: sweep points
and sweep count", on page 499.
For spectrogram displays, the sweep count determines how many sweeps are com-
bined in one frame in the spectrogram; that is: how many sweeps the FSW performs to
plot one trace in the spectrogram result display. For more details, see "Time frames"
on page 632.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt on page 1205
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt on page 1249

Sweep Points
Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep.
For details see Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data is measured: sweep points and
sweep count", on page 499.
All values from 101 to 100001 can be set. The default value is 1001 sweep points.
For EMI measurements, 200001 sweep points are available.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep[:WINDow<n>]:POINts on page 1208

Optimization
In FFT mode, several FFT analysis steps are required to cover the entire measurement
span. The span which is covered by one FFT analysis step is called subspan. The sub-
span cannot be defined directly, but it can be optimized according to measurement
requirements.
Note: To determine the number of required subspans for the measurement, see "FFT
Subspans" on page 508.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 506

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

Table 7-4: Optimization parameters in FFT mode

Optimization mode Description

"Dynamic" Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan (depending
on the RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the
best control range for the A/D converter.

"Speed" Optimizes the sweep rate by using the widest possible subspan (depending on the
RBW).
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated. (Note: set
the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A/D converter).
It is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to "Auto" to optimize the sweep
rate.

"Transient" Recommended mode for measurements on highly transient signals in spectrum

analysis. It increases the measurement speed with a trade off in dynamic range.
Only available for FSW67/85 models.

"Auto" Uses a medium-sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic

range and a fast sweep rate.
The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated. (Note: set
the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A/D converter).

Note: FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21)

The subspan optimization modes "Dynamic" and "Auto" include automatic suppression
of unwanted mixing products. Thus, when using external mixers (R&S FSW-B21), use
the "Speed" mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in frequency sweep mode.
Zero span mode
For zero span measurements, the optimization mode defines the selection of the A/D
converter prefilter.
Table 7-5: Optimization parameters in zero span mode

Optimization mode Description

Dynamic The narrowest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.

Speed The widest filter possible (depending on the RBW) is used.

Auto A medium-sized prefilter is used.

Note: EMI measurements

For EMI measurements (using R&S FSW-K54), "Dynamic" mode is not supported.
"Auto" mode always uses "Speed" optimization.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:OPTimize on page 1206

Sweep Type
Defines the sweep type.
"Sweep" In the standard sweep mode, the local oscillator is set to provide the
spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency.
"Auto" Automatically sets the fastest available sweep type for the current
measurement (Frequency or FFT). Auto mode is set by default.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 507

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

"FFT" The FFT sweep samples on a defined frequency value and trans-
forms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transform (FFT) (see also
Section 7.5.1.5, "How data is measured: the sweep type",
on page 497).
FFT is not available in the following cases:
● When using 5-Pole filters or RRC filters
● When using one of the CISPR detectors
● When an external generator is active (via hardware option)
In these cases, frequency sweep is used.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE on page 1209

FFT Subspans
Indicates the number of FFT subspans required to cover the entire measurement
range (read-only).
See also "Number of subspans" on page 498.
Only available in FFT sweep mode in the Spectrum application, and not for SEM,
ACLR, or Spurious emissions measurements.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:FFTSubspan? on page 1206

Single Sweep / Run Single

After triggering, starts the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count". The measurement
stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed.
While the measurement is running, "Single Sweep" and [RUN SINGLE] are highligh-
ted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or
key again.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, "Single Sweep" only controls the sweep
mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect
the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined
sequence. In this case, the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only
once.
Furthermore, [RUN SINGLE] controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN
SINGLE] starts the Sequencer in single mode.
If the Sequencer is off, only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel is upda-
ted.
For details on the Sequencer, see Section 5.4.1, "The sequencer concept",
on page 124.
For details on the Sequencer, see the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 913
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1253

Continuous Sweep / Run Cont

After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the
default setting.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 508

FSW Common measurement settings
Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration

While the measurement is running, "Continuous Sweep" and [RUN CONT] are high-
lighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey
or key again. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, "Continuous Sweep" only controls the
sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes
effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-
defined sequence. In this case, a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeat-
edly.
Furthermore, [RUN CONT] controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN
CONT] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
For details on the Sequencer, see Section 5.4.1, "The sequencer concept",
on page 124.
For details on the Sequencer, see the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912

Continue Single Sweep

After triggering, repeats the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count", without deleting
the trace of the last measurement.
While the measurement is running, "Continue Single Sweep" and [RUN SINGLE] are
highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted
softkey or key again.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONMeas on page 912

Spectrogram Frames
These settings are only available if spectrogram display is active.
For more information see Section 8.5.2.3, "How to display and configure a spectro-
gram", on page 644.

Select Frame ← Spectrogram Frames

Selects a specific frame, loads the corresponding trace from the memory, and displays
it in the Spectrum window.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati-
cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and
only if a spectrogram is selected.
The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number.
For more details, see "Time frames" on page 632.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 1254

Continue Frame ← Spectrogram Frames

Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of
the next sweeps for trace modes "Max Hold", "Min Hold", and "Average".
This function is available in single sweep mode only.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 509

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

● On
When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep, the results of
the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also considered.
● Off
The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept
frames only.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1253

Frame Count ← Spectrogram Frames

Determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep (as opposed to a con-
tinuous sweep). The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history
depth (see "History Depth" on page 641).
For more details, see "Time frames" on page 632.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:COUNt on page 1253

Clear Spectrogram ← Spectrogram Frames

Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 1252

7.6 Trigger and gate configuration

Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal. Choosing the right trigger
type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents
in your signals.
Gating allows you to restrict measurement analysis to the important part or parts of the
signal, for example bursts.
● Triggering.............................................................................................................. 510
● Gating....................................................................................................................522

7.6.1 Triggering

7.6.1.1 Trigger basics

In a basic measurement with default settings, the sweep is started immediately. How-
ever, sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is
fulfilled, for example a signal level is exceeded, or in certain time intervals. For these
cases, you can define a trigger for the measurement. In FFT sweep mode, the trigger
defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 510

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

An "Offset" can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event, or to
include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements (pre-trigger
offset).
For complex tasks, advanced trigger settings are available:
● Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise
● Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event causes the trigger in a jittering signal
● Trigger source....................................................................................................... 511
● Trigger offset......................................................................................................... 511
● Trigger hysteresis.................................................................................................. 511
● Trigger drop-out time.............................................................................................512
● Trigger holdoff....................................................................................................... 513

Trigger source
The trigger source defines which source must fulfill the condition that triggers the mea-
surement. Basically, the source can be:
● Time: the measurement is repeated in a regular interval
● Power: an input signal is checked for a defined power level
The trigger signal can be any of the following:
– The input signal at one of various stages in the signal analysis process - before
or after the input mixer, after the video filter etc.
– A signal from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT
connectors on the instrument
– A signal from a power sensor, see "Using a power sensor as an external power
trigger" on page 370.
For details on the available trigger sources, see "Trigger Source" on page 516.

Trigger offset
An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event, or to include
data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements (pre-trigger offset).
Pre-trigger offsets are possible because the FSW captures data continuously in the
time domain, even before the trigger occurs.
See "Trigger Offset" on page 520.

Trigger hysteresis
Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by
noise, for example. The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal
must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger
event occurs.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 511

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Example:
In the following example, the signal does not drop below the hysteresis (threshold)
before it reaches the trigger level again. Thus, the second possible trigger event on the
rising edge is ignored. On the falling edge, however, two trigger events occur. The sig-
nal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time.

Trigger on rising edge Trigger on falling edge

Trigger
hysteresis

Trigger level

T T
T T

Figure 7-32: Effects of the trigger hysteresis

See "Hysteresis" on page 520

Trigger drop-out time

If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional "drop-outs" during a burst,
you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger
level before triggering again. This is called the "drop-out" time. Defining a dropout time
helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events.

T T T

Drop-Out

Figure 7-33: Effect of the trigger drop-out time

See "Drop-Out Time" on page 520.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 512

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Drop-out times for falling edge triggers

If a trigger is set to a falling edge ("Slope" = "Falling", see "Slope" on page 521) the
measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level. This is useful,
for example, to trigger at the end of a burst, similar to triggering on the rising edge for
the beginning of a burst.
If a drop-out time is defined, the power level must remain below the trigger level at
least for the duration of the drop-out time (as defined above). However, if a drop-out
time is defined that is longer than the pulse width, this condition cannot be met before
the final pulse. Thus, a trigger event does not occur until the pulsed signal is over.
T T T

Drop-Out

Figure 7-34: Trigger drop-out time for falling edge trigger

For gated measurements, a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop-out time is
generally not allowed.

Trigger holdoff
The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one
will be recognized.

Frame 1 Frame 2
T T T T

Holdoff

Figure 7-35: Effect of the trigger holdoff

See "Trigger Holdoff" on page 521.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 513

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

7.6.1.2 Trigger settings

Access: "Overview" > "Trigger/Gate"

External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the FSW
are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box.
See Section 7.2.9, "Trigger input/output settings", on page 470

For step-by-step instructions on configuring triggered measurements, see Sec-

tion 7.6.1.4, "How to configure a triggered measurement", on page 521.
Preview....................................................................................................................... 515
└ Frequency..................................................................................................... 515
└ RBW..............................................................................................................515
└ Sweep Time.................................................................................................. 515
Trigger Source.............................................................................................................516
└ Free Run....................................................................................................... 516
└ External Trigger 1/2/3................................................................................... 516
└ Video.............................................................................................................517
└ IF Power........................................................................................................517
└ Baseband Power...........................................................................................518
└ I/Q Power...................................................................................................... 518

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 514

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

└ RF Power...................................................................................................... 518
└ Power Sensor............................................................................................... 519
└ Time.............................................................................................................. 519
Trigger Level............................................................................................................... 519
Repetition Interval....................................................................................................... 520
Drop-Out Time.............................................................................................................520
Trigger Offset.............................................................................................................. 520
Hysteresis................................................................................................................... 520
Trigger Holdoff.............................................................................................................521
Slope........................................................................................................................... 521

Preview
The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply-
ing them to the current measurement.
The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with
the defined RBW and sweep time. This is useful when analyzing bursts, for example,
to determine the required gate settings.
The trigger and gate settings are applied to the measurement when the dialog box is
closed.
Note: The zero span settings refer only to the preview diagram. The main diagram
remains unchanged.
If preview mode is switched off, any changes to the settings in this dialog box are
applied to the measurement diagram directly. In this case, the zero span settings for
the preview diagram are not displayed.
For information on the zero span settings, see:
● "Center Frequency" on page 476
● "RBW" on page 349
● "Sweep Time" on page 504

Frequency ← Preview
Defines the center frequency for the preview diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 1195

RBW ← Preview
Defines the resolution bandwidth for the preview diagram. The available resolution
bandwidths are specified in the specifications document. Numeric input is always roun-
ded to the nearest possible bandwidth.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1201

Sweep Time ← Preview

Defines the sweep time for the preview diagram. Allowed values depend on the ratio of
span to RBW and RBW to VBW. For details refer to the specifications document.
Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:TIME on page 1208

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 515

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Trigger Source
Selects the trigger source. If a trigger source other than "Free Run" is set, "TRG" is dis-
played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated.
For gated measurements, this setting also selects the gating source.
For more information, see "Trigger source" on page 511.
Note: When triggering or gating is activated, the squelch function is automatically dis-
abled.
(See "Squelch" on page 583).
For an active external frontend, only external triggers, I/Q power triggers and (periodic)
time triggers are supported as trigger sources.
See "External Frontend Connection State" on page 453.
Note: If the 1.2 GHz bandwidth extension option (B1200) or the internal 2 GHz option
(B2001) is active, only an external trigger, IF power trigger, or no trigger is available.
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, only an external trigger,
power trigger, or no trigger is available for bandwidths ≥80 MHz. If any trigger other
than an external trigger or power trigger is active and the analysis bandwidth is
increased above 80 MHz (thus activating the B4001/B6001/B8001 option), the trigger
is automatically deactivated.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1232

Free Run ← Trigger Source

No trigger source is considered. Data acquisition is started manually or automatically
and continues until stopped explicitly.
In the Spectrum application, this is the default setting.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225

External Trigger 1/2/3 ← Trigger Source

Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector
meets or exceeds the specified trigger level.
(See "Trigger Level" on page 519).
Note: "External Trigger 1" automatically selects the trigger signal from the "TRIGGER
1 INPUT" connector on the front panel.
For details, see the "Instrument Tour" section in the FSW Getting Started manual.
"External Trigger 1"
Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 1 INPUT" connector.
"External Trigger 2"
Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT" connector.
Note: Connector must be configured for "Input" in the "Output" config-
uration
For FSW85 models, "Trigger 2" is not available due to the second RF
input connector on the front panel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 516

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

"External Trigger 3"

Trigger signal from the "TRIGGER 3 INPUT / OUTPUT" connector on
the rear panel.
Note: Connector must be configured for "Input" in the "Output" config-
uration.
(See Section 7.2.9, "Trigger input/output settings", on page 470).
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR EXT, TRIG:SOUR EXT2
TRIG:SOUR EXT3
See TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 1232

Video ← Trigger Source

Defines triggering by the video signal, i.e. the filtered and detected version of the input
signal (the envelope of the IF signal), as displayed on the screen.
Define a trigger level from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height. The absolute trigger
level is indicated by a horizontal trigger line in the diagram, which you can also move
graphically to change the trigger level.
A fixed hysteresis of ±5 % of the specified trigger value (in V) is applied to the video
trigger level automatically and cannot be changed.
Video mode is only available in the time domain, and not for I/Q-based data.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR VID, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
SWE:EGAT:SOUR VID for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 1232

IF Power ← Trigger Source

The FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the
third intermediate frequency.
For frequency sweeps, the third IF represents the start frequency. The trigger threshold
depends on the defined trigger level, as well as on the RF attenuation and preamplifi-
cation. A reference level offset, if defined, is also considered. The trigger bandwidth at
the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type. For details on avail-
able trigger levels and trigger bandwidths, see the instrument specifications document.
For measurements on a fixed frequency (e.g. zero span or I/Q measurements), the
third IF represents the center frequency.
This trigger source is only available for RF input.
Available for input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A refer-
ence level offset, if defined, is also considered.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths, see the specifications
document.
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep
types, the trigger bandwidth can vary considerably for the same RBW setting.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 517

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IFP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
SWE:EGAT:SOUR IFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 1232

Baseband Power ← Trigger Source

Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input.
Available for input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR BBP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225

I/Q Power ← Trigger Source

This trigger source is only available in the I/Q Analyzer application and in applications
that process I/Q data.
Not available for the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled I/Q data exceeds the
trigger threshold.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IQP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225

RF Power ← Trigger Source

Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed
measurement range.
For this purpose, the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre-
quency.
The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli-
fication. For details on available trigger levels, see the instrument's specifications docu-
ment.
Note: If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range (e.g. for fullspan
measurements), the sweep can be aborted. A message indicating the allowed input
frequencies is displayed in the status bar.
A "Trigger Offset", "Trigger Polarity" and "Trigger Holdoff" (to improve the trigger stabil-
ity) can be defined for the RF trigger, but no "Hysteresis".
Not available for input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface.
Not available for input from the optional "Digital Baseband" interface.
If the trigger source "RF Power" is selected and you enable baseband input, the trigger
source is automatically switched to "Free Run".
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR RFP, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
SWE:EGAT:SOUR RFP for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 1232

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 518

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Power Sensor ← Trigger Source

Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source. This option is only available if a
power sensor is connected and configured.
(See Section 7.2.3.3, "How to work with a power sensor", on page 375.)
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, this trigger is not availa-
ble for bandwidths ≥80 MHz.
If a power sensor is selected as the trigger mode, the following softkeys are not availa-
ble; these settings are configured in the "Power Sensor Config" dialog box (seeSec-
tion 7.2.3.2, "Power sensor settings", on page 370 ).
● "Trigger Level" on page 519
● "Slope" on page 521
● "Hysteresis" on page 520
● "Trigger Holdoff" on page 521
Note: For Rohde & Schwarz power sensors, the "Gate Mode" Lvl is not supported. The
signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded,
rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in level
mode. Thus, the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated
measurement; the measurement cannot be completed.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR PSE, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225
SWE:EGAT:SOUR PSE for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
on page 1232

Time ← Trigger Source

Triggers in a specified repetition interval.
See "Repetition Interval" on page 520.
If a B4001/B6001/B8001 bandwidth extension option is active, this trigger is not availa-
ble for bandwidths ≥80 MHz.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR TIME, see TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce on page 1225

Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source.
For gated measurements, this setting also defines the gate level.
For details on supported trigger levels, see the instrument specifications document.
For time triggers, the repetition interval is defined. See "Repetition Interval"
on page 520.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 1224
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower on page 1224
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] on page 1223
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 1225
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower on page 1224
For baseband input only:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower on page 1223

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 519

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Repetition Interval
Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger.
The shortest interval is 2 ms.
Set the repetition interval to the exact pulse period, burst length, frame length or other
repetitive signal characteristic. If the required interval cannot be set with the available
granularity, configure a multiple of the interval that can be set. Thus, the trigger
remains synchronized to the signal.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TIME:RINTerval on page 1227

Drop-Out Time
Defines the time that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering
again.
For more information on the drop-out time, see "Trigger drop-out time" on page 512.
Note: For input from the optional "Analog Baseband" interface using the baseband
power trigger (BBP), the default drop out time is set to 100 ns. This avoids uninten-
tional trigger events (as no hysteresis can be configured in this case).
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DTIMe on page 1221

Trigger Offset
Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep.
For more information, see "Trigger offset" on page 511.

Offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed

Offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pretrigger)

Only possible for zero span (e.g. I/Q Analyzer application) and gated trigger switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time:
Pretriggermax = sweep timemax

For the "Time" trigger source in swept measurements, this function is not available.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] on page 1222

Hysteresis
Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed
before a trigger event occurs. Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events
caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level.
This setting is only available for "IF Power" trigger sources. The range of the value is
between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
For more information, see "Trigger hysteresis" on page 511.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis on page 1223

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 520

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Trigger Holdoff
Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events.
Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored.
For more information, see "Trigger holdoff" on page 513.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff on page 1222

Slope
For all trigger sources except time, you can define whether triggering occurs when the
signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it.
For gated measurements in "Edge" mode, the slope also defines whether the gate
starts on a falling or rising edge.
Remote command:
TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe on page 1225
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 1232

7.6.1.3 How to determine the required trigger/gate parameters

1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, switch on "Show Preview".

A zero span measurement for the currently defined center frequency is displayed.

2. Set the "Frequency", "RBW" and "Sweep Time" such that the relevant part of the
signal is displayed, for example a complete burst.

3. Determine the parameters you want to use to define the trigger and gate conditions
from the preview diagram, for example:
● the length of a burst or slot
● the upper or lower power level of a pulse
● the maximum noise level
● the power level or time at which a certain incident occurs

4. Try out different trigger and gate settings as described in How to configure a trig-
gered measurement and How to configure a gated measurement, then select
"Update Main Diagram" to see the effect of the current settings on the main mea-
surement in the background.

5. If the results are as expected, close the dialog box to keep the changes perma-
nently. Otherwise, correct the settings as necessary.

7.6.1.4 How to configure a triggered measurement

To define a time trigger:

1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "Time".

2. Define the "Repetition Interval": the time after which a new measurement is started.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 521

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

To define an external trigger:

1. Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the TRIG-
GER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the FSW.
For details see the FSW "Getting Started" manual.

2. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "External".

3. If you are using the variable TRIGGER 2 INPUT / OUTPUT connector, you must
define its use as an input connector. In the "Trigger In/Out" tab of the "Trigger And
Gate" dialog box, set the corresponding trigger to "Input".
(Note: Trigger 2 is on the front panel, Trigger 3 is on the rear panel.)

4. Configure the external trigger as described for the other power triggers.

To define a power trigger:

1. In the "Trigger And Gate" dialog box, define the "Trigger Source" = "IF Power".
Alternatively, define "Trigger Source" = "Video". The video signal corresponds to
the envelope of the IF signal: it has been processed by the resolution and video
filters and the selected detector.

2. Define the "Trigger Level": the power level at which the measurement will start.
For a "Video" trigger source you can move the level line graphically to define the
level. If you define the value numerically, you must enter a percentage of the full
diagram height as the level.

3. Define whether the signal must cross the trigger level on a falling or on a rising
edge ("Slope") to trigger the measurement.

4. To start the measurement with a time delay, define a "Trigger Offset".

5. To reject triggers due to noise or jittering in the signal, define a "Hysteresis" that is
larger than the expected noise or jittering. After the previous trigger, the signal
must exceed this threshold before the next level crossing triggers a new measure-
ment.

6. To skip multiple triggers in a burst, define a "Holdoff" time that must pass between
two triggers. The holdoff time should be slightly larger than the burst.

7.6.2 Gating

● Gated measurements............................................................................................523
● Gate settings......................................................................................................... 526
● Continuous gate settings.......................................................................................528
● Gate source settings............................................................................................. 529
● How to configure a gated measurement............................................................... 530

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 522

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

7.6.2.1 Gated measurements

Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the
input signal pass in defined areas only. The gate controls exactly when data is included
in the measurement results and when not. The gate is opened by the trigger source,
which is also the gate source.
Gates can be used in two different modes:
● Level: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the
gate source is exceeded and stops when the gate source drops below the "Gate
Level".
Using a pulsed gate signal in level mode, the following behavior can be achieved:
When the gate source signal is active, the input signal data is collected; when the
gate signal is inactive, the input signal is ignored.
● Edge: The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the
gate source is exceeded and stops when the defined "Gate Length" is reached.

Restrictions
● The "Gate Mode" Level is not supported for Rohde & Schwarz power sensors. The
signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded,
rather than a time period. However, only time periods can be used for gating in
level mode. Thus, the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a
fully gated measurement; the measurement cannot be completed.
For details on power sensors, see "Using a power sensor as an external power trigger"
on page 370.

Additionally, a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after
the gate opening are ignored.

Figure 7-36: Effects of Gate mode, Gate delay and Gate length

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 523

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Example:
By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is
inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi-
tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can
also be analyzed for an inactive carrier. The sweep can be controlled by an external
gate or by the internal power trigger.

Figure 7-37: GSM signal with GATE OFF

Figure 7-38: GSM signal with GATE ON

Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements. This allows you
to display level variations of individual slots, for instance in burst signals, versus time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 524

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in
the channel bar.

Continuous gating
With common gating, a measurement is performed each time the trigger event occurs.
However, when using an external trigger, the measurement time for a single gate is
restricted by the repetition rate of the external trigger.
Now, a new function in the FSW allows you to perform a number of measurements
periodically after each external trigger event. This function can speed up the measure-
ment significantly. After the first external trigger event, a specified number of gate peri-
ods are generated internally, in a specified interval, without requiring additional trigger
events. Only after the specified number of measurements have been performed, the
FSW waits for the next external trigger event.

Example:

Figure 7-39: Continuous gating for a gate period count of 9

Continuous gating is useful, for example, if you want to measure a periodic signal
which occurs after a specific trigger event. Using gate periods, you can average the
individual periods of the signal for several trigger events.
Continuous gating can also improve the measurement speed, as you no longer have to
wait for the next external trigger events, but can measure several periodic bursts after
a single trigger event.
Settings for continuous gate periods are defined in a separate tab of the "Trigger / Gate
Config" dialog box (see Section 7.6.2.3, "Continuous gate settings", on page 528).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 525

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Restrictions for continuous gating

While continuous gating reduces the number of required external trigger events, not
every sweep constellation can be performed using just one external trigger event. Note
the following restrictions:
● The number of gates is limited to 1023. If the required measurement time exceeds
the duration of 1023 gates, a new external trigger event is necessary for each sub-
sequent 1023 gates.
● In "Sweep Mode Type: Sweep", more than one external trigger events may be nec-
essary due to hardware segmentation of the sweep
● In "Sweep Mode Type: FFT", more than one external trigger event may be neces-
sary, but the covered span with one external trigger event is normally larger than in
"Sweep Mode Type: Sweep".
In FFT mode, it is recommended that you activate the "Optimization mode: Speed",
as it further reduces the required number of external trigger events.

Triggered gated measurements

By default, the gate is opened by the trigger source, which is also the gate source.
However, you can also use different sources for a general trigger and the beginnning of
the individual gates. In this case, the trigger source defines when measurement is gen-
erally possible, and the gate source determines which data is actually measured.

Example:
A rotating antenna can be used as a general (external) trigger source, for example.
Only when the antenna reaches a specified position, measurement is possible. A sec-
ond external trigger can then be used to control the gating periods to measure a burs-
ted signal.

RF Signal ...

Ext. Trigger1 ...

Frame trigger
(Ext. Trigger2) ...

Measured 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6
Gates
...

Figure 7-40: Triggered gated measurement

Triggered gated measurements are only available in applications based on frequency

sweeps (not I/Q-data based), such as the Spectrum application.

7.6.2.2 Gate settings

Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger / Gate Config." > "Gate Settings"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 526

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Gate settings define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured.

Gating is not available for measurements on I/Q-based data.

Gated Trigger.............................................................................................................. 527

Gate Mode.................................................................................................................. 527
Gate Delay.................................................................................................................. 528
Gate Length................................................................................................................ 528

Gated Trigger
Switches gated triggering on or off.
If the gate is switched on, a gate signal applied to one of the TRIGGER INPUT connec-
tors or the internal IF power trigger controls the sweep.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe on page 1228

Gate Mode
Sets the gate mode.
For more information, see Section 7.6.2.1, "Gated measurements", on page 523
"Edge" The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal
edge.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until
the gate length is over.
"Level" The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level.
After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until
the signal disappears.
Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF
Power trigger, the FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep,
FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements.
This mode is not supported when using R&S Power Sensors as
power triggers ("Trg/Gate Source" = Power Sensor or External).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 527

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE on page 1233

Gate Delay
Defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measure-
ment.
The delay position on the time axis in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line
labeled "GD".
For more information, see Section 7.6.2.1, "Gated measurements", on page 523
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff on page 1230

Gate Length
Defines how long the gate is open when it is triggered.
The gate length can only be set in the edge-triggered gate mode. In the level-triggered
mode the gate length depends on the level of the gate signal.
The gate length in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL".
For more information, see Section 7.6.2.1, "Gated measurements", on page 523
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth on page 1230

7.6.2.3 Continuous gate settings

Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Trigger / Gate Config." > "Cont. Gate" tab
Continuous gating allows you to perform a continuous gated sweep after a single
external trigger is received.

For details see "Continuous gating" on page 525.

Continuous Gate......................................................................................................... 528
Gate Period Length..................................................................................................... 529
Gate Period Count...................................................................................................... 529

Continuous Gate
Activates or deactivates continuous gating.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 528

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is "On".

If no external trigger is active yet when continuous gating is activated, external trigger 1
is automatically activated as the trigger source.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous[:STATe] on page 1229

Gate Period Length

Defines the length in seconds of a single gate period in continuous gating. The length
is determined from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the
next one.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PLENgth on page 1229

Gate Period Count

Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event in con-
tinuous gating.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:CONTinuous:PCOunt on page 1229

7.6.2.4 Gate source settings

Access: "Overview" > "Trigger" > "Gate Settings" > "Source" tab
By default, the gate is opened by the trigger source, which is also the gate source.
However, you can also use different sources for a general trigger and the beginnning of
the individual gates. In this case, the trigger source defines when measurement is gen-
erally possible, and the gate source determines which data is actually measured.
Triggered gated measurements are only available in applications based on frequency
sweeps (not I/Q-data based), such as the Spectrum application.
For more information see "Triggered gated measurements" on page 526.
For more information see the FSW User Manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 529

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

Gate Source Mode...................................................................................................... 530

Source.........................................................................................................................530
Level............................................................................................................................530
Polarity........................................................................................................................ 530

Gate Source Mode

Determines whether the same or different triggers are used for general measurement
and gating.
"AUTO" (Default:) The trigger defined by Trigger Source is used both for the
general measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
"MANUAL" The gate is opened by the trigger source defined in Source, but only
after a trigger from the general Trigger Source occurs.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:AUTO on page 1228

Source
Selects the gating trigger source which determines when the gate is opened. For Gate
Source Mode "AUTO", the trigger defined by Trigger Source is used both for the gen-
eral measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
The following gate trigger sources are supported:
● External Trigger 1/2/3
● Power Sensor
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1232

Level
Defines the gate level for which the gate is open.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel[:EXTernal<tp>] on page 1230
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LEVel:RFPower on page 1231

Polarity
Defines whether the gate is opened when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls
down to it. For gated measurements in "Edge" mode, the slope defines whether the
gate starts on a falling or rising edge.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity on page 1232

7.6.2.5 How to configure a gated measurement

A gated measurement records data only while the gate conditions are fulfilled. These
step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a gated measurement man-
ually.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 530

FSW Common measurement settings
Trigger and gate configuration

To configure a common gated measurement

1. Determine the required parameters as described in Section 7.6.1.4, "How to config-
ure a triggered measurement", on page 521.

2. The gate is opened by a trigger event, which must be based on a power source.
Define the trigger as described in Section 7.6.1.4, "How to configure a triggered
measurement", on page 521.
As the "Trigger Source", use "IF Power", "Video" or "External".

3. Define how long the gate is to remain open:

To measure the signal as long as the trigger level is exceeded, for example for one
or more pulses, define "Gate Mode" = "Level".
To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded, for example dur-
ing a burst:
a) Define "Gate Mode" = "Edge".
b) Define the time to measure for each gate: "Gate Length".

4. To open the gate with a time delay, for example to ignore an overshoot, define a
"Gate Delay".

5. Select "Gated Trigger" = "On".

To configure a continuous gated measurement

A continuous gated measurement is based on a common gated measurement. How-
ever, after a single external trigger event, multiple further gate measurements are per-
formed.
1. The gate is opened by a trigger event, which must be provided by an external trig-
ger source. Define the trigger as described in Section 7.6.1.4, "How to configure a
triggered measurement", on page 521. As the "Trigger Source", use "External".

2. In the "Gate Settings" of the "Trigger and Gate" dialog box, select "Gated Trigger":
"On".

3. Define the gate settings as described in "To configure a common gated measure-
ment" on page 531.

4. Select the "Cont. Gate" tab next to the "Gate Settings".

5. Set "Continuous Gate" to "On".

6. Define the length in seconds from the beginning of one gate measurement to the
beginning of the next one ("Gate Period Length").

7. Define how many gate measurements are to be performed after a single trigger
event ("Gate Period Count").

8. Run a measurement and wait for the external trigger event to occur.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 531

FSW Common measurement settings
Adjusting settings automatically

To configure a triggered gated measurement

A triggered gated measurement is based on a common gated measurement. However,
the gates are only opened after an initial trigger event.
1. Determine the required parameters as described in Section 7.6.1.3, "How to deter-
mine the required trigger/gate parameters", on page 521.

2. In order to trigger the initial gate, define a trigger event based on a power source.
Define the trigger as described in Section 7.6.1.4, "How to configure a triggered
measurement", on page 521. As the "Trigger Source", use "External" or "Power
Sensor" (if available).

3. Each individual gate is also opened by a trigger event. To use a different trigger
source for the individual gates than for general measurement:
a) Switch to the "Source" tab for gate settings.
b) As the "Source", select "External" or "Power Sensor" (if available).
c) Configure the power trigger as defined in Section 7.6.1.4, "How to configure a
triggered measurement", on page 521.

4. Switch to the "Gate Settings" tab to define the individual gates.

5. Define how long the gate is to remain open:

To measure the signal as long as the trigger level is exceeded, for example for one
or more pulses, define "Gate Mode" = "Level".
To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded, for example dur-
ing a burst:
a) Define "Gate Mode" = "Edge".
b) Define the time to measure for each gate: "Gate Length".

6. To open the gate with a time delay, for example to ignore an overshoot, define a
"Gate Delay".

7. Select "Gated Trigger" = "On".

7.7 Adjusting settings automatically

Access: [AUTO SET]
Some settings can be adjusted by the FSW automatically according to the current
measurement settings. To do so, a measurement is performed. You can configure this
measurement.
For an active external frontend, automatic settings are not available. See "External
Frontend Connection State" on page 453.

MSRA/MSRT operating mode

In MSRA and MSRT operating mode, settings related to data acquisition can only be
adjusted automatically for the MSRA/MSRT primary, not the secondary applications.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 532

FSW Common measurement settings
Adjusting settings automatically

Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements

When you select an auto adjust function, a measurement is performed to determine
the optimal settings. If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement,
you are asked how the FSW should behave:
● (Default:) The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger
● The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger.
The trigger source is temporarily set to "Free Run". After the measurement is com-
pleted, the original trigger source is restored. The trigger level is adjusted as fol-
lows for "IF Power" and "RF Power" triggers:
Trigger level = Reference level - 15 dB
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:TRIGger on page 1239

Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically (Auto All)...................................... 533

Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically (Auto Frequency).............................. 533
Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level)............................................. 534
Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Auto).................................534
Changing the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Manual)............................ 534
Upper Level Hysteresis............................................................................................... 534
Lower Level Hysteresis............................................................................................... 535

Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically (Auto All)

Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings,
including:
● Auto Frequency
● Auto Level
Note: MSRA/MSRT operating modes. In MSRA/MSRT operating mode, this function is
only available for the MSRA/MSRT primary, not the secondary applications.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:ALL on page 1237

Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically (Auto Frequency)

The FSW adjusts the center frequency automatically.
The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S/N ratio in the fre-
quency span. As this function uses the signal counter, it is intended for use with sinus-
oidal signals.
This function is not available during signal tracking (see Section 7.3.3, "Keeping the
center frequency stable - signal tracking", on page 479).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency on page 1239

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 533

FSW Common measurement settings
Adjusting settings automatically

Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level)

Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at
the FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the
preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full-scale level) are adjusted. As a result,
the signal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are mini-
mized.
To determine the required reference level, a level measurement is performed on the
FSW.
If necessary, you can optimize the reference level further. Decrease the attenuation
level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs, then decrease
the reference level in the same way.
You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary (see
"Changing the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Manual)" on page 534).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel on page 1240

Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Auto)

Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value.
(Spectrum and AM/FM/PM modulation analysis application: 1 ms)
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE on page 1238

Changing the Automatic Measurement Time (Meas Time Manual)

This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting
adjustments. Enter the value in seconds.
Note: The maximum measurement duration depends on the currently selected mea-
surement and the installed (optional) hardware. Thus, the measurement duration
actually used to determine the automatic settings can be shorter than the value you
define here.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE on page 1238
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation on page 1237

Upper Level Hysteresis

When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the
internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adapta-
tion due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting
defines an upper threshold that the signal must exceed (compared to the last measure-
ment) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:UPPer on page 1238

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 534

FSW Common measurement settings
Adjusting settings automatically

Lower Level Hysteresis

When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the
internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adapta-
tion due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting
defines a lower threshold that the signal must fall below (compared to the last mea-
surement) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:HYSTeresis:LOWer on page 1238

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 535

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

8 Common analysis and display functions

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis"
General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless
of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measure-
ment task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode,
or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific
application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate from these
common settings.
● Result display configuration.................................................................................. 536
● Zoomed displays................................................................................................... 543
● Marker usage........................................................................................................ 550
● Display and limit lines............................................................................................592
● Trace configuration................................................................................................611
● Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation............................... 650
● Event-based actions..............................................................................................662

8.1 Result display configuration

Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Thus, the result display is highly config-
urable to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis. Here you can find out
how to optimize the display for your measurement results.
Basic operations concerning the FSW display, for example how to use the SmartGrid,
are described in the FSW Getting Started manual.
General display settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup,
independently of the current measurement, e.g. which items or colors are displayed on
the screen, are described in Section 11.2, "Display settings", on page 736.
● Basic evaluation methods..................................................................................... 536
● Laying out the result display with the smartgrid.................................................... 539

8.1.1 Basic evaluation methods

Measurement results can be displayed and evaluated using various different methods,
also at the same time. Depending on the currently selected measurement, in particular
when using optional firmware applications, not all evaluation methods are available.
The evaluation methods described here are available for most measurements in the
Spectrum application.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 536

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

Diagram.......................................................................................................................537
Marker Table............................................................................................................... 537
Marker Peak List......................................................................................................... 538
Result Summary..........................................................................................................538
Spectrogram................................................................................................................538

Diagram
Displays a basic level vs. frequency or level vs. time diagram of the measured data to
evaluate the results graphically. This is the default evaluation method. Which data is
displayed in the diagram depends on the "Trace" settings. Scaling for the y-axis can be
configured.
See Section 8.5, "Trace configuration", on page 611 and Section 7.4.3, "Scaling the
y-axis", on page 491.

Remote command:
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, DIAG, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103
Results:
TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262

Marker Table
Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers.
This table is displayed automatically if configured accordingly.
(See "Marker Table Display" on page 557).

Tip: To navigate within long marker tables, simply scroll through the entries with your
finger on the touchscreen.
Remote command:
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, MTAB, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103
Results:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1292

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 537

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

Marker Peak List

The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or
time domain. How many peaks are displayed can be defined, as well as the sort order.
In addition, the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram. The peak list can also
be exported to a file for analysis in an external application.
You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis.
(See Section 8.3.3.1, "Marker search settings", on page 559).

Tip: To navigate within long marker peak lists, simply scroll through the entries with
your finger on the touchscreen.
Remote command:
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, PEAK, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103
Results:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y? on page 1292

Result Summary
Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for
numerical evaluation. The contents of the result summary vary depending on the
selected measurement function. See the description of the individual measurement
functions for details.

Tip: To navigate within long marker tables, simply scroll through the entries with your
finger on the touchscreen.
Remote command:
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, RSUM, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103

Spectrogram
A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis
shows the frequency or sweep time, the y-axis shows the measurement time. A third
dimension, the power level, is indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the
strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 538

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

The spectrogram display consists of two diagrams: the standard spectrum result dis-
play (upper diagram) and the spectrogram result display (lower diagram).
For details see Section 8.5.2.1, "Working with spectrograms", on page 631.
Remote command:
LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, SGR, see LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103

8.1.2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid

Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically,
as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a
separate window in the channel tab. Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per
channel (i.e. per tab). To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen, the Rohde &
Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target position simply and quickly.
Principally, the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid, the
SmartGrid. However, the SmartGrid is dynamic and flexible, allowing for many different
layout possibilities. The SmartGrid functionality provides the following basic features:
● Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows, or in a combination of both.
● Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns.
● Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen, pos-
sibly changing the layout of the other windows, as well.
● All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar. If the evaluation bar contains more icons
than can be displayed at once on the screen, it can be scrolled vertically. The same
evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously.
● New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to
the screen. The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval-
uation icon in relation to the existing windows.
● All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. When Smart-
Grid mode is activated, the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu dis-
play. When the SmartGrid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu
display is restored.
● Background information: the smartgrid principle...................................................539
● How to activate smartgrid mode............................................................................541
● How to add a new result window...........................................................................541
● How to close a result window................................................................................542
● How to arrange the result windows....................................................................... 542

8.1.2.1 Background information: the smartgrid principle

SmartGrid display
During any positioning action, the underlying SmartGrid is displayed. Different colors
and frames indicate the possible new positions. The position in the SmartGrid where
you drop the window determines its position on the screen.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 539

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

Figure 8-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode

The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which
the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win-
dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position. The frames indicate
the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows:
above/below, right/left or replacement (as illustrated in Figure 4-33). If an existing win-
dow would be replaced, the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade.

Positioning the window

The screen can be divided into up to four rows. Each row can be split into up to four
columns, where each row can have a different number of columns. However, rows
always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column. A
single row is available as the drop area for the window in the SmartGrid. The row can
be split into columns, or a new row can be inserted above or below the existing row (if
the maximum of 4 has not yet been reached).

1
A

B 2 3 2 3 2

C
1

Figure 8-2: SmartGrid window positions

1 = Insert row above or below the existing row

2 = Create a new column in the existing row
3 = Replace a window in the existing row

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 540

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

SmartGrid functions
Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and
move functions.
The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the
size and position of the other displayed windows.

The "Delete" icon allows you to close the window, enlarging the display of the remain-
ing windows.

8.1.2.2 How to activate smartgrid mode

All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode. In SmartGrid
mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display. When the Smart-
Grid mode is deactivated again, the previous softkey menu display is restored.

► To activate SmartGrid mode, do one of the following:

●

Select the "SmartGrid" icon from the toolbar.

● Select "Display Config" in the configuration "Overview".
● Select "Display Config" from the [Meas Config] menu.
The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed.

To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu, select the
"Close" icon, or press any key.

8.1.2.3 How to add a new result window

Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window. Up to 16 individual windows

can be displayed per channel (i.e. per tab).

1. Activate SmartGrid mode.

All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis-
played as icons in the evaluation bar.

2. Select the icon for the required evaluation method from the evaluation bar.
If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the
screen, it can be scrolled vertically. Touch the evaluation bar between the icons
and move it up or down until the required icon appears.

3. Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid, which is displayed
in the diagram area, and drop it at the required position. (See "How to arrange the
result windows" on page 107 for more information on positioning the window).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 541

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Result display configuration

Remote command:
LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? on page 1103 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 1107

8.1.2.4 How to close a result window

► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the
window.

Remote command:
LAYout:REMove[:WINDow] on page 1105 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REMove
on page 1108

8.1.2.5 How to arrange the result windows

1. Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the "Move" icon for an existing evaluation
window.

2. Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid.

A blue area shows where the window will be placed.

3. Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue.

4. Drop the window in the target area.

The windows are rearranged to the selected layout, and "Delete" and "Move" icons
are displayed in each window.

5. To close a window, select the corresponding "Delete" icon.

Remote command:
LAYout:REPLace[:WINDow] on page 1105 / LAYout:WINDow<n>:REPLace
on page 1108
LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] on page 1105

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 542

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

8.2 Zoomed displays

You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail.
Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be
enlarged.

Graphical Zoom Versus Measurement Zoom

Graphical zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measurement set-
tings, such as the number of sweep points, the frequency range, or the reference level.
Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points tempora-
rily. You must explicitly activate the graphical zoom function (see Section 8.2.2, "Zoom
functions", on page 545).

Graphical zoom and the number of sweep points

Note that (graphical) zooming is merely a visual tool, it does not change any measure-
ment settings, such as the number of sweep points!
You should increase the number of sweep points before zooming, as otherwise the res-
olution of the trace in the zoomed region is poor (see Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data
is measured: sweep points and sweep count", on page 499).

When you change the display using touch gestures, however, the corresponding mea-
surement settings are adapted. For example, dragging horizontally in a spectrum dis-
play changes the center frequency. Dragging vertically in a spectrum display changes
the reference level (for absolute scaling). These changes are permanent for the mea-
surement. This behavior is also referred to as measurement zoom, and is active by
default in the new FSW.However, you can also activate it manually for a display that
has already been zoomed graphically. In this case, the temporary changes to the dis-
play are replaced by permanent changes to the measurement settings with the same
effect.

Example:
Assume you have a spectrum display from a spurious emission measurement. You
graphically zoom into the area around a detected spur. If you now activate a measure-
ment zoom, the reference level, the center frequency, the frequency span, and the
scaling settings are adapted so that the results of the measurement now indicate only
the formerly zoomed area around the detected spur.

● Single zoom versus multiple zoom........................................................................543

● Zoom functions......................................................................................................545
● How to zoom into a diagram................................................................................. 547

8.2.1 Single zoom versus multiple zoom

Two different (graphical) zoom modes are available: single zoom and multiple zoom. A
single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an
enlarged extract of the trace. This function can be used repetitively until the required

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 543

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

details are visible. In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge up to four different areas of
the trace simultaneously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original
trace, while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom
areas can be moved and resized any time. The zoom area that corresponds to the indi-
vidual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the scrollbars.

Figure 8-3: Single zoom

Figure 8-4: Multiple zoom

Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search

The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search,
but only in single zoom mode (see "Use Zoom Limits" on page 562).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 544

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

8.2.2 Zoom functions

Access: "Zoom" icons in toolbar

Single Zoom................................................................................................................ 545
Multi-Zoom.................................................................................................................. 545
Measurement Zoom.................................................................................................... 545
└ Level Lock.....................................................................................................546
└ X-Lock...........................................................................................................546
└ Y-Lock........................................................................................................... 546
└ Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram).........................................546
Restore Original Display............................................................................................. 546
Data shift (Pan)....................................................................................................... 547
Data Zoom............................................................................................................... 547

Single Zoom

A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an
enlarged extract of the trace. This function can be used repetitively until the required
details are visible.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1241
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:AREA on page 1240

Multi-Zoom

In multiple zoom mode, you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane-
ously. An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace, while the
zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows. The zoom area that corre-
sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner, between the
scrollbars.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]
on page 1243
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>:AREA
on page 1242

Measurement Zoom
As opposed to the graphical zoom, which is merely a visual tool, the measurement
zoom adapts the measurement settings such that the data you are interested in is dis-
played in the required detail. In measurement zoom mode, you can change the display
using touch gestures. This is the default operating mode of the FSW.
For details on touch gestures see "Operating Basics" in the FSW Getting Started man-
ual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 545

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

Note: The measurement settings are adapted to practical values based on a suitable
grid for the current settings, rather than to unwieldy values that reflect precisely the
pixel you happen to tap.
If the measurement zoom leads to undesirable results, you can easily return to the
original measurement settings using the "UNDO" function.
When you select the "Measurement Zoom" icon, then tap in a diagram, a dotted rect-
angle is displayed which you can drag to define the zoom area. This allows you to
define the zoom area more precisely than by spreading two fingers in the display.
The measurement zoom function provides further options in a context-sensitive menu,
which is displayed when you tap the icon for about a second (or right-click it). These
options concern the behavior of the firmware for subsequent touch gestures on the
screen. Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset.

Level Lock ← Measurement Zoom

If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is:
remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen.

X-Lock ← Measurement Zoom

If activated, the x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.

Y-Lock ← Measurement Zoom

If activated, the y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.

Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram) ← Measurement Zoom

If you already performed a graphical zoom using the "Single Zoom" on page 545 or
"Multi-Zoom" on page 545 functions, this function automatically adapts the measure-
ment settings to maintain the currently zoomed display.

Restore Original Display

Restores the original display, that is, the originally calculated displays for the entire
capture buffer, and closes all zoom windows.
Note: This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms,
for which measurement settings were adapted, are recalculated based on the adapted
measurement settings. In this case, the zoomed display is maintained.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 546

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

Remote command:
Single zoom:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1241
Multiple zoom:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:ZOOM:MULTiple<zn>[:STATe]
on page 1243 (for each multiple zoom window)

Data shift (Pan)

Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display (analysis region or hop/chirp) and
re-evaluates the new data. ALL result displays based on the same data (analysis
region or hop/chirp) are updated.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Tip: Result tables are also re-evaluated for each data shift, which can take some time.
Close the result tables during a data shift/zoom to improve the screen update speed.

Data Zoom
Decreases the amount of data to be evaluated in the result display (analysis region or
hop/chirp) and re-evaluates the new data, thus enlarging the display of the remaining
data.
ALL result displays based on the same data (analysis region or hop/chirp) are updated.
Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Tip: result tables are also re-evaluated for each data zoom, which can take some time.
Close the result tables during a data shift/zoom to improve the screen update speed.

8.2.3 How to zoom into a diagram

The remote commands required to zoom into a display are described in Section 13.8.1,
"Zooming into the display", on page 1240.
The following tasks are described here:
● "To zoom into the diagram at one position" on page 547
● "To return to original display" on page 548
● "To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram" on page 548
● "To maintain a zoomed display permanently" on page 549

For information on how to zoom into a diagram using touch gestures and change the
display permanently, see Section 4.5.5, "Touchscreen gestures", on page 99.

To zoom into the diagram at one position

1.

Click on the "Single Zoom" icon in the toolbar.

Zoom mode is activated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 547

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

2. Tap and drag your finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The
selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.

When you leave the touchscreen, the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace
area.

3. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to enlarge the diagram further.

Scrolling in the zoomed display

You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the
right and at the bottom of the diagram.

To return to original display

►

Click on the "Zoom Off" icon in the toolbar.

The original trace display is restored. Zoom mode remains active, however.

To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram

1.

Click on the "Multi-Zoom" icon in the toolbar.

Multiple zoom mode is activated.

2. Select the first area in the diagram to be enlarged as described in "To zoom into
the diagram at one position" on page 547. The selected area is indicated by a dot-
ted rectangle.
When you have completed your selection, the original trace is shown in an over-
view diagram with the selected area indicated by a dotted rectangle. The zoomed
trace area is displayed in a separate window (see Figure 8-4.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 548

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Zoomed displays

3.

Click on the "Multi-Zoom" icon in the toolbar again.

4. In the overview diagram, select the next area to be enlarged.

The second zoom area is indicated in the overview diagram, and a second zoom
window is displayed.

5. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to zoom into further trace areas (up to four).

To move or change zoom areas

In multiple zoom mode, you can change the size or position of the individual zoom
areas easily at any time.
► To resize a zoom area, tap directly on the corresponding frame in the overview
window and drag the line to change the size of the frame.
To move a zoom area, tap inside the corresponding frame in the overview window
and drag the frame to the new position.
The contents of the zoom windows are adapted accordingly.

To maintain a zoomed display permanently

Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points tempora-
rily. In order to change the display permanently, you must change the corresponding
measurement settings.
(Note: Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement set-
tings to reflect a graphically zoomed display, see "To perform a measurement zoom"
on page 549).
1. Perform a graphical zoom as described in the previous procedures.

2. Select the "Measurement Zoom" icon from the toolbar.

3. Select "Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)".

The measurement settings are adapted as required to obtain the zoomed result
display.

To perform a measurement zoom

Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement settings to
reflect a graphically zoomed display.
1. Select the "Measurement Zoom" icon from the toolbar.

2. Do one of the following to define the zoom area:

● Stretch two fingers in the diagram to enlarge the area between them.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 549

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

● Tap and drag one finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The
selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.
The measurement settings are adapted as required to obtain the zoomed result
display.

8.3 Marker usage

Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values
in the diagram. Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display both in
the time and frequency domain. In addition to basic markers, sophisticated marker
functions are provided for special results such as noise or demodulation.

Markers in Spectrogram Displays

In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers
at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in
addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new
marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently
selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame.

● Basics on markers.................................................................................................550
● Marker settings......................................................................................................553
● Marker search settings and positioning functions................................................. 559
● Marker (measurement) functions.......................................................................... 567
● How to work with markers..................................................................................... 588
● Measurement example: measuring harmonics using marker functions................ 591

8.3.1 Basics on markers

Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a
better understanding of the required configuration settings.
Markers are used to mark points on traces, to read out measurement results and to
select a display section quickly. FSW provides 17 markers per display window. In the
Spectrum application, the same markers are displayed in all windows.
● To set individual markers very quickly, use the softkeys in the "Marker" menu.
● To set up several markers at once, use the "Marker" dialog box.
● To position the selected marker to a special value, use the softkeys in the "Marker
To" menu.
● The easiest way to work with markers is using a mouse. Simply drag the marker
and drop it at the required position.
● When you select a marker in a diagram, a vertical line is displayed which indicates
the marker's current x-value.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 550

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

● Alternatively, change the position of the selected marker using the rotary knob. By
default, the marker is moved from one pixel to the next. If you need to position the
marker more precisely, change the step size to move from one sweep point to the
next (General Marker Setting).
● You can also set an active marker to a new position by defining its x-position
numerically. When you select the softkey for a marker, an edit dialog box is dis-
played.
● The most commonly required marker settings and functions are also available as
softkeys or via the context menu. Tap the marker on the touch screen and hold
your finger for about 2 seconds until the context menu is opened, then select the
required entry.
● Softkeys for active markers (displayed on the screen) are highlighted blue. The
softkey for the currently selected marker (for which functions are performed) is
highlighted orange.
● To determine more sophisticated marker results, use the special functions in the
"Marker Function" dialog box.
● Marker types......................................................................................................... 551
● Activating markers.................................................................................................552
● Marker results....................................................................................................... 552

8.3.1.1 Marker types

All markers can be used either as normal markers or delta markers. A normal marker
indicates the absolute signal value at the defined position in the diagram. A delta
marker indicates the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker (by
default marker 1).
In addition, special functions can be assigned to the individual markers. The availability
of special marker functions depends on whether the measurement is performed in the
frequency or time domain, and on the type of measurement.
Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to analyze
the measurement results for special marker functions. They disappear when the asso-
ciated function is deactivated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 551

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

8.3.1.2 Activating markers

Only active markers are displayed in the diagram and in the marker table.
Active markers are indicated by a highlighted softkey.
By default, marker 1 is active and positioned on the maximum value (peak) of trace 1
as a normal marker. If several traces are displayed, the marker is set to the maximum
value of the trace which has the lowest number and is not frozen (View mode). The
next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level (next peak)
as a delta marker; its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1.
A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is
visible. If a trace is switched off, the corresponding markers and marker functions are
also deactivated. If the trace is switched on again, the markers along with coupled
functions are restored to their original positions, provided the markers have not been
used on another trace.

8.3.1.3 Marker results

Normal markers point to a trace point on the x-axis and display the associated numeric
value for that trace point. Delta markers indicate an offset between the level at the
delta marker position and the level at the position of the assigned reference marker, in
dB.
Note that markers placed on the start and stop values of the x-axis indicate the y-val-
ues of the first and last trace point, respectively. For details see "X-value of the sweep
point" on page 619.
Signal count markers determine the frequency of a signal at the marker position very
accurately.
The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table. By
default, the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area. If more markers
are activated, the results are displayed in a marker table.

Marker information in diagram area

By default, the results of the last two markers or delta markers that were activated are
displayed in the diagram area.

The following information is displayed there:

● The marker type (M for normal, D for delta, or special function name)
● The marker number
● The assigned trace number in square brackets [ ]
● The marker value on the y-axis, or the result of the marker function
● The marker position on the x-axis

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 552

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

For n dB down markers, additional information is displayed, see Table 8-1.

Marker information in marker table

In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram area, a separate
marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram. This table provides the following
information for all active markers:

Type Marker type: N (normal), D (delta), T (temporary, internal) and number

Ref Reference marker for delta markers

Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned

Frame Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in. Displayed only when the Spectro-
gram is displayed.

X-value X-value of the marker

Y-value Y-value of the marker

Function Activated marker or measurement function

Function Result Result of the active marker or measurement function

8.3.2 Marker settings

Or: [MKR] > "Marker Config"

The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.3.1, "Setting up individual markers", on page 1272.
● Individual marker setup......................................................................................... 553
● General marker settings........................................................................................557

8.3.2.1 Individual marker setup

Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously.

Initial marker setup is performed using the "Marker" dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 553

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview. By default, the first
marker is defined as a normal marker, whereas all others are defined as delta markers
with reference to the first marker. All markers are assigned to trace 1, but only the first
marker is active.
Selected Marker.......................................................................................................... 554
Marker State................................................................................................................554
Marker Position X-value.............................................................................................. 555
Frame (Spectrogram only).......................................................................................... 555
Marker Type................................................................................................................ 555
Reference Marker....................................................................................................... 555
Linking to Another Marker........................................................................................... 556
Assigning the Marker to a Trace................................................................................. 556
Select Marker.............................................................................................................. 556
All Markers Off.............................................................................................................557

Selected Marker
Marker name. The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange.
Remote command:
Marker selected via suffix <m> in remote commands.

Marker State
Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 554

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Marker Position X-value

Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the
absolute position is indicated. For delta markers, the position relative to the reference
marker is provided.
To create a delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as
the x-value for the delta marker. Then link the delta marker to another marker using the
Linking to Another Marker function.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1279
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 1276

Frame (Spectrogram only)

Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1294
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe on page 1298

Marker Type
Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta".
These types cannot be changed.
Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an
additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not
activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal" A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position
in the diagram.
"Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci-
fied reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

Reference Marker
Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis
results (delta marker values).
If the reference marker is deactivated, the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva-
ted.
If a fixed reference point is configured (see "Defining a Fixed Reference"
on page 558), the reference point ("FXD") can also be selected instead of another
marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREFerence on page 1275

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 555

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Linking to Another Marker

Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers. If the x-
axis value of the initial marker is changed, the linked marker follows to the same posi-
tion on the x-axis. Linking is off by default.
Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ-
ence (e.g. between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement
and a reference trace).
For linked delta markers, the x-value of the delta marker is 0 Hz by default. To create a
delta marker in a fixed distance to another marker, define the distance as the x-value
for the linked delta marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1277
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<ms>:LINK:TO:MARKer<md> on page 1274
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK on page 1273

Assigning the Marker to a Trace

The "Trace" setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace. The trace deter-
mines which value the marker shows at the marker position. If the marker was previ-
ously assigned to a different trace, the marker remains on the previous frequency or
time, but indicates the value of the new trace.
If a trace is turned off, the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva-
ted.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe on page 1278

Select Marker
The "Select Marker" function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate
one or more markers quickly.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 556

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

All Markers Off

Deactivates all markers in one step.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF on page 1277

8.3.2.2 General marker settings

Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark-
ers.

Marker Table Display...................................................................................................557

Marker Info.................................................................................................................. 558
Marker Stepsize.......................................................................................................... 558
Defining a Fixed Reference.........................................................................................558

Marker Table Display

Defines how the marker information is displayed.
"On" Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath
the diagram.
"Off" No separate marker table is displayed.
If Marker Info is active, the marker information is displayed within the
diagram area.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 557

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

"Auto" (Default) If more than two markers are active, the marker table is dis-
played automatically.
If Marker Info is active, the marker information for up to two markers
is displayed in the diagram area.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MTABle on page 1280

Marker Info
Turns the marker information displayed in the diagram on and off.

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] on page 1280

Marker Stepsize
Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob.
"Standard" The marker position is moved in steps of (Span/1000), which corre-
sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display
of 1001 sweep points. This setting is most suitable to move the
marker over a larger distance.
"Sweep The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next. This
Points" setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points
are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the
screen. It is the default mode.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe on page 1280

Defining a Fixed Reference

Instead of using a reference marker whose position can vary depending on the mea-
surement results, you can define a fixed reference marker for trace analysis.
Note that this function is not available in all result displays.
For "State" = "On", a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as
"FXD". The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace
assigned to marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker
is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value. The delta marker refers to the fixed
reference marker.
The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the ref-
erence marker. To move the fixed reference, move the red display lines marked "FXD"
in the diagram, or change the position settings in the "Marker Settings" tab of the
"Marker" dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 558

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Peak Search sets the fixed reference marker to the current maximum value of the
trace assigned to marker 1.
If activated, the fixed reference marker ("FXD") can also be selected as a Reference
Marker instead of another marker.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 1303
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1303
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1302
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
on page 1302

8.3.3 Marker search settings and positioning functions

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Search"

or: [MKR TO]
Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and
easily, or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value. In
order to determine the required marker position, searches may be performed. The
search results can be influenced by special settings.
For more information on searching for signal peaks see Section 8.3.4.8, "Marker peak
list", on page 584.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the marker", on page 1285.
● Marker search settings..........................................................................................559
● Marker search settings for spectrograms..............................................................562
● Positioning functions............................................................................................. 565

8.3.3.1 Marker search settings

Access: [MKR TO] > "Search Config"

Markers are commonly used to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum val-
ues, in the measured signal. Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak
search results.

For Spectrograms, special marker settings are available, see Section 8.3.3.2, "Marker
search settings for spectrograms", on page 562.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 559

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Search Mode for Next Peak........................................................................................ 560

Exclude LO..................................................................................................................560
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 561
Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search.........................................................561
Search Limits.............................................................................................................. 561
└ Search Limits (Left / Right)........................................................................... 561
└ Search Threshold..........................................................................................561
└ Use Zoom Limits........................................................................................... 562
└ Search Limits Off.......................................................................................... 562

Search Mode for Next Peak

Selects the search mode for the next peak search.
"Left" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current
peak.
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current
peak.
"Right" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current
peak.
Remote command:
Section 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the marker", on page 1285

Exclude LO
If activated, restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions.
"On" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 ×
resolution bandwidth (RBW).
Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter-
mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig-
nal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0
Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.
"Off" No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in
the marker search functions.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 560

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 1281

Peak Excursion
Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi-
fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for
the peak excursion is 6 dB.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected
result display type.
For more information, see Section 8.3.4.8, "Marker peak list", on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1281

Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search

If activated, a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for
marker 1 after each sweep.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.
For EMI measurements, these functions are not available; use Automatic Peak Search
instead (see Section 6.13.4.2, "EMI final measurement configuration", on page 347).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1285
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 1287

Search Limits
The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con-
ditions.

Search Limits (Left / Right) ← Search Limits

If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the
limited search range are considered.
For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1283

Search Threshold ← Search Limits

Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. If
enabled, only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1284
CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 1284

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 561

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits

If activated, the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single
zoom.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1284

Search Limits Off ← Search Limits

Deactivates the search range limits.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1284

8.3.3.2 Marker search settings for spectrograms

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Markers" > "Search"

or: [MKR TO] > "Search Config"
Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results, but also the sweep history.
Thus, when searching for peaks, you must define the search settings within a single
time frame (x-direction) and within several time frames (y-direction).
These settings are only available for spectrogram displays.

Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction................................................................. 563

Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction..................................................................563
Marker Search Type....................................................................................................564
Marker Search Area.................................................................................................... 564
Exclude LO..................................................................................................................564
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 564

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 562

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search.........................................................564

Search Limits.............................................................................................................. 565
└ Search Limits (Left / Right)........................................................................... 565
└ Search Threshold..........................................................................................565
└ Use Zoom Limits........................................................................................... 565
└ Search Limits Off.......................................................................................... 565

Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction

Selects the search mode for the next peak search within the currently selected frame.
"Left" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the left of the current
peak.
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum to either side of the current
peak.
"Right" Determines the next maximum/minimum to the right of the current
peak.
Remote command:
Section 13.8.3.4, "Positioning the marker", on page 1285

Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction

Selects the search mode for the next peak search within all frames at the current
marker position.
"Up" Determines the next maximum/minimum above the current peak (in
more recent frames).
"Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum above or below the current
peak (in all frames).
"Down" Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in
older frames).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe on page 1295
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:ABOVe
on page 1299
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow on page 1295
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:BELow
on page 1300
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1296
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MAXimum:NEXT
on page 1300
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe on page 1296
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:ABOVe
on page 1301
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow on page 1296
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:BELow
on page 1301
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT on page 1297
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:Y:MINimum:NEXT
on page 1301

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 563

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Marker Search Type

Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram.
"X-Search" Searches only within the currently selected frame.
"Y-Search" Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position.
"XY-Search" Searches in all frames at all positions.
Remote command:
Defined by the search function, see Section 13.8.3.6, "Marker search (spectrograms)",
on page 1293

Marker Search Area

Defines which frames the search is performed in.
"Visible" Only the visible frames are searched.
"Memory" All frames stored in the memory are searched.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 1294
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SPECtrogram:SARea on page 1299

Exclude LO
If activated, restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions.
"On" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 ×
resolution bandwidth (RBW).
Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter-
mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig-
nal at 0 Hz. To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0
Hz, this frequency is excluded from the peak search.
"Off" No restriction to the search range. The frequency 0 Hz is included in
the marker search functions.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude on page 1281

Peak Excursion
Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi-
fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for
the peak excursion is 6 dB.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected
result display type.
For more information, see Section 8.3.4.8, "Marker peak list", on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1281

Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search

If activated, a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for
marker 1 after each sweep.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 564

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

For EMI measurements, these functions are not available; use Automatic Peak Search
instead (see Section 6.13.4.2, "EMI final measurement configuration", on page 347).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1285
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO on page 1287

Search Limits
The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con-
ditions.

Search Limits (Left / Right) ← Search Limits

If activated, limit lines are defined and displayed for the search. Only results within the
limited search range are considered.
For details on limit lines for searches, see "Peak search limits" on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHt on page 1283

Search Threshold ← Search Limits

Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. If
enabled, only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1284
CALCulate<n>:THReshold on page 1284

Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits

If activated, the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single
zoom.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM[:STATe] on page 1284

Search Limits Off ← Search Limits

Deactivates the search range limits.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1282
CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 1284

8.3.3.3 Positioning functions

Access: [MKR ->]

The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search
or set other characteristic values to the current marker value.
Peak Search................................................................................................................566
Search Next Peak....................................................................................................... 566
Search Minimum......................................................................................................... 566

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 565

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Search Next Minimum.................................................................................................566

Center Frequency = Marker Frequency...................................................................... 567
Reference Level = Marker Level................................................................................. 567

Peak Search
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the maximum of the trace. If no marker is
active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the peak is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1286
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 1289

Search Next Peak

Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (lower) maximum of the assigned
trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next peak is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1286
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1287
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1286
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1289
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1290
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 1289

Search Minimum
Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the minimum of the trace. If no marker is
active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1288
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] on page 1290

Search Next Minimum

Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the next (higher) minimum of the selected
trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated.
For spectrogram displays, define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1288
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1287
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1288
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT on page 1290
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT on page 1290
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt on page 1291

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 566

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Center Frequency = Marker Frequency

Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency. A peak
can thus be set as center frequency, for example to analyze it in detail with a smaller
span.
This function is not available for zero span measurements.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer on page 1194

Reference Level = Marker Level

Sets the reference level to the selected marker level.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:REFerence on page 1210

8.3.4 Marker (measurement) functions

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions"

The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.3, "Working with markers", on page 1272.
● Precise frequency (signal count) marker...............................................................568
● Measuring noise density (noise meas marker)..................................................... 569
● Phase noise measurement marker....................................................................... 572
● Measuring characteristic bandwidths (n db down marker)....................................575
● Fixed reference marker......................................................................................... 577
● Measuring the power in a channel (band power marker)......................................578

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 567

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

● Demodulating marker values and providing audio output (marker demodulation)

.............................................................................................................................. 581
● Marker peak list.....................................................................................................584
● Deactivating all marker functions.......................................................................... 588

8.3.4.1 Precise frequency (signal count) marker

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" >
"Signal Count" > "Signal Count Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Signal Count" > "Signal Count Config"
A normal marker determines the position of the point on the trace and indicates the sig-
nal frequency at this position. The trace, however, contains only a limited number of
points. Depending on the selected span, each trace point can contain many measure-
ment values. Thus, the frequency resolution of each trace point is limited.
(See also Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data is measured: sweep points and sweep
count", on page 499).
Frequency resolution is further restricted by the RBW and sweep time settings.
To determine the frequency of a signal point accurately without changing the sweep
settings, the FSW is equipped with a signal counter. The signal counter sets the RF to
the current marker position, then counts the zero crossings of the IF (thus the term sig-
nal counter) and derives the precise frequency value.

To determine the frequency accurately using the signal counter function, the marker
must be sufficiently close to the actual signal (for a 3-dB Gauss filter, the delta must be
less than 2*RBW). Usually, the marker peak function detects a trace point that is close
enough. However, for a large span or a small number of sweep points, the result can
be inaccurate.

Signal counting can be performed explicitly at the current marker position ("Signal
Count" marker function), or implicitly by the FSW for certain functions.
Signal counting is only possible while the instrument is not sweeping. Thus, to perform
a signal count for a marker, the sweep is stopped at the marker position. The fre-
quency is determined with the desired resolution and then the sweep is allowed to con-
tinue.

A measurement example is described in Section 6.1.3.2, "Measuring the signal fre-

quency using the signal counter", on page 135.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 568

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Signal counters are not available for measurements on I/Q-based data.

Remote commands:
"Example: performing a highly accurate frequency measurement using the signal count
marker" on page 1331
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 1319
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution on page 1320
Signal Count Marker State.......................................................................................... 569
Resolution................................................................................................................... 569

Signal Count Marker State

Activates or deactivates the special signal count marker function.
When activated, the sweep stops at the reference marker until the signal counter has
delivered a result.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 1319
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? on page 1319

Resolution
Defines the resolution with which the signal is analyzed around the reference marker 1.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution on page 1320

8.3.4.2 Measuring noise density (noise meas marker)

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" >
"Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas
Config"
Using the noise measurement marker function, the noise power density is measured at
the position of the marker. In the time domain mode, all points of the trace are used to
determine the noise power density. When measurements are performed in the fre-
quency domain, eight points to the right and left of the marker (if available) are used for
the measurement to obtain a stable result.

Result display
Noise density is the noise referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz. With logarithmic amplitude
units (dBm, dBmV, dBmµV, dBµA), the noise power density is output in dBm/Hz, i.e. as
the level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A,
W), the noise voltage density is analyzed in µV/√Hz; the noise current density in µA/
√Hz; the noise power density in µW/√Hz.
The result is indicated as the function result in the Marker Table.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 569

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Prerequisite settings
The following settings are required to obtain correct values:
● Detector: Sample or RMS
● Video bandwidth:
≤ 0.1 resolution bandwidth with sample detector
≥ 3 x resolution bandwidth with RMS detector
● Trace averaging:
In the default setting, the FSW uses the sample detector for the noise function.
With the sample detector, you can set the trace to "Average" mode to stabilize the
measured values. When the RMS detector is used, trace averaging produces noise
levels that are too low and cannot be corrected. Instead, increase the sweep time
to obtain stable measurement results.

Correction factors
The FSW uses the following correction factors to analyze the noise density from the
marker level:
● Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth, the bandwidth
correction value is deducted from the marker level. It is 10 x lg (1 Hz/BWNoise),
where BWNoise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter (RBW).
● RMS detector: With the exception of bandwidth correction, no further corrections
are required since this detector already indicates the power for each point of the
trace.
● Sample detector: As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging, 1.05 dB
is added to the marker level. This is the difference between the average value and
the RMS value of white noise. With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added addi-
tionally. Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account, which yields a value
that is 1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging.
● To allow for a more stable noise display, eight trace points on each side of the mea-
surement frequency are averaged.
● For span > 0, the measured values are averaged versus time (after a sweep).

The FSW noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density level. It is
calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation (RF Att) from the displayed noise level
and adding 174 to the result.

The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box
(see Section 8.3.2.1, "Individual marker setup", on page 553). Any settings to the
marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box are also changed in
the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 570

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Remote commands:
"Example: measuring noise density" on page 1327
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1308
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? on page 1308
Marker State................................................................................................................571
Marker Type................................................................................................................ 571
Noise Measurement State...........................................................................................572
Switching All Noise Measurement Off......................................................................... 572

Marker State
Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

Marker Type
Toggles the marker type.
The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta".
These types cannot be changed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 571

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an
additional delta marker 1. For any other marker, switching the marker type does not
activate an additional marker, it only switches the type of the selected marker.
"Normal" A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position
in the diagram.
"Delta" A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci-
fied reference marker (marker 1 by default).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1278
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 1275

Noise Measurement State

Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram.
This function is only available for normal markers.
If activated, the marker displays the noise power density measured at the position of
the marker.
For details see Section 8.3.4.2, "Measuring noise density (noise meas marker)",
on page 569.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1308
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? on page 1308

Switching All Noise Measurement Off

Deactivates noise measurement for all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe[:STATe] on page 1308

8.3.4.3 Phase noise measurement marker

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase
Noise Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase Noise Config"
For each of the 16 markers, you can activate a phase noise measurement.
Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier; it creates frequencies next to the
carrier frequency. A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measure-
ments at defined offsets from the carrier; the results are given in relation to the carrier
level (dBc). The phase noise marker function measures the noise power at the delta
markers referred to 1 Hz bandwidth. Marker 1 is used as the reference for the phase
noise measurement. By default, the current frequency and level of marker 1 are used
as the fixed reference marker. However, you can start a peak search to use the current
signal peak as the reference point, or you can define a reference point manually.
The reference point for the phase noise measurement is fixed. After phase noise mea-
surement is started, you can set the reference level or the center frequency so that the
carrier is outside the displayed frequency range. You can also activate a notch filter to
suppress the carrier.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 572

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Alternatively, the reference point can be determined automatically by a peak search

after each sweep. Use this function to track a drifting source during a phase noise
measurement. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise measurement result,
keeps the delta frequency value. Thus, the phase noise measurement leads to reliable
results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Only if the marker 2 reaches
the border of the span, the delta marker value is adjusted to be within the span. In
these cases, select a larger span.
The result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in level between the refer-
ence point and the noise power density. It is indicated as the function result of the
phase noise marker in the "marker table".
The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0.1 times the
resolution bandwidth (RBW). The two settings are considered in the correction values
used for the noise power measurement. To obtain stable results, two pixels on the right
and the left of the delta marker position are taken for the measurement.
The procedure to determine the noise power is identical to the method used for the
noise power measurement (see Section 8.3.4.2, "Measuring noise density (noise meas
marker)", on page 569).
The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box.
Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box
are also changed in the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 573

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Remote commands:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1311
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 1311
Phase Noise Measurement State............................................................................... 574
Defining Reference Point............................................................................................ 575
Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off............................................................ 575

Phase Noise Measurement State

Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia-
gram.
This function is only available for delta markers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 574

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

If activated, the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets
from the reference position.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1310
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? on page 1309

Defining Reference Point

Instead of using marker 1 as the reference marker, a fixed reference marker can be
defined for phase noise measurement.
The "Level" and "Frequency" or "Time" settings define the position and value of the ref-
erence point.
Alternatively, a Peak Search can be performed to set the maximum value of the
selected trace as the reference point.
If "Automatic Peak Search" is activated, a peak search is started automatically after
each sweep and the result is used as the reference point.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1303
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1302
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK]
on page 1302
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AUTO on page 1309

Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off

Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1310

8.3.4.4 Measuring characteristic bandwidths (n db down marker)

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "n dB down" > "n dB Down
Config"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "n dB down" > "n dB Down Config"
When characterizing the shape of a signal, the bandwidth at a specified offset from its
peak level is often of interest. The offset is specified as a relative decrease in ampli-
tude of n dB. To measure this bandwidth, you could use several markers and delta
markers and determine the bandwidth manually. However, using the n dB down marker
function makes the task very simple and quick.
The n dB down marker function uses the current value of marker 1 as the reference
point. It activates two temporary markers T1 and T2 located on the signal, whose level
is n dB below the level of the reference point. Marker T1 is placed to the left and
marker T2 to the right of the reference marker. The default setting for n is 3 dB, but it
can be changed.
If a positive offset is entered, the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active refer-
ence point. If a negative value is entered (for example for notch filter measurements),
the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference point.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 575

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Figure 8-5: n dB down marker function

The following marker function results are displayed:

Table 8-1: n dB down marker function results

Label Description

M1 Current position and level of marker 1

ndB Offset value (n dB down)

ndB down Bw / Determined bandwidth or pulse width (zero span) at the offset
PWid

Q-factor Center frequency / n-dB-down-bandwidth

Quality factor of the determined bandwidth (characteristic of damping or resonance)

T1, T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers

If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely, for
example due to noise, dashes are displayed as a result.

Remote commands:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1318

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 576

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? on page 1317

n dB down Marker State..............................................................................................577
n dB down Value......................................................................................................... 577

n dB down Marker State

Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1318
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? on page 1317

n dB down Value
Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or
time span.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? on page 1316
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? on page 1318

8.3.4.5 Fixed reference marker

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Reference Fixed"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Reference Fixed"
Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea-
surement results, a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis. Once
positioned, the reference marker does not move during subsequent sweeps unless you
explicitely move it manually.
When you select this marker function, a vertical and a horizontal red display line are
displayed, marked as "FXD". A normal marker is activated and set to the peak value
and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker is set to the position of
the normal marker at the peak value. The delta marker refers to the fixed reference
marker.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 577

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

You can move the position of the fixed reference marker graphically by dragging the
display lines, or numerically by entering values for the marker position and level.

Remote commands:
"Example: using a fixed reference marker" on page 1326
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe] on page 1303
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X on page 1302
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:Y on page 1303

8.3.4.6 Measuring the power in a channel (band power marker)

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Band Power" > "Band Power
Config"
or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Band Power"
To determine the noise power in a transmission channel, you can use a noise marker
and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth. However, the results are only accu-
rate for flat noise.
Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span
(band) around a marker (similar to ACP measurements). By default, 5 % of the current
span is used. The span is indicated by limit lines in the diagram. You can easily change
the span by moving the limit lines in the diagram. They are automatically aligned sym-
metrically to the marker frequency. They are also moved automatically if you move the
marker on the screen.
The results can be displayed either as a power (dBm) or density (dBm/Hz) value and
are indicated in the "marker table" for each band power marker.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 578

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Relative band power markers

The results for band power markers which are defined as delta markers and thus have
a reference value can also be calculated as reference power values (in dB).
For Analog Modulation Analysis, relative band power markers are not available.
In this case, the result of the band power deltamarker is the difference between the
absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the ref-
erence marker. The powers are subtracted logarithmically, so the result is a dB value.
[Relative band power (Delta2) in dB] = [absolute band power (Delta2) in dBm] - [abso-
lute (band) power of reference marker in dBm]
The measured power for the reference marker may be an absolute power at a single
point (if the reference marker is not a band power marker), or the power in a band (if
the reference marker is a band power marker itself).
If the reference marker for the band power marker is also a delta marker, the absolute
power level for the reference marker is used for calculation.

Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not
zero span) in the Spectrum and Spectrum application. In Analog Modulation Analysis
with AM, FM, or PM spectrum results, this marker function does not determine a power
value, but rather the deviation within the specified span.
For the I/Q Analyzer application, band power markers are only available for Spectrum
displays.
The entire band must lie within the display. If it is moved out of the display, the result
cannot be calculated (indicated by "- - -" as the "Function Result"). However, the width
of the band is maintained so that the band power can be calculated again when it
returns to the display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 579

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a
band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other-
wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker
functions for this marker are deactivated).
If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to "Auto", the RMS detector is used.
The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the "Marker" dialog box
(see Section 8.3.2.1, "Individual marker setup", on page 553). Any settings to the
marker state or type changed in the "Marker Function" dialog box are also changed in
the "Marker" dialog box and vice versa.

Remote commands:
"Example: measuring the power in a channel using band power markers"
on page 1329
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1313
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? on page 1312
Band Power Measurement State................................................................................ 580
Span............................................................................................................................581
Power Mode................................................................................................................ 581
Switching All Band Power Measurements Off.............................................................581

Band Power Measurement State

Activates or deactivates band power measurement for the marker in the diagram.
Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements (not
zero span) in the Spectrum application.
If activated, the markers display the power or density measured in the band around the
current marker position.
For details see Section 8.3.4.6, "Measuring the power in a channel (band power
marker)", on page 578.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 580

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1313
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1315

Span
Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured.
The span is indicated by lines in the diagram. You can easily change the span by mov-
ing the limit lines in the diagram. They are automatically aligned symmetrically to the
marker frequency. They are also moved automatically if you move the marker on the
screen.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 1313
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN on page 1315

Power Mode
Defines the mode of the power measurement result.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the power mode is not editable for AM, FM, or PM
spectrum results. In this case, the marker function does not determine a power value,
but rather the deviation within the specified span.
"Power" The result is an absolute power level.
The power unit depends on the Unit setting.
"Relative This setting is only available for a delta band power marker.
Power" The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band
around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference
marker (see "Reference Marker" on page 345). The powers are sub-
tracted logarithmically, so the result is a dB value.
[Relative band power (Delta2) in dB] = [absolute band power (Delta2)
in dBm] - [absolute (band) power of reference marker in dBm]
For details see "Relative band power markers" on page 579
"Density" The result is a power level in relation to the bandwidth, displayed in
dBm/Hz.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 1312
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 1314

Switching All Band Power Measurements Off

Deactivates band power measurement for all markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1313
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1315

8.3.4.7 Demodulating marker values and providing audio output (marker demodulation)

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" >
"Marker Demodulation" > "Marker Demod Config"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 581

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Marker Demodulation" > "Marker
Demod Config"
The FSW provides demodulators for AM, FM and PM signals. The demodulation
marker function sends the demodulated data at the current marker frequency to the
audio output. Thus, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically with the help of the
internal loudspeaker or with headphones.

This function is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements or measure-
ments on I/Q-based data.

The sweep stops at the frequency determined by marker 1 for the selected time and
the RF signal is demodulated in a bandwidth that corresponds to the RBW. Alterna-
tively, demodulation can be activated continuously, i.e. audio output occurs regardless
of the marker position and the marker stop time. For measurements in the time domain
(zero span), demodulation is always continuous.
Optionally, a minimum level ("Squelch Level") can be defined so that the signal is only
demodulated when it exceeds the set level. This is useful during continuous demodula-
tion to avoid listening to noise.
The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video" on page 517) and
deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level are
set to the same value. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for
squelch. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.

Remote commands:
Section 13.8.3.15, "Programming examples for using markers and marker functions",
on page 1323
Marker Demodulation State........................................................................................ 583
Continuous Demodulation...........................................................................................583
Marker Stop Time........................................................................................................583
Modulation...................................................................................................................583
Squelch....................................................................................................................... 583
Squelch Level..............................................................................................................584

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 582

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Marker Demodulation State

Activates or deactivates the demodulation output. If activated, the signal is demodula-
ted and sent to the audio output.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] on page 1322

Continuous Demodulation
If activated, the signal is demodulated continuously and sent to the audio output,
instead of stopping the sweep at the marker frequency of marker 1 and demodulating
there for the configured marker stop time. This allows you to monitor the frequency
range acoustically (assuming the sweep time is long enough).
In FFT mode, "Continuous Demodulation" is not available. The sweep always stops at
the frequency of marker 1.
For EMI measurements, during the initial peak search, demodulation is not stopped at
the determined markers, even if "Continuous Demodulation" is disabled.
During the final measurement, demodulation is always performed at the detected peak
marker positions only (for the defined dwell time), regardless of the "Continuous
Demodulation" setting.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous
on page 1321

Marker Stop Time

Defines how long the sweep is stopped at the marker position to output the demodula-
ted signal.
For zero span measurements, demodulation is always active continuously, regardless
of the marker stop time.
For EMI measurements, the duration of the demodulation at each marker position is
limited by the dwell time of the EMI measurement marker (see "Dwell Time"
on page 350).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:HOLDoff on page 1321

Modulation
Defines the demodulation mode for output. The default setting is AM.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect on page 1322

Squelch
Activates or deactivates the squelch function. If activated, the audible AF is cut off
below a defined threshold level. Thus, you avoid hearing noise at the audio output
when no signal is available.
The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video" on page 517) and
deactivates any other trigger or gating settings. The squelch level and trigger level are
set to the same value. The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for
squelch. The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 583

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as "SQL" for squelch. The squelch
level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] on page 1323

Squelch Level
Defines the level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off if squelching is
enabled. The video trigger level is set to the same value.
The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel on page 1322

8.3.4.8 Marker peak list

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Marker Peak List"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Marker Peak List"
A common measurement task is to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum
signal levels. The FSW provides various peak search functions and applications:
● Setting a marker to a peak value once (Peak Search)
● Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area (Search Limits)
● Creating a "marker table" with all or a defined number of peak values for one
sweep ("Marker Peak List")
● Updating the marker position to the current peak value automatically after each
sweep (Auto Peak Search)
● Creating a fixed reference marker at the current peak value of a trace (Fixed Refer-
ence)

Peak search limits

The peak search can be restricted to a search area. The search area is defined by limit
lines which are also indicated in the diagram. In addition, a minimum value (threshold)
can be defined as a further search condition.

When is a peak a peak? - Peak excursion

During a peak search, noise values are detected as a peak if the signal is very flat or
does not contain many peaks. Therefore, you can define a relative threshold ("Peak
Excursion"). The signal level must increase by the threshold value before falling again
before a peak is detected. To avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima, enter
a peak excursion value that is higher than the difference between the highest and the
lowest value measured for the displayed inherent noise.

Effect of peak excursion settings (example)

The following figure shows a trace to be analyzed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 584

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Figure 8-6: Trace example

The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram
above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak:

Marker # Min. amplitude decrease to either side of the signal

1 80 dB

2 80 dB

3 55 dB

4 39 dB

5 32 dB

To eliminate the smaller peaks M3, M4 and M5 in the example above, a peak excur-
sion of at least 60 dB is required. In this case, the amplitude must rise at least 60 dB
before falling again before a peak is detected.

Marker peak list

The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum. It
is updated automatically after each sweep. How many peaks are displayed can be
defined, as well as the sort order. In addition, the detected peaks can be indicated in
the diagram. The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external
application.

Automatic peak search

A peak search can be repeated automatically after each sweep to keep the maximum
value as the reference point for a phase noise measurement. Automatic peak search is
useful to track a drifting source. The delta marker 2, which shows the phase noise

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 585

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

measurement result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore, the phase noise
measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting.

Using a peak as a fixed reference marker

Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency
level. In this case, the maximum level can be determined by an initial peak search and
then be used as a reference point for further measurement results.

Remote commands:
"Example: obtaining a marker peak list" on page 1327
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe on page 1306
TRAC? LIST,
See TRACe<n>[:DATA] on page 1262
Peak List State............................................................................................................ 587
Sort Mode....................................................................................................................587
Maximum Number of Peaks........................................................................................587
Peak Excursion........................................................................................................... 587
Display Marker Numbers.............................................................................................587
Export Peak List.......................................................................................................... 587

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 586

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

Peak List State

Activates/deactivates the marker peak list. If activated, the peak list is displayed and
the peaks are indicated in the trace display.
For each listed peak, the frequency/time ("X-value") and level ("Y-Value") values are
given.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe on page 1306

Sort Mode
Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x-values or y-values. In either
case, the values are sorted in ascending order.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT on page 1306

Maximum Number of Peaks

Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:LIST:SIZE on page 1305

Peak Excursion
Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi-
fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed; the resolution is 0.1 dB. The default setting for
the peak excursion is 6 dB.
For Analog Modulation Analysis, the unit and value range depend on the selected
result display type.
For more information, see Section 8.3.4.8, "Marker peak list", on page 584.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion on page 1281

Display Marker Numbers

By default, the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks
from the list. However, for large numbers of peaks, the marker numbers can decrease
readability; in this case, deactivate the marker number display.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:ANNotation:LABel[:STATe]
on page 1304

Export Peak List

The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file (.DAT) for analysis in an external appli-
cation.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:PEAK on page 1378
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 587

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

8.3.4.9 Deactivating all marker functions

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "All Functions Off"
Or: [MKR FUNC] > "All Functions Off"
All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF on page 1312
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF on page 1307
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF on page 1310

8.3.5 How to work with markers

The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate in detail how to work with markers.
● How to analyze a signal point in detail.................................................................. 588
● How to use a fixed reference marker.................................................................... 589
● How to output the demodulated signal accoustically............................................ 589
● How to export a peak list.......................................................................................590

8.3.5.1 How to analyze a signal point in detail

Step-by-step instructions on working with markers are provided here. For details on
individual functions and settings see Section 8.3.2, "Marker settings", on page 553.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.3, "Working with markers", on page 1272.

When you need to analyze a characteristic point in the signal in more detail, the follow-
ing procedure can be helpful:

1. Perform a peak search to determine the characteristic point roughly by pressing

[Peak Search].

2. If the required signal point is not the maximum, continue the peak search to one of
the subsequent maxima or minima:
a) Press [Mkr ->].
b) Select "Next Peak" or "Next Min".
c) If necessary, change the search settings by selecting "Search Config".

3. Center the display around the determined signal point by setting the marker value
to the center frequency. Select "Center = Mkr Freq".

4. Determine the precise frequency of the signal point:

a) Select "Select Marker Function".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 588

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

b) Select "Signal Count".

c) Select "Signal Count Resolution".
d) Select the resolution depending on how precise the result needs to be.

8.3.5.2 How to use a fixed reference marker

By default, delta markers refer to marker 1. However, they can also refer to a fixed ref-
erence marker.

How to Define and Move a Fixed Reference Marker

1. To display a fixed reference marker, do one of the following:
● Press [MKR FUNC], then select the "Reference Fixed" marker function.
● In the "Marker" dialog box, in the "Reference Fixed" area of the "Marker Config"
tab, set the "State" to "On".
A vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed, marked as "FXD". The
normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to
marker 1, and a delta marker to the next peak. The fixed reference marker is set to
the position of marker 1 at the peak value.

2. To move the fixed reference marker, do one of the following:

● Change the "Level" and "Frequency" of the reference point in the "Marker Con-
fig" tab of the "Marker" dialog box, . By default, the current peak value of trace
1 is set.
● Set the fixed reference marker to the current peak value by selecting "Peak
Search" in the "Marker Config" tab of the "Marker" dialog box.
● Move the "FXD" display lines that define the position of the fixed reference
marker by dragging them on the screen.

How to Assign a Fixed Reference Marker to Delta Markers

1. In the "Marker" dialog box, select the horizontal "Markers" tab.

2. For the active delta marker that is to refer to the fixed reference marker, select
"FXD" from the "Reference Marker" list.
The delta marker indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker posi-
tion from the fixed reference value.

8.3.5.3 How to output the demodulated signal accoustically

For long sweep times you may wish to monitor a measurement accoustically rather
than visually to determine when a certain signal level is reached.

1. Set marker 1 to the signal level you want to monitor.

2. Press [Mkr FUNCT].

3. Select "Select Marker Function".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 589

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

4. Select "Marker Demodulation".

5. Select "Marker Demod Config".

The marker function results are determined immediately according to the default
settings.

6. Define how long you want to hear the output signal when the marker value is
reached by entering the duration in the "Marker Stop Time" field.
Alternatively, the audio signal can be output continuously, regardless of the marker
value; in this case, set "Continuous Demodulation" to "On".

7. Select the modulation type (AM/FM/PM) of the signal.

8. To avoid listening to noise during continuous output, set "Squelch" to "On" and
define the signal level below which the signal is ignored ("Squelch").

9. Set "Marker Demodulation" to "On".

10. CAUTION! Risk of hearing damage. To protect your hearing, make sure that the
volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones.
Plug your headphones into the PHONES connector on the front panel of the FSW.

11. Adjust the volume using the rotary knob next to the PHONES connector.
During the next or currently running measurement, when the sweep reaches the
marker position, the demodulated signal is output as an audio signal via the head-
phones for the given duration. Or, depending on the configuration, the demodula-
ted signal is continuously output via the headphones, if the signal level exceeds the
squelch level.

8.3.5.4 How to export a peak list

You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file.

1. Press [MKR FUNCT].

2. Select "Marker Peak List".

3. Configure the peak search and list settings as described in Section 8.3.4.8,
"Marker peak list", on page 584.

4. Set the marker peak list "State" to "On".

5. Press [RUN SINGLE] to perform a single sweep measurement and create a marker
peak list.

6. Select "Marker Peak List" to display the "Marker Peak List" dialog box again.

7. If necessary, change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file.

8. Select "Export Peak List".

9. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 590

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Marker usage

10. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the peak list data to the file.

8.3.6 Measurement example: measuring harmonics using marker func-

tions

This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided
marker functions. Note that this task can be performed much simpler using the Har-
monic Distortion measurement (see Section 6.10, "Harmonic distortion measurement",
on page 315).

Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW):

Frequency: 128 MHz

Level: +15 dBm

Procedure:

1. Preset the FSW.

2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz.

3. Set the span to 100 kHz.

4. Select "Auto Level".

The FSW displays the reference signal with a span of 100 kHz and resolution
bandwidth of 1 kHz.

5. Switch on the marker by pressing [MKR].

The marker is positioned on the trace maximum.

6. Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values:
a) Press [MKR FUNC]
b) Press "Reference Fixed".
The position of the marker becomes the reference point. The reference point level
is indicated by a horizontal line, the reference point frequency with a vertical line.
At the same time, the delta marker 2 is switched on.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 591

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Figure 8-7: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point

7. Make the step size for the center frequency correspond to the signal frequency: in
the "Frequency" configuration dialog box, select "Center Frequency Stepsize" =
"Marker".
The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency.

8. Move the center frequency to the 2nd harmonic of the signal by pressing [UP] ( ).
The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic.

9. Select "Auto Level" to ensure the FSW measures the harmonics with a high sensi-
tivity.

10. Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic: in the "Marker To" menu, select
"Peak".
The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2nd harmonic. The displayed level
result is relative to the reference point level (= fundamental wave level).

The other harmonics are measured by repeating steps step 8 to step 10, with the cen-
ter frequency being incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the [UP] or
[DOWN] keys.

8.4 Display and limit lines

Display and limit lines help you analyze a measurement trace.

Display lines are only available in the Spectrum and (optional) Analog Demodulation
applications.
In the I/Q Analyzer application, lines are only available for measurements in the fre-
quency domain.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 592

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines"

For remote operation, see Section 13.8.4, "Configuring display lines", on page 1332.
● Display lines.......................................................................................................... 593
● Limit lines.............................................................................................................. 595

8.4.1 Display lines

8.4.1.1 Basics on display lines

Display lines help you analyze a trace – as do markers. The function of a display line is
comparable to that of a ruler that can be shifted on the trace in order to mark absolute
values. They are used exclusively to visually mark relevant frequencies or points in
time (zero span), as well as constant level values. It is not possible to check automati-
cally whether the points are below or above the marked level values - use limit lines for
that task (see Section 8.4.2.1, "Basics on limit lines", on page 595).
Two different types of display lines are provided:
● Two horizontal lines: "Horizontal Line 1" and "Horizontal Line 2".
These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagram
and can be shifted up and down.
● Four vertical lines: "Vertical Line 1" to "Vertical Line 4".
These lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram
and can be shifted left and right.

Lables
Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the diagrams:
● H1: "Horizontal Line 1"
● H2: "Horizontal Line 2"
● V1: "Vertical Line 1"
● V2: "Vertical Line 2"
● V3: "Vertical Line 3"
● V4: "Vertical Line 4"

8.4.1.2 Display line settings

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Display Lines"

Four vertical and two horizontal lines can be defined in the display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 593

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Vertical Line <x>..........................................................................................................594

Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2............................................................................ 594

Vertical Line <x>

Activates a vertical display line in the diagram at the specified point of the x-axis,
depending on the scale of the axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FLINe<dl> on page 1333
CALCulate<n>:TLINe<dl> on page 1333

Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2

Activates a horizontal display line (H1 or H2) in the diagram at the specified point of the
y-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 1332
CALCulate<n>:DLINe<dl> on page 1332

8.4.1.3 Defining display lines

1. Display lines are configured in the "Lines Config" dialog box. To display this dialog
box, press [Lines] and then "Lines Config".

2. Select the "Display Lines" tab.

3. To define a vertical line:

a) Select "Vertical Line 1", 2, 3, or 4.
b) Enter the x-value at which the line is to be displayed.

4. To define a horizontal line:

a) Select "Horizontal Line 1" or 2.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 594

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

b) Enter the y-value at which the line is to be displayed.

8.4.2 Limit lines

Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or
above specified values.
● Basics on limit lines...............................................................................................595
● Limit line settings and functions............................................................................ 599
● How to define limit lines........................................................................................ 606
● Reference: limit line file format..............................................................................610

8.4.2.1 Basics on limit lines

Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in
the result diagram which are not to be exceeded. They indicate, for example, the upper
limits for interference radiation or spurious waves which are allowed from a device
under test (DUT). When transmitting information in TDMA systems (e.g. GSM), the
amplitude of the bursts in a time slot must adhere to a curve that falls within a specified
tolerance band. The lower and upper limits may each be specified by a limit line. Then,
the amplitude curve can be controlled either visually or automatically for any violations
of the upper or lower limits (GO/NOGO test).
The FSW supports limit lines with a maximum of 200 data points. Eight of the limit lines
stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number of limit lines
stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used.
Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evalua-
tion in other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can
also be imported to the FSW for other measurements.

Compatibility
Limit lines are compatible with the current measurement settings, if the following
applies:
● The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting.
● The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep-
tion of dB based units; all dB based units are compatible with each other.

Validity
Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated:
● Each limit line must consist of a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points.
● The frequencies/times for each data point must be defined in ascending order;
however, for any single frequency or time, two data points may be entered (to
define a vertical segment of a limit line).
● Gaps in frequency or time are not allowed. If gaps are desired, two separate limit
lines must be defined and then both enabled.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 595

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

● The entered frequencies or times need not necessarily be selectable in FSW. A

limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The minimum fre-
quency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the
time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed range
is -1000 s to +1000 s.

Figure 8-8: Example for an upper limit line

Limits and Margins

Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal. A
margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It
can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated
by a separate line in the display, but if it is violated, a warning is displayed. Margins are
defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line.
To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit, whereas to
check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit.
Limits can be defined relative to the reference level, the beginning of the time scale, or
the center frequency, or as absolute values.
Relative scaling is suitable, for example, if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero
span, or if masks for modulated signals are required in the frequency domain.

Thresholds
If the y-axis for the limit line data points uses relative scaling, an additional absolute
threshold can be defined for the limit check. In this case, both the threshold value and
the relative limit line must be exceeded before a violation occurs.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 596

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Offsets and Shifting

A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Two different
methods to do so are available:
● An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values
or positions of the individual data points. This option is only available if relative
scaling is used.
Thus, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line
which has been shifted horizontally or vertically.
● Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points
changes the line configuration, thus changing the position of the line in the dia-
gram.

Limit Check Results

A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated
("Visibility" setting). Only the specified "Traces to be Checked" are compared with the
active limit lines. The status of the limit check for each limit line is indicated in the dia-
gram. If a violation occurs, the limit check status is set to "MARG" for a margin viola-
tion, or to"Fail" for a limit violation.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 597

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Figure 8-9: Margin violation for limit check

Figure 8-10: Limit violation for limit check

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 598

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Storing and Recalling Limit Lines

Limit lines can be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for
other measurements at a later time (seeSection 10.3, "Storing and recalling instrument
settings and measurement data", on page 679). Note, however, that any changes
made to the limit lines after storing the configuration file cannot be restored and will be
overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled. Always remem-
ber to store the settings again after changing the limit line values.
After recalling measurement settings, the limit line values applied to the measurement
may be different to those displayed in the "Limit Lines" dialog box; see "Saving and
recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.

8.4.2.2 Limit line settings and functions

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines"

or: [LINES] > "Line Config"
Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the FSW. Many more can be
stored on the instrument.

Stored limit line settings

When storing and recalling limit line settings, consider the information provided in "Sav-
ing and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.
When storing and recalling limit line settings, consider the information provided in the
Data Management section of the FSW User Manual.

● Limit line management.......................................................................................... 599

● Limit line details.....................................................................................................602

Limit line management

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines"
or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 599

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

For the limit line overview, the FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file exten-
sion .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows
you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current mea-
surement.
For details on settings for individual lines see "Limit line details" on page 602.
For more basic information on limit lines see Section 8.4.2.1, "Basics on limit lines",
on page 595.
Name...........................................................................................................................600
Unit..............................................................................................................................601
Compatibility................................................................................................................601
Visibility....................................................................................................................... 601
Traces to be Checked................................................................................................. 601
Comment.....................................................................................................................601
Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)..................................................................... 601
└ Show Lines for all Modes..............................................................................601
X-Offset....................................................................................................................... 601
Y-Offset....................................................................................................................... 602
Create New Line......................................................................................................... 602
Edit Line...................................................................................................................... 602
Copy Line.................................................................................................................... 602
Delete Line.................................................................................................................. 602
Disable All Lines..........................................................................................................602

Name
The name of the stored limit line.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 600

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Unit
The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the limit line are defined.

Compatibility
Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement
settings.
For more information on which conditions a limit line must fulfill to be compatible, see
"Compatibility" on page 595.

Visibility
Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram. Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the
same time. Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:STATe on page 1340
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:STATe on page 1344
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACTive? on page 1345

Traces to be Checked
Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines. As
soon as a trace to be checked is defined, the assigned limit line is active. One limit line
can be activated for several traces simultaneously. If any of the "Traces to be
Checked" violate any of the active limit lines, a message is indicated in the diagram.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:TRACe<t>:CHECk on page 1346

Comment
An optional description of the limit line.

Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)

Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview.
"Show Com- Only compatible lines
patible" Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility
setting.
"Show All" All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits sub-
folder of the main installation folder.
(if not restricted by "Show Lines for all Modes" setting).

Show Lines for all Modes ← Included Lines in Overview (View Filter)
If activated (default), limit lines from all applications are displayed. Otherwise, only
lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed.
Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are
lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application. In this case a warning
is displayed when you try to store the limit line.

X-Offset
Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times (x-axis) hori-
zontally.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 601

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values
for the x-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet on page 1337

Y-Offset
Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as
volt) vertically.
This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values
for the y-axis.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:OFFSet on page 1339
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:OFFSet on page 1343

Create New Line

Creates a new limit line.

Edit Line
Edit an existing limit line configuration.

Copy Line
Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COPY on page 1345

Delete Line
Delete the selected limit line configuration.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:DELete on page 1345

Disable All Lines

Disable all limit lines in one step.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:STATe on page 1346

Limit line details

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines" > "New" / "Edit" / "Copy To"
or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines" > "New" / "Edit" / "Copy To"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 602

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Name...........................................................................................................................603
Comment.....................................................................................................................603
Threshold.................................................................................................................... 603
Margin......................................................................................................................... 604
X-Axis..........................................................................................................................604
Y-Axis.......................................................................................................................... 604
Data Points..................................................................................................................604
Insert Value................................................................................................................. 605
Delete Value................................................................................................................605
Shift x.......................................................................................................................... 605
Shift y.......................................................................................................................... 605
Save............................................................................................................................ 605
Import.......................................................................................................................... 605
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................605
Export..........................................................................................................................605
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................606

Name
Defines the limit line name. All names must be compatible with Windows conventions
for file names. The limit line data is stored under this name (with a .LIN extension).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:NAME on page 1341

Comment
Defines an optional comment for the limit line.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:COMMent on page 1335

Threshold
Defines an absolute threshold value (only for relative scaling of the y-axis).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 603

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

For details on thresholds see "Thresholds" on page 596.

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold on page 1340
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold on page 1344

Margin
Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin).
For details on margins see "Limits and Margins" on page 596.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MARGin on page 1338
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MARGin on page 1342

X-Axis
Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined.
Includes the following settings:
● Unit:
– "Hz": for frequency domain
– "s": for time domain
● Scaling mode: absolute or relative values
For relative values, the frequencies are referred to the currently set center fre-
quency. In the time domain, the left boundary of the diagram is used as the refer-
ence.
● Scaling: linear or logarithmic
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:MODE on page 1336
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:DOMain on page 1336
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SPACing on page 1337

Y-Axis
Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined.
Includes the following settings:
● Level unit
● Scaling mode: absolute or relative (dB/%) values
Relative limit values refer to the reference level.
● Limit type: upper or lower limit; values must stay above the lower limit and below
the upper limit to pass the limit check
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UNIT on page 1341
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:MODE on page 1338
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:MODE on page 1342
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SPACing on page 1340
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SPACing on page 1343

Data Points
Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points. Each
data point is defined by its position (x-axis) and value (y-value). Data points must be
defined in ascending order. The same position can have two different values.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 604

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 1335
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 1338
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] on page 1341

Insert Value
Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dia-
log box.

Delete Value
Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box.

Shift x
Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width (as opposed
to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see "X-Offset" on page 601).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:SHIFt on page 1337

Shift y
Shifts the y-value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width (as opposed to
an additive offset defined for the entire limit line, see "Y-Offset" on page 602).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:SHIFt on page 1339
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:SHIFt on page 1343

Save
Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the "Name" field.

Import
Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the selected file in .CSV
format.
Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the
FSW.
For details on the file format see Section 8.4.2.4, "Reference: limit line file format",
on page 610.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:LIMit on page 1347

File Explorer ← Import

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

Export
Opens a file selection dialog box and stores the currently displayed limit line to the
defined file in .CSV format.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 605

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

For details on the file format see Section 8.4.2.4, "Reference: limit line file format",
on page 610.
The limit line can be imported again later by the FSW for use in other measurements.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIMit on page 1347

File Explorer ← Export

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

8.4.2.3 How to define limit lines

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Lines" > "Limit Lines"

or: [LINES] > "Line Config" > "Limit Lines"

Limit lines for spurious and SEM measurements

Note that for spurious and SEM measurements, special limit lines can be defined for
each frequency range, see Section 6.6.4.2, "Limit lines in SEM measurements",
on page 242 and Section 6.7.3.2, "Limit lines in spurious measurements",
on page 284. It is strongly recommended that you define limits only via the "Sweep
List" dialog for these measurements, not using [Lines].
Any changes to the special limit lines are automatically overwritten when the sweep list
settings are changed.

The following tasks are described here:

● "How to find compatible limit lines" on page 606
● "How to activate and deactivate a limit check" on page 607
● "How to edit existing limit lines" on page 607
● "How to copy an existing limit line" on page 607
● "How to delete an existing limit line" on page 607
● "How to configure a new limit line" on page 608
● "How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally" on page 609

How to find compatible limit lines

► In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible".
All stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the
main installation folder of the instrument that are compatible to the current mea-
surement settings are displayed in the overview.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 606

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

How to activate and deactivate a limit check

A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated.
1. To activate a limit check:
Select the "Check Traces" setting for a limit line in the overview and select the
trace numbers to be included in the limit check. One limit line can be assigned to
several traces.
The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines. The
status of the limit check is indicated in the diagram.

2. To deactivate a limit line, deactivate all "Traces to be Checked" for it.

To deactivate all limit lines at once, select "Disable All Lines".
The limit checks for the deactivated limit lines are stopped and the results are
removed form the display.

How to edit existing limit lines

Existing limit line configurations can be edited.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.

2. Select "Edit".

3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 608.

4. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

If the limit line is active, the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram.

How to copy an existing limit line

1. In the dialog box, select the limit line.

2. Select "Line Config" "Copy To".

3. Define a new name to create a new limit with the same configuration as the source
line.

4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 608.

5. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.

How to delete an existing limit line

1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.

2. Select "Delete".

3. Confirm the message.

The limit line and the results of the limit check are deleted.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 607

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

How to configure a new limit line

1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select "New".
The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis-
played in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each
change to the configuration.

2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new limit line.

3. Define the x-axis configuration:

● Time domain or frequency domain
● Absolute or relative limits
● Linear or logarithmic scaling

4. Define the y-axis configuration:

● Level unit
● Absolute or relative limits
● Upper or lower limit line

5. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 200:

a) Select "Insert Value".
b) Define the x-value ("Position") and y-value ("Value") of the first data point.
c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point.
d) Repeat this to insert all other data points.
To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then
"Insert Value".
To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after
the last entry and then select "Insert Value".
To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value".

6. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If neces-
sary, correct individual data points or add or delete some.
If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting "Shift x" or
"Shift y" and defining the shift width.

7. Optionally, define a "Margin" at a fixed distance to the limit line.

The margin must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the dia-
gram or preview area.

8. Optionally, if the y-axis uses relative scaling, define an absolute "Threshold" as an

additional criteria for a violation.

9. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 608

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally

A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new limit
line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted
horizontally.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.

2. To shift the complete limit line parallel in the horizontal direction, select "X-Offset"
and enter an offset value.
To shift the complete limit line parallel in the vertical direction, select "Y-Offset" and
enter an offset value.

3. To shift the individual data points of a limit line by a fixed value (all at once):
a) Select "Edit".
b) In the "Edit Limit Line" dialog box, select "Shift x" or "Shift y" and define the
shift width.
c) Save the shifted data points by selecting "Save".
If activated, the limit line is shifted in the diagram.

How to export a limit line

Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs
or to be imported later for other measurements.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.

2. Select "New" or "Edit".

3. Define the limit line as described in "How to configure a new limit line"
on page 608.

4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file.

You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the
FSW first.

5. Select a file name and location for the limit line.

6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file.

7. Select "Save".
The limit line is stored to a file with the specified name and the extension .CSV.
For details on the file format see Section 8.4.2.4, "Reference: limit line file format",
on page 610.

How to import a limit line

Limit line configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum of
required data can be imported to the FSW.
For details on the required file format see Section 8.4.2.4, "Reference: limit line file for-
mat", on page 610.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the limit line.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 609

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Display and limit lines

2. Select "New" or "Edit".

3. Select "Import" to load a limit line from a file.

You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the
FSW first.

4. Select the file name of the limit line.

5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.

6. Select "Select".
The limit line is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit Limit Line"
dialog box.

7. Activate the limit line as described in "How to activate and deactivate a limit check"
on page 607.

8.4.2.4 Reference: limit line file format

Limit line data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evaluation in
other applications. Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) format can also be
imported to the FSW for other measurements (see "How to import a limit line"
on page 609). This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for
limit lines. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of
the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see "Deci-
mal Separator" on page 654).
Table 8-2: ASCII file format for limit line files

File contents Description

Header data

sep=; Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for

example)

Type;RS_LimitLineDefinition; Type of data

FileFormatVersion;1.00; File format version

Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage

OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer Application the limit line was created for

Name;RELFREQ1 Limit line name

Comment;Defines the upper limit line Description of limit line

Mode;UPPER Type of limit line (upper, lower)

ThresholdUnit;LEVEL_DBM Unit of threshold value

ThresholdValue;-200 Threshold value

MarginValue;0 Margin value

XAxisScaling;LINEAR Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 610

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

File contents Description

XAxisUnit;FREQ_HZ Unit of x values

XAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of x-axis (absolute or relative)

YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values

YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)

NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by

Data section for individual data points

-4500000000;-50 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line

-2000000000;-30

-1000000000;0

0;-30

2500000000;-50

8.5 Trace configuration

A trace is a collection of measured data points. The trace settings determine how the
measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen.
● Standard traces..................................................................................................... 611
● Spectrograms........................................................................................................631
● Trace math............................................................................................................ 648

8.5.1 Standard traces

8.5.1.1 Basics on setting up traces

Some background knowledge on traces is provided here for a better understanding of

the required configuration settings.
● Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector....................................611
● X-value of the sweep point....................................................................................619
● Analyzing several traces - trace mode.................................................................. 620
● How many traces are averaged - sweep count + Sweep mode............................621
● How trace data is averaged - the averaging mode............................................... 622
● Trace smoothing................................................................................................... 623

Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector

A trace displays the values measured at the measurement points (also known as
sweep points in some applications). However, the number of samples taken during a
measurement can be much larger than the number of measurement points that are dis-
played in the measurement trace.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 611

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Example:
Assume the following measurement parameters:
● Sample rate: 32 MSamples / s
● Measurement points: 1000
● Measurement time: 100 ms
● Span: 5 GHz
During a single measurement, 3.2 * 106 samples are collected and distributed to 1000
measurement points, i.e. 3200 samples are collected per measurement point. For each
measurement point, the measured data for a frequency span of 5 MHz (span/<mea-
surement points>) is analyzed.
Note that if you increase the number of measurement points, the frequency span ana-
lyzed for each point in the trace decreases, making the trace more reliable. The ana-
lyzed results become more accurate. On the other hand, for detectors that average the
samples within the span, the trace becomes less stable because fewer samples are
averaged.
See also Section 7.5.1.8, "How much data is measured: sweep points and sweep
count", on page 499.

Obviously, the data must be reduced to determine which of the samples are displayed
for each measurement point. This is the trace detector's task. The trace detector can
analyze the measured data using various methods.
The result obtained from the selected detector for a measurement point is displayed as
the value at this frequency point in the trace.
Measurement point n Meas. point n+1

Video video
Signal signal

SAMPLE
AVG s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1
RMS

MAX PEAK
AUTO PEAK
MIN PEAK

You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual traces manually, or the
FSW can select the appropriate detector automatically.
The detectors of the FSW are implemented as pure digital devices. All detectors work
in parallel in the background, which means that the measurement speed is independ-
ent of the detector combination used for different traces.
However, you should select a measurement time that is sufficient for the detector that
requires the longest measurement time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 612

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Auto detector
If the FSW is set to define the appropriate detector automatically, the detector is set
depending on the selected trace mode and average mode:

Trace mode Detector

"Clear Write" Auto peak

"Max Hold" Positive peak

"Min Hold" Negative peak

"Average" Sample peak

(for average mode "Power": RMS)

"View" –

"Blank" –

The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace
information by an abbreviation. Not all detector types are supported by all applications
available for the FSW.

Table 8-3: Detector types

Detector Abbrev.

Positive peak "Pk"

Negative peak "Mi"

Auto peak "Ap"

RMS "Rm"

Average "Av"

EMI measurement detectors

Some additional detectors are available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement
option is installed. However, the EMI measurement need not be active. The additional
detectors are especially designed for and required by EMI applications.
Table 8-4: Detector types

Detector Abbrev.

Quasi Peak "QP"

CISPR Average detector "CISPR AV"

RMS Average detector "RMS AV"

Measurement time
The measurement time defines how long the FSW measures the signal at the individ-
ual frequencies. Each detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and dis-

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 613

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

charge; the individual requirements on the measurement time are described for each
detector.
● Positive peak (max peak) and negative peak (min peak) detector....................... 614
● Auto peak detector................................................................................................ 614
● RMS detector........................................................................................................ 614
● Average detector...................................................................................................615
● Sample detector.................................................................................................... 616
● Quasipeak detector............................................................................................... 616
● CISPR average detector....................................................................................... 617
● RMS average detector.......................................................................................... 618

Positive peak (max peak) and negative peak (min peak) detector
The positive (maximum) detector determines the largest of all positive peak values
measured at the individual measurement points which are combined in one sample
point.
The negative (minimum) peak detector determines the smallest of all negative peak
values measured at the individual measurement points which are combined in one
sample point.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● For unmodulated signals, you can use the shortest possible measurement time.
● For pulsed signals, measurement time must be longer than the expected pulse
length, that is: it must cover at least one pulse.

Auto peak detector

The auto peak detector combines the "Positive peak (max peak) and negative peak
(min peak) detector" on page 614. The maximum and the minimum values determined
for each sample point are displayed.
Available in the spectrum application, but not for the Spectrum Emission Mask mea-
surement.

RMS detector
The RMS detector calculates the root mean square of all samples combined in a
sweep point. The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measure-
ment point. The IF envelope is digitized using a sample rate which is at least five times
the selected resolution bandwidth. Based on the sample values, the power is calcula-
ted for each measurement point using the following formula:

Where:
● PRMS = power represented by a measurement point
● N = number of A/D converter values (samples) per measurement point

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 614

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

● R = electrical impedance
● si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter

For logarithmic scaling, after the power has been calculated, the power units are con-
verted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point.

Where:
● P (dB) = logarithmic power represented by a measurement point
Each sweep point thus corresponds to the root mean square of the measured values
combined in the sweep point.
The RMS detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the waveform (CW
carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or impulsive signal). Correction factors as nee-
ded for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not
required.
Tips regarding measurement time:
● For unmodulated signals, you can use the shortest possible measurement time.
● For modulated signals, the measurement time must be long enough to make sure
the averaging considers all variations due to the modulation characteristics of the
signal.
● For pulsed signals, the measurement time must be long enough to capture a suffi-
cient number of pulses. For averaging, a sufficient number of pulses is greater than
10.

The RMS detector and the video bandwidth

When using the RMS detector in the Spectrum application, the video bandwidth (VBW)
in the hardware is bypassed. However, if the measurement time is determined auto-
matically, the VBW is still considered. The measurement time is then set to the mini-
mum time required by the current VBW setting. Thus, a similar averaging effect is ach-
ieved, while providing a correct RMS power result.
Video filtering together with the RMS detector would result in logarithmic averaging.

Average detector
The average detector calculates the linear average of all samples combined in a
sweep point.
For average detection, the video voltage (envelope of IF signal) is averaged over the
measurement time. Averaging is digital, i.e. the digitized values of the video voltage
are summed up and divided by the number of samples at the end of the measurement
time. This corresponds to a filtering with a rectangular window in the time domain and
a filtering with sin x/x characteristic in the frequency domain.
To this effect, FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection. The sampled lin-
ear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples (= linear
average value). For linear display, the average value is displayed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 615

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Where:
● PAVG = power represented by a measurement point
● N = number of A/D converter values per measurement point
● R = electrical impedance
● si = linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A/D converter

For logarithmic scaling, after the power has been calculated, the power units are con-
verted into decibels, and the value is displayed as a measurement point.

Where:
● P (dBm) = logarithmic power represented by a measurement point
Each measurement point thus corresponds to the average of the measured values
combined in the measurement point.
The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the wave-
form (CW carrier, modulated carrier, white noise or impulsive signal).
Tips regarding measurement time:
● For unmodulated signals, you can use the shortest possible measurement time.
● For modulated signals, the measurement time must be long enough to make sure
the averaging considers all variations due to the modulation characteristics of the
signal.
● For pulsed signals, the measurement time must be long enough to capture a suffi-
cient number of pulses. For averaging, a sufficient number of pulses is greater than
10.

Sample detector
The sample detector selects and displays a single sample (always the first or always
the last) from all samples that are combined in the sweep point. All other measured
values for the sample point are ignored.

Quasipeak detector
The quasipeak detector resembles the behavior of an analog voltmeter by analyzing
the measured values for a sample point. The quasipeak detector is especially designed
for the requirements of EMI measurements and is used to analyze pulse-shaped spurs.
This detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
It requires the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) to be installed.
The quasipeak detector is not available for an RBW of 1 MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 616

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

The quasipeak detector displays the weighted maximum signal level according to
CISPR 16-1-1 that was detected during the specified measurement time.
The filter bandwidth and time parameters of the detector depend on the measured fre-
quency. The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of
the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc.
Table 8-5: Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR quasi-peak detector

Band A Band B Band C/D

Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz > 30 MHz

Resolution bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz

Tips regarding measurement time:

● The relatively long time constants of the quasipeak detector result in long measure-
ment times to yield valid results.
● For unknown signals, use a measurement time of at least 1 s. This ensures correct
weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● For known signals, you can use a much shorter measurement time.
When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the FSW waits until the lowpass
filter has settled before starting the measurement. Since the level does not change dur-
ing a frequency scan, known signals (e.g. broadband RFI) can be measured correctly
with a much shorter measurement time.

CISPR average detector

The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to
CISPR 16-1-1.
The average value according to CISPR 16-1-1 is the maximum value detected while
calculating the linear average value during the specified measurement time.
This detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
It requires the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) to be installed.
The CISPR Average detector is applied to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a
low pulse frequency, for example. It is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodula-
ted sinusoidal signal. The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd
order (simulating a mechanical pointer instrument).
The lowpass time constants and the IF bandwidths depend on the measured fre-
quency. The main parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 8-6: Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR Average detector

Band A Band B Band C/D Band E

Frequency range <150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz >1 GHz

IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 617

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Tips regarding measurement time:

● The relatively long time constants of the CISPR average detector result in long
measurement times to yield valid results.
● For unknown signals, use a measurement time of at least 1 s. This ensures correct
weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● For unmodulated sinusoidal signals and signals with a high modulation frequency,
you can use a much shorter measurement time.
● For slowly fluctuating signals or pulsed signals, use longer measurement times.
When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the FSW waits until the lowpass
filter has settled before starting the measurement. In this case, the measurement time
depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal.

RMS average detector

The RMS Average detector is a combination of the RMS detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies above a corner frequency) and the Average detector (for pulse repetition
frequencies below the corner frequency). It thus achieves a pulse response curve with
the following characteristics:
● 10 dB/decade above the corner frequency
● 20 dB/decade below the corner frequency
The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order (simulation of a
mechanical pointer instrument).
The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter.
It requires the R&S FSW EMI measurement option (K54) to be installed.
The detector is used to measure broadband emissions, for example, and can possibly
replace the quasipeak detector in the future.
The detector parameters depend on the measured frequency.
Table 8-7: Required parameters depending on frequency for RMS Average detector

Band A Band B Band C/D Band E

Frequency range <150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz >1 GHz

IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz

Corner frequency 10 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz

Tips regarding measurement time:

● The relatively long time constants of the CISPR average detector result in long
measurement times to yield valid results.
● For unknown signals, use a measurement time of at least 1 s. This ensures correct
weighting of pulses down to a pulse frequency of 5 Hz.
● For unmodulated sinusoidal signals and signals with a high modulation frequency,
you can use a much shorter measurement time.
● For slowly fluctuating signals or pulsed signals, use longer measurement times.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 618

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

When you change the frequency or the attenuation, the FSW waits until the lowpass
filter has settled before starting the measurement. In this case, the measurement time
depends on the resolution bandwidth and the characteristics of the signal.

Measurement times shorter than 20 ms

With measurement times shorter than 20 ms, the detector weighting changes to plain
RMS weighting.

X-value of the sweep point

As described in "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector"
on page 611, the number of samples taken during a sweep can be much larger than
the number of sweep points that are displayed in the measurement trace.
To determine the x-value of the sweep point, two different methods are available:
● Start/stop
● Bin-centered

Start/stop
This is the default (legacy) method for trace values in the frequency domain. The x-
value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement
span. The x-value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full mea-
surement span. All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last
points. The distance between two sweep points is span/(<no_sweep_points> -1).

Bin-centered
This is the default method for all marker values. The full measurement span is divided
by the number of sweep points. The result is the span that is evaluated for an individ-
ual sweep point, also referred to as a bin. The x-value of the sweep point is then
defined as the x-value at the center of the bin (bin/2).
Measurement point n Meas. point n+1

Video video
Signal signal

s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1

x
xn xn+1

Span/<no. of meas points> Span/<no. of meas points>

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 619

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Using the bin-centered method, the first and last x-values of the trace are not identical
to the exact starting and end point of the measurement span. The distance between
two sweep points corresponds to the width of the bin, or span/(<no_sweep_points>).
Marker values are always determined using the bin-centered method. Markers placed
on the first and last x-values of the measured span indicate the same results as the
first and last trace point.

Example:
Assume the following measurement parameters:
● Start frequency: 1.000 GHz
● Stop frequency: 6.000 GHz
● => Span: 5 GHz
● sweep points: 1000
● =>bin: 5 MHz (span/<sweep points>)
The first trace point is displayed at (<fstart> + bin/2) = 1.0025 GHz.
The last trace point is displayed at (<fstop> - bin/2) = 5.9975 GHz.
A marker placed at 1.000 GHz indicates the same result as a marker placed at 1.0025
GHz, since no other value is available.

For trace values in the frequency domain, you can select which method is used to
determine the x-values in the frequency domain, that is:
● In the result displays
● When exporting traces
● For the TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? command
See "X-Value Distribution" on page 654.
Note the possible minor discrepancy between marker values and trace values using
the start/stop method.

Analyzing several traces - trace mode

If several sweeps are performed one after the other, or continuous sweeps are per-
formed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed.
After each sweep, the trace mode determines whether:
● The data is frozen ("View")
● The data is hidden ("Blank")
● The data is replaced by new values ("Clear Write")
● The data is replaced selectively ("Max Hold", "Min Hold", "Average")

Each time you change the trace mode, the selected trace memory is cleared.
The trace mode also determines the detector type if the detector is set automatically,
see "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector" on page 611.

The FSW supports the following trace modes:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 620

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Table 8-8: Overview of available trace modes

Trace Mode Description

Blank Hides the selected trace.

Clear Write Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
All available detectors can be selected.

Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed. The
FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than
the previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum
is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of
envelope.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.

Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than
the previous one.
This mode is useful for example for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite
signal visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed,
whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.

Average The average is formed over several measurements and displayed.

The Sweep/Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.

View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.

If a trace is frozen ("View" mode), you can change the measurement settings, apart
from scaling settings, without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that the displayed
trace no longer matches the current measurement settings is indicated by a yellow
asterisk on the tab label.

If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes, the FSW
automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. Thus, you can zoom
into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace.

How many traces are averaged - sweep count + Sweep mode

In "Average" trace mode, the sweep count and sweep mode determine how many
traces are averaged. The more traces are averaged, the smoother the trace is likely to
become.
The algorithm for averaging traces depends on the sweep mode and sweep count.
● sweep count = 0 (default)
– In "Continuous" sweep mode, a continuous average is calculated for 10
sweeps, according to the following formula:
9 * Traceold  MeasValue
Trace 
10
Figure 8-11: Equation 1

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 621

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace, past val-
ues have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten
sweeps. With this setting, signal noise is effectively reduced without need for
restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal.
– In "Single" sweep mode, the current trace is averaged with the previously
stored averaged trace. No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the
measured value is stored in the trace memory. The next time a sweep is per-
formed, the trace average is calculated according to the following formula:
Traceold  MeasValue
Trace 
2

The averaged trace is then stored in the trace memory.

● sweep count = 1
The currently measured trace is displayed and stored in the trace memory. No
averaging is performed.
● sweep count > 1
For both "Single" sweep mode and "Continuous" sweep mode, averaging takes
place over the selected number of sweeps. In this case the displayed trace is
determined during averaging according to the following formula:
1  n 1 
Tracen    (Ti )  MeasValuen 
n  i 1 
Figure 8-12: Equation 2

Where n is the number of the current sweep (n = 2 ... sweep count).

No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in
the trace memory. With increasing n, the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed
since there are more individual sweeps for averaging.
After the selected number of sweeps, the average trace is saved in the trace mem-
ory. Until this number of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed.
When the averaging length defined by the "Sweep Count" is attained, averaging is
continued in continuous sweep mode or for "Continue Single Sweep" according to
the following formula:
( N  1) * Traceold  MeasValue
Trace 
N
Where N is the sweep count

How trace data is averaged - the averaging mode

When the trace is averaged over several sweeps (Trace mode: "Average"), different
methods are available to determine the trace average.
With logarithmic averaging, the dB values of the display voltage are averaged or sub-
tracted from each other with trace mathematical functions.
With linear averaging, the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or pow-
ers before averaging. Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against each
other and reconverted into level values.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 622

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

For stationary signals, the two methods yield the same result.
Logarithmic averaging is recommended if sinewave signals are to be clearly visible
against noise since with this type of averaging noise suppression is improved while the
sinewave signals remain unchanged.
For noise or pseudo-noise signals, the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in loga-
rithmic averaging due to the characteristic involved. The negative peak values are
increased relative to the average value. If the distorted amplitude distribution is aver-
aged, a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value. The difference
is -2.5 dB.
This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2.5 dB
factor. Therefore the FSW offers the selection of linear averaging. The trace data is lin-
earized before averaging, then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the
screen. The average value is always displayed correctly irrespective of the signal char-
acteristic.

Trace smoothing
A video bandwidth filter (VBW) is a hardware-based method of smoothing the trace
(see also Section 7.5.1.2, "Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth",
on page 495). However, other sweep and bandwidth settings can be coupled to the
VBW. For some signals, a VBW may not be freely selectable to obtain the required
smoothing effect. Therefore, a software-based trace smoothing function is also availa-
ble.
(Software-based) smoothing is a way to remove anomalies visually in the trace that
can distort the results. The smoothing process is based on a moving average over the
complete measurement range. The number of samples included in the averaging proc-
ess (the aperture size) is variable and is a percentage of all samples that the trace con-
sists of.

Figure 8-13: Sample size included in trace smoothing

Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions

Note that in Spectrum mode, all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit
checks, markers, or channel power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace
data. Thus, the results differ from results based on the original trace.

You can turn trace smoothing on and off for all traces individually and compare, for
example, the raw and the smooth trace.
Linear smoothing is based on the following algorithm:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 623

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

 x s  n1 
1 2 
y ' s    y x 
n
 x s  n1 
 2 
Equation 8-1: Linear trace smoothing

With:
s = sample number
x = sample offset from s
n = aperture size

8.5.1.2 Trace settings

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces"

Or: [TRACE] > "Trace Config"
You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces in the same result display.
Each trace is displayed in a different color, indicated in the window title bar and the
trace settings.
For settings on spectrograms, see Section 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram settings",
on page 639.

Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis. For details see
Section 8.6.2, "Trace/data ex/import", on page 652.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 624

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6.......................................................625

Trace Mode................................................................................................................. 625
Detector.......................................................................................................................626
Hold.............................................................................................................................626
Smoothing................................................................................................................... 627
Average Mode.............................................................................................................627
Average Count............................................................................................................ 627
Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config................................................................... 628
Trace 1/ Trace 2/ Trace 3/ Trace 4 (Softkeys).............................................................628
Copy Trace..................................................................................................................629
Trace Labels................................................................................................................629

Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6

Selects the corresponding trace for configuration. The currently selected trace is high-
lighted.
For details see Section 8.5.1.3, "How to configure a standard trace", on page 630.
Remote command:
Selected via numeric suffix of:TRACe<1...6> commands
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 1247

Trace Mode
Defines the update mode for subsequent traces.
For details, see "Analyzing several traces - trace mode" on page 620.
"Clear/ Write" Overwrite mode (default): the trace is overwritten by each sweep.
All available detectors can be selected.
In Spectrum mode, the "Detector" is automatically set to "Auto Peak".
"Max Hold" The maximum value is determined over several measurements and
displayed. The FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only
if the new value is greater than the previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The
signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal compo-
nents are detected in a kind of envelope.
The "Detector" is automatically set to "PositivePeak".
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
"Min Hold" The minimum value is determined from several measurements and
displayed. The FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only
if the new value is lower than the previous one.
This mode is useful for example for making an unmodulated carrier in
a composite signal visible. Noise, interference signals or modulated
signals are suppressed, whereas a CW signal is recognized by its
constant level.
The "Detector" is automatically set to "Negative Peak".
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
"Average" The average is formed over several sweeps.
The Sweep/Average Count determines the number of averaging pro-
cedures.
The "Detector" is automatically set to "Sample".
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 625

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

"View" The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, you can change the measurement settings,
apart from scaling settings, without impact on the displayed trace.
The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current mea-
surement settings is indicated by a yellow asterisk on the tab label.
If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram
axes, the FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed
display range. Thus, you can zoom into the diagram after the mea-
surement to show details of the trace.
"Blank" Removes the selected trace from the display.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 1245

Detector
Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis.
For details see "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector"
on page 611.
Note: For EMI measurements, the trace detector is used for the initial peak search
only, not for the final test. The detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker
settings, see Section 6.13.4.1, "EMI marker configuration", on page 343.
"Auto" (default:) Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and fil-
ter mode
"Type" Defines the selected detector type.
Note: If the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is installed,
additional detectors are available, even if EMI measurement is not
active. If you select a CISPR trace detector, the RBW filter type is
automatically also set to CISPR.
CISPR detectors are only available under the following conditions:
● Time domain measurements and frequency measurements in
sweep mode (not FFT mode, not power measurements, emission
measurements, or statistics measurements)
For details and further restrictions, see Section 6.13.3.2, "Detectors
and dwell time", on page 338.
Remote command:
[SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion] on page 1250
[SENSe:][WINDow<n>:]DETector<t>[:FUNCtion]:AUTO on page 1251

Hold
If activated, traces in "Min Hold", "Max Hold" and "Average" mode are not reset after
specific parameter changes have been made.
Normally, the measurement is started again after parameter changes, before the mea-
surement results are analyzed (e.g. using a marker). In all cases that require a new
measurement after parameter changes, the trace is reset automatically to avoid false
results (e.g. with span changes). For applications that require no reset after parameter
changes, the automatic reset can be switched off.
The default setting is off.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 626

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous
on page 1246

Smoothing
If enabled, the trace is smoothed by the specified value (between 1 % and 50 %). The
smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width. The larger the
smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect.
Note: Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions. Note that in Spectrum mode,
all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit checks, markers, or channel
power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace data. Thus, the results differ
from results based on the original trace.
For more information, see "Trace smoothing" on page 623.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing[:STATe]
on page 1248
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:SMOothing:APERture
on page 1248

Average Mode
Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps.
This setting is generally applicable if trace mode "Average" is selected.
For FFT sweeps, the setting also affects the VBW (regardless of whether the trace is
averaged).
(See also "Video bandwidth (VBW)" on page 160).
How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the "Sweep/Average Count"
on page 506.
For details see "How trace data is averaged - the averaging mode" on page 622.
"Linear" The power level values are converted into linear units before averag-
ing. After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original
unit.
"Logarithmic" For logarithmic scaling, the values are averaged in dBm. For linear
scaling, the behavior is the same as with linear averaging.
"Power" Activates linear power averaging.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt before averaging.
After the averaging, the data is converted back into its original unit.
Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes correctly.
In particular, for small VBW values (smaller than the RBW), use
power averaging mode for correct power measurements in FFT
sweep mode.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:TYPE on page 1249

Average Count
Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace
modes "Average", "Max Hold" or "Min Hold" are set.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 627

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

In continuous sweep mode, if sweep count = 0 (default), averaging is performed over

10 sweeps. For sweep count =1, no averaging, Max Hold or Min Hold operations are
performed.
This value is identical to the Sweep/Average Count setting in the "Sweep" settings.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt on page 1249

Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config

Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very
quickly by selecting the appropriate button.

Function Trace Settings

Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write

Auto Detector (Auto Peak)

Traces 2-6: Blank

Auto Detector

Set Trace Mode Trace 1: Max Hold

Max | Avg | Min Auto Detector (Positive Peak)

Trace 2: Average
Auto Detector (Sample)

Trace 3: Min Hold

Auto Detector (Negative Peak)

Traces 4-6: Blank

Auto Detector

Set Trace Mode Trace 1: Max Hold

Max | ClrWrite | Min Auto Detector (Positive Peak)

Trace 2: Clear Write

Auto Detector (Auto Peak)

Trace 3: Min Hold

Auto Detector (Negative Peak)

Traces 4-6: Blank

Auto Detector

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:PRESet on page 1247

Trace 1/ Trace 2/ Trace 3/ Trace 4 (Softkeys)

Displays the "Traces" settings and focuses the "Mode" list for the selected trace.
For details see Section 8.5.1.3, "How to configure a standard trace", on page 630.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] on page 1247

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 628

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Copy Trace
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Copy Trace"
Or: [TRACE] > "Copy Trace"
Copies trace data to another trace.
The first group of buttons (labeled "Trace 1" to "Trace 6") selects the source trace. The
second group of buttons (labeled "Copy to Trace 1" to "Copy to Tace 6") selects the
destination.
Remote command:
TRACe<n>:COPY on page 1251

Trace Labels
Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Trace Label" tab
You can define a descriptive label to active traces instead of the default "Trace <x>"
label.
Note: This function is not available in all applications.
The labels are displayed in the diagram area. The font color corresponds to the color of
the particular trace (for example, yellow trace: yellow font).

Figure 8-14: Example: the yellow and blue traces have a label

You can move the trace label to any position on the display by dragging it to the new
position.
You can only configure labels for active traces and for traces whose "State" is enabled.

Enable the state and enter a trace label.

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:LABel[:STATe] on page 1244
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:LABel:TEXT on page 1245

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 629

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

8.5.1.3 How to configure a standard trace

Step-by-step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here.

For details on individual functions and settings see Section 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings",
on page 624.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.2, "Configuring the trace display and retrieving trace data", on page 1243.
Trace settings are configured in the "Traces" dialog box.
To display the "Traces" dialog box, do one of the following:
● Press [TRACE] and then select "Trace Config".
● Select "Analysis" from the "Overview", then select the "Traces" tab.

1. For each trace, select the "Trace Mode" and "Trace Detector". Traces with the
trace mode "Blank" are not displayed.

2. To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step, press the but-
ton for the required function:
● "Preset All Traces"
● "Set Trace Mode Max | Avg | Min"
● "Set Trace Mode Max | ClrWrite | Min"
For details see Section 8.5.1.2, "Trace settings", on page 624.

3. For "Average" trace mode, define the number of sweeps to be averaged in the
"Count:" field.

4. If linear scaling is used, select the "Average Mode": "Linear".

5. To improve the trace stability, increase the number of "Sweep Points" or the
"Sweep Time" (in the "Sweep" settings).
All configured traces (not set to "Blank") are displayed after the next sweep.

How to Copy Traces

1. A trace copy function is provided in a separate tab of the "Traces" dialog box. To
display this tab do one of the following:
● Select [TRACE] and then "Trace Copy".
● Select "Analysis" from the "Overview", then select the "Trace Copy" tab.

2. Select the "Source" trace to be copied.

3. Select "Copy to Trace" for the trace to which the settings are to be applied.
The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace. The newly
configured trace (if not set to "Blank") is displayed after the next sweep.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 630

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

8.5.2 Spectrograms

8.5.2.1 Working with spectrograms

In addition to the standard "level versus frequency" or "level versus time" traces, the
FSW also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data.
A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time. The x-axis
shows the frequency, the y-axis shows the time. A third dimension, the power level, is
indicated by different colors. Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies
over time for different frequencies.

Three-dimensional spectrograms are also available and are described in "Three-

dimensional spectrograms" on page 635. Most basic information described in the fol-
lowing sections applies similarly to both two- and three-dimensional spectrograms.

Example:

In this example, you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the FSW, com-
pared to the standard spectrum display. Since the signal does not change over time,
the color of the frequency levels does not change over time, i.e. vertically. The legend
above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent.

Result display
The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 631

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

2
4
8 5 8
7
3

Figure 8-15: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display

1 = Spectrum result display

2 = Spectrogram result display
3 = Marker list
4 = Marker
5 = Delta marker
6 = Color map
7 = Timestamp / frame number
8 = Current frame indicator

For more information about spectrogram configuration, see Section 8.5.2.2, "Spectro-
gram settings", on page 639.

Remote commands:
Activating and configuring spectrograms:
Section 13.8.2.2, "Configuring spectrograms", on page 1252
Storing results:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1379
● Time frames.......................................................................................................... 632
● Markers in the spectrogram.................................................................................. 634
● Three-dimensional spectrograms..........................................................................635
● Color maps............................................................................................................636

Time frames
The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically, along the y-axis. Each
line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one or more captured sweep and is called a
time frame or simply "frame". As with standard spectrum traces, several measured
values are combined in one sweep point using the selected detector.
(See "Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector" on page 611).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 632

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Frames are sorted in chronological order, beginning with the most recently recorded
frame at the top of the diagram (frame number 0). With the next sweep, the previous
frame is moved further down in the diagram, until the maximum number of captured
frames is reached. The display is updated continuously during the measurement, and
the measured trace data is stored. Spectrogram displays are continued even after sin-
gle measurements unless they are cleared manually.

In three-dimensional spectrograms, frames are displayed vertically. The most recently

recorded frame (frame 0) is added at the front of the display (in the default position).
For more information, see "Three-dimensional spectrograms" on page 635.

The maximum number of frames that you can capture is summarized in Table 8-9.
Table 8-9: Correlation between number of sweep points and number of frames stored in the history
buffer

Sweep Points Max. History Depth

≤1250 20000

2001 12488

4001 6247

8.001 3124

16.001 1562

32.001 781

The scaling of the time axis (y-axis) is not configurable. However, you can enlarge the
spectrogram display by maximizing the window using "Split/Maximize".

Frame analysis - Frame count vs. sweep count

As described for standard spectrum sweeps, the sweep count defines how many
sweeps are analyzed to create a single trace. Thus, for a trace in "Average" mode, for
example, a sweep count of 10 means that 10 sweeps are averaged to create a single
trace, or frame.
The frame count, on the other hand, determines how many frames are plotted during a
single sweep measurement (as opposed to a continuous sweep). For a frame count of
2, for example, 2 frames will be plotted during each single sweep. For continuous
sweep mode, the frame count is irrelevant; one frame is plotted per sweep until the
measurement is stopped.
If you combine the two settings, 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep
measurement. The first 10 will be averaged to create the first frame, the next 10 will be
averaged to create the second frame.
As you can see, increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual
traces, while increasing the frame count increases the number of traces in the diagram.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 633

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Especially for "Average" or "Min Hold" and "Max Hold" trace modes, the number of
sweeps that are analyzed to create a single trace has an effect on the accuracy of the
results. Thus, you can also define whether the results from frames in previous traces
are considered in the analysis for each new trace ("Continue Frame").

Tracking absolute time - timestamps

Alternatively to the frame count, the absolute time (that is: a timestamp) at which a
frame was captured can be displayed. While the measurement is running, the time-
stamp shows the system time. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, the
timestamp shows the time and date at the end of the sweep.Thus, the individual
frames can be identified by their timestamp or their frame count.
When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number in the diagram
footer (see Figure 8-15).

Displaying individual frames

The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared. Arrows
on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame.
The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame.
The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer, or alternatively a time-
stamp, if activated. The current frame, displayed at the top of the diagram, is frame
number 0. Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index,
e.g."-10". You can display the spectrum diagram of a previous frame by changing the
current frame number.

Markers in the spectrogram

Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram. They are
only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the
spectrogram. If more than two markers are active, the marker values are displayed in a
separate marker table.

Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms are slightly different and are described in

"Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms" on page 636.

In the spectrum result display, the markers and their frequency and level values (1) are
displayed as usual. Additionally, the frame number is displayed to indicate the position
of the marker in time (2).

In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers
at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in
addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new
marker. If no frame number is specified, the marker is positioned on the currently
selected frame. All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame. Special
search functions are provided for spectrogram markers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 634

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

In the spectrum result display, only the markers positioned on the currently selected
frame are visible. In "Continuous Sweep" mode, this means that only markers posi-
tioned on frame 0 are visible. To view markers that are positioned on a frame other
than frame 0 in the spectrum result display, you must stop the measurement and select
the corresponding frame.

Three-dimensional spectrograms
A common spectrogram shows the frequency on the x-axis, while the y-axis shows the
time (in frames). The power level is indicated by different colors of the 2-dimensional
points.
In the 3-dimensional spectrogram, the power is indicated by a value in a third dimen-
sion, the z-axis. The color mapping is maintained for the point in the 3-dimensional
result display.
This new display provides an even better overview of how the strength of the signal
varies over time for different frequencies.

Figure 8-16: Three-dimensional spectrogram

The number of frames displayed on the time (y-)axis is user-definable, whereas for 2-
dimensional spectrograms, the number of frames is determined automatically accord-
ing to the size of the window. All other spectrogram settings are identical for 3-dimen-
sional and 2-dimensional spectrograms.
When the measurement is stopped or completed, the currently selected frame is indi-
cated by a gray vertical plane. (As opposed to the small white arrows at the borders of
the 2-dimensional display.) The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the
currently selected frame.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 635

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

By default, the most recently recorded frame (frame 0) is selected, and added at the
front of the diagram.

Rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions

Depending on which aspect of the spectrogram is currently of interest, you can rotate
the display to have a closer look at the frequency, the time, or the power dimension.
Simply drag your finger or the mouse pointer over the spectrogram in the direction you
want to rotate it. You can rotate the display left or right, up and down. Note, however,
that the degree of rotation is restricted in the upward direction to avoid confusing
views. If you rotate the spectrogram such that you see the frequency-frame-plane
directly from above, the display is identical to the 2-dimensional spectrogram.
Table 8-10: Effect of rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions

Rotation to the left > focus on Rotation down > focus on fre- Rotation to the right > focus on
frame quency and frame frequency

Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms

In three-dimensional spectrograms, the markers are indicated by the common arrows
used in the spectrum display, for example. New markers are automatically placed on
the current frame. You can move the markers to any position in all dimensions of the
diagram. When you select a marker on the screen, three-dimensional cross-hairs indi-
cate the position on all axes.
Sometimes, a marker can be hidden by other frames. If necessary, rotate the spectro-
gram or select a different frame as the current frame.

Color maps
Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them. The legend
above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent.
The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs. You
can define:
● Which colors to use (Color scheme)
● Which value range to apply the color scheme to
● How the colors are distributed within the value range, i.e where the focus of the vis-
ualization lies (shape of the color curve)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 636

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the FSW.

The Color Scheme

● Hot

Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low levels, red colors indi-
cate high ones.
● Cold

Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors
indicate high ones.
The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme.
● Radar

Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in
between. Dark colors indicate low levels, light colors indicate high ones.
● Grayscale

Shows the results in shades of gray. Dark gray indicates low levels, light gray indi-
cates high ones.

The value range of the color map

If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram, you can optimize
the displayed value range. Then it becomes easier to distinguish between values that
are close together. Display only parts of interest.

The shape and focus of the color curve

The color-mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the
spectrogram display. By default, colors on the color map are distributed evenly. How-
ever, to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest, you
can set the focus of the color mapping to that area. Changing the focus is performed
by changing the shape of the color curve.
The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear. If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution
becomes non-linear. The slope of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of
the color palette then covers a large range of results, while the other end distributes
several colors over a relatively small result range.
You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be
able to detect small variations of the signal.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 637

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Example:
In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm
is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to
-20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.

Figure 8-17: Spectrogram with (default) linear color curve shape = 0

The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors. After shifting the color
curve to the left (negative value), more colors cover the range from -100 dBm to
-60 dBm (blue, green and yellow). This range occurs more often in the example. The
range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm, on the other hand, is dominated by various shades of
red only.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 638

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Figure 8-18: Spectrogram with non-linear color curve (shape = -0.5)

8.5.2.2 Spectrogram settings

Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config"

The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here. For set-
tings on color mapping, see "Color map settings" on page 643.
Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided
as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display.
See Section 7.5, "Bandwidth, filter and sweep configuration", on page 494.
Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Section 8.3.3.2, "Marker
search settings for spectrograms", on page 562.
● General spectrogram settings............................................................................... 639
● Color map settings................................................................................................ 643

General spectrogram settings

Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config"
This section describes general settings for spectrogram display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 639

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

State............................................................................................................................640
3D Spectrogram State.................................................................................................641
Select Frame...............................................................................................................641
History Depth.............................................................................................................. 641
3-D Display Depth....................................................................................................... 641
Time Stamp................................................................................................................. 641
Color Mapping.............................................................................................................641
Continuous Sweep / Run Cont....................................................................................642
Single Sweep / Run Single..........................................................................................642
Clear Spectrogram...................................................................................................... 642

State
Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow.
"Split" Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result dis-
play.
"Full" Displays the Spectrogram in a subwindow in the full size of the origi-
nal result display.
"Off" Closes the Spectrogram subwindow.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:LAYout on page 1255

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 640

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

3D Spectrogram State
Activates and deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram. As opposed to the common 2-
dimensional spectrogram, the power is not only indicated by a color mapping, but also
in a third dimension, the z-axis.
For details see "Three-dimensional spectrograms" on page 635.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:THReedim[:STATe] on page 1255

Select Frame
Selects a specific frame, loads the corresponding trace from the memory, and displays
it in the Spectrum window.
Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati-
cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker.
This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, and
only if a spectrogram is selected.
The most recent frame is number 0, all previous frames have a negative number.
For more details, see "Time frames" on page 632.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:FRAMe:SELect on page 1254

History Depth
Sets the number of frames that the FSW stores in its memory.
The maximum number of frames depends on the Sweep Points.
If the memory is full, the FSW deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and
replaces them with the new data.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:HDEPth on page 1254

3-D Display Depth

Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3-dimensional spectrogram.
For details see "Three-dimensional spectrograms" on page 635.

Time Stamp
Activates and deactivates the timestamp. The timestamp shows the system time while
the measurement is running. In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped, the
timestamp shows the time and date of the end of the sweep.
When active, the timestamp replaces the display of the frame number.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp[:STATe] on page 1257
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:TSTamp:DATA? on page 1256

Color Mapping
Opens the "Color Mapping" dialog.
For details see "Color maps" on page 636.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 641

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Continuous Sweep / Run Cont

After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the
default setting.
While the measurement is running, "Continuous Sweep" and [RUN CONT] are high-
lighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey
or key again. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, "Continuous Sweep" only controls the
sweep mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes
effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-
defined sequence. In this case, a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeat-
edly.
Furthermore, [RUN CONT] controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN
CONT] starts the Sequencer in continuous mode.
For details on the Sequencer, see Section 5.4.1, "The sequencer concept",
on page 124.
For details on the Sequencer, see the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912

Single Sweep / Run Single

After triggering, starts the number of sweeps set in "Sweep Count". The measurement
stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed.
While the measurement is running, "Single Sweep" and [RUN SINGLE] are highligh-
ted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or
key again.
Note: Sequencer. If the Sequencer is active, "Single Sweep" only controls the sweep
mode for the currently selected channel. However, the sweep mode only takes effect
the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined
sequence. In this case, the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only
once.
Furthermore, [RUN SINGLE] controls the Sequencer, not individual sweeps. [RUN
SINGLE] starts the Sequencer in single mode.
If the Sequencer is off, only the evaluation for the currently displayed channel is upda-
ted.
For details on the Sequencer, see Section 5.4.1, "The sequencer concept",
on page 124.
For details on the Sequencer, see the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 913
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CONTinuous on page 1253

Clear Spectrogram
Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer.
This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:SPECtrogram:CLEar[:IMMediate] on page 1252

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 642

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Color map settings

Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram" > "Color Mapping"
or: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" > "Color Mapping"
For more information on color maps, see "Color maps" on page 636. For details on
changing color-mapping settings, see "How to configure the color mapping"
on page 646.
In addition to the available color settings, the dialog box displays the current color map
and provides a preview of the display with the current settings.

Figure 8-19: Color Mapping dialog box

1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution

2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color
scheme
3 = Color curve pane: graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme
4/5 = Color range start and stop sliders: define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram
6 = Color curve slider: adjusts the focus of the color curve
7 = Histogram: shows the distribution of measured values
8 = Scale of the horizontal axis (value range)

Start / Stop.................................................................................................................. 643

Shape..........................................................................................................................644
Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale.......................................................................................... 644
Auto.............................................................................................................................644
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 644
Close........................................................................................................................... 644

Start / Stop
Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 643

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer on page 1258
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer on page 1258

Shape
Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display.
"-1 to <0" More colors are distributed among the lower values
"0" Colors are distributed linearly among the values
">0 to 1" More colors are distributed among the higher values
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:SHAPe on page 1258

Hot/Cold/Radar/Grayscale
Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor[:STYLe] on page 1259

Auto
Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for
optimized display.

Set to Default
Sets the color mapping to the default settings.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:DEFault on page 1258

Close
Saves the changes and closes the dialog box.

8.5.2.3 How to display and configure a spectrogram

Step-by-step instructions on how to display and configure a spectrogram are provided

here. For details on individual functions and settings see Section 8.5.2.2, "Spectrogram
settings", on page 639.
The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Sec-
tion 13.8.2.2, "Configuring spectrograms", on page 1252.
The following tasks are described here:
● "To display a spectrogram" on page 645
● "To remove the spectrogram display" on page 645
● "To set a marker in the spectrogram" on page 645
● "To configure a spectrogram" on page 645
● "To select a color scheme" on page 646
● "To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders" on page 647
● "To set the value range of the color map numerically" on page 647

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 644

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

● "To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider" on page 648
● "To set the color curve shape numerically" on page 648

To display a spectrogram
1. In the "Overview", select "Display", then drag the evaluation type "Spectrogram" to
the diagram area.
Alternatively:
a) Select [TRACE] and then "Spectrogram Config".
b) Toggle "Spectrogram" to "On".

2. To clear an existing spectrogram display, select "Clear Spectrogram".

3. Start a new measurement using [RUN SINGLE] or [RUN CONT].

The spectrogram is updated continuously with each new sweep.

4. To display the spectrum diagram for a specific time frame:

a) Stop the continuous measurement or wait until the single sweep is completed.
b) Select the frame number in the diagram footer.
c) Enter the required frame number in the edit dialog box.
Note that the most recent sweep is frame number 0, all previous frames have
negative numbers.

To remove the spectrogram display

1. Select [TRACE] and then "Spectrogram Config".

2. Toggle "Spectrogram" to "Off".

The standard spectrum display is restored.

To set a marker in the spectrogram

1. While a spectrogram is displayed, select [MARKER].

2. Select a "Marker" softkey.

3. Enter the frequency or time (x-value) of the marker or delta marker.

4. Enter the frame number for which the marker is to be set, for example 0 for the cur-
rent frame, or -2 for the second to last frame. Note that the frame number is always
0 or a negative value!
The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently
selected frame. In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are
positioned on a visible frame.

To configure a spectrogram
1. Configure the spectrogram frames:
a) Select [SWEEP].
b) Select "Sweep Config".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 645

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

c) In the "Sweep/Average Count" field, define how many sweeps are to be ana-
lyzed to create a single frame.
d) In the "Frame Count" field, define how many frames are to be plotted during a
single sweep measurement.
e) To include frames from previous sweeps in the analysis of the new frame (for
"Max Hold", "Min Hold" and "Average" trace modes only), select "Continue
Frame" = "On".

2. Define how many frames are to be stored in total:

a) Select [TRACE] and then "Spectrogram Config".
b) Select "History Depth".
c) Enter the maximum number of frames to store.

3. Optionally, replace the frame number by a time stamp by toggling "Time Stamp" to
"On".

4. If necessary, adapt the color mapping for the spectrogram to a different value
range or color scheme as described in "How to configure the color mapping"
on page 646.

How to configure the color mapping

The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrogram to your needs.
The settings for color mapping are defined in the "Color Mapping" dialog box. To dis-
play this dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select the color map in the window title bar of the "Spectrogram" result display.
● Select "Color Mapping" in the "Spectrogram" menu.

To select a color scheme

You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values.
► In the "Color Mapping" dialog box, select the option for the color scheme to be
used.

Editing the value range of the color map

The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the "Color Map-
ping" dialog box. To cover the entire measurement value range, make sure the first and
last bar of the histogram are included.
To ignore noise in a spectrogram, for example, exclude the lower power levels from the
histogram.

The value range of the color map must cover at least 10% of the value range on the
horizontal axis of the diagram, that means, the difference between the start and stop
values must be at least 10%.

The value range of the color map can be set numerically or graphically.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 646

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders
1. Select and drag the bottom color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the left of
the color curve pane) to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping.

2. Select and drag the top color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the right of
the color curve pane) to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping.

To set the value range of the color map numerically

1. In the "Start" field, enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that
marks the beginning of the value range.

2. In the "Stop" field, enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that
marks the end of the value range.

Example:
The color map starts at -110 dBm and ends at -10 dBm (that is: a range of 100 dB). In
order to suppress the noise, you only want the color map to start at -90 dBm. Thus,
you enter 10% in the "Start" field. The FSW shifts the start point 10% to the right, to
-90 dBm.

Adjusting the reference level and level range

Since the color map is configured using percentages of the total value range, changing
the reference level and level range of the measurement (and thus the power value
range) also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram.

Editing the shape of the color curve

The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map. By
default, the color curve is linear, i.e. the colors on the color map are distributed evenly.
If you shift the curve to the left or right, the distribution becomes non-linear. The slope
of the color curve increases or decreases. One end of the color palette then covers a
large number of results, while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively
small result range.
The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 647

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider

► Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle
of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focused, i.e.
more colors are distributed there.

To set the color curve shape numerically

► In the "Shape" field, enter a value to change the shape of the curve:
● A negative value (-1 to <0) focuses the lower values
● 0 defines a linear distribution
● A positive value (>0 to 1) focuses the higher values

8.5.3 Trace math

Access: [TRACE] > "Trace Math"

Or: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Trace Math"
If you have several traces with different modes, for example an average trace and a
maximum trace, it may be of interest to compare the results of both traces. In this
example, you could analyze the maximum difference between the average and maxi-
mum values. To analyze the span of result values, you could subtract the minimum
trace from the maximum trace. For such tasks, the results from several traces can be
combined using mathematical functions.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 648

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Trace configuration

Trace Math Function................................................................................................... 649

Trace Math Off............................................................................................................ 649
Trace Math Position.................................................................................................... 649
Trace Math Mode........................................................................................................ 650

Trace Math Function

You can select one of several different math operations.
Each operation subtracts one trace from another as indicated on the corresponding
button and writes the result to one of the traces. "T1 - T3 > T1", for example, subtracts
trace 3 from trace 1 and writes the result to trace 1. You can apply one operation at a
time.
The result refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math Position setting. The fol-
lowing subtractions can be performed:

"T1-T2->T1" Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1.

"T1-T3->T1" Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1

"T1-T4->T1" Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1

"T1-T5->T1" Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1

"T1-T6->T1" Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1

To switch off the trace math, use the Trace Math Off button.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>[:EXPRession][:DEFine] on page 1259
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe on page 1261

Trace Math Off

Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions.
Remote command:
CALC:MATH:STAT OFF, see CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:STATe on page 1261

Trace Math Position

Defines the zero point on the y-axis of the resulting trace in % of the diagram height.
The range of values extends from -100 % to +200 %.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:POSition on page 1261

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 649

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

Trace Math Mode

Defines the mode for the trace math calculations.
"Lin" Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values
are converted into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtrac-
tion, the data is converted back into its original unit.
This setting takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale. In this case,
subtraction is done in two ways (depending on the set unit):
● The unit is set to either W or dBm: the data is converted into W
prior to subtraction, i.e. averaging is done in W.
● The unit is set to either V, A, dBmV, dBµV, dBµA or dBpW: the
data is converted into V prior to subtraction, i.e. subtraction is
done in V.
"Log" Activates logarithmic subtraction.
This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a loga-
rithmic scale, i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values
are subtracted in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling) the behav-
ior is the same as with linear subtraction.
"Power" Activates linear power subtraction.
The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtrac-
tion. After the subtraction, the data is converted back into its original
unit.
Unlike the linear mode, the subtraction is always done in W.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MATH<t>:MODE on page 1260

8.6 Importing and exporting measurement results for

evaluation
The FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed mea-
surements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external applica-
tions. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format file
(ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported to
the FSW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application):
● Trace data
● Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc.
● I/Q data
The following data types can be imported (depending on the application):
● I/Q data

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 650

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such
as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications.
See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.

● Displaying a reference trace - importing trace data.............................................. 651

● Trace/data ex/import............................................................................................. 652
● How to import traces............................................................................................. 657
● How to export trace data and numerical results....................................................658
● How to export a peak list.......................................................................................658
● Reference: ASCII file export format...................................................................... 659

8.6.1 Displaying a reference trace - importing trace data

Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the
Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.
The data in the import file must have a specified format (see Section 8.6.6, "Reference:
ASCII file export format", on page 659), and can be stored in .CSV or .DAT format.

Trace Mode
The trace mode for the imported traces is set to "View" so that the data is not overwrit-
ten immediately during the next sweep. Other trace settings remain unchanged. Thus,
the displayed trace may not comply with the displayed trace settings in the
channel bar.

Detector type and number of sweep points

In particular, the detector type and the number of sweep points remain unchanged.
If the detector type of the active trace requires two points per x-value ("Auto Peak"),
but the file contains only one, each point is duplicated. If the detector type requires only
one point per x-value, but the file contains two, each second point is ignored.
If the file contains more sweep points than the active trace requires, the superfluous
points are ignored. If the file does not contain enough sweep points, the missing points
are inserted as -200 dBm.

Units
If the unit of the y-axis values in the file does not correspond to the active result dis-
play, the imported values are converted. If no unit is defined in the file, it is assumed to
be dBm.

Importing multiple traces in one file

If the import file contains more than one trace, you can import several traces at once,
overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the
same trace number. Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not
imported.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 651

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

Alternatively, you can import a single trace only, which is displayed for the trace num-
ber specified in "Import to Trace". This list contains all currently active traces in the
result display. If a trace with the specified number exists in the import file, that trace is
imported. Otherwise, the first trace in the file is imported (indicated by a message in
the status bar).
Example:
The import file contains trace 1, trace 2, and trace 4. The current result display has 4
active traces.
"Import to Trace" = 2: trace 2 of the import file is displayed as trace 2 in the result dis-
play.
"Import to Trace" = 3: trace 3 is not available in the import file, thus trace 1 is imported
and displayed as trace 3 in the result display
"Import all Traces" is enabled: Trace 1 is imported from the file and replaces trace 1 in
the result display.
Trace 2 is imported from the file and replaces trace 2 in the result display.
Trace 4 is imported from the file and replaces trace 4 in the result display.
Trace 3 in the result display remains unchanged.

Importing spectrogram traces

Trace data can also be imported to an active Spectrogram result display.
Note the following differences that apply in this case:
● The measurement must be stopped before import.
● Only trace 1 is imported to the spectrogram. Any other traces may be imported to a
Spectrum display, if available. However, they do not change the spectrogram dis-
play, which always refers to trace 1.
● A single spectrum is inserted as a new frame number 0.
● The trace mode is not changed to "View" as for Spectrum trace imports.

8.6.2 Trace/data ex/import

Access: [TRACE] > "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export"

The FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed mea-
surements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with other, external applica-
tions. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard ASCII format
file (DAT or CSV). You can also import existing trace data from a file, for example as a
reference trace (Spectrum application only).

The standard data management functions (e.g. saving or loading instrument settings)
that are available for all FSW applications are not described here.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 652

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

Export all Traces and all Table Results....................................................................... 653

Include Instrument & Measurement Settings.............................................................. 653
Trace to Export............................................................................................................653
Decimal Separator...................................................................................................... 654
X-Value Distribution.....................................................................................................654
Export Trace to ASCII File...........................................................................................654
└ File Type....................................................................................................... 656
└ Decimal Separator........................................................................................ 656
└ Column Separator.........................................................................................656
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................656
Importing Traces......................................................................................................... 656
└ Import All Traces/Import to Trace..................................................................657
└ Import ASCII File to Trace............................................................................ 657
└ File Explorer........................................................................................657

Export all Traces and all Table Results

Selects all displayed traces and result tables (e.g. "Result Summary", marker table
etc.) in the current application for export to an ASCII file.
Alternatively, you can select one specific trace only for export (see Trace to Export).
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window
by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:TRACes on page 1267

Include Instrument & Measurement Settings

Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export
file for result data.
See Section 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII file export format", on page 659 for details.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer on page 1377

Trace to Export
Defines an individual trace to be exported to a file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 653

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected.

Decimal Separator
Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import
files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

X-Value Distribution
Defines how the x-values of the trace are determined in the frequency domain.
See "X-value of the sweep point" on page 619.
"Bin-Centered" The full measurement span is divided by the number of sweep points
to obtain bins. The x-value of the sweep point is defined as the x-
value at the center of the bin (bin/2).
"Start/Stop" (Default): The x-value of the first sweep point corresponds to the
starting point of the full measurement span. The x-value of the last
sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full measurement
span. All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and
last points.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:XDIStrib on page 1267

Export Trace to ASCII File

Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the speci-
fied file and directory in the selected ASCII format.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the FSW firmware, you can also
use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 654

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins
with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For
large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
For details on the file format in the Spectrum application, see Section 8.6.6, "Refer-
ence: ASCII file export format", on page 659.
Note: Secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 655

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1269
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1379

File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File

Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated,
a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat on page 1267

Decimal Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File

Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import
files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

Column Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File

Selects the character that separates columns in the exported ASCII file. The character
can be either a semicolon, a comma or a tabulator (tab).
Example for semicolon:
Type;FSW13;Version;1.00;Date;01.Jan 3000;

Example for comma:

Type,FSW13,
Version,1.00,
Date,01.Jan 3000,

Example for tabulator (tab after the last column is not visible):
Type FSW13
Version 1.00
Date 01.Jan 3000

The selected column separator setting remains the same, even after a preset.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator on page 1266

File Explorer ← Export Trace to ASCII File

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

Importing Traces
Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the
Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 656

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

Import All Traces/Import to Trace ← Importing Traces

If the import file contains more than one trace, you can import several traces at once,
overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the
same trace number. Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not
imported.
Alternatively, you can import a single trace only, which is displayed for the trace num-
ber specified in "Import to Trace". This list contains all currently active traces in the
result display. If a trace with the specified number exists in the import file, that trace is
imported. Otherwise, the first trace in the file is imported (indicated by a message in
the status bar).
Remote command:
FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes on page 1268

Import ASCII File to Trace ← Importing Traces

Loads one trace or all traces from the selected file in the selected ASCII format (.DAT
or .CSV) to the currently active result display.
Remote command:
FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes on page 1268

File Explorer ← Import ASCII File to Trace ← Importing Traces

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

8.6.3 How to import traces

Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the
Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.

To import trace data

1. Press [Trace].

2. Select "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export"/"Import".

3. Select "Import All Traces" to import traces for all the currently active traces, or
select a specific trace to be imported in "Import to Trace".

4. Select "Import ASCII File to Trace".

5. Select the file format in which the data is stored.

6. Select the file that contains the trace data.

7. Select "Select" to close the dialog box and start the import.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 657

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

8.6.4 How to export trace data and numerical results

The measured trace data and numerical measurement results in tables can be expor-
ted to an ASCII file. For each sweep point, the measured trace position and value are
output.
The file is stored with a .DAT or .CSV extension. For details on the storage format, see
Section 8.6.6, "Reference: ASCII file export format", on page 659.

For the results of a Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) or Spurious Emissions measure-
ment, special file export functions are available, see Section 6.6.6.2, "How to save
SEM result files", on page 272(SEM) and "Save Evaluation List" on page 292 (Spuri-
ous).

To export trace data and table results

1. Select [TRACE] > "Trace Config" > "Trace / Data Export" tab.

2. Select "Export all Traces and all Table Results" to export all available measurement
result data for the current application, or select a specific "Trace to Export".

3. Optionally, select "Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" to insert additional

information in the export file header.

4. Select "Export Trace to ASCII File".

5. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file.

6. If necessary, change the decimal separator for the ASCII export file.

7. Select the data format of the ASCII file.

8. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the data to the file.

8.6.5 How to export a peak list

You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file.

1. Press [MKR FUNCT].

2. Select "Marker Peak List".

3. Configure the peak search and list settings as described in Section 8.3.4.8,
"Marker peak list", on page 584.

4. Set the marker peak list "State" to "On".

5. Press [RUN SINGLE] to perform a single sweep measurement and create a marker
peak list.

6. Select "Marker Peak List" to display the "Marker Peak List" dialog box again.

7. If necessary, change the decimal separator to be used for the ASCII export file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 658

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

8. Select "Export Peak List".

9. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the
export file.

10. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the peak list data to the file.

8.6.6 Reference: ASCII file export format

Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other appli-
cations. This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data.
(For details see Section 8.6.4, "How to export trace data and numerical results",
on page 658)

For a description of the file formats for spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement
settings and results, see Section 6.6.8, "Reference: SEM file descriptions",
on page 274.
The file format for Spurious Emissions measurement results is described in Sec-
tion 6.7.6, "Reference: ASCII export file format (spurious)", on page 294.

The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec-
tion containing the trace data. Optionally, the header can be excluded from the file (see
"Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" on page 653).
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon:
parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace). The measured data follows in one or sev-
eral columns (depending on the measurement), which are also separated by a semico-
lon.
The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen: window
by window, trace by trace, and table row by table row.
Generally, the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation
programs, e.g. MS-Excel. Different language versions of evaluation programs can
require a different handling of the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal sep-
arator to use (decimal point or comma, see "Decimal Separator" on page 654).
If the spectrogram display is selected when you select "ASCII Trace Export", the entire
histogram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data corresponding to a par-
ticular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame
was recorded.
Table 8-11: ASCII file format for trace export in the Spectrum application

File contents Description

Header data

Type;FSW; Instrument model

Version;1.00; Firmware version

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 659

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

File contents Description

Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage

Mode;ANALYZER; Operating mode

Preamplifier;OFF Preamplifier status

Transducer; OFF Transducer status

Center Freq;55000;Hz Center frequency

Freq Offset;0;Hz Frequency offset

Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range.

Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics mea-
surements

Span;90000;Hz Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure-

ments)

Ref Level;-30;dBm Reference level

Level Offset;0;dB Level offset

Rf Att;20;dB Input attenuation

El Att;2.0;dB Electrical attenuation

RBW;100000;Hz Resolution bandwidth

VBW;30000;Hz Video bandwidth

SWT;0.005;s Sweep time

Sweep Count;20; Number of sweeps set

Ref Position;75;% Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % =

lower edge)

Level Range;100;dB Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x-axis LOG, % with x-
axis LIN

x-Axis;LIN; Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

y-Axis;LOG; Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB

with statistics measurements

y-Unit;dBm; Unit of y values: dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit

with y-axis LOG or % with y-axis LIN

Data section for individual window

Window;1;Frequency Sweep Window number and name

Trace 1;; Selected trace

Trace Mode;AVERAGE; Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVER-

AGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD

Detector;AUTOPEAK; Selected detector

Values; 1001; Number of measurement points

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 660

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation

File contents Description

10000;-10.3;-15.7 Measured values: <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available
10130;-11.5;-16.9 only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the
smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point.
10360;-12.0;-17.4
...;...;

Data section for individual trace

Trace 2;; Next trace in same window

...

Data section for individual window

Window;2 ..; Name of next window

Data section for individual trace

Trace 1;; First trace

...

Table 8-12: ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export

File contents Description

Header

Type;FSW; Instrument model

Version;5.00; Firmware version

Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage

Mode;ANALYZER;SPECTROGRAM Operating mode

Center Freq;55000;Hz Center frequency

Freq Offset;0;Hz Frequency offset

Span;90000;Hz Frequency range (0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure-

ments)

x-Axis;LIN; Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

Start;10000;Hz Start/stop of the display range.

Stop;100000;Hz Unit: Hz for span > 0, s for span = 0, dBm/dB for statistics mea-
surements

Ref Level;-30;dBm Reference level

Level Offset;0;dB Level offset

Ref Position;75; % Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % =

lower edge)

y-Axis;LOG; Scaling of y-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

Level Range;100;dB Display range in y direction. Unit: dB with x-axis LOG, % with x-
axis LIN

Rf Att;20;dB Input attenuation

RBW;100000;Hz Resolution bandwidth

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 661

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

File contents Description

VBW;30000;Hz Video bandwidth

SWT;0.005;s Sweep time

Trace Mode;AVERAGE; Display mode of trace: CLR/WRITE,AVER-

AGE,MAXHOLD,MINHOLD

Detector;AUTOPEAK; Selected detector

Sweep Count;20; Number of sweeps set

Data section

Trace 1:;; Selected trace

x-Unit;Hz; Unit of x values: Hz with span > 0; s with span = 0; dBm/dB

with statistics measurements

y-Unit;dBm; Unit of y values: dB*/V/A/W depending on the selected unit

with y-axis LOG or % with y-axis LIN

Values; 1001; Number of measurement points

Frames;2; Number of exported frames

Frame;0; Most recent frame number

Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.990 Timestamp of this frame

10000;-10.3;-15.7 Measured values, identical to spectrum data:

10130;-11.5;-16.9 <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector
AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two
10360;-12.0;-17.4
measured values for a measurement point.
...;...;

Frame;-1; Next frame

Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.342 Timestamp of this frame

...

8.7 Event-based actions

During a measurement, specific events require that you take a certain action. The FSW
allows you to automize such tasks.
The event-based actions feature allows you to capture a particular state of the device
under test. Then you can document it for further research or start a specific procedure.
The mechanism triggers one or more actions at the end of a sweep if a certain condi-
tion applies. The combinations of condition and actions are called rules. Each applica-
tion individually specifies its own set of rules. Triggering conditions are referred to as
events. Typical examples are exceeding or going below a limit value, the (non-) viola-
tion of a limit line, hitting a marker value, etc. The range of actions includes taking a
screenshot, starting a separate program, saving I/Q data, etc. Also, continuous sweep-
ing can be stopped to retain the data of a particular state of the system.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 662

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

General conditions for event-based actions

Some general conditions apply to event-based actions:
● A maximum of 5 rules can be defined for each application.
● The base unit applications (Spectrum, I/Q analyzer, Analog Demodulation) are
counted together and thus support a total of 5 rules over all three applications.
Rules defined in one application are visible, but cannot be edited or enabled, in the
other two applications. The same applies to different measurements within a single
application (e.g. SEM and ACLR).
● Only the currently active measurement channel processes rules.
● The FSW in general, or any applications, do not perform a validity check on the
rules.
● When you save and then recall the instrument settings, any rule definitions are also
stored and loaded, including their state.
● After an instrument preset or restart, the rules are maintained, but disabled. The
trigger count for rules is cleared.

● Managing rules......................................................................................................663
● Defining rules........................................................................................................ 664
● Debugging rules with the EBA-Journal................................................................. 671
● Reference: overview of available result-events and state-events......................... 672

8.7.1 Managing rules

Access: toolbar
The event-based actions manager allows you to configure actions to be performed
when specific events occur in the measurement.

Rule state.................................................................................................................... 664

Rule.............................................................................................................................664
Events......................................................................................................................... 664
Actions........................................................................................................................ 664
Triggered..................................................................................................................... 664
New Rule.....................................................................................................................664
Edit Rule......................................................................................................................664

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 663

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Copy Rule................................................................................................................... 664

Delete Rule................................................................................................................. 664
Show Journal.............................................................................................................. 664

Rule state
Enables/disables processing of the defined rule for the currently active channel only.
Note that the application does not perform a validity check on the rules. For example, if
you change or delete the required command file for a rule, the rule becomes invalid.
However, the application still attempts to process the rule as far as possible. An easy
way to detect such a situation is using the log information, see Section 8.7.3, "Debug-
ging rules with the EBA-Journal", on page 671.

Rule
Name of the rule

Events
Specified trigger events for the rule

Actions
Specified actions to be performed by the rule.

Triggered
Number of trigger events for the rule that occurred since the last instrument preset or
restart.

New Rule
Opens the "Event Based Actions: Add Rule" dialog box to define a new rule as descri-
bed in Section 8.7.2, "Defining rules", on page 664.

Edit Rule
Opens the "Event Based Actions: Modify Rule" dialog box to edit the selected rule as
described in Section 8.7.2, "Defining rules", on page 664.

Copy Rule
Creates a copy of the selected rule and opens the "Event Based Actions: Modify Rule"
dialog box to edit it, as described in Section 8.7.2, "Defining rules", on page 664.

Delete Rule
Deletes the selected event-based action rule.

Show Journal
Shows the logging information for the rules defined in the EBA rule manager. This
information is useful to debug rules when expected actions are not performed. For
details, see Section 8.7.3, "Debugging rules with the EBA-Journal", on page 671.

8.7.2 Defining rules

Access: "Event-based actions" > "New Rule" / "Edit Rule" / "Copy Rule"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 664

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Rules are defined individually for each measurement channel. You must activate each
rule for each application individually, and only the currently active channel processes
the rules.
A maximum of 5 rules can be defined for each application. The base unit applications
(Spectrum, I/Q analyzer, Analog Demodulation) are counted together and thus support
a total of 5 rules over all three applications. Rules defined in one application are visible,
but cannot be edited or enabled, in the other two applications. The same applies to dif-
ferent measurements within a single application (e.g. SEM and ACLR).

Rule Name.................................................................................................................. 666

Event........................................................................................................................... 666
└ Limit Line.......................................................................................................666
└ Limit Line............................................................................................ 666
└ Trigger condition................................................................................. 666
└ Window............................................................................................... 666
└ Marker Y Pos................................................................................................ 666
└ Marker.................................................................................................667
└ Window............................................................................................... 667
└ Trigger condition (Marker value is)..................................................... 667
└ Value...................................................................................................667
└ Result Value..................................................................................................667
└ Result..................................................................................................667
└ Trigger condition (Value is)................................................................. 667
└ Value...................................................................................................667
└ State Value....................................................................................................667
└ Result..................................................................................................668
└ Trigger condition (Check for).............................................................. 668
Action.......................................................................................................................... 668
└ Store Screenshot.......................................................................................... 668
└ Storage location (Browse).................................................................. 668
└ File name............................................................................................ 668
└ Format................................................................................................ 669

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 665

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

└Stop Cont Sweep.......................................................................................... 669

└Deactivate Rule.............................................................................................669
└Auto Level..................................................................................................... 669
└Trace Export................................................................................................. 669
└ Browse................................................................................................669
└ Mode...................................................................................................669
└ I/Q Export......................................................................................................669
└ Start Program/Script..................................................................................... 670
└ Type.................................................................................................... 670
└ Program/script (Browse)..................................................................... 670
Add Action...................................................................................................................670
Remove Action............................................................................................................670
Save............................................................................................................................ 671

Rule Name
Defines the unique name for the actions to be taken under specific conditions.
Without a name, the rule cannot be stored.

Event
Defines the event that triggers the action.
Depending on the selected event, further parameters are available.

Limit Line ← Event

The result of a limit line check triggers the actions.

Limit Line ← Limit Line ← Event

The name of a limit line that is defined for the current measurement channel (see Sec-
tion 8.4.2, "Limit lines", on page 595).
The limit line must be active in the current measurement channel for the rule to be pro-
cessed.

Trigger condition ← Limit Line ← Event

The result of the limit check ("Pass" / "Fail" / "Margin") that triggers the actions.

Window ← Limit Line ← Event

Window in which the specified limit line is evaluated.

Marker Y Pos ← Event

The value of a specific marker triggers the actions. The marker must be active in the
current measurement channel for the rule to be processed (see "Marker State"
on page 344).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 666

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Marker ← Marker Y Pos ← Event

The marker whose value triggers the actions; only for marker 1: also the marker type
("Norm"/"Delta")

Window ← Marker Y Pos ← Event

Window in which the specified marker is evaluated.

Trigger condition (Marker value is) ← Marker Y Pos ← Event

The relation of the marker value to the specified value ("greater than" / "lower than")
that triggers the actions

Value ← Marker Y Pos ← Event

Value with which the marker value is compared.

Result Value ← Event

The value of a specific result triggers the actions. Depending on the currently selected
measurement, different result values are available (see Section 6, "Measurements and
results", on page 129, Section 8.7.4, "Reference: overview of available result-events
and state-events", on page 672).

Result ← Result Value ← Event

The measurement result whose value is evaluated (see also Section 8.7.4, "Reference:
overview of available result-events and state-events", on page 672).

Trigger condition (Value is) ← Result Value ← Event

The relation of the result value to the specified value ("greater than" / "lower than") that
triggers the actions

Value ← Result Value ← Event

Value with which the result value is compared.

State Value ← Event

The measurement result whose state ("Pass" / "Fail") is evaluated. Depending on the
currently selected measurement, different state results are available (see Table 8-13).
For example, a limit check for a specific result triggers the actions.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 667

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Result ← State Value ← Event

The measurement result whose state is evaluated (see also Table 8-13).

Trigger condition (Check for) ← State Value ← Event

The state ("Pass" / "Fail") that triggers the actions.

Action
Defines the actions to be taken when the specified events occur.
Depending on the selected action, further settings are available.

Store Screenshot ← Action

Creates and stores a screenshot of the current display to a file.

Storage location (Browse) ← Store Screenshot ← Action

Defines the storage location of the screenshots. Enter the path of the target directory
directly, or browse in the file explorer and select the directory there.

File name ← Store Screenshot ← Action

Defines the (generic) file name for the screenshots. If necessary, a consecutive num-
ber is added to the specified file name to create unique file names. Placeholders can
be inserted in square brackets to create generic file names. The placeholders are
replaced by current values at the time the screenshot is created.
The following placeholders are supported:
● [Year]
● [Month]
● [Day]
● [Hour]
● [Minute]
● [Second]
● [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day]
● [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second]

Example:
The definition ScreenShot_[Date]_[Time] creates file names such as
ScreenShot_2018-12-14_12-49-51.PNG,
ScreenShot_2018-12-14_12-50-01.PNG.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 668

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Format ← Store Screenshot ← Action

Defines the image file format

Stop Cont Sweep ← Action

Stops a continuous sweep.
No further parameters required.

Deactivate Rule ← Action

Deactivates the rule after the specified number of trigger events occurred; useful to
perform a single action only.

Auto Level ← Action

Automatically optimizes the level settings according to the current measurement.
Note: If several "Auto Level" actions are defined for the same rule or for multiple rules,
only one "Auto Level" action is performed.
Combining an I/Q data export and the "Auto Level" function for the same event stops a
continuous sweep.

Trace Export ← Action

Stores the current trace data to the specified file.
Note: Exporting trace data more than once for the same event is not possible (and not
useful), even if the event is specified for multiple rules.
Define the path and (generic) file name. The default directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER.
If necessary, a consecutive number is added to the specified file name to create unique
file names. Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file
names. The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the data is expor-
ted.
The following placeholders are supported:
● [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day]
● [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second]

Browse ← Trace Export ← Action

Opens a file-selection dialog box to select the directory for exported traces.

Mode ← Trace Export ← Action

Defines whether all traces or only user-defined traces are exported (as defined in
[Trace] > "Trace export" settings).

I/Q Export ← Action

Stores the current I/Q data to the specified file. Only available for I/Q-based applica-
tions.
Note: Exporting I/Q data more than once for the same event is not possible (and not
useful), even if the event is specified for multiple rules.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 669

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Combining an I/Q data export and the "Auto Level" function for the same event stops a
continuous sweep.
Define the path and (generic) file name. The default directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER.
If necessary, a consecutive number is added to the specified file name to create unique
file names. Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file
names. The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the data is expor-
ted.
The following placeholders are supported:
● [Date] = [Year]-[Month]-[Day]
● [Time]: =[Hour]-[Minute]-[Second]
Select "Browse" to select the directory for exported data from a file-selection dialog
box.

Start Program/Script ← Action

Executes the specified program, script, or command, for example a user-defined script
or an external application. The command is executed asynchronously to the measure-
ment, that is: the measurement continues without waiting for the command to finish
execution. However, you can combine the action "Stop continuous sweep" with the
"Start Program/Script" to retain the processed measurement results (see "Add Action"
on page 670).

Type ← Start Program/Script ← Action

Defines the type of command to be executed, which determines the application
required to execute the command. For example, a SCPI command script (*.inp) is
executed in the R&S IECWIN tool.

Program/script (Browse) ← Start Program/Script ← Action

Defines the path and file name of the script or program to be executed; invalid (not
available) file names are indicated by red font.

Add Action
Adds another action to be taken when the specified events occur. You can define up to
3 different actions. The order in which the actions are defined is irrelevant.
If several actions are scheduled due to one or more rules, the actions are performed in
the following order (if specified):
● 1. Store Screenshot
● 2. Auto Level
● 3. Start Program/Script
Any other actions are performed in parallel.

Remove Action
Removes the corresponding action from the rule.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 670

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Save
Saves the rule definition. Saving is only available if the rule definition is valid. Invalid
parts of the definition are indicated by red font, for example if the specified command
name, result, or limit line does not exist. Other validity checks are not performed.

8.7.3 Debugging rules with the EBA-Journal

Access: "Event-based actions" > "Show Journal"

The event-based actions journal shows the logging information for the rules defined in
the EBA manager. This information is useful to debug rules when actions are not per-
formed as expected.

Debug / Info / Warning / Error..................................................................................... 671

Refresh........................................................................................................................672
Clear............................................................................................................................672
Debug Logging............................................................................................................672

Debug / Info / Warning / Error

Determines which level of information is provided in the journal, depending on its
importance. Each level displays information of the selected level or higher. The type of
information is indicated in the log display.
"DBG" Additional descriptions as debugging information (only if Debug Log-
ging is enabled).
"INF" Basic information on triggering events or executed actions defined by
the active rules
"WNG" Information on possibly unexpected results due to conflicting rule def-
initions, for example if an "Auto Level" action causes the EBA man-
ager to pause execution of further actions
"ERR" Errors concerning failed rules, for example due to missing action
command or invalid trigger event

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 671

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Refresh
Updates the journal display to include the latest information (since journal was opened
or last updated).

Clear
Clears all currently stored information in the journal

Debug Logging
If enabled, additional debug information is logged in the journal. Since this information
requires large amounts of storage space and can slow down the performance of the
firmware, use this mode carefully and only when necessary for troubleshooting. Debug
mode is automatically disabled when you close the "EBA Journal" dialog.

8.7.4 Reference: overview of available result-events and state-events

Using the event-based actions, you can define actions to be performed depending on
the values or states of specific results (see Result Value and "State Value"
on page 667). The following overview shows you which results and states are available
for which measurements.
Table 8-13: Available result and state events

Measurement Results States

Channel power ACLR Channel Power ACLR Tx Total Channel Power ACLR

Channel Power ACLR Tx<1-n>

Channel Power ACLR Adj Lower

Channel Power ACLR Adj Upper

Channel Power ACLR Alt<1-n> Lower

Channel Power ACLR Alt<1-n> Upper

Carrier-to-Noise C/N

C/N0

OBW OBW Occ BW

OBW Occ BW Freq Offset

Statistics APD Crest (TRC <1-6>)

CCDF Crest (TRC <1-6>)

Spectrum Emission Mask Spectrum Emission Mask Tx Power Spectrum Emission Mask Limit
Check

Spurious Emissions Spurious Emissions Limit Check

Time Domain Power Time Domain Power Peak

Time Domain Power RMS

Time Domain Power Mean

Time Domain Power Std Dev

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 672

FSW Common analysis and display functions
Event-based actions

Measurement Results States

Noise Power Ratio NPR Channel Power Density

NPR Notch Power Density

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 673

FSW Optimizing measurements
Improving averaging results

9 Optimizing measurements

9.1 Minimizing the measurement duration

If you want to minimize the measurement duration, try the following methods to opti-
mize the measurement:
● Reduce the span of the measurement to the relevant parts of the signal only.
● Increase the RBW to minimize the measurement time; however, consider the
requirements of the standard if you need to measure according to standard!
● Take advantage of the speed optimization mode in the "Sweep" settings if you do
not require the larger dynamic range (see "Optimization" on page 506).
● Reduce the sweep time and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcula-
ted; however, consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation.
● To determine average (or peak) values, use an RMS detector (or peak detector)
with a higher sweep time instead of trace averaging to obtain better average
power results in less time. Furthermore, enforce the use of the sweep type "FFT"
(as opposed to "Auto"; in Sweep mode, the averaging effect of the RMS detector
may be less efficient).
● When performing multiple measurements, use multiple channels to switch
between measurements rather than changing the settings within one channel
repeatedly.
Take advantage of the Sequencer function to switch between multiple measure-
ments automatically or continuously (see also Section 5.4, "Running a sequence of
measurements", on page 124).

Additional information
An application note discussing measurement speed optimization is available from the
Rohde & Schwarz website:
1EF90: Speeding up Spectrum Analyzer Measurements

9.2 Improving averaging results

Instead of trace averaging, use an RMS detector with a higher sweep time to obtain
better average power results in less time. Furthermore, enforce the use of the sweep
type "FFT" (as opposed to "Auto"; in Sweep mode, the averaging effect of the RMS
detector may be less efficient).
In FFT mode, FFTs are calculated per bin and combined using the RMS detector. For
trace averaging, on the other hand, the local oscillator must be switched repeatedly for
each trace, which takes additional time.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 674

FSW Optimizing measurements
Improving averaging results

Generally, a higher sweep time leads to more data to be averaged and thus stabilizes
the results. In FFT mode, a higher sweep time means more FFTs are calculated and
combined per bin.
Thus, in the same capture time, the FFT mode with an RMS detector can provide bet-
ter results than an averaged trace.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 675

FSW Data management
Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset)

10 Data management
The FSW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and
export measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store or print the measure-
ment results displayed on the screen.
General storage and import/export functions are available via the toolbar. Some special
storage functions are (also) available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding
menus, for example trace data export.
See Section 8.6, "Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation",
on page 650 for RF measurements in the Spectrum mode, or the description of the
specific applications.
● Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset)........................................ 676
● Protecting data using the secure user mode.........................................................677
● Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data........................ 679
● Import/export functions..........................................................................................691
● Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings..................... 696
● Working with test reports.......................................................................................712

10.1 Restoring the default instrument configuration (pre-

set)
When delivered, the FSW has a default configuration. You can restore this defined ini-
tial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements. This is often recom-
mendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise.

Factory default configuration

The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected
against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for
the instrument.
Alternatively to the factory default settings, you can define user-specific recall settings
to be restored after a preset or reboot, see "To recall settings automatically after preset
or reboot" on page 691.

To restore the default instrument configuration for all channels at once

► Press [PRESET].

After you use the [PRESET] function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e. any
actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/REDO]
keys.

Remote command:
*RST or SYSTem:PRESet

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 676

FSW Data management
Protecting data using the secure user mode

To restore the default configuration for a single channel

The default measurement settings can also be reset for an individual channel only,
rather than resetting the entire instrument.
► In the "Overview", select "Preset Channel".
The factory default settings are restored to the current channel. Note that a user-
defined recall settings file is NOT restored.

Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:CHANnel[:EXEC] on page 1366

10.2 Protecting data using the secure user mode

During normal operation, the FSW uses a solid-state drive to store its operating sys-
tem, instrument firmware, instrument self-alignment data, and any user data created
during operation.
If necessary, the solid-state drive can be removed from the FSW and locked in a
secure place to protect any classified data it may contain.

Redirecting storage to volatile memory

Alternatively, to avoid storing any sensitive data on the FSW permanently, the secure
user mode was introduced (option R&S FSW-K33). In secure user mode, the instru-
ment’s solid-state drive is write-protected so that no information can be written to mem-
ory permanently. Data that the FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirec-
ted to volatile memory instead, which remains available only until the instrument is
switched off. This data includes:
● Windows operating system files
● Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state
● Self-alignment data
● General instrument settings such as the IP address
● Measurement settings
● User data created during operation
(see also Table 10-1)
● Any data created by other applications installed on the FSW, for example, text edi-
tors (Notepad), the clipboard, or drawing tools.
Users can access data that is stored in volatile memory just as in normal operation.
However, when the instrument’s power is switched off, all data in this memory is
cleared. Thus, in secure user mode, the instrument always starts in a defined, fixed
state when switched on.
To store data such as measurement results permanently, it must be stored to an exter-
nal storage device, such as a memory stick.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 677

FSW Data management
Protecting data using the secure user mode

Limited storage space

The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB.
Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage
space is still available.

Storing required data permanently

Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the FSW must be stored
on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes
predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data.

Self-alignment data
Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature
changes. Therefore, to achieve optimal accuracy, it can be preferable to perform a new
self-alignment at the start of each new session on the FSW.

Windows updates
In secure user mode, in rare cases, Windows updates trigger a reboot. We recommend
using secure user mode on R&S FSW-K33 only in private LAN without access to the
internet or disconnected to LAN to avoid unwanted Windows updates. In preparation
for Windows updates, disable secure user mode temporarily.

Restricted operation
Since permanent storage is not possible, the following functions are not available in
secure user mode:
● Firmware update
● Activating a new option key
Furthermore, since the "SecureUser" used in secure user mode does not have admin-
istrator rights, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration and some general
instrument settings are not available. Refer to the description of the basic instrument
setup ([SETUP] menu) to find out which functions are affected.

Activating and deactivating secure user mode

Only a user with administrator rights can activate (and deactivate) the secure user
mode. Once activated, a restart is required. The special user "SecureUser" is then log-
ged on to the FSW automatically using the auto-login function. While the secure user
mode is active, a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 678

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

Secure passwords
By default, the initial password for both the administrator account and the "Secure-
User" account is "894129". When the secure user mode is activated the first time after
installation, you are prompted to change the passwords for all user accounts to
improve system security. Although it is possible to continue without changing the pass-
words, it is strongly recommended that you do so.
You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via:
"Start > Settings > Account > SignIn Options > Password > Change"

To deactivate the secure user mode, the "SecureUser" must log off and a user with
administrator rights must log on.

Switching users when using the auto-login function

In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to "Shut down" and then "Log off".
The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account
name and password.

The secure user mode setting and auto-login is automatically deactivated when
another user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available.
For users with administrator rights, the secure user mode setting is available in the
general system configuration settings (see "SecureUser Mode" on page 794).

Remote control
Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.
(See SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe].)
Manual activation is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords.

10.3 Storing and recalling instrument settings and mea-

surement data
Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar
Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a measurement you performed under spe-
cific conditions on the instrument. Or you want to evaluate imported data in another
application on the FSW and would like to restore the measurement settings applied
during measurement. In these cases, you can store and recall instrument and mea-
surement settings, and possibly other related measurement data.
Two different methods are available for managing instrument settings:
● Quick Save/Quick Recall - a defined set of instrument settings or channels are
stored or recalled quickly in just one step

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 679

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

● Configurable Save/Recall - a user-defined set of instrument settings or channels

are stored to a definable storage location

Restrictions when recalling measurement settings

When recalling a saved configuration file, the following restrictions apply:
● The FSW must support the frequency range defined in the configuration file.
● Configuration files created on a FSW with certain options in use do not work on an
FSW without these options.
● Files created with newer firmware versions may not work with a previous version.
● Files created on an instrument other than the FSW do not work on the FSW.

Saving instrument settings in secure user mode

Be sure to store instrument settings that you require beyond the current session before
SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure
user mode", on page 41.
Settings that are saved via QuickSave in secure user mode are only available during
the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the FSW, the data is
cleared.

Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings

If a transducer file was in use when the save set was stored (with the save item "Cur-
rent Settings" only) the FSW assumes that these transducer values should remain
valid after every recall of that save set. Thus, even if the transducer file is changed and
the original save set file is recalled later, the originally stored transducer values are
recalled and applied to the measurement. In the "Edit" transducer dialog box, however,
the changed transducer file values are displayed, as no updated transducer file was
loaded.
The same applies to limit line settings.
The same applies to integrated measurements' weighting filter.
If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling the save set, you
must force the application to reload the transducer file. To do so, simply open the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box (see Section 11.4.2, "Transducer settings", on page 758) and
toggle the "X-Axis" option from "Lin" to "log" and back. Due to that change, the trans-
ducer file is automatically reloaded, and the changed transducer values are applied to
the current measurement. Now you can create a new save set with the updated trans-
ducer values.
Similarly, if you want to apply the changed limit values after recalling the save set, you
must force the application to reload the limit file. To do so, simply open the "Edit Limit
Line" dialog box (see Section 8.4.2.2, "Limit line settings and functions", on page 599)
and toggle the "Y-Axis" unit. Due to that change, the limit line file is automatically
reloaded, and the changed limit values are applied to the current measurement. Now a
new save set with the updated limit values can be created.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 680

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

● Quick save/quick recall......................................................................................... 681

● Configurable storage and recall............................................................................ 683
● How to save and load instrument settings............................................................ 689

10.3.1 Quick save/quick recall

The "Quick Save" and "Quick Recall" functions allow you to store instrument settings or
channels very easily and quickly in one step. Up to ten different sets of settings can be
stored to or recalled from "save sets". Each save set is identified by its storage date
and type (instrument or specific "Channel") in the display. The save sets are stored in
the C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave directory, in files named QuickSave1.dfl to
QuickSave10.dfl. Only the current measurement settings are stored, not any addi-
tional data such as traces, limit line or transducer files (see Section 10.3.2.1, "Stored
data types", on page 683).
Source calibration files for an optional external generator, if available, are included.

Saving instrument settings in secure user mode

Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are stored to the SDRAM,
and are only available during the current session. As soon as the power is switched off
on the FSW, the data is cleared (see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure
user mode", on page 41).

During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instru-
ment. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.

If a channel with the same name as the "Channel" to be restored is already active, the
name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number:

10.3.1.1 Quick save / quick recall settings

Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Quick Save" / "Quick Recall"
Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 681

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10................................................................................ 682

└ Rename........................................................................................................ 683
└ Write Protection............................................................................................ 683
Storage Type (Save only)............................................................................................683
Recall.......................................................................................................................... 683

QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10

Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the
time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10" placeholder is replaced by a
label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type.
Right-click on one of the QuickSave buttons to display a context menu with additional
functions for the save set.

During recall, save sets of type "Instrument" replace the settings of the entire instru-
ment. All other save sets start a new channel with the stored settings.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 682

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.

Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are only available during
the current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the FSW, the data is
cleared (see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41).

Rename ← QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10

Displays an input field to rename the save set, if write protection is disabled.

Write Protection ← QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10

Enables or disables write protection for the save set. If enabled, the save set cannot be
renamed or overwritten.

Storage Type (Save only)

Defines which type of settings are stored in the save set.
"Instrument The instrument settings for all currently active "Channel"s are stored.
with all Chan-
nels"
"Current Chan- Only the instrument settings for the currently selected measurement
nel" "Channel"s are stored.

Recall
Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings
file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, a new channel with the stored set-
tings is activated, otherwise all "Channel"s and instrument settings are overwritten with
the stored settings.
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/
REDO] keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1362

10.3.2 Configurable storage and recall

The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings
are stored, and where the settings file is stored to. Any settings file can be selected for
recall.
● Stored data types..................................................................................................683
● Storage location and filename...............................................................................684
● Save and recall dialog boxes................................................................................ 685
● Startup recall settings............................................................................................687

10.3.2.1 Stored data types

The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog
box on the FSW:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 683

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

Table 10-1: Items that can be stored to files

Item Description

Current Settings Current instrument and measurement settings.

All Transducers All transducer factor files.

(Note: Restoring a saveset overwrites transducer factor files on the hard disk
that have the same name as those in the saveset. For more information, see
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.)

All Traces All active traces.

All Limit Lines All limit line files.

EBA Rules Event based action rules

See Section 8.7, "Event-based actions", on page 662

Source Cal Data Source calibration data for an optional external generator
(If available, see "Saving calibration results" on page 382).

Spectrograms Spectrogram trace data (only available if spectrogram display is currently

active).

10.3.2.2 Storage location and filename

The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net-
work drive. The operating system, firmware and stored instrument settings are located
on drive C.

Saving instrument settings in secure user mode

In secure user mode all data is stored to the SDRAM, and is only available during the
current session. As soon as the power is switched off on the FSW, the data is cleared
(see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41).
Other storage locations cannot be selected in this mode.

The storage location and filename are selected in a file selection dialog box which is
displayed when you perform a storage function.
By default, the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under-
score and three numbers, e.g. limit_lines_005. In the example, the base name is
limit_lines. The base name can contain characters, numbers and underscores.
The file extension dfl is added automatically. The default folder for settings files is
C:\R_S\INSTR\Save.

File name restrictions

File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 684

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

10.3.2.3 Save and recall dialog boxes

Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Save" / "Recall"

Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related.

Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................685

File Name....................................................................................................................686
Comment.....................................................................................................................686
File Explorer................................................................................................................ 686
File Type......................................................................................................................686
Items:.......................................................................................................................... 686
Save File..................................................................................................................... 687
Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel....................................................687

Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files

Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 685

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog on page 1353

File Name
Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore.
Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g.
limit_lines_005.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Section 10.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 684.

Comment
An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COMMent on page 1354

File Explorer
Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

File Type
Determines whether the global instrument settings with all "Channel"s are stored or
recalled, or the current "Channel" settings only.

Items:
Defines which data and settings are stored or are recalled. Depending on the "File
Type", either channels only, or global settings are available. Which items are available
also depends on the installed options (see also Section 10.3.2.1, "Stored data types",
on page 683).
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL on page 1358
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault on page 1359
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE on page 1360
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 1359
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 1359
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SCData on page 1360
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:SGRam on page 1360

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 686

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe<1...3>[:ACTive] on page 1361

MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1361

Save File
Saves the settings file with the defined filename.
Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instru-
ment are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory
limit reached" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is
still available.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 1364
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe:NEXT on page 1364

Recall in New Channel / Recall in Current Channel

Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file. If the settings
file contains settings for a specific "Channel" only, select "Recall in New Channel" to
activate a new channel with the stored settings. Select "Recall in Current Channel" to
replace the current "Channel" settings.
Note: After you use the "Recall" function, the history of previous actions is deleted, i.e.
any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the [UNDO/
REDO] keys.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1362

10.3.2.4 Startup recall settings

Access: "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Startup Recall"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 687

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

Startup Recall..............................................................................................................688
Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files...........................................................688
File Name....................................................................................................................689
Comment.....................................................................................................................689

Startup Recall
Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in
the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset. If deactivated,
the default settings are loaded.
Note that only instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function,
not "Channel" files.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO on page 1362

Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files

Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive.
The default storage location for the SEM settings files is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std.
Note: Saving instrument settings in secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 688

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.
Remote command:
MMEMory:CATalog on page 1353

File Name
Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension.
By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore.
Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers, e.g.
limit_lines_005.
File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names. In partic-
ular, they must not contain special characters such as ":", "*", "?".
For details on the filename and location, see Section 10.3.2.2, "Storage location and
filename", on page 684.

Comment
An optional description for the data file. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed.
Remote command:
MMEMory:COMMent on page 1354

10.3.3 How to save and load instrument settings

Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can
repeat the measurement with the same settings. Optionally, user-defined measurement
settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instrument.

To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function
1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.

2. Select whether the instrument settings for all"Channel"s are stored, or only those
for the current"Channel".

3. Select one of the save sets in which the settings are stored ("QuickSaveX").
The selected settings are stored to the file
C:\R_S\INSTR\QuickSave\QuickSaveX.dfl.
Note: If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file,
remember to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored
and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
4. To restore the settings, select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 689

FSW Data management
Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data

5. Select the save set in which the settings were stored ("QuickSaveX").
The selected settings are restored to the instrument or channel.

To save configurable instrument settings

1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar.

2. In the "Save" dialog box, switch to the "Save" tab.

3. In the file selection dialog box, select a filename and storage location for the set-
tings file.

4. Optionally, define a comment to describe the stored settings.

5. Select whether the instrument settings for all"Channel"s are stored, or only those
for the current"Channel".

6. Select the items to be saved with the settings. Either the settings for the currently
selected "Channel" only, or the settings for all "Channel"s can be stored. Various
other items, such as lines or traces etc., can be stored as well (see Sec-
tion 10.3.2.1, "Stored data types", on page 683).

7. Select "Save".
A file with the defined name and path and the extension .dfl is created.

If you make any changes to the settings after storing the configuration file, remember
to save the settings again. Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be
overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.

To recall configurable instrument settings

1. Select the "Open" icon from the toolbar.

2. In the "Recall" dialog box, switch to the "Recall" tab.

3. In the file selection dialog box, select the filename and storage location of the set-
tings file.
Note: The "File Type" indicates whether the file contains instrument settings for
all"Channel"s, or only those for the current "Channel".
4. If several items were saved, select which items are restored.

5. If a "Channel" was saved, select whether the settings will replace the settings in the
current "Channel", or whether a new channel with the saved settings will be
opened.

6. Select "Recall".
The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and
you can repeat the measurement with the same settings.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 690

FSW Data management
Import/export functions

Note that any changes made to the settings after storing the configuration file will
be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.

To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot

You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument.
1. Configure the settings as required and save them as described in "To save configu-
rable instrument settings" on page 690.

2. In the "Save/Recall" menu, select "Startup Recall".

3. From the file selection dialog box, select the recall settings to restore.

4. Select "Select File".

5. Set "Startup Recall" to "On".

Now when you press [PRESET] or reboot the instrument, the defined settings will
be restored.

6. To restore the factory preset settings, set "Startup Recall" to "Off".

10.4 Import/export functions

Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Import" / "Export"
The FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed mea-
surements. However, you may want to evaluate the data with further, external applica-
tions. In this case, you can export the measurement data to a standard format file
(ASCII or XML). Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re-imported to
the FSW for further evaluation later, for example in other applications.
The following data types can be exported (depending on the application):
● Trace data
● Table results, such as result summaries, marker peak lists etc.
● I/Q data
The following data types can be imported (depending on the application):
● I/Q data

I/Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I/Q data, such
as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications.
See the corresponding user manuals for those applications for details.

These functions are only available if no measurement is running.

In particular, if Continuous Sweep / Run Cont is active, the import/export functions are
not available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 691

FSW Data management
Import/export functions

Import.......................................................................................................................... 692
Export..........................................................................................................................692
└ Export Trace to ASCII File............................................................................ 692
└ File Type............................................................................................. 694
└ Decimal Separator.............................................................................. 694
└ Column Separator...............................................................................694
└ File Explorer........................................................................................694
└ Export Configuration..................................................................................... 694
└ I/Q Export......................................................................................................695
└ File Type............................................................................................. 695
└ File Explorer........................................................................................695

Import
Access: "Save/Recall" > Import
Provides functions to import data.
Importing trace data is only available via the "Trace Config" dialog box, see Sec-
tion 8.6.2, "Trace/data ex/import", on page 652.
I/Q data can only be imported by applications that process I/Q data.
Importing I/Q data is not possible in MSRA operating mode.
See the FSW I/Q Analyzer user manual for more information.

Export
Access: "Save/Recall" > Export
Opens a submenu to configure data export.

Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export

Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the speci-
fied file and directory in the selected ASCII format.
"File Explorer": Instead of using the file manager of the FSW firmware, you can also
use the Microsoft Windows File Explorer to manage files.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 692

FSW Data management
Import/export functions

If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo-
gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins
with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For
large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
For details on the file format in the Spectrum application, see Section 8.6.6, "Refer-
ence: ASCII file export format", on page 659.
Note: Secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 693

FSW Data management
Import/export functions

Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe on page 1269
MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPECtrogram on page 1379

File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export

Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated,
a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:FORMat on page 1267

Decimal Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export

Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import
files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator on page 1352

Column Separator ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export

Selects the character that separates columns in the exported ASCII file. The character
can be either a semicolon, a comma or a tabulator (tab).
Example for semicolon:
Type;FSW13;Version;1.00;Date;01.Jan 3000;

Example for comma:

Type,FSW13,
Version,1.00,
Date,01.Jan 3000,

Example for tabulator (tab after the last column is not visible):
Type FSW13
Version 1.00
Date 01.Jan 3000

The selected column separator setting remains the same, even after a preset.
Remote command:
FORMat:DEXPort:CSEParator on page 1266

File Explorer ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

Export Configuration ← Export

Opens the "Traces" dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings.
Section 8.6.2, "Trace/data ex/import", on page 652

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 694

FSW Data management
Import/export functions

I/Q Export ← Export

Opens a file selection dialog box to define an export file name to which the I/Q data is
stored. This function is only available in single sweep mode.
It is not available in the Spectrum application, only in applications that process I/Q
data, such as the I/Q Analyzer or optional applications.
For details, see the description in the FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual ("Importing and
Exporting I/Q Data").
Note: Storing large amounts of I/Q data (several Gigabytes) can exceed the available
(internal) storage space on the FSW. In this case, it can be necessary to use an exter-
nal storage medium.
Note: Secure user mode.
In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile
memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached" error can occur
although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory
device.
For details, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode",
on page 41.
For details, see "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode" in the "Data Manage-
ment" section of the FSW base unit user manual.

File Type ← I/Q Export ← Export

The I/Q data file can be stored in one of the following supported formats:
● .iq.tar
● .iqw
● .csv
● .mat
● .aid
Note: Not all applications support all formats.
Remote command:
The file type is determined by the file extension of the file name parameter. If no file
extension is provided, the file type is assumed to be .iq.tar. For .mat files, Matlab®
v4 is assumed.

File Explorer ← I/Q Export ← Export

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 695

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

10.5 Creating screenshots of current measurement results

and settings
To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently per-
formed measurement, you can create a screenshot of the current display. Screenshots
can either be printed or stored to a file.
● Print and screenshot settings................................................................................696
● How to store or print screenshots of the display................................................... 707
● Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file.......................... 710

10.5.1 Print and screenshot settings

Access: "Print" icon in the toolbar

For step-by-step instructions, see Section 10.5.2, "How to store or print screenshots of
the display", on page 707.
Remote commands for these settings are described in Section 13.9.4, "Storing or print-
ing screenshots", on page 1366.

To print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately, with-
out switching to the "Print" menu, use the "SnapShot" icon in the toolbar.

● Print content settings.............................................................................................696

● Print preview functions.......................................................................................... 699
● Printer settings...................................................................................................... 701
● Page setup............................................................................................................704
● Print color settings.................................................................................................706

10.5.1.1 Print content settings

Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Content" tab

The content settings determine which data is included in the printout.
Note that some content settings are independent of the selected printing device, others
are printing device-specific.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 696

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Print Screenshot..........................................................................................................697
Print Multiple Windows................................................................................................698
Comment.....................................................................................................................698
Print Logo....................................................................................................................698
Print Page Count.........................................................................................................698
Select Device 1/2........................................................................................................ 698
Print Dialog..................................................................................................................699
Print Date and Time.................................................................................................... 699

Print Screenshot
Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel (or
"MultiView"): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the
channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page. Displayed items belonging to
the software user interface (e.g. softkeys) are not included. The position and size of the
elements in the printout is identical to the display.
This setting is independent of the printing device.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 697

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Remote command:
HCOPy:CONTent on page 1367

Print Multiple Windows

Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the
current channel (or "MultiView") are available for selection. How many windows are
printed on a single page of the printout is user-definable (see "Windows Per Page"
on page 706).
This option is only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see "Destina-
tion" on page 703). If the Destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard
for the selected printing device, it is automatically changed to be a PDF file.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CONTent on page 1367
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:STATe on page 1375
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:CHANnel:STATe on page 1374

Comment
Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display. Maximum
120 characters are allowed. Up to 60 characters fit in one line. In the first line, a man-
ual line-feed can be forced at any point by entering "@".
The comment is printed in the top left corner of each printout page. If a comment
should not be printed, it must be deleted.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Tip: The current date and time can be inserted automatically, see "Print Date and
Time" on page 699.
Remote command:
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TEXT on page 1372

Print Logo
Activates/deactivates the printout of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper
right corner.
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Remote command:
DISPlay:LOGO on page 1367

Print Page Count

Includes the page number for printouts consisting of multiple windows ("Print Multiple
Windows" on page 698).
This setting is independent of the printing device.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:COUNt:STATe on page 1372

Select Device 1/2

Selects the printing device to be configured.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 698

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "SnapShot" function, the selected printing
device and its settings determine the behavior of the FSW.

Print Dialog
Includes any currently displayed dialog in the screenshot printout.
This setting is (printing) device-specific and only available if Print Screenshot is
selected.

Print Date and Time

Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout.
This setting is (printing) device-specific.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TDSTamp:STATe on page 1376

10.5.1.2 Print preview functions

Access: "Print"
The "Print Preview" of the printout according to the current configuration is available in
all "Print Settings" dialog tabs.
The preview display (not the functions) is device-specific (see "Select Device 1/2"
on page 698).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 699

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Zoom In / Zoom Out.................................................................................................... 700

Fit Page.......................................................................................................................701
Zoom 1:1..................................................................................................................... 701
Page Up / Page Down.................................................................................................701
Print.............................................................................................................................701

Zoom In / Zoom Out

Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the
zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 700

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Fit Page
Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large
as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the
preview, not the printout itself.

Zoom 1:1
Displays the printout in its original size, as it will be printed.

Page Up / Page Down

Depending on the selected contents (see Section 10.5.1.1, "Print content settings",
on page 696), the printout can consist of multiple pages. Use these functions to scroll
within the preview to see the individual pages.

Print
Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file (see Section 10.5.1.1,
"Print content settings", on page 696).
Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on
the selected printing device and the printing device settings (see Section 10.5.1.3,
"Printer settings", on page 701).
If the output is stored to a file, a file selection dialog box is opened to select the file-
name and location. The default path is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER.
Remote command:
HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 1372
HCOPy[:IMMediate]:NEXT on page 1372

10.5.1.3 Printer settings

Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Printer" tab

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 701

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Printer settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ-
ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura-
tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.

Select Device 1/2........................................................................................................ 702

Destination.................................................................................................................. 703
└ Destination: File............................................................................................ 703
└ Destination: Clipboard...................................................................................703
└ Destination: Printer....................................................................................... 703
Suppress File Name Dialog........................................................................................ 703
Printer Name............................................................................................................... 703
Print to file................................................................................................................... 704
Install Printer............................................................................................................... 704

Select Device 1/2

Selects the printing device to be configured.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 702

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "SnapShot" function, the selected printing
device and its settings determine the behavior of the FSW.

Destination
Defines the medium to which the printout is output.

Destination: File ← Destination

Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of
storage, or a default name is used (see Suppress File Name Dialog).
Multiple windows can only be printed to a file in PDF format. If you select an image file
format, the content setting is automatically set to Print Screenshot. Page settings are
not available for image files; however, you can configure the colors used for the
screenshot (see Section 10.5.1.5, "Print color settings", on page 706).
Remote command:
To save as a file:
HCOPy:DESTination<di> 'MMEM'
To save as a file in the specified format:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 1371

Destination: Clipboard ← Destination

Copies the printout to the clipboard. Since only single pages can be copied, only
screenshots can be copied to this destination, not multiple windows (see Sec-
tion 10.5.1.1, "Print content settings", on page 696). Page settings are not available;
however, you can configure the colors used for the screenshot (see Section 10.5.1.5,
"Print color settings", on page 706).
If you select the clipboard as the printing destination, the content setting is automati-
cally set to Print Screenshot.
Remote command:
HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:CLIPboard'

Destination: Printer ← Destination

Sends the printout to the printer selected from the Printer Name list.
Remote command:
HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'

Suppress File Name Dialog

If the Destination is a file, the file selection dialog box is not displayed. Instead, the
default storage location and filename are used.
(C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FSW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).

Printer Name
Defines the printer to print to if a printer is selected as the Destination.
Any printers detected in the network are listed for selection.
Tip: the printout can also be stored in a print file using the selected printer driver, see
"Print to file" on page 704.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 703

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT] on page 1376
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt on page 1376
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect<di> on page 1377

Print to file
If a printer is selected as the Destination, use this option to store the data in a .prn file
using the selected printer driver.
Remote command:
To enable: HCOP:DEST1 'MMEM'
To disable: HCOP:DEST1 'SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter'

Install Printer
This softkey opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer. All print-
ers that are already installed are displayed.
Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer.
For further information, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation.

10.5.1.4 Page setup

Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Page Setup" tab

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 704

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Page settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ-
ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura-
tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.

Page settings are only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file (see "Desti-
nation" on page 703).
Select Device 1/2........................................................................................................ 705
Orientation...................................................................................................................706
Windows Per Page......................................................................................................706
Scaling........................................................................................................................ 706
Margins....................................................................................................................... 706

Select Device 1/2

Selects the printing device to be configured.
Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one
for storage to a file. When you execute the "SnapShot" function, the selected printing
device and its settings determine the behavior of the FSW.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 705

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

Orientation
Selects the page orientation of the printout: portrait or landscape.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation on page 1374

Windows Per Page

Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout. This setting
is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active (see Section 10.5.1.1, "Print content
settings", on page 696).
If more than one window is printed on one page, each window is printed in equal size.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:COUNt on page 1375

Scaling
Determines the scaling of the windows in the printout if Print Multiple Windows is active
(see Section 10.5.1.1, "Print content settings", on page 696).
If more than one window is printed on one page (see Windows Per Page), each win-
dow is printed in equal size.
"Maintain Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the
aspect ratio" aspect ratio of the original display.
"Size to fit" Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally, not regarding the
aspect ratio of the original display.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow:SCALe on page 1375

Margins
Defines margins for the printout page on which no elements are printed. The margins
are defined according to the selected unit.
Remote command:
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom on page 1373
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT on page 1373
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt on page 1373
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP on page 1373
HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:UNIT on page 1374

10.5.1.5 Print color settings

Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Color" tab

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 706

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

The settings provided here are identical to those in the "Print Colors" section of the
"Display" > "Theme + Color" dialog box.
See "Print Colors" on page 743.
See the FSW User Manual.

10.5.2 How to store or print screenshots of the display

The measurement results displayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file
very easily.
Two different scenarios can be configured in parallel, assigned to different printing
devices. You can then perform one or the other simply by selecting the corresponding
printing device and the "Print" function.

For a programming example, see Section 13.9.7, "Examples: managing data",

on page 1390.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 707

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

To start printing or storing results to a file

► If the FSW has already been set up according to your current requirements, simply
select the "Print immediate" on the toolbar.
The current measurement display is printed or stored to a file, as configured.

To print a screenshot
This configuration assumes a printer has already been installed. To install a new
printer, use the Install Printer function (common Microsoft Windows procedure).
1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to config-
ure.
(Note: Some settings are independent of the printing-device.)

3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to
be included in the printout.
a) Select "Print Screenshot" to include all elements displayed on the screen in a
single-page printout.
b) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of the printout.
c) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the print-
out.
d) Optionally, activate "Print Dialog" to include any dialog boxes currently dis-
played on the screen in the printout. This is useful, for example, to document
the used settings for a particular result.
e) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.

4. In the "Printer" tab, select "Printer" as the "Destination".

5. Select the "Printer Name" to print to from the list of installed printers.

6. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page.
a) Select the page orientation.
b) Define the page margins.
c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.

7. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors.
The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
For a printout that reflects exactly what you see on the screen, select "Screen
Colors (Screenshot)".
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.

8. Select "Print" to execute the print function.

The screenshot is printed on the printer as configured.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 708

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

9. To print another screenshot using the same configuration any other time, simply
press the "SnapShot" icon on the toolbar.
If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to
print another screenshot:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device.
c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.

To store a printout containing multiple windows

1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to define which printing device you want to config-
ure.

3. In the "Content" tab, define the elements of the screen and additional information to
be included in the printout.
a) Select "Print Selected Windows" to include the selected windows in the print-
out, possibly on multiple pages.
b) Select the result displays in the currently selected channel to be included in the
printout.
Tip: Select the "MultiView" before configuring the printout to include result dis-
plays from any active channel.
c) Optionally, add a comment to be printed at the top of each page of the printout.
d) Optionally, activate the date and time or the logo so they are added to the print-
out pages.

4. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included.
a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page
Down".
b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are
visible.

5. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination".

6. Select the file format from the selection list.

7. By default, you define the filename individually for each print operation. To avoid
having the "File Selection" dialog box being displayed for each print operation,
select "Suppress File Name Dialog". In this case, the previously used or default
storage location and filename are used.
(C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FSW_ScreenShot_<date and time>).

8. In the "Page Setup" tab, configure the layout of the printout page.
a) Select the page orientation.
b) Define the page margins.
c) Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all relevant elements of the display are
visible.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 709

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

9. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout.
a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors.
The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
For a printout that reflects the colors you see on the screen, but with a white
background, select "Screen Colors (Print)".
b) Check the "Print Preview" to find out if the setting is appropriate.

10. Select "Print" to execute the print function.

11. If you did not select the option to suppress the dialog, enter a filename in the file
selection dialog box.
The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.

12. To store another file using the same configuration any other time, simply select the
"Print immediate" icon on the toolbar.
If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to
store another file:
a) Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.
b) Select "Device 1" or "Device 2" to select the configured printing device.
c) Select "Print" to execute the print function.

10.5.3 Example for storing multiple measurement results to a PDF file

The following example describes the procedure to store results from measurements in
the Spectrum application and the I/Q Analyzer to a single PDF file.

1. Configure and perform the measurements in the Spectrum application and I/Q
Analyzer as required. Configure at least the following result displays:
● Frequency Sweep, Spectrogram (Spectrum)
● Magnitude, Spectrum (I/Q Analyzer)

2. Switch to the "MultiView" tab to display an overview of the result displays in all
active channels.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 710

FSW Data management
Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings

3. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar.

The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed.

4. Select "Device 1" to configure the settings for this printing device.

5. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows".

6. Select the result displays listed in step 1.

7. Enter the comment Measurement Test Report to be inserted at the top of each
page.

8. Select "Print Page Count" and "Print Date and Time".

9. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows".

10. In the "Printer" tab, select "File" as the "Destination".

11. Select "PDF" from the file format selection list.

12. Select "Suppress File Name Dialog".

13. In the "Page Setup" tab, select "Landscape" as the "Orientation".

14. Select "Windows Per Page": 1 to print a single result display on each page.

15. Select the "Scaling" option "Size to fit" to maximize the result display on each page.

16. In the "Color" tab, select "Screen Colors (Print)" for a printout that reflects the col-
ors you see on the screen, but with a white background.

17. Check the "Print Preview" to make sure all required result displays are included
and all relevant data elements are visible.
a) Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using "Page Up" and "Page
Down".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 711

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are
visible.

18. Select "Print" to execute the print function.

The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured.

10.6 Working with test reports

Access: Toolbar:

The FSW features a test report generator. A test report is a document that summarizes
the results and configuration of measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 712

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Figure 10-1: Example of a test report

A test report is made up of one or more datasets. Each dataset contains the results
and configuration of one measurement.
Test reports are based on a general template, and are completed with user-defined,
measurement-specific contents. You can create multiple templates for different applica-
tions.

Currently, test reports are only supported in the Spectrum application, for all measure-
ment types.
Test reports require the R&S FSW-K54 option to be installed on the FSW.

● Designing a test report template........................................................................... 713

● Managing templates..............................................................................................722
● Creating datasets..................................................................................................723
● Creating a test report............................................................................................ 724
● How to create a test report....................................................................................726

10.6.1 Designing a test report template

Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"

The FSW allows you to create multiple test report templates. Thus, you can document
measurement tasks that require different information or a different layout in the test
report.
The properties available in the "Templates" tab define the information that each dataset
in the test report will contain. Templates contain general contents and application-spe-
cific contents.
The test report consists of different types of information, some of which are displayed
on each page, others per measurement (subreport):

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 713

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

1
2
3

Figure 10-2: Types of information in the test report

1 = Logo (each page)

2 = Global information (each page)
3 = Measurement-specific information (per subreport)
4 = General instrument settings (per subreport)
5 = Measurement-specific settings (per subreport)
6 = Measurement results (per subreport)
7 = Date and page count (each page)

To see the result of your template configuration, use the Show Preview function.

● General contents...................................................................................................715
● Title page.............................................................................................................. 716
● Measurement information..................................................................................... 719
● Application-specific contents.................................................................................721

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 714

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

10.6.1.1 General contents

Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "General"
The "General" area defines general properties of the report document.

Page format.................................................................................................................715
File type.......................................................................................................................715
Use Screen Colors...................................................................................................... 715
Date.............................................................................................................................716
Page Count................................................................................................................. 716
Report Path................................................................................................................. 716
└ Suppress Dialog............................................................................................716
Raw Data Storage.......................................................................................................716

Page format
Selects the format of the document (A4 or "Letter" format).
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGesize on page 1388

File type
Selects the file type (*.pdf or *.doc).
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 1371

Use Screen Colors

Enables or disables the use of printer-friendly color schemes (as opposed to the colors
used on the screen).
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:PCOLors:STATe on page 1388

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 715

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Date
Adds the current date to each page of the report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:TDSTamp:STATe on page 1388

Page Count
Adds page numbers to each page of the report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:PAGecount:STATe on page 1387

Report Path
Defines the location where the report file is saved.
Enter the path in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." button.
If you omit the path, the report is saved in the default directory (C:\R_S\INSTR\USER).
Note: This path defines the location of the actual test report. Templates are stored in a
different location (see "Save" on page 723).
Remote command:
MMEMory:NAME on page 1356

Suppress Dialog ← Report Path

By default, when you store a report, a dialog is displayed to define the file name.
If the dialog is suppressed, reports are saved to the Report Path with a generic name
without further interaction. The generic name is:
TestReport-<YYYY>-<MM>-<DD>-<hh>-<mm>-<ss>[_<nnn>]
Where <nnn> is a consecutive number, added if multiple files are created with the
same name.

Raw Data Storage

Defines the location where the measurement data sets for the report are stored until
the report is created.
Enter the path and filename in the input field, or select the directory using the "..." but-
ton.
Remote command:
MMEMory:RAW on page 1390

10.6.1.2 Title page

Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "Title Page"
You can define an optional title page for the test report with a title and a short descrip-
tion of the report contents. It is only included in the report if you enable it.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 716

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 717

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Figure 10-3: Example of a test report title page

State: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe:STATe on page 1389

Title: HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe on page 1389
Abstract: HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription on page 1381

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 718

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

10.6.1.3 Measurement information

Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates" > "General" > "▽" > "Measurement Informa-
tion"
The "Measurement Information" area allows you to add user-defined information on the
measurement to the report.

You can add up to six lines to the report, plus one picture, for example a company logo.
The first line is a heading. Each of the following five lines consists of a title and a value,
which is displayed next to the title. The information can be global, that is: valid for the
entire report, or specific to an individual measurement. In this case, you define the
actual value when you store the measurement data.

Figure 10-4: Dialog box for measurement information when appending data to a report

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 719

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Figure 10-5: Example for measurement-specific information in a test report

State............................................................................................................................720
Title..............................................................................................................................720
Value........................................................................................................................... 720
Visibility....................................................................................................................... 720
Logo............................................................................................................................ 721

State
Enables or disables the user-defined measurement information on the test report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:STATe on page 1383

Title
Defines a title for the type of information, for example "Test equipment" for the name of
the device under test. Default titles are provided, but you can change and customize
each title, except for the initial "heading". A maximum of 17 characters are available.
For data that is specific to an individual measurement, this title is used in the dialog
box asking you to provide the information when you append the measurement results
to the report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TITLe on page 1383

Value
Defines the actual text for the content defined by the title. A maximum of 25 characters
are available.
For data that is specific to an individual measurement, you are asked to provide this
information when you append the measurement results to the report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:TEXT on page 1382

Visibility
Determines the validity of the content and thus when the contents are configured and
where the line is displayed in the report.
"Never" (Default): Contents are ignored.
"Global" Contents are valid globally for the entire report. They are configured
in the template and included on each page.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 720

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

"Subreport" Contents are valid for an individual measurement only. They are con-
figured when you append the measurement results to the report, and
included once for each subreport (measurement).
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<li>:CONTrol on page 1381
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol on page 1384

Logo
Includes a picture or logo in the report. Enter the path and filename in the input field, or
select the directory using the "..." button.
The following formats are supported:
● .bmp
● .jpg
● .png
● .gif
● .emf
● .wmf
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO on page 1384

10.6.1.4 Application-specific contents

For each application, you can select which graphical results, numerical results, or infor-
mation on the measurement setup to include in the report. Information that is to be
included in the test report is represented by a blue button. Information not included is
represented by a gray button. Some information is only included if it is also displayed
for the measurement, indicated by an asterisk (*).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 721

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

For the FSW, test reports are only available in Spectrum mode, and only if the
R&S FSW-K54 is installed.

For details on the provided information, see:

● "Diagram" on page 537
● "Spectrogram" on page 538
● "Marker Table" on page 537
● "Marker Peak List" on page 538
● "Result Summary" on page 538
● Section 11.4, "Transducers", on page 756
● Section 6.13.4.3, "LISN control settings", on page 351
● Result list: a table that contains the trace values for each trace point
A maximum of 50001 measurement points per trace are written to the report. The
rest is dismissed.
If you have more measurement points, export the data to an ASCII file (see "Export
Trace to ASCII File" on page 654 ).
● Settings: basic instrument and measurement-specific settings (as indicated in the
channel bar)

Select All / Select None

Selects or deselects all items in the corresponding area:
● Diagrams
● Tables
● All items
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect on page 1385

10.6.2 Managing templates

Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"

Some general functions to manage test report templates are available on all "Tem-
plates" subtabs.

Template name............................................................................................................722
Save............................................................................................................................ 723
Load............................................................................................................................ 723
Default.........................................................................................................................723

Template name
Enter the path and filename of the template in the input field, or select the directory
using the "..." button.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 722

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

If you omit the path, the template is saved in the default directory (C:\R_S\INSTR
\USER).
Remote command:
Query available templates: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:CATalog?
on page 1386

Save
Saves the current test report configuration as a template to the specified Template
name.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE on page 1387

Load
Restores the selected test report configuration.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:LOAD on page 1386

Default
Restores the default template configuration.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:DEFault on page 1381

10.6.3 Creating datasets

Access: Toolbar:
Before you can print a test report, you have to create report data.
Test report data is organized in datasets. Each dataset contains the information for one
measurement. A dataset can contain several subsets for different kinds of data for a
single measurement, for example settings and a result summary.
You create new datasets manually after a measurement.
Datasets are stored in the directory specified in "Raw Data Storage" on page 716.
After creating a dataset, you can view the details in the "Preview" dialog box (see
"Show Preview" on page 726).
Report New............................................................................................................. 723
Report Append........................................................................................................724

Report New
Deletes all currently stored datasets and creates a new one. Note that the dataset is
only written to an actual report when you select Save.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:NEW on page 1387

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 723

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Report Append
Adds a new dataset to the existing ones for the next test report. If measurement-spe-
cific data is configured in the report template, a dialog box prompts you to provide the
information for the appended dataset. Note that the dataset is only written to an actual
report when you select Save.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:APPend on page 1381

10.6.4 Creating a test report

Access: > "Report menu" > "Preview"

Once you have created datasets for a report, you can create and save the actual test
report. Optionally, you can select which of the saved datasets to include. Before you
save the test report to a file, you can check a preview of the current configuration and
contents.

File type.......................................................................................................................724
Save............................................................................................................................ 725
Selecting items to include in the report....................................................................... 725
└ Remove All....................................................................................................725
Show Preview............................................................................................................. 726

File type
Selects the file type of the report (*.pdf or *.doc).
Remote command:
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 1371

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 724

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Save
Access: > "Report menu" > "Save"
Saves the test report with the selected items to the selected Report Path with the
selected File type. If the option Suppress Dialog is enabled, the report is saved to the
directory specified in the general contents area (see Report Path).
Tip: before saving the report, check the contents using the Show Preview function.
Remote command:
Print mode: HCOPy:MODE on page 1381
Report name and directory: MMEMory:NAME on page 1356
Print report: HCOPy[:IMMediate] on page 1372

Selecting items to include in the report

By default, all datasets and subsets stored for the test report are included (see Sec-
tion 10.6.3, "Creating datasets", on page 723). However, you can remove individual
datasets or subsets before creating the report.
Each dataset is indicated by the date and time it was stored. A dataset can contain
subsets for individual results.

To delete an item, select the "X" next to the item.

Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove on page 1389

Remove All ← Selecting items to include in the report

Deletes all items currently stored for the test report.
Remote command:
HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:ALL on page 1389

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 725

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

Show Preview
If enabled, a preview of the current test report configuration and contents is displayed.
Note that it can take a short time until the preview has been created.
The preview area provides typical viewing functions as in common PDF viewers.

10.6.5 How to create a test report

Using a test report you can summarize the results and configuration of measurements
in a document directly from the Spectrum application.

To configure a test report template

1. Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"

2. In the "General" area, define the general report settings, including:

● Page format
● File type
● Color scheme (as on screen or print-optimized)
● Include date
● Include page numbers
● Storage path for the final report and temporary data

3. Optionally, in the "Title Page" area, configure a separate title page with a title and
description of the report.

4. Optionally, in the "Measurement Information" area, configure further information on

the measurement to be included in the report.
a) Define a label ("Title").
b) Enter the text for the label ("Value").
c) Select whether the text is to appear on each page ("Global"), or only once per
measurement ("Subreport").
d) Upload a picture, e.g. a logo.

5. Select the "Spectrum" tab to configure application-specific contents.

6. Select the diagrams and tables to include in the report.

7. If you want to create multiple test report configurations, save the configuration as a
template.
a) Enter a name for the test report template.
b) Select "Save" to save the template.

To create an initial test report

1. Access: > "Report menu" > "Templates"

2. If you want to use one of multiple predefined test report configurations, load the
required template.
a) Select the "..." button at the bottom of the "Templates" tab to select the precon-
figured template for your report.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 726

FSW Data management
Working with test reports

b) Select "Load".
The preconfigured report template is loaded to the dialog box.

3. Configure and perform your measurement as usual.

4. When the measurement is finished, save the results for your report:
From the toolbar, select > "Report new" to delete any existing report data and
start a new report.

5. Perform further measurements and save the results as required.

From the toolbar, select "Report Append".

6. When you are ready to create the report, from the toolbar, select > "Report
menu" > "Preview".

7. Optionally, remove any datasets you do not want to include in the report, for exam-
ple due to false measurement settings.
In the "Select items to include in the report" area, select the "X" to remove an item.

8. Optionally, use the browser functions to view the report preview in more detail.

9. Select "Save".
A file selection dialog box is displayed, unless you enabled the "Suppress dialog"
option in the general template settings.

10. Select the file name and path for the report.

11. Select "OK".

The test report is saved to the selected location.

To create subsequent test reports

1. Configure and perform your measurement as usual.

2. When the measurement is finished, save the results for your report:
From the toolbar, select "Report New".

3. Perform further measurements and save the results as required.

From the toolbar, select "Report Append".

4. When you are ready to create the report, from the toolbar, select > "Report
menu" > "Save".
A file selection dialog box is displayed, unless you enabled the "Suppress dialog"
option in the general template settings.

5. Select the file name and path for the report.

6. Select "OK".
The test report is saved to the selected location.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 727

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

11 General instrument setup

Access: [SETUP]
Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected oper-
ating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially
when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or require-
ments and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when neces-
sary. Some special functions are provided for service and basic system configuration.

Network and Remote Settings, Display Settings

Settings for network and remote operation are described in Section 12, "Network oper-
ation and remote control", on page 819.
Display settings are described in Section 11.2.1, "Display settings", on page 736.

● Alignment.............................................................................................................. 728
● Display settings..................................................................................................... 736
● Application starter................................................................................................. 751
● Transducers.......................................................................................................... 756
● Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)............................................... 769
● Reference frequency settings............................................................................... 781
● System configuration settings............................................................................... 785
● Service functions...................................................................................................798
● Synchronizing measurement channel configuration............................................. 805

11.1 Alignment

11.1.1 Basics on alignment

When you put the instrument into operation for the first time or when strong tempera-
ture changes occur, align the data to a reference source (see "Temperature check"
on page 729).
The firmware determines the correction data and characteristics required for the align-
ment. It compares the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the
high-precision calibration signal source at 64 MHz.
Basic operation of the FSW can be affected before or after a self-alignment in the fol-
lowing ways:
● Depending on the installation settings, an automatic self-alignment is performed
directly after installation, and a dialog is displayed indicating how much warm-up
time is still required before self-alignment can be performed.
● During instrument start, the firmware checks whether the installed hardware is sup-
ported. If not, an error message is displayed ("Wrong Firmware Version") and you

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 728

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-align-
ment fails.
● When you start self-alignment, a self-test is automatically performed first.
For details on the self-test, see Section 11.8.2, "Self-test settings and results",
on page 800.
● By default, a reminder is shown in the status bar of the instrument 30 days after the
last self-alignment took place. You can enable or disable the reminder, and change
the timing for it.
Tip: To check for a self-alignment reminder message in the status history, use the
SYStem:ERRor:EXTended? command and search for messages that start with
Self alignment older than. In addition, you can check bit 12 in the
STATus:OPERation register.
● A reminder is shown in the status bar of the instrument if the temperature changes
by more than 10 degrees compared to the last self-alignment took place.
Tip: To check if the temperature has changed, check bit 0 in the
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register.
● If you start a self-alignment remotely and then select "Local" while the alignment is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the
alignment is completed.
● During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running
a self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measure-
ment results.

Alignment results
The alignment results are displayed and contain the following information:
● Date and time of last correction data record
● Overall results of correction data record
● List of performed alignment steps
The results are classified as follows:

PASSED Calibration successful without any restrictions

CHECK Deviation of correction value larger than expected, correction could however be per-
formed

FAILED Deviations of correction value too large, no correction was possible. The found cor-
rection data is not applicable.

The results are available until the next self-alignment process is started or the instru-
ment is switched off.

Temperature check
During self-alignment, the instrument's frontend temperature is measured (if activated,
only after the instrument has warmed up completely, see "Await Warm-Up Operation
before Self Alignment" on page 733). This temperature is used as a reference for a
continuous temperature check during operation. If the current temperature deviates
from the stored self-alignment temperature by a certain degree, a warning is displayed

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 729

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

in the status bar. The warning indicates the resulting deviation in the measured power
levels. A status bit in the STATUs:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register indicates a
possible deviation. The current temperature of the frontend can be queried using a
remote command (see SOURce<si>:TEMPerature:FRONtend on page 1406).

Touchscreen alignment
When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially calibrated. However, to ensure
that the touchscreen responds to the finger contact correctly, a touchscreen alignment
is required.
Alignment of the touchscreen is useful:
● At first use
● After an image update or after exchanging a hard disk
● If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor-
rect response
● If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on
the screen
● If another person operates the instrument

11.1.2 Alignment settings

Access: [Setup] > "Alignment"

Both the instrument and the touchscreen can be aligned when necessary (see Sec-
tion 11.1.1, "Basics on alignment", on page 728).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 730

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

Automatic self-alignment
During installation of the FSW firmware, you can configure an automatic self-alignment
to be performed directly after installation. In addition, you can activate a preceding
warmup time before self-alignment, which is strongly recommended. If you do not acti-
vate this option, make sure the instrument has reached its operating temperature
before installing the firmware. Furthermore, you can force the instrument to shut down
after self-alignment. Note, however, that you cannot switch the instrument back on
remotely afterwards.

The additional settings for self-alignment can also be activated or deactivated during
operation in the "Alignment" settings dialog (see Await Warm-Up Operation before Self
Alignment and Shut down Device after Self Alignment.)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 731

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

Self-alignment results in secure user mode

Be sure to store self-alignment results before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Sec-
tion 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.
In secure user mode, the results are not stored permanently. Thus, if the currently
stored self-alignment results are not suitable, you must perform a self-alignment each
time you switch on the FSW.

Start Self Alignment.................................................................................................... 732

Abort Self Alignment................................................................................................... 733
Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment....................................................... 733
Schedule..................................................................................................................... 733
Shut down Device after Self Alignment.......................................................................733
Reuse Old Alignment Data..........................................................................................734
Start Preselector Centering.........................................................................................734
Align all........................................................................................................................734
Starting Touch Screen Alignment................................................................................734
Regular Reminder....................................................................................................... 734
Alignment Results:...................................................................................................... 735

Start Self Alignment

Starts recording correction data for the instrument. If the correction data acquisition
fails or if the correction values are deactivated, a corresponding message is displayed
in the status field.
For details, see Section 11.1.1, "Basics on alignment", on page 728.
Note:
A running Sequencer operation is aborted when you start a self-alignment.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 732

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

During self-alignment, do not connect a signal to the RF input connector. Running a

self-alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement
results.
Remote command:
*CAL? on page 896, see also CALibration[:ALL]? on page 1398

Abort Self Alignment

As long as the self-alignment data is being collected, the procedure can be canceled
using "Abort Self Alignment".
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select "Local" while the alignment is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the align-
ment is completed. In this case, you cannot abort a self-alignment manually.

Await Warm-Up Operation before Self Alignment

Displays a message indicating the remaining warmup time required before self-align-
ment is performed. After the warmup operation has completed, self-alignment is star-
ted automatically.
Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:WARMup on page 1401

Schedule
If enabled, a self-alignment is performed regularly at specific days and time.

Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:SCHedule on page 1400
CALibration:DUE:DAYS on page 1399
CALibration:DUE:TIME on page 1401

Shut down Device after Self Alignment

If activated, the FSW is automatically shut down after self-alignment is completed.
Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control.
Remote command:
CALibration:DUE:SHUTdown on page 1401

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 733

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

Reuse Old Alignment Data

If data from a previous self-alignment is available on the instrument, it can be reused
even though the instrument claims the instrument is uncalibrated. This is useful, for
example, after activating a software option or updating the firmware to a beta version.
After rebooting the instrument, you must re-activate this function if you still want to
reuse the old alignment data.
Note, however, that re-using old alignment data can lead to inaccurate measure-
ment results, or even cause the FSW firmware to fail altogether. For measure-
ments using old alignment data, an [OLD CAL] message is indicated in the status bar
(instead of [UNCAL], which indicates that a new self-alignment is actually required.)
To measure with the accuracy specified in the specifications document, always
perform a self-alignment when the instrument calls for it.

Start Preselector Centering

Due to changes in temperature, the YIG-preselector frequency may become slightly
offset. This function re-aligns the preselector quickly, without requiring a full self-align-
ment of the FSW. For FSW85 models, the YIG2 filter is also re-aligned.
This function is only available for FSW models 1331.5003Kxx, and only if a YIG-prese-
lector is available.
Remote command:
CALibration:PRESelection on page 1402

Align all
Performs an extended self-alignment as performed in the factory. Any previous self-
alignment results are deleted.
Note that this process takes longer than the common self-alignment.
Remote command:
CALibration[:ALL] ACLear

Starting Touch Screen Alignment

Starts the touchscreen alignment.
Tap the 4 markers on the screen as you are asked to do. The touchscreen is aligned
according to the executed pointing operations.

Regular Reminder
Schedules a regular reminder for self-alignment. By default, a reminder is shown in the
status bar of the instrument 30 days after the last self-alignment took place.
Enable or disable the reminder as required.
If enabled, define the number of days after the last self-alignment that the reminder
appears.
Remote command:
To query whether a reminder is being displayed (self-alignment overdue):
CALibration:INFO:OLD? on page 1402

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 734

FSW General instrument setup
Alignment

Alignment Results:
Information on whether the alignment was performed successfully and on the applied
correction data is displayed. The results are available until the next self-alignment
process is started or the instrument is switched off.
Remote command:
CALibration:RESult? on page 1403

11.1.3 How to perform a self-test

You do not have to repeat the self-test every time you switch on the instrument. It is
only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.

Operating temperature
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature.
For details, refer to the specifications document.

1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Service".

3. Select "Selftest".
Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully, a message is dis-
played.

11.1.4 How to align the instrument

Operating temperature
Before performing this alignment, make sure that the instrument has reached its oper-
ating temperature.
For details, refer to the specifications document.

To perform a self-alignment
Make sure no signal is connected to the RF input connector. Running a self-alignment
with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results.
1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Alignment".

3. Select "Start Self Alignment".

4. To abort the self-alignment process, select "Abort Self Alignment".

Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully, a message
is displayed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 735

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

To display the alignment results again later

► Select [SETUP] > "Alignment".

11.1.5 How to align the touchscreen

To align the touchscreen

1. Press [Setup].

2. Select "Alignment".

3. Select "Touch Screen Alignment".

A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen.

4. Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking.

Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners.

11.2 Display settings

11.2.1 Display settings

Access: [Setup] > "Display"

Some general display settings are available regardless of the current application or
operating mode. For information on optimizing your display for measurement results,
see Section 8.1, "Result display configuration", on page 536.
● General display settings........................................................................................736
● Displayed items.....................................................................................................738
● Display theme and colors......................................................................................741
● External monitor settings.......................................................................................746
● Touch(screen) settings.......................................................................................... 747

11.2.1.1 General display settings

Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "General"

This section includes general screen display behavior and date and time display.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 736

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen............................................................. 737

Display Update Rate................................................................................................... 737
Set Date and Time...................................................................................................... 737
Date and Time Format................................................................................................ 738

Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen

The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used
for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action.
To reactivate the touchscreen, simply press [Setup] on the front panel. The "Display"
dialog box is opened automatically and the "Touch Screen" option is set to "On".
"Touch On" Touchscreen function is active for the entire screen.
"Touch Off" Touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen.
"Touch Diagram Off"
Touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen, but
active for the surrounding softkeys, toolbars and menus.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TOUChscreen[:STATe] on page 1432

Display Update Rate

By default, a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis-
play. However, when performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during
remote control), it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen dis-
play is updated.

Set Date and Time

Sets the current date and time for the internal real-time clock on the instrument. This
function uses the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box. Setting
the clock requires administrator rights.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 737

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Select "Set Date and Time" in the "Display" dialog box, or select the date and time dis-
play in the status bar to open the Windows dialog box.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DATE on page 1433
SYSTem:TIME on page 1433

Date and Time Format

Switches the time and date display on the screen between US, ISO and German (DE)
format.
"DE" dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
"US" mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss
12 hour format.
"ISO" yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
24 hour format.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat on page 1432

11.2.1.2 Displayed items

Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Displayed Items"

Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required, for exam-
ple to enlarge the display area for the measurement results.

Toolbar........................................................................................................................ 739
Status Bar................................................................................................................... 739
Softkey Bar..................................................................................................................739
Channel Bar................................................................................................................ 739
Diagram Footer (Annotation).......................................................................................739
Date and Time.............................................................................................................739
Front Panel..................................................................................................................740
Mini Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 740

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 738

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Toolbar
The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the
screen. Some functions, such as zooming, finding help, printing screenshots or storing
and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar.
Remote command:
DISPlay:TBAR[:STATe] on page 1431

Status Bar
The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global instrument settings, the instru-
ment status and any irregularities during measurement or display.
Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the status reg-
istry via remote commands, see Section 13.11, "Using the status register",
on page 1483.
We recommend displaying the status bar at all times. If you hide the status bar, you
can miss important error messages.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SBAR[:STATe] on page 1431

Softkey Bar
Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software. Thus, more functions can be provi-
ded than can be accessed directly via the function keys on the device.
The functions provided by the softkeys are often also available via dialog boxes. How-
ever, some functions are not accessible at all without the softkey bar.
Note: The softkey bar is hidden while the SmartGrid is displayed and restored auto-
matically when the SmartGrid is closed.
Remote command:
DISPlay:SKEYs[:STATe] on page 1431

Channel Bar
The channel bar provides information on firmware and measurement settings for a
specific channel.
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:CBAR on page 1430

Diagram Footer (Annotation)

The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x-axis of the dia-
gram display, such as:
● The current center frequency and span settings
● The displayed span per division
● The number of sweep points
Remote command:
DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 1431

Date and Time

The date and time display can be switched off independently of the status bar.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 739

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

You can set the current date and time and configure the display format in the "General"
tab of the "Display" dialog box.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME on page 1432

Front Panel
The "Front Panel" display simulates the entire front panel of the device (except for the
external connectors) on the screen. Thus, you can interact with the FSW without the
keypad and keys on the front panel of the device. That is useful, for example, when
working with an external monitor or operating via remote control from a computer.

To hide or show the front panel temporarily, press [F6] on the external keyboard (if
available) or the remote computer.
For more information, see Section 11.2.3, "How to work with the soft front panels",
on page 748.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 1433

Mini Front Panel

If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in
the display area, a mini front panel is available. The mini version displays only the main
function keys in a separate window in the display area.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 740

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

For more information, see Section 11.2.3, "How to work with the soft front panels",
on page 748.
Note:
You can also show the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be aware
of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when you
are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe] on page 1433

11.2.1.3 Display theme and colors

Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Theme + Color"

You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 741

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

For step-by-step instructions see Section 11.2.2, "How to configure the colors for dis-
play and printing", on page 747.

Theme......................................................................................................................... 742
Screen Colors............................................................................................................. 742
Print Colors................................................................................................................. 743
Showing Print Colors on Display.................................................................................743
Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............................................................... 743
└ Selecting the Object......................................................................................744
└ Predefined Colors......................................................................................... 744
└ Preview......................................................................................................... 744
Defining User-specific Colors......................................................................................745
Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors............................................................ 745

Theme
The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen
objects.
The default theme is "IndustrialDark".
Remote command:
DISPlay:THEMe:SELect on page 1435

Screen Colors
Two different color sets are provided by the instrument, a third user-defined set can be
configured.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 742

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regard-
ing the screen from above or below. Default setting is "Default Colors 1".
If "User Defined Colors" is selected, a user-defined color set can be defined (see
"Defining User-specific Colors" on page 745).
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 1434

Print Colors
Defines the color settings used for printout.
In addition to the predefined settings, a user-defined color set can be configured (see
"Defining User-specific Colors" on page 745).
If "Show Print Colors on Display" is activated, the currently selected print colors are
displayed as a preview for your selection.

Gui setting Description Remote command

"Optimized Colors" Selects an optimized color setting for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF2

printout to improve the visibility of the colors
(default setting). Trace 1 is blue, trace 2
black, trace 3 green, and the markers are
turquoise. The background is always printed
in white and the grid in black.

"Screen Colors (Print)" Selects the current screen colors for the HCOP:CMAP:DEF1
printout. The background is always printed in
white and the grid in black.

"Screen Colors Selects the current screen colors without any HCOP:CMAP:DEF4
(Screenshot)" changes for a screenshot.

"User Defined Colors" Selects the user-defined color setting. HCOP:CMAP:DEF3

Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:DEFault<ci> on page 1368

Showing Print Colors on Display

Temporarily shows the currently selected print colors on the screen display. This func-
tion can be used as a preview for printing.

Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments

You can configure the colors used to display and print individual screen objects accord-
ing to your specific requirements.
The colors are configured in the (identical) "Screen Color Setup"/"Printer Color Setup"
dialog boxes.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 743

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Selecting the Object ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments

Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the
following objects:
● Background
● Grid
● Individual traces
● Display lines
● Limit lines and check results
● Markers and marker information
Remote command:
Each object is assigned to a specific suffix of the CMAP commands, see Sec-
tion 13.10.5.3, "CMAP suffix assignment", on page 1436.

Predefined Colors ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments

Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the
selected object.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 1369

Preview ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments

Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 744

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Defining User-specific Colors

In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user-specific
color to be used for the selected object.
When you select "Userdefined Colors...", the set of predefined colors is replaced by a
color palette and color configuration settings.

The color palette allows you to select the color directly. The color settings allow you to
define values for tint, saturation and brightness.
Remote command:
HCOPy:CMAP<it>:HSL on page 1369

Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors

In addition to the predefined color settings, a user-defined setting can be configured.
By default, the same settings as defined in "Default Colors 1" are used. They can then
be modified according to user-specific requirements (see "Modifying User-Defined
Color Assignments" on page 743).
The "Set to Default" function restores the original default settings for the user-defined
color set. You can select which of the three default settings are restored.
Remote command:
DISPlay:CMAP<it>:PDEFined on page 1435

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 745

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

11.2.1.4 External monitor settings

Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Configure Monitor"

You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the "DVI" or "display port" con-
nector on the instrument's rear panel.

Screen resolution and format

The touchscreen of the FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format. If you connect a monitor
or projector using a different format (e.g. 4:3), the calibration is not correct and the
screen does not react to your touch actions properly.
The touchscreen has a screen resolution of 1280x800 pixels. Usually, the display of
the external monitor is a duplicate of the instrument's monitor.
If you configure the external monitor to be used as the only display in the Windows
configuration dialog box ("Show only on 2"), the maximum screen resolution of the
monitor is used. In this case, you can maximize the FSW application window and see
even more details. You cannot change the monitor's screen resolution via the standard
Windows configuration dialog box.
However, you can restore the default instrument resolution (1280x800) on the monitor
using the instrument function "Setup" > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" > "Screen Res-
olution: Restore to default".

Setup...........................................................................................................................746
Screen Resolution: Restore to Default........................................................................746

Setup
Opens the standard Windows configuration dialog box to configure the used display
devices.

Screen Resolution: Restore to Default

The default screen resolution (1280 x 800) is restored in the Windows configuration
settings. This is useful, for instance, if the instrument was connected to a display
device and was adapted to different requirements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 746

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

11.2.1.5 Touch(screen) settings

Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Touch"

These options concern the behavior of the firmware for touch gestures on the screen.
Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset.

Level Lock................................................................................................................... 747

X-Lock......................................................................................................................... 747
Y-Lock......................................................................................................................... 747
Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram).......................................................747

Level Lock
If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is:
remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen.

X-Lock
If activated, the x-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.

Y-Lock
If activated, the y-axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges-
tures.

Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)

If you already performed a graphical zoom using the "Single Zoom" on page 545 or
"Multi-Zoom" on page 545 functions, this function automatically adapts the measure-
ment settings to maintain the currently zoomed display.

11.2.2 How to configure the colors for display and printing

You can configure the style and colors with which various screen objects are displayed
or printed.

To select a color set

1. Press [Setup] and select "Display".

2. Select the "Theme + Color" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 747

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

3. In the "Screen Colors" area, do one of the following:

● Select a predefined set of colors for screen display.
● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.

4. In the "Print Colors" area, do one of the following:

● Select a predefined set of colors for printing screenshots.
● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself.

5. Activate the "Show Print Colors on Display" option to see a preview of the print col-
ors.

To configure a user-defined color set

1. In the "Theme + Color" tab of the "Display" dialog box, select "User Defined Colors"
either for the screen or the print colors.

2. Select "Modify User Defined Colors".

The "Screen Color Setup" dialog box is opened.

3. From the "Selected Object:" list, select the object to which you want to assign a
color.

4. Do one of the following:

● Select a color from the "Predefined Colors".
● Select "Userdefined Colors ..." to define a different color.
The "Preview" area indicates the currently selected color.

5. To assign a user-specific color to the selected object, do one of the following:

● Select the color from the palette.
● Enter values for the "Tint:", "Saturation:", and "Brightness:".
Note: In the continuous color spectrum ("Tint:"), 0 % represents red and 100 %
represents blue.
● Enter an "ARGB:" value in hexadecimal format.

6. Select the next object to which you want to assign a color from the "Selected
Object:" list.

7. Repeat these steps until you have assigned a color to all objects you want to con-
figure.

8. Select "OK" to close the dialog box.

The colors are applied to the assigned objects.

11.2.3 How to work with the soft front panels

Basic operation with the soft front panels is identical to normal operation, except for the
following aspects:
● To activate a key, select the key on the touchscreen.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 748

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

● To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between
the keypad and the arrow keys:

Icon Function

Turn left

Enter

Turn right

Mini front panel

The mini front panel provides only the keys on the touchscreen, to operate the FSW
via an external monitor or remote desktop.

To display the soft front panel or mini front panel

1. Press [Setup] and select "Display".

2. Select the "Displayed Items" tab.

3. Select "Front Panel": "On" or "Mini Front Panel": "On".

To hide or show the front panel, press [F6] on the external keyboard (if available) or on
the remote computer.
To hide or show the "Mini Front Panel", double-click the title of the softkey menu. As an
alternative, press [ALT + m] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operat-
ing system!) on the external keyboard (if available) or on the remote computer.

To close the mini front panel

► Select the "Close" icon at the top of the panel.

11.2.4 Reference: Keyboard shortcuts for the mini front panel

The mini front panel provides an alternative way to access the functionality of the hard-
keys when you are operating the instrument remotely. You can access the keys either
using a mouse or using keyboard shortcuts on the remote computer. The follow table
provides an overview of the assigned keyboard shortcuts for a German keyboard lay-
out. Be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!

To hide or show the "Mini Front Panel", double-click the title of the softkey menu. As an
alternative, press [ALT + m].

Hardkey on instrument Keyboard shortcut

[Freq.] [Alt+Shift+J]

[Span] [Alt+Shift+K]

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 749

FSW General instrument setup
Display settings

Hardkey on instrument Keyboard shortcut

[Ampt./Scale] [Alt+Shift+C]

[Auto Set] [Alt+Shift+N]

[BW] [Alt+Shift+L]

[Sweep] [Alt+Shift+M]

[Trace] [Alt+Shift+F]

[Trigger] [Alt+Shift+S]

[Meas] [Alt+Shift+A]

[Meas Config] [Alt+Shift+W]

[Lines] [Alt+Shift+B]

[Input/Output] [Alt+Shift+I]

[Marker] [Alt+Shift+G]

[Peak Search] [Alt+Shift+R]

[Marker Function] [Alt+Shift+Q]

[Marker ->] [Alt+Shift+H]

[Undo] [CTRL+Shift+U]

[Redo] [CTRL+Shift+R]

[Run Single] [Alt+Shift+D]

[Run Cont.] [Alt+Shift+E]

[Setup] [Alt+Shift+T]

[Print] [Alt+CTRL+P]

[File] [CTRL+S]

[Mode] [Alt+Shift+P]

[CTRL+M]

[CTRL+N]

[GHz s -dBm V] [CTRL+Shift+G]

[MHz ms dBm mV] [CTRL+Shift+M]

[kHz μs dB μV] [CTRL+Shift+K]

[Hz ns dB.. nV] [CTRL+Shift+H]

[Preset] [Alt+Shift+U]

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 750

FSW General instrument setup
Application starter

11.3 Application starter

The "Application Starter" allows you to start any external application directly from the
FSW firmware.

This is useful, for example, for the following scenarios:

● Starting analysis software for the measurement data, such as R&S Vector Signal
Analysis (VSA) software
● Starting the provided auxiliary tool IECWIN to test a remote command script that
was created using the SCPI Recorder, for example
● Start an application to send the measurement results to a connected PC or cloud
● Start any user-defined application script to provide additional functionality to the
firmware, such as measurement-specific auto leveling

11.3.1 Application starter functions

Access: Toolbar
The "Application Starter" dialog box provides different tabs for different types of appli-
cations:
● "External Applications": contains applications that are provided with, but are not
part of the FSW, such as auxiliary tools
● "User Applications": contains any user-defined applications that can be accessed
from the FSW, such as command scripts
● "R&S Applications": contains applications predefined by Rohde & Schwarz to
enhance the functionality of your FSW
You can add further applications to the "User Applications" and "External Applications"
tabs as you like. They are separated only to improve usability if you have a large num-
ber of applications. You cannot edit the "R&S Applications" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 751

FSW General instrument setup
Application starter

The application starter provides the following functions.

Application buttons......................................................................................................752
Add Application/ Change Application.......................................................................... 752
└ Drive/ Path/ File Name..................................................................................753
└ File Type....................................................................................................... 753
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................753
└ Select............................................................................................................ 753
Edit Properties.............................................................................................................753
└ Application.................................................................................................... 754
└ Parameters................................................................................................... 754
└ Working Directory......................................................................................... 754
└ Display Name................................................................................................754
└ Choose Icon..................................................................................................755
Delete Link.................................................................................................................. 755
Add to Toolbar............................................................................................................. 755
Remove from Toolbar..................................................................................................755

Application buttons
Start the selected application directly on the FSW. Any application windows, outputs, or
results are displayed on the FSW screen.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:EXECute on page 1480

Add Application/ Change Application

Opens the "Add Application"/ "Change Application" dialog box. Both dialog boxes are
identical.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 752

FSW General instrument setup
Application starter

This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab.
Remote command:
For data security reasons, executable applications cannot be added to the Application
Starter remotely.

Drive/ Path/ File Name ← Add Application/ Change Application

Defines the path and file name of the application.

File Type ← Add Application/ Change Application

Defines a filter for the type of application, for example an .exe, .inp (IECWIN script)
or other file.
If you select a file type other than .exe, the FSW searches for the appropriate applica-
tion to start your file with.
For .inp files, for example, the IECWIN tool provided by Rohde & Schwarz to execute
scripts is preselected as the application to start.

File Explorer ← Add Application/ Change Application

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

Select ← Add Application/ Change Application

Closes the "Add Application"/ "Change Application" dialog box and opens the "Edit
Properties" dialog box.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect on page 1482

Edit Properties
Access: Application button context menu

Defines the display and behavior of the selected application.

This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 753

FSW General instrument setup
Application starter

Tip:
For .inp files, the IECWIN tool provided by Rohde & Schwarz to execute scripts is
preselected as the application to start. The script is defined as the parameter for the
application. The file name without the extension is used as the application name. The
IECWIN icon is selected as the application icon.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect on page 1482

Application ← Edit Properties

Indicates the application selected in the "Add Application" dialog box. Provides access
to the Add Application/ Change Application dialog box to change the application.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:SELect on page 1482

Parameters ← Edit Properties

Defines parameters that are provided with the application for execution, for example
arguments for a custom script.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:PARams on page 1481

Working Directory ← Edit Properties

Defines the working directory used by the selected application.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DIRectory on page 1480

Display Name ← Edit Properties

Defines the name of the application as displayed on the button in the "Application
Starter" dialog box.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:NAME on page 1481

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 754

FSW General instrument setup
Application starter

Choose Icon ← Edit Properties

Defines an icon for the application to be displayed on the button in the "Application
Starter" dialog box and optionally in the toolbar.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:ICON on page 1481

Delete Link
Access: Application button context menu
Removes the application from the "Application Starter" dialog box and the toolbar.
This function is not available for applications on the "R&S Applications" tab.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PLUGin:APPStarter:DELete on page 1480

Add to Toolbar
Access: Application button context menu
Inserts the specified application icon in the FSW toolbar.

Remove from Toolbar

Access: Application button context menu
Removes the application icon from the FSW toolbar.

11.3.2 How to work with the application starter

To start an application
1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the required application from the dialog box.

The application is started and displayed on the FSW screen.

To return to the FSW

1. If no external keyboard is connected to the instrument, select the online keyboard
icon.

2. Press [Alt]+[Tab].

To add an application to the Application Starter

1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed.

2. Select "Add Application".

3. Select the file type of the application to filter the file selection in the dialog box.

4. Select or enter the file name of the required application.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 755

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

5. Select "Select".
The "Edit Properties" dialog box is displayed.

6. Optionally, define parameters to be provided to the application.

7. Define the working directory to be used by the application.

8. Define the name to be displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog
box.

9. Select an icon to be displayed on the button in the "Application Starter" dialog box
and optionally in the toolbar.

10. Select "OK".

The application is available in the Application Starter.

11. Optionally, add an icon for the application to the toolbar.

To add an icon for the application to the toolbar

1. Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar.
The "Application Starter" dialog box is displayed.

2. Right-click the application button in the Application Starter.

3. Select "Add to Toolbar".

11.4 Transducers

11.4.1 Basics on transducer factors

The transducer allows you to manipulate the trace at discrete trace points to correct
the signal coming from an input device. Transducers are often used to correct the fre-

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 756

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

quency response for antennas, for example. The transducer is configured by defining
transducer factors for specific trace points. A set of transducer factors defines an inter-
polated transducer line and can be stored on the instrument.
In the Spectrum application, the correction factor from all active transducers is calcula-
ted for each displayed trace point once in advance and is added to the result of the
level measurement during the sweep. If the sweep range changes, the correction val-
ues are calculated again. If several measured values are combined in one point, only
one value is taken into consideration. If the active transducer line is not defined for the
entire sweep range, the missing values are replaced by zeroes.
When a transducer is used, the trace is shifted by a calculated factor. However, an
upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values. Thus, the reference
level can be adapted automatically to restore the original dynamic range. The refer-
ence level is shifted by the maximum transducer factor. By default, if transducers are
active the reference level function is adapted automatically to obtain the best dynamic
performance.
If a transducer factor is active, "TDF" is displayed in the channel bar.

Transducers can also be defined when an optional external mixer is used (R&S FSW-
B21).
When using probes for RF input, transducers are automatically created according to
the probe's detected characteristics as soon as the probe is connected.
(See the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.)
Input from I/Q data files is imported as it was stored, including any correction factors,
for example from transducers. Any currently configured correction factors at the time of
import, however, are not applied.

Y-Axis Unit
The individual transducer factors can be defined as absolute values or relative (dB)
values. However, all factors for one transducer line use the same unit. As soon as a
transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level
settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude settings since the
FSW and the active transducer are regarded as one measuring instrument. Only for
relative transducer factors (unit dB), the unit originally set on the instrument is main-
tained and can be changed.
When all transducers have been switched off, the FSW returns to the unit that was
used before a transducer was activated.

Configuration
The FSW supports transducer lines with a maximum of 1001 data points. Eight of the
transducer lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously. The number
of transducer lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage
device used.
A transducer line consists of the following data:
● A maximum of 1001 data points with a position and value

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 757

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

● A unit for the values

● A name to distinguish the transducer lines

Validity
The transducer factors must comply with the following rules to ensure correct opera-
tion:
● The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order.
Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and an error message is displayed.
● The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the
FSW since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements.
The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz.
● The value range for the transducer factor is ±200 dB.
● Gain has to be entered as a negative value, and attenuation as a positive value.

Storing transducer factors

Transducer factors can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further evalua-
tion in other applications. Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) for-
mat can also be imported to the FSW for other measurements.
Transducer factors can also be stored with the configuration settings so they can be
recalled for other measurements at a later time. Note, however, that any changes
made to the transducer factors after storing the configuration file cannot be restored
and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled.
Always remember to store the settings again after changing the transducer factors.
(See Section 10.3, "Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data",
on page 679).

Recalling transducer factors stored with measurement settings

After recalling measurement settings, the transducer factors applied to the measure-
ment may be different to those displayed in the "Transducer" dialog box; see "Saving
and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.

11.4.2 Transducer settings

Access: [Setup] > "Transducer"

Up to 8 transducer lines can be activated simultaneously in the FSW. Many more can
be stored on the instrument.

Transducers can also be defined when an optional external mixer is used (R&S FSW-
B21).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 758

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Transducer settings in secure user mode

Be sure to store transducer files before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Sec-
tion 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.

Stored transducer settings

When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.

● Transducer management...................................................................................... 759

● Transducer factors................................................................................................ 761

11.4.2.1 Transducer management

Access: [Setup] > "Transducer"

The settings required to manage all transducer lines on the instrument are described
here.

For the transducer line overview, the FSW searches for all stored transducer lines with
the file extension .TDF in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd directory.
The overview allows you to determine which transducer lines are available and can be
used for the current measurement.
For details on settings for individual lines see Section 11.4.2.2, "Transducer factors",
on page 761.
For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see Section 11.4.4, "How
to configure the transducer", on page 765.
Name...........................................................................................................................760
Unit..............................................................................................................................760
Compatibility................................................................................................................760

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 759

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Activating / Deactivating..............................................................................................760
Comment.....................................................................................................................760
Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter).................................................. 760
Adjust Ref Level.......................................................................................................... 761
Create New Line......................................................................................................... 761
Edit Line...................................................................................................................... 761
Copy Line.................................................................................................................... 761
Delete Line.................................................................................................................. 761

Name
The name of the stored transducer line.

Unit
The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined.
The following units are available:
● dB
● dBm
● dBmV
● dBμV
● dBμV/m
● dBμA
● dBμA/m
● dBpW
● dBpT
Additional units available only for installed FSW-K54 (EMI measurements) option:
● dBmV/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
● dBµV/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz)
● dBµA/MHz (normalized to 1 MHz)

Compatibility
Indicates whether the transducer factors are compatible with the current measurement
settings.
For more information on which conditions a transducer line must fulfill to be compati-
ble, see Section 11.4.1, "Basics on transducer factors", on page 756.

Activating / Deactivating
Activates/deactivates the transducer line. Up to 8 transducer lines can be active at the
same time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1409
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer[:STATe] on page 1410

Comment
An optional description of the transducer line.

Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter)

Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview. The view can
be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found.
Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 760

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Adjust Ref Level

Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected
transducer factor.
"Auto" Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range is
restored by shifting the reference level by the maximum transducer
factor.
"Manual" Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level via
the "Amplitude" menu.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ADJust:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 1407

Create New Line

Create a new transducer line.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1409

Edit Line
Edit an existing transducer line configuration.

Copy Line
Copy the selected transducer line configuration to create a new line.

Delete Line
Delete the selected transducer line.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DELete on page 1409

11.4.2.2 Transducer factors

Access: [Setup] > "Transducer" > "Edit Line" / "Copy Line" / "New Line"
The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here.
For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see Section 11.4.4, "How to
configure the transducer", on page 765.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 761

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Name...........................................................................................................................762
Comment.....................................................................................................................762
Unit..............................................................................................................................763
X-Axis Scaling............................................................................................................. 763
Data Points..................................................................................................................763
Insert Value................................................................................................................. 763
Delete Value................................................................................................................763
Shift x.......................................................................................................................... 763
Shift y.......................................................................................................................... 763
Save............................................................................................................................ 763
Import.......................................................................................................................... 764
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................764
Export..........................................................................................................................764
└ File Explorer..................................................................................................764

Name
Defines the transducer line name. All names must be compatible with the Windows 10
conventions for file names. The transducer data is stored under this name (with a .TDF
extension) in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd directory.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect on page 1409

Comment
Defines an optional comment for the transducer line. The text may contain up to 40
characters.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:COMMent on page 1408

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 762

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Unit
The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined.
As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used
for all the level settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude set-
tings unless dB is used.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:UNIT on page 1410

X-Axis Scaling
Describes the scaling of the horizontal axis on which the data points of the transducer
line are defined. Scaling can be linear or logarithmic.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SCALing on page 1409

Data Points
Each transducer line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 1001 data
points. Each data point is defined by its position (x-axis) and value (y-value).
The data points must comply with the following rules to ensure correct operation:
● The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order.
Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and the an error message is displayed.
● The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the
FSW since only the set frequency range is taken into account for measurements.
The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz, the maximum frequency 200 GHz.
● The value range for the transducer factor is ±200 dB.
● Gain has to be entered as a negative value, and attenuation as a positive value.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA on page 1408

Insert Value
Inserts a data point in the transducer line above the selected one in the "Edit Trans-
ducer" dialog box.

Delete Value
Deletes the selected data point in the "Edit Transducer" dialog box.

Shift x
Shifts the x-value of each data point horizontally by the defined shift width.

Shift y
Shifts the y-value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width.

Save
Saves the currently edited transducer line under the name defined in the "Name" field.
Remote command:
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL on page 1361
MMEMory:STORe<1|2>:STATe on page 1364

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 763

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Import
Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the transducer factor from the selected file
in .CSV format.
Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the
FSW. For details on the file format see Section 11.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor
file format", on page 764.
Remote command:
MMEMory:LOAD<n>:TFACtor on page 1410

File Explorer ← Import

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

Export
Opens a file selection dialog box and stores the currently displayed transducer factor to
the defined file in .CSV format.
For details on the file format see Section 11.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor file for-
mat", on page 764.
The transducer factor can be imported again later by the FSW for use in other mea-
surements.
Remote command:
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TFACtor on page 1411

File Explorer ← Export

Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer.
Remote command:
not supported

11.4.3 Reference: transducer factor file format

Transducer factor data can be exported to a file in ASCII (CSV) format for further eval-
uation in other applications. Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII (CSV) for-
mat can also be imported to the FSW for other measurements.
For more information about transducer factors, see "Import" on page 764.
This reference describes in detail the format of the export/import files for transducer
factors. Note that the bold data is mandatory, all other data is optional.
Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of
the decimal point. Thus, you can define the decimal separator to be used (see "Deci-
mal Separator" on page 654).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 764

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

Table 11-1: ASCII file format for transducer factor files

File contents Description

Header data

sep=; Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for

example)

Type;RS_TransducerFactor; Type of data

FileFormatVersion;1.00; File format version

Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage

OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for

Name;TestTDF1 Transducer factor name

Comment;Transducer for device A Description of transducer factor

XAxisScaling;LINEAR Scaling of x-axis linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG)

YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values

YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative)

NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by

Data section for individual data points

100000000;-50.000000 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line

500000000;-30.000000

1000000000;0.000000

1500000000;-30.000000

2500000000;-50.000000

11.4.4 How to configure the transducer

Configuring the transducer is very similar to configuring transducer factors.

The transducer settings are defined in the "Transducer" dialog box which is displayed
when you press [Setup] and then select "Transducer".

Stored transducer settings

When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in
"Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 680.

The following tasks are described:

● "How to find compatible transducer lines" on page 766
● "How to activate and deactivate a transducer" on page 766
● "How to edit existing transducer lines" on page 766
● "How to copy an existing transducer line" on page 766
● "How to delete an existing transducer line" on page 767

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 765

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

● "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 767

● "How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally" on page 768

How to find compatible transducer lines

► In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible".
All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current
measurement settings are displayed in the overview.

How to activate and deactivate a transducer

1. To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the
"Active" setting for it.
The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is
activated.

2. To deactivate a transducer line, deactivate the "Active" setting for it.

After the next sweep, the originally measured values are displayed.

How to edit existing transducer lines

Existing transducer line configurations can be edited.
1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.

2. Select "Edit".

3. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line"
on page 767.

4. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep if the transducer line is
active.

In order to store the changes to the transducer lines in a settings file, select the
"Save" icon in the toolbar.
(See Section 10.3, "Storing and recalling instrument settings and measurement data",
on page 679).

How to copy an existing transducer line

1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.

2. Select "Copy".
The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is opened with the configuration of the selected
transducer.

3. Define a new name to create a new transducer with the same configuration as the
source line.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 766

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line"
on page 767.

5. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.

How to delete an existing transducer line

1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer line.

2. Select "Delete".

3. Confirm the message.

The transducer line is deleted. After the next sweep, the originally measured val-
ues are displayed.

How to configure a new transducer line

1. In the "Transducer" dialog box, select "New".
The "Edit Transducer" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis-
played in the preview area of the dialog box. The preview is updated after each
change to the configuration.

2. Define a "Name" and, optionally, a "Comment" for the new transducer line.

3. Define the scaling for the x-axis.

4. Define the data points: minimum 2, maximum 1001:

a) Select "Insert Value".
b) Define the x-value ("Position") and y-value ("Value") of the first data point.
c) Select "Insert Value" again and define the second data point.
d) Repeat this to insert all other data points.
To insert a data point before an existing one, select the data point and then
"Insert Value".
To insert a new data point at the end of the list, move the focus to the line after
the last entry and then select "Insert Value".
To delete a data point, select the entry and then "Delete Value".

5. Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dialog box. If neces-
sary, correct individual data points or add or delete some.
If necessary, shift the entire line vertically or horizontally by selecting "Shift x" or
"Shift y" and defining the shift width.

6. Save the new configuration by selecting "Save".

The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 767

FSW General instrument setup
Transducers

How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally

A configured transducer line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new
transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which
has been shifted.
1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the transducer line.

2. Select "Edit".

3. In the "Edit Transducer Line" dialog box, select "Shift x" or "Shift y" and define the
shift width.

4. Save the shifted data points by selecting "Save".

If activated, the trace is recalculated after the next sweep.

How to export a transducer factor

Transducer factor configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other
programs or to be imported later for other measurements.
1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor.

2. Select "New" or "Edit".

3. Define the transducer factor as described in "How to configure a new transducer

line" on page 767.

4. Select "Export" to save the configuration to a file.

You are asked whether you would like to save the configuration internally on the
FSW first.

5. Select a file name and location for the transducer factor.

6. Select the decimal separator to be used in the file.

7. Select "Save".
The transducer factor is stored to a file with the specified name and the exten-
sion .CSV.
For details on the file format see Section 11.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor file
format", on page 764.

How to import a transducer factor

Transducer factor configurations that are stored in an ASCII file and contain a minimum
of required data can be imported to the FSW.
For details on the required file format see Section 11.4.3, "Reference: transducer factor
file format", on page 764.
1. In the "Edit Transducer" dialog box, select the transducer factor.

2. Select "New" or "Edit".

3. Select "Import" to load a transducer factor from a file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 768

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the
FSW first.

4. Select the file name of the transducer factor.

5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file.

6. Select "Select".
The transducer factor is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the "Edit
Transducer" dialog box.

7. Activate the transducer factor as described in "How to activate and deactivate a

transducer" on page 766.

11.5 Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

If the Frequency Response Correction option (R&S FSW-K544) is installed, the FSW
supports frequency response correction using Touchstone (.snp) files or .fres files.

11.5.1 Basics on frequency response correction

Input-specific frequency correction

Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input
types (RF, baseband). The settings in the "User-defined Frequency Response Correc-
tion" dialog box apply to the currently selected input type. Be sure to select the appro-
priate input source before you define the correction data
Section 7.2.2, "Input source settings", on page 364
In remote operation, be sure to use the correct command for the required input type
(see "Input-specific frequency correction" on page 1412).
Otherwise the correction may seem to fail because it was defined for a different input
type than the one being used.

Touchstone (.snp) files

Touchstone (.snp) files contain data to characterize a measurement setup in respect
to the gain and phase error over frequency. Such files are generated by network ana-
lyzers, for example. The FSW can use such files to compensate for any gain or phase
errors between the DUT and the connection from the DUT to the instrument.
Touchstone files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports. The
total number of ports configured in the file is indicated by the file extension; the "n"
in .snp is merely a placeholder. Thus, a file for a cable with one input and one output
is referred to as an S2P file. A file for a switch with one input and 3 outputs is referred
to as an S4P file etc.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 769

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Transducer vs filter function

Touchstone files are handled similarly to transducer files by the FSW. However, while a
transducer adapts the frequency values by a fixed factor, Touchstone files act as a filter
on I/Q input data. For common frequency sweeps, the effects of transducers and
Touchstone files are the same.

.fres files
Additional frequency response correction files in .fres format allow you to correct
effects from components for which no Touchstone files are available.
Files in .fres format correspond to an S1P file. They contain exactly three values for
each frequency:
● The frequency
● The magnitude correction value
● The phase correction value
Instead of the magnitude and phase correction values, the I and Q values can be provi-
ded.
These values are applied to the input data. If the file contains any other data, it cannot
be loaded.
For .fres files, magnitude and phase correction can be activated separately.

Group delay compensation

The phase correction values can be used to compensate for a group delay. However,
to calculate the correction correctly, the distance between two values must not be too
large. Thus, the application requires a minimum number of values in the correction file.
Define at least enough values so the following equation is true:
Group_delay * Frequency_Spacing * 360 < 180

Combining multiple correction files

Since the measurement setup may consist of several cables, DUTs and other compo-
nents, multiple Touchstone and frequency response files can be required for full com-
pensation. In this case, the order in which the files are applied is important. The FSW
combines all active Touchstone files to a single S2P file, and creates the required filter
or correction factors for the measurement.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 770

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Correction filters for I/Q data

Filters can only be applied to I/Q data if they are defined for the complete analysis
bandwidth. Therefore, if the combined frequency response filter does not cover the
complete analysis span, it is invalid and cannot be used for the measurement. See
also "Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement results"
on page 771.
For common frequency sweeps, values not covered by the combined frequency
response are not corrected, but the settings remain valid. A message is displayed in
the status bar. See also "Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement
results" on page 771.

External preamplifier Touchstone files

If an external preamplifier is connected to the FSW, an additional Touchstone file is
provided by the preamplifier. The combined frequency response filter also considers
those values. For your convenience, the external preamplifier can be switched on and
off directly in the "User-Defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box, as an
alternative to the common input settings.

Correcting data in one or more applications

While transducer files are always used for all measurements on the instrument, .snp
and .fres files can be configured either for the current application only, or for all mea-
surement channels.
Thus, you can configure different files for individual measurement setups with a partic-
ular input source and channel setup. For example, you can set up three different I/Q
Analyzer channels in parallel and use different Touchstone files for each measurement
channel.

Recognizing frequency response correction in measurement results

If frequency response correction is active for a measurement channel, "FRCORR" is
indicated in the channel bar. The status of the correction settings is indicated by the
color of this message:

Color Meaning

Green Active correction settings valid and in use

Yellow For Spectrum mode only:

Correction settings active, but not all frequencies in measurement
span are covered by filter, or the combined filter does not cover any
frequencies.
Use the [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:
SCOVered? command to determine the covered span.

Red Correction settings active, but not in use, e.g. due to invalid settings
(see "Correction filters for I/Q data" on page 771)

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid? on page 1429

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 771

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Since multiple correction settings can be active at the same time, the channel bar
merely indicates that frequency response correction is being applied, but not which
files are being used. To find out which correction files are being used for the active
application, open the "User-Defined Frequency Response Correction" dialog box (see
Section 11.5.2, "User-defined frequency response correction settings", on page 772).
An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction or the
external preamplifier in general is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is
dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a fre-
quency response (.fres) file.

Storing frequency response correction settings

You can store frequency response correction settings to a file (saveset) and load them
for future measurements. For details see "Save Settings" on page 776.

Storing SaveSets with a loaded Touchstone file

If you store the settings for a measurement using a Touchstone file in a saveset, only
the link to the Touchstone file name is actually stored. That means that if you change
the settings in the file and recall the saveset for the measurement later, the results will
differ from the original measurement.

Imported I/Q data

Correction factors are not applied to input from I/Q data files during import. Data from
these files is imported as it was stored. However, if any correction factors were applied
to the stored data, for example from Touchstone files, the imported data contains those
corrections.

Restrictions
Currently, the FSW has the following restrictions for Touchstone file support:
● Trace data containing corrections from Touchstone files cannot be returned in I/Q
block format
(See TRAC:IQ:DATA:FORM, described in the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input
User Manual).

11.5.2 User-defined frequency response correction settings

Access: [SETUP] > "User Correction"

User-defined frequency response correction can be defined in one or more Touchstone
files and in one or more frequency response (.fres) files, or a combination of them. A
configuration of correction files can be stored to and loaded from a file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 772

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input
types (RF, baseband). The settings in the "User-defined Frequency Response Correc-
tion" dialog box apply to the currently selected input type.

State............................................................................................................................774
Refresh........................................................................................................................774
Ext. PA Correction.......................................................................................................774
Adjust Ref Level.......................................................................................................... 775
Apply to....................................................................................................................... 775
Load Settings.............................................................................................................. 775
Save Settings.............................................................................................................. 776
Clear Settings..............................................................................................................776
Touchstone File Information........................................................................................ 776
└ ID.................................................................................................................. 776
└ Filename....................................................................................................... 776
└ Active............................................................................................................ 776
└ To - From.......................................................................................................776
Add Touchstone File....................................................................................................777
Remove File................................................................................................................ 777
Move File Up or Down.................................................................................................777
Frequency Response active........................................................................................777
Frequency Response File Information........................................................................ 777
└ ID.................................................................................................................. 777
└ Filename....................................................................................................... 778
└ Magnitude..................................................................................................... 778
└ Phase............................................................................................................778
Add Freq Resp File..................................................................................................... 778
Remove Frequency Response File.............................................................................778
Preview....................................................................................................................... 778

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 773

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

└ Selected File................................................................................................. 778

└ IQ Mode........................................................................................................ 779
└ Spectrum Mode.............................................................................................780

State
Enables or disables the general usage of user-defined frequency response correction
settings. If activated, the data in the active correction files is combined to create a filter.
This filter is applied to the measurement results of subsequent sweeps.
TPIS correction is not supported if user frequency response correction is active. If you
activate frequency response correction, TPIS correction is automatically deactivated in
all channels.
For details see the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STATe on page 1428
Testing the validity of the correction setting:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:VALid? on page 1429

Refresh
Retrieves the specified files again and creates a new combined filter. If enabled, the
filter is applied immediately.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:INPut<ip>:USER:REFResh
on page 1420

Ext. PA Correction
This function is only available if an external preamplifier is connected to the FSW, and
only for frequencies above 1 GHz. For details on connection, see the preamplifier's
documentation.
Using an external preamplifier, you can measure signals from devices under test with
low output power, using measurement devices which feature a low sensitivity and do
not have a built-in RF preamplifier.
When you connect the external preamplifier, the FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P)
file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the
preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the FSW, the preamplifier is
permanently on and ready to use. However, you must enable data correction based on
the stored data explicitly on the FSW using this setting.
When enabled, the FSW automatically compensates the magnitude and phase charac-
teristics of the external preamplifier in the measurement results. Any internal preampli-
fier, if available, is disabled.
An active external preamplifier is also included in the calculation of the combined user-
defined frequency response correction filter and displayed in the preview for SnP files
(see "Preview" on page 778).
For FSW85 models with two RF inputs, you can enable correction from the external
preamplifier for each input individually, but not for both at the same time.
When disabled, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains
connected.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 774

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Remote command:
INPut:EGAin[:STATe] on page 1216

Adjust Ref Level

Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the active
filter calculation configuration. The offset is the mean of the filter calculation. The refer-
ence level offset is calculated individually for each channel the frequency response
correction settings apply to (see "Apply to" on page 775).
Note the following prerequisites and restrictions concerning the automatic reference
level adjustment:
● The reference level offset is only applied if frequency response correction is
enabled (see "State" on page 774). If you disable frequency response correction,
"Adjust Ref Level" is automatically set to "Manual".
● The reference level offset is only applied if the center frequency is within the cur-
rently covered filter frequency range.
● The reference level offset is applied independently of a transducer reference level
offset (see "Adjust Ref Level" on page 761).
"Auto" Activates the automatic adjustment. The original dynamic range of
the reference level is shifted by the filter calculation offset.
"Manual" Deactivates the automatic adjustment. Adjust the reference level in
the "Amplitude" settings (see "Reference Level" on page 486).
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:ADJust:RLEVel:STATe
on page 1414

Apply to
Determines which channels the correction settings are applied to.
Note: In MSRA mode, the settings are always applied to all active measurement chan-
nels.
"All Input Src" The frequency response correction settings are applied to all active
measurement channels with the same input source. A new filter is
calculated for each measurement channel as soon as you switch to it,
or when a measurement is performed (e.g. by the Sequencer).
"Channel" The frequency response correction settings are applied to the cur-
rently selected channel only.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOPe on page 1420

Load Settings
Loads a stored saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario.
Existing settings in the dialog box are overwritten. The settings apply to the currently
selected channel or all channels, depending on the Apply to setting.
Only .dfl files can be loaded. The default storage directory for correction files is
C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:LOAD on page 1419

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 775

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Save Settings
Stores a saveset for a user-defined frequency response correction scenario. As for all
instrument settings, a .dfl file is created for the correction data. Note that only the
settings defined in this dialog box are stored, not the contents of the files themselves.
Whether the settings for the currently selected channel only or for all channels are
stored depends on the Apply to setting.
The default storage directory is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\FResponse.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:STORe on page 1428

Clear Settings
Clears all current user-defined frequency response correction settings, either for the
currently selected channel only or for all channels, depending on the Apply to setting.
Merely files specific to the FSW itself remain in the list of Touchstone files.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PRESet on page 1420

Touchstone File Information

Provides information on loaded Touchstone files and the order of their application.
If an external preamplifier is active, it is also included at the bottom of the list.

ID ← Touchstone File Information

Consecutive number which determines the order in which the correction files are
applied to the measurement data. The maximum number of files per configuration is
15.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether the file is active and Touchstone files or the
external preamplifier in general are switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is
dark). A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file.

Filename ← Touchstone File Information

Name of a loaded Touchstone file.

Active ← Touchstone File Information

Activates or deactivates the selected file for the current configuration. Only active files
are included in filter calculation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:STATe
on page 1427

To - From ← Touchstone File Information

Touchstone files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports.
You must define the ports from the Touchstone file whose data is to be applied.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:TO
on page 1424
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:PORTs:FROM
on page 1424

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 776

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Add Touchstone File

Loads a new Touchstone file for the current configuration. The maximum number of
files per configuration is 15. The new file is added below the currently selected file. To
change the order of the files, use the Move File Up or Down icons.
The file extension of the Touchstone file must correspond to the number of ports inclu-
ded in the file. For example, a file containing 4 parameters for S11, S22, S12 and S21
must have the extension .s2p.
A minimum number of values is required to compensate for a group delay, see "Group
delay compensation" on page 770.
The default directory for Touchstone files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:INSert
on page 1423

Remove File
Removes the selected Touchstone file from the current configuration.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove
on page 1425
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar
on page 1422

Move File Up or Down

Moves the selected Touchstone file one position up or down in the list of files, changing
the order in which the correction data is applied.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:MOVE on page 1423

Frequency Response active

Activates or deactivates the use of additional frequency response (.fres) files. The
correction data in these files is applied after any correction settings in active Touch-
stone files. Only active files are included in filter calculation.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FSTate on page 1418

Frequency Response File Information

Provides information on loaded frequency response files and the order of their applica-
tion.

ID ← Frequency Response File Information

Consecutive number which determines the order in which the correction files are
applied to the measurement data. The maximum number of files per configuration is
15.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether the file and frequency response in general is
active (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A green symbol represents a fre-
quency response (.fres) file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 777

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Filename ← Frequency Response File Information

Name of a loaded Touchstone file.

Magnitude ← Frequency Response File Information

Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for magnitude
results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:MAGNitude[:
STATe] on page 1416

Phase ← Frequency Response File Information

Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for phase
results.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:PHASe[:STATe]
on page 1417

Add Freq Resp File

Loads a frequency response (.fres) file to the current configuration. The maximum
number of files per configuration is 15.
A minimum number of values is required to compensate for a group delay, see "Group
delay compensation" on page 770.
The default directory for .fres files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert
on page 1415

Remove Frequency Response File

Removes the selected frequency response (.fres) file from the current configuration.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:REMove
on page 1417
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:CLEar
on page 1415

Preview
The preview of the (combined) user correction files shows the correction values.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:PSTate on page 1425
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SCOVered? on page 1421

Selected File ← Preview

The preview of the selected user correction file shows the correction values for the
specified frequency range. The values for individual ports can be activated or deactiva-
ted.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 778

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Figure 11-1: Preview of selected user correction file

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency?
on page 1415
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude?
on page 1415
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe?
on page 1415
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:
FREQuency<spi>? on page 1422
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:
MAGNitude<spi>? on page 1422
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA:
PHASe<spi>? on page 1422

IQ Mode ← Preview
The preview in IQ Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individual cor-
rection files. The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which all files contain
values.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general
is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents
a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
The lower part shows the combined correction values for the valid frequency range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 779

FSW General instrument setup
Frequency response correction (R&S FSW-K544)

Figure 11-2: IQ Mode preview of user correction files

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency?
on page 1419
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude?
on page 1419
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe? on page 1419

Spectrum Mode ← Preview

The preview in Spectrum Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individ-
ual correction files. The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which at least
one file contains values.
An LED-like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general
is switched on (symbol "lights up") or not (symbol is dark). A purple symbol represents
a Touchstone file. A green symbol represents a frequency response (.fres) file.
The lower part shows the combined correction values for the valid frequency range.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 780

FSW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings

Figure 11-3: Spectrum Mode preview of user correction files

Remote command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency?
on page 1427
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude?
on page 1427
[SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe?
on page 1427

11.6 Reference frequency settings

Access: [Setup] > "Reference"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 781

FSW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings

Reference Frequency Input.........................................................................................782

└ Behavior in case of missing external reference............................................ 783
└ Tuning Range............................................................................................... 784
└ Frequency..................................................................................................... 784
└ Loop Bandwidth............................................................................................ 784
Reference Frequency Output......................................................................................784
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 784

Reference Frequency Input

The FSW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the
frequency standard for all internal oscillators. A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the
internal reference source. In the external reference setting, all internal oscillators of the
FSW are synchronized to the external reference frequency.
External references are connected to one of the REF INPUT or the SYNC TRIGGER
connectors on the rear panel.
Note: The optional, and more precise OCXO signal can replace the internal reference
source.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 782

 FSW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings

The default setting is the internal reference. When an external reference is used, EXT
REF is displayed in the status bar.
The following reference inputs are available:
Table 11-2: Available Reference Frequency Input

Setting Source Connector Frequency Tuning Loop Band- Description

Range width

Internal (OCXO) 10 MHz - 1-100 Hz Internal reference signal

or optional OCXO

External Reference REF INPUT 10 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-100 Hz Fixed external 10 MHZ reference fre-
10 MHz 1..50 MHz quency
Good phase noise performance

External Reference REF INPUT 1..50 MHz +/- 0.5 ppm 0.1 Hz (fixed) Variable external reference frequency
1..50MHz 1..50 MHz in 1 Hz in 1 Hz steps
steps Good external phase noise suppres-
sion. Small tuning range.

+/- 6 ppm 1-30 Hz Variable external reference frequency

in 1 Hz steps
Wide tuning range.

External Reference REF INPUT 100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
100 MHz 100 MHz / 1 GHz Good phase noise performance

External Reference REF INPUT 1 GHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
1 GHz 100 MHz / 1 GHz

Sync Trigger SYNC TRIGGER 100 MHz +/- 6 ppm 1-300 Hz External reference
INPUT

Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:SOURce on page 1396
SOURce<si>:EXTernal<ext>:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency
on page 1395

Behavior in case of missing external reference ← Reference Frequency Input

If an external reference is selected but none is available, there are different ways the
instrument can react.
"Show Error The error message "External reference missing" is displayed if no
Flag" valid external reference signal is available. Additionally, the flag "NO
REF" is displayed to indicate that no synchronization was performed
for the last measurement.
"Switch to The instrument automatically switches back to the internal reference
internal refer- if no external reference is available. Note that you must re-activate
ence" the external reference if it becomes available again at a later time.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FALLback on page 1395

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 783

FSW General instrument setup
Reference frequency settings

Tuning Range ← Reference Frequency Input

The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It
determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per mil-
lion (10-6).
"+/- 0.5 ppm" With this smaller deviation a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0.1
Hz is realized. With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an
external reference signal with a very precise frequency. Due to the
very narrow loop bandwidth, unwanted noise or spurious components
on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated. Fur-
thermore, the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state.
During this locking process, "NO REF" is displayed in the status bar.
"+/- 6 ppm" The larger deviation allows the instrument to synchronize to less pre-
cise external reference input signals.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:TRANge on page 1397

Frequency ← Reference Frequency Input

Defines the external reference frequency to be used (for variable connectors only).

Loop Bandwidth ← Reference Frequency Input

Defines the speed of internal synchronization with the reference frequency. The setting
requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise.
For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range (+/- 0.5 ppm),
the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0.1 Hz and cannot be changed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:LBWidth on page 1394

Reference Frequency Output

A reference frequency can be provided by the FSW to other devices that are connec-
ted to this instrument. If activated, the reference signal is output to the corresponding
connector.
"Output 100 MHz"
Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHz
connector.
"Output 640 MHz"
Provides a 640 MHz reference signal to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHz
connector.
"Output Sync Trigger"
Provides a 100 MHz reference signal to the SYNC TRIGGER OUT-
PUT connector.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:O640 on page 1395
[SENSe:]ROSCillator:OSYNc on page 1396

Set to Default
The values for the "Tuning Range", "Frequency" and "Loop Bandwidth" are stored for
each source of "Reference Frequency Input".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 784

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

When you switch the input source, the previously defined settings are restored. You
can restore the default values for all input sources using the "Set to Default" function.

11.7 System configuration settings

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration"
● Hardware information............................................................................................785
● Licensing, versions and options............................................................................ 786
● System messages.................................................................................................791
● Firmware updates................................................................................................. 792
● General configuration settings.............................................................................. 793
● Signal generator settings...................................................................................... 795
● AC power loss behavior........................................................................................ 797

11.7.1 Hardware information

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Hardware Info"

An overview of the installed hardware in your FSW is provided.
Every listed component is described by its serial number, part number, model informa-
tion, hardware code, and hardware revision.
This information can be useful when problems occur with the instrument and you
require support from Rohde & Schwarz.

Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:HWINfo? on page 1452

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 785

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

11.7.2 Licensing, versions and options

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Versions + Options"

Information on the firmware version and additional licensed options on your instrument
is provided. The unique Rohde & Schwarz device ID is also indicated here, as it is
required for license and option administration.

Remote commands:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1455
DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? on page 1452
DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? on page 1453
● Obtaining copyright information on used third-party sources................................786
● License management............................................................................................786

11.7.2.1 Obtaining copyright information on used third-party sources

Open Source Acknowledgment: Open

Displays a PDF file containing information on open-source code used by the FSW firm-
ware.

11.7.2.2 License management

After installing optional firmware, you must install or enable its license.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 786

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

Installing options in secure user mode

Be sure to install any new options before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Sec-
tion 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.
For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available.

Expired option licenses

If a timed option license is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you.
You can then use the "Install Option" function to enter a new license key or you can
enable a new floating license.
If a timed option license has already expired, a message box appears for you to con-
firm. In this case, the optional functions and applications are unavailable until you enter
a new license key or enable a floating license.

Trial license
The trial option (R&S FSW-K0) allows you to use further optional applications that
require a separate license from Rohde & Schwarz. It is pre-installed at the factory on
request. If enabled, you can use additional applications for a limited period of time (90
days from factory installation). They are accessible from the common "Mode" dialog
box (see Section 5.3, "Selecting the operating mode and applications", on page 122).
If the trial option has already expired, a message box appears for you to confirm. In
this case, all instrument functions are unavailable (including remote control) until the
FSW is rebooted. To continue to use the optional applications, you must acquire a
commercial license. Then use the "Install Option" function to enter the new license key
or activate a floating license as described in Section 11.7.2, "Licensing, versions and
options", on page 786.

Using a Floating License Server

As an alternative to license key files installed on the FSW, software licenses can now
also be provided by an R&S®License Server. In this case, all available licenses are
stored on a specified server. When you need a particular application, you obtain a
license from the server. When you no longer need the license, you return it to the
server and it becomes available to other users again. These licenses are also referred
to as floating licenses, as opposed to permanently assigned licenses.
If the predefined number of available licenses for a particular option are currently occu-
pied by other users, you cannot open a further instance of the optional application until
a license is returned. Per option, you only require a single license for any number of
channels.
The R&S®License Server must be set up as described in the R&S®License Server -
Managing Floating Licenses - User Manual.
Two different types of licenses are available.

Common floating license

A common floating license enables you to use an option as long as you need it, but
requires a permanent connection to the license server.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 787

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

The license is retrieved from the license server only when you select the application in
the "Mode" dialog box. Only one license per option is retrieved, but the option can be
used in multiple channels. It is returned shortly after you close the (last) application
channel. The license is blocked for other users only while at least one application
channel is in use.
If the connection to the license server is lost for longer than approximately 10 minutes,
the FSW assumes no license is available and closes the application.

Occupied license
An occupied license is retrieved once from the license server and stored locally for up
to 7 days, depending on the selected time period. During the occupied period, the
license is blocked for other users. After this time, the license automatically expires and
becomes available on the license server again. During the occupied period, no further
access to the license server is required. The license cannot be returned or disabled
manually before it expires, but it can be extended.
When the license expires, you must retrieve a new license from the license server. If
the connection to the license server is not available or no more licenses are available,
the FSW closes the application.
Occupied licenses are only available for instruments using a Windows 10 operating
system.
Install Option............................................................................................................... 788
Install Option by XML.................................................................................................. 788
License state ( ).................................................................................................... 789
└ Enabling/disabling floating licenses.............................................................. 789
Setup Floating License Server.................................................................................... 790
└ IP / Host name.............................................................................................. 790
└ Port............................................................................................................... 790
└ Description.................................................................................................... 790
└ Add Server.................................................................................................... 791
└ Remove Server............................................................................................. 791
└ Refresh List...................................................................................................791

Install Option
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the (permanently assigned) license key for an option.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options and enable
licenses.

Install Option by XML

Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional (permanently assigned) option
license to the FSW using an XML file. Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that
contains the option license key and select "Select".
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options and enable
licenses.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 788

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

License state ( )
Provides functions to enable or disable a floating license for an installed option. These
functions are only available if a floating license server is configured (see "Setup Float-
ing License Server" on page 790).
Note: Trial license. If the trial option (R&S FSW-K0) is installed, the "State" column
indicates whether an individual trial license is enabled or disabled.
Remote command:
SYSTem:OPTion:LICense[:LIST]? on page 1456
Enable/disable trial option: SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal[:STATe] on page 1458
Determine available trial applications: SYSTem:OPTion:TRIal:LIST? on page 1457

Enabling/disabling floating licenses ← License state ()

If a floating license server is configured (see "Setup Floating License Server"
on page 790), you can enable or disable a license for the selected option in the
"License" dialog box. Two different types of licenses are available (see "Using a Float-
ing License Server" on page 787).
You cannot change a license state that is currently in use by an application. The
change in license usage becomes effective when you select "Apply". Restarting the
firmware is not necessary.

"Enabled" If enabled, the license is retrieved from the license server when you
select the application in the "Mode" dialog box.
Some options are available for multiple applications, such as power
sensor support. In this case, the license is retrieved if you select any
application that supports the option.
For options with suboptions, e.g. K91 with suboptions K91AC, K91N,
all suboptions are automatically activated together with the main
option by default.
"Disabled" If the license is disabled, it is not retrieved from the server when you
open the main application. The option is grayed out in the "Versions +
Options" dialog box. Disabling licenses is useful for suboptions (e.g.
K91N) or options that are available for multiple applications.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 789

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

"Occupied license" period

Defines the time period that an occupied license is stored locally after
it is retrieved from the license server. A time period between 1 and 7
days is available. The license cannot be returned or disabled man-
ually before it expires, but it can be extended.
Remote command:
SYSTem:OPTion:LICense[:LIST] on page 1456

Setup Floating License Server

To use floating licenses, you must set up one or more floating license servers. The
FSW software checks the configured servers for available floating licenses when it
starts up. Only options for which licenses are found are available in the FSW. After
adding new options on the floating license server, you must restart the FSW software
before using them.
For details on the floating license concept, see "Using a Floating License Server"
on page 787.
For details on configuring floating license servers, see the R&S®License Server - Man-
aging Floating Licenses - user manual.

Indicates the currently configured floating license servers. All enabled servers are
searched for floating licenses when the FSW software starts. Note that changes to the
list of servers only take effect after the FSW software and the local License Manager
are restarted. To abort any changes, simply close the dialog box.

IP / Host name ← Setup Floating License Server

IP address or host name of the server. Ask your administrator for details.

Port ← Setup Floating License Server

Port information for the server. The default port is 9443.
Ask your administrator for details.

Description ← Setup Floating License Server

Optional description of the configured server.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 790

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

Add Server ← Setup Floating License Server

Opens a dialog to add a floating license server. The server must be connected to the
same network as the FSW software, and set up as described in the R&S®License
Server - Managing Floating Licenses - user manual.
Configure the IP / Host name and Port.
The license server automatically restarts. To update the server list and the list of availa-
ble licenses, you must also restart the FSW software.

Remove Server ← Setup Floating License Server

Removes the selected server permanently. To update the server list and the list of
available licenses, you must also restart the FSW software.

Refresh List ← Setup Floating License Server

Updates the list of floating license servers, for example after someone changes the
configuration via the web application instead of the FSW dialog.

11.7.3 System messages

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "System Messages"

The system messages generated by the FSW are displayed.
The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent mes-
sages are placed at the top of the list. Messages that have occurred since you last vis-
ited the system messages tab are marked with an asterisk '*'.

If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message
Buffer Overflow" is displayed. To clear the message buffer, use "Clear All Messages".
The following information is available:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 791

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

No device-specific error code

Message brief description of the message

Component hardware messages: name of the affected module

software messages: name of the affected software

Date/Time date and time of the occurrence of the message

Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 1454

11.7.4 Firmware updates

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Firmware Update"

During instrument start, the FSW checks the installed hardware against the current
firmware version to ensure that the hardware is supported. If not, an error message is
displayed ("Wrong Firmware Version") and you are asked to update the firmware. Until
the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails. To see which components are not
supported, see the System messages.
Possibly, you also have to update the firmware on your FSW to enable additional new
features or if reasons for improvement come up. Ask your sales representative or
check the Rohde & Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firmware
update package includes at least a setup file and release notes.

Before updating the firmware on your instrument, read the release notes delivered with
the firmware version.
Administrator rights are no longer required to perform a firmware update.

Installing options in secure user mode

Be sure to perform any firmware updates before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see
Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.
For restricted users in secure user mode, this function is not available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 792

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

For detailed instructions on installing the firmware, see the product release notes.

Remote command:
SYSTem:FIRMware:UPDate on page 1455

11.7.5 General configuration settings

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Config"

General system settings, for example concerning the initial behavior of the FSW after
booting, can also be configured.

Preset Mode................................................................................................................793
Out-of-range value behavior....................................................................................... 794
SecureUser Mode....................................................................................................... 794
└ Changing the password................................................................................ 794
Number block behavior............................................................................................... 795

Preset Mode
The presettings can be defined in the "Config" tab of the "System Configuration" dialog
box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 793

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

"SAN" Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode

"MSRA" Multi-Standard Radio Analysis mode
"MSRT" Multi-Standard Real-Time mode
Remote command:
SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible on page 1458

Out-of-range value behavior

By default, if you enter a value that is outside the valid range in an input field for a set-
ting, a warning is displayed and the value is not accepted. Alternatively, entries below
the minimum value can automatically be set to the minimum entry, and entries above
the maximum value set to the maximum entry. This behavior avoids errors and facili-
tates setting correct values.

SecureUser Mode
If activated, the FSW requires a reboot and then automatically logs in using the
"SecureUser" account.
Data that the FSW normally stores on the solid-state drive is redirected to volatile
memory instead. Data that is stored in volatile memory can be accessed by the user
during the current instrument session. However, when the instrument’s power is
removed, all data in volatile memory is erased.
The Secure User Mode can only be activated or deactivated by a user with administra-
tor rights.
Note: Storing instrument settings permanently. Before you activate secure user mode,
store any instrument settings that are required beyond the current session, such as
predefined instrument settings, transducer files, or self-alignment data.
For details on the secure user mode, see Section 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the
secure user mode", on page 41.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] on page 1458
Note: Initially after installation of the R&S FSW-K33 option, secure user mode must be
enabled manually once before remote control is possible.

Changing the password ← SecureUser Mode

When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation, you are promp-
ted to change the passwords for all user accounts to improve system security.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 794

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

To save the new password, select "Save". The password dialog for the next user is dis-
played, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts.
If you cancel the dialog without changing the password, the password dialog for the
next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password for all
user accounts. It is possible to continue in secure user mode without changing the
passwords, and you will not be prompted to do so again. However, we strongly recom-
mend that you do define a more secure password for all users.
By default, the password characters are not displayed to ensure confidentiality during
input. To display the characters, select "Show password".
To display the onscreen keyboard, select "Keyboard".

Number block behavior

Defines the default behavior of the keypad on the front panel of the FSW for text input.
Depending on the type of values you most frequently enter using the keypad, a differ-
ent default is useful.
"123" Numeric values are entered when you press a key on the keypad.
To enter alphanumeric values, use an external or the on-screen key-
board, or switch this setting.
"ABC" (Default)
Every key on the keypad represents several characters and one num-
ber. If you press the key multiple times in quick succession, you tog-
gle through the symbols assigned to the key. For the assignment,
refer to Table 4-12.

11.7.6 Signal generator settings

Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Signal Generator"

These settings configure a connected signal generator that can then be used for vari-
ous tasks, for example for external generator control or NPR measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 795

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator................................................... 796

└ 123/ABC........................................................................................................796
└ Password...................................................................................................... 796
Test Connection.......................................................................................................... 796
Connect/Disconnect.................................................................................................... 797

IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the FSW via
LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Section 4.3.2.21, "Device
ID", on page 63, or the signal generator's user documentation.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see the FSW User Manual or
the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the
connection information.
The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred
between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in
the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time.
Select "Test Connection" on page 796 to establish a temporary connection from the
FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provi-
ded for information only.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1460

123/ABC ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".

Password ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.

Test Connection
The FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 796

FSW General instrument setup
System configuration settings

If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed:

● Device type
● Name and serial number
● Connection state
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1460

Connect/Disconnect
The FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed:
● Device type
● Name and serial number
● Connection state
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1460
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459

11.7.7 AC power loss behavior

Access: BIOS
Using a specific configuration setting in the BIOS of the FSW, you can define how the
instrument behaves after the AC power supply is interrupted. The setting applies
regardless whether the interruption occurs due to an irregular power outage in the
mains supply, by removing the power cable, or by switching the instrument power sup-
ply off.
The setting supports the following values:
● "Power Off": Instrument remains switched off.
● "Power On": Instrument automatically switches on as soon as power supply is
restored.
● "Last State": (Default) Instrument restores the state that it was in before the outage
occurred.

To change the instrument's power loss behavior

Prerequisite: the instrument is switched off and a keyboard is connected.
1. Switch on the power switch on the rear panel of the FSW.

2. Watch for the prompt on the display, then press [DEL] on the keyboard to enter the
BIOS setup.

3. In the BIOS menu, select "Chipset" > "PCH-IO Configuration" > "Restore AC Power
Loss".

4. Select the required setting as described above.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 797

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

5. In the BIOS menu, select "Save & Exit" > "Save Changes and Exit".

11.8 Service functions

Access: [Setup] > "Service"
When unexpected problems arise with the FSW some service functions may help you
solve them.
For more helpful information for support, see also Section 14.6, "Collecting information
for support", on page 1555
● R&S support information....................................................................................... 798
● Self-test settings and results................................................................................. 800
● Calibration signal display...................................................................................... 800
● Service functions...................................................................................................802
● Hardware diagnostics............................................................................................804

11.8.1 R&S support information

Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "R&S Support"

In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to
your Rohde & Schwarz support center.

Create R&S Support Information................................................................................ 799

Save Device Footprint.................................................................................................799
Last Service Date........................................................................................................799
Last Calibration Date...................................................................................................799
Next Calibration Due................................................................................................... 799

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 798

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

Create R&S Support Information

Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the sys-
tem configuration information ("Device Footprint"), the current eeprom data and a
screenshot of the screen display.
This data is stored to the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER directory on the instrument.
The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file
creation.
If you contact the Rohde & Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send
these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SINFo? on page 1462

Save Device Footprint

Creates an *.xml file with information on installed hardware, software, image and
FPGA versions. The *.xml file is stored under
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\devicedata\
xml\ on the instrument. It is also included in the service ZIP file (see "Create R&S
Support Information" on page 799).
Remote command:
SYSTem:DFPRint on page 1453

Last Service Date

Opens a calendar to define the date that the FSW was inspected by Rohde & Schwarz
service. The service date is updated by the service technicians. For new instruments,
the last service date (= date of production) is entered during production.
If the field contains no date, we recommend that you enter the date of last service
according to the service certificates you received after the FSW has been serviced.
If the FSW has not been serviced yet, leave the field empty.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE on page 1451

Last Calibration Date

Opens a calendar to define the date that the FSW was calibrated. For new instru-
ments, we recommend to enter the factory calibration date specified on the calibration
certificate.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE on page 1450

Next Calibration Due

Opens a calendar to define the date that the FSW needs its next calibration. The rec-
ommended calibration interval is specified in a read only field next to this input field.
This date must always be configured by the customer due to ISO17025.
Remote command:
Set date: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE on page 1450
Recommended interval: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:INTerval?
on page 1450

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 799

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

11.8.2 Self-test settings and results

Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Selftest"

If the FSW fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defective
modules.

Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result
is displayed. You can abort a running test.
In case of failure a short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associ-
ated value range and the corresponding test results are indicated.

A running Sequencer process is aborted when you start a self-test.

If you start a self-test remotely, then select "Local" while the test is still running, the
instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed. In this
case, the self-test cannot be aborted.

Remote command:
*TST? on page 899
DIAGnostic:SERVice:STESt:RESult? on page 1406

11.8.3 Calibration signal display

Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Calibration Signal"

As an alternative to the RF input signal from the front panel connector, you can use the
instrument's calibration signal as the input signal, for example to perform service func-
tions on.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 800

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

NONE..........................................................................................................................801
Calibration Frequency RF........................................................................................... 801
└ Spectrum.......................................................................................................801
└ Frequency..................................................................................................... 802
Calibration Frequency MW..........................................................................................802
Calibration Analog Baseband......................................................................................802
└ Calibration Signal Type................................................................................. 802

NONE
Uses the current RF signal at the input, i.e. no calibration signal (default).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1406

Calibration Frequency RF
Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1406
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency on page 1404

Spectrum ← Calibration Frequency RF

Defines whether a broadband or narrowband calibration signal is sent to the RF input.
"Narrowband" Used to calibrate the absolute level of the frontend at 64 MHz.
"Broadband" Used to calibrate the IF filter.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:RF[:SPECtrum] on page 1405

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 801

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

Frequency ← Calibration Frequency RF

Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil-
ter calibration (max. 64 MHz).
For narrowband signals, 64 MHz is sent.

Calibration Frequency MW
Uses the microwave calibration signal as the RF input (for frequencies higher than 8
GHz). This function is used to calibrate the YIG-filter on the microwave converter. The
microwave calibration signal is pulsed.
You can define whether the distance between input pulses is small or wide.
Note: For FSW85 models, you can use a microwave calibration signal with a spectrum
of 43.5 GHz, or a wideband signal that covers the complete 85 GHz bandwidth. You
can define the frequency of the microwave calibration signal. The firmware adapts the
defined value to the next possible valid value.

Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1406
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC[:DISTance] on page 1403
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:CFRequency on page 1403
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:MC:RANGe on page 1404

Calibration Analog Baseband

Uses an internal calibration signal as input to the optional "Analog Baseband" inter-
face. This signal is only available if the interface option is installed.
For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface, see the FSW I/Q Analyzer
and I/Q Input User Manual.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 1406

Calibration Signal Type ← Calibration Analog Baseband

Defines the type of calibration signal to be used for the optional "Analog Baseband"
interface.
"AC" 1.5625 MHz square wave AC signal
"DC" DC signal
"DC zero" no signal
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut:AIQ[:TYPE] on page 1405

11.8.4 Service functions

Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Service Function"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 802

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

Using service functions

The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. Incorrect
use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the FSW.
Therefore, only user accounts with administrator rights can use service functions and
many of the functions can only be used after entering a password. These functions are
described in the instrument service manual.

Service Function......................................................................................................... 803

Send............................................................................................................................803
Numeric Mode.............................................................................................................804
Clear History............................................................................................................... 804
Password.................................................................................................................... 804
Clear Results...............................................................................................................804
Save Results............................................................................................................... 804
Result List................................................................................................................... 804

Service Function
Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name.
The selection list includes all functions previously selected (since the last "Clear His-
tory" action).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 1461

Send
Starts the selected service function.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction on page 1461

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 803

FSW General instrument setup
Service functions

Numeric Mode
If activated, the service function is selected by its numeric code. Otherwise, the func-
tion is selected by its textual name.

Clear History
Deletes the list of previously selected service functions.

Password
Most service functions require a special password as they may disrupt normal opera-
tion of the FSW. There are different levels of service functions, depending on how
restrictive their use is handled. Each service level has a different password.
"Reset Password" clears any previously entered password and returns to the most
restrictive service level.
Remote command:
SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 1462
SYSTem:PASSword:RESet on page 1463

Clear Results
Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete on page 1461

Save Results
Saves the results of all previously performed service functions to a file stored as
C:\R_S\INSTR\results\Servicelog.txt.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:SAVE on page 1461

Result List
The Results List indicates the status and results of the executed service functions.

11.8.5 Hardware diagnostics

In case problems occur with the instrument hardware, some diagnostic tools provide
information that may support troubleshooting.
The hardware diagnostics tools are available in the "Hardware Diagnostics" tab of the
"Service" dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 804

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Relays Cycle Counter................................................................................................. 805

Relays Cycle Counter

The hardware relays built into the FSW may fail after a large number of switching
cycles (see specifications document). The counter indicates how many switching
cycles the individual relays have performed since they were installed.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt? on page 1449

11.9 Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling"
Each of the applications of the FSW is usually treated as an independent entity regard-
ing their configuration: changing a setting in one measurement channel does not auto-
matically change the corresponding setting in another channel.
For example, changing the frequency in the spectrum application does not, by default,
change the frequency in the vector signal analysis (VSA) application.
However, sharing settings can be convenient for certain measurement tasks. The FSW
provides a tool to couple (or synchronize) selected parameters across applications -
the coupling manager.
The coupling managers allows you not only to couple parameters, but also markers
and lines accross applications.
● General parameter coupling..................................................................................806
● User-defined parameter coupling..........................................................................808
● Generator coupling................................................................................................812
● How to synchronize parameters............................................................................814
● Example for a user-defined parameter coupling................................................... 816

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 805

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

11.9.1 General parameter coupling

Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "General"

The "General" tab of the coupling manager contains several parameters that you can
couple across all (active) measurement channels - if the channel supports the corre-
sponding parameter.

When you couple a parameter across all active measurement channels, a change in
the currently selected application is passed on to all other active measurement chan-
nels.

In MSRA mode, the data is captured by the MSRA primary only. Thus, parameter cou-
pling is not available for data acquisition parameters. However, it can be useful to cou-
ple time or frequency markers between applications. Thus, you can easily determine
effects that occur at the same time or frequency in different measurement views.
Note that the accuracy of time marker couplings is ±1 sample.

Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels....................................806

Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms.................................................................... 808
Restoring the default configuration............................................................................. 808

Synchronizing parameters across all measurement channels

To synchronize a specific parameter, turn on the corresponding function.
Note that you cannot synchronize all parameters at the same time, because some
parameters are interdependent. For example, you cannot synchronize the resolution
and video bandwidth simultaneously, because the video bandwidth depends on the
resolution bandwidth and vice versa.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 806

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

"Center Frequency"
Synchronizes the center frequency
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:CENTer on page 1465
"Start / Stop Frequency"
Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for measurements in the
frequency domain
Note: The start and stop frequencies can automatically change when
you change another frequency parameter (such as center frequency
or span).
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:SPAN on page 1468
"Reference Synchronizes the reference level
Level" Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:RLEVel on page 1468
"Attenuation"
Synchronizes the attenuation
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:ATTen on page 1464
"Preamplifier"
Synchronizes the gain of the optional preamplifier
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN on page 1466
"Amplitude Unit"
Synchronizes the unit of the level axis
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:AUNit on page 1465
"Video Bandwidth"
Synchronizes the video bandwidth
Note: You cannot synchronize the video bandwidth and the resolution
bandwidth is not possible.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:VBW on page 1469
"Resolution Bandwidth"
Synchronizes the measurement bandwidth
Note: You cannot synchronize the video bandwidth and the resolution
bandwidth simultaneously.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth on page 1465

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 807

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

"Limit Lines"
Activates the limit line over all channels
Note: Limit lines are only synchronized over channels if the limit line
is compatible to the channel configuration (especially units of the x-
and y-axis).
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:LIMit on page 1467
"AC DC Coupling"
Synchronizes the Input Coupling
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC on page 1464
"Impedance"
Synchronizes the impedance for RF input
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance on page 1466
"Analog Baseband Impedance"
Synchronizes the impedance for analog baseband input
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance on page 1463

Selecting all or no coupling mechanisms

Select all items available in the general coupling manager using "Enable All Items".
Note that you cannot actually select all items, because some of them are mutually
exclusive.
Deselect all items available in the coupling manager using "Disable All Items".
Remote command:
not supported

Restoring the default configuration

You can restore the default parameter coupling configuration any time with "Default
Config".
Remote command:
not supported

11.9.2 User-defined parameter coupling

Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling" > "User Coupling"

User couplings allow you to synchronize user-defined parameters, as well as markers
and lines, between measurement channels.
Compared to the predefined couplings, user couplings do not necessarily have to syn-
chronize all active measurement channels. Instead you can define specific channels
that are synchronized with each other, in any combination, while other channels remain
independent.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 808

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Example:
You currently run two instances of the Spectrum application, two instances of the VSA
application, and one instance of the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod application.
You can synchronize only the first instance of the Spectrum application with the first
instance of the VSA application, while the other three channels remain independent.
Alternatively, you can synchronize all instances of the VSA application, while the Spec-
trum and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod applications remain independent.

Any existing user-defined couplings are displayed in the dialog box.

Index........................................................................................................................... 809
Edit coupling definition................................................................................................ 809
Parameter 1 / Parameter 2..........................................................................................810
State............................................................................................................................810
Direction...................................................................................................................... 810
Delete coupling definition............................................................................................ 810
Info.............................................................................................................................. 810
Delete All.....................................................................................................................810
Add New User Coupling..............................................................................................810
└ Category........................................................................................................811
└ Channel 1 / Channel 2.................................................................................. 811
└ Specifics for Window.....................................................................................811
└ Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2.................................................... 811
└ Couple Selected Parameters........................................................................ 812

Index
Index of the user-defined parameter coupling, used to identify the definition in remote
operation.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NUMBers:LIST? on page 1475

Edit coupling definition

Opens a dialog box to edit the selected coupling. See "Add New User Coupling"
on page 810.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc> on page 1469

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 809

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Parameter 1 / Parameter 2
The coupled parameters, markers, or lines.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 1473

State
Enables or disables the coupling.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe on page 1476

Direction
Determines which parameter controls the other.
"<-" Parameter 2 controls parameter 1. If parameter 2 is changed, param-
eter 1 is adapted. If parameter 1 is changed, parameter 2 remains
unchanged.
Remote command:
INST:COUP:USER:REL RTOL
"->" Parameter 1 controls parameter 2. If parameter 1 is changed, param-
eter 2 is adapted. If parameter 2 is changed, parameter 1 remains
unchanged.
Remote command:
INST:COUP:USER:REL LTOR
"<->" Both parameters are equal. If one parameter is changed, the other
parameter is adapted and vice versa.
Remote command:
INST:COUP:USER:REL BID

Delete coupling definition

Deletes the selected coupling definition permanently.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove on page 1476

Info
Shows information for the selected coupling, for example, restrictions regarding the
coupling.
Note that usually, no information is displayed.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:INFO on page 1472

Delete All
Deletes all current coupling definitions. Parameters are no longer coupled.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:REMove on page 1476

Add New User Coupling

Opens a dialog box to create a new user-defined coupling definition.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 810

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? on page 1473

Category ← Add New User Coupling

Selects the category of parameters to be displayed in the Coupling Element 1 / Cou-
pling Element 2 selection list.

Channel 1 / Channel 2 ← Add New User Coupling

Selects the channels for which the parameters are coupled. Only active channels are
available for selection. If no other active measurement channels have the selected
parameter, "Channel 2" is not available.
The following selections are possible:
● Individual channels
● All channels of the same type
● All channels
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:CHANnel:LIST? on page 1471

Specifics for Window ← Add New User Coupling

Selects the windows of the selected channel for which the parameters are coupled.
This setting is only available for AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels. Individual win-
dows can only be coupled for frequency markers.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:WINDow:LIST? on page 1477

Coupling Element 1 / Coupling Element 2 ← Add New User Coupling

Defines the parameter or marker to be coupled. All available elements in the selected
applications are displayed. If no other active measurement channels have the selected
"Coupling Element 1", "Coupling Element 2" is not available.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 811

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? on page 1471

Couple Selected Parameters ← Add New User Coupling

Closes the dialog box and adds the new user-defined coupling definition to the list.

11.9.3 Generator coupling

You cannot only couple parameters between FSW applications, but also between the
FSW and a connected signal generator. Coupling parameters is especially useful when
you use the SCPI recorder and need to include generator commands (see "Combined
Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator" on page 850).

IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator................................................... 813

└ 123/ABC........................................................................................................813
└ Password...................................................................................................... 813
Connect/Disconnect.................................................................................................... 813
Coupling State.............................................................................................................813
Center Frequency....................................................................................................... 814
Generator Frequency Offset........................................................................................814
Reference level........................................................................................................... 814
Generator Reference Level Offset.............................................................................. 814

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 812

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the FSW via
LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Section 4.3.2.21, "Device
ID", on page 63, or the signal generator's user documentation.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see the FSW User Manual or
the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the
connection information.
The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred
between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in
the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time.
Select "Test Connection" on page 796 to establish a temporary connection from the
FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provi-
ded for information only.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1460

123/ABC ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".

Password ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.

Connect/Disconnect
The FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or disconnects it.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed:
● Device type
● Name and serial number
● Connection state
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1460
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459

Coupling State
Enables or disables coupling between the FSW and a connected signal generator.
Note that only one channel can control a generator at any time. If a measurement
channel already has control of the connected generator and you enable parameter
coupling, the control is disabled in the other channel.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:STATe on page 1479

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 813

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

Center Frequency
Couples the center frequency of the connected signal generator to the FSW.
This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer[:STATe] on page 1478

Generator Frequency Offset

Defines a fixed offset to the center frequency of the FSW for the coupled signal gener-
ator.
This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:CENTer:OFFSet on page 1478

Reference level
Couples the reference level of the connected signal generator to the FSW.
This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel[:STATe] on page 1479

Generator Reference Level Offset

Defines a fixed offset to the reference level of the FSW for the coupled signal genera-
tor.
This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled.
Remote command:
INSTrument:COUPle:GENerator:RLEVel:OFFSet on page 1478

11.9.4 How to synchronize parameters

Access: [SETUP] > "Parameter Coupling"

User-defined couplings allow you to couple parameters other than those available in
the "General" tab of the coupling manager. Thus, you can create highly customized
couplings between measurement channels.
Compared to the predefined couplings, user couplings do not necessarily have to syn-
chronize all active measurement channels. Instead you can define specific channels
that are synchronized with each other, in any combination, while other channels remain
independent.

How to use predefined parameter couplings

1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Parameter Coupling".

3. In the "General" tab, set the parameter you want to synchronize over all measure-
ment channels to "On".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 814

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

4. Close the dialog box.

How to create user-defined parameter couplings

1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Parameter Coupling".

3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.

4. Select "Add New User Coupling".

5. From the "Channel 1" list, select the channels or type of channel to couple.

6. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select the parameter or marker to couple for
the selected measurement channels.
To shorten the list and restrict it to a certain type of parameters, select a "Category"
first.

7. For AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels and frequency markers only, select the
individual windows (in the frequency domain) to couple.

8. To couple specific channels rather than all channels of a type:

a) Select the second channel for coupling from the "Channel 2" list
b) Select the parameter to which the first parameter is coupled from the "Coupling
Element 2" list.
c) For AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels and frequency markers only, select
the individual windows (in the frequency domain) from the second AM/FM/PM
Analog Demod channel to couple.

9. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".

The "Add New User Coupling" dialog box is closed, and the new user-defined cou-
pling is added to the list in the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.

10. If specific channels are coupled, select the "Direction" to define which channel con-
trols the other, that is: in which channel the parameter is adapted if the other is
changed.

11. Close the dialog box.

From now on, if you change a coupled parameter in one channel, the parameter in
the coupled channel or channels is set to the same value.

How to edit user-defined parameter couplings

1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Parameter Coupling".

3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.

4. Select the "Edit" icon for the parameter coupling you want to edit.

5. Continue as described in How to create user-defined parameter couplings, step 5.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 815

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

How to deactivate user-defined parameter couplings

1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Parameter Coupling".

3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.

4. To deactivate the coupling temporarily, without deleting the coupling definition

entirely, set the "State" of the coupling to "Off".
To delete the coupling permanently, select the "Delete" icon for the parameter cou-
pling you want to remove.

5. Close the dialog box.

11.9.5 Example for a user-defined parameter coupling

Currently two Spectrum application channels are active, one I/Q analyzer channel, and
two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels.

Synchronizing all Spectrum channels

The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all
Spectrum application channels, while the I/Q analyzer and AM/FM/PM Analog Demod
applications remain independent.
1. Select [SETUP].

2. Select "Parameter Coupling".

3. Select the "User Coupling" tab.

4. Select "Add New User Coupling".

5. From the "Channel 1" list, select "All Spectrum".

6. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Center Frequency".

7. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".

8. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.

9. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Center Frequency" to 1 GHz.

10. Switch to the second Spectrum channel.

The center frequency in the second Spectrum channel is also set to 1 GHz.

Synchronizing specific channels

The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the attenuation only for the
first Spectrum channel and the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel, while the other
three channels remain independent.
1. Select "Add New User Coupling".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 816

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "Spectrum 1".

3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Attenuation".

4. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 1".

5. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Attenuation".

6. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".

7. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.

8. In the first Spectrum channel, change the "Attenuation" to 15 dB.

9. Switch to the first AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel.

The attenuation in the second AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channel is also set to
15 dB.

Synchronizing markers in AM/FM/PM Analog Demod windows

Now you have two AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels. AnaDemod1 has an FM
Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window. AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an
RF Time Domain window. Only when the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum win-
dow is moved, the marker in the RF Spectrum window is to move to the same position.
1. Select "Add New User Coupling".

2. From the "Channel 1" list, select "AnaDemod 1".

3. From the "Coupling Element 1" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".

4. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the FM Spectrum
window).

5. From the "Channel 2" list, select "AnaDemod 2".

6. From the "Coupling Element 2" list, select "Frequency Marker 1".

7. From the "Specifics for Window" list, select window "1" (which is the RF Spectrum
window).

8. Select "Couple Selected Parameters".

9. In the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box, for the coupling definition for the frequency
markers in the AM/FM/PM Analog Demod channels, select the "Direction": "->"

10. Close the "Parameter Coupling" dialog box.

11. In the first AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum to
900 MHz.
In the second AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum is
also at 900 MHz.

12. In the second AnaDemod channel, set the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum to
1100 MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 817

FSW General instrument setup
Synchronizing measurement channel configuration

In the first AnaDemod channel, the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum is still at
900 MHz.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 818

FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

12 Network operation and remote control

In addition to working with the FSW interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is
also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote
operation are supported:
● Connecting the instrument to a (LAN) network
● Using the web browser interface in a LAN network
● Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network
● Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface (requires the "Additional Interfaces" hard-
ware option R&S FSW-B5)
Basic information on operating the FSW via remote control is provided here. This infor-
mation applies to all applications and operating modes on the FSW.

For additional information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following
documents available from the Rohde & Schwarz website:
● Remote control via SCPI
● 1EF62: Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Network Analyzers
● 1MA171: How to use Rohde & Schwarz Instruments in MATLAB
● 1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP

How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Section 12.7, "How to
set up a network and remote control", on page 873.
● Remote control interfaces and protocols...............................................................819
● Status reporting system........................................................................................ 825
● GPIB languages.................................................................................................... 838
● The IECWIN tool................................................................................................... 840
● Automating tasks with remote command scripts...................................................841
● Network and remote control settings.....................................................................854
● How to set up a network and remote control.........................................................873

12.1 Remote control interfaces and protocols

The instrument supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control. The fol-
lowing table gives an overview.

For a description of the protocols refer to Remote control via SCPI.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 819

 FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

Table 12-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols

Inter- Protocols, VISA*) address string Port **) Remarks

face

Local HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) TCP port: 4880 A LAN connector is located
Area TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] on the rear panel of the
Net- instrument.
work VXI-11 TCP or UDP port: 111
(LAN)
TCPIP::host address::inst0[::INSTR] TCP port: well-known ports (600
- 1023) for Linux or registered
Library: VISA
ports (1024 - 49151) for Windows

socket communication (Raw Ethernet, simple Telnet) SCPI raw, TCP port: 5025, 5125
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name]:: SCPI telnet, TCP port: 5024,
<port>::SOCKET 5124
Library: VISA or socket controller

VNC via VNC client: 5800/5900

Device web: 5850

Device web / web control 80

GPIB VISA*) address string: A GPIB bus interface

(IEC/ GPIB::primary address[::INSTR] according to the IEC 625.1/
IEEE IEEE 488.1 standard is
Bus (no secondary address) located on the rear panel of
Inter- the instrument.
face)

USB VISA*) address string: USB connectors are loca-

USB::<vendor ID>::<product_ID>:: ted on the front and rear
<serial_number>[::INSTR] panel of the instrument.

*) VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA

installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces.
**) By default, FSW use these ports for communication via LAN control interface. If necessary, adapt your firewall to allow for use of

these ports.

Within this interface description, the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC/IEEE
bus interface.

12.1.1 LAN interface

To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting

of a connector, a network interface card and protocols. The network card can be oper-
ated with the following interfaces:
● 10 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3
● 100 Mbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3u
● 1Gbit/s Ethernet IEEE 802.3ab
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the
LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected
using a commercial RJ45 cable (shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5). The

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 820

FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the
instrument. Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be
installed on the controller.

IP address
Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection.
The host address is part of the "VISA resource string" used by the programs to identify
and control the instrument.
The VISA resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where:
● TCPIP designates the network protocol used
● host address is the IP address or host name of the device
● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstru-
ment;
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (default)
– hislip0 selects the HiSLIP protocol
● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
● port determines the used port number
● SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class

Example:
● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11
protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
● The DNS host name is FSW13-123456; the valid resource string using HiSLIP is:
TCPIP::FSW13-123456::hislip0
● A raw socket connection can be established using:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET

Identifying instruments in a network

If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
the resource string.

For details on configuring the LAN connection, see Section 12.7, "How to set up a net-
work and remote control", on page 873.
● LAN web browser interface................................................................................... 822

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 821

FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

12.1.1.1 LAN web browser interface

The LAN web browser interface allows for easy configuration of the LAN and remote
control of the FSW without additional installation requirements.
The instrument's LAN web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant
browsers.
Via the web browser interface to the FSW you can control the instrument remotely from
another PC. Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation.
File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available.
Using this feature, several users can access and operate the FSW simultaneously.
This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes.
For details, see Section 12.7.1.4, "How to configure the LAN using the web browser
interface", on page 878 and Section 12.7.5, "How to control the FSW via the web
browser interface", on page 884.

If you do not want other users in the LAN to be able to access and operate the FSW
you can deactivate this function.
See Section 12.7.6, "How to deactivate the web browser interface", on page 885.

Restrictions
Only user accounts with administrator rights can use the LAN web browser functional-
ity.

To display the LAN web browser interface

► In the address field of the browser on your PC, type the host name or IP address of
the instrument, for example: http://10.113.10.203.
The instrument home page (welcome page) opens.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 822

FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements:
● "LAN"
– "Home" opens the instrument home page.
The home page displays device information, including the VISA resource string
in read-only format.
"Device Indicator" allows you to physically identify the instrument. This is useful
if you have several instruments and want to know which instrument the LAN
home page belongs to. To identify the instrument, activate the "Device Indica-
tor". Then check the "LAN Status" indicator of the instruments.
– "LAN Configuration" allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a
ping.
(See "LAN configuration" on page 879.)
– "Utilities" provides access to an event log.
● "Instrument Control"
– "Web Control" provides remote access to the instrument via VNC (no installa-
tion required). Manual instrument controls are available via the front panel sim-
ulation.
– "File Download" downloads files from the instrument.
– "File Upload" uploads files to the instrument.
(See step 4.)
● "License Manager"

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 823

FSW Network operation and remote control
Remote control interfaces and protocols

– "License Manager" allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to acti-
vate, register or unregister licenses.
● "Help"
"www.rohde-schwarz.com" opens the Rohde & Schwarz home page.

12.1.2 GPIB interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 bus interface)

A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument.

By connecting a PC to the FSW via the GPIB connection you can send remote com-
mands to control and operate the instrument.
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller
must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the pro-
gram libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller.
The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address (see Sec-
tion 12.7.1.5, "How to change the GPIB instrument address", on page 880). You can
set the GPIB address and the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI
by default and cannot be changed for the FSW.

Notes and Conditions

In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following:
● Up to 15 instruments can be connected
● The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less; the cable length between two instruments should not
exceed 2 m.
● A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel.
● Any connected IEC-bus cables should be terminated by an instrument or controller.

12.1.3 USB interface

For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be con-
nected via the USB type B interface.
(Note: the USB type B interface is not available for instruments with CPU board
1206.3874.00 or higher.)
A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed. VISA detects and config-
ures the R&S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established. You
do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver.

USB address
The used USB address string is:
USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR]
where:
● <vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz (0x0AAD)

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 824

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

● <product ID> is the product ID for the Rohde & Schwarz instrument
● <serial number> is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
Table 12-2: Product IDs for FSW

Instrument model Product ID

FSW8 C6

FSW13 C7

FSW26 C8

FSW43 CA

FSW50 CB

FSW67 CC

FSW85 CD

Example:
USB::0x0AAD::0x00C7::100001::INSTR
0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz
0x00C7 is the product ID for the FSW13
100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument

12.2 Status reporting system

The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface
using the STATus... commands.
(See Section 13.11, "Using the status register", on page 1483).
For details on the status reporting system, see Remote control via SCPI.
● Hierarchy of status registers................................................................................. 825
● Contents of the status registers............................................................................ 826
● Reset values of the status reporting system......................................................... 837

12.2.1 Hierarchy of status registers

As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 825

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

& logic AND 15 not used 15 not used 15 not used 15 not used
of all bits
logic OR 14 14 14 14
one register for 13 13 13 13
*)
each channel
12 Self-alignment info 12 12 12
11 11 11 11
10 Range completed 10 10 10
Multi-Standard Capture
9 9 9 9
Finish
8 HCOPy in progress 8 GAP ACLR FAIL 8 8
7 7 CACLR FAIL 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL 7 LIMit 8 FAIL
6 6 ALT3...11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL 6 LIMit 7 FAIL
5 Waiting for TRIGger 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL 5 LIMit 6 FAIL
4 MEASuring 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL 4 LIMit 5 FAIL
3 SWEeping 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL 3 LIMit 4 FAIL
2 2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL 2 LIMit 3 FAIL
1 1 ADJ LOWer FAIL 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL 1 LIMit 2 FAIL
SRQ
0 CALibrating 0 ADJ UPPer FAIL 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL 0 LIMit 1 FAIL
STATus:OPERation STAT:QUES:ACPLimit *) STAT:QUES:LMARgin<n> *) STAT:QUES:LIMit<n> *)
& 7
6 RQS/MSS
& 5 ESB 15 not used
& 4 MAV 15 not used
15 not used ...
& 3 ...
15 not used
... 9
& 2 14 DIQ 9
9 8
1 13 8
8 NO REF 7
0 12 ACPLimit 7
7 6
SRE STB 11 SYNC 6
6 5
10 LMARGin 5
5 4
9 LIMit 4
4 3 INPUT OVLD
8 CALibration (=UNCAL) 3
3 2 OVLD
& 7 2
2 1
& 6 1
1 LO UNLocked 0 OVERload
& 5 FREQuency 0 Frontend temp. error
0 OVEN COLD STAT:QUES:POWer *)
& 4 TEMPerature STAT:QUES:TEMPerature *)
STAT:QUES:FREQuency *)
& 3 POWer
& 2 TIME
1
0 EXTended 15 not used 15 not used
15 not used
PPE ... ... ...
STATus:QUEStionable
5 5 5
ISTflag 4 4 4 FATal
& 7 Power On 3
3 3 ERRor
& 6 User Request 2
2 2 WARNing
& 5 Command Error 1 INFO
1 Sweep time too low 1 INFO
& 4 Execution Error 0
0 0 MESSage
Device Dependent
& 3
Error STAT:QUES:TIME *) STAT:QUES:EXTended *) STAT:QUES:EXTended:INFO *)
& 2 Query Error
& 1
Error/ Event Output & 0 Operation Complete
Queue Buffer
ESE ESR

Figure 12-1: Graphical overview of the FSW status registers hierarchy

All status registers have the same internal structure.

12.2.2 Contents of the status registers

In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more
detail.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 826

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register
The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register is used for digital I/Q data from the
optional Digital Baseband Interface and is described in the FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q
Input User Manual.

STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register
The STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register is used by the FSW applications and is
described in the individual sections (manuals) for each application.

● Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)..............................827

● IST flag and parallel poll enable register (PPE).................................................... 828
● Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)....................828
● STATus:OPERation register..................................................................................829
● STATus:QUEStionable register............................................................................. 830
● STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register............................................................. 832
● STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register........................................................... 832
● STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register..................................................833
● STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register........................................................ 833
● STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register.................................................................... 834
● STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register............................................................. 835
● STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register................................................................ 835
● STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register.......................................................836
● STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register....................................................................837

12.2.2.1 Status byte (STB) and service request enable register (SRE)

The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over-
view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis-
ters. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status
byte.
The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and
assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is
set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service
request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read
using the command *SRE?.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 827

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Table 12-3: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte

Bit No. Meaning

0...1 Not used

2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and
specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error mes-
sage. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems
involved with remote control.

3 QUEStionable status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be speci-
fied in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.

4 MAV bit (message available)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be
used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.

5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set
and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which
can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.

6 MSS bit (main status summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits
of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.

7 STATus:OPERation status register summary bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated
ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The
type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.

12.2.2.2 IST flag and parallel poll enable register (PPE)

As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It
can be read by means of a parallel poll or using the command *IST?.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to
the IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE,
with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the
"ORing" of all results. The PPE can be set using commands *PRE and read using com-
mand *PRE?.

12.2.2.3 Event status register (ESR) and event status enable register (ESE)

The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI
register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE
and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set.
The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command
*ESE?.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 828

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Table 12-4: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.

1 Not used

2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument
instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.

3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between
-300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue.

4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in
greater detail, is entered into the error queue.

5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error
message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is
entered into the error queue.

6 User Request
This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.

7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set on switching on the instrument.

12.2.2.4 STATus:OPERation register

The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the

FSW. It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last
read out.
You can read out the register with STATus:OPERation:CONDition? or STATus:
OPERation[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-5: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a self-alignment.

1-2 Not used

3 SWEeping
Sweep is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 4
In applications, this bit is not used.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 829

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Bit No. Meaning

4 MEASuring
Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3
In applications, this bit is not used.

5 Waiting for TRIgger

Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal.

6-7 Not used

8 HardCOPy in progress
This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.

9 For data acquisition in MSRA/MSRT mode only:

Multi-Standard capture finish
This bit is set if a data acquisition measurement was completed successfully in MSRA/MSRT
operating mode and data is available for evaluation.
For details on the MSRT operating mode see the FSW "Real-Time Spectrum" Application and
MSRT Operating Mode User Manual.

10 Range completed
This bit is set when a range in the sweep list is completed if "Stop after Sweep" is enabled (see
"Stop After Sweep" on page 289).

11 Not used

12 Self-alignment overdue

13-14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.5 STATus:QUEStionable register

The STATus:QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do

not meet the specifications.

The STAT:QUES:SYNC register is used by the applications and is thus described in the
individual applications' User Manuals.

You can read out the register with STAT:QUES:COND or STAT:QUES:EVEN.

The STATus:QUEStionable register "sums up" the information from all subregisters
(e.g. bit 2 sums up the information for all STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe registers).
For some subregisters, there may be separate registers for each active channel. Thus,
if a status bit in the STATus:QUEStionable register indicates an error, the error may
have occurred in any of the channel-specific subregisters. In this case, you must check
the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error. By
default, querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently
selected channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 830

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Table 12-6: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit No. Meaning

0 "EXTended"
This bit indicates further status information not covered by the other status registers in any of
the active channels.

1 Unused

2 "TIMe"
This bit is set if a time error occurs in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register provides more information on the error type.

3 "POWer"
This bit is set if the measured power level in any of the active channels is questionable.
The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register provides more information on the error type.

4 "TEMPerature"
This bit is set if the temperature is questionable.

5 "FREQuency"
This bit is set if there is anything wrong with the frequency of the local oscillator or the reference
frequency in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register provides more information on the error type.

6-7 Unused

8 "CALibration"
This bit is set if the FSW is unaligned ("UNCAL" display)

9 "LIMit" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register provides more information on the error type.

10 "LMARgin" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated in any of the active channels in any window.
The STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register provides more information on the error type.

11 "SYNC" (device-specific)
This bit is set if the FSW is not synchronized to the signal that is applied.
The FSW is not synchronized if:
● it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement
● it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement
● the results deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements

12 "ACPLimit" (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit during ACLR measurements is violated in any of the active channels.
The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register provides more information on the error type.

13 Unused

14 Digital I/Q (device-specific)

This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the optional Digital Baseband Interface.
For details see the FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual.

15 This bit is always 0.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 831

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

12.2.2.6 STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register

The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of

a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for
each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition?
or STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]?
Table 12-7: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 ADJ UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper adjacent channel

1 ADJ LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower adjacent channel.

2 ALT1 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 1st alternate channel.

3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel.

4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel.

5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel.

6 ALT3 … 11 LOWer/UPPer FAIL

This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 … 11.

7 CACLR FAIL
This bit is set if the CACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.

8 GAP ACLR FAIL

This bit is set if the ACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels.

9 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.7 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register

The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register contains further status information

not covered by the other status registers of the FSW. A separate EXTended register
exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:CONDition?
or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended[:EVENt]?

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 832

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Table 12-8: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register

Bit No. Meaning

0 not used

1 INFO
This bit is set if a status message is available for the application.
Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO reg-
ister.

2 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.8 STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register

The STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register contains information on the

type of messages that occur during operation of the FSW. A separate INFO register
exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO[:EVENt]?. You can
query all messages that occur for a specific channel using the command SYSTem:
ERRor:EXTended? on page 1454.
Table 12-9: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO register

Bit No. Meaning

0 MESSage
This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation.

1 INFO
This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application.

2 WARNing
This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement, e.g. the settings no longer
match the displayed results, or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily.

3 ERRor
This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement, e.g. due to missing data or wrong set-
tings, so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly.

4 FATal
This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possi-
ble.

5 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.9 STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register

The STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register contains information about the condi-

tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency. A separate frequency register
exists for each active channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 833

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:

CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVEN COLD
This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO"
is displayed.

1 LO UNLocked
This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks. "LOUNL" is displayed.

2 to 7 Not used

8 EXTernalREFerence
This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable
external reference source.
In that case the synthesizer can not lock. The frequency in all probability is not accurate.

9 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.10 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register

The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register contains information about the results of a

limit check when you are working with limit lines.
A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition?
or STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LIMit 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated.

1 LIMit 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated.

2 LIMit 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.

3 LIMit 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated.

4 LIMit 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated.

5 LIMit 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated.

6 LIMit 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 834

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

Bit No. Meaning

7 LIMit 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated.

8 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.11 STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register

This register contains information about the observance of limit margins.

A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin:CONDition? and
STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin[:EVENt]?.
Table 12-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register

Bit No. Meaning

0 LMARgin 1 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated.

1 LMARgin 2 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated.

2 LMARgin 3 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated.

3 LMARgin 4 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated.

4 LMARgin 5 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated.

5 LMARgin 6 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated.

6 LMARgin 7 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated.

7 LMARgin 8 FAIL
This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated.

8 to 14 Not used

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.12 STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register

The STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register contains information about possible

overload situations that may occur during operation of the FSW. A separate power reg-
ister exists for each active channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 835

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? or

STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
Table 12-13: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register

Bit No. Meaning

0 OVERload
This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing
damage to the device.
The FSW displays the keyword "RF OVLD".

1 Unused

2 IF_OVerload
This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path.
The FSW displays the keyword "OVLD".

3 Input Overload
This bit is set if the signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the maximum.
The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device. In order to re-enable
measurement, decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the
mixer input.
For details on the protection mechanism see "RF Input Protection" on page 365 or INPut:
ATTenuation:PROTection:RESet on page 1113.
The FSW displays the keyword "INPUT OVLD".

4 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.2.13 STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register

The STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register contains information about possible

temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the FSW. A separate tem-
perature register exists for each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:
CONDition? or STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?
Table 12-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register

Bit No. Meaning

0 This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self-
alignment temperature.
During warmup, this bit is always 1.
For details see "Temperature check" on page 729.

1 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 836

FSW Network operation and remote control
Status reporting system

12.2.2.14 STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register

The STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register contains information about possible time

errors that may occur during operation of the FSW. A separate time register exists for
each active channel.
You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:TIME:CONDition? or
STATus:QUEStionable:TIME[:EVENt]?
Table 12-15: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register

Bit No. Meaning

0 not used

1 Sweep time too low

This bit is set if the sweep time is too low.

2 to 14 Unused

15 This bit is always 0.

12.2.3 Reset values of the status reporting system

The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does
not change the instrument settings.
Table 12-16: Resetting the status reporting system

Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Tem:PRE Set
Power-On-Status- (Device
Set
Clear Clear,
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)

Clear STB, ESR - yes - - - yes

Clear SRE, ESE - yes - - - -

Clear PPE - yes - - - -

Clear EVENt parts of the regis- - yes - - - yes

ters

Clear ENABle parts of all - yes - - yes -

OPERation and QUEStionable
registers;
Fill ENABle parts of all other
registers with "1".

Fill PTRansition parts with "1"; - yes - - yes -

Clear NTRansition parts

Clear error queue yes yes - - - yes

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 837

FSW Network operation and remote control
GPIB languages

Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS

voltage SDC SYS- Tus:PRE-
Power-On-Status- (Device Tem:PRE Set
Clear Clear, Set
Selected
Device
Effect 0 1
Clear)

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)

Clear command processing yes yes yes - - -

and input buffer

1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA-
TOR> clears the output buffer.

12.3 GPIB languages

The FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands used by other
devices. Thus it can emulate other devices in order to use existing remote control pro-
grams.
The device model to be emulated is selected manually using "SETUP > Network +
Remote > GPIB tab > Language". Via the GPIB interface using the SYSTem:
LANGuage on page 1494 command.
In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB
"Language" setting, you can modify the identification string received in response to the
ID command ("Identification String" setting). Thus, any device model whose command
set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated.

Supported languages

Language Comment

SCPI

71100C Compatible to 8566A/B

71200C Compatible to 8566A/B

71209A Compatible to 8566A/B

8560E

8561E

8562E

8563E

8564E

8565E

8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 838

FSW Network operation and remote control
GPIB languages

Language Comment

8566B

8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8568B Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument

8591E Compatible to 8594E

8594E Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules
regarding the command structure.

PSA89600

PSA

PXA

R&S FSEA

R&S FSEB

R&S FSEM

R&S FSEK

R&S FSP

R&S FSQ

R&S FSU

R&S FSV

Notes:
● If you select a language other than "SCPI", the GPIB address is set to 18 if it was
20 before.
● The Start/stop frequency, reference level and number of sweep points are adapted
to the selected instrument model.
● For R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation, HP commands are not automatically also
allowed. In this case, set HP Additional to ON.
● When you switch between remote control languages, the following settings or
changes are made:
SCPI:
The instrument performs a PRESET.
8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK:
– The instrument performs a PRESET.
– The following instrument settings are changed:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 839

FSW Network operation and remote control
The IECWIN tool

Table 12-17: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM;
FSEK instruments

Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling
Points

8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC

8568A/B 1001 0 Hz 1.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8560E 601 0 Hz 2.9 GHz 0 dBm AC

8561E 601 0 Hz 6.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8562E 601 0 Hz 13.2 GHz 0 dBm AC

8563E 601 0 Hz 26.5 GHz 0 dBm AC

8564E 601 0 Hz 40 GHz 0 dBm AC

8565E 601 0 Hz 50 GHz 0 dBm AC

8594E 401 0 Hz 3 GHz 0 dBm AC

FSEA 500 0 Hz 3.5 GHz -20 dBm AC

FSEB 500 0 Hz 7 GHz -20 dBm AC

FSEM 500 0 Hz 26.5 GHz -20 dBm AC

FSEK 500 0 Hz 40 GHz -20 dBm AC

Note: The stop frequency indicated in the table may be limited to the corresponding
frequency of the FSW, if required.

12.4 The IECWIN tool

The FSW is delivered with IECWIN installed, an auxiliary tool provided free of charge
by R&S. IECWIN is a program to send SCPI commands to a measuring instrument
either interactively or from a command script.

The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a
future version without notice.

IECWIN offers the following features:

● Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe
(if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB)
● Interactive command entry
● Browsing available commands on the instrument
● Error checking following every command
● Execution of command scripts
● Storing binary data to a file
● Reading binary data from a file

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 840

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

● Generation of a log file

For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features:
● Synchronization with the instrument on every command
● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value)
● Checking for expected errors codes
● Optional pause on error
● Nested command scripts
● Single step mode
● Conditional execution, based on the *IDN and *OPT strings

You can use the IECWIN to try out the programming examples provided in the FSW
User Manuals.

Starting IECWIN
IECWIN is available from the Windows "Start" menu on the FSW, or by executing the
following file:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\iecwin32.exe
You can also copy the program to any Windows PC or laptop. Simply copy the
iecwin32.exe, iecwin.chm and rsib32.dll files from the location above to the
same folder on the target computer.
When the tool is started, a "Connection settings" dialog box is displayed. Define the
connection from the computer the IECWIN tool is installed on to the FSW you want to
control. If you are using the tool directly on the FSW, you can use an NT Pipe (COM
Parser) connection, which requires no further configuration. For help on setting up
other connection types, check the tool's online help (by clicking the "Help" button in the
dialog box).

The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the
tool.

12.5 Automating tasks with remote command scripts

To configure a test setup quickly and make complex test setups or repetitive measure-
ments reproducible, you can automate the required settings with scripts. A script con-
tains a series of SCPI commands corresponding to the settings. When completed, it is
converted to an executable format, saved in a file, and can be run whenever needed.

Creating a SCPI script

Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instru-
ment and then export the script for use on the controller. You can also edit or write a
script manually, using a suitable editor on the controller. For manual creation, the

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 841

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax for the cur-
rent setting value.
You can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument at any time of operation, in the
following ways:
● Recording individual steps manually
In manual recording mode, you can record an individual SCPI command using the
"Add SCPI Command to Recording" function, see "How to record SCPI commands
manually" on page 852.
● Recording all performed steps automatically
The instrument records the SCPI command and settings value of each step you
perform, and then writes the commands to the file system, see "How to record
SCPI commands automatically" on page 851. You can start, stop and resume
automatic recording, and also record individual commands manually.
● Copying commands from the context-sensitive SCPI Recorder menu and pasting
them into an editor
The SCPI Recorder enables you to copy the SCPI command and the current set-
ting shown in the context-sensitive menu and paste them into any suitable editor,
see "To edit a SCPI command list" on page 852.

12.5.1 The context-sensitive SCPI command menu

The SCPI Recorder provides information on the required SCPI command for the avail-
able measurement settings, functions, and results in a context-sensitive menu. The
SCPI command menu is displayed when you tap and hold (right-click) any interface
element that allows you to define a setting, perform a function, or displays results, for
example:
● Softkeys
● Buttons or input fields in dialog boxes
● Traces or markers in a diagram

Figure 12-2: Context-sensitive SCPI command menu for a trace in a result display

The menu provides the syntax of the remote command with the current setting, and
some functions to help you create your script.
Show SCPI result query commands........................................................................... 843
Show SCPI command................................................................................................. 843
└ Copy SCPI Command to Clipboard.............................................................. 843
└ Help...............................................................................................................843
└ Add SCPI Command to Recording............................................................... 843
Help.............................................................................................................................843

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 842

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Show SCPI result query commands

This menu item is displayed if you selected a result display.
All possible commands to query the results in the diagram are displayed. Select the
query command you are interested in to display the SCPI command dialog box, as
described in "Show SCPI command" on page 843.

Figure 12-3: Possible result query commands for an ACLR measurement

Show SCPI command

This menu item is displayed if you selected a setting or function.
A dialog box displays the SCPI command required to perform the setting or function, or
to query the trace or marker results.

Figure 12-4: SCPI command dialog for a trace in a result display

Copy SCPI Command to Clipboard ← Show SCPI command

Copies the command and the current value for the selected setting to the clipboard.

Help ← Show SCPI command

Provides help on the displayed SCPI command, its syntax and possible parameter val-
ues.

Add SCPI Command to Recording ← Show SCPI command

Adds the command and the current value for the selected setting to the recorded SCPI
list.

Help
Provides help on the selected setting, function, or result display, as opposed to the
SCPI command itself. This function is identical to selecting the context-sensitive help
icon in the toolbar and then the interface element.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 843

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

12.5.2 The SCPI recorder

Access: Toolbar
The SCPI Recorder displays a list of the currently recorded commands and provides
functions to create and export a script of SCPI commands. Some additional settings for
recording are provided on a separate tab in the dialog box.

● Recording..............................................................................................................844
● Managing recordings.............................................................................................847
● Recording settings................................................................................................ 849

12.5.2.1 Recording

Auto Recording........................................................................................................... 844

List of recorded commands / script editor................................................................... 845
Remove Last............................................................................................................... 845
Load Recording....................................................................................................... 845
Save........................................................................................................................ 845
Save As...................................................................................................................845
Export......................................................................................................................845
Clear All...................................................................................................................846

Auto Recording
If enabled, the SCPI Recorder automatically records the required SCPI commands and
parameter values for the settings and functions you use while operating the FSW.
To view the list of currently recorded SCPI commands at any time, select the SCPI
Recorder icon in the toolbar.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 844

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Recording is stopped when you deactivate "Auto Recording".

To continue recording, reactivate "Auto Recording".
To start a new SCPI command list, select Clear All before activating "Auto Record-
ing".
Note:
● Some parameters cannot be set by a SCPI command.
● The FSW automatically clears the SCPI command list after booting.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder[:AUTO] on page 1488

List of recorded commands / script editor

The currently recorded commands are displayed in a basic editor directly in the SCPI
Recorder dialog box. Right-click the editor to display a context-sensitive menu with
basic editing functions for the list, such as copy, paste, delete, undo and redo.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:DATA[:ALL]? on page 1488

Remove Last
Deletes the last recorded SCPI command from the list.

Load Recording
Loads an existing script in ASCII format (*.inp) from a file to the script editor. If the
editor contains recorded commands, you must confirm a message to overwrite them. A
file selection dialog box is displayed.

Save
Saves the current SCPI command list to the currently loaded or most recently
saved .inp recording file.

Save As
Saves the current SCPI command list to a new file in the
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings directory in ASCII format with the file exten-
sion .inp.
Tip: You can execute the command list in an .inp file without further editing using the
IECWIN tool provided with the FSW, see Section 12.4, "The IECWIN tool",
on page 840. You can also reload .inp files to the script editor later.

Export
Exports the current SCPI command list to the specified file and directory in the
selected format. By default, the file is stored in the
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings directory. Besides the recorded commands them-
selves, the exported script includes all format-specific header data required to execute
the script using an external program on the controller.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 845

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Before storing the file, you can display a "Preview" of the file in the selected format.
Currently, the following file formats are supported:
"C#" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (*.cs)
"C++" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (*.cpp)
"MATLAB A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing
(Instrument and test and measurement applications (*.m)
Control Tool- You can use this format directly with the MATLAB© Instrument Con-
box)" trol Toolbox.
"MATLAB You can use this format directly with the MATLAB© Toolkit.
(R&S Toolkit)"
"NICVI" An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements
and tests (*.cvi)
You can use this format directly with National Instruments LabWind-
ows CVI.
"Plain SCPI" Represents SCPI base format, that is ASCII format, saved as a text
file (*.inp); contains no additional header data
Use this format to load a recorded script back to the editor later.
"Python" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (.py)
Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:EXPort on page 1490

Clear All
Removes all recorded commands from the current SCPI command list.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 846

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:CLEar on page 1488

12.5.2.2 Managing recordings

You can manage existing recordings in the C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings direc-

tory directly from the SCPI recorder.

Load Recording....................................................................................................... 847

Export......................................................................................................................847
Delete Recording........................................................................................................ 848
Import Recording.....................................................................................................849

Load Recording
Loads an existing script in ASCII format (*.inp) from a file to the script editor. If the
editor contains recorded commands, you must confirm a message to overwrite them. A
file selection dialog box is displayed.

Export
Exports the current SCPI command list to the specified file and directory in the
selected format. By default, the file is stored in the
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiRecordings directory. Besides the recorded commands them-
selves, the exported script includes all format-specific header data required to execute
the script using an external program on the controller.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 847

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Before storing the file, you can display a "Preview" of the file in the selected format.
Currently, the following file formats are supported:
"C#" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (*.cs)
"C++" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (*.cpp)
"MATLAB A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing
(Instrument and test and measurement applications (*.m)
Control Tool- You can use this format directly with the MATLAB© Instrument Con-
box)" trol Toolbox.
"MATLAB You can use this format directly with the MATLAB© Toolkit.
(R&S Toolkit)"
"NICVI" An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements
and tests (*.cvi)
You can use this format directly with National Instruments LabWind-
ows CVI.
"Plain SCPI" Represents SCPI base format, that is ASCII format, saved as a text
file (*.inp); contains no additional header data
Use this format to load a recorded script back to the editor later.
"Python" A commonly used general programming language for various applica-
tions (.py)
Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:EXPort on page 1490

Delete Recording
Deletes the selected recording file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 848

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Import Recording
Imports the specified file to the script editor.

12.5.2.3 Recording settings

Some additional settings are available to configure the exported SCPI command files.
Add Synchronization Commands................................................................................849
Recording Format....................................................................................................... 849
Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator................... 850
IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator................................................... 850
└ 123/ABC........................................................................................................850
└ Password...................................................................................................... 850
Test Connection.......................................................................................................... 850

Add Synchronization Commands

If enabled, additional commands are included in the script to synchronize the recorded
commands when necessary. For instance, when a measurement is started, a *WAI
command is inserted to ensure that the next command is only executed after the mea-
surement has finished.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:SYNC on page 1492

Recording Format
Defines whether the commands are recorded using the short or long SCPI notation.
"Short" The shortform of the keyword is used.
Example: FREQ:CENT
"Long" The entire keyword is used.
Example: FREQuency:CENTer

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 849

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

Remote command:
SYSTem:SRECorder:FORMat on page 1491

Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R&S Signal Generator

Records commands both from the FSW and from a connected Rohde & Schwarz sig-
nal generator.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:RECording:COMBine on page 1492

IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the FSW via
LAN.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see Section 4.3.2.21, "Device
ID", on page 63, or the signal generator's user documentation.
For tips on how to determine the default computer name, see the FSW User Manual or
the signal generator's user documentation.
By default, the IP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".
Note: While a connection to a signal generator is established, you cannot change the
connection information.
The IP address / computer name is maintained after a [PRESET], and is transferred
between applications. However, when you switch applications, the control is disabled in
the other applications. Only one application can control a generator at any time.
Select "Test Connection" on page 796 to establish a temporary connection from the
FSW to the specified signal generator.
If a connection to a signal generator is already configured, the connection data is provi-
ded for information only.
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess on page 1460

123/ABC ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the
"123"/"ABC" button to "ABC".

Password ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator

Enter the password required to operate the connected signal generator.

Test Connection
The FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator.
If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed:
● Device type
● Name and serial number
● Connection state
Remote command:
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1459
CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] on page 1460

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 850

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

12.5.3 How to determine the required SCPI command

The SCPI Recorder provides information on the required SCPI command for the avail-
able measurement settings, functions, and results in a context-sensitive menu.

1. Define the setting or navigate to the function you need the SCPI command for.
To find the query command for trace or marker results, select the result diagram.

2. On the screen, tap and hold, or right-click the measurement setting, function, or
result display.
The context-sensitive menu for that particular setting, function, or result is dis-
played.
Tip: If the SCPI command menu is not displayed, you probably tapped outside of a
softkey or input field, for example in a block diagram. Tap within the corresponding
softkey, button or input field, or in a result display, to display the context-sensitive
SCPI command menu.
3. Select "Show SCPI result query commands" or "Show SCPI command", depending
on which item you selected.
A dialog box with the required command and some functions is displayed.
If multiple commands are possible, for example to query different measurement
results, all possible commands are displayed.

4. To display the SCPI command dialog box for a query command, select the query
command you are interested in from the list.

12.5.4 How to create and export SCPI scripts

Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instru-
ment and then export the script for use on the controller. The SCPI Recorder allows
you to record SCPI command lists either automatically or manually.

How to record SCPI commands automatically

The following procedure explains how to record SCPI commands automatically during
operation.
1. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon.
The SCPI Recorder dialog box is displayed.

2. Select "Auto Recording": "On".

From now on, the commands required to execute all steps you perform on the
instrument are recorded.

3. To query results in the SCPI script:

a) Right-click (or tap and hold) in the result display.
All possible commands to query the results in the diagram are displayed in the
SCPI command menu.
b) Select the results you want to query.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 851

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

c) Select "Add SCPI Command to Recording".

4. To stop SCPI recording, select the SCPI Recorder icon again.

The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the recorded command list is displayed.

5. Select "Auto Recording": "Off".

6. Save the recorded command list to a file for later use.

a) Select "Save As".
b) Define a file name for the script file.

How to record SCPI commands manually

1. Determine the required SCPI command as described in Section 12.5.3, "How to
determine the required SCPI command", on page 851.

2. From the SCPI command dialog box, select "Add SCPI Command to Recording".
The command is added to the SCPI Recorder command list.

3. Repeat these steps for any settings, functions, or results you want to record.

4. To check the progress of the recording, select the SCPI Recorder icon in the tool-
bar.
The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is dis-
played.

5. Save the recorded command list to a file for later use.

a) Select "Save As".
b) Define a file name for the script file.

To edit a SCPI command list

All command lists can be edited after recording, either directly on the instrument or in
any suitable editor on the controller. The following functions describe how to edit the
SCPI command list directly in the SCPI Recorder dialog box.
1. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon.
The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is dis-
played.

2. To load a stored script in ASCII format:

a) Select "Load Recording" in the SCPI Recorder dialog box.
b) If necessary, confirm the message to overwrite existing commands in the edi-
tor.
c) Select the stored *.inp file.
d) Select "Select".
The stored commands are displayed in the editor.

3. To remove the most recently recorded command, select "Remove Last" in the SCPI
Recorder dialog box.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 852

FSW Network operation and remote control
Automating tasks with remote command scripts

4. To remove any other command in the recorded command list:

a) Select the command by tapping it or using the arrow keys.
b) Press [BACK SPACE] on the front panel of the instrument, or press [Delete] on
a connected keyboard.

5. To insert a command within the recorded command list:

a) Define the setting or navigate to the function you want to record.
b) Select "Copy SCPI Command to ClipBoard".
c) Tap and hold or right-click the position in the SCPI command list at which you
want to insert the new command.
d) From the context menu, select "Paste".

6. Select "Save As" to store the changes to the script.

How to check a SCPI script

The easiest way to check a script is to execute it, for example in the auxiliary tool IEC-
WIN, which is provided with the FSW firmware (see Section 12.4, "The IECWIN tool",
on page 840).
The tool shows an error message if a command could not be executed.
Some suggestions on how you can check and improve a recorded SCPI script:
● Remove unnecessary commands written after a preset.
● Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order. For example, if you move a
STATe command to the end of your script, you can avoid intermediate calculations
of the signal.
● Check the script for completeness by comparing its results with the modified set-
tings in manual mode.

How to export a SCPI script

When you save a command list to a file, only the recorded commands are stored in a
text file. However, to execute a script in an external programming environment, it
requires additional header data according to the specific format.
1. On the toolbar, select the SCPI Recorder icon.
The SCPI Recorder dialog box with the currently recorded command list is dis-
played.

2. Select "Export".

3. Define a file name and storage location for the script file.

4. Select the "File Type" which defines the format of the script.

5. Select "Save".
A script with the required header data for the selected format is stored to a file.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 853

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

12.5.5 Example for a recorded SCPI script

The following example shows a recorded SCPI script in python format. The script con-
figures the ACLR measurement example described in Section 6.2.7.1, "Measurement
example 1 – ACPR measurement on a CDMA2000 signal", on page 199.
# python script created by FSW: 29:11:2017 09:08:53

import visa

# connect to instrument (MU717225)

VisaResourceManager = visa.ResourceManager()
FSW = VisaResourceManager.open_resource("TCPIP::10.124.0.195::INSTR")

# Display update ON
FSW.write("SYST:DISP:UPD ON")

FSW.write("*RST")
FSW.write("INIT:CONT OFF")
FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:CENT 850000000")
FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:SPAN 4000000")
FSW.write("DISP:WIND:SUBW:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10")
FSW.write("CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:SEL ACP")
FSW.write("CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:PRES S2CD")
FSW.write("SENS:ADJ:LEV;*WAI")
FSW.write("SENS:POW:HSP ON")
FSW.write("TRAC1:DATA? TRACE1")
FSW.query("CALC1:MARK:Y?")
FSW.write("CALC1:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CPOW")

# Back to local mode

FSW.write("SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF")

12.6 Network and remote control settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote"

Network settings in secure user mode

Be sure to store all network settings beforeSecureUser Mode is enabled; see Sec-
tion 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.
If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each
time you switch on the FSW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored per-
manently in this case.

The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Sec-
tion 13.10.7, "Configuring the network and remote control", on page 1438.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 854

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Step-by-step instructions are provided in Section 12.7, "How to set up a network and
remote control", on page 873.
● General network settings...................................................................................... 855
● GPIB settings........................................................................................................ 857
● Compatibility settings............................................................................................ 860
● LAN settings..........................................................................................................864
● HUMS settings...................................................................................................... 865
● Remote errors....................................................................................................... 871
● Returning to manual mode ("local")...................................................................... 873

12.6.1 General network settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Network" tab

The FSW can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control the
instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer.

Network settings can only be edited in the firmware if a LAN cable is connected to the
FSW.

Risk of network problems

All parameters can be edited here; however, beware that changing the computer name
has major effects in a network.
For details, see Section 12.7, "How to set up a network and remote control",
on page 873.

Network settings in secure user mode

Be sure to store all network settings before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Sec-
tion 4.2.16, "Protecting data using the secure user mode", on page 41.
If the currently stored network settings are not suitable, you must correct them each
time you switch on the FSW in secure user mode, as the settings are not stored per-
manently in this case.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 855

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Computer Name..........................................................................................................856
IP Address...................................................................................................................857
Subnet Mask............................................................................................................... 857
DHCP.......................................................................................................................... 857
Network Configuration.................................................................................................857

Computer Name
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be
changed. The naming conventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or
numbers are entered, an error message is displayed in the status line.
The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax:
<Type><variant>-<serial_number>
For example FSW13-123456
The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part
of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 856

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

IP Address
Defines the IP address. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address
10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), the setting is read-only.
The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains
3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).

Subnet Mask
Defines the subnet mask. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the subnet mask
255.255.255.0. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), this setting is read-only.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block con-
tains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g. 100.100.100.100), but also one or two numbers are
allowed in a block (as an example see the preinstalled address).

DHCP
Switches between DHCP server available (On) or not available (Off). If a DHCP server
is available in the network, the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are
obtained automatically from the DHCP server.

Network Configuration
Opens the standard Windows "Network Configuration" dialog box for further configura-
tion.

12.6.2 GPIB settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "GPIB" tab

Alternatively to connecting the FSW to a LAN, the GPIB interface can be used to con-
nect a remote PC. For details see Section 12.1, "Remote control interfaces and proto-
cols", on page 819).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 857

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

GPIB Address............................................................................................................. 858

Identification String......................................................................................................858
Reset to Factory String............................................................................................... 858
Remote Display Update.............................................................................................. 859
GPIB Terminator..........................................................................................................859
*IDN Format................................................................................................................ 859
I/O Logging..................................................................................................................859
Display Remote Errors................................................................................................ 860
Set Hardware Immediately..........................................................................................860

GPIB Address
Defines the GPIB address. Values from 0 to 30 are allowed. The default address is 20.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 1438

Identification String
Defines the identification string for the FSW which is provided as a response to the
*IDN? query. Maximum 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] on page 1440

Reset to Factory String

Restores the default identification string. Each FSW has a unique ID according to the
following syntax:
Rohde&Schwarz,FSW,<Unique number>,1.00

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 858

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Remote command:
SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory on page 1440

Remote Display Update

Defines whether the display of the FSW is updated when changing from manual opera-
tion to remote control.
Turning off the display update function improves performance during remote control.
Note: Usually, this function remains available on the display during remote operation.
However, it can be disabled remotely. In this case, the display is not updated during
remote operation, and cannot be turned on again locally until local operation is
resumed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 1440
SYSTem:DISPlay:LOCK on page 1439

GPIB Terminator
Changes the GPIB receive terminator.
"LFEOI" According to the standard, the terminator in ASCII is <LF> and/or
<EOI>.
"EOI" For binary data transfers (e.g. trace data) from the control computer
to the instrument, the binary code used for <LF> might be included in
the binary data block, and therefore should not be interpreted as a
terminator in this particular case. This can be avoided by using only
the receive terminator EOI.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator on page 1438

*IDN Format
Defines the response format to the remote command *IDN? (see *IDN?
on page 897). This function is intended for re-use of existing control programs
together with the FSW.
"Leg" Legacy format, as in the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ family.
"New" FSW format.
Remote command:
SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1455

I/O Logging
Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function. All remote control commands
received by the FSW are recorded in a log file. The files are named according to the
following syntax:
C:\R_S\INSTR\ScpiLogging\ScpiLog.<no.>
where <no.> is a sequential number
A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted.
Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to
find misspelled keywords in control programs.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 859

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Remote command:
SYSTem:CLOGging on page 1487

Display Remote Errors

Activates and deactivates the display of errors that occur during remote operation of
the FSW. If activated, the FSW displays a message box at the bottom of the screen
that contains the type of error and the command that caused the error.

The error message remains in place when you switch to "Local" mode. To close the
message box, select the "Close" icon.
Only the most recent error is displayed in remote mode. However, in local mode, all
errors that occurred during remote operation are listed in a separate tab of the "Net-
work + Remote" dialog box (see Section 12.6.6, "Remote errors", on page 871).
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay on page 1440
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 1454

Set Hardware Immediately

Determines when the remote commands that change hardware settings on the FSW
are executed.
If enabled (default), remote commands are always executed immediately when they
are received by the instrument.
If disabled, remote commands that cause changes to the hardware are only executed
when an appropriate command is executed explicitely.
Regardless of this setting, the firmware automatically sets the hardware when a sweep
is started.
Postponing hardware changes is useful, for example, when switching measurement
channels. When you switch channels, the settings from the previous channel are used
by default. However, if you have to change the frequency and level values for the new
channel measurement, the default settings cause unnecessary hardware settling
times.
This setting is not changed by the preset function.
Remote command:
SYSTem:SHIMmediate:STATe on page 1442
SYSTem:SHIMmediate ONCE on page 1442

12.6.3 Compatibility settings

The FSW can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum analyzers, e.g.
in order to use existing control applications.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 860

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers

As a rule, the FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum
analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particu-
lar the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the FSW
can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previ-
ous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.

The required settings are configured in the "Compatibility" tab of the "Network
+Remote" dialog box.

Language.................................................................................................................... 861
IF Gain........................................................................................................................ 862
Sweep Repeat.............................................................................................................862
Coupling...................................................................................................................... 862
Wideband.................................................................................................................... 863
FSU/FSQ Preamplifier................................................................................................ 863
HP Additional.............................................................................................................. 863
Revision String............................................................................................................ 863
Resetting the Factory Revision................................................................................... 863

Language
Defines the system language used to control the instrument.
For details on the available GPIB languages, see Section 13.14.2, "Reference: GPIB
commands of emulated HP models", on page 1496.
Note: This function is also used to emulate previous R&S signal and spectrum ana-
lyzers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 861

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

As a rule, the FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum
analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particu-
lar the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the FSW
can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previ-
ous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.
For R&S FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation, HP commands are not automatically also allowed.
In this case, set SYSTem:HPADditional to ON.
Note: For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the *OPT? query
("B7J, 140" or "B7J, 122" if Wideband is activated, see SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband
on page 1495).
Remote command:
SYSTem:LANGuage on page 1494

IF Gain
Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application
needs. This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth < 300 kHz.

NORM Optimized for high dynamic range, overload limit is close to reference level.

PULS Optimized for pulsed signals, overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level.

This setting is only available if an HP language is selected (see "Language"

on page 861).
Remote command:
SYSTem:IFGain:MODE on page 1494

Sweep Repeat
Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands (for details
on the commands refer to Section 13.14.2, "Reference: GPIB commands of emulated
HP models", on page 1496). If the repeated sweep is OFF, the marker is set without
sweeping before.
Note: In single sweep mode, switch off this setting before you set the marker via the
E1 and MKPK HI commands in order to avoid sweeping again.
This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language"
on page 861).
Remote command:
SYSTem:RSWeep on page 1496

Coupling
Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for:
● span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW)
● resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth (RBW/VBW)
For FSx, the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a result, in
most cases a shorter sweep time is used than in case of HP.
This setting is only available if a HP language is selected (see "Language"
on page 861).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 862

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Remote command:
SYSTem:HPCoupling on page 1493

Wideband
This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the state of the wideband option.
It is only available for PSA89600 emulation.
"Off" No wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J".
"40 MHz" The 40 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 140".
"80 MHz" The 80 MHz wideband is used.
The option is indicated as "B7J, 122".
Remote command:
SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1495

FSU/FSQ Preamplifier
This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed,
depending on the used preamplifier.
It is only available for FSU/FSQ emulation, and only if a preamplifier is used by the
FSW (-B24/-B25 option).
Remote command:
SYSTem:PREamp on page 1495

HP Additional
Allows the use of HP commands in addition to SCPI commands for R&S
FSP/FSQ/FSU emulation (see Language).
Remote command:
SYSTem:HPADditional on page 1494

Revision String
Defines the response to the REV? query for the revision number.
(HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 861).
Max. 36 characters are allowed.
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] on page 1496

Resetting the Factory Revision

Resets the response to the REV? query for the revision number to the factory default
(HP emulation only, see "Language" on page 861).
Remote command:
SYSTem:REVision:FACTory on page 1441

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 863

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

12.6.4 LAN settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "LAN" tab

In a LAN network, the FSW can be accessed via any web browser (e.g. the Microsoft
Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks:
● Modifying network configurations
● Modifying device configurations
● Monitoring connections from the device to other devices
The "LAN" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog box provides basic LAN configuration
functions and information for the FSW.
Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the web browser interface.
For details see "LAN configuration" on page 879.
Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LAN configuration and
web browser functionality.

Current LAN Configuration..........................................................................................864

LAN Password............................................................................................................ 865
LAN Reset...................................................................................................................865

Current LAN Configuration

Displays the current LAN information from the FSW (read-only).
"Computer Name of the FSW as defined in the operating system (see also "Com-
name" puter Name" on page 856)
"MAC address" Media Access Control address (MAC address), a unique identifier for
the network card in the FSW

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 864

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

"IP address" IP address of the FSW as defined in the operating system (see also
"IP Address" on page 857).

LAN Password
Password for LAN configuration. The default password is LxiWebIfc.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:PASSword on page 1441

LAN Reset
Resets the "LAN" configuration to its default settings (LCI function).

Parameter Value

TCP/IP Mode DHCP + Auto IP Address

Dynamic DNS Enabled

ICMP Ping Enabled

Password for "LAN" configuration LxiWebIfc

The LAN settings are configured in the "Network" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog
box or using the instrument's "LAN" web browser interface.
Remote command:
SYSTem:LXI:LANReset on page 1441

12.6.5 HUMS settings

Available with option R&S FSW-K980.

The FSW comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) providing
information about the FSW. The aim is to increase the overall utilization, to avoid
downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments.
HUMS provides, for example, information about:
● Instrument identification, hardware components, software packages, licenses
● Usage of remote control, usage via keyboard / mouse, usage of test applications
● Hardware utilization and status, including S.M.A.R.T. data of the system drive
● User-defined static information, for example, an inventory code

Interfaces and protocols

The HUMS installation on the FSW includes an SNMP agent and a REST service with
HTTP endpoints. So you can access the health and usage information via LAN, using
the SNMP protocol or the REST protocol. Accessing the data does not interfere with
remote control via SCPI commands or with measurement execution.
Reference information for both protocols is available on the FSW at the address http://
<instrument>/api/hums/v1/documents?name=<interface>.
For <instrument>, enter the host name (e.g. fsw8-123456) or the IP address (e.g.
10.121.0.34) of your instrument, as for access to the GUI.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 865

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

For <interface> = snmp, you get a ZIP file containing the MIB files for SNMP. For
<interface> = rest, you get a YAML file with the OpenAPI specification of the REST
API.
Address example: http://fsw8-123456/api/hums/v1/documents?name=snmp.
The following table lists the REST endpoints and the SNMP MIB filenames.
For further information about the HUMS service itself, see R&S HUMS user manual.
You can download or view the manual on the internet.
● Basic settings........................................................................................................ 866
● Protocol settings....................................................................................................867
● Device tags........................................................................................................... 870

12.6.5.1 Basic settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" tab

The "HUMS" tab of the "Network + Remote" dialog provides basic R&S HUMS configu-
ration functions.
To export the complete HUMS history, use the REST API with the endpoint:
http://<IP>/api/hums/v1/dump

The remote commands to configure HUMS are described in Section 13.10.8, "Config-
uring HUMS", on page 1443.
State............................................................................................................................866
Enhanced Settings...................................................................................................... 867
View Tracked Information............................................................................................867
Delete HUMS History.................................................................................................. 867

State
Turns HUMS on or off.
If you want to track HUMS data, turn on this function.
If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 866

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:STATe on page 1444

Enhanced Settings
Opens the dialog to configure the protocol settings and device tags.

View Tracked Information

Opens the R&S HUMS device web in the web browser of the FSW.
For more information about the R&S HUMS device web, see its user manual.
You can also reach the device web from a remote PC by entering the following address
into a browser's address bar:
http://<instrumentaddress>/hums/
The <instrumentaddress> is either the IP address of the instrument or the instrument
name.

Delete HUMS History

Deletes complete HUMS data which includes the device history, device tags, SCPI
connections, utilization history, utilization (table values).
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL on page 1443

12.6.5.2 Protocol settings

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Config-
ure" > "Protocol"
The "Protocol" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialog provides protocol settings for
SNMP or REST protocol.

SNMP..........................................................................................................................868
REST...........................................................................................................................868
SNMPv2c Configuration..............................................................................................868
└ Access.......................................................................................................... 868

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 867

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

└ Community....................................................................................................868
SNMPv3 Configuration................................................................................................869
└ User Name....................................................................................................869
└ Access.......................................................................................................... 869
└ Security Level............................................................................................... 869
└ Passwords.................................................................................................... 869
SNMP Location........................................................................................................... 870
SNMP Contact............................................................................................................ 870

SNMP
Selects the SNMP version to communicate with the service.
"None" Do not use SNMP.
"v2c" Select SNMP version v2c, which also activates v1.
Unlocks the settings available for SNMP v2c.
"v3" Select SNMP version v3.
Unlocks the settings available for SNMP v3.
"v2c + v3" Select both SNMP versions v2c and v3.
Unlocks the settings for both SNMP v2c and v3.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion on page 1448

REST
Turns communication via REST API on or off.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:REST:ENABle on page 1445

SNMPv2c Configuration
For SNMPv2c/v1 authentication, you can define the "Access" and "Community".

Access ← SNMPv2c Configuration

Defines the access an SNMP user can have for a specific SNMP community: read-
write = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW" Read-write access allows the user to read and change information.
By default, the user has read-write access rights.
"RO" Read-only access allows the user to only read information.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RO on page 1446
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:COMMunity:RW on page 1446

Community ← SNMPv2c Configuration

Defines the SNMP community string. An SNMP community represents a collection of
devices and agents grouped to monitor them. Authorized managers and the managed
devices belong to an SNMP community.
You can define an individual community for each read-write and read-only access.
The default community is the serial number of the instrument (same community for
read-only and for read-write).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 868

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Entering a community is mandatory.

SNMPv3 Configuration
For SNMPv3 authentication, you can define user profiles. You can manage them via a
table.
To add a new user, select "Add" and enter the data.
To delete all user profiles, select "Delete All".
To delete a single user profile, select the "x" in the appropriate user line of the table.
Remote command:
Create user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER on page 1447
Query all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:ALL? on page 1447
Delete a single user: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete
on page 1448
Delete all users: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:USM:USER:DELete:ALL
on page 1448

User Name ← SNMPv3 Configuration

Defines the name of the user who should have specific user rights.
Entering a user name is mandatory.

Access ← SNMPv3 Configuration

Defines the access right a user can have: read-write = RW, read-only = RO.
"RW" Read-write access allows the user to read and change information.
"RO" Read-only access allows the user to only read information.

Security Level ← SNMPv3 Configuration

Defines the security level for access: noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv or authPriv.
For security reasons, we recommend that you only allow access via passwords.
"noAuthNo- Low security level: no authentication, no data transfer encryption,
Priv" user name query only.
No authentication password and no privacy password to be defined.
"authNoPriv" Medium security level: authentication, no data transfer encryption,
user name and password query.
Authentication password to be defined, privacy password is not avail-
able.
"authPriv" High security level: authentication, data transfer encryption, user
name, password and encryption password query.
Authentication password and privacy password to be defined.
If no privacy password is defined, the HUMS service uses the authen-
tication password as privacy password.

Passwords ← SNMPv3 Configuration

Depending on the selected Security Level, you have to define specific passwords:
authentication password (Auth. Password) and privacy password (Priv. Password).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 869

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

"Auth. Pass- For authentication, you have to define an authentication password.

word" For authentication password, the FSW supports the MD5 protocol.
Authentication passwords must have 8 to 12 characters with any
combination of ASCII characters.
"Priv. Pass- For stronger encryption, you have to define a second password, the
word" privacy password.
For privacy password, the FSW supports the DES protocol.
Private passwords must have at least 8 characters with any combina-
tion of ASCII characters.

SNMP Location
"SNMP Location" defines the SNMP location information. This information complies
with the server's physical location and is used for identification of the SNMP server. By
default, this input field is empty.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:LOCation on page 1447

SNMP Contact
"SNMP Contact" defines the SNMP contact information. This information complies with
the person who manages the SNMP server and is used for identification of the SNMP
server. By default, this input field is empty.
Remote command:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:CONTact on page 1446

12.6.5.3 Device tags

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "HUMS" > "Enhanced Settings" > "Config-
ure" > "Device Tags"
The "Device Tags" tab of the "Enhanced Settings" dialogs displays the defined device
tags. You can also add or delete device tags here.
A device tag is a label to assign to your instrument. You can create any device tag for
your instrument and define it by a specific key and value.

Add..............................................................................................................................871
Index........................................................................................................................... 871
Key.............................................................................................................................. 871
Value........................................................................................................................... 871
Delete All.....................................................................................................................871

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 870

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

Add
Adds a new device tag.
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS[:VALue] on page 1445

Index
Index (ID) of the created device tag. You can change the ID if necessary.

Key
Defines a key for your device tag. A device tag key represents the type of tag.

Value
Defines the actual value of the device tag or key.
Example:
● "Key" = Location
● "Value" = Building 1
Remote command:
DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:ALL? on page 1444

Delete All
Deletes all defined device tags.
Remote command:
Delete all device tags:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete:ALL on page 1444
Delete a single device tag:DIAGnostic:HUMS:TAGS:DELete on page 1445

12.6.6 Remote errors

Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Remote Errors" tab

The error messages generated by the FSW during remote operation are displayed
here.
The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence; the most recent mes-
sages are placed at the top of the list.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 871

FSW Network operation and remote control
Network and remote control settings

The most recent error message during remote operation can be displayed on the
screen, see "Display Remote Errors" on page 860.

If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, the oldest
error message is removed before the newest one is inserted. To clear the message
buffer use "Clear Error List". It is automatically cleared when the FSW is shut down.
The following information is available:

No Device-specific error code

Error Brief description of the error

Date/Time Time the message occurred

Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? on page 1454

Clear Error List

Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation.
Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the FSW is shut down.
Remote command:
SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote on page 1454

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 872

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

12.6.7 Returning to manual mode ("local")

When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and
can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com-
mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.
In remote control mode, all keys of the instrument are disabled. The "LOCAL" softkey
and the Remote Display Update softkey are displayed.

Local
The instrument switches from remote to manual operation.
Note:
● If the local lockout function (LLO or SYST:KLOC ON) is activated in the remote con-
trol mode, manual operation is no longer available until GTL (or SYST:KLOC OFF)
is executed.
● Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must
be completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immedi-
ately.
● If you select "Local" while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running (which was
started remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state when
the alignment or test is completed.
Furthermore, when you return to manual operation, the following happens:
● All front panel keys are enabled.
● The main softkey menu of the current mode is displayed.
● The measurement diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed again.
● If, at the time of pressing "LOCAL", the synchronization mechanism via *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI is active, the currently running measurement procedure is aborted
and synchronization is achieved by setting the corresponding bits in the registers of
the status reporting system.
● Bit 6 (User Request) of the Event status register is set.
If the status reporting system is configured accordingly, this bit immediately causes
the generation of a service request (SRQ) to inform the control software that the
user wishes to return to front panel control. For example, this can be used to inter-
rupt the control program and to correct instrument settings manually. This bit is set
each time you select "LOCAL".
Remote command:
SYST:COMM:INT:REM OFF, see SYSTem:COMMunicate:INTernal:REMote
on page 1439

12.7 How to set up a network and remote control

Remote operation
You can operate the instrument remotely from a connected computer using SCPI com-
mands. Before you send remote commands, configure the instrument in a LAN net-
work or connect it to a PC via the GPIB interface as described in Section 12.7.1, "How
to configure a network", on page 874.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 873

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

Remote Desktop
In production test and measurement, a common requirement is central monitoring of
the T&M instruments for remote maintenance and remote diagnostics. Equipped with
the Remote Desktop software of Windows, the FSW ideally meets requirements for
use in production. The computer that is used for remote operation is called "controller"
here.
The following tasks can be performed using Remote Desktop:
● Access to the control functions via a virtual front panel (soft front panel)
● Printout of measurement results directly from the controller
● Storage of measured data on the controller's hard disk
This documentation provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for
the FSW. For details refer to the Windows 10 operating system documentation.

12.7.1 How to configure a network

A precondition for operating or monitoring the instrument remotely is that it is connec-

ted to a LAN network or a PC connected to the GPIB interface. Setup is described
here.

Windows Firewall Settings

A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access
to it through a network. We highly recommend using the firewall on your instrument.
Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and pre-
configured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled.
For more details on firewall configuration, see the Windows 10 help system and the
Rohde & Schwarz white paper (available from the Rohde & Schwarz website):
1EF96: Malware Protection Windows 10

12.7.1.1 How to connect the instrument to the network

There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:

● A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned
an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same
network.
● A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru-
ment and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The
computer must be equipped with a network adapter and be directly connected to
the instrument. The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however,
data transfer is still performed using the TCP/IP protocol. You have to assign an IP
address to the instrument and the computer, see Section 12.7.1.2, "How to assign
the IP address", on page 875.
Note: As the FSW uses a 1 GBit LAN, a crossover cable is not necessary (due to
Auto-MDI(X) functionality).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 874

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

► NOTICE! Network environment.

Before connecting the product to a local area network (LAN), consider the follow-
ing:
● Install the latest firmware to reduce security risks.
● For internet or remote access, use secured connections, if applicable.
● Ensure that the network settings comply with the security policies of your com-
pany. Contact your local system administrator or IT department before connect-
ing your product to your company LAN.
● When connected to the LAN, the product may potentially be accessed from the
internet, which may be a security risk. For example, attackers might misuse or
damage the product.
To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45
cable to one of the LAN ports.
To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between
the instrument and a single PC.

If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network
connection and activates the required drivers.
The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.

12.7.1.2 How to assign the IP address

Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-
ment can be obtained in different ways.
● If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automati-
cally.
● If the network does not support DHCP, or if the instrument is set to use alternate
TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and
obtain all address information automatically. Thus, it is safe to establish a physical con-
nection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.

When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address can be assigned each time the PC is
restarted. You have to determine this address on the PC itself. Thus, when using a
DHCP server, we recommend using the permanent computer name, which determines
the address via the DNS server (see "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address"
on page 876).

Assigning the IP address on the instrument

Note: Risk of network errors. Connection errors can affect the entire network. Con-
tact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
1. Press [SETUP].

2. Press "Network + Remote".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 875

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

3. Select the "Network" tab.

4. In the "Network + Remote" dialog, toggle the "DHCP On/Off" setting to the required
mode.
If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol-
lowing steps.
Note: When you switch DHCP from "On" to "Off", the previously set IP address
and subnet mask are retrieved.
If DHCP is "On", the instrument obtains the IP address of the DHCP server auto-
matically. The configuration is saved, and the FSW prompts you to restart the
instrument. You can skip the remaining steps.
Note: When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address can be assigned each time
you restart the instrument. You have to determine this address on the instrument
itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, we recommend using the permanent com-
puter name. Then the address is determined via the DNS server.
(See "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 876 and Sec-
tion 12.7.1.3, "How to change the instrument name", on page 877).

5. Enter the "IP Address", for example 192.0.2.0. The IP address consists of four
number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 numbers.

6. Enter the "Subnet Mask", for example 255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of
four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains a maximum of 3 num-
bers.

7. Close the dialog box.

If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of
range" is displayed in the status line. If the settings are correct, the configuration is
saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.

8. Confirm the displayed message to restart the instrument.

Using a DNS server to determine the IP address

If a DNS server is configured on the FSW, the server can determine the current IP
address for the connection using the permanent computer name.
1. Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS
servers on your network (see Section 12.7.1.3, "How to change the instrument
name", on page 877).

2. Select [Setup] > "Network + Remote".

3. In the "Network" tab, select "Open Dialog 'Network Connections'".

4. Double-tap "Ethernet".

5. In the "Ethernet Status" dialog box, select "Properties".

The items used by the Ethernet connection are displayed.

6. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 876

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

7. Select "Properties".

8. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses".

9. Enter your own DNS addresses.

For more information, refer to the Windows 10 operating system Help.

12.7.1.3 How to change the instrument name

In a LAN that uses a DNS server, each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be
accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address. The DNS
server translates the host name to the IP address. Using the computer name is espe-
cially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address can be assigned each
time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but you can change
this name.

To change the instrument's computer name

1. Press [Setup] and then "Network + Remote".
The current "Computer Name" is displayed in the "Network" tab.

2. Enter the new computer name.

3. Close the dialog box.

The configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.

4. Confirm the displayed message to restart the instrument.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 877

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

12.7.1.4 How to configure the LAN using the web browser interface

The instrument's "LAN" web browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant
browsers.

► In the web browser, open the http://<instrument-hostname> or http://

<instrument-ip-address> page, e.g. http://10.113.10.203.
The default password to change "LAN" configurations is LxiWebIfc.
The "Instrument Home Page" (welcome page) opens.

The instrument home page displays device information, including the VISA resource
string, in read-only format.
► On the "Instrument Home Page", select "Device Indicator" to activate or deactivate
the "LAN" status icon on the status bar of the FSW. The "Device Indicator" setting
is not password-protected.
A green "LAN" status symbol indicates that a LAN connection is established.
A red symbol indicates an error, for example, that no LAN cable is connected.
When a device is connecting to the instrument, the "LAN" icon blinks.

The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface
are the following:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 878

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

● "LAN Configuration" opens the menu with configuration pages.

● "Status" displays information about the "LAN" status of the instrument.

LAN configuration
The LAN configuration consists of three parts:
● "IP configuration" provides all mandatory LAN parameters.
● "Advanced LAN Configuration" provides further LAN settings.
● "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru-
ment and other devices.

IP configuration
The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN
parameters and allows their modification.
The "TCP/IP Mode" configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument
gets assigned (see also Section 12.7.1.2, "How to assign the IP address",
on page 875).
For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway are used to configure the LAN. The automatic configuration mode uses DHCP
server or Dynamic Link Local Addressing (Automatic IP) to obtain the instrument IP
address.

Changing the LAN configuration is password-protected. The default password is Lxi-

WebIfc (notice upper and lower case characters).
You can change the LAN password in the "Network + Remote" dialog box, see Sec-
tion 12.6.4, "LAN settings", on page 864.

Advanced LAN configuration

The "LAN Configuration > Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as fol-
lows:
● "mDNS and DNS-SD" are two additional protocols: Multicast DNS and DNS Ser-
vice Discovery. They are used for device communication in zero configuration net-
works working without DNS and DHCP
● "ICMP Ping" must be enabled to use the ping utility.
● "VXI-11" is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN.

Ping client
Ping is a utility that verifies the connection between the instrument and another device.
The ping command uses the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets to determine
whether the LAN connection is functional. Ping is useful for diagnosing IP network or
router failures. The ping utility is not password-protected.
To initiate a ping between the instrument and a second connected device:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 879

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

To initiate a ping between the instrument and a second connected device

1. Enable "ICMP Ping" on the "Advanced LAN Configuration" page (enabled after an
LCI).

2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with-
out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g.
10.113.10.203).

3. Select "Submit".

12.7.1.5 How to change the GPIB instrument address

To operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the GPIB
address. The remote control address is factory-set to 20, but it can be changed if it
does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30
are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.

Setting the GPIB address

1. On the FSW, press [SETUP].

2. Press "Network + Remote".

3. In the "Network + Remote" dialog box, select the "GPIB" tab.

4. In the "GPIB Address" field, enter a value between 0 and 30.

Remote command:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18

12.7.2 How to operate the instrument without a network

To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma-

nently, no special measures are necessary. Windows 10 automatically detects the
interruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the
instrument is switched on.
If you are not prompted to enter the user name and password, proceed as described in
Section 12.7.3.3, "How to configure the automatic login mechanism", on page 882.

12.7.3 How to log on to the network

Windows 10 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass-
word in a login window. You can set up two types of user accounts, either an adminis-
trator account with unrestricted access to the computer/domain or a standard user
account with limited access.
The instrument provides an auto-login function for the administrator account, i.e. login
with unrestricted access is carried out automatically in the background. By default, the

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 880

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

user name for the administrator account is "Instrument", and the user name for the
standard user account is "NormalUser".
In both cases the initial password is "894129". You can change the password in Win-
dows 10 for any user at any time. Some administrative tasks require administrator
rights (e.g. firmware updates or the configuration of a LAN network). If so, it is men-
tioned in the function descriptions.
At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on
to the network. As a prerequisite, the user name and the password must be identical
on the instrument and on the network.

12.7.3.1 How to create users

After the software for the network has been installed, the instrument issues an error
message the next time it is switched on because there is no user named "instrument"
(= default user ID for Windows auto-login) in the network. Thus, a matching user must
be created in the FSW and in the network, the password must be adapted to the net-
work password, and the auto-login mechanism must then be deactivated.

The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network.
1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.

2. Select "Start > Settings > Accounts > Other users".

3. Select "Add someone else to this PC".

4. In the "Microsoft account" dialog box, enter the new user name and password.

5. Select "OK".

6. Select "Finish".
The new user is created.

12.7.3.2 How to change the user password

After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted
to the network password.
1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.

2. Press [Ctrl + Alt + Delete], then select "Change a password".

3. Enter the user account name.

4. Enter the old password.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 881

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

5. Enter the new password twice.

6. Press [Enter].
The new password is now active.

12.7.3.3 How to configure the automatic login mechanism

Adapting the auto-login function to a new password

If you change the password that is used during auto-login, this function no longer
works. Adapt the settings for the auto-login function first.

Changing the password for auto-login requires administrator rights.

1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 38).

2. Open the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG file in any text editor (e.g.

Notepad).

3. In the line "DefaultPassword"="894129", replace the default password

(894129) by the new password for automatic login.

4. Save the changes to the file.

5. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Run".

The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

6. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.

7. Press [ENTER] to confirm.

The auto-login function is reactivated with the changed password. It is applied the
next time you switch on the instrument.

Switching users when using the auto-login function

Which user account is used is defined during login. If auto-login is active, the login win-
dow is not displayed. However, you can switch the user account to be used even when
the auto-login function is active.
1. Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system of the
FSW (see also "To access the "Start" menu" on page 38).

2. Press [CTRL] + [ALT] + [DEL], then select "Sign out".

The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user
account name and password.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 882

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

Deactivating the auto-login function

When shipped, the instrument is already configured to log on the "instrument" user
automatically under Windows 10. To deactivate the auto-login function, perform the fol-
lowing steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\NO_AUTOLOGIN.REG.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm.

The auto-login function is deactivated. The next time you switch on the instrument,
the FSW prompts you to enter your user name and password before the firmware
is started.

Reactivating the auto-login function

To reactivate the auto-login function after manually deactivating it, perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. In the "Start" menu, select "Run".
The "Run" dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter the command C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\AUTOLOGIN.REG.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm.

The auto-login function is reactivated. It is applied the next time you switch on the
instrument.

12.7.4 How to share directories (only with Microsoft networks)

Sharing directories makes data available for other users. Sharing directories is only
possible in Microsoft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory.

1. In the "Start" menu, select "Programs" > "Accessories" > "Windows Explorer".

2. Right-click the desired folder.

3. In the context menu, select "Sharing with" > "Specific people".

The dialog box for sharing a directory is displayed.

4. Select a user from the list or add a new name.

5. Select "Add"

6. Select "Share".

7. Select "Done" to close the dialog box.

The drive is shared and the selected users can access it.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 883

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

12.7.5 How to control the FSW via the web browser interface

Via the LAN web browser interface to the FSW, one or more users can control the
instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instrument
controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between
the instrument and the remote PC is also available.

To access the FSW via the web browser interface

1. Start a web browser that supports html5 (W3C compliant).

2. Enter the IP address of the FSW in the browser's address bar.

The FSW's Welcome page is displayed.

3. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control > Web Control".

The instrument's display is shown in a new browser window, with a software front
panel displayed beside or below it.

4. Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in
the display as you would directly on the instrument's front panel.

To exchange files with the FSW

You can download files, for example stored measurement data, from the FSW to the
remote PC, or upload files, for example limit line definitions, from the PC to the FSW.
1. In the web browser, select the Welcome page window.

2. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control" > "File Upload" or "File Down-
load".

The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed. For example,
folders that contain user data. From the top-most folder, My Computer, you can
access all other folders on the instrument.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 884

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

3. To download a file from the FSW:

a) Select the file from the displayed folders.
b) Select "Download File".

4. To upload a file to the FSW:

a) From the displayed folders in the web browser window, select the folder on the
FSW to which you want to copy a file.
b) Under "File to Upload", select "Browse".
c) From the file selection dialog box, select the required file on the PC.
d) Select "Upload" to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the FSW.

12.7.6 How to deactivate the web browser interface

If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the FSW via
its LAN web browser interface, you must deactivate this function. Note that after a
firmware update the function is automatically active again until you deactivate it
manually.

To deactivate the LAN web browser interface

1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.

2. In the "Start" menu, select "Control Panel".

3. Select "System and Security" > "Administrative Tools".

4. From the list on the right, select "Services".

5. From the list of local services, select "R&S TightVNC Server".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 885

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

6. Set "Startup type" to "Disabled".

7. Select "Stop".

8. Select "Apply".
The next time a user enters the IP address of the instrument in a web browser, an
error message is displayed:
Failed to connect to server (code. 1006)

12.7.7 How to set up remote desktop

Remote Desktop is a Windows application which can be used to access and control
the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instru-
ment is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote com-
puter, and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and net-
work resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the FSW is possible.
With Windows 10, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system. For other
versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on. For
details refer to the Windows 10 operating system documentation.
With the factory settings, the default "instrument" user can connect to the FSW with the
Remote Desktop program of the controller immediately. No further configuration is
required. However, if the connection fails or other users need to connect, this section
provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the FSW.

12.7.7.1 How to configure the FSW for remote operation via remote desktop

1. Create a fixed IP address for the TCP/IP protocol as described in Section 12.7.1.2,
"How to assign the IP address", on page 875.
Note: To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address.
When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru-
ment is restarted. This address must first be determined on the instrument itself.
Thus, using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the FSW via
Remote Desktop.
2.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.

3. In the Windows "Start" menu, select "Settings > System".

4. Search for "remote access".

5. Select "Allow remote access to your computer".

6. Define which users can access the FSW via Remote Desktop.
Note: The currently used user account is automatically enabled for Remote Desk-
top.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 886

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

a) Select "Select Users".

b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in Section 12.7.3.1,
"How to create users", on page 881.
c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings.

7. The FSW is now ready for connection setup with the Remote Desktop program of
the controller.

12.7.7.2 How to configure the controller

Remote Desktop Client

With Windows 10, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be
accessed via "Start > Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection".
For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-
on.

1.

Select the "Windows" icon in the toolbar to access the operating system.

2. From the "Start" menu, select "All Programs" > "Accessories" > "Remote Desktop
Connection".
The "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select "Options >>".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 887

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

The dialog box is expanded to display the configuration data.

4. Open the "Experience" tab.

The settings on this tab select and optimize the connection speed.

5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: "LAN (10 Mbps or
higher)").
Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are
activated or deactivated.

6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show
contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options.

7. Open the "Local Resources" tab to enable printers, local drives and serial interfa-
ces.

8. To access drives of the controller from the FSW, e.g. to store settings or to copy
files from the controller to the FSW:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 888

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

a) Select "More".

b) Enable the "Drives" option.

Windows maps drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives.

9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the FSW,
activate the "Printers" option. Do not change the remaining settings.

10. Open the "Display" tab.

The options for configuring the FSW screen display are displayed.

11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the FSW window on the
desktop of the controller.

12. Under "Colors", do not change the settings.

13. Set the "Display the connection bar when I use the full screen" option:

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 889

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

● If activated, a bar showing the network address of the FSW appears at the top
edge of the screen. You can use this bar to reduce, minimize or close the win-
dow.
● If deactivated, the only way you can return to the controller desktop from the
FSW screen in full screen mode is to select "Disconnect" from the "Start"
menu.

12.7.7.3 How to start and close the remote desktop

To set up a connection to the FSW

1. In the "Remote Desktop Connection" dialog box (see Section 12.7.7.2, "How to
configure the controller", on page 887), open the "General" tab.

2. In the "Computer" field, enter the IP address of the FSW.

In the "User name" field, enter instrument to log in as an administrator, or Normal
User to log in as a standard user.
In the "Password" field, enter 894129.

3. To save the connection configuration for later use:

a) Select "Save As".
The "Save As" dialog box is displayed.
b) Enter the name for the connection information (*.RDP).

4. To load an existing connection configuration:

a) Select "Open".
The "Open" dialog box is displayed.
b) Select the *.rdp file.

5. Select "Connect".
The connection is set up.

6. If the "Disk drives" option is enabled on the "Local Resources" tab, a warning is
displayed indicating that the drives are enabled for access from the FSW.
Select "OK" to confirm the warning.
After a few moments, the FSW screen is displayed.

7. If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of
the screen, restart the FSW to see the modified screen resolution.
a) Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4].
The FSW firmware is shut down, which can take a few seconds.
b)

On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 890

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Softfrontpanel", i.e. the
user interface on which all front panel controls and the rotary knob are mapped to
buttons.
For more information, see Section 11.2.3, "How to work with the soft front panels",
on page 748.

8. To deactivate or activate the "Softfrontpanel", press [F6].

After the connection is established, the FSW screen is displayed in the "Remote
Desktop" application window.

To access the Windows "Start" menu, expand the "Remote Desktop" window to full
size.
During the connection with the controller, the login dialog box is displayed on the
FSW screen.

To terminate Remote Desktop control

The controller or a user at the FSW can terminate the remote connection:
► ● On the controller, close the "Remote Desktop" window at any time.
The connection to the FSW is terminated.
● On the FSW, log on.
The connection to the controller is terminated. A message is displayed on the
controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the
instrument.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 891

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

Restoring the connection to the FSW

Follow the instructions above to set up a connection to the FSW. If the connection is
terminated and then restored, the FSW remains in the same state.

12.7.7.4 How to shut down the FSW via remote operation

1. Select the FSW softfrontpanel.

2. Close the application with the key combination [ALT] + [F4].

3. Select the desktop.

4. Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4].

A safety query is displayed to warn you that the instrument cannot be reactivated
via remote operation and asks you whether you want to continue the shutdown
process.

5. Respond to the safety query with "Yes".

The connection with the controller is terminated and the FSW is shut down.

12.7.8 How to start a remote control session from a PC

When you switch on the FSW, it is always in manual operation state ("local" state) and
can be operated via the front panel.

To start remote control

1. Send an addressed command (GTR - Go to Remote) from a controller to the instru-
ment.
The instrument is switched to remote control ("remote" state). Operation via the
front panel is disabled. Only the "Local" softkey is displayed to return to manual
operation. The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual
state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces. Switching from manual
operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument set-
tings.

2. During program execution, send the SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ON command to

activate the display of results (see SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate on page 1440).
The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis-
played on the instrument screen.

3. To obtain optimum performance during remote control, send the

SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia-
grams again (default setting in remote control).

4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru-
ment using the universal command LLO.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 892

FSW Network operation and remote control
How to set up a network and remote control

Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is
only available for the GPIB interface.

5. To enable the keys of the FSW again, switch the instrument to local mode (GTL -
Go to Local), i.e. deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface.

If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control, it is recommended that you

switch off the display. For details see "Remote Display Update" on page 859.

12.7.9 How to return to manual operation

Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be
completed. Otherwise, the instrument switches back to remote control immediately.

► ● Manual operation: Select "Local".

● Remote operation: Use the following GPIB command:
status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL)

If you select "Local" while a self-alignment or a self-test is still running (which was star-
ted remotely), the instrument only returns to the manual operation state when the align-
ment or test is completed.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 893

FSW Remote commands
Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions

13 Remote commands
The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a
remote environment are described here.
It is assumed that the FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network
as described in Section 12.7, "How to set up a network and remote control",
on page 873.

Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers

As a rule, the FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum
analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particu-
lar the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the FSW
can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previ-
ous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.

● Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions............................................... 894

● Common suffixes.................................................................................................. 895
● Common commands............................................................................................. 895
● Selecting the operating mode and application...................................................... 900
● Configuring and performing measurements..........................................................910
● Configuring the result display.............................................................................. 1101
● Setting basic measurement parameters..............................................................1112
● Analyzing measurements (basics)...................................................................... 1240
● Managing settings and results............................................................................ 1351
● Configuring the FSW...........................................................................................1394
● Using the status register..................................................................................... 1483
● Commands for remote instrument operation.......................................................1487
● Recording SCPI Commands Automatically.........................................................1487
● Emulating other instruments' commands............................................................ 1492
● Deprecated commands....................................................................................... 1532
● Programming examples...................................................................................... 1536

13.1 Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions

The following conventions are used in the remote command descriptions:
● Command usage
If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying
parameters.
If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the
usage is stated explicitly.
● Parameter usage
If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value, and it is the
result of a query.
Parameters required only for setting are indicated as "Setting parameters".
Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as "Query parameters".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 894

FSW Remote commands
Common commands

Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as "Return
values".
● Conformity
Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as "SCPI con-
firmed". All commands used by the FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules.
● Asynchronous commands
A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com-
mand starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an "Asynchronous
command".
● Reset values (*RST)
Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST
command) are indicated as "*RST" values, if available.
● Default unit
The default unit is used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the
parameter.
● Manual operation
If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link
to the description is inserted.

13.2 Common suffixes

In the Spectrum application, the following common suffixes are used in remote com-
mands:
Table 13-1: Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application

Suffix Value range Description

<m> 1 to 16 Marker

<n> 1 to 16 Window (in the currently selected channel)

<t> 1 to 6 Trace

<li> 1 to 8 Limit line

13.3 Common commands

Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These
commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi-
ces. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many
common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?...........................................................................................................................896
*CLS.............................................................................................................................896
*ESE.............................................................................................................................896
*ESR?...........................................................................................................................896

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 895

FSW Remote commands
Common commands

*IDN?............................................................................................................................897
*IST?............................................................................................................................ 897
*OPC............................................................................................................................ 897
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................897
*PCB............................................................................................................................ 898
*PRE............................................................................................................................ 898
*PSC............................................................................................................................ 898
*RST.............................................................................................................................899
*SRE............................................................................................................................ 899
*STB?...........................................................................................................................899
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 899
*TST?........................................................................................................................... 899
*WAI............................................................................................................................. 900

*CAL?
Calibration query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and then queries the calibration status. Respon-
ses > 0 indicate errors.
Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the
alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state
after the alignment is completed.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Start Self Alignment" on page 732

*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of
the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage: Setting only

*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the con-
tents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255

*ESR?
Event status read

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 896

FSW Remote commands
Common commands

Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg-
ister to zero.
Return values:
<Contents> Range: 0 to 255
Usage: Query only

*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values:
<ID> "Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial num-
ber>,<firmware version>"
Example: Rohde&Schwarz,FSW-26,1312.8000K26/100005,1.30
Usage: Query only

*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit
which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag> 0|1
Usage: Query only

*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu-
ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query writes a "1" into the
output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed, which is useful for
command synchronization.

*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and
their description, refer to the specifications document.
Return values:
<Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options,
separated by commas, where:
B<number> describes hardware options.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 897

FSW Remote commands
Common commands

K<number> describes software options.

For PSA89600 emulation, the option is indicated as "B7J" for the
*OPT? query ("B7J, 140" if SYST:PSA:WID is activated).
(See SYSTem:PSA:WIDeband on page 1495.)
Note that B3 (Audio demodulator), K9 (Power Meter) and K14
(Spectrograms) are displayed for compatibility reasons only; in
fact they are standard functionality of the FSW base unit and do
not require additional ordering.
Usage: Query only

*PCB <Address>
Pass control back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of
the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address> Range: 0 to 30
Usage: Setting only

*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value> Range: 0 to 255

*PSC <Action>
Power on status clear
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru-
ment is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action> 0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 898

FSW Remote commands
Common commands

*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 1362). For more details on default values, see Sec-
tion 10.1, "Restoring the default instrument configuration (preset)", on page 676.
Usage: Setting only

*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command deter-
mines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents> Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255

*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage: Query only

*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger
subsystem.
*TRG corresponds to the INITiate:IMMediate command.
See INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] on page 913.
Usage: Event

*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 899

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is
still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is
completed. In this case, you cannot abort the self-test.
Return values:
<ErrorCode> integer > 0 (in decimal format)
An error occurred.
For details, see the Service Manual supplied with the instrument.
0
No errors occurred.
Usage: Query only

*WAI
Wait to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and
*OPC).
Usage: Event

13.4 Selecting the operating mode and application

The following commands are required to select the operating mode or the application
and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment.
The tasks for manual operation are described in Section 5, "Applications, measure-
ment channels, and operating modes", on page 111.
● Selecting the mode and applications.................................................................... 900
● Performing a sequence of measurements............................................................ 906
● Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements...................... 908

13.4.1 Selecting the mode and applications

DISPlay:ATAB................................................................................................................901
INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate...................................................................................... 901
INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]............................................................................................ 901
INSTrument:CREate:REPLace........................................................................................ 902
INSTrument:DELete....................................................................................................... 902
INSTrument:LIST?......................................................................................................... 902
INSTrument:MODE........................................................................................................ 904
INSTrument:REName.....................................................................................................905
INSTrument[:SELect]......................................................................................................905

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 900

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

DISPlay:ATAB <State>
This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed
channel. If only one channel is active, this command has no effect.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
OFF | 0
Switches off the function.
ON | 1
Switches on the function.

INSTrument:CREate:DUPLicate
Duplicates the currently selected channel, i.e creates a new channel of the same type
and with the identical measurement settings. The name of the new channel is the
same as the copied channel, extended by a consecutive number (e.g. "IQAnalyzer" ->
"IQAnalyzer 2").
The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST:SEL command.
Is not available if the MSRA/MSRT primary channel is selected.
Example: INST:SEL 'IQAnalyzer'
INST:CRE:DUPL
Duplicates the channel named 'IQAnalyzer' and creates a new
channel named 'IQAnalyzer2'.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Duplicate Current Channel" on page 124

INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] <ChannelType>, <ChannelName>

Adds a measurement channel. You can configure up to 10 measurement channels at
the same time (depending on available memory).
See also
● INSTrument[:SELect] on page 905
● INSTrument:DELete on page 902
Parameters:
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types, see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 902.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new
channel. If you do, an error occurs.
Example: INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum 2'
Adds a spectrum display named "Spectrum 2".

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 901

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

Manual operation: See "New Channel" on page 123

INSTrument:CREate:REPLace <ChannelName1>, <ChannelType>,

<ChannelName2>
Replaces a channel with another one.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to replace.
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types, see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 902.
<ChannelName2> String containing the name of the new channel.
Note: If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the
default name, extended by a sequential number, is used for the
new channel (see INSTrument:LIST? on page 902).
Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file
names. In particular, they must not contain special characters
such as ":", "*", "?".
Example: INST:CRE:REPL 'IQAnalyzer2',IQ,'IQAnalyzer'
Replaces the channel named "IQAnalyzer2" by a new channel of
type "IQ Analyzer" named "IQAnalyzer".
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Replace Current Channel" on page 124

INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName>
Deletes a channel.
If you delete the last channel, the default "Spectrum" channel is activated.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
A channel must exist to delete it.
Example: INST:DEL 'IQAnalyzer4'
Deletes the channel with the name 'IQAnalyzer4'.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Closing an application" on page 124

INSTrument:LIST?
Queries all active channels. The query is useful to obtain the names of the existing
channels, which are required to replace or delete the channels.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 902

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

Return values:
<ChannelType>, For each channel, the command returns the channel type and
<ChannelName> channel name (see tables below).
Tip: to change the channel name, use the INSTrument:
REName command.
Example: INST:LIST?
Result for 3 channels:
'ADEM','Analog Demod','IQ','IQ
Analyzer','IQ','IQ Analyzer2'
Usage: Query only
Table 13-2: Available channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer
mode

Application <ChannelType> Default Channel name*)

parameter

Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum

1xEV-DO BTS (R&S FSW-K84) BDO 1xEV-DO BTS

1xEV-DO MS (R&S FSW-K85) MDO 1xEV-DO MS

3GPP FDD BTS (R&S FSW-K72) BWCD 3G FDD BTS

3GPP FDD UE (R&S FSW-K73) MWCD 3G FDD UE

802.11ad (R&S FSW-K95) WIGIG 802.11ad

802.11ay (R&S FSW-K97) EDMG 802.11ay EDMG

Amplifier Measurements (R&S FSW-K18) AMPLifier Amplifier

AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis (R&S FSW-K7) ADEM Analog Demod

Avionics (R&S FSW-K15) AVIonics Avionics

Bluetooth (R&S FSW-K8) BTO Bluetooth

cdma2000 BTS (R&S FSW-K82) BC2K CDMA2000 BTS

cdma2000 MS (R&S FSW-K83) MC2K CDMA2000 MS

DOCSIS 3.1 (R&S FSW-K192/193) DOCSis DOCSIS 3.1

Fast Spur Search (R&S FSW-K50) SPUR Spurious

GSM (R&S FSW-K10) GSM GSM

HRP UWB (R&S FSW-K149) UWB HRP UWB

I/Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer

LTE (R&S FSW-K10x) LTE LTE

Multi-Carrier "Group Delay" (R&S FSW-K17) MCGD MC "Group Delay"

NB-IoT (R&S FSW-K106) NIOT NB-IoT

Noise (R&S FSW-K30) NOISE Noise

*) If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential num-
ber, is used for the new channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 903

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

Application <ChannelType> Default Channel name*)

parameter

5G NR (R&S FSW-K144) NR5G 5G NR

OFDM VSA (R&S FSW-K96) OFDMVSA OFDM VSA

OneWeb (R&S FSW-K201) OWEB OneWeb

Phase Noise (R&S FSW-K40) PNOISE Phase Noise

Pulse (R&S FSW-K6) PULSE Pulse

"Real-Time Spectrum" RTIM "Real-Time Spectrum"

TD-SCDMA BTS (R&S FSW-K76) BTDS TD-SCDMA BTS

TD-SCDMA UE (R&S FSW-K77) MTDS TD-SCDMA UE

Transient Analysis (R&S FSW-K60) TA Transient Analysis

Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF, V5GT V5GT

R&S FSW-K118)

VSA (R&S FSW-K70) DDEM VSA

WLAN (R&S FSW-K91) WLAN WLAN

*) If the specified name for a new channel already exists, the default name, extended by a sequential num-
ber, is used for the new channel.

INSTrument:MODE <OpMode>
The operating mode of the FSW determines which applications are available and
active. Whenever you change the operating mode, the currently active channels are
closed. The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however,
the presetting can be changed.
(See the "Instrument Setup" section in the FSW User Manual).
For details on operating modes and applications see Section 5, "Applications, mea-
surement channels, and operating modes", on page 111.
Parameters:
<OpMode> SANalyzer
Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode
MSRanalyzer
Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode
RTMStandard
Multi-Standard Real-Time (MSRT) mode
Only available if one of the real-time options is installed.
*RST: SAN
Example: INST:MODE MSR
Switches to Multi-Standard Radio Analysis (MSRA) mode.
Manual operation: See "Switching the operating mode" on page 123

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 904

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

INSTrument:REName <ChannelName1>, <ChannelName2>

Renames a channel.
Setting parameters:
<ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to rename.
<ChannelName2> String containing the new channel name.
Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new
channel. If you do, an error occurs.
Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters, and
must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file
names. In particular, they must not contain special characters
such as ":", "*", "?".
Example: INST:REN 'IQAnalyzer2','IQAnalyzer3'
Renames the channel with the name 'IQAnalyzer2' to 'IQAna-
lyzer3'.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Changing the Channel Name" on page 86

INSTrument[:SELect] <ChannelType> | <ChannelName>

Activates a new channel with the defined channel type, or selects an existing channel
with the specified name.
Also see
● INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] on page 901
● Section 13.4.3, "Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements",
on page 908
Parameters:
<ChannelType> Channel type of the new channel.
For a list of available channel types see INSTrument:LIST?
on page 902.
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
Example: INST IQ
Activates a channel for the I/Q Analyzer application (evaluation
mode).
INST 'MyIQSpectrum'
Selects the channel named 'MyIQSpectrum' (for example before
executing further commands for that channel).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 905

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

Manual operation: See "Spectrum" on page 115

See "1xEV-DO BTS" on page 115
See "1xEV-DO MS" on page 115
See "3G FDD BTS" on page 116
See "3G FDD UE" on page 116
See "5G NR" on page 116
See "802.11ad" on page 116
See "802.11ay" on page 116
See "Amplifier" on page 117
See "AM/FM/PM Modulation Analysis" on page 117
See "Avionics" on page 117
See "Bluetooth" on page 117
See "cdma2000 BTS" on page 117
See "cdma2000 MS" on page 118
See "Fast Spur Search" on page 118
See "(Multi-Carrier) Group Delay" on page 118
See "GSM" on page 118
See "HRP UWB" on page 118
See "I/Q Analyzer" on page 118
See "LTE" on page 119
See "NB-IoT" on page 119
See "Noise Figure" on page 119
See "OFDM Vector Signal Analysis (OFDM VSA)" on page 119
See "OneWeb" on page 119
See "Phase Noise" on page 119
See "Pulse Measurements" on page 120
See "Real-Time Spectrum" on page 120
See "TD-SCDMA BTS" on page 120
See "TD-SCDMA UE" on page 120
See "Transient Analysis" on page 120
See "Verizon 5GTF Measurement Application (V5GTF)"
on page 121
See "Vector Signal Analysis (VSA)" on page 121
See "WLAN" on page 121
See "DOCSIS 3.1" on page 121
See "Selecting an application" on page 123
See "New Channel" on page 123

13.4.2 Performing a sequence of measurements

The following commands control the sequencer.

For details on the Sequencer see Section 5.4.1, "The sequencer concept",
on page 124.
INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt............................................................................................ 907
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate....................................................................................... 907
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE.............................................................................................907
SYSTem:SEQuencer...................................................................................................... 908

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 906

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

INITiate:SEQuencer:ABORt
Stops the currently active sequence of measurements.
You can start a new sequence any time using INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate
on page 907.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 127

INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate
Starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer.
Its effect is similar to the INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] command used for a single
measurement.
Before this command can be executed, the Sequencer must be activated (see
SYSTem:SEQuencer on page 908).
Example: SYST:SEQ ON
Activates the Sequencer.
INIT:SEQ:MODE SING
Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement is per-
formed once.
INIT:SEQ:IMM
Starts the sequential measurements.
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 127

INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE <Mode>
Defines the capture mode for the entire measurement sequence and all measurement
groups and channels it contains.
Note: To synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using *OPC, *OPC? or
*WAI, use SINGle Sequencer mode.
Parameters:
<Mode> SINGle
Each measurement group is started one after the other in the
order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are
started simultaneously and performed once. After all measure-
ments are completed, the next group is started. After the last
group, the measurement sequence is finished.
CONTinuous
Each measurement group is started one after the other in the
order of definition. All measurement channels in a group are
started simultaneously and performed once. After all measure-
ments are completed, the next group is started. After the last
group, the measurement sequence restarts with the first one and
continues until it is stopped explicitly.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 907

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

*RST: CONTinuous
Manual operation: See "Sequencer Mode" on page 127

SYSTem:SEQuencer <State>
Turns the Sequencer on and off. The Sequencer must be active before any other
Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are executed, otherwise an error occurs.
A detailed programming example is provided in Section 13.4.3, "Programming exam-
ple: performing a sequence of measurements", on page 908.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is
started immediately.
OFF | 0
The Sequencer is deactivated. Any running sequential measure-
ments are stopped. Further Sequencer commands
(INIT:SEQ...) are not available.
*RST: 0
Example: SYST:SEQ ON
Activates the Sequencer.
INIT:SEQ:MODE SING
Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement is
performed once.
INIT:SEQ:IMM
Starts the sequential measurements.
SYST:SEQ OFF
Manual operation: See "Sequencer State" on page 127

13.4.3 Programming example: performing a sequence of measurements

This example demonstrates how to perform several measurements in a sequence in a

remote environment.

//2xSpectrumanalyzer + 2xIQ, start Sequencer at the end, test OPC?

// ------------------------------------------------------------------------

//------Preparing the instrument and first and second channel -----------

*RST
//Activate new IQ channel
INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 1'
//Set sweep count for new IQ channel
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 6
//Change trace modes for IQ channel

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 908

FSW Remote commands
Selecting the operating mode and application

DISP:TRAC1:MODE BLANK
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MINH
//Switch to single sweep mode
INIT:CONT OFF
//switch back to first (default) analyzer channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI
//Switch into SEM
SENSe:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum
//Load Sem standard file for W-CDMA
SENSe:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\3GPP_DL.xml'
//Set sweep count in Spectrum channel
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 5

//----------Creating a third measurement channel ----------------

//Create second IQ channel

INSTrument:CREate:NEW IQ,'IQ 2'
//Set sweep count
SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 2
//Change trace modes
DISP:TRAC1:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MINH
//Create new analyzer channel
INSTrument:CREate:NEW SANalyzer,'Spectrum 2'
//Activate ACLR measurement in channel 'Spectrum 2'
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower
//Load W-CDMA Standard
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet FW3Gppcdma
//Change trace modes
DISP:TRAC2:MODE MAXH
DISP:TRAC1:MODE MINH

//--------Performing a sweep and retrieving results----------------

//Change sweep count

SENS:SWEep:COUNt 7
//Single Sweep mode
INIT:CONT OFF
//Switch back to first IQ channel
INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI
//Perform a measurement
INIT:IMM;*OPC?
//Retrieve results
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Activate Multiview
DISPlay:ATAB ON

//---------Performing a sequence of measurements with the Sequencer------------

//Activate Sequencer

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 909

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

SYSTem:SEQuencer ON
//Start sweep in Sequencer
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC?
//Switch into first IQ channel to get results
INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Change sweep time in IQ
SENS:SWE:TIME 300us
//Switch to single Sequencer mode
INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE SINGle
//Sweep all channels once, taking the sweep count in each channel into account
INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC?
//Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result
CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results
INST:SEL 'IQ 2';*WAI
CALCulate:MARKer:MIN
CALC:MARK:Y?
//Switch to first Spectrum channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI
//Query one of the SEM results
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? CPOWer
//Switch to second Spectrum channel
INST:SEL 'Spectrum 2';*WAI
//Query channel power result
CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ACPower

13.5 Configuring and performing measurements

The following commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environ-
ment. The tasks for manual operation are described in Section 6, "Measurements and
results", on page 129.
● Performing measurements.................................................................................... 911
● Configuring power measurements........................................................................ 914
● Measuring the channel power and ACLR............................................................. 918
● Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio...................................................................... 982
● Measuring the occupied bandwidth.......................................................................983
● Remote commands for noise power ratio (NPR) measurements..........................985
● Measuring the spectrum emission mask.............................................................1001
● Measuring spurious emissions............................................................................1038
● Analyzing statistics (APD, CCDF)....................................................................... 1054
● Measuring the time domain power...................................................................... 1064
● Measuring the harmonic distortion...................................................................... 1074
● Measuring the third order intercept point............................................................ 1078
● Measuring the AM modulation depth.................................................................. 1081

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 910

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

● Remote commands for EMI measurements........................................................1083

● List evaluations................................................................................................... 1092
● Measuring the pulse power................................................................................. 1096

13.5.1 Performing measurements

Useful commands for performing measurements described elsewhere

● INITiate<n>:ESPectrum on page 1003
● INITiate<n>:SPURious on page 1039

Remote commands exclusive for performing measurements:

ABORt.......................................................................................................................... 911
INITiate<n>:CONMeas................................................................................................... 912
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous................................................................................................ 912
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]..................................................................................................913
[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?................................................................................ 914

ABORt
Aborts the measurement in the current channel and resets the trigger system.
To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure-
ment has been aborted successfully, use the *OPC? or *WAI command after ABOR and
before the next command.
For details on overlapping execution see Remote control via SCPI.
Note on blocked remote control programs:
If a sequential command cannot be completed, for example because a triggered sweep
never receives a trigger, the remote control program will never finish and the remote
channel to the FSW is blocked for further commands. In this case, you must interrupt
processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement.
To do so, send a "Device Clear" command from the control instrument to the FSW on a
parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels. Depending on the used
interface and protocol, send the following commands:
● Visa: viClear()
● GPIB: ibclr()
● RSIB: RSDLLibclr()
Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea-
surement.
Example: ABOR;:INIT:IMM
Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new
one.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 911

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Example: ABOR;*WAI
INIT:IMM
Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once
abortion has been completed.
Usage: Event

INITiate<n>:CONMeas
Restarts a (single) measurement that has been stopped (using ABORt) or finished in
single sweep mode.
The measurement is restarted at the beginning, not where the previous measurement
was stopped.
As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in
maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measure-
ments using maxhold or averaging functions.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
INIT:CONM;*WAI
Continues the measurement (next 20 sweeps) and waits for the
end.
Result: Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps.
Usage: Asynchronous command
Manual operation: See "Continue Single Sweep" on page 509

INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
Controls the sweep mode for an individual channel.
Note that in single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement
with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of
the measurement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous
sweep mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after
a single sweep end synchronization.
For details on synchronization see Remote control via SCPI.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 912

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1
ON | 1
Continuous sweep
OFF | 0
Single sweep
*RST: 1 (some applications can differ)
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches the sweep mode to single sweep.
INIT:CONT ON
Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep.
Manual operation: See "Frequency Sweep" on page 131
See "Zero Span" on page 131
See "Continuous Sweep / Run Cont" on page 508

INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
Starts a (single) new measurement.
With sweep count or average count > 0, this means a restart of the corresponding
number of measurements. With trace mode MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, the
previous results are reset on restarting the measurement.
You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
For details on synchronization see Remote control via SCPI.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
Example: INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
Usage: Asynchronous command
Manual operation: See "Frequency Sweep" on page 131
See "Zero Span" on page 131
See "Single Sweep / Run Single" on page 508

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 913

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

[SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements. This com-
mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single
sweep mode.
Return values:
<CurrentCount>
Example: SWE:COUNt 64
Sets sweep count to 64
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode
INIT
Starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!)
SWE:COUN:CURR?
Queries the number of started sweeps
Usage: Query only

13.5.2 Configuring power measurements

The following commands work for several power measurements.

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE............................................... 914
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult?.............................................915
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect.............................................. 916
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe]..............................................917
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet................................................................................ 917
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel.....................................................................918
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.................................................................................................918

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE <Mode>
Selects the trace display mode for power measurements.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> WRITe | MAXHold
WRITe
The power is calculated from the current trace.
MAXHold
The power is calculated from the current trace and compared
with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm.
Manual operation: See "Power Mode" on page 172

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 914

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? <Measurement>
Queries the results of power measurements.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
<sb> Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement;
MSR ACLR: 1 to 8
Multi-SEM: 1 to 8
for all other measurements: irrelevant
Parameters:
<Measurement> ACPower | MCACpower
ACLR measurements (also known as adjacent channel power or
multicarrier adjacent channel measurements).
Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent
channel. The order is:
• power of the transmission channels
• power of adjacent channel (lower,upper)
• power of alternate channels (lower,upper)
MSR ACLR results:
For MSR ACLR measurements, the order of the returned results
is slightly different:
• power of the transmission channels
• total power of the transmission channels for each sub block
• power of adjacent channels (lower, upper)
• power of alternate channels (lower, upper)
• power of gap channels (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2)
The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y-
axis:
• logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit
• linear scaling returns the power in W
GACLr
For MSR ACLR measurements only: returns a list of ACLR val-
ues for each gap channel (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2)
MACM
For MSR ACLR measurements only: returns a list of CACLR val-
ues for each gap channel (lower1, upper1, lower2, upper2)
CN
Carrier-to-noise measurements.
Returns the C/N ratio in dB.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 915

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

CN0
Carrier-to-noise measurements.
Returns the C/N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in
dBm/Hz.
CPOWer
Channel power measurements.
Returns the channel power. The unit of the return values
depends on the scaling of the y-axis:
• logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit
• linear scaling returns the power in W
For SEM measurements, the return value is the channel power
of the reference range (in the specified sub block).
PPOWer
Peak power measurements.
Returns the peak power. The unit of the return values depends
on the scaling of the y-axis:
• logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit
• linear scaling returns the power in W
For SEM measurements, the return value is the peak power of
the reference range (in the specified sub block).
Note that this result is only available if the power reference type
is set to peak power (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe
on page 1022).
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Occupied bandwidth.
Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz.
COBandwidth | COBWidth
<Centroid frequency>,<Frequency offset>
See Section 6.4.2, "OBW results", on page 214
Manual operation: See "C/N" on page 210
See "C/N0" on page 211

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect <MeasType>
Selects a power measurement and turns the measurement on.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<MeasType> ACPower | MCACpower
Adjacent channel leakage ratio (ACLR), also known as adjacent
channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel.
The FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 916

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

CPOWer
Channel power measurement with a single carrier.
The FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with
[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe.
OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Occupied bandwidth measurement.
The FSW performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1
is positioned on.
CN
Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement.
CN0
Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz band-
width
Manual operation: See "C/N" on page 210
See "C/N0" on page 211

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>[:STATe] <State>
Turns a power measurement off. To switch on the power measurement again, use
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:SELect on page 916.
A standard frequency sweep is activated.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<m> irrelevant
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> OFF
Manual operation: See "C/N" on page 210
See "C/N0" on page 211

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet <Measurement>
Determines the ideal span, bandwidths and detector for the current power measure-
ment.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912.
Parameters:
<Measurement> ACPower | MCACpower
ACLR measurement
CPOWer
channel power measurement

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 917

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

OBANdwidth | OBWidth
Occupied bandwidth measurement
CN
Carrier to noise ratio
CN0
Carrier to noise ration referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth
Manual operation: See "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 172
See "Adjust Settings" on page 211
See "Adjust Settings" on page 216

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel
This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement.
This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not over-
load the FSW or limit the dynamic range by too small a S/N ratio.
To determine the best reference level, the FSW aborts current measurements and per-
forms a series of test sweeps. After it has finished the test, it continues with the actual
measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the
sweep end. This is only possible in single sweep mode.

[SENSe:]POWer:TRACe <TraceNumber>
Selects the trace channel power measurements are performed on.
For the measurement to work, the corresponding trace has to be active.
Parameters:
<TraceNumber> Range: 1 to 6
*RST: 1
Example: POW:TRAC 2
Assigns the measurement to trace 2.
Manual operation: See "Selected Trace" on page 171

13.5.3 Measuring the channel power and ACLR

All remote control commands specific to channel power or ACLR measurements are
described here.

See also Section 13.5.2, "Configuring power measurements", on page 914.

● Managing measurement configurations................................................................ 919

● Configuring the channels...................................................................................... 921
● Defining weighting filters....................................................................................... 925

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 918

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

● Selecting the reference channel............................................................................927

● Checking limits...................................................................................................... 928
● Checking limits (total limit pass mode)..................................................................935
● General ACLR measurement settings.................................................................. 940
● Configuring MSR ACLR measurements............................................................... 941
● Performing an ACLR measurement...................................................................... 970
● Retrieving and analyzing measurement results.................................................... 971
● Programming examples for channel power measurements..................................974

13.5.3.1 Managing measurement configurations

The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measure-

ments.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet............................................. 919
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?........................... 919
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete.............................. 920
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE.................................920

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet <Standard>
Loads a measurement configuration.
The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter,
channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, detector and sweep
time.
If the "Multi-Standard Radio" standard is selected (see "Standard" on page 168), differ-
ent commands are required to configure ACLR measurements (see Section 13.5.3.8,
"Configuring MSR ACLR measurements", on page 941).
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Standard> For more information see Section 6.2.9, "Reference: predefined
CP/ACLR standards", on page 206.
If you want to load a customized configuration, the parameter is
a string containing the file name.
Manual operation: See "Predefined Standards" on page 168
See "User Standards" on page 168

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog?
Queries all xml files containing ACLR standards in the
C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std direc-
tory. Note that subdirectories are not searched.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 919

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement;
MSR ACLR: 1 to 8
Multi-SEM: 1 to 8
for all other measurements: irrelevant
Return values:
<Standards> List of standard files.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "User Standards" on page 168

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:DELete
<Standard>
Deletes a file containing an ACLR standard.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Standard> String containing the file name of the standard.
Manual operation: See "User Standards" on page 168

CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:SAVE <Standard>
Saves the current ACLR measurement configuration as a new ACLR standard.
The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter,
channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, detector and sweep
time.
Suffix: .
<n> Window
<m> Marker
<sb> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Standard> String containing the file name. The file format is xml.
Manual operation: See "User Standards" on page 168

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 920

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

13.5.3.2 Configuring the channels

The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measure-
ments.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs................................................................................ 921
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel................................................................. 921
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel............................................................921
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch>.......................................................... 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch>.....................................................922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>]......................................................... 922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>]....................................................922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel...................................................................922
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch>............................................................923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch>.............................................................923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel]............................................................. 923
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch>........................................................ 924
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch>......................................................... 924
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt................................................................925

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs>
Defines the number of pairs of adjacent and alternate channels.
Parameters:
<ChannelPairs> Range: 0 to 12
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Number of channels: Tx, Adj" on page 169
See "Number of Adjacent Channels (Adj Count)" on page 187

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel <Bandwidth>
Defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channels.
The adjacent channels are the first channels to the left and right of the transmission
channels. If you set the channel bandwidth for these channels, the FSW sets the band-
width of the alternate channels to the same value (not for MSR signals).
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the bandwidth of the lower adja-
cent channel. To configure the bandwidth for the upper adjacent channel, use the
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel command.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 174
See "Adjacent Channel Bandwidths" on page 187

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 921

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> <Bandwidth>
Defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels.
For MSR signals, this command defines the bandwidth of the lower alternate channels
in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the bandwidth for the upper alternate
channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> com-
mand.
If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel, the FSW sets the band-
width of the other alternate channels to the same value, but not the other way round
(not for MSR signals). The command works hierarchically: to set a bandwidth of the 3rd
and 4th channel, you have to set the bandwidth of the 3rd channel first.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 174
See "Adjacent Channel Bandwidths" on page 187

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth>
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] <Bandwidth>
Defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels.
Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Tx channel number
Parameters:
<Bandwidth> Range: 100 Hz to 1000 MHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 174
See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 211
See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 216

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel <Name>
Defines a name for the adjacent channel.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 922

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

For MSR ACLR measurements, this command defines the name for the lower adjacent
channel in asymmetric channel definitions. To define the name for the upper adjacent
channel use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel command.
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the channel
*RST: ADJ
Manual operation: See "Channel Names" on page 177

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> <Name>
Defines a name for an alternate channel.
For MSR ACLR measurements, this command defines the name for the lower alternate
channel in asymmetric channel definitions. To define the name for the upper alternate
channels use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the channel
*RST: ALT<1...11>
Manual operation: See "Channel Names" on page 177

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> <Name>
Defines a name for a transmission channel.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Tx channel number
Parameters:
<Name> String containing the name of the channel
*RST: TX<1...12>
Manual operation: See "Channel Names" on page 177

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] <Spacing>
Defines the distance from transmission channel to adjacent channel.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx chan-
nel in the first sub block to the lower adjacent channel. To configure the spacing for the
upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical configurations, use the [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel command.
A change of the adjacent channel spacing causes a change in the spacing of all alter-
nate channels below the adjacent channel (not for MSR signals).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 923

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Parameters:
<Spacing> Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST: 14 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Spacings" on page 174
See "Adjacent Channel Spacings" on page 187

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> <Spacing>
Defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels.
For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx chan-
nel in the first sub block to the lower alternate channel. To configure the spacing for the
upper alternate channel in asymmetrical configurations, use the [SENSe:]POWer:
ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> command.
If you set the channel spacing for the first alternate channel, the FSW adjusts the spac-
ing of alternate channels of a lower order, but not the other way round (not for MSR
signals). The command works hierarchically: to set a distance from the transmission
channel to the 2nd and 3rd alternate channel, you have to define a spacing for the 2nd
alternate channel first.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<Spacing> Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz
*RST: 40 kHz (ALT1), 60 kHz (ALT2), 80 kHz (ALT3), ...
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Spacings" on page 174
See "Adjacent Channel Spacings" on page 187

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> <Spacing>
Defines the distance between transmission channels.
If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel, the FSW sets the spacing of
the lower transmission channels to the same value, but not the other way round. The
command works hierarchically: to set a distance between the 2nd and 3rd and 3rd and
4th channel, you have to set the spacing between the 2nd and 3rd channel first.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Tx channel number
Parameters:
<Spacing> Range: 14 kHz to 2000 MHz
*RST: 20 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Manual operation: See "Channel Spacings" on page 174

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 924

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt <Number>
Defines the number of transmission channels.
The command works for measurements in the frequency domain.
Parameters:
<Number> Range: 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Number of channels: Tx, Adj" on page 169

13.5.3.3 Defining weighting filters

The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements.

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel........................................................ 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL]............................................................... 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch>................................................. 925
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch>.................................................. 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel....................................................... 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe][:ALL].............................................................. 926
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch>................................................ 927
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch>................................................. 927

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel <Alpha>
Defines the roll-off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the roll-off factor for the lower
adjacent channel. To configure the factor for the upper adjacent channel, use the
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel command.
Parameters:
<Alpha> Roll-off factor
Range: 0 to 1
*RST: 0.22
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177
See "Weighting Filters" on page 188

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] <Value>
Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for all channels.
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 0.22
Example: POW:ACH:FILT:ALPH:ALL 0.35

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> <Alpha>
Defines the roll-off factor for the alternate channel weighting filter.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 925

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command defines the roll-off factor for the lower
alternate channels. To configure the factor for the upper alterante channels, use the
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch> command.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<Alpha> Roll-off factor
Range: 0 to 1
*RST: 0.22
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177
See "Weighting Filters" on page 188

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> <Alpha>
Defines the roll-off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Tx channel number
Parameters:
<Alpha> Roll-off factor
Range: 0 to 1
*RST: 0.22
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ACHannel <State>
Turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower
adjacent channel on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper adjacent chan-
nel, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel com-
mand.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177
See "Weighting Filters" on page 188

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe][:ALL] <State>
Turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 926

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> <State>
Turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off.
For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower
alternate channels on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper alternate chan-
nels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch>
command.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177
See "Weighting Filters" on page 188

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:CHANnel<ch> <State>
Turns the weighting filter for a transmission channel on and off.
Suffix: .
<ch> 1..n
Tx channel number
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Weighting Filters" on page 177

13.5.3.4 Selecting the reference channel

The following commands define the reference channel for relative ACLR measure-
ments.
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE....................................................... 927
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO................................................ 928
[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual............................................. 928

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:AUTO ONCE
This command sets the channel power as the reference for relative ACLR measure-
ments.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 927

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Example: POW:ACH:REF:AUTO ONCE

Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measure-
ments (Set CP Reference)" on page 172

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel>
Selects the reference channel for relative measurements.
You need at least one channel for the command to work.
Parameters:
<RefChannel> MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest
MINimum
Transmission channel with the lowest power
MAXimum
Transmission channel with the highest power
LHIGhest
Lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and
highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels
Example: POW:ACH:REF:TXCH:AUTO MAX
Selects the channel with the peak power as reference channel.
Manual operation: See "Reference Channel" on page 170

[SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:MANual <ChannelNumber>
Defines a reference channel for relative ACLR measurements.
You need at least one channel for the command to work.
Note that this command is not available for MSR ACLR measurements (see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet on page 919).
Parameters:
<ChannelNumber> Range: 1 to 18
*RST: 1
Manual operation: See "Reference Channel" on page 170

13.5.3.5 Checking limits

The following commands configure and query limit checks for channel power and
ACLR measurements.

The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT:QUES:ACPL sta-
tus registry (see Section 12.2.2.6, "STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register",
on page 832).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 928

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute..................................................... 929
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe........................................... 929
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]....................................................930
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?.......................................................930
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe..........................................931
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute.............................................. 932
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe.................................... 932
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative].............................................933
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?................................................933
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe...................................934
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.......................................................................934
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe]....................................................................... 935

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>[,
<UpperLimit>]
Defines the absolute limit of the adjacent channels.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the FSW uses the lower
value for the limit check.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit> The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST: -200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
<UpperLimit> The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST: -200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute:STATe <State>[, <State>]

This command turns the absolute limit check for the adjacent channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 929

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for lower adjacent channel
*RST: 0
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for upper adjacent channel
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>[,
<UpperLimit>]
Defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels. The reference value for the relative
limit is the measured channel power.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the FSW uses the lower
value for the limit check.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Parameters:
<LowerLimit> The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Default unit: dB
<UpperLimit> The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult?
Queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent channels in an ACLR measure-
ment.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 930

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

<li> irrelevant
Return values:
<LowerACH> text value
Thestate of the limit check for the lower adjacent channels.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAIL
Limit check has failed.
<UpperACH> text value
The state of the limit check for the upper adjacent channels.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAIL
Limit check has failed.
Example: INIT:IMM;*WAI;
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
PASSED,PASSED
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State>[, <State>]

This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for lower adjacent channel
*RST: 0
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for upper adjacent channel
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 931

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute <LowerLimit>[,
<UpperLimit>]
Defines the absolute limit of the alternate channels.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the FSW uses the lower
value for the limit check.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<LowerLimit> The limit of the lower adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST: -200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
<UpperLimit> The limit of the upper adjacent channel.
Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm
*RST: -200 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:ABSolute:STATe <State>[,
<State>]
This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for lower alternate channel
*RST: 0
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Absolute limit check for upper alternate channel
*RST: 0

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 932

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175

See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>[,
<UpperLimit>]
Defines the relative limit of the alternate channels. The reference value for the relative
limit is the measured channel power.
If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the FSW uses the lower
value for the limit check.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<LowerLimit> The limit of the lower alternate channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Default unit: dB
<UpperLimit> The limit of the upper alternate channel.
Range: 0 dB to 100 dB
*RST: 0 dB
Default unit: dB
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult?
Queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate channels in an ACLR
measurement.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza-
tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible
for single sweep mode.
See also INITiate<n>:CONTinuous on page 912.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> Alternate channel number
Return values:
<LowerChan> text value

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 933

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

The state of the limit check for the lower alternate or adjacent
channels.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAIL
Limit check has failed.
<UpperChan> text value
The state of the limit check for the upper alternate or adjacent
channels.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAIL
Limit check has failed.
Example: INIT:IMM;*WAI;
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES?
PASSED,PASSED
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe <State>[,
<State>]
This command turns the relative limit check for the alternate channels on and off.
You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> 1..n
Alternate channel number
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for lower alternate channel
*RST: 0
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
Relative limit check for upper alternate channel
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe <Mode>
Selects the limit evaluation mode for ACLR measurements.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 934

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Supported for ACLR measurements in the LTE and 5G applications.

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Parameters:
<Mode> AND
Overall limit check passes if both absolute and relative limit
checks pass.
OR
Overall limit check passes if either absolute or relative limit
checks pass.
*RST: AND
Example: //Select evaluation mode
CALC:LIM:ACP:PMOD AND
Manual operation: See "Total Limit Pass Mode" on page 176

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] <State>
Turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off.
In addition, limits must be defined and activated individually for each channel (see
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe,
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe,
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ABSolute:STATe,
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative]:
STATe and CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:
CACLr][:RELative]:STATe).
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Limit Check" on page 175
See "Limit Checking" on page 183
See "Limit Checking" on page 188

13.5.3.6 Checking limits (total limit pass mode)

The following commands are only available in the ACLR measurements of the LTE and
5G applications.
Depending on the syntax, the commands return the limit check results for:
● adjacent channels

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 935

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

● alternate channels
● gap channels in multi carrier ACLR measurements (LTE and 5G downlink only)
● gap channels in cumulative ACLR measurement (LTE downlink and 5G downlink
only)
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult:ABSolute.......................................... 936
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult:RELative...........................................936
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult:ABSolute................................... 937
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult:RELative....................................937
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult:ABSolute?..............................938
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult:RELative?.............................. 938
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult:ABSolute?...........................939
CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult:RELative?........................... 939

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult:ABSolute
Queries the absolute limit check results for adjacent channels (ACLR measurements).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select absolute limit check mode
evaluation mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the adjacent channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES:ABS?

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult:RELative
Queries the relative limit check results for the adjacent channels (ACLR measure-
ments).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select relative limit check mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 936

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

<li> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the adjacent channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES:REL?

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult:ABSolute
Queries the absolute limit check results for the alternate channels (MC ACLR mea-
surements).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select absolute limit check mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<ch> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the alternate channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:RES:ABS?

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult:RELative
Queries the relative limit check results for the alternate channels (MC ACLR measure-
ments).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select relative limit check mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 937

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

<ch> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the alternate channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT:RES:REL?

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult:ABSolute?
Queries the absolute power limit check results for the gap channels (MC ACLR mea-
surements).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select absolute limit check mode
evaluation mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<gap> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the gap channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP:ACLR:RES:ABS?
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult:RELative?
Queries the relative power limit check results for the gap channels (MC ACLR mea-
surements).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select relative limit check mode
evaluation mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 938

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<gap> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the gap channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP:ACLR:RES:REL?
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult:ABSolute?
Queries the absolute limit check results for the gap channels (MC ACLR measure-
ments).
Prerequisites for this command
● Select absolute limit check mode
evaluation mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<gap> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the gap channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP:RES:ABS?
Usage: Query only

CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:CACLr]:RESult:RELative?
Queries the relative limit check results for the gap channels (MC ACLR measure-
ments).

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55 939

FSW Remote commands
Configuring and performing measurements

Prerequisites for this command

● Select relative limit check mode
evaluation mode
ACLR: CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:PMODe.
Suffix: .
<n> irrelevant
<li> irrelevant
<gap> irrelevant
Return values:
<LimitCheck> Returns two values, one for the upper and one for the lower
adjacent channel.
PASSED
Limit check has passed.
FAILED
Limit check has failed.
Example: //Query results of the gap channel limit check
CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP:RES:REL?
Usage: Query only

13.5.3.7 General ACLR measurement settings

The following commands control the measurement algorithm.

Useful commands for the ACLR measurement described elsewhere:
● [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection on page 1212
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet on page 917
● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel on page 918
● [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe on page 918
● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE on page 914

Remote commands exclusive to ACLR measurement

[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed............................................................................................... 940

[SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed <State>
Turns high speed ACLR and channel power measurements on and off.
If on, the FSW performs a measurement on each channel in the time domain. It returns
to the frequency domain when the measurement is done.
In some telecommunications standards, high speed measurements use weighting fil-
ters with characteristic or steep-edged channel filters for band limitation.

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 55